GIFT OF
JANE Kc^ATHER
»
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/beginnersgreekboOOfrisrich
A MAP TO THE AI
S15 OF XENOPHON.
38
+0
4-2
4.4
+ 6
40
38
36
34
36 G/tEEN WICH. 3^
4.0
+ +
THE
BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK.
BY
IVORY FRANKLIN FRISBEE, Ph.D.
(Univeesity of the City of New York),
Principal of the Latin School, Bates College.
In all instruction, clearness, association, s if stem,
and method must rule. — Hebbakt.
EDW. E. BABB AND CO.,
Boston, U. S. A.
1898.
t'opynght, 1898,
By Ivory Franklin Frisbee.
All rights reserved.
7/3
John Wilson and Son, Cambridge, U.S.A.
PREFACE.
THE Beginner's Greek Book is an attempt to apply
the principles of pedagogy to the preparation for
reading Xenophon's Anabasis. It is complete in itself,
and is intended to furnish the first year's work. The book
is fully illustrated, printed in large type, and in every way
made legible and attractive. The leading principles of
the language, the inflectional forms, fundamental rules of
syntax, exercises and vocabularies, are given in a manner
at once clear and most convenient for the learner's use.
The full scientific treatment of these forms and rules, is
accompanied by brief critical observations especially suited
to the needs of the secondary pupil. Although by this
manner of treatment and style of typography, the number
of pages is necessarily increased, the pupil's facility in the
study of Greek, is thereby greatly augmented.
The subject matter of the book, taken mainly from the
first chapters of the Anabasis, contains only that which is
of prime importance in the subsequent acquisition of Greek.
While avoiding on the one hand, the meagreness of the
epitomes, and on the other, the unassimilated material of
many text books for the secondary school, its aim is com-
pleteness. It gives a full treatment of transliteration, a
brief scientific exposition of the fundamental uses of the
prepositions, a practical treatment of word formation, of
Grimm's Law, and of word grouping. While making
provision" in each lesson for constant reviews, it assures
3G0202
Vlll PREFACE.
The future of the vowel, mute, and liquid verbs is intro-
duced in order as one schema. The first and second aorists
are given together, and the first and second perfects. The
inflection of etyu-fc has been placed with the -a) verbs, and the
regular -/z-t verbs have been brought forward and developed
with the subjunctive and optative moods. The verbs are
fully classified and repeatedly reviewed.
Special care has been directed toward the development
of the pupil's understanding together with his memory.
All of the material is presented according to its logical
sequence, and, by the critical observations, the pupil is
led to classify and assimilate it by its necessary relations.
Thus in all of his work, he is led to observe, to think, and
to form his own conclusions. Further, not only do the dif-
erent subjects follow a logical sequence, but each subject
is developed in the same manner. Accordingly many of
the leading principles of the language, as the euphony
of vowels and of consonants, and the syntactical rules,
have been reduced to their simplest analysis and expressed
in the most concise language consistent with clearness.
Attention is called to the natural treatment of the future and
aorist of liquid verbs, of the second aorists and perfects,
of the infinitive and participle, and how the exposition of
one subject by proper'review references, prepares the mind
of the student for the rapid assimilation of kindred matter,
as it is shown in the correlation of the pronominal forms
of the vowel declensions.
The teacher will be interested to note the simplified
treatment of the -jjll verbs and of the great terrors to the
average pupil, the subjunctive and optative moods, condi-
tional, final, and temporal clauses, and indirect discourse.
Not only are the hypothetical notions of the subjunctive
PREFACE. ix
and optative deferred until the direct expressions of the
language have been mastered, but the simple uses of these
moods are made to prepare for the understanding of ithe
more complex, and these in turn, through the conditions
and other dependent clauses, are made a preparation for
the most complex, indirect discourse.
Again, as with the paradigms so with the principles of
syntax, only the best types have been selected. Whenever
they offer any difficulty, they have been presented in a series
of special examples. While they have been taken intact
from the Anabasis, they are expressed in familiar language
and should be thoroughly committed to memoiy. The
more obvious constructions have been presented with the
general exercises, and afford an additional incentive to
the scholar for careful and thorough study.
The exercises of the book, which have been selected
especially for their freshness and their ease in assimila-
tion, are taken, as a whole, intact from the Anabasis, and
are written therefore in the form that will commonly
appear in the pupil's later reading. While they include
regularly sentences for review, they are graded for both
oral and written work, and it is recommended that at the
beginning, at least, they be taken in this manner. The
English exercises have been subordinated to the Greek.
These consist, as a rule, of one half of the latter, and are
chiefly intended to apply the rules of construction.
As a supplement to these exercises, selections from the
Anabasis for sight reading and retroversion have been
introduced early, and continued at frequent intervals
throughout the book. Selections from other works and
authors have been excluded, since, through their rare words
and miscellaneous authorship, they too often distract the
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
Grammatical Introduction ........ 1-7
I. The Alphabet 7-8
II. Syllables, Pronunciation 9
III. Quantity, Accent 9-10
IV. Person, Number, Gender, Case 11-12
V. The Article 12-14
VI. Present Indicative Active, Middle, and Passive
of Av© — Accent of Verbs — Syntax of Subject,
Verb, and Object 15-19
VII. Feminines op First Declension — Accent of Nouns 20-24
VIII. Masculines op First Declension — Syntax of the
Focative 24-28
IX. The Second Declension — Subject, Neuter Plural as
Subject — Indirect Object 28-32
X. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension — Position of
— Agreement of — Predicate Nouns 32-35
XI. Transliteration — Appositive — Accusative of Extent,
of Time or Space 36-39
XII. Essentials for Reading — Proclitics — Enclitics —
Dative of Possessor — Reading Lesson : The Pal-
aces of Cyrus ajid Artaxerxes 39-44
XIII. Imperfect of Xua* — A^igment — Present Infi?iitive
Active, Middle, and Passive — Uses not in Indirect
Discourse 44-49
XIV. Review: Alphabet — Accentuation — Substantives of
the Vowel Declension — Verbs — Syntax — Sight
Translations 49-53
XV. Fundamental Uses op Prepositions : Prepositions
with Oblique Cases — Dative, with Compound Words,
with Special Verbs 53-59
XVI. Contract Verbs — Contraction of Vowels — Dative
of Time 59-G3
XIV
CONTENTS.
XVII. Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the Vowel
Declension — Uses of avros — Dative with
Adjectives 64-68
XVIII. Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns —
Syntax of 68-72
XIX. Euphony of Consonants — Future and Aorist
Indic. and Infin., Active and Middle . 72-78
XX. Consonant Declension — Dative of Advantage . 79-83
XXI. Consonant Declension, Variations: Liquid
and Lingual Stems — Gender of Consonant
Stems — Dative of Union, etc 83-87
XXII. Participles, Present, Futur-e, Aorist, Active
AND Middle — Attributive and Circum-
stantial Participles ... ... 88-93
XXIII. Participles of Contract Verbs — Supplemen-
tary Participle 94-97
XXIV. Future and Aorist of Liquid Verbs, Active
AND Middle — Genitive of Agent — Cognate
Accusative 98-102
XXV. Adjectives of the Consonant Declension —
Two Accusatives with Verbs of Naming, Choos-
ing, etc., and of Asking, Demanding, etc . . 102-106
XXVI. Review : Prepositions — Contraction — Demon-
strative Pronouns — Future and Aorist Active
and Middle — Consonant Declension — Syntax
— Sight Translations 106-115
XXVII. Contract Nouns of the Third Declension —
Stems in t-, v-, atid ev Present Indicative
ofelfil 116-120
XXVIII. Adjective Stems in v of the Third Declension
— Irregular Adjectives — Imperfect ofcifii . 121-124
XXIX. Tenses Denoting Completed Action — Mute
Themes — Reduplication — Future of tlfii . 125-131
XXX. Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the Third
Declension — Stems in <r- — Accusative of
Specification — Dative of Pespect — Genitive
with words of Fullness 131-137
XXXI. Aorist and Future Passive Indicative, Infini-
tive, and Participle — Tense Systems — Prin-
cipal Parts of a Verb — Adverbial Accusative 137-] 42
CONTENTS.
XV
XXXII.
XXXIII.
XXXIV.
XXXV.
XXXVI.
XXXIX.
XL.
XLI.
XLII.
XLIII.
XLIV.
XLV.
XLVI.
Deponent Verbs — Irregular Nouns — Syn-
copated Nouns in ep 142-147
Attributive and Predicate Genitives. . . 147-150
Comparison of Adjectives — Irregular Ad-
jectives — Declension of TrXeiW — Geni-
tive of Comparison — Dative of Manner —
Reading Lesson : The Arrival of Cyrus's
Fleet •. • • • 151-157
Personal Pronouns — Genitive with Verbs 157-162
Reflexive, Reciprocal, and Possessive Pro-
nouns — Genitives of Source-, Separation^ and
Cause 162-166
The Imperative Active, Middle, and Pas-
sive — Negatives — Commands and Prohibi-
tions — Genitive of Price, Time — Genitive
with Adjectives 166-170
Imperative Active and Middle of Contract
Verbs — Story of the Anabasis — Reading
Lesson : Accession of Artaxerxes .... 170-174
The Interrogative tij, Indefinite tW and
ocrris — Assimilation of the Relative . . . 175-178
Numerals : Cardinals, Ordinals — Declension
of (Is, dvo, rpels, and Terrapes — Reading
Lesson : A Halt and Numbering at Celae-
nae 179-183
Review : Contract Nouns and Adjectives of the
Consonant Declension — Tenses of Completed
Action^ Passive Voice, etc. — Comparison of
Adjectives — Pronouns — Syntax — Sight
Translations 183-189
Formation and Comparison of Adverbs —
Syntax of Adverbs — Two Accusatives with
Verbs of Doing, etc 190-194
Formation of Words — Sight Translations . . 194-200
Denominative Verbs — Compound Yv ords -^
Sight Translations 201-204
Grimm's Law — Word Grouping — R. dy —
Sight Translations 204-209
Present System of Verbs — Verbs op the
First Class ~\l. dpx- 209-213
XVI
CONTENTS.
XL VII.
XLVIII.
XLIX.
L.
LI.
LIT.
LIII.
LIV.
LV.
LVI.
LVII.
IVIII.
PAGE.
Verbs of the Second Class — Second Aoeist
System 213-217
First and Second Perfect Systems — Attic
Reduplication, — R. /3oX- 217-221
Subjunctive and Optative Active of at Verbs
— Subjunctive of Exhortation, of Pro-
hibition, OF Deliberation — Optative of
Wishing — Potential Optative — femes of
the Subjunctive and Optative 221-227
Subjunctive and Optative of et/xi — Subjunc-
tive AND Optative, Middle and Passive
of a Verbs — Purpose Clauses — Object
Clause after Verbs of Fearing .... 228-234
Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute
Verbs — Object Clausks with oircor after
Verbs of Striving — Verbs of the Third
Class — R. ttlB- 235-238
Future and First Aorist Systems of Liquid
Verbs {continued) — Liquid Verbs of tfik
Fourth Class — Accusative after alaxvvofiai,
etc 238-241
Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs
(continued) — Mute Verbs of the Fourth
Class — Denominative Verbs of the Fourth
Class — Summary of Euphonic Changes of Con-
sonants before i — R. clk- 241-245
Regular Verbs in fu, -. icrTijfu — Group aWos . 246-251
Veubs of the Fifth Class — Perfect Middle
System of Vowel Verbs — R. «c- — Reading
Lesson : C^rus plans to become King . . . 252-257
Regular Verbs in fii -. didafii — R. bo Reading
Lesson : Siege of Miletus 257-262
Verbs of the Sixth Class — The First and
Second Aorist Passive Systems — € as Aug-
ment or Reduplication — e changed to a — R.
yvco- 262-268
Conditional Sentences : Simple Particular ;
Contrary to Fact ; Wishes Unattained —
R. KoK Reading Lesson : The Army of
Clearchus 268-273
LIX.
LX.
LXI.
LXII.
LXIII.
LXIV.
LXV.
LXVI.
LXVII.
LXVIII.
CONTENTS.
Subjunctive and Optative or Contract Verbs
— General Conditions — Group dfw. . .
Future Conditions, More and Less Vivid —
E.. Kpa-
Verbs of the Eighth Class — Relative and
Temporal Clauses — R. fiuK Reading
Lesson : Forces of Aristippus
Irregular Verbs in fit : tlfil, (prif^i. — Substitu-
tions for Conditions — Relative Clauses
OF Purpose — Cause and Result — Indirect
Discourse — The Infinitive in Indirect Dis-
course — R. (pa Reading Lesson : Forces
assemble at Sardis
Regular Verbs in lu : rt^/Mt — Verbs of the
Seventh Class — R. TrXa — Reading Les-
son : Character and Number of the Greek Forces
Verbs in fu : deUiwfu, tlfii — Verbs of the Fifth
Class (continued) — Reading Lesson : Cyrus
begins his March inland
Review : Formation of Adverbs ; of Substantives ;
of Verbs — Grimm's Law — Subjunctive and
Optative — Conditional Sentences — Restdt
Clauses^ etc. — Verbs in fii — Infinitive in In-
direct Discourse, etc. — Sight Translations —
Reading Lesson : Review of the Greek
Forces
Perfect Middle System of Consonant Themes
{continued') — Periphrastic Forms — R. ap-
— Reading Lesson : The Payment of the
Troops
Irregular Verbs in fw : olba — Simple Senten-
ces IN Indirect Discourse after on and
Q)s — Indirect Questions — Constructions
WITH ^ftt, elirov AND \tyai — R. trrpa- —
Reading Lesson : Review of all the Troops .
Participles in Indirect Biscotjrse — Agreement
of Predicate Adjectives after Infinitives with
omitted Subjects — Verbal Adjectives — R.
n Reading Lesson : Mock Charge of the
Greeks
XV 11
PAOE.
273-277
277-282
282-290
291-299
299-303
304-308
308-318
318-322
323-329
330-337
XVIU
CONTENTS.
LXIX. Indirect Quota—^n of Complex Sentences —
Ellipsis — Reading Lesson: The Passage of
the Mountains 338-343
LXX. Irregular Verbs in ftt : ij;/xt, y]\i.ai, KeT/xai —
Group 0tXos — Reading Lesson : The Meet-
ing of Cyrus and Syennesis 343-346
LXXL Review : Perfect Middle System of Consonant
Themes — Indirect Discourse {Summary) —
Ellipsis — Sight Translations — Reading Les-
sons : Speech of Clearchus ; Second Address
of Clearchus ; Clearchus refuses to Lead ; Con-
ference with Cyrus 347-361
LXXII. Review of the Anabasis 361-363
Appendix : Paradigms of Declensions and Conjugations 365-401
Abbreviations ~ 404
Greek-English Vocabulary 405-437
English-Greek Vocabulary 438-450
English Index 451-456
Greek Index . 457-460
INTR0DUCf'6RY.
THE ALPHABET.
I. The Greek alphabet has twentj-four letters : —
Fonns.
Large. Small.
Sound.
Name
Latin.
A
a
a in father
"AXcfia
Alpha
a
B
P
b in bib
Bijra
Beta
b
r
7
gin go
Tdfxixa
Gamma
g
A
8
d in did
AeAra
Delta
d
E
e
e in prey ^ (short)
''E ij/lkov
Epsilon
e
Z
^
' z in adze
Zrjra
Zeta
z
H
n
e in prey (long)
'Hra
Eta
e
ee
th in thin
®rJTa
Theta
th
I
!■
i in machine
'Iwra
lota
i
K
K
k in book
KctTTTra
Kappa
c
A
A
1 in bell
AdfilSSa
Lambda
1
M
ti:
m in aim
Mv
Mil
m
N
lA
n in nun
NO
Nil
n
S ~
1
X in box
al
Xi
X
o
6 in obey
*0 fUKpoV
Omicron
(u)6
n
TT
p in tip
nr
Pi
P-
p
P
r in ran
'FCy
Rho
r
2
0-s^
s in so
2ty/Aa
Sigma
s
T
T
t in sit
Tav
Tail*
t
Y
V
French u or German ii ^
'Y il/lXov
Upsilon
(")y
$
</>
ph in Philip
^:
Phi'
ph
X
X
German ch^
x:
Chi
ch, kh
♦
^
ps in hops
*r
P^
ps
o
(0
o in no
*0 fiiya
Omega
o
u
1 Begin the study with Lesson I., page 7.
2 Has the same sound as the long vowel, only shorter, — near the sound heard
ill m^f.
^ Always s at the end of a word, elsewhere <r -. ao(p6s, wise.
* Rhymes with now.
J * Pronounce like eeyu.
• Pronounce like German ch in Buck, nearly like the Scotch ch in loch.
1
2 TUiV BJIGIJ^NER S GREEK BOOK.
II. Breathings. The letter h is wanting in the alpha-
bet, but its sound before an initial vowel or diphthong
is indicated by the rough breathing ( * ) ; its absence
by the smooth breathing (' ). Every vowel or diph-
thong at the beginning of a word must have one of
these breathings over such vowel or second vowel of
the diphthong. Thus, 6, the, is pronounced ' ho ' ; cac,
from^ ' ek ; ' ol/cog, house ^ ' oikos.' Initial p also has
the rough breathing : *Pd8to9, Bhodian. Double p is
often written pp, Eng. rrh : Hvppo^, Pgrrhus.
III. Vowels. Of the vowels, e and o are always short
in quantity; i) and w are always long ;^ a, l, and v are
short in some words and long in others. In the para-
digms and vocabularies of this book, a, l, and v, when
long, are marked d, i, and u, except in cases where the
quantity may be inferred from the accent. The short
vowels have the same quality of sound as the long,
but shortened or more nbmpt. Thus, a is pronounced
like first a in papa ; e like Erench e in real, near the
sound heard in met or get ; t like i in verity ; o like o
in ohey^ monastic.
Remark, a, e, 17, o, ce>, from' their open sounds in
pronunciatiQU, are called open vowels ; i and v, close
vowels,
IV. Diphthongs, The proper diphthongs, except m,
are formed by the union of an open vowel with a close
one, as at, av, ei, ev, ot, ov, r)v. The improper diph-
^ I. e., they have more time given them in pronunciation than the short
vowels.
PRONUNCIATION. 3
thongs are formed by the union of a long vowel (a, rj, <y)
with I, and are written thus, a, rj, co. In these, the
iota is called iota subscript. With capitals it is written
on the line, as ^iltero, ^^toj he thought.
Remark. Observe that the improper diphthongs have
both the breathing and accent on the first vowel.
V. Fronunciation of Diphthongs.
1. ai like ai in^isle, av like ou in our^
ct^ " ei '' hd^t, ev " eu '' feud, ^
m OL " oi " oil, ov " ou " gouth,
W VI " ui " quit, rjv " d-oo rapidly pronounced.
: 2. The improper diphthongs, a, rj, co, are pronounced
like d, rjy o).
^ PRONUNCIATION.
VT. The pronunciation of Greek is phonetic. Every
consonant is sounded. V is the only letter that has
more than one sound, w^hich before k, y, x? ^^ f equals
n in ink : ayyeko^ (ang-gelus), messenger.
VII. 1. Syllables, In Greek, as in Latin, every word
has as many syllables as it has separate vowels and
diphthongs. The last syllable is called the ultima, the
next to the last, the penult, the one before the penult,
the antepenult,
2. In dividing words into syllables, a single conso-
nant is joined with the following vowel : e-^w, have^
Kco^fjLT], village, cTKrj-vy], tent.
^ Many prefer to pronounce ft as ei in ei^hL
4 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
3. Consonants between two vowels are joined witli
the following vowel when they can be pronounced at
the beginning of a word or syllable/ otherwise they are
divided : e-(T\ov, I had, /xa-/cpds, lon^, Ovij-cTKa}, diej
177-7709, Jiorse.
4. Compound words that retain their component
parts entire are divided into their component parts, other-
wise they may be divided as simple words : Trpocr-i-x'^
(from 77^09 and ej^w), hold to, but ira-pe-Xavva) or 77ap-
eKavvo) (from irapd and ekavvay), ride past.
QUANTITY.
VIII. 1. Quantity? A syllable is long by nature if
it contains a diphthong or one of the long vowels -q or
0) : <\)aiv(t), shotu ; short if it contains one of the short
vowels € or o : aocjiof;, loise.
2. A syllable is long by position if its vowel is
followed by a double consonant or by two single conso-
nants except a mute and a liquid : ayyiWo), announce,
To^ov, botv.
Note. The double consonants are {, f, and \\}. ^^
arises from a coalescence of S with cr; ^ is composed
of K and cr ; \\t,oi tt and o*.
^ Such consonants can regularly be pronounced by one impulse of the
voice ; as spl in splendor. See the Lexicon.
2 Quantity in Greek, as in Latin, refers to tlie time given in pronun-
ciation.
* Some pronounce ^ as dz, heard in adze.
ACCENT. 5
ACCENT.
IX. 1. There are three characters used in Greek
to mark the accent. These are : the acute accent ('),
7rora/xo9, river ; the circumjlex accent (^), ra> noTafi^, to
ihe river ; \k\Q grave accent (^), tov Trorafiov, the river.
2. These accents are written over the vowel of the
accented syllable or second vowel of the diphthong, un-
less the second vowel is l subscript (IV.). If the vowel
has a breathing also, the acute and the grave follow it,
but the circumflex is placed above the breathing : croc^os,
wise ; dycj, lead ; ol, who ; (S, to whom. If the accented
vowel is a capital, the accent, as well as the breathing,
stands just before it : "^liero (IV.).
3. The acute can stand only on one of the last three
syllables of a word ; the circumflex only on one of the
last two ; and the grave only on the last.
a. A word having the acute on the ultima is called
oxytone : Trora/xds; on the ^Qim% par oxgtone : to^ov ;
on the antepenult, ^i^ op ar oxytone : ayyeXo?.
h. A word having the circumflex on the ultima is
called perispomenon : rlfirjf;, of honor; on the penult,
properispjomenon : hcopov, gift, oiko^, home,
c. A word having no accent on the ultima is called
barytone : ro^ov, ayyeXo<;, hoipov.
X. The antepenult can be accented only when the
last syllable is short : ayyeXo?.
XI. If the penult is accented, it takes the circum-
flex when it is long by nature and at the same time
the ultima is short by nature : hoipov. Otherwise, if
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
accented, it takes the acute : Scopov^ to^ov, ltttto^,
€(T\OV.
Note. Final at and ot are regularly considered short
in determining the accent : /cw/xat, villages, dyyeXou,
messengers ; except in the optative, and in the adverb
oiKOL, at /lome,
XII. The circumflex can stand on the ultima only
when it is long by nature,^ but it does not necessarily
stand on such a syllable : Kcoficov, of villages ; rlyirj,
honor, tIjjltjs.
XIII. The place of the accent on many words must
be learned by observation. But in most words it
recedes as far as possible from the end (IX. 3 ; X.).
This is called recessive "accent. Thus, the accent on
ayyeX.09 is placed on the penult whenever by inflec-
tion the ultima becomes long : ayyekov ; but recedes
again when the ultima becomes short : dyyekop. Verbs
regularly take the recessive accent.
XIV. An oxytone regularly changes its acute to
the grave before other words in the same sentence in
close connection : ets rrfv ^oipav iXavpovcn (for et? Tijv
)(copav iXavpovcn).
Note. The acute is the regular accent. The cir-
cumflex and grave are modifications of this. The
grave indicates that the syllable upon which it is
placed is to be pronounced with a lighter stress.
^ Observe that the circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by
uatare.
THE ALPHABET.
XV. Punctuation. The comma ( , ) and period ( . )
are like those in English. The colon ( • ), a point above
the hne, corresponds to the English colon and semi-
colon. The mark of interrogation ( ; ) is like the
English semicolon.
LESSON I.^
THE ALPHABET.
I. Learn the alphabet and sound of the letters (L),
breathings (IL), classification of vowels and diph-
thongs (IIL Rem. ; IV. Rem. ; V. 1, 2).
Remark. Note the letters of the Greek alphabet
having forms like the corresponding English letters,
and then learn those differing from the English noting
the sound of each letter. Give the sound of each
letter and then the character representing it, and vice
versa, until the characters can be written instantly upon
hearing the different sounds. Observe that the Greek
name of each letter begins with the sound of that
letter.
2. EXERCISES.
L 1. What characters represent o,^ a, e in pre^, i?
2. Give both the long and the short sound of the
^ The notation of sounds used in this book is as found in Webster's
Dictionary.
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
vowels. 3. Give the letters representing b, g, th, ks,
ph, ps, r, etc. 4. Give the sound of a, /3, S, ^, k, \,
0, e, w, etc. 5. Give English words containing letters
representing the sound of ^, ^, xjf, (f), x^ 'n; /a, etc.
6. In the same way give English words representing
the sound of rj, e, co, o, l, v, ov, at, etc. 7. Give the
sounds of ov and av, of at and ei, of o) and o, etc.
II. 1. Pronounce by the phonic method rd : ^ t-o,
to; 6: h-o, 6 ; tov : T-o-v, rov. 2. Trfv^ rrj^, tojv, tw,
01, al, Toivy ralvy rot?, rot. 3: Tl-fJiT], 81-/07, vl-kt), ol-
KL-d, aKr)-jnj, rj-fie-pd, ^&>-pa. 4. ke-yco, kv-co, Trefi-TTcj,
^a'(TL-Xev-(o, ^ai-v(ii, i-kav-vco, Tret-Oo). 5. ck, ef, eV, et?,
e/c^ Twz/ KO}-yLO)v^ iv^ rrj r)-ixi-pa, ai-re-w, 77/309, na-pd,
crvVy t6-^ov, (fyai'i^o), Ovrj-CTKO), itt^ttos, 7rd-X€-/xo9. 6. 6^
d-ya-^ds. 7. ets^ 77)1/ -^ay-pdv e-kav-vov-ai. 8. Xi-ov-crt
tt)^' ye-(j>V'pav, 9. e/c rwi' Kco-ficov i-\av-peL. 10. 6
d-ya-^05 dv-0 p(x)r7ro<i iv rfi Kcxi-purj tjv.
^ The student should aim to connect the Greek sounds with the letters
representing them. Tliese sounds should be held in the mind like the
quality of a note in music as a distinct object of thought. In beginning
to pronounce, give first the sound of each letter, then combine the sounds
as the pronunciation of the word, and vice versa. To vary the exercise,
let the teacher give either the sound of the letters or the letters, and the
pupil either the characters or pronunciation. The teacher also should
both give the reading of the sentences to the pupil, and require independ-
ent reading from him.
2 A few monosyllables attach themselves so closely to the following
word as not to have a separate accent, but are pronounced with the follow-
ing word. Pronounce €< tq>v as one word. These are called proclitics
(101).
SYLLABLES. 9
LESSON 11.
SYLLABLES. PRONUNCIATION.
Review Lesson I. Learn VL ; VIL, 1, 2, 3, 4 ;
IX. 1, 2.
3. EXERCISES.
L I. Apply the principles of syllabication to the
words in Exercise IL of the preceding lesson.
n. 1. Divide into syllables and pronounce: ayyeXo?,
dyyeWo), eyyu9, rvyxdvo), dvayKT), TTora^dg. 2. dyco,
KeXevct), Xvo), SoKeco, Trefjunco, kafx^dvco, /txa^o/xat,, fjuevcj,
3. dvTjp, cs.v0p(o7ros, oTk:o9j /BacnXevs, S7JX09, rlfJicoT/,
<^tXo9, Q-ocfiOV, fjLaKpo^, (TTparia, x^P^i yecfyvpa, a/iafa,
dfid^T}^. 4. aevids, craTpdirr)^, 6 OTrXtrr;?, Trekrao'Tr}^,
6 o'TpaTicoT7)Sy i^-ekavpco, e/c-XeiTTw, Trpocr-ep^o/^atj Kara-
kaix^dvo). 5. els rrjv ^capav iXavpovcrt. 6. 8ta
^pvyids i^-eXavi/co, 7. els ^ikidv ^(xipav ekavvovai,
8. evravda fxei/et Kvpos koI t) crrpaTid rjfjiepds eiKocri.
LESSON m.
QUANTITY. ACCENT.
Review Lessons L, IL Learn VIIL, 1, 2, n. ; IX.
I, 2, 3, a,d,c; X.; XL N. ; XIL ; XIIL ; XIV. N. ;
XV.
10 . THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
4. EXERCISES.i
I. 1. Apply the rules of accentuation to the words
in Exercise IL, Lesson 11. , especially to proparoxy tones
and properispomenons. 2. In the same exercise^ note
the oxy tones, paroxy tones, and perispomenons.
II. 1. Upon what kind of syllables may the circum-
flex accent stand ? 2. Why can the acute stand on
the antepenult of dvOpcoire, iroXeixoL, Xverop, Xierai,
Xvofjuev ? 3. Why can not the circumflex stand on
the penult of olkm, dyco, dvdyKrj, KcofXT], itttto?, oirXovy
fi€cro<;, (f)6l3ov ? 4. Why can not the acute stand on
the antepenult of dvOpconov, dvOpcono), TroXejuiw, TroXe-
IJLOLVy 7To\€fjiov<s ? 5. Placc the accent on the penult or
antepenult of the following words as the last syllable
will permit, and pronounce : dvOpconov, dvOpoiiroiv, tto-
Xe/xou?, KLvSvvo^Sj 770X1x179, dypiOf;, ^ekricTTo^, KpaTtcTTOs,
Xvofiev, kvere, Xvovq-l, iXveTrjv, Xverat. XvovTai, ifxeve-
TTjv, Overov. 6. Place the proper accent on the penult
of the following words, and pronounce : Zlkj], X^P^^*
Xoyoi, hrfko^, B6)pov, Scopo), rofa, Kcofxai, Kojfjir)^;, tinroL,
Slojko), Xve, Xvet9, iOveTrjv, Xvaov.
^ The pupil should be drilled until the letters at once suggest the
sounds, and the sight of tlie word the proper pronunciation, without any
substitution of Roman letters. Let the pupil also be constantly drilled in
writing Greek words from tlieir sound or pronunciation. In all of the
exercises of this book the blackboard should be constantly used.
ACCIRENTS. 1 1
LESSON IV.
PERSON, NUMBER, G-ENDER, CASE.
5. In Greek, as in Latin, nouns, pronouns, adjectives,
and verbs are inflected. There are three declensions of
substantives and adjectives, corresponding in general to
the first three declensions in Latin, First, Second, and
Third, or respectively the A, O, and Consonant declen-
sions. The first two, as opposed to the third, are some-
times called the vowel declension.
6. There are three nu?nbers ; the singular, dual, and
plural. The singular denotes one object, the plural
more than one ; the dual refers definitely to two
objects.
7. There are \\\vqq genders : the masculine, the fem-
inine, and the neuter. The first two distinguish nouns,
as in English, according to their reference to sex. This
is called natural gender. But the Greek, like the Latin,
further distinguishes nouns by the so-called grammatical
gender.
a. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined partly by
their signification, but mostly by their endings.
h. The general rules for the grammatical gender of nouns,
independent of their endings, are the same as in Latin : (1) Most
names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine. (2) Most
names of countries, cities, islands, and trees are feminine.
(3) Gender determined by the endings of nouns — as, those end-
ing in a or ?; are feminine — will be given under the several
declensions.
12 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
8. There are five cases : the nominative, genitive,
dative, accusative, and vocative. The Latin ablative is
supplied partly by the genitive, but mostly by the
dative ; otherwise the cases have the same meaning
as the corresponding cases in Latin : as, nom.-^ a king
(subject); gen. of a king ; dat. to ov for a king ; ace.
a king (object) ; voc. king !
Note. All the cases except the nominative and
vocative are called oblique.
LESSON V.
THE ARTICLE.
Review Lessons IIL, IV. Note especially IX. 3,
XIL
g. The Greek article 6, 17, to [to] generally corre-
sponds to the English definite article the. But it often
has the force of a possessive pronoun. It is declined in
three genders and numbers, and in all the cases but the
vocative. Its endings, united with the stem \to'\, are,
in the main, like the corresponding endings of the vowel
declension.
1 For abbreviations see page 404.
THE ARTICLE. 13
\
10. Paradigm.
Singulm'. Dual. Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fein. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut.
o 17 TO TO} (raj TO) ot at ra
TOV'TTj^ TOV TOLP (tOLp) ToIp TCOP T(x)V TOiV
TCp Trj TO) TOLP (tOLv) TOLP Tol^; Tttt? TOt?
A. TOP TTji^ TO T(ii {to) T(i) T0-6<i Ta<i TCt
I Note. The pupil himself should make the observa-
tions before formulating them.
I a. Observe that 6, 77, ol, at are proclitics (101).
b. Observe that the gen. and dat. raasc. and neut. of all
I numbers are alike; that the nom. and ace. of the neuters are
alike, and their plural ends in a.
c. Observe that every dat. has an l, but in the singular it
t takes the form of t subscript.
I d. Observe that the gen. and dat. of all numbers are circum-
I flexed ; other accented forms follow the nom. neut. sing.
' II. Decline 77 tI^ltj, the honor, with the same end-
ings and accents as those of the fern. art. ; y] Tifxt], ttjs
T'nirj<;^ of the honor, etc.
12. Decline 6 TT0TaiJL6<;, the river, in the oblique
cases with the same endings and accents as those of the
masc. art. ; 6 Trora/xd?, tov iroTayLOv, of the river, etc.,
nom. plural, ot iroTafioi^
13. 1. What accent do the gen. and dat. in all
^,
^ Ta>, Toiv may be used for all genders.
2 Vocatives are like uominatives, of. paradigm 41.
* Cf. paradigm 61.
HWWiWIIMllillWliliWIIWliillli
14 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
numbers of oxytones and monosyllables of the vowel
declension take ?
2. What accent do all the other cases of these syl-
lables take?
3. Of what gender is rlfXTJ, Trora/xd^j ayyeXo?, dv-
OpoiTTo^, man ?
a. Observe that the article agrees with the noun that it
limits in gender, number, and case.
14. VOCABULARY.
ayye\o9, messenger, Kcofxr), village, o-Krjvij, tent.
Swpov, gift, oIkos, house. to^ov, bow,
LTTTTos, horse, TTOTafjio^, river, tI/xtJ, honor,
15. EXERCISES.i
I. 1. TLjlTJ, 7} TLfXl]^ TLfJirjf;, TLfJLTJv, (TKr)VT], 6 TTOTaflO^j
ttJ? TLjxrj<;, TTjv TLfiTJif (as object), ttj Tififj, rats rt/xat?,
ra>j/ TLfJiCJV, ra? TLfid^;. 2. rj crKiqvrj, ai (TKrjvaL, roiv
cTKrjvcoi^, rat? (TKrjvaL^;, tcj CTKrjva, tol cTKrjvd, toIv
(TKTjValv. 3. TOV Tr'OTCLjJiOV, TCOV TTOTafJLWV, T(0 TTOTa/Xft),
TOP TTOTafJLov, Tov<; TTOTa/xou?, 6 Xo)(dy6<;, the captain,
Tw Xo^ctyw, Tcov \o^ay(x)v, 4. at Acco/xat, ol lttttol, to
Scopov, TOV Scjpov, TOL Sojpa, 6 oIk'09, to to^ov, tcjv
K(OfX(OV.
IT. 1. Of the tent, for the tent, of the tents, of the
village, a village, villages. 2. Of the villages, of the
^ Read or pronounce and translate into English.
VERBS, INTRODUCTORY. 1 5
honors, of the gift, of the captain, for the captain.
3. The honors, of the honor, the messengers, for the
honors.^
LESSON VI.
PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE,
AND PASSIVE OF Xvco,
Review IX, 3; X, XI, XIII, XIV; Lessons III,
IV, V.
1 6. The Greek verb has three voices, the active,
middle, and passive.
a. There are four moods : the indicative, suhjuiictive, opta-
tive, and imperative. To these are added, in the conjugation of
the verb, the infinitives and participles.
d. There are seven tenses : the present, imperfect, aorist, fu-
;- ture, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect.
17. There are three persons, first, second, and
• third.
18. There are three numbers (6).
. ig. Verbs have recessive accent : that is, they accent
the antepenult if the last syllable is short, otherwise the
penult.
1 The average amount of work is given in the exercises of this book as
a guide to the pupil. The teacher should vary this, if need be, in his
instruction to the class.
16 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
20. Present Indicative,
Active. ^> Middle. Passive.
S. 1. Xva>, I loose ^ Xvo-fiai XvofjiaL.
2. Xvet9i ^ou loose Xvet, Xvr)
3. Xif€L, he looses Xve-Tai The passive
^ 1 / \ 7 z n ^^^^ ^^^^ same
D. 2. Xve-Tov, 1/ou [tivo) loose Xve-adov ^^^^ ^g |.|jg
3. Xve-Tovy they {two) loose Xve-aOov middle.
P. 1. Xvo'iieVy tve loose Xvo-fxeOa
2. Xve-Te, you loose Xve-crOe
3. Xvovcri, they loose Xvo-vr ai
21. Most Greek verbs are conjugated like Xvco, and
are called from their first form -w verbs.
22. Verb Theme. The theme of a verb is its funda-
mental part, the common base to which certain prefixes
and suffixes are added in its conjugation. The theme
of Xvoi is Xv' or Xv-,
23. Tense Ste7n. From the theme the different tense
stems by certain tense suffixes are formed. The final
vowel of these is either o or c, and is called the variable
(or thematic) vowel. Its sign is 7e-j as XvVe., the present
stem of Xv(xi.
24. Personal Endings. The different forms of the
verb are made by adding to the tense stems certain
endings. These in the finite moods denote the person ^
and number, and are called Personal Endings.
25. Variable {or thematic) vowel. The variable
vowel is o before /x and v, and e elsewhere.
1 Eirst person is like first person plural Xvofieu.
2 Personal pronouns are not used except for emphasis.
r.
VERBS, CONJUGATION. 1 7
26. In the present indicative active originally -o-jut,
-c-cri, and -e-Tu were respectively the endings of the 1st,
2d, and 3d person singular, and -o-vcri of the 3d plural.
In the former, -/xi was dropped and o changed to w ;
I in -crt and -rt passed over to the preceding vowel and
united with it "by contraction, and r was dropped. In
the latter, v in -vai before sigma was dropped and o
lengthened to ov (194, 4, end).
27. In the second person singular of the middle, cr
*T dropped after a variable vowel. Here -eat by a
rsgular rule of contraction becomes -et or -77.
Observe that the active and middle voices are distinguished
Dtily by different endings ; that in the dual and second person
.singularbf the middle -aO- occurs instead of -r- of the active.
?S. The personal endings of the primary^ tenses in
thf indicative, active and middle, are as follows :
Active. Middle.
Sing. Dual. Plur. Sing. Dual. Plur.
1. -, (-/xi)' -^ev 'fiai -fxeOa
2. -s, {-o'i) -TOP -T€ -crat -crOov -crOe
3. -, (-rt, -crt) -TOP -(TL, {-vctl) -rat -crOov -vTai
29. The present tense represents the action as taking
place at the present time.
a. Customary actions and general truths are also expressed
by the present.
30. The active voice represents the subject as acting :
XuG), J loose.
^ Cf. primary tenses (110).
18 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
31. The middle voice commonly represents the sub-
ject as acting upon itself or for itself : ^ Xuo/xat, / am
loosing myself, Tropevoixau, {iropevo), make go), I proceed,
fi-eraTre/xTTo/xat avrov, I send for him, {summon).
32. The passive voice represents the subject as acted
upon : XvofxaLy I am loosed.
33. Write the present indicative active and middle
of Xeyo), TTopevoj, Treida), TrefXTro), and ^ovXevo).
34. VOCABULARY.^
Give the meaning of avOpoiiro^, -ov ; Scopov, to ; Xo-
^ayo9, -ov ; TTora/xd?, -ov ; tZ/xt/, -779 ; (rKr)V7), -rj<; :
Kv/oos, -oVf Cyrus. Xeyco, -et?, say, speak.
fiovXevcoy -619, plan ; mid. Tre/ATro), -et?, send,
deliberate. 7r€L0(o, -el's, persuade ; mid,
iXavvcoy march [elastic^]. believe, obey.
Xv(o,-eLs, loose, destroy, break, iropevo), -ei9, make go ; mid .
puivo). -€Ls, remain. proceed [pore].
35. EXERCISES.
1. Xvei, Xverat, Xvovcn, XvovraL, Xverov^ XveaOov^
Xvopev, XvopeOa, Xvei, Xvrj^ XveaOe. 2. pivei<;, pivere,
Xeyei, Xeyerat, Xiyovrai, jropevopai, Tropevovrai, Tropev-
erat. 3. to hcopov Tripirei. 4. ireiOo), TreiOeiy TreiOeT ai,
1 It may represent the action on something belonging to oneself:
Xvofiai, I ransom.
2 First learn the meaning of the words from their use in the sentences,
and then commit to memory.
• Borrowed from the Greek (501).
SYNTAX OF VERB. 19
TreiOofieOay /BovXeveif;, ^ovXevecrOe, ^ovXevei. 5. Kvpo<;
iXavpeu. 6. 6 dvOpa)7ro<; ^ovXeveraL. 7. Kvpo<; rov
Xo^ayov TrefiTTeL. 8. ol Xo^ayol ttjp o-Krjvrjv Xvovcn
(destroy).
Examine the nominatives in 5, Q, 1 , 8^ and note their relation
to the verb.
RULE.^
36. The subject. of the finite verb is in the nomina-
tive case.
Examine the verbs in b, 6, 7, 8, and note the relation of their
form to their subjects.
Rule.
37. A verb agrees in person and number with its
subject.
Examine the accusatives in 3, 7, 8, and note their relation to
the verbs upon which thej depend.
Rule.
38. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the
accusative.
39. EXERCISES.
1. Of honor, for the honor, of the river, for the
river, the gift, the bow, of the tent, of the tents.
2. , Cyrus believes. 3. The man proceeds. 4. He is
marching, they are sending men. 5. Cyrus remains.
6. They two are remaining. 7. The captains delib-
erate.
* Give the corresponding English and Latin rules of syntax whenever
applicable.
20
BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
LESSON VII.
FIRST, OR A DECLENSION.
Review IX., 3 ; X.,. XL, n. ; XIL, XIII. Lessons
IV., v., VI.
40. The Stem. The stem of a noun is its funda-
mental part, that part to which the case-endings-^ are
added in declension. It corresponds to the theme of
the verb (22). The stem of nouns of the first declen-
sion ends in d, which in feminine nouns remains long
or is changed to 7; or a.
41. Paradigms.
(TTpaTia
Xcopd
y€(j)vpa
army
land
Singular.
bridge
N.V.
(XT p ana
XOipd
ye(j)vpa
G.
crrparta?
X^pct?
ye(f)vpd<;
D.
(jTpaTia
Xf^pa
yej)vpa
A.
(TTpaTidv
X(^poiv
Dual.
yi^vpav
N.A.V.
(TTparia
X(opd
y€(f)vpd
G.D.
CTTparialv
XfJ^pOLi'V
Plural.
ye(j)vpaiv
N.V.
(TTpariaL
'^ojpai
ye(f>vpaL
G.
CTTpaTlCOV
X^ip^v
y€(j)vp(t)v
D.
CTT/oartats
X(opaL<;
yei^vpaif;
A.
arpaTids
Xw/>d9
ye(j)vpd^
^ Certain letters, as in Latin, to express the relation of the word to other
words.
FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 21
TlflTJ
dfjLa^a
honor
Singular.
wagon
N.V.
Tlixrj
dfxa^a
G.
riixrj^
dixd^rjq
D.
Tlfiy
djid^rj
A.
rlyLrjv
Dual.
dfia^ap
N.A.V.
TlfJid
dfjid^d
G.D.
TLflOLP
Plural.
dfxd^aiv
N.V.
Ti/xat
a/xafat
G.
TLfXCOP
dfjLa^wi/
D.
TlfJLa2<;
a/Actfat?
A.
Tt/xag
djxd^d<^
a. Observe^ that the case endings ^ unite with the final
vowel of the stem, forming one syllable.
d. Observe that the terminations of the dual and plural of
each noun are like the endings of the dual and plural of the
fem. article (10).
c. Observe that : 1 . In the singular a preceded by e, l, or /o,
is retained : %c^/3a, -a?, etc. 2. When the final vowel is pre-
ceded by 0-, TT^ W, or a double consonant (VIII. 2, n.), it is
changed to a in the nom., ace, and voc, and to r} in the gen.
and dat._, OdXarra, OaXdrTT}^. 3. After other letters the
final vowel is regularly changed to 7) throughout^ and is de-
clined like the fem. article (10, 11): crKr^vri^ KcofMr).
d. Observe that the nom. and voc. are alike in all numbers.
^ These observations' must be actually made by the pupil (10. n.).
2 These will be noticed later (49).
22 beginner's greek book.
42. Quantity of the Terminations.
a. Observe that a in the endings of the gen. sing., nom.
dual, and ace. plural is long.
h. Observe that : 1. In the singular a preceded by e, t, or /),
is long, except in nouns ending in pa preceded by a diphthong
or V : 7€</)i5/oa, irelpa (cf. p. 68^). 2. That the stem vowel a of
the ace. and voc. shig. agrees in quantity with the nom. : 76-
(l)Vpa, ye(l>vpav, djxa^av^ daXarrav.
43. Accent of Nouns.
1. The accent of the nom. sing, of most nouns must
be learned by observation. All the forms of a noun are
accented on the same syllable as the nom. sing., and
have the same kind of an accent as far as the general
rules of accent (X., XL, n., XIL, XIII.) will allow.
2. In the A Declension the last syllable of the gen.
plur. is always circumflexed : a/xafa, afjua^cov. ^
3. The accent of the ultima is regularly retained, but
in the gen. and dat. of all numbers, a long ultima, if
accented, takes the circumflex (XIL, 13, 1): crrparta?,
TtjLt'^9, ti/xt}, Tt/xai?, rat?, (xt^v, fjnqvoiv, fjLrjvwp.
44. Decline rj crKiqvrj, rj Kcofir), rj ^v\aKrj^ rj Slktj.
45. Decline rj neupa, rj rjixepd^ rj Ovpd^ rj OdkaTTa,
a. Of what gender are nouns of the first declension ending
in a and rj ?
h. Account for the circumflex accent on the gen. and dat.
of all numbers of o, rtft^, (^vKaKr).
c. Give the quantity of the penult and ultima of the follo\ving
words : KM/iai., Kcofia^ BiKat^ dvpat, ye(f)vpa, rj/JLepav.) irelpav
(III.).
^ This is only an apparent exception, since the stem vowel -a and the
gen. ending -av are contracted, so that d-av becomes av (153).
FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 23
46. VOCABULARY.
Give the Greek words for honor, village, captain, tent,
believe, rivers proceed.
djjia^a, -179, wagon, yjjipa.^ -d?, land, country,
y€(j)vpa, -d?, bridge. ayadj], good, brave, fertile,
Slktj, -7] <;, justice [syi\-dic]. Kakij, beautiful.
Ovpd, -d?, door [door].^ ayco, lead, carry [axiom].
OdXarra, -7)^, sea, ^X^' have.
rjfjiepd, -d?, day [eph-eme- et?, prep, with ace, to, into.
ral]. e/c,^ prep, with gen., from,
Treipa, -d?, trial, experience out of ; ef before vowels.
[em-piric, ex-perience] . eV, prep, with dat., in^ on,
(TTpaTid, -d9j army. during.
(t)v\aKy]y -779, garrison.
47. EXERCISES.
I. 1. Trjq TLfJLrj<;, Trj<; Slk7]<;, rfj neCpa, tcjv ireipcov,
TTjv ^(i)pav. 2. xd)pa dyaOrj? r) dyadrj ^oipa, rj KaXrf
Kcofjirj, X^P^ koXtj. 3. daXdrrrj^;, Tr^v ddXaTTai/, €19 ttjp
OdXarrav, e/c T179 OaXdrnqf;. 4. iK t(ov KcofjiCJv ikavvei.
5. et9 rv^v x<^P^^ Ikavvovcri. 6. \vovq-i rr/v yi^vpav.
7. iv rfj rffiepa Kvpo<; ekavvei. 8. Treipav e^€i9 t'^9
(TTpcLTid^. 9. eK Trj<; 6a\dTTrj<; iXavveu et9 rrjif ^w/oai^.
II.' 1. He sends a garrison. 2. He leads an army
into the villages. 3. They destroy the tents. 4. The
captain has justice. 5. On the day Cyrus sends the
army.
1 Cognate word (504). « See 101.
* Adjectives agree with their nouns as does the article (13, 3, a).
24
BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK,
LESSON VIII.
A DECLENSION. MASCULINES.
Review Lessons V., VIL, Note 40.
48.
Paradigms.
Sez^tds, 6 ^
(TaTpd7Tr)<;, 6
oifKiTiq^y
Xenias
satrap
Singular.
hoplite
N. Sertds
crarp (1777^9
ottXiVt;?
G. BevLov
(Tarpdirov
ottXCtov
D. BevCa
(rarpoLTTin
oTrXiTrj
A. Bevidv
craTpd7T7]v
ottXlttjv
V. BevCd
craTpoLTrrj
Dual.
oTrXtrd
N. A. V. (815)
crarpaTrd
onXiTa
G. D.
crarpdiraiv
Plural.
. oirXiTaiv
N. V.
craTpdiTai
OTrXcrat
G.
(Tar pair (ov
ottXltcop
D.
crarpdiTaLf;
OTrXtrat?
A.
craTpdird^
OTrXtrd? *
49. Case endings of the A Declension united with
the final vowel of the stem, are as follows :
* The article prefixed or affixed to a substantive in the paradigms or
vocabularies indicates the gender: 6, masc, ^, fera., t6, neut.
MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION.
25
Singular. ■'Dual. Plural.
Feminine. Masculine. Masc. & Fern. Masc. & Fern.
N. -a or -a -r) -a? -179 N. -ai
G. -as or -7)<; -7/9 -ov -ov N.A.V. -d G. -wz^ (-dcov)
D. -a or-]7 -]7 -a -77 G.D. -atz/ J), -at?
A. -di' or -ai' -rjv 'dv ~r)v A. -d?
V. -d or -d -t; -d ->; or -d V. -at
Observe that the mascu-
lines of the A Declension are
like the feminines except in
the following particulars :
1. Final d of the stem is
retained in the nom. after e, l
or /3, as in the feminines, but
otherwise it if* changed to rj.
2. They have the case
ending -9 in the nom. sing,
and -ov in the gen. sing.^
3. Nouns in -T7/9 have vo-
cative in d : TroXtrd, oTrXtrd.
50. Decline 6 Mapav-
dg, 6 To^oTTjf;, 6 TreXra-
cttt;?, 6 <TTpaTLa)Tr)<;, 6
'Opovrds,^ 6 'ApTa^ep^r)<;,
51. Conjugate the pres.
ind. act. and mid. of
ayo), Xvct), e^w, Xajx^dpa).
No. 1. 'OTrXiVr;?.
^ A few nouns, especially proper names, retain the Doric genitive a,
having a or ov in the gen. sing. ; in other respects they are like nouns
in -as.
26 beginner's greek book.
52. vocabulary.
Give the Greek words for experience^ good, brave,
beautiful, in, into, from, plan, say^ send.
' APpoK6iJLd<;, -a, Abrocomas. (TTpaTLc^r)*;, -ov, soldier,
* Kpra^ip^iqs, -ov, Artaxer- to^ov, to, bow,
xes. To^oTYjf;, -ov, bowman.
Mapo-vdq, -ov, MarsyaSy a (No. 3)
satyr. ySao-tXeuo), -€t9, be king,
Bellas, -ovj Xenias. Xafx^dvo), -€t9, receive, cap"
677X17179, -ov, a heavy-ar7ned ture [di-lemma].
foot soldier^ hoplite. rjv, {he, she, it) teas, 3d
(No. 1) sing. impf. of dp.i, to
'OpovTa^, -a, -ov, Orontas. be,
7re\TaaT7]<;, -ov, [peltastj, '^aav, (they) were, 3d pi.
targeteer. (No. 2) impf. of et/it, to be.
7T€Xtt], -rj<;, small and light ivravOa, adv., there, there-
shield, target, upon,
o-aTpdirrj^, -ov [satrap], a co, interj. 0, with voc. usual-
Persian viceroy. ly best left untranslated.
Notice the common element of ireXTT) and TrekTao-rrj^,
(TTpoTid and (TTpaTLa)T7]<;, ro^ov and to^ott)^.
53. EXERCISES.
1. 6 irekTacrrrjf; TrekTrjv e)^et. 2 6 To^6Tr}<; ro ^
To^ov €)(ei. 3. ivTavOa oirXiTri^^ tjv. 4. OTrXtrat iv
rai? Kcofiaif; rjcrav. 5. rjaav ev rfi aTparid roforat.
^ Force of a possessive pronoun (9).
MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION. 27
G. *Apra^€p^r)<; ^acrikevei, 7. aevLa<; dyet Toifs ottXC-
ras et9 ttjv )(copav. 8. w *0p6vTa,
rov<; (TTpaTioyra^ Xafx/Baveis ; XafM-
^dv(j}. 9. iv TTj X^P^ Acw/xat Kakai
Tjcrav. 10. 6 7reXra(m79 /xeVet eV rrj
KCOfJirj. 11. €19 KCOfJLTJV TOV ^ A/BpOKOfia
iXavvei. 12. CTTparicoTaL, ra? TreXras
e;)(eT€ ; ra? TreXra? e^oixev. 13. 6
a-arpdirrj^ dyeu tovs ro^ora'^ Ik t(x)v
(TKriVO)V. No. 2. IIcXTao-Tiis.
54. 1. Explain the agreement of the article in these
sentences (13, 3, a),
2. Apply the rules for the case of the subject, object,
and agreement of the verb (36, 37, 38).
55. Arrangement of the principal parts of a sentence.
a. Observe that the subject regularly stands first in the sen-
tence, and the copula last (3, 4), and the object before the verb.
h. Observe that when this order is changed, it is for em-
phasis, or to express better the relation of the following ideas to
the preceding ^ (53, 5). A favorite position of the verb in
Greek is in the middle of the sentence (53, 1, 10, 13).
Examine the vocatives in 53, 8, 12.
Rule.
56. The name of the person or thing addressed is
put in the vocative with or without w.
1 Let the pupil always seek clearness. The Greek allows a greater
variety in the collocation of the parts of a sentence than tlie Latin, which the
pupil can best note in connected discourse (107).
28
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
57-
EXERCISES.
1. Orontas speaks.
No. 3. To$6t7}<s.
2. The satrap deliberates.
3. Xenias has hoplites.
4. There the army re-
mains. 5. The soldiers
destroy the wagons.
6. There was a beautiful
village. 7. [There] ^ were
brave soldiers in the army.
8. He marches from
the villages into the
country.
LESSON IX.
SECOND, OR O DECLENSION.
Review Lessons IV. ; V. Note (9, 10 ; 13, 1, 2) ; VIL
Note (40, 43, 3) ; VIII.
58. The stem of the second declension ends in o,
corresponding to the second declension in Latin. Its
nom. sing. masc. ends in s and its neut. in v, and the
voc. masc. sing, ends in e. The nom., ace, and voc. of
the neut. follow the rule for the article (10, d).
59. Decline 6 -Trora/x-o?, 6 Xo^ctydg, 6 o-rpaTo^; with
the article (12), observing that the stem-vowel of the
1 Omit. There is no word in Greek for the expletive there.
NOUNS OF SECOND DECLENSION.
29
second declension is like that of the article (to) united
with the same case endings, except as indicated above
(58).
60. Decline to to^ov with the same endings as those
of the neuter article (10), except that the nora., ace,
and voc. sing, have case-ending -v (58).
61.
Paradigms.^
olvo^, 6
dvOpCOTTOS, 6
6809, 7)
SoipOV, TO
wine
man
Singular.
road
sift
N.
oXvo<;
dv9pco7ros
6809
Scopov
G.
olvov
dvOpCOTTOV
oSov
Scopov
D.
OlV(x)
dvOpCOTTO)
« '>
00(p
Scopco
A.
olvov
dvdpcoTTOv
oBov
Sojpov
V.
ohe
dvOpoDire
Dual.
oSe
Bcopov
N.A.V.
OLVO)
dvOpCOTTO)
68(0
Sa>p(o
G.D.
olvoiv
dvOpCOTTOLV
Plural.
68o2v
BcOpOLV
N.V.
olvOL
dvOpojTroL
680L
Scopa
G.
OLVCOV
dvOpCOTTCJV
oScjv
Batpcov
D.
OLVOL<;
dvOpamoL<;
68ot9
8ft>/30t9
A.
OLvov<;
dv9p(07rov<;
680V9
hwpa
a. Observe that nouns of the O Declension with the case-
ending -9 in the nom. sing, are masculine, rarely feminine.
h. Observe that all nouns of the Declension with the
case-ending -v in the nom. sing, are neuter.
^ Let the pupil first decline these words as above, and then, if necessary,
correct them by the paradigms and commit to memory.
30 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
(1) How do the gen. and dat. of masc. and neut.
nouns of all numbers compare ?
(2) How do the nom. and voc. of the masc. dual and
plur. compare ?
(3) Give the rule for the form of the nom., ace, and
voc. of the neut. sing, and plur.
(4) What quantity has a of the nom. plur. of the
neut. ?
62. Decline 6 TrdXe/xo?, 6 \6xo<;, 6 Kvpo<;, 6 crTparr)-
yds, TO ottXov, to TreSiop*
63. Conjugate the pres. ind. act. and mid. : Xvco,
(j)aLvo)y (\>4po}.
64. EXERCISES.
1. Maporva<; Slktjj/ €)(eL, 2. 6 avOpcxiiro^ ev tco^ oIko)
rjv. 3. 'Ay8/)Ofcd/xa9, <3 Kvpe, iropeveTai ; 4. ^v rj
dSo9 (TTeviq. 5. tov oXvov ovk ^^op^ev. 6. ret rdfa iv
TTJ o-Kr]vrj ^v. 7. TOi oirka iirl dfia^cjv ayerai. 8. ol
(TTpaTLcoTai TOL^ oVXa (jyepovCL. 9. ol (TTpaTrjyol /cat
OL Xox^ayol rjcrav iTrl rat? Ovpais. 10. 6 dvOpa)TTO<;
Kvpcp Xeyei. 11. Kvpo<; toI<; o-TpaTLCOTaus tol Scopa
7re/x7rei. 12. koI 6^ Kvpo<; aTroTre/xTret tov<; Saapov<;
* ApTa^ep^rj. 13. (^yaivovTai koX lttttol /cat avOpcoiroi.
Examine 6, 7, and observe that the neuter plural subjects
have singular verbs.
^ What force lias this article ?
2 The article is used with proper names in the sense of " well known "
or as "previously mentioned," "the said," etc.
nouns of second declension. 31
Rule.
65. A neuter plural subject regularly takes a singu-
lar verb.
Examine the datives in 10, 11, 12, and observe that they
express the object (person or thing) indirectly affected by the
action of the verb.
Rule.
66. The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative.
Observe that the indirect or remote object regularly comes
before the verb and its object (11); but when the verb comes
in the middle of the sentence, it follows the verb, either before
or after its object (12; cf. 55, «, ¥).
67. EXERCISES.
1. Boats were on the river. 2. The captain receives
a company. 3. The way was long and narrow. 4. The
general leads the army into the plain. 5. The hoplite
speaks to Cyrus. 6. Clearchus sends a messenger to
Cyrus. 7. The army appears in the plain.
68. VOCABULARY.
Sacr/xo9, 6, fax. olvo<;, 6, wine (Lat. vinum)
KXea/))(09, o, Clearchus, [wine].
\6xo^, 6, company, ottXov, im/plement ; onXa,
Xo)(^ay6s, 6, captain [Xo- arms [pan-oply].
X0<; + ayw], tteSlop, plain,
6So9, 17, loay^ road [ex- 77X0101^, boat,
odus, peri-od].
32 THE beginner's greek book.
(TTparos^o^encairipedarm^i Kau, and (Lsit.et); kol . . .
force, army. Kau, both . . . and,
(TTpaT7)y6si 6, ^eneral[(TTpa- iiri, prep., w. gen . on, upon ;
709+ ayw; stratagem]. w. dat., on, by, at; w.
fta/cpd?, -a/ -6v, long. ace, upon, to, at
(TTevo^, -7], -6v, narrow. [epi-gram].
dTTO-Tre/xTTCt), send off, back, ov, ovk, ov^, ^^6g. adv.,
remit. not (Lat. non) ; ov be-
^olvoiy show, mid. appear comes ovk before a
[phenomenon]. smooth vowel, ovx be-
<^€/>a>, bear, briny, carry (Lat. fore a rough.
fero) [bear].
69. What words in the preceding vocabularies have
a common element with o-rparo^ and aTparrjyos?
What common element in Xd;j(os and Xoxayos ?
LESSON X.
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION.
Review 9, 10, 13, 3, a; 4^1, a, b, c ; 43, 1, 2, 3;
Lesson IX.^
70. The stem of these adjectives ends in o and a
(40, 58), like the nouns of the Second and First Declen-
sions, and are therefore declined with the same endings.
The masc. and neut. follow the O Declension, and the
^ The feminine of the adjective follows tlie A declension.
2 The lesson of the precedin^^ day should always be reviewed, and the
preceding ones as often as possible.
• ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION. 33
fern, the A. Long a in the feminine is retained after
e, I, or p ; otherwise it is changed to rj. Thus the nom.
sing, ends in 09, 17 or d, ov (Latin -us, -a, -myi) : S77X09,
SijXr), SrjXov ; d^LO^;, dfta, d^Lov.
71. Some adjectives in og, especially compounds, are
decHned with two sets of endings, having the masc. and
fem. alike : diropo^y -ov ; dfia^LTo^, -ov ; pdp^apo<;, -ov.
72. Adjectives follow the rule for the accent of nouns,
except in the nom. and gen. plur. of the vowel declen-
sion, the fem. follows the accent of the masc. : d^ioi,
a^-tat ; agucov, agtwf .
73. Hereafter the paradigms requiring special notice
only will be given in the lessons. All others may be
found iu the appendix. But the pupil whenever possi-
ble should first inflect the words as in 61, and then
compare his work with the paradigms. Decline : 1. Srj-
X09, hijXrjy SrjXov ; 2. d^LO^, d^id, d^LOv (817).
74. Decline: 1. <^i\o9, -rj, -ov; c^tXto?, -d, -ov ;
2. iiaKp6<^^ -dy.ov ', a/xa^irdg, -ov.
75. Decline : 6 dyaOo^ 677X17179 ; 17 /xa/cpa oSos ; to
Kokov Scopov,
76. EXERCISES.
1. rj Tip.7) dfta ecrrt. 2. iv rat? c^iXiat? ^oipai^
elcrL 3. KXea/)^09 TrefJiTreu rov to^ottjv to2^ crTpaTicO'
rat?. 4. T0^6Ty]<? dyado^ iv ttj Tiixr} tj v. 5. 6 dyaOo^
dvdpojTTo^; iv rw oikm icTTi. 6. 877X77 -qv r) Itti^ovXtj.
7. Tj irdpoSo^ Tjv 6S6^ ctjLtaf trd?. 8. €)(€i rj KiXtcrcra
rj ao(j)r) kol KaXr) ^uXafca?. 9. ol dyaOoi Kvpov </)iXo6
Tjcrav. 10. cTTpaTLcoTaL rjaav ol Kvpov (^iXot. 11. Ota
31 THE IVEGINNEll's GREEK BOOK. .
<^tXta9 rrjs \(x)pa^ ayei 6 (rarpdTrrjf; tov<; crrpariwra?,
12. ol CTT/oartajrat ol cvv Kkedp^cp iv Seftct rjcrav.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
77. The attributive adjective qualities the noun di-
rectly without the intervention of a verb (2, 4, 5).
78. When a noun without the article is moditied by
an attributive adjective, the adjective regularly follows
the noun (4, 7). It is changed for emphasis.
79. When a noun with the article is modified by the
attributive adjective, the adjective always has an article
before it, and is said to be in the Attributive Position
(2.5,8).
a. Regularly the order is, as in English, article, adjective,
noun; but when the article with adjective follows the noun, the
noun may have another article before it : o ayaOb<; avOpcoTro^;,
dvdpoJTTO^ 6 ayaOoi^ 6 avOpcoiro^ 6 ayaOoi (8).
b. All attributive phrases regularly take the attributive po-
sition (10, 12).
80. The predicate adjective forms part of the pred-
icate, and is connected with its noun by a copula or an
equivalent verb (1, 0).
81. When a noun with the article is modified by a
predicate adjective, the adjective never has the article
before it, and is said to be in the Predicate Position,
that is, the adjective stands as it might with the copula
expressed or understood : 6 cti/^pcuTro? Q.y<iBQ<i (ecrrt) ;
aya^09 6 av9pco7ro<; (cWi) (1, 6, 11).
ADJECTIVES, VOWEL DECLENSION. 35
82. An adjective, as in English, generally with the
article, may be used as a noun (9). Any phrase with an
article may have the same force : ol avv KXedp^oi eV
Sefta yjaav (12).
83. Agreement of Adjectives.
An adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number,
and case. The article, adjective pronouns, and partici-
ples conform to this rule.
84. Predicate Noun and Adjective.
With verbs signifying to be, to appear, to be named,
etc., a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same
case as the subject (1, 6, 9, 10).
85. EXERCISES.
1. The general leads the brave hoplites into a friendly
country. 2. He marches into a beautiful plain. 3. The
noble were the friends of Cyrus. 4. The Greek army
was on the right. 5. The men in the country were
friendly.
86. VOCABULARY.
eTTL-^ovkT], plot, design, af to?, -d, -ov, worthy, valaa-
KtXtcrcra, Cilician queen, hie,
oIfco9, 6, house, home [eco- Sefiog, -a, -6v<f right ; kv Se-.
iiomy]. fta, on the right,
7rdp-oSo<s, 7), way, passage, 8rjko<;, -rj, -op, clear, mani'
pass. /est, evident.
dya96<;,'rj,'6v, good, brave. 'EXX-y/i/t/co?, -rj, -op, Greek,
dfia^LTo^;, 'OP, passable for [Hellenic].
wagons (dfia^a). Ka\6^, -t], -op, beautiful, noble
86
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
ao(j)6<;, -7], -6v, wise [philo- etcri, {fhei/) are, 3d plur.
sophy], pres. of etjut.
<^iXio5, -a, -ovy friendly, es- Sta, prep., w. gen., through;
pecially of countries. w. ace, on account of
<^tXo9, -7), -ov, friendly ; o [dia-meter].
</>tXo9, a friend [Phil-ip, (fvv^ prep. w. dat., with, in
philtre, philo-sophyj. company loith, by the aid
i(TTL, {lie, she, it) is, 3d sing. of [syn-opsis].
pres. of et/xt, be.
LESSON XI.
TRANSLITERATION.
Review L, IL, III., IV., V., VI., VIL, VIII. I, 2, n. ;
41, a,b,c', 48, 58, 61.
87. Greek proper names and Greek words are bor-
rowed or written in English with Latin letters expressed
in Latin form. They are then accented as in Latin,
according to the quantity of the penult, ^nd pronounced
with the English pronunciation : Kv/>09, Cyrus ; 'AySpo-
KOfid^, Abrocomas.
88. Examine the following :
1 . IleXrat, Feltae
2. 'Aptato9, Ariaeus
3. Adpeio?, Darius
4. BotcuTLo?, Boeotian ^
5. SoXot, Soli
6. Taper OL, Tarsus
7. TXov<;, Glus
8. MtkrjTo^, Miletus
9. Svfji/3pLov, Thymbrium
10. %7rdpTrj, Sparta
1 1 . (jydXay^, phalanx
12. kvk\o<;, cycle'
^ When the name has a well-known EngKsh form, tliis should be used.
Such only are regularly printed in full-faced type.
TRANSLITERATION. 3?
a. Observe that in transliterating,^ the consonants and vowels
are regularly represented by the Latin letters as given in the
alphabet (I.) ; that the diphthongs are represented as follows :
1. ai by ae ; eu by ^ or ^; oi by oe ; ov by u.
2. c subscript is omitted in transliteration.
6. Observe that a, o, av, ev are regularly unchanged, but the
terminations of the nouns, ac, 09, ov, and ot, etc., are altered to
suit the Latin declensions : 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10.
1. 7 before 7, /c, ^, or f, becomes n (VL).
89. Write in Latin letters :
'Apraf 6)0^7)9, 'A;)(ato?5 Ev(j)pdTrj(;, 'icovia, ^l(TcroL, Ke-
XatvaC, KikiKLa, KXedpcop) ^Opovra^, Soc^atVero?, Xvpia,
3,€vo(j)a>Vy Tvpialov, ^OLvtKT], X€Lpicro(f)o<;, TavXlTT)^.
90. Write in Greek letters : Arabia, Babylon,^ Boe-
otia, Castolus,^ Colossae,^ Lydia, Marsyas, Proxenus,
Phrygia, Roina.
91. EXERCISES.
1. Kai To2<; (TTpaTL(t)TaL<; cx^eCkerai fjucrOo^;. 2. ^o-
(j>aLV€To<; 6 ^rvfJL(j)d\Lo<; OTrXtra? e^et ^tXtou?. 3. /xe-
vovcFiv ^ iv ^6koi<^ /cat 'Icrcrois. 4. ef 'Et^eVou dyerai
Tov arpaTov. 5. ^coKpdTrjf; 6 'A^atog OTrXtra? e^et
7r€VTaKO(TLOv<; Koi ^tX.tov9. 6. ivrevOev e^ekavvei crraO-
jLtov9 Svo Trapa(rdyya<s Se/ca em tov "^dpov irorafjiov.
7. ivrevOev e^ekavvei crra9iJiov<; rrevre 7rapaadyya<; €lko-
(TLv^ €1<;'Ik6vlov. ivravOa fxeveuSvo rjfji€pa<;. 8. ivrev-
^ Some prefer to transliterate proper names directly into English, and
accent and pronounce tliem as any other Greek words.
^ Oxytone.
* V movable is added to words ending in at before a word beginning
with a vowel (100).
38 THE beginner's greek book.
6ev Kvpof; ttjv KiXLcrcrav et9 Tr)v KiXiKuav aTroTri^Tru,
9. ivTevOev i^ekavveu aTa0^ov<; Suo irapacrdyya^; 6/ctcj
els IleXra?. ivravOa fjuevei rifjuepas iTrrd.
Examine the relation of the first and second substantives in
2, 5, and observe that the second,, denoting the same person (or
thing) as the firsts is annexed to it to describe it. This is called
ajppositioiij and the words so annexed^ appositives.
Rule.
92. An appositive agrees in case with the substan-
tive which it qualifies.
a. Names of rivers and countries regularly have the attribu-
tive position : -6.
Examine o-raOfiov^ and 7rapao-dyya<i in 6, 7, and rj/jLepa^; in
7j 9, and observe their relation to the verb.
Rule.
93. The extent of time or space is expressed by the
accusative.
94. . EXERCISES.
1. The river appears impassable. 2. Clearchus was
a Lacedaemonian. 3. The allies were in Miletus.
4. Proxenus has five hundred hoplites. 5. And Cle-
archus the Lacedaemonian has come. 6. Thence he
marches two stages, five parasangs, into Thymbrium.
95. VOCABULARY.
*'E<^ecro9, rj, Ephesus} Aa/ceSat/xdi'to?, 6, Lacedae-
^Ikovlov, Iconium. , monian,
^ Proper names hereafter will be omitted from the special vocabularies.
ESSENTIALS FOR READING.
39
fjLLaOo'^, 6, wages^pay.
TTapao-dyyrj^, -ov^parasang,
three and one third miles.
ITeXrai, -oiv^ Peltae.
crra^/xd?, 6, station, stage,
a days march.
Sru)Lt(/)aXto9, 6, Stymphalian.
(TvfjL-iJLaxos, 6, ally \_cnjp^
+ t^^xn]'
X(oKpdrr)<;y Socrates.
^a/309, 6, JPsarus.
diropo^;, -ov, without means,
impassable [d + 7r6po<;,
means\
SeKa, indecL, ten [decade].
Svo, two,
eiKocTLy indecl., twenty.
iiTTd, indecl., seven [hepta-
gon].
oKToj, indecl., eight [octa-
gon].^
TrevTOL-KocnoLy -at, -a, five
hundred.
irivre, indecl., Jive [penta-
gon].
^tXtot, -ai, -a, one thousand.
i^-ekavvQ), march on.
rJKO), come, he or have come.
6(^etXa), owe ; pass. due.
ivTevOep, adv., thence.
LESSON XII.
ESSENTIALS FOR READING.
96. In reading rapidly any Greek author three
things are necessary, — a thorough knowledge of the
words, of the inflections, and of the syntax.
1. In acquiring the vocabularies, the allied words
should be grouped about the root or stem-word, (510,
f. f.) and the borrowed and corresponding Latin words
noted. Every word should be reviewed, either sepa-
rately or by its use in sentences, until the Greek word
instantly suggests its meaning, and its meaning the
word.
1 See 194, 4.
40 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
2. The forms of the inflections should be classified
as much as possible, that the old may explain the new,
and the new review the old (9, 11, 12).
3. The rules of syntax should be thoroughly learned
as modes of thought, and the pupil should be able to
give the forms of construction, either from reading or
from the dictation of the teacher, as rapidly as he would
give those of his own language.
97. Rules for Heading.
1. Read the sentences aloud in the original. Strive
to recall the meaning of the w^ords, observing their
inflectional endings and grammatical relations.
2. Endeavor to classify new forms and words with
those already known, ascertaining their meaning either
by word analysis or from the context.
3. Repeat the process again and again, if need be,
before referring to the vocabularies.
4. Arrive at the thought in the order of the Greek
words, and translate according to the sense of the author
into idiomatic English.
5. Exercises in rapid oral and written translations
must be repeated until the pupil thoroughly grasps the
form of the Greek sentence, and at once comprehends
the thought.
98. 1. In translating English into Greek, seek first
the thought to be put into Greek.
2. Compose the entire thought or sentence aloud in
the form of a Greek model, and then commit to memory.
99. Elision. A final short vowel may be dropped
ESSENTIALS FOR READING. 41
when the next word begins with a vowel. This is
called elision. An apostrophe ( ' ) marks the elision :
6 8' '^v for 6 Se '^v. .
a. Elision is most common in prepositions, conjunctions, ad-
verbs, pronouns, and other short common words.
b. Oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent
with the elided vowel ; other oxytone words throw it back on
the penult : eirr rjaav (eTrra).
100. V movable, v may be added to most words
ending in -crt (including -ft and -\\fi), to all verbs in the
third person singular in -e, and to ecrrt, when the next
word begins with a vowel. This is called v movable.
It may also be added at the end of a sentence : e. g.
ixivovaiv iv SoXots ; ctti rat? Ovpai^ fxevovcTLP,
loi. Proclitics, The proclitics are words of one
syllable that attach themselves so closely to the follow-
ing word as not to have a separate accent, and are
pronounced as if a part of the following word : 6, eV,
e/c, et9, et, w?, ov.
102. Enclitics, The enclitics are words of one or
more syllables, that attach themselves so closely to the
preceding word as to lose their own accent, and are pro-
nounced as a part of the preceding word : aya66<; ecrrt
(dya^d? — icTTi),
103. 1. The enclitic loses its accent, except a dis-
syllabic enclitic after a paroxytone : afta ecrrt.
2. A word before an enclitic always preserves its
own accent, and never changes an acute to the grave :
ayad6<; iaTL.
42 THE beginner's greek book.
3. If it is pro-paroxytone or -perispomenon, it adds
an acute to the ultima : dvOpcoiro^ icri ; hrj\6v e'crrt.
4. If proclitic, it takes an acute : ex /xou ; ovtb
(ov ~\- re).
104. Enclitics retain their accents :
1. Whenever special emphasis falls upon them : ov
/ 1
crot.
2. When the preceding syllable is elided : /caXos 8'
eaTL ; ocjp ecrriv.
3. ecrrt has the recessive accent, ecrri, at the begin-
ning of a sentence, when it signifies existence or possi-
bility, and after certain words, as, ovk^ fxij, el, w?, /cat,
dXXa ; ^ ecrrt cro(f>os avO pcx)Tro<; ; ovk ecmv dvOpcjiro^.
105. EXERCISES.
1. Kvpo<; e\ei <j)vXaKd<;. 2. Kvpco^ ecrrt (f)vXaK7].
3. e^et KXeap^o? cTTparov. 4. '^v KXeap^w (TTpaTo^.
5. Kv/ao) paaikeia rjv. 6. 'ApLcrmnro^ Se 6 ©erraXo?
fei^o? ^i^ Kupw. 7. e^' fJiecro) tov irapaheiaov elal at
Tou TTOTajJiov TTTjyai. 8. ai 8e Trrj-yal at rou iroTap^ov
elcTLv iK TO)v ySao-tXetwj/.. 9. 'i^i/ Kvpw TrdXe/xog 7rpo9
{a(/ainst) ^KpTa^ip^rjv. 10. Treiderai re koX cruXXa/x,-
jBoiveL Kvpov. 11. ecTTt 8e /cat ^Apra^ep^ov ^acrtXeta
ez^ KeXati^at?. 12. ou /xeV etcrti' KXectp^w cru/^/xa^ot,
rail/ 8e irokefjiiaiv cru/x/xa^ot ctcrt fivpLOL.
Examine tlie datives in 2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and observe that
they are used with a copulative verb and denote the possessor.*
1 This will be explained later (392).
2 After these words ela-L retains its accent.
8 In the order of words, " To Cyrus is a garrison ; " iu English,
" Cyrus has a garrison."
^ exa does not necessarily denote possession.
essentials for reading. 43
Rule.
106. The dative with the verb to he (ei/^t, yiyvo\LCki)
and similar verbs may denote the possessor.
107. Translate at sight :
The Palaces of Cyrus and Artaxerxes.
'EpT€v9ev i^ekavvei 8ta ^pvyCci^ crraOixov irapa-
crdyya<; oktcj els KoXocrcrct?. 'E^raO^a /xeVei rjfjiepas
eTTToi' Kol 7JK€. M.iv(x}v 6 ©erraXo? oTrXtrag i^ojv {hav-
in(/) yikiovs kol TreXracrTa? TrevraKoaiov^^ *O\vv0iov<^.
^EvTevdep i^ekavvei crraO^JLom Trivre Trapacrdyya'S et-
KOQ-L KOL TTcWe ct? KcXatj^ct?. 'EpTavda Kvpco ySacrt-
Xeta '^v KOL 7rapdSeLcro<;. Ata fieaov Se tov irapaheiaov
pel {Jloivs) 6 MauapS pos Trora/^o? * at Se 7rr)yai avTov
(it) elcTLv eK tcov f^acrikeicov ' pel Se kol Slol KeXati/oji/.
^Ecrrt 8e kol 'Apra^ep^ov /BacriXeia ev KeXat^ai? eVl
rat9 TrrjyoLS tov Mapcrvov iroTafiov.
Note the position of rjKe, e^cDv, K.vpq), irapaheicrov^ irora-
fjLo^^ 'K7]^ai^ and compare with 55, ay h. See foot-note, p. 27.
108. Translate into Greek :
In Celaenae Cyrus had a palace and a park. Put
through the middle of the park flows the Maeander
river; and it flows also through Celaenae. And Arta-
xerxes also "had a palace in Celaenae.
log. VOCABULARY.
/SacrtXcto?, -o^', royal; pecros, -rj, -ov,. middle ;
^aaiketovy to, or /8acri- pecrov, to, the middle
Xeta, Td, jjalace, [Meso-potamia].
44 THE beginner's greek book.
fjLvpL0<;, -a, -OP, countless TroXejjLos, 6, tvar.
[myriad]. irokefjuos, -d, -ov, hostile
fjivpioL, -at, -a, ten thousand, [polemic].
^ivof;, b, guest-friend; guest, ol TTokefjuoL, the enemy,
TTapdSeLcro^, 6, park [par- cruX-Xa/xySai^o)/ seize, arrest
adise] . [syllable] .
inqyTj^-yj^;, fountain, source.
Se, post-posit, conj., but ; sometimes rendered and ; kol
. . . §€ or Se . . . Kai, and also ; /cat here has the
force of also,
Ijl4v, post-posit, adv., on the one hand, indeed, truly, hut ;
usually not translated; regularly with correlative 8e:
pkv . . . 8e, on the one hand . . . on the other, but
usually rendered only by emphasis.
re, post-posit, end. conj., and; Lat., -que; re . . . /cat
or re /cat, both . . . and.
LESSON XIII.
IMPERFECT OF Xvw. PRESENT INFINITIVE
ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.
Review Lesson VI. Note especially 19, 20, 22, 23,
25, 27, Obs.; 30, 31, 32.
no. In Greek, as in Latin, the tenses (1-6, b) are
divided into primary and secondary. The secondary
tenses refer to past time; all others are primary.
1 For (Tvv- (194, 4).
IMPERFECT TENSE.
45
Paradigms.
Imperfect,
Infinitive,
Active.
Middle.
Passive.
Active.
eXvop
eXves
lXv6\ki]v
iXvov
iXvofirji'
Xv^iv
eXve
iXveTov^
iXveT7]v
iXvofiev
iXiere
iXv€TO
iXvecrdov
eXviaOiqv
iXvojJLeda
iXtea-ee
The passive uses
the same form
as the middle.
Middle and
Passive.
XvecrOai
iXvop
iXvovTO
III.
S. 1.
2.
3.
D. 2.
3.
P. 1.
2.
3.
a. Observe that the secondary tenses have special personal
endings; that they use the same thematic vowel (25) as the
primary.
b. Observe that in the second person singular of the middle
a is dropped and oe contracted to ov (27).
112. Aagnient. In the secondary tenses of the in-
dicative the verb receives an augment (increase) as the
sign of past time.
113. The augment is of two forms: syllabic, which
prefixes € to verbs beginning with a consonant; tempo-
ral, which lengthens the initial short vowel of verbs
beginning with a vowel or diphthong. The initial
vowel is lengthened to the corresponding long vowel,
but a or a always becomes 17 : \u&), tXvov ; iOiXo),
TjOeXov ; ayo), rjyov ; alpeco, '^p€ov ; 'qKO), rJKov.
114. The imperfect is formed upon the present stem,
and tlie augment prefixed to this stem transfers the
^ The dual forms may be omitted in all of the subsequent inflections.
46 THE beginner's greek book.
force of the" present to the past. Hence the imperfect
regularly expresses continued past time : eXvov, I was
loosing. It has also a derived meaning, like the present,
of attempted and customary action.
115. The ending of the present infinitive active is
'&;, contracted with the thematic vowel e to -eiv ; that
of the middle and passive is -cr^ai preceded by tlie
regular thematic vowel.
a. The four proper moods, in distinction from the infinitive,
are called ^^^7e moods.
116. Secondary endings of the Indicative,
Active. Middle,
Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural.
1. -V or — -^xev -fxrjv -jxeOa
2. -s 'Tov -T€ -cro -(tOov 'CrOe
3. — -nqv -V or -aav ^ -to -ctOtjv -vto
117. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal
noun, and may take the article in all its cases. It may
at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or object
or adverbial modifiers. It is regularly translated by to
as in English, but it may frequently best be translated
by a verbal noun.
Examine the following :
1. XP^'^ IkavveiVy it is necessary to march,
2. TTopevea-Oai ovk rjv, it loas not possible to proceed,
3. KoX 6 (raTpdTT7]<; tov<; crrpartoira? ^vkdrTCiv K€r
Xevet, and the satrap commands the soldiers to guard,
^ Endinf^ of the pluperfect and aorist passive ind.
2 What is the subject of x9'ni W > object of KeXevei, etc. ? See 10, n.
IMPERFECT TENSE. 47
4. Kvpo<; ideXet ^aaikeveiVy Cyrus desires to he king.
5. (1) rjpx^To Xeyeuvj he began to speak.
(2) yjpx^ro tov Sia^aiveLv, he began the crossing,
6. LKavol rjcrav Trjv yecjyvpap ^vKoltt^iv, they ivere
able to guard the bridge.
7. Kupo? r^v dpx^iy a^iosy Cyrus was worthy to
reign.
8. ovx ^pct icTTl Xeyeip,^ it is not a time to speak.
a. Observe that in 1, 2, the infinitive is the subject.
h. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, (1), (2), the infinitives are the
objects of verbs expressing wish, command, ability, beginning,
etc.; that the subject of the infinitive is in the accusative; that
the subject is not expressed if it is the same as the subject or
object of the leading verb.
c. Observe that in 6, 7, 8, the infinitives depend upon adjec-
tives and substantives denoting ability, fitness, etc.
Rule.
Ii8. As subject nominative, the infinitive is used
chiefly with impersonal verbs like XP^? «^ ^^ necessary,
etc., or with eVrt.
Rule.
119. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with
verbs whose action implies another action as its object,
especially those expressing wish, command, beginning,
poiver, ability y fitness, etc.
Rule.
120. The infinitive may depend upon adjectives or
^ Xey€ti> may be regarded also as subject.
48 THE beginner's greek book.
substantives similar in meaning to verbs which take an
object infinitive, especially those denoting ability, fitness^
and willingness.
Rule.
121. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative.
'But the subject of the infinitive is regularly omitted if
it is the same as the subject or object {direct, indirect,
or genitive) of the leading verb.
122. EXERCISES.
I. 1. iXavveiv ovk rjv. 2. ^p^ TTopevecrdai.
3. dvdyKr) earl XiyecrO ai, 4. rjOeke TreWeaO ai.
5. LKavoi rjcrav ra? yec^upa? StafiaiveLv. 6. ov)(^ ^pa
ecrrt iropevecrd ai. 7. al dfia^au i(f)€popTO Sia tcov
TToXefJiLCov. 8. KeXeveL tov<; aTpaTTjyov^ \4yeLv to2<;
(TTpaTLCoTaLS' 9. Trjv 'EWrjvLKrjv o-rparidv rjOpoit^ev.
10. ecTTiv dvdpcoTTO^ dyaOo^. 11. ovk ecttl Xveiv rrjv
yi^vpav. 12. ol ^dpfiapOL rd aKpa ec^vXarrov,
13. rd Orjpia Kvpos eOripevev dno lttttov. 14. inl rfj
Td(f)p(p OVK iKctikve ^ 'ApTa^ep^7]<; ttjv Kvpov orrpaTidv
XL 1. He began to cross. 2. It is possible to
guard the wagons. 3. It is necessary to destroy the
bridge. 4. The bowmen pursued the wild beasts.
5. He commanded Clearchus to come. 6. The generals
are worthy to rule. 7. They were leading the generals
into the tent. 8. You do not desire to obey. 9. The
hoplites were mustering in the plain of Castolus.
10. The satrap commanded the soldiers to guard their
tents.
^ Attempted action.
REVIEW.
49
123.
VOCABULARY.
aKpo^, -d, 'Ov, topmoBt ; tcl apyo), begin, command, rule
cLKpa, the heights [edge, [arch-angel, archi-tect].
acme].
avdyKT], -rj<;,/orce, necessity ;
oLvdyKT) icTTL, it is neces-
sary, one must.
^dp/3apo<;, -ov, barbarian ;
Sia-^aLvo), cross; ace.
Slcoko), pursue.
iOeXco, desire, wish.
6r)peva)y hunt, chase, catch
{ffyjpd, a hunt)*
^dp/3apo^, 6, a barbarian. Kekevco, command, bid, urge.
Oiqpiovy wild animal.
lKav6<;, -T], -OP, sufficient,
able.
Td^po<^, rj, ditch, trench.
<^pd, -d?, time, season^prop-
er time [hour].
ddpoL^o), collect, assemble;
mid., muster.
kojXvco, hinder, oppose, pre-
vent.
(j)v\dTT(o, guard [phylac-
tery].
XP"^-) iinpers., it is needful,
it is necessary.
diroy prep. w. gen., from,
away from [apo-logy].
LESSON XIV.
REVIEW.
Review each of the preceding lessons in order, with
Iheir vocabularies.
124. The Alphabet}
1. Give the long and short vowels.
2. Give the proper and improper diphthongs.
^ The following questions are intended to aid the pupil to classify and
correlate the matter of the preceding lessons.
4
50 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
3. Give the souikIs of the consonants.
4. Give the double consonants.
125. Syllabication and Accentuation.
1. How are simple and compound words divided
into syllables ?
2. When are syllables long by nature ?
3. Classify the syllables according to their accent.
4. Give the general rules for accent.
5. Give the rule for the accent of nouns.
6. Give the rule for the accent of oxytone words of
the vowel declensions.
126. I. Substantives of the Vowel Declensions.
1. Define natural and grammatical gender.
2. Of what genders are nouns of the first and second
declensions ?
3. Decline the article. Give its different uses.
4. Decline and divide into syllables : ^ (rKr)vT], ireipa,
ddkarra, TreXraaTTJ^;.
5. How do the feminine nouns of the first declension
compare with the feminine article ?
6. How do the masculines of the first declension
differ from the feminines ?
7. Decline ayyeXo?, crrpaTo^, ireBiov, lttttos,
8. How do the masculine and neuter forms of the
second declension compare with the corresponding forms
of the article.
9. What three cases are alike in the neuter ?
. 1 These words are given as examples ; others also should be added.
REVIEW. 51
II. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension.
1. How do the adjectives of the vowel declension
compare with the nouns of the vowel declension ?
2. What peculiarity of accent in the feminine plural
of the adjectives in -os ?
3. Decline <^tXto9, UTevo'i, dnopof;, dKpo<;.
127. Transliteration.
1. In transliteration how are the consonants rep-
resented ?
2. Give the changes of the vowels and diphthongs.
128. Essentials for Translating,
1. What are the three requisites for rapid trans-
lation ?
2. How is the thought of an author best understood ?
3. Why does not the subject always come first and
the verb last ?
129. Verbs.
1. Define the theme and tense stem.
2. Give the rule for the thematic vowel, for the
accent of verbs.
3. Define primary and secondary tenses.
4. Define the active, middle, and passive voices.
5. Give the primary and secondary endings, active
and middle.
6. Conjugate fceXeuw in the present indicative active
and middle.
a. Explain the forms KeXevei and Kekevovat.
7. Conjugate Tropevoj and (fyaLPco in the imperfect
active and middle, and translate.
52 THE beginner's greek book.
a. How is the imperfect formed from the present stem ?
b. How do the middle forms differ from the active ?
130. Proclitics and Enclitics,
1. Name several proclitics and enclitics.
2. When is the accent of enclitics retained ?
3. When does eVri become ecm ?
4. When is -v movable attached to the end of a word ?
131. Syntax,
1. Give the rules for the case of the subject, object,
indirect object, and the agreement of the verb.
2. What are the positions of the direct and indirect
objects ?
3 Define the attributive and predicate positions.
4. Give the rule for the agreement of adjectives.
5. Distinguish between the appositive and predicate
nouns. Give examples in Greek and in English.
6. What verbs take the dative of possessor ? Give
an example in Greek.
7. Give the rule for the subject of the infinitive.
8. Give the uses of the infinitive in the preceding
lessons.
132. EXERCISES.
I. 1. Name from the preceding vocabularies words
allied to o-rpard?. 2. Give the English forms for :
Botwrta, 'Aptato?, Aapetog, ^E(^e<T09, Macr/cd«?, Hepcrrjs,
HvXat, SvpCa, ^aXay^, Tvpiaiov.
II. 1. KcoXveiy KcokveraL, i(j)vXaTTOv, i(f)v\dTTOVTO,
oip-^ei, apteral, r]p)(0Vy rjpxovTO. 2. ol XoxoLyoi iirL
rais 6vpaL<; p.ivovcnv, 3. ipTavOa /xeVet Kvpo<; /cai
^ FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 53
r) crrpaTia rjfji€pa<; eiKocriv, 4. ol arpanqyol eXeyov
Tov \6yov 7019 crTpaTLcoTaL<;. 5. 6 aaTpd7rr]<^ eTrefXTre
Tov<; arpaTLCora^ Ik ttJs Kcofxtj^;. 6. tol Be oirXa tol tcov
ottXltiov yjyeTO eVi roii/ dpia^aiv, 7. ol ^dp^apoi dv-
OpcDTTOL iv Se^id Tjaav, 8. Tipo^evov 8e tov ^okxttiov
iKeXeve TropevecrOaL. 9. ovk '^v elaQdWeiv {invade)
els Tj)v KtXt/ctW, el (if) 6 aaTpdirrj^ iKcokvev, 10.
Upo^evo^; Se 6 Boiwrios ^eVo9 17^' Kupw. 11. evrevOev
e^eXavvei crraOfjiovs hvo irapacrdyyas irevreKaiheKa ets
'Icrcrou? ' evravOa e/xeve rjixepas irevTe,
III. 1. The satrap was deliberating. 2. The army
appears in the plain. 3. The generals were proceeding
through a friendly country. 4. He was leading his
army to the Euphrates river. 5. But Proxenus was a
guest friend of Cyrus. 6. The captains were remain-
ing at the doors. 7. Cyrus commanded the generals
to lead hoplites about ^ his tent.
LESSON XV.
FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS.
Review 99^, 111, 112, 113.
133. A simple word is formed from a single stem :
o-TpaTo^; ; a compound word is formed by combining
two or more stems : crTpaTiqyos [crr/oaro? + ayw.]
134. Elision generally occurs in the formation of
compound wo.rds, but here without the apostrophe:
TTfpt
I with ace.
54 THE beginner's greek book.
TToip-ohos (for irapd + 6S05) ; oLTrdyo) [oltto + dyco), lead
hack,
135. The augment of a compound verb is prefixed
to the verb-theme after the preposition. Here the final
vowel of the preposition is elided before the augment ;
but irepi and irpo retain the final vowel ; irpo may be
contracted with the augment e to ov. Karifiaivov
i^Kar Or ^aiv (a), descend ; TrpovSeScoKecrav (7r/)o-8iSa)/xt),
f^ive over,
136. In composition, prepositions being regarded
as prefixes lose their accent, hence compounds are
generally accented like simple words ; but in compound
verbs the accent never goes farther back than the aug-
ment : dirr^yov (cxTrd + riyov).
127* Prepositions, according to their original use,
are adverbs of place ; they are prefixed to the different
cases to define more definitely the sense in which they
are used.
138. Fandamefital Uses of the Oblique Cases.
1. The genitive embraces both the use of the gen-
itive proper, — that to which anything belongs, — and
the ablative use, — that from which anything proceeds.
2. The dative embraces both the idea of the dative
proper, — that which is indirectly affected by the action
of the verb {^Q), — and the ablative use of location,
time, and instrument.
3. The accusative embraces the relations of motion
toward or extension over, and that of the object, —
that on which the action expressed by the verb is
exerted (38).
k FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 55
139. Prepositions with Oblique Cases,
1. With the genitive the prepositions in general de-
■ line its ablative use, from a place ; tov olkov, may mean
of, from, on, than, some of the house, but with Ik be-
fore it, Ik tov olkov must mean out of the house,
jk, 2. With the dative the prepositions denote certain
ablative uses, rest at, time, in company ivith : iv ry
aKr)vfj, in the tent ; avv rw d8eX</)w, ivith his brother,
3. With the accusative the prepositions denote its
generic use of motion toward, extension over : €19 ras
Kw/xa? ikavvei^ he marches into the villages.
140. Examine the following: —
1. aTTo T179 «-PX'^^ /3aLV€L, he goes from his province,
2. e/c Trj<; K(x)ixrj<^ iXavpei, he inarches out of the
village.
3. eV T77 cTKiQvrj fxeveiy he remains in his tent.
4. /caret TOV aKpov €Tp€)(ov, they loere running down
from the summit,
5. /cara tov \6^ov hpeyov^ they ivere running doion
the hill.
6. 6 ayyeXo? 7ra/>a Yjvpov '^k€1', the messenger came
from the presence of Cyrus.
7. 6 ayyeXo? TTapa Kvpco /xeVei, the messenger re*
mains in the presence of Cyrus,
8. 6 ayyeXo? Trapa Upo^evov rJK€v, the messenger
came to Proxerms.
9. r)<jav fcw/xat vrapa tov 'Ev(f)pdTr)v noTafJiov, there
were villages along the Euphrates river,
10. €(^' ^ LTTTTov SicoKovcTLv, they pursuc on horseback,
1 Por fVi. TT becomes (^ before a rough breathing (194, 1, d).
56 THE beginner's greek book.
11. ecTTL ySacrtXeta eV KeXaivals eVl rat? 7T'r]yal<; rov
iroTajxov, there is a palace in Celaenae at the sources of
the river,
12. iTTi Tov TTOTafjLov €^eXavv€L, hc marches forth to
the hanks of the river,
a. Observe that in 1, 2, 3^ the case takes a preposition
whose root meaning is kindred to its own ; et? cannot be used
with the gen., or kic with the ace.
h. Observe that KaTa^ down, 4, 5, is used with the gen. and
ace. Its meaning precludes its use with the dative.
c. Observe that irapd, beside, and eVt, ujoon, are used with
gen._, dat., and ace.
Rule.
141. Prepositions denoting motion from are used
only with the genitive ; in company with, rest at, only
with the dative ; motion to2vard,ou\y w'ith the accusative.
A preposition whose root idea does not contradict the
fundamental idea of any of the cases may be used with
any of them.
142. Metaphoric Use of Prepositions.
The prepositions have certain metaphoric or derived
meanings, as time, cause, means, etc., which can best
be learned from observation, but they all depend upon
the fundamental meaning of the prepositions. The
following derived meanings may be examined.
1. eVi, upon, hence also, in, at, in addition to, on ac-
count of
2. 7Tp6, before, hence also, in preference to, in be-
half of,
3. Stct, through, hence also, by means of by reason of
FUNDAMENTAL USES OF PREPOSITIONS. 57
4. TTapd, besidey hence also, in comparison with, con-
trary to, beyond, alony, daring.
5. 77/309, in front of, hence also, by, at, to, off, in ad-
dition to, in consequence of with reference to,
143. Compound Verbs.
Prepositions ^ in composition with verbs are used to
define more definitely the action of the verb. Thus,
^aivoi, I go, with ava {up) prefixed, means, / go up ;
with /caret, I go doion ; with cac, I go out ; with et?, /
go into, etc.
144. Sometimes the preposition retains its force in
defining the relation of the case to the verb, and is
followed by its own construction : oLTTocnrdo} tov Trora-
fjiov, I withdraw from the river. In this form the prepo-
sition, or one of similar meaning, may be repeated :
aTTOcTTraw aTTo tov iroTafjiov. In this way the relation
of the prepositions to their cases probably arose.
145. EXERCISES.
1 . vnep yap Trj<; K(ofji7]<; kocj^os rjv. 2. ol §€ crrpa-
TLcoTai Kvpo) eTTeWovTo. 3. /cat arparrjyoX iiricTTevov
Kvpcp. 4. ol crrpaTLcoTaL e^akeiraivov toZ^ crrpariqyol^.
5. 6 'Opoz^ra? eVe/SovXeve Kvpcx). 6. /cat eVt to oLKpov
dva^aivei Xetptcroc^o?. 7. 6 he KOpo? 'ApKrTLTnra) crvpr
fiovXeveTaL. 8. (rvfi^ovXevo) crw^eaOai KXeap^w. 9.
(TweTrefXTTe ttj KiXio-crr) tov^ cTTpaTLcoTa^;. 10. inefiTre
TOV ayyeXov napd tov<; crTpaTr)yov<;. 11. ifxevov iv
rat? /cw/xat? rat? virep tov ttcBlov, 12. ttjp Td(f>pov
^ Originally written as sej)arate words.
58 THE beginner's greek book.
ovK iK(o\v€ Tov Kvpov (TTpaTov SLa/3aLPeLv. 13. Tov<;
Examine the datives in 2, 3, 4^ and observe that they are the
indirect objects (66) of intransitive verbs, which, in English, are
generally translated with a direct object.
146. Dative with Special Verbs}
The dative of indirect object is used with verbs sig-
nifying to benefit, please, serve, trust, obey, befit^ aid,
satisfy^ advise, ewhort, or their opposites ; and v^^ith
those denoting friendliness, hostility, envy, favor, anger,
threats, etc. ; also with those of yielding, belonging^ and
seeming.
Examine the datives in 5, 7, 8, 9, and observe that they
depend upon compound verbs.
Rule.
147. The dative is used with many verbs com-
pounded with eV, cvv, eVt; and some compounded
with TT/oog, rrapd, irepL, and vtto.
148. EXERCISES.
1. And Cyrus kept remitting the tributes to Arta-
xerxes. 2. The soldiers obeyed, for they trusted
Cyrus. 3. Clearchus is consulting with Cyrus. 4. He
advised Clearchus to lead. 5. The soldiers were angry
with Clearchus. 6. And he marches forth through
Lydia to the river Maeander. 7. He was plotting
against the army with Clearchus. 8. I advise the
hoplites to cross the river.
^ Give corresponding rule in Latin, cf. p. 19^.
CONTRACT VERBS.
59
149.
VOCABULARY.
\6(f)o<;, 6, /lill, height,
ava-^aivo), go up, go inland.
i7rL-/3ovXevcoj to plan or plot
against,
7TL(rT€vco, trust, believe, dat.
crvfx-fiovXevcjy^ advise, plan
with ; mid. corifer with,
deliberate.
cru/x-Tre/iTTw/ send tvith,
(T(o[,a}, save, rescue; mid.
save one's ^^^[sozo-dont].
XoXeiTaivo), be angry ; pass.
be offended,
Kara, prep. w. gen., ace,
down [cata-strophe].
ixerd, prep. w. gen., with, in
company with; w. ace,
after, next,
irapd, prep.[^m<^^]w. gen.,
from the side of, from;
w. dat., by the side of, at,
on, with; w. ace, to the
side of, to, contrary to,
along, [par-ody].
virep, prep. w. gen., over,
above, in behalf of; w.
ace, over, beyond [hyper-
bole].
yap, post-posit, conj., for.
LESSON XVI.
CONTRACT VERBS IN THE INDICATIVE
AND INFINITIVE.
Review 28, 110, 111, a,b', 112, 113, 114, 115, 116.
150. Contraction of Fowels, When an open vowel
is followed by a vowel or a diphthong in the same
word, the successive vowels are regularly contracted
into a single long vowel or diphthong : Tifxdcop, rificov;
fJLvdai, jxpal; TToke'L TrdXet.
^ For a-vv; lO'i, 4>.
60 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
151. Two Foivels.
1. An open and a close vowel form a diphthong
(IV.) : /SacrtXet, ySacrtXet, irokei, TrdXet, oto/xat, oto/xai.
2. Two vowels of a like sound unite to form the com-
mon long. But €€ gives ei, and 00 gives ov. Thus,
/xi^aa, fjiva ; 817X00;, St^Xw ; TTOLerjTov, iroirjTOv \ but,
ST^Xdo/xat, SrjXovfiai ; Troiierov, iroielTov.
3. An o sound (o or w) unites with a, e, or rj, to
form 0). But eo and oe give ov. Thus, Tlfidco, rl^oi ;
TTOteo), TTOtw ; ST^XoTyroz^, Sr]Xa>TOP ; but, Troieo/xe^', ttoi-
ovfxev ; jiLcrOoeTov, jjucOovtov.
4. When a or e (e or 7;) sounds come together, the
first in order prevails and gives d or 17. Thus, rl^deTov,
TLfxaTOv ; rlfJidrjTOVj TlfxaTov ; -^pvcrea, )(^pvcrrj \ yia, yrj-
152. Voivel and Biphtliong,
A simple vowel before a diphthong is generally
contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong, and
the second disappears, unless it can be retained as i
subscript, a, 17, <w. Thus, rtjuaet?, rtjita? ; rlfidovai,
rlfJicocTi ; Tlfjuar), rlfxa ; rlfxaoLfjiL, rljJicpfjLL ; TToiiovcrij
TTOLovcTL. But a simpIc vowel disappears by absorption
before a diphthong beginning with the 5<2^;^^ vowel,^
and € is absorbed before oi : Troteet?, Trotel? ; St^Xooixti,
ST^XoGo't ; fjivdai, [jlvol ; i^dot, i^ot ; TToteoi/it; TTOLolfiL
(see further 165).
«. In the second person singular of the middle and passive
eai (for eaai) gives et, as well as the regular contract form in 7).
b. In verbs, oet and 077 give 01 : S?7\oet9, hrfkobi ; SrjXoTj,
^ Often only an application of the former.
CONTRACT VERBS. 61
SrjXol ; and the spurious diphthong ^ ei is contracted like simple
€ : TlfJideiv^ TL/Jidv ; SrjXoetP, SrjXovv.
153. Accent of Contracted Syllables.
If either of the contracted syllables had an accent,
the contracted syllable is accented. If the contracted
syllable is penult or antepenult, the kind of accent is
determined by the general rules (X., XL, XII.). If
the contracted syllable is an ultima, it is circumflexed ;
but if the original word was oxytone, the acute is
retained.
154. Write the present and imperfect indicative,
and the present infinitive, active and middle, of the
following verbs in the uncontracted forms, and then
contract and accent ^ (843, 844, 845):
Present Active. Present Middle.
1. Ind., Sing, rl/xaw, rt/xw rl/xao/xat, rt/xoijLtat
rt/xaet9, ri/xa? TljJLoir}, rlfxa
K, r. X.^ /c. T. X.
Inf. rlfideLV;, rlfiav rl/xotecr^at, TlfiaaO ai
2. Ind., Sing. TroLeco, ttolw Troteo/xat, Troiov/xat
7roLe€L<;, Troieis ttoUtj, ttoltJ
K. T. X. K. T. X.
Inf. TTOieeiv, TTOieiv TTOilecrOai, TroieZcrOai
3. Ind., Sing. St^Xow, St^Xw ST^Xdo/xat, h-qkov^ai
■ 8T7Xo€t9, 817X019 817X017, 877X04
K, r. X. /c. T. X.
^ Generally arising from contraction, Xveei', \vclv (115).
* See 73. ^ ««! to Xoittci. and the rest.
62 THE beginner's greek book.
155. 1- As in 154 inflect: fiodo), vlKaoi, doKeco,
fjLLcrdoa).
156. EXERCISES.
I. Give the uncontracted forms of the following
verbs, and the rules applicable to their contraction and
accentuation :
I. viKco, 6pa9, y8oa. 2. So/cetre, opajfjuev. 3. ivuKcoi^,
eKokovv, eKokeiTO, Ivlkcovto. 4. vLKare, So/cel, irifjia,
CTTOtet, SrjXol. 5. Tiyio>^aiy TTOLOVfJuai, Sr]\ovfJiai. 6.
TLfJiav, TTOieiv, Sr)Xovv, vlkolv, 7. TLfiacrOaL, SoKeiaOaL,
fjucrdovaOai,
II. Give the contracted forms for the following :
1. You are honoring. He is honoring. They are hon-
oring. 2. I was making. He was making. We
w^ere making. 3. We were showing. They were
showing. 4. He is conquering. They are shouting.
You are calling. 5. They desire to see. He desired
to see. 6. He honors the Persian. 7. The hoplites
conquer the barbarians.
157. EXERCISES.
1. ol (TTpaTLcoTai T(p K\edp)((o iireiOovTO. 2. ttj
voTTepaia^ Kvpo<; inopevero, 3. Kvpo<;ydpTovIlepa-r)v
Si evvoiav iTijLa. 4. 6 TTOTa/JLO'? Kakeirai Mapcrva^.'^
5. ۤ17X01; Se TOP (j)6^ov Tjj TTpcoTrj. 6. TToKefxeiv
LKavol rjaav. 7. Kvpo? iTreiparo vlkolv. 8. iirei 8*
ehoKU Kvpcp 7Top€vecr9 ai, KXeapxov eKokei. 9. /cat
7019 orrpartwrats i^oa on ' ApTa^€p^r]<^ crvv arparia
TTopeverai. 10. evrevSev iTreipoivTO elcr/SoiXXeLv et?^ rrjv
KiXuKLav' rj Se ela^oXr] rjv 6869 afxa^LTo^ (rrevrj,
1 Sc. fniia. 2 See 84. « See 132, II, 9 ; 144.
CONTRACT VERBS.
63
Rule.
158. The dative vvitlioiit a preposition is used to de-
note the definite time when an action takes place.
159. EXERCISES.
1. For on the following day -he was making the
battle. 2. Bat Clearchus called Proxenus and deliber-
ated. 3. It seemed best to the generals to proceed
into the villages. 4. Cyrus conquers the barbarians
before Artaxerxes. 5. And he shouted to Clearclius to
lead his army against (upon) the enemy.
160. VOCABULARY.
el(T^o\ri,-ri^y entrance, pass, opdo), see, perceive [pan-
evvoia,^ -a?, fidelity, orama ].
vcrepaio^, -a, -ov, following, Treipdco, try, test (Tretpa),
(l)6fio<;, 6, fear, dread [hy- [pirate] .
dro-phobia], iroiioi^do^maJce^effect [poet,
^odoiy shouts cry out, poem],
St^Xow, make clear, show irokeixico.war.^nakeov carry
(81^X09). on loar (tt-oXc/xo?). Cf.
So/cea>, seem, seem best or 109.
yood, think [dogma^. Tlixdco, value, honor {rLfiT]).
eicr- /SdXXo), enter, invade; Trpo, prep., w. gen. only, /5^-
of rivers, empty, fore, in behalf of [pro-
Kokicx), call, summon [ec- phet].
% clesiastic]. eVet, conj., when, since,
vlKda),conguer,surpass{pLKrj, on, conj., thaty because
victory), (Lat. quod).
^ Observe that the final a is short. Abstracts in -eia and -ota, from
adjectives in -r^s and -00s, have final a short, cf. 42, b.
64 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
LESSON XVII.
auro9. — CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES
OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION.
Review 9, 10, 41, 48, 58, 59, Gl, 83 ; Lesson XVI.,
noting 150; 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 152; 153.
i6i. Decline the article 6 [to],
162. Decline avTos ^ [avro] , self, with the endings
of the article (9) :
avro9, avnj, avro,
avTovy avTTJs, avTov,
K, T. X.
163. Decline dX\o<;^ [aWo], other ^ another , with
the endings of the article (9) :
aXko<i, aWrj, aWo
K. T. X.
164. 1. auro?, not in attributive position, in all of
its cases may be an intensive adjective pronoun, himself,
herself itself. (Lat., ipse.)
2. In the attributive position it has the meaning the
same. (Lat., idem.)
8. In oblique cases standing alone it has the force of
a personal pronoun of the third person, him, her, it.
(Lat., is.)
165. In contracts of the first and second declensions
a short vowel before a or before a long vowel or diph-
1 See 820. 2 gee avT6s (820).
■ CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 65
thong is absorbed, except in the singular of the first
declension, where ed is regularly contracted to rj, but
after a vowel or p to a.
166. The accent of the contracted forms of the first
and second declensions is regular, except the dual of the
second declension, which contracts eiw and oco into co.
167. Compounds in -oo<; retain the accent on the
same syllable as the uncontracted nom. sing. : evpoo^,
evvov^.
168. Contract adjectives in -eo^ circumflex the last
syllable in all forms, except the nom. dual of the second
declension, which is oxytone (166).
169. Crasis is the contraction of a vowel or diph-
thong at the end of a word with one at the beginning
of the following word. A coronis (') is placed over the
contracted syllable. The first of the two words is
generally an article or a relative (o or d), /cat or irpo :
01 dSe\(j)OL, dSe\(j)OL ; to avTo, ravTO ; 6 e/c, ovk ; kol
dyaOoL, KdyaOoi.
a. A final vowel of the diphthong of the first word is gener-
ally dropped before crasis takes place, and the final vowel and
diphthong of the article is absorbed before a.
h. The diphthong of Kai is absorbed before all vowels and
diphthongs except e and et.
c. The accent of the first word is lost, and that of the second
retained, but the rough breathing of the article or relative takes
the place of the coronis.
170. Write the uncontracted forms of the following
words, and then contract and accent (818).
Q6 THE beginner's greek book.
1. iJiva, mina yrj, earth i^oug, mind
fjLpdd, fxva yea, yrj 1^009, vovs
fjLvdds, /xj^as ye'aSj yrj<; voov, vov
K, T. X. K. T. X. in sing. k. t. X.
2. yjiV(Tov<;^ golden (819)
Xpvcr€o<;, ^pvaov^; ;j(pvcred, XP^^V XP^^^^^> XP^^^^^
K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X.
3. evj'ovs/ ^^^//-<^^<^05^^ [ei' + i^ou?] (819)
evvoo^, €vvov^ evvoovy evvovv
K. T. X. K. T. X,
171. EXERCISES.
1. /cat crvveTToXifjieL Kvpco Trpo<; avTov. 2. Ilpdfei^o?
avTcp <^tXos ^i^. 8. auroJ ol koKol t€ fcaya^oi eui^ot
Tjcrav, 4. TavTOL So/cet roi?
arpaT-qyol'?, 5. ot ^dp^apoi
TTokifxioi Tol^ aXXot9 eiaiv.
6. KavTo^ KXeapx^s VPX^'^^ ^^^'
^aiveiv. 7. ot OTrXtrat 77/36 avrov
'Apra^ep^ov rjcrav. 8. aurol
iireLpcovTO ctti to aKpov dvaj3aL-
veiv. 9. ei/ MtXifrw ra avra
No. i.SrpeTrroV ^ovXevovraL. ^10. €1x01.2 ro 8e
fxicrov ol dXXoi crTparriyoL
11. 'Aptato? TTpocreLX'^ toIs (TrpaTioyrai^ tov vovv.
12. Kvpos CTToXtop/cei MiXt^toz/ /cai /caret yi^i^ /cat /caret
ddXaTTav. 13. Kupos rw oirXiTr) iripLirei ixicrOov irevre
^ Compounds of i/oCs do not contract the nom. and ace. plu. neu., as
fHvoa.
* Imperfect of cxw. Stem a-ex; fixov for ea-ex^v, etxov.
CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 67
fjivas dpyvpiov. 14. at 8e twv Trokeyiioyv neXrai X^^"
/cat '^aap. 15. 6 Se Kvpos tco dpOpcjiro) Swpa Tre/XTret,
Ittttov ^ /cat (TTpeTTTOv ^pvaovv /cat xpeXua.
Examine the datives in 2, 3, 5, and observe that they depend
upon adjectives denoting friendliness, hostility, etc.
172. The dative is used with adjectives kindred in
meaning to verbs that take the dative (146).
a. This includes adjectives, adverbs, and some verbal sub-
stantives.
173. EXERCISES.
1. He called together the rest. 2. After him an-
other spoke. 3. Cyrus was friendly to him. 4. Oron-
tas was sending the same pay. 5. And
he himself desired to go upon the heights.
6. They conquered them both by land
and by sea. 7. The barbarian has a
])lot in mind. 8. Cyrus sends the bow-
men pay, five talents of gold. 9. Cyrus
the brother of Artaxerxes sends the bowmen pay, five
minae of silver.
174. VOCABULARY.
dSeX<^09, 6, brother [Adel- avrd?, -r\^ -d, selfiJjdX. ipse)
phia, Adelphian]. [auto-graph, tauto-logy,
dXkoq, -f], -o, other, another; to aurd].
ol dWoLy the rest, yrj, -rj^;, earth, land [Gre-orge,
dpyvpLov, silver, ge-ographyj.
1 See 92.
68 THE beginner's greek book.
evvov<;, -ovv, well disposed yjivcriovj a piece of gold ^
( eu + vovi), money, gold.
fivoLy -as, mAna, xpeXtov, bracelet (No. 5).
vov%, o, mind. TroXiopKeo), besiege.
crTpe7rT6<;,6,nec/clace(No.4<). 7rpocr-€)(^co^ to hold to, di-
rdXavTov, talent. reel,
yjxkKov'i^ -rj, -ovv, of bronze, crvy^-KaXect), call together,
bronze (^yakK^oi). o-v/x^-TToXe/xew, mahe war
■)(pv(Tov<;, -rj, -ovv, of gold ^ together with, aid in war.
golden.
LESSON XVIII.
THE DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE
PRONOUNS.
Review 9, 10/41, 48, 59, 61, 83.
175. Decline ovto^ (6 + -VT09), this, with the end-
ings of the article (820) :
OVTOS aVTY] TOVTO
TOVTOV TaVTTj^, TOVTOV
K. T. X.
Observe that ovro^ takes ov in the penult wherever the last
syllable has an sound (151, 3) ; otherwise it takes av.
176. Decline oSe (6 + -Se), this., the following , as an
article, and then append the enclitic demonstrative suffix
-8e(820):
•s*^ </0 'Q>
ooe Tjoe Tooe
TovSe TTJaoe rovSe
K. T.X.
1 Por avp-, 194, 4.
DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 69
Observe that 6, being compounded with the enclitic -8e in oBe,
takes the accent in the nom. sing, and plur. (103, 4), and retains
its own throughout the other forms.
177. Decline e/cetj^o?, f/iat, with the endings of the
article (820):
iKelvo<^ eKeivT) iKelvo
eKeivov iKeLvr]<; eKeuvov
K. T. \.
178. Decline 09, who, which, with the endings of the
article, or like aurd? (820) :
ff V V
09 17 O
^ <j> ^
ov ri<; ov
K. T
.X.
Observe that 0? differs from the article in appending 9 to
form the nom. masc. sing., and in taking an accent in its masc.
and fem. nom. forms as a word standing alone ; that in other
forms the relative is made from the article by writing the rougli
breathing C) in place of the initial r. Hence, to inflect the
relative, write the article with the rough breathing in place of 1,
appending -9 to form the nom. sing, masc, and accent all its
forms.
179. When the demonstrative pronoun agrees with
a noun (83), it regularly takes the article and stands in
the predicate position (81) : ovro9 6 dj/dpcoiro^; ; ravTrj's
T179 TrapoSov.
180. 0VT09 and oSe, this, generally refer to Avhat is
near or present ; iKeLvo<;, that, to what is remote.
181. In referring to an object already mentioned,
ouro9 is used ; but in referring to what follows, o*8e.
70 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
182. The article in certain expressions, and especially
before fxev and 8e, retains its demonstrative force : 6 fxep
... 6 Se, t/iis . . . t/iai, the one . . . the other, he . . . the
rest, etc. 6 8e without preceding 6 /xeV frequently
means but he, and he ; in the nominative this always
introduces a new subject.
183. Examine the following : —
1. avjJLTrefjLTTeL avrfj tov<s arparioyra^ ov^ Mevcov €L)(e,
he sent loith her the soldiers which Menon had.
2. Xajji^dveL, ol elaiv aura), rov^ To^oTa^, he takes
the bowmen that he has.
3. €19 ra TrXota ifx^aiPOvcTL a Kvpo<; eTre/xTre, the^
embark on the boats that Cyrus sent.
Observe that the relatives in 1, 2, 3, have the same number
and gender as their antecedents ; that in 1 and 3, ov^ and a are
respectively the objects of el^e and ireyimei, but in 2, oi is the
subject of daiv and takes the verb in the same person as its
antecedent.
Rule.
184. A relative agrees with its antecedent in num-
ber and gender and represents its person, but the case
of the relative depends upon the construction of the
clause in which it stands.
185. Examine the following : —
1. 817X01 OU9 Tt/xa, he shows lohom, he honors.
2. el)(€. ov<; e\eyov, he had ivhom I mentioned.
Observe that in 1, 2, the antecedents are omitted and the
relative 'clause becomes a substantive^ the object of the verb.
demonstrative and relative pronouns. 71
Rule.
186. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted
when it is implied in the context or is indefinite.
187. EXERCISES.
I. 1. ovTOi iiToiovv ovT(o<;. 2. fcavro? eXeye raSe.
3. a \iyov(TLv eKeZvo^ ayyeWei. 4. ot yikv fjuevovcri, ol
Se TTopevovTai, 5. koX 6 fxep ravra Xeyet. 6. tov
avOpcjiTov e^et 09 iirefiovXeve ttj crrpaTia. 7. roJ av~
OpcoTTO) TTLO-TevojjLev 6v Kupo? iirefnTe. 8. /cat /ceXeuei
avTovs Xeyeiv ravra rols crrparKxirai^. 9. ot arparioi-
rai OL re avrov iKeivov, koX ol aXXot rov TTorapuov Ste-
^aivov. 10. ol 8e avrov re e^aXXov /cat ra v7rot;uyia
ra eKeivov. 11. pel he koX ovro<; Sta l^e\aiv<xiv, /cat
ifi/BdWeL els rov MatavSpov irorapLov, 12. ot S'
aXXot inel r^Kov, rovs Tapcrovs StapTra^ouort fcal ravra
ra /SacrtXeta. 13. ot jiev OTrXtrat aurov efjuevov, ol
Se Tofdrat, ot T^o-az^ avrS iv rrj err par La, rjXavvov iirl
rovs arparLcoras eKeivov.
II. 1. And he himself said these things. 2. After
these Proxenus speaks as follows. 3. We destroyed
the wagons which we had. 4. He seizes the boat of
that one. 5. But he commanded and the rest obeyed.
6. The generals report these things to Cyrus. 7. Cy-
rus desires to be king instead of that one. 8. Aris-
tippus sends back the soldiers whom he has. 9. But
on account of this the river is called Marsyas.
72 THE beginner's greek book.
188. VOCABULARY.
iKelvos, that (Lat., ille) ; ap7ra{a>, seize^ plunder
often best translated he, [harpy].
she, it, as emphatic per- 8t-a/)7ra^aj, tear in pieces,
sonal pronoun. lay waste, plunder, rav-
oSc, this, the following, age (Lat., diripio),
OS, who, which, lohat (Lat., /BaXkco, throw, throw at,
qui). hit, hit with stones,
ovTos, this (Lat., hie) ; he, e/x-y8aXXw,^ throw in, injUct^
she, it, as emphatic per- invade ; of rivers, empty.
sonal pronoun. ifi-fiaiva), go into, embark,
vT^oQuyiov, beast of bur- peco, flow [rheum],
den (vTro-l^ijyLov, under olvtl, prep. w. gen., instead
the yoke). of [anti-dote].
dyyeXXo), announce, report avTov, adv., here, in this
(dyyeXo?). place (avrd?).
dir-ayyeWco, bring back ovTcoq, before a consonant
word, report. ovtco, adv., thus, so.
LESSON XIX.
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.^
Review 16, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31,
110, 111, a, b; 112, 113, 114, 115, 116.
189. 1. The consonants are divided first according
to the organs of speech by which they are formed.
1 For eV (194, 4).
* If it should seem desirable to review here from Lesson. XV , review
questions may be found in Lesson XX VL, page 106.
euphony of consonants. 73
Orders.
Smooth, Middle, Rough,
or Surd, or Souaut. or Aspirate.
c Labials, tt /3 <j> fi
Classes. < Liiigiials, r 8 d s, ^, v, p
i Palatals, f< y X
2. The consonants are divided farther according to
the greater or less influence of the organs in their for-
mation into : (a) Semi-vowels, X, /x, v, p, which are
called liquids, and cr, a sibilant ; /x, v, and y-nasal(VI.)
are called nasals ; (d) Mutes, the nine remaining conso-
nants as given above.
3. These nine mutes are divided, according to the
quality of voice in articulation, into smooth, middle, and
rough. Mutes of the same class are called cognate^
since they are formed by the same organs, — lips,
tongue, or palate. Mutes of the same order are called
co-ordinate.
Observe that in the dingram the classes of mutes stand in
parallel lines, and those of the same order in the same column.
igo. The double consonants are formed by the
coalescence of the mutes with the sibilant cr ; i/; from
TTO", f from fccr, ^ from So- (VIII., 2, n.).
igi. A rough consonant is never doubled, but 7r<^,
K\^ T0, are always written instead.
ig2. The only consonants that can end a Greek
word are v, p, and q. The only exceptions are Ik and
ovK, or oux? which have other forms, ef and ov, — cf
74 THE beginner's greek book.
before vowels (46), ovk before smooth, and ovx before
rough vowels (68).
193. Initial p is regularly doubled when by inflec-
tion or composition a simple vowel is brought before it :
pel, eppei, Karappel, flowing down [catarrh].
194. In the formation and inflection of words : ^ —
1. Before a lingual mute, r, 8, 0, a labial or palatal
mute becomes co-ordinate, and another lingual be-
comes cr :
^T and <^T
become 777
yT and x^ become kt
ttS " <|)8
" ^8
kS '' x^
" y8
77(9 " ^e
" <^(9
kO " yd
" X^
yeypaTTTai
for
yeypa^-Tai
inefjLcjyOrjv
iireixTT-Orjp
riraKTai
T€T ay-rat
iXexOiqv
i\€y-0r)v
TreireLo-TaL
TreTreiB-rai
ineLadrjv
i7rei6-0r)v
a. A smooth mute tt, /c, t, brought before a rough breathing
either by elision or in forming a compound word becomes the
cognate rough : e^' Xirirov^ cK^apTrd^o) (Jnro + dpird^o)),
2. Before cr, labial and palatal mutes become smooth,
and 77cr is written \\t, and kct, ^. A lingual mute is
dropped :
ypdxjjo) for ypa(f)-aa) irepxpa) for TrepTr-crco
Xe^o) " Xey-cro) 77€tcra) "' 7rei0-aa)
^ The followmg rules are given here partly for future reference. Note
m this lesson especially 2, 4.
FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 75
3. Before fi (labial) a labial becomes /x, a palatal, y,
and a lingual, o- :
yeypafijJiai for yeypa(^-/>tai
'^py-fjLaL " rip-^-fxaL
ireiTeLcrixaL " 7re7r€t^-/xat
4. V before a labial becomes /x ; before a palatal, y
(nasal) ; before a liquid it is changed to that liquid ;
before o- it is generally dropped and the preceding
vowel is lengthened, a to d, e to et, o to ov :
ifx/SoiXkco for ei^-^SaXXw
(TvyKokio) " crvvKoXeai
\vovcTi " \vov(Ti
195. Future and Aorist Indicative :
Future (826). Aorist (827).
Active. Middle. Active. Middle.
Sing. 1. Xvcroi XvcrofxaL iXvaa iXvaafjLrjv
2. Xvcret9 Xucret, 77 ikvaas eXvcrw (aero, ao)
3. K. T. X. K. T. X. eXucre ikvcraTO
K. T. X. K. T. X.
Infin. \vcreiv XvcrecrOaL Xucrat \vaaa9aL
a. Observe that : 1 . The future differs from the present in
adding a to the theme. 2. The aorist differs from the imperfect
in adding cr to the theme and a instead of %. in all forms except
in the third person sing. ; that it omits v of the first person sing.
3. The aorist active inf. takes the ending -at, and accents the
penult.
76 THE beginner's greek book.
h. Observe that the future and the aorist both have cr, but
the aorist as a secondary tense has an augment in the indicative;
that the second person sing, middle of the future and aorist
drop a and contract (27 ; 151, 3 ; \h%, a).
ig6. The future stem is formed by annexing the
tense suffix -(7%. to the theme. The personal endings
are primary.
197. The first aorist stem is formed by appending
the tense suffix -era to the theme. In the first person
singular v is dropped, and in the third a is changed to e.
As a secondary tense the aorist has augment and sec-
ondary endings in the indicative.
198. Most verbs ending in a short vowel lengthen
this vowel before the tense suffix in all tenses except the
present and imperfect.^ a and e become 17, o becomes
ft), but a after e, t, or p becomes d : Trotew, TroLTJaco,
iTTOLiqaa ; PLKaco, PLKijaa) ; SrjXoo), hrjXcjaoi} ; ireipdu),
TTCtpaCTft).
199. A labial mute at the end of a theme unites
with (T of the tense-suffix of the future or first aorist
and forms t/;, a palatal with this a forms ^, a preceding
lingnal is dropped (194, 2).
200. The theme of some verbs with presents in {,
as dpTrd^co, (tcoIco, end in 8 : dpiraS-, o-ft)8-. In forming
the future and first aorist of these verbs 8 is dropped
before <t: dpTzdcro)^ eacoca, (194, 2).
201. The Future Indicative represents an action that
will take place at a future time : Xvcrco, I shall loose, or
/ shall be loodn(],
1 Except second aorist system (203).
FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE. 77
202. The Aorist Indicative represents the simple oc-
currence of an action in past time, corresponding to the
Historical Perfect in Latin : eXvcra, / loosed.
a. The aorist infinitive not in indirect discourse has the same
time as the present, but differs from it in denoting a single act.
203. Some verbs have a Second Aorist active and
middle formed from the theme of the verb with %. af-
fixed. These tenses in the indicative are inflected like
the imperfect (111): ex^? ^f^? second aorist active,
e(Txov, mid. icrxof^W^ ^ ^^^^ (531). It regularly has
the force of the first aorist (530).
204. Give the future and aorist ind. and inf. act.
and mid. of the following verbs :
1. KcoXvo), KeXevco, Tropevo), Troieoj, fiovXevcj.
2. TTefjLTTO), Keyco, 7T€lO(o, dpTTcii^a).
7re/xi//cu TrejjLxjjoiJLaL eTre/xi/ia iTrefixfjdfjLTjv
K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. K, T. X.
205. EXERCISES.
I. 1. ol TreXracrral TreXra? ecrypv. 2. 6 Yiipcnq^
(TTpeTTTOV XPV^O^^ ^"^X^* ^- ^ Kl}/0O9 TOV dS€X(j)01/
opa. 4. KavTTj i^ihqcrev avTov. 5. avrr] avrov eireLcre.
6. Kvpo^ iff) dfjid^7]<; inopeveTO, 7. atpelrai^ ttoXc-
fjietv 77 po^ XlicrtSa?. 8. crrpaTidv crvveke^ev 0,770 tov-
TOV TOV xP^^'-o^- 9' o^ aXXoi dp^ovTO TTopevecOai,
10. ivTavOa Kvpo<; dpiOpLov tcov crTpaTLO)T(ov iTTOLTjcrev
iv Tw TTapaheiao). 11. ov Tr)v tcov ^ap^dpoiv ^Ckiav
alpTJcrofiaL. 12. irapd T7]v ye(^vpav tov noTafJLOv Trep,-
^ Historical present. The present in narration is frequently used
vividlv for the aorist.
78 THE beginner's greek book.
i//at KeXevovcTL^ ^v\aKrjv. 13. /cat tovtov<; tov^ crrpa-
TtftJra? iKeXevcre avv avT(o arparevecrO ai. 14. koX tov^
crvv K^vpco /Bap/Soipov^ iSioj^a cvv rotcrSe^ rot? orrpa-
TLCoTai*;. 15. ivrevOev i^ekavvei Sta tt^? Aufcdoi^ia?
araOyiovz irevTe Trapaadyyas TpiaKOVTa. ravTrjv Tif}v
^(tipav ^iripTTacTev,
II. 1. The soldiers will lead this man to Clearchus.
2. He will send with her a guard. 3. Bat I will
come at once. 4. And Cyrus summoned him from his
province. 5. The barbarians upon the heights hin-
dered him. 6. He himself took part in an expedition
against these countries. 7. Thej will command the
Persians to destroy the bridge.
206. VOCABULARY.
dpiOpLO^;, o^numberwf/, enu' Hon, make 2var ; mid.,
7neration [arithmetic J. take part in an expedition
oLpxV) -^s, rule, province. (arpaTos).
rpiaKovra, indecl., thirty. a-vk-kiyo), collect {Xeyco,
<f>L\[d, -d?, friends/lip, affec- gather\
tion ((^tXto?), <^i\ea), (fyiXijcro), etc., love
alpect), alpyja-o), etc., take, ((^tXo?).
seize; mid. c/ioose [her- irpo^, prep. w. gen., in
esyj. front of, from ; w. dat.,
/Ltera-Tre/ATro), send for or af- near, at; w. ace, towards,
ter ; mid. summon, to, against [pros-odyj.
(TTpaTeva), make an expedi- evOvs, adv., at once.
^ Explain the use of this tense.
^ Near at hand ; more emphatic than ovtos.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
79
LESSON XX.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
Review IX. 3, a.h.c, X. ; XL N. ; XIL ; XIIL ; 5 ;
6; 7, a, ^,(1), (2), (3); 8; 40; 43, 1, 2, 3; 192;
194, 2, 4.
207. The third declension includes all nouns whose
stem ends in a consonant or a close vowel (t or v), and
is called the consonant declension. The stem of the
nouns of this declension is regularly found by dropping
the case ending of the gen. sing., -09.
208. Stems JEndint/ in a Consonant.
Paradigms.
6 ^vXa^
6 0paf
6 ^vyd<;
(^cfivXoLK-)
(©paK-)
(<t>vya^)
watchman
Thracian
Singular.
fugitive
N.
(f>v\a^
0paf
^vydq
G.
<^i;Xa/co9
©/DOL/cds
^vydho^
1>.
(f)vXaKL
^paKi
(^uyctSt
A.
(f)v\aKa
%paKa
(^vyaSa
V.
<^vXaf
Dual.
(fyuyd<;
N.A.V.
^vXaKe
(dpaK€
^vydZe
G.D.
^vkoLKOLV
SpaKoiv
(^vydhoiv
80
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
N.
V.
(^Aafce?
Plural.
(jyvydSes
G.
(JivXaKcov
%paK(t)v
(j)vydSo}p
D.
(jyvXa^L ^
@paji'
(j)vyd(Ti
A.
(f)vXaKa^
©yDOLAcas
<^vya8a9
r) (fidXay^ to ovofxa
(cfiaXayy) (ovo/xar-)
phalanx name
Sinp-ular.
(j)dXay^
(fyaXayyo^;
(j)dXayyL
<f)dXayya
<f)dXay^
Dual.
<j)aXayye
(j)aXayyoLV
Plural.
(^aXayyoiv
(j)dXay^L ^
(f)aXayyas
ovojxa
OVO^JLaTO^
OVOfiaTL
ovofia
ovofxa
ovofxare
ovofidroLi/
ovofJuaTa
OVOfxdTCOV
ovofxa&L
ovofxaTa
a. Observe that the nom. sing, of masc. and fem. nouns is
formed by annexing -9 to the stem and making the necessary
euphonic changes (194, 2).
h. Observe that the nom. sing, of neuters is the same as the
stem with the necessary euphonic changes (192).
<?. Observe that the nom. and voc. of the masc. and fem.
nouns are alike, that the nom., ace, and voc. of the neuters are
alike, and the plurals end in a (61, h, (3)).
The ending in the dat. plur. is -o-t.
. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 81
f
d. Observe that the rules for accenting nouns (43) regularly
apply to the nouns of this declension, except monosyllables of
the third declension, like @pa^, which accent the gen. and dat.
of all numbers on the ultima, -oiv and -cov having the circumflex
(43, 3).
e. Observe that the masc. and fem. nouns have the same
case endings ; that the gender of nouns of this declension must
be frequently learned by observation.
209. Monosyllables of the third declension accent
the genitive and dative of all numbers on the ultima,
-oiv and -oiv have here the circumflex.
210. Write a table of the endings of the consonant
declension, marking their quantity.
a. Decline as above : 6 Ocjpa^, -afco? ; to xPVt^^y
-aro? ; to crr/oarev/xa, -aro? ; to dpfia, -aro5.
211. EXERCISES.
1. TTpcJToi/ 7rpo9 Tov<; @pa/ca9 eTToXe/iT^cra. 2. to
ovofjia S' OLVTrj icTL KeXaij/at. 3. ol OTrXtrat d(opaKa<;
e)(ovaL. 4. ovtol els AvSidv avTco
-^KOV. 5. (J)6P0V TTOLOVaL T0t9 177"
77019. 6. K\eapxo<; Aafce8at/xo-
^109 <j)iryd<; fjv. 7. rjye to
(TTpdTevfxa /caret fxeaov to tov
(jidkayyos- 8. kol tov<; (f)vydSa<;
eKeXevcre crvv avrw crrpareuecr^ai.
n v>. X CN> r ' , ^ V , No. 7. "Apua.
)). a Wo 0€ (TTpaTevyia avTco crvveKe-
y€To ev 'Keppov7)(r(p. 10. irapayyiWei tm ^ApLaTLmrq}
aTTOTre/xi/zat o et^e aTpdTevjJLa. 11. ivravOa 'Bepua t(o
ApKdSv o9 avTO) avveXeye tovto to aTpdTevfia tjkuv
82 THE beginner's greek book,
TrapayyeWei. 12. 6 Se crrpdreviia crvveke^ev aTTO tov'
Tcov T(op ^pr)ixajT(j)v koX iTTokefiei toI<; Spa^u} 13. Kv-
/)os TrapTJXavpev icf) ^ dpjxarof; kol rj KtXtcrcra €<^' dp-
/xa/xa^T7S. 14. at Sucopvx^^ dno tov Tiypr^TOS irora-
jxov peovcri ' koL irXola Trkei ^ iv avrats • ela/SdWovcn
Se els TOV Eiv(l)pdTrjv.
Examine the datives in 4, 5, 9, 11 (avro)), and observe that
they denote the person or thing for whose advantage, benefit,
etc., or disadvantage, harm, etc., something is or is done ; that
they are not closely connected with the verb like the indirect
object (QQ), which must always be expressed or implied, but are
merely added to sentences which would be complete without
them. Observe that this dative is generally translated by for.
Rule.
212. The person or thing for whose advantage or
disadvantage anything is or is done is put in the
dative.
213. EXERCISES.
1. He was leading the army for him. 2. I will
do these things. 3. He was pursuing the phalanx.
.4. But they were wearing breastplates. 5. And he
collects both a barbarian and a Greek army. 6, But
he, himself, held the Thracians whom he had in his
army. 7. And he commanded the phalanx to proceed.
1 Depends upon eVoXcVet ; verbs of contending with, etc., take the
dative (225, a).
2 194, 1, a.
* Dissjllahic verbs in -e© contract only -ee and -cft.
LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS. 83
214. VOCABULARY.
dpfxa, -aro?, to, chariot (j)vy(i<;, -aSo?, 6, fugitive,
(No. 7). exile.
dpixdfjia^a, rj, covered car- (f)v\a^, -a/co?, 6, a guard ;
riage (ap/Aa + d/xafa). pi., a bodyguard.
^ap^apiK6^,-ri,'6v, foreign, ^/37j/xa, -aro?, to, a thing
barbarian ; to /3ap^ap- used; pi. goods, projjcrtg,
iKov (sc. dTpoLTevpLo), moncy.
the barbarian or Persian irap-ayyeWo), send ivord
army. along, send orders, order,
hi'wpv^, -v^os, 7}, ditch, irap-ekavvo), march or ride
canaL by.
Spa^, -/C09, 6, Thracian. TrXeo), sail [flow, fleet].
dcopd^, -d/cog, 6, breastplate irpcoTov, adv., frst (adj.,
(No. 6) [thorax]- TrpcoTO';, frst).
6po[xa,-aTo^,T6,naine [syn- ,
-j aTpaTos, army encamped.
aT^'^l^f.a, -aTo,, t6, ar- ^^pdTevf^a, divisions of an
my, host (Lat., exercitus) ^^'^^^; ^^^^^^' ''^^^^•
(crrpard?). (TTpaTud, the effective force
^d\cx.yt -yyos, y), a line of ^^ ^^^^ field or on the
battle [phalanx]. march.
LESSON XXI.
LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS — VARIA-
TIONS IN THE SINGULAR.
Review preceding lesson ; 192; 194, 2, 4.
215. Euphony of Consonants,
vT, vh, v0 are dropped before -o" in inflections, and the
84 THE beginner's greek book.
preceding vowel lengthened, as in 194, 4 : dp^ovai
(dpxovT-ai), commander.
2i6. V alone is dropped before -cri of the dative
plural without lengthening the final vowel : rjyeixoo-L
(rjyefjLOV'crL).
217. 27ie Nominative, Stems in v^ p, cr, ovt, reject
a in the nominative and lengthen e to 77, and o to w.
Final r is dropped (192) : rjyefjbcov, -ovo';, dp^ojv, -ovto^ ;
Ttarrip^ Trarepo?, father.
218. The Accusative. Barytone^ stems in r, 8, 6,
after a close vowel (t, v) regularly drop the lingual and
annex v : ^dpiq., ^dpiv.
219. The Vocative. The vocative, which is regu-
larly like the nominative, is like the stem : {a) in bary-
tone stems ending in a liquid : yeirojv, yelrov ; ^ {h) in
stems ending in t8- and cr- : cXtti?, eXm (192).
220. Decline : 6 rjyefjicjv,'^ -ovo^ ; 6 fJiijv, fxiqvos ; o
SaifJLoyVf -ovo^ ; yj x^pts, -lto<; ; rj eXTTts, -1809 ; 6 dp-^cov,
-opTos (part, as subst. voc. dpxotn^) ; rj X^^P' X^^P^^-^
Observe that some nouns from their signification may be
either masculine or feminine, or common geyuler ; that stems end-
ing in a labial or palatal mute are either masculine or feminine.
221. Gender of the Consonant Stems.
The gender of these nouns must be often learned by
^ Special examples in p and cr will be noticed later.
2 See IX., 3, c.
^ Barytone stems in -vt, except participles, have voc. like the stem, but
these are rare.
* No variations in the plural. See 821.
* X^p has x^potv in the gen. and dat. dual, and x^P^*' i^i the dat. plur.,
m the form of the original stem (821). Most stems in p- are masculine.
LIQUID AND LINaUAL STEMS.
85
observation, but the following general rules may be
given :
1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are either
masculine or feminine.
2. Masculine stems end in p, p, and pt. Exc. rj
Xeip.
3. Feminine stems end in 8, and feminines are most
nominatives in t?.
4. Neuter stems end in ar.
222. Give examples of nouns illustrating the above
rules for gender.
223. 77ie Case Endings of the Third Declension.
Masc. and F
EM.
Neut.
Singular.
N.
-5 or
■ none
none
G.
-09 (
-0)?)
-09 (-0)9)
D.
-t
-t
A.
-a(-
^)
like nom.
V.
like
nom.
or like stem
Dual.
like nom.
N.A.V.
-€
-e
G.D.
'OIV
Plural.
-OLP
N.
-€5
-a
G.
-OiV
-CJV
D.
-CTL
-o-i
A.
-a?
-a
224.
EXERCISES.
1. ot y)y
'efiope
9 i(f)aLvovTO 7r\rj(TL0v.
2. €P fieP TTj
apLCTTepd X^^P'- '^^ To^ov €l;)^€. 3. 01 he ^l)(Ov i/zsA-ta
86 THE beginner's greek book.
TTcpt rat? ^epaiv. 4. 6rjpioi<; eTrXriciat^ov ol Ittttoi.
5. TO TTpayfJid ecTTL TrapairXijorLov iKeCvco. 6. tol oirXa
Toi<; arparucJTais inl dfjia^cjp TJyero, 7. a/ia ry
r)fji€pa TjKov dyyeXoL irapd tov (TTpanqyov. 8. 6 8e
iXnCSaf; /caXa? Xeyei. 9. yeiroiv oIkco rfj *EXXaSt.
10. 6 Kvpo? TTokepLTjcrei tco craTpaTrr) crifp rots (j)vydcn.
11. ot arpaTLCoTai tov /cara /xi^j/a jxiadov €(j)epov.
12. Ol (TTpaTLCOTaL Tol^ rjyefjLoai iOeXovcn TreideaSai,
13. e;)(€t 6 KXeapxo'S vnrjpeTaf;, ot avTco ovk tov pucrOov
eveKa p^ovov vTrrj peTijaopTau dXXd Koi^ tt}? \dpiTO<;,
Examine the datives in 4, b, 7, 9, 10 io-arpdirrj), and observe
that the words upon which thev depend signify approach, near-
ness, likeness, agreement, association, or their opposites, as
in 10.
Rule.
225. The dative is used with all words implying
nearness, likeness, association, or opposition,
a. This class includes verbs of following, discoursing with,
mixing, contending with, etc.
226. EXERCISES.
1. The army has fair hopes of safety. 2. On the
following day they proceeded with a guide. 3. He
was warring with the Persians. 4. But the soldiers
were angry with their leaders. 5. And Cyrus sum-
moned the generals of the Greeks. 6. Of the Greeks
there were ten thousand shield {used as a collective noun)
and twenty chariots.
^ Kat not at the beginning of a sentence or clause, has force of also,
even, etc. See 109.
LIQUID AND LINGUAL STEMS.
87
}v, left
•ov
€V
227.
dptaTepoSy
apicTTepa (sc. ■^(eipi), on
the left (Lat. sinister).
apyoi)v, -ovTo<;, 6, leader,
commande r, chief ; higher
title than crTpaTrjy6<;,
commander of a division
of an army (dp^o))*
VOCABULARY.
No. 8. 'Aa-TLs.
dcnTL<;, -1S09, rj, a shield
(Nos. 1, 8).
yeiTciiVy 'Ovo<;, 6, neighbor.
haufKov, -ovo<;, 6, divinity,
spirit [demon].
cXtti?, -t8o?5 17, hope.
y^yeixctiv, -ovo^;, 6, leader, >
guide, commander (ayoi).
\kriv, pjr]v6<^y 6, month [moon,
month].
7rapa-iT\T]crL0<;, -a, -ov, near
by, similar, like{TT\.y)0'io<;).
7rXrjO'Lo<;, -d, -ov, near, neigh-
boring ; ttXtjo-lov, adv.
TTpdyixa, -aT09, to, deed,
act; '^\., affairs, trouble
{7rpdTTco,do) [pragmatic].
(T0)T7)pia, -d?, safety, deliv-
erance (crw^w).
vTTTjpeTrjf;, -ov, servant, at-
tendant.
-ydpi^;, -LTo^, y], favor, grat-
itude,
yj^ip, x^ipo^, rj, hand, wrist
• [chiro-graphy].
oLK€(o, dwell, live (oIko?).
7rXrjcnd(,o) (TrXrjcnaS-), ap-
proach (TT\y](TlO%).
v7rr]peT€(o, serve, supply
(vTrrjpeTrj^;).
dXXct, adversative conj.,
stronger than 8e.
djjLa, adv., at the same time,
together with, dat. ; d^ia
T^ rjfjiepa, at daybreak
[same, some, hom-ily].
jjLopov, adv., only, alone,
(/XW09, alone) [monk,
monad, mono-theism].
a. Give the alhed words in tliis vocabularj.
88 THE beginner's greek book.
LESSON XXII.
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES,
ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.
Review 23, 196, 197; 208, a, b -, 217, 219, a-,
223.
228. The Participle is a verbal adjective which has
certain tenses and governs the same case as the verb to
which it belongs.
229. Examine the following :
Participles. ,
\vci)v (XvovT-), loosing (822).
Active. Middle.
1. I^res, \vo)v, -ovcra, -ov \v6ijl€po<;, -rj, -ov
\vovTo<;, -ovo-r]<;, -ovro^ (pass, uses the same
K. r. X. form as the mid.)
2. Fat. Xvcrcov, -ovcra -ov Xvaofxevos, -r), -ov
XvcrovTO^;, -ovar]^, -ovto^
K. T. X.
3. Aor, Xv(Td<;, -adcra -crav Xvcrdfxevo<;, -7), -ov
XvaavTO^;, -adcrr)^;, -cravro^
K.T. X.
a. Observe that the active participles form their stems by
annexing -vr to the tense stem of the verb (23) (perf. act. adds
-or) ; that the middle adds -/JLevo.
h. Observe that the participles in -09 belong to the vowel
declension^ and are declined like StJXo? (70;, 817); that the
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 89
masc. and neut. active participles belong to the consonant declen-
sion, as apxcov, dpxovTO^ (220); and that the nom. sing, of the
latter is formed according to 208, b, and that of the former ac-
cording to 217; that the feminine with ending -aa^ is of the
first declension, and is inflected like afxa^a (41, c, 2).
230. The participles in their inflection are accented
with the regular accentuation of nouns.
231. Decline ap^oiv, (jyevyojv, (l)ep(ov.
232. Decline wv, being, like Xvo^v : oiv^ oScraj ov {o>v,
pres. part, of verb elfjuu, be), (823).
233. Decline XvojJievo^, \vcrdfjLevo<;, 8iwfa/x€^09.
234. Attributive Fartici;ple.
Examine the following :
1 . 6 /Bao-iXevcov 'ApTa^€p^r)<;, the reigning ArtaxerxeSj
or Artaxerxes who is reigning.
2. a/x<^t ayopcLv irXijOovcrav, about the time of fall
market.
3. apxcov, a commander.
4. 6 dp-^oiv, the commander,
5. 6 (jiipcov Scopa, he tvho bears gifts.
6. ol he Sicj^avTe^ Ta^y inavovTOy those who loere
pursuing quicMy stopped.
a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle is used like an adjec-
tive, and that it may be translated like a relative clause.
h. Observe that in 3, 4, 5, 6, the participle being used alone
or with the article, as an adjective in like situation, has the force
of a substantive, and is often best translated by he who or iho8e
who.
^ -aa is for -la {-vT-ia, -paa), r passing into a before i, and v then was
dropped and the preceding vowel lengtliened (194, 4).
90 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
Rule.
235. The attributive participle may be used like an
adjective, both in qualifying a noun and as a substan-
tive.
236. Circumstantial Participle,
Examine the following :
1. a, Tavra Xefa?, inopevero, having said these things
he adva7iced, or after he had said these things he advanced,
h. ravra Xeycov iiropeveTo, saying these things he
advanced.
c, iiropeveTo ravra Xefo/iei^og, he advanced about
to say these things, or to say these things,
2. ri^iov dSeX^09 o^v avTov, he asked because he was
his brother.
3. TO '^WrjvLKov T]0pOi^ev 0)9 fxaXiO'Ta iirLKpyTTTOfJie-
z^09, he tvas collecting his Greek force as secretly as
possible.
4. avTayopa^ovTes &Itov e(^a)v, they subsisted by pur-
chasing provisiojis in return.
5. riK^ (TTpaTevcroiJievo^, he came for the purpose oj
taking part in the expedition.
6. Tovf; opKov^ kv(ov, TTjv Slk7]v e)(€L, if hc broke his
oaths, he has his deserts.
7 . fxeaov TO eavTOv i\(ov, tov Kvpov evcovvfiov e^co
TjVy although he occupied the centre of his own forces, he
was outside of the left loing of Cyrus.
8. 17 /ce oTrXtra? h)(Oiv yih.iov%y he came with one thou-
sand hopjlites.
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 91
9. crvXXefas arpauTevyua iiroXiopKei MiXrjTOT/, he col-
lected a7i army and laid siege to Miletus.
10. jxeTaTrejJLTroiJLevov avrov, ovk ideXo) ekdeiv^ ah
though he contirmes to send for me, I do not wish to go.
a. Observe that the tenses of the participle denote time pres-
ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal verb.
Thus, in 236, 1, «, he spoke before he advanced ; b, he ad-
vanced while speaking ; <?, he advanced before he spoke, or for
the purpose of speaking.
b. Observe that these participles add a circumstance con-
nected with the action of the leading verb : that they express
respectively time, cause, manner, means, purpose, condition
(translated by if), concession, and any attendant circumstance.^
c. Observe that in 1, <?; 5, the future participle is regularly
used with verbs of motion, like the Latin supine in -um, to express
purpose.
• d. Observe that these participles are regularly translated by
a clause of time, cause, etc. ; that in 9, the participle is best
translated by a co-ordinate verb.
e. Observe that in 10, the participle agrees with a genitive
not connected with any word in the sentence, and forms a distinct
dependent clause with a change in the subject without introduc-
ing a finite verb and conjunction. This is called the genitive
absolute, corresponding to the ablative absolute in Latin. It
can denote any relations of the circumstantial participle, but it
may frequently be translated by a preposition and verbal noun.
Rule.
237. The tenses of the participle are regularly pres-
^ These indicate only the most common relations of the circumstantial
participles. They are classified by the predominant element, and the same
participle may belong to more than one class, as time, cause, concession.
92 THE beginner's greek book.
ent, past, or future relatively to the time of the principal
verb.^
Rule.
238. The circumstantial participle may define the
circumstances of an action.
Rule.
239. The circumstantial participle and a noun not
the same as the subject or object of the main verb, may
be put in the genitive absolute.
240. EXERCISES.
I. 1. €)((E.i ap^ovra 8e avra)v Heviav. 2. ol ap-^ov
res iirl rai? 6vpaL<; elcri. 3. Kupos \ap,^dvei rov<;
(j)evyovTa<;. 4. Tavra aKovcravTe<; ol arpanqyoi kol
Xo^ayot iiroLOvv ovtcj. 5. iiropevovro eV Sefta e)(0VTe<i \
TOP 7]Xlov. 6. iTTOLTjcre Tavra, eKeupcov ovk im fia^rjv
ava^aivovTCtiv. 7. />tera Tavra yjSrj rjXcov Svvoptos
o-vyKakecra^ roug aTpaT7]yov(; /cat Xoxcuyov^; eXefe rctSe.
8. UapvcraTLS e^aiTiqcrap^evy) avTOV aTroTre/xTret irakiv
inl T7)v ap^Tjv. 9. M.ivcx)va 8e ovk H^yjTei Trap ' Apiaiou
o)v Tov M.ev(x)vo<; ^evov, 10. ol 8' aXXot cTrel rJKov,
Tov^ Tapcrovg hirfpTTaaav, 8ta tov okedpov tojv crrpari-
(OTwv opyi^ojJievoL. 11. Kal virep rrj^ 'EXXa8os SpaKa^
eTifxcopoviJLrjv, Ik Trj<; XeppovTjaov avTov<; i^eXavvcov.
12. Kvpo<; 8' ovp dve/BaLve iirl rd aKpa aarpdirov
^ The present and aorist sometimes have no distinction of time, tlie
former denoting continuance, the latter a single act. This more frequent Ij
occurs with the circumstantial participle.
^ Translate mtk.
PRESENT, FUTURE, AORIST PARTICIPLES. 93
ov K0}kvovTO<;. 13. TTapayyiWei rols ap-^ovcn eKoi'
aTOL<; kafJi^di/eLv tovs HeXoTropviqcriovf;, o)? iin^ovXev-
ovTO^ Tov craTpdirov rat? /cw/xats.
II. I. After they heard these things they crossed
the river. 2. But when they had made an assembly,
they announced these things. 3. And he orders Xenias
to come with his army. 4. For he who will lead (us)
has boats. 5. He goes up with three hundred hopHtes
of the Greeks. 6. Parysatis did not love the reigning
Artaxerxes. 7. He commanded Socrates, who was a
guest friend, to come as he intended to make war with
the satrap.
241. VOCABULARY,
e/cacrro?, -17, -oz/, eac/i of olkovco, hear [acoustic].
more than two, every d^Locj, to demand ; ask as
one, Lat. qiiisgue ; plur. Jit, worthy [afto?].
several, each, severally ; *8vw, enter ; of the ^u\\,set.
with a substantive us- i^-airio), demand, bey off
ually in the predicate [atreoi, ask~\.
position. tpqrio}, seek, ask for.
iKKkrj(TLd, -dsy assembly, opyiQ(s},to make angry, m\{\,
meetiny [/caXeoj]. to he enrayed.
17X109, sun [peri-helion, TljjLcjpeo), avenye, mid. take
helio-tropej. venyeance on [ti/xt;].
6XeOpo<;, destruction. 17877, adv. already, now,
(j)evyo)p, 'OVTo^, 6, fuyitive, ovv, post-posit, inferential
ecvile [(j)€vya), flee'] . conj., therefore, then,
oiv, ovcra, ov, heiny, pres. irdXiv, adv. hack ayain
part. [€t/x,i]. [palin-drome] .
94
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
<W9, conj. adv., as<) when; w? /xaXtcrra, as much as possible ;
with circumstantial participles to express the purpose
or pretext of the subject of the leading verb without
implying that it is also the opinion of the author, as
if, just as, on the ground that, ivith the intention
of, etc.
LESSON XXIII.
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
Review 150, 151, 2, 3, 4 ; 152, 153, 154. Note in
Lesson XXIL, 229, 3, ^, /5 ; 230.
242. Decline in the original form and then contract
(822):
1.
Tlfxacop
Tlfjidovcra
rlfiaop
rlfJicoi/
TlfJicjcra
TlfXCOV
TlfJidoVTOS
r'niaovo-y)^
TlfJLdoPTO<;
K. T. X.
TliJi(0(rr)<;
K. T. X.
TlfJiCt)VTO<;
K. T. X.
2.
TTOli(t)V
TTOieovaa
TTOlioV
TTOLCOP
TTOiovcra
TTOLOVV
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
3.
hrjXocDT/
Sy)\cop
K. T. X.
SrjXovcra
K. T. X.
SrjXoov
S7)\oVP
K. r. X.
243. The supplementary participle completes the idea
expressed by the verb. It may agree either with the
subject or object.
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 95
1. KXeapxo^s StareXetro Xeycoj/, Clear chus continued
to speak.
2. l-Trava-avTo irokeixovvre^, they ceased warring,
3. OiKoxxa avTov \iyovTo^^ I hear him speaking,
4. irvyxav^ \iyo)v, he happened to be saying.
5. rpecfiOfJievoT/ iXdvdavev to cTTpdrevfJia, the army
was secretly supported.
a. Observe that in 1, 2, the participle completes the idea ex-
pressed in the verb ; that in 3, the participle denotes the action
or state in which the object is perceived or heard.
h. Observe that in 4, 5, the participle contains the leading
idea and the verb may be translated as an adverb, or that the
participle may become the verb of the sentence and the verb
a participle expressing manner : \av6dvov iTp€(j)eTO to o-Tpd-
Tev/jia,^ the anny was secretly supported.
Rule.
244. The supplementary participle resembling the
object infinitive is used with verbs signifying to begin,
continue, end, hear, knoio,jind, see, represent, appear, and
with verbs of endurance and emotion.
Rule.
■245. The supplementary participle with Tvyxdvco,
\avddv(x), ^ddvco, regularly contains the leading idea of
the expression, and is usually translated by a verb.
a. Here the present and aorist have no distinction of time.
246. Examine the following :
^ TJiis arrangement would be expected in English.
96 THE beginner's greek book.
SrjXo^ Tjv dpLa)fjievo<;, he ivas evidently/ distressed, for
hrj\ov Tjv on 7)viaT0.
h. Observe that the participle is used with 87) Xo? et^t to
change the impersonal construction with hr\\6v eVrt to the
personal.
Rule.
247. The supplementary participle may be used per-
sonally with S'^Xo? et/xt, (j)ai'ep6s elfiL, (l)aLPOiJLaL, etc.^
248. EXERCISES.
1. Tjp^ero TToXejxeLi/. 2. 6 Se eXTTtSa? Xeycov Sua-
reXet. 3. opa avrov irapekavvovTa. 4. vlkcov ifvy-
^avev. 5. iTLfJi7](re KXeap^ov (fyevyovTa. 6. Kpavyfj
TjXavvov iiTL rov9 7ToXepLiov<?. 1 . tovtco tco rpoirco iiro-
pevovTO. 8. 01 8e /cat rjiropovv rw Trpay/xart. 9. ra
aKpa ov (^OdvovcTLV 01 KtXtfce? KaraXa^ovTe^? 10. toI^
dXXoi9 napTJyyeXXe OTrXu^eaOai Ocopa^L. 11. ovto) 8e
TO iv ©erraXta iXdvOavev avrco rpecfyofievov arpaTevpia.
12. ^OpovTa^ im/BovXevajv Kvpco (j)av€po^ '^v. 13. Ila-
pucrart? 817 VTrrjp^e rco Kvpco ^ (^tXovcra avrov. 14. /cat
iiroXepei e/c XeppopTJaov oppcopevos toIs O/oaft rot?
VTrep EXXy^cTTroj^TOj' ot/covcrt.
Examine the datives in 6, 7, 8, 10 (Odypa^u) and note the
relations they express.
249. The dative is used to denote manner, cause,
means, or instrument.
^ This participle will be more fully classified later {717).
2 Sec \ati^dv(o. 3 See 146.
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.
97
250. EXERCISES.
1. They were arming themselves with breastplates
2. It was evident that Menon desired to be honored
3. Cyrus happened to be present. 4. I hear him
shouting. 5. Clearchus ceased to war with the Thra
cians. 6. He happened to be a guest friend of his
7. This army was thus secretly supported for him.
251
VOCABULARY.
Kpavyij, -^9, s/ioiit, outcry J XavOdvo), escape the notice
clamor. of, lie hid [lethargy] .
7Tap-a>i>y -ovaa, -6v, he near, ottXi^o), arm^ equip \07r\ov\.
present ; part, of 7ra/>et/>ti. opfjida)^ hasten, start ; mid.,
(j)avep6<;, -a, -6v, visible, man- set out, forth .
if est, evident [<^aivo)\.
Tp67ro<;, manner, charac-
ter [rpeiTOD ; tropic, tro-
phy].
d-TTopeo), to be without re-
source, to he perplexed,
in douht [aTropo?] .
Travct), cause to stop, end,
stop; mid., cease, desist,
cease from [Lat pausa^
pause].
Tp€(f)a), nourish, support.
Tvjxdvo), hit, obtain, hap-
pen.
Sta-reXeiw, finish, complete (jyOdpco, he or come before.
the distance, continue.
iTTL-Ovfieo), set one's heart
upon^ desire eagerly, loish
[^i5/xo9, soul"].
KaTa-Xafi^dvct), take, cap-
ture, seize, overtake, pre-
occupy [catalepsy] .
anticipate; w^thasuppl.
participle, before, sooner,
first.
St], post-posit, intensive par-
ticle, now, indeed, surely,
accordingly.
9'8 THE beginner's greek book.
LESSON XXIV.
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS.
Review 151, 2, 3, 4; 152, a-, 153, 154, 2; 196,
197.
252. Verbs are called vowel (pure), mute, or liquid,
according as their themes end in a vowel, mute, or
liquid.
253. New themes are often formed by adding e to
the verb root. From this new theme some verbs form
the present tense stem, and the other tenses (or part of
them) from the root: So/ceco [80/c-], Sdfw, eSofa, etc.
Other verbs form their present from the simple theme
or root, and the other tenses (or part of them) from the
longer theme in c, and lengthen e as in simple vowel
verbs (198): iOeXco, iOekTJcrcj (ideXe-), o^eiko), o^ei-
XtJo'ci) {6(j>eLke-).
254. Some verbs in -ecu drop cr in the future, and
contract : KaXeco, Ka\a> (/caXecro)) ; reXelw, finish, TeKcj
(Tekia-o)). This form of the future is called Attic.
a. Observe that these verbs retain the sliort final vowel, the
former retains it in the fut. and aor., the latter throughout the
tenses.
255. Liquid verbs form their future by annexing
-€%. to the theme. They are then contracted like iroiiw,
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS.
99
a. Here -e%- is for an original -eo-%. ; the a is dropped
between two vowels (329, Obs. 4).
256. Liquid verbs form their aorist by rejecting cr
in -era and lengthening the theme vowel in compensa-
tion : a to 7^ (after t, or /o to a), € to et, t to I, v to v.
Thus, /xeW, e/xeti/a, ; Kplvo) (Kptv-), eKplva, distinguish ;
dyyeXXo) (dyyeX-), rjyyuXa; Kreivoi [KTev), eKTeiva,
MR.
257. Paradigms (832, 833).
1. Future Indicative of dyyiXXo), dyyeXw.
Active.
Middle.
s.
1 . dyyeXco
2. dyyeXet^
3. dyyeXei
1.
2.
3.
dyyeXovfiai
dyyeXeu, -fj
dyyeXeiTat
D.
2. dyyeXelrov
3. dyyeXeuTov
2.
3.
dyyeXelcrOoi/
dyyeXelaOov
P.
1 . dyyeXovfJiep
2. dyyeXelre
3. dyyeXoOcri
1.
2.
3.
dyyeXovfieOa
dyyeXelaOe
dyyeXovvrai
Infin.
Infin.
dyyeXeti/
dyyeXelcrOaL
Part.
Part.
dyyeXcov
dyyeXovfiepo^;
a. Apply the rules of contraction to these forms.
100
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK,
2. Aorist Indicative.
S. 1. TjyyeiXa
2. TjyyeiXas
3. yjyyeiXe
D. 2. rjyyeikarov
3. rjyyeiKdTr)v
P. 1 . rjyyeiXafJiev
2. rjyyeikaTe
3. y^yyeikav
Infia.
ayyeikai
Part.
dyyeiXoLS, -dcra, -av
1. r^yyeikayjiriv
2. rjyyeiXoj
3. TjyyeikaTO
2. rjyyeiXacrdov
3. rjyyeiXdcrOrjv
1 . rQyyeiXdfxeOa
2. riyyeiXaade
3. TfyyetXavTO
Infin.
Part.
dyyeiXa/Aei^o?
«. Observe that the thematic vowel and endings are regular.
^. Observe that the stems of the last three verbs in 256 are
\^/cpiv-'\, [a77eX-], [/crei^-]. These verbs form the present by
adding -t°/e- to the theme ; -X with t becomes -XX (596) ; with
themes in v- and p-, t unites with the theme vowel (597, 598).
258. Write in the active and middle the future and
aorist indicative, infinitive, and participle of /xeVw,
KTeivco,
259. EXERCISES.
1. Sofere dyaOol elpai. 2. TrapTJyyeuXe tol<; dp-
^ovcri eKdcTTOL^ Xafju/Bdveuv tov<; HeXoirovpTjcTLOv^.
3. evravOa efxeivev r}fx€pa<; eTrrd. 4. e/BaXXe aXXo^; Se
XlOo) /cat dXXo<; 5. Kvpo^ vtto '¥iXXijpcop kol ^ap^d-
FUTURE AND AOiJJST OF LIQUID' VERBS. 101
pcop (^tXetrat. 6. 6/3a»crt avroi;<; rtjua)/xeii^ou9 vtto tojv
(TT parriy(x)v . 7. ov o'Tparr)y7](Ta) Tavriqv ttjp (TTparr)-
yiav, 8. aevLa<^ 6 Ap/ca? tol AvKaua eOvae, 9. iv
revOev Kvpo<; ttjv KiXtcrcraz/ et? ttjv KiXuKLav aTroTre/xTret
TT7^' jJiaKpap oSop. 10. rw ayeiv iOeXovri apyupiov
TeXovfJLep. 11. iOekrjcreL fxeveui' iv rat? /cw/xat?.
12. ivravOa ifieive Kvpo^ kch tj aTparia r^xipa^ eiKo-
aiv. 13. 6 Se TreiOeTai re kol avWayij^dveL Kvpov oS?
airoKTevcov. 14. ifxeipav 8e /cat ot napa ttjv dakaTTav
oLKovvTe<; iv S0X019 /cat eV Icrcroi?.
Examine the genitives in b, 6, and observe that with vtto the
genitive denotes the author or the person by vi'hom an act is done.
Rule.
260. The agent with passive verbs is expressed by
the genitive with vtto.
Examine the accusatives in 7, 8, and note their relation to
the verbs.
Rule.
261. Any verb whose meaning permits may take an
accusative of kindred signification. This accusative de-
fines more definitely the predication contained in the
verb, and may follow both transitive and intransitive
verbs. It is called the cognate (or kindred) accusative.^
a. When a neuter adjective represents the cognate accusative,
its noun is implied in the verb (8).
h. With verbs of motion the cognate accusative expresses the
ground over which the motion passes (9, o^ov).
^ This is an adverbial use of tlie accusative.
102 tHE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
262. EXERCISES.
1. They were throwing stones. 2. These things
seemed to be best. 3. He happened to be proceeding
upon a wagon. 4. It was evident that Cyrus was
advancing. 5. There he remained five days. 6. And
he will remain in the villages. 7. But Clearchus gave
orders to the soldiers to cease.
263. VOCABULARY.
\W Of;, stone [litho-graph]. Ovo},sacrifce,ci.gQX\.voQ^h,
AvKaLo<;, -a, -ov, Lycaean ; arpanqyico, beyejieral, com-
ra Av/cata, the Lycaea, mand [o-r/QarT^yd?] .
festival in honor of Tekico, reXco, ireXecra, etc.,
Zeus. finish, fulfil an obligation,
arpaTiqyia, -a'^, generalship, pay.
command [strategy]. vno, prep., under ; w. gen.,
airo-KTeiva), kill ojf, slay, from under ; of agency,
put to death. by ^ through ; w. dat., «;^-
elvai, to be, pres. inf. of der, at the foot of; w.
et/At. ace, under.
LESSON XXV.
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT
DECLENSION.
Review 41, c, 2; 208, a, b, c, 215, 216, 217, 219,
a; 223, 229, 1, 3.
264. Adjectives of the consonant declension follow
in the masculine and neuter the third declension. The
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 103
feminine," when it differs from the masculine, follows the
a declension, having in the nominative singular a (229,
265. Stems in vr- are declined like the participles
(229, 1, 3).
Paradigms (824).
eKcjv {eKOPT'), willing. Tras {TTavr-\ all.
k-KOiv ^ €/covcra kKov Tra? ^ iracra irap
eK6vro<i iKovar]<; iKovro^; iravTos 7racrri<; iravTO^
K. T.
X. K, T. X.
266. Most stems in v- have the masculine and fem-
inine alike, and are declined like 8aificov (220). The
accent is recessive (XIIL).
Paradigm (824).
evSaLixcov (evhaLfiov-), fortunate,
evSaifJioji' evSaufJiov
evSaufiovo^ evSaufJiOi/o^
K. T. X.
267. EXERCISES.
1. 7rdvT€<;^ ol Kokol TratSe? TraiSevovTaL, 2. top
TToraiiov KoKei Mapavav. 3. 6 TTorajito? /caXetrat
Mapcrva?. 4. ovg ol Supot 0€ov<; ivoynl^ov. 5. Kv/005
^ cKtoi/ is declined with the same endings as \v(ov (229, 1).
2 lias is declined with the endings of Xvaas (229, 3). In irav^d. is long
by exception. The compounds regularly have it short, anav, (rvfnrav. The
gen. and dat. dual and plural violate 209, and accent the first syllable.
irav sometimes appears in the voc. sing.
* TTCLi regularly has the predicate position.
104 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
^'0/xt{€t, KaKov<; ^ l3ap/3dpov<; elvau. 6. hrj\o<; tjv Kvpos
(TTTevhoiv iraaav ttjv oSov.'^ 7. Iv ravTj] Se ttj X^P^
rjv Tj yrj vreSioi' airav. 8. iropeveraL 6 Kvpo<; crvv Toi^
nepl avTov ev8at/x,ocrt. 9. olkovtos ' Apra^ep^ov, avfji-
^ovXevco (T (xil^ecr 9 ai. 10. ol Se rjpojTojp Kvpop tol Sd-
^avTa rfi (Trparia, 11. /cat atrei avrov et?^ ^tXiou?
feVov9 fJLLadov. 12. oi 0/)afC€9 rjOeXov a^aipelaOai
Tov^ ivoLKovvras EkXr)va<; Trjv yrjv. 13. Tracra? ra?
TavTT)^ Trj<; ^j^wpag Kcofxa^ ZiapTrdcrai^ toI<^ ''KXXiqcnv
ineTpexIfe. 14. Trdpre^ ovtol ou9 opare /Bdp^apoL
TToXepLLOL Tol<; FiXXrjaiv elcnv. 15. ivrevOev e^eXavvei
Sta ^pvyLa<; crTa9fxov Trapacrdyya^ okto) et? /coj/xa?
€voaLfjLOva<?. 16. Kvpoi^ Se fxer air efXTTCT at diro ttJ^
apx^S 179 avTov (TaTpaTTTjv iTToCrjcre.^
Examine the pairs of accusatives in 2, 4, 16 (avrov o-arpd-
7r7]v) and the verbs upon which they depend, and note that one
accusative of each pair expresses predicate relations such as
would appear with elvai with the same verbs (5). Observe also
that the predicate accusative may be an adjective (5).
Rule.
268. Verbs of naming, choosing, making, appointing,
tJiinking, believing, or regay^ding^ may take a predicate
accusative in addition to the object accusative.
a. In the passive both accusatives appear in the nominative,
3 (84).
^ Predicate adj. after ffvat agreeing with its subject ^ap^dpovs, infin-
itive subj. accusative indirect discourse as in Latin.
2 Ace. extent (93). ^ Prep., /or, governing ^evovs.
* The infinitive without an article may express a purpose.
* The Eng. would use plupf.
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 105
Examine the pairs of accusatives in 10, 11 (avrov . . .
fjLLo-dov), 12 J and note their relations to the verbs upon which
they depend.
Rule.
269. Verbs of asking, demanding, teaching^ remind-
ing, clothing, concealing, depriving, etc., may take two
object accusatives, one of the person and the other
of the thing.
a. With some of these verbs, the accusative of the thing is a
cognate accusative (261).
270. EXERCISES.
1. They ask Cyrus for a guide. 2. They bade them
ask for boats. 3. He made these commanders.
4. They beheve him brave. 5. The good appear pros-
perous. 6. And all these hoplites withdrew. 7. All
the rest of the army crossed. 8. For he will not will-
ingly bid you^ report these things. 9. He has all who^
muster in the plain of Castolus.
271. VOCABULARY.
K-Koiv^ -ovaa, -ov, unwilling prosperous, happy (eu +
(d + kKOiv). haLficov). See 227.
a-TTct?, -cto-a, -av, all togeth- 0e6<;, 6, rj, god, goddess
er, all (d + Trctg). [theist, theism].
kKcliv, 'ovo-a, -6v, willing; KaKos, -t], 'ov, had, base,
in pred., ivillinghj. cowardly ; to KaKov, evil,
eu-Sat/xwi', -ov, fortunate, harm.
1 iiuSc. '^ As many as.
106
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
ocro9, -7), -ov, rel. proii. of
quantity, as great as, as
77iany as, how much or
great; after Trag trans-
lated who, etc.
TTol^} TTaiSo?, 6, 7], child
[ped-agogue].
Trag, Tracra, irav, all, the
whole, every ; generally
in pred. position [pan-
theon, pan-theism, pan-
orama] .
oLTect), ash: for, demand;
mid., entreat, beseech,
beg,
aiT€(o, ash:, demand.
a^Loo), ash as tvorthg, right.
ipcoToiaj, ash a question, in-
quire.
airo-cnrdo), -dcro), etc., draw
off, separate, withdraio.
d(j>-aLp€(o, take away; mid.,
rob [aTTo + aipecuj.
iv-oLK€0), inhabit, live in.
iiTi-TpeTTQ), turn over to^ en-
trust., commit.
ipcjTaco, -Tjcro), etc., ask a
question, question.
vofxit^o) {vofJLiS-)j to hold as
a custom or usage, thinh,
consider, believe, etc.
TraiSevco, educate (ttols)
[en-cyclo-paedia] .
cTTreuSo), urge, hasten.
l^rjTeco, ash for tvhat one
needs.
LESSON XXVI.
REVIEW.
272. Review Lessons XV.-XXV. in order, with
their vocabularies. Group the related words in form
and meaning with the allied words of the previous
vocabularies.
^ TTois violates (209) in gen. dual and plural Traidoiv, iraiboiv, and has
voc. in Trat as a stem in 18 (219, b).
REVIEW. 107
273. Compounds.
1 . What is a compound word ?
2. How are compound verbs formed, accented,
augmented ?
3. What force had the prepositions originally?
4. Give special verbs that take the dative of indirect
object.
5. What compound verbs take the dative ?
274. Prepositions,
1. Give the generic uses of the oblique cases.
2. Give the rule for the use of the prepositions with
the different cases.
3. With what case are aTrd, ojvtI, Ik, and Trpd, used ?
4. Why cannot et? bS used with the genitive, or eV
with the accusative ?
5. Why is /cara not used with the dative?
6. Give the uses of eVt and Trapct with genitive,
dative, and accusative, and give examples in Greek.
7. Translate the following and distinguish the uses of
(Tvv and /Ltera : 1. iiroXefMei craTpaTrr) avv roL<; (f^vydo-t.
2. Kvpo<; fiera rcov dkXcov i^ekavvei.
8. Give some metaphoric uses of the prepositions.
9. Translate into Greek: 1. Out of the house.
2. Before the phalanx. 3. Instead of his brother.
4. Away from the army. 5. In the plain. 6. Down
from the hill.
10. Translate into English : 1. /Ltera ravra i^eKavvei.
2. iXavv€L iirl tov TTorrayLOV. 3. ifxevov eTTt rat? Ov'
pai<;. 4. TOP oLvOpoiTTov riyov irpo^ KXiap^ov. 5. aire*
(riraore oltto tov TroTafxov.
108 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
275. Contraction.
1. When may vowels be contracted?
2. How are diphthongs formed ?
3. Give the rules of contraction for vowels of like
sound, of o sound.
4. When a and e come together what forms does the
contraction take ?
5. Give the rule for the contraction of a vowel be-
fore a diphthong ; give examples.
6. What special contractions have verbs?
7. What special contraction has the vowel declen-
sion ? What accent has the noni., ace, and voc. dual of
the o declension ?
8. Give the rule for the accent of contracted syllables.
9. How are compound adjectives in -009 accented ?
Adjectives in -eo? ?
10. Why are not other forms of rt/iao), Troiew, etc.,
than the present and imperfect contracted ?
11. Conjugate in the present and imperfect, active
and middle indicative, in uncontracted and contracted
forms vLKoio), alreoiy and fjucrOoo).
12. Explain the contracted forms in the following :
TLjJLOLV, VLKOLP, So/C€t^, atT€tr, jJLLCrdoVV.
13. Decline in the uncontracted and contracted
forms fiva, vov^.
14. Define crasis, elision*
15. Give the rules for the accent of elided svllables
both in elision and crasis.
16. Perform crasis upon the following: zeal ayaOoi',
REVIEW. 109
TO avTo ; TOL dya6d ; rd aWa ; kol aurd? ; to ovofxa ;
Tov avTov ; ov eveKa.
17. Perform elision upon the following : irapd aurw;
errTOL rjaav ; olvtI eKeivov ; iirl dvOpcono) ; Kara ou? ;
dvTl d)v ; diro lttttov ; rovro aXXo.
18. Form compounds of the following: irapd +
ekavvo) ; iiri + 6809 ; aTrd + atpeo) ; 0,770 + dyyeXXco ;
viro -\- dp^o) ; irapd + dyyekXco.
276. Pronouns, Demonstrative and Intensive.
1. What substantives are in the main declined with
the endings of the article?
2. Decline avrd? and give its uses.
3. How are aXXo?, e/ceti^o?, and dSe declined ?
4. Decline ovto%. What is the position of the
demonstrative ?
5. Give the uses of ovto<^, dSe, and Ik€ivo<^, and the
force of 6 yAv ... 6 Se.
6. Decline the article, and then change it to the
relative.
7. Give the rule for the agreement and construction
of the relative.
8. Write in Greek : 1. This man ; that man. 2. I
say these things. 3. He spoke as follows. 4. The
general himself led. 5. Cyrus loved him. 6. They
were doing the same things. 7. He showed whom he
honored. 8. He sent back the army which he had.
277. Euphony of Consonants,
1. Write the diagram of the classes and orders of
mutes. Define cognate and co-ordinate mutes.
110 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
2. Define smooth and rough mutes. What are the
double consonants ?
3. What are the liquids ? When is y nasal ?
4. What consonants only can end words? Why are
c/c and ovk no exceptions ?
5. Give the rule for the euphonic changes of mutes
before the Unguals r, 8, d.
6. What form does ov take before a smooth vowel ?
Before a rough ?
7. What change occurs when a consonant either
by elision or in forming a compound word is brought
before a rough vowel ?
8. Give the rule for the changes of mutes before cr
and examples.
9. Give the rule for the changes of v preceding the
mutes and liquids.
278. Explain the euphonic changes in the following:
(Tvy-KaXeo), crvX-Xeyw, ifJi-/3aLV(o, avix-^ovXevco, cri;//,-
TToXefjueo), Xe^coy ike^a, Trefxipcoy apTrdcroj, ireiao), So^co,
KekevovcTi, T^yejudcrt, dp^ovau {dpxo[yT]crL), dpfxa
(dpfxar).
279. Future and Aorist Active and Middle of Verbs.
1. How is the future and aorist active and middle of
vowel, mute, and liquid verbs formed ?
2. Name two vowel verbs that form the future by
rejecting cr.
3. Explain the several changes in forming the future
of So/ceo), TTOteo), iOeXo).
4. Give the primary and secondary tense-endings.
REVIEW. Ill
5. How does the middle differ in the main from the
active ?
6. How does the future differ in form from the
present? The aorist from the imperfect?
7. Distinguish between the uses of the aorist and
imperfect. What is the use of the augment ?
8. Write the future and aorist active and middle in-
dicative, infinitives, and participles of Kekevco, ttoUo), Bvcd,
9. Write the same forms as the preceding of Xeyw,
TrefXTTco, TreiOo), ayyeXXco, fievo), Kreivo), Kpivo). '
280. Consonant Declension,
1. What substantives does the third declension in-"
elude ?
2. How is the stem of the consonant declension
found ?
3. How is the nominative singular of masculines and
feminines formed from the stem ? Of neuters ?
4. Explain the euphonic changes in forming the
nominative singular of the following : <^vXafco9, ^wpa-
/C09, Stcopf^o?* <^a\ayyo9, (jyvydSos, 'Ap/cctSo?, apfxaTO*;,
6v6jJLaTo<;.
5. Decline : <^vXa^, xPVH'^j 'A/o/cct?.
6. Decline and explain formation of nominative and
vocative singular of rjyefjLCJv, yeLTcov, 6 dp^cov, dcTTri?,
7. Give the rule for the accent of monosyllables of
the third declension in the genitive and dative, and note
exceptions in Trat? and Tra?.
8. Give the rules for forming the vocative of nouns
of the third declension.
112 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
9. When does the accusative singular have v instead
of a?
10. Account for the euphonic changes in the dative
plural of yeuTCDv, ap^cov, c^uXaf, dcTTrt?.
11. Give the general rules for the gender of the
third declension.
12. Write the case endings of the third declension.
281. Participles and Adjectives.
1. What is a participle? Give the endings of the
stems of the active })articiples.
2. How are the active participles and adjectives of
consonant stems inflected ? What form has the vocative
of participles ?
3. Decline : \vo}v^ eKcov, ^p, Xucra?, Tra?, evSaCficov.
4. Decline in both uncontracted and contracted forms :
viK(xiv^ (j)i\(ov, Sr)Xct)v.
5. What are the three principal uses of the participle ?
How is it best translated when used with an article ?
6. What are the principal relations expressed by
the circumstantial participle ?
7. How may the participle be used with hrjXoq elfiL
and <j)av6p6<; elfXL ?
8. Translate and explain the syntax: 1. oldyaOoi;
6 ap^cjv; 6 d^cov dvOpcoiTo^ ^aiverai. 2. ravra aKOv-
(ravTe<; hi4^aivov. 3. rr^v dpxrjv hvyyajv^v e^wi^.
4. TO (TTpaTevfJLa Tp€(j)6fX€voi' i\dv9avev. 5. eKeivov
XeyovTO^, eTTopevovTO. 6. iiravovTo Xeyopre^;. 7. to
'^XXr)VLKov iK^Xevae '^kglp cos 7roXefji7J(ra)v ntcrioats.
REVIEW. 113
282. Synopses of Verbs,
1. Give the synopses of the forms already given
of \\)oi^ KeXevco, ireido), 7re/x7r&), dyyekXco.
2. Give the forms of et/xi that have appeared in the
preceding lessons.
283. Syntax,
1. Give the rule for the agreement of words express-
ing adjective relations.
2. Distinguish between the dative of advantage, dis-
advantage, and indirect object.
3. Give the construction with words signifying near-
ness, likeness, association, and opposition.
4. How are cause, manner, and means expressed?
How agent?
5. Define the cognate accusative, and give an exam-
ple in Greek.
6. Name verbs taking object and predicate accusatives.
7. Name verbs taking two object accusatives, and
give examples in Greek and Latin.
284. EXERCISES.
Review 55, a, b; 97, 1, 2, 3, 4; 98, 1, 2; 107.
I. 1. Give from the preceding vocabularies words
allied in form to ayyeXo?, ap^w, ^dWco, 7rdXe/xo9, ireipa,
(J)l\o<;, crrpaTo^, <^uXaf. 2. Give the words allied in
meaning to ipcoToia).
II. 1. ret yap eVtrr^Seta ovk €(TTl e)(eiv. 2. Xiqoi
yap Kal ravTa i.^ oyv e^w eXTTiSa?. 3. ivTevOev ige-
Xaw€i hid tt}? 'ApayStct? Trapd rov ^v(f)paT'rjp irorap^ov.
114 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
4. ravra ol crrpanqyol Kvpco amjyyeWov ' 6 8e crrpa-
TLcoTT) eKoiaTco e7r€/xi//€ irivre apyvpiov iMva<;. 5. e/caXecre
Se Kal Tov<s MiXrjTov irokiopKovvTa^;, Koi rov^ (j^vydhas
iKeXevcre crvv avTco o-rparevecrOaL, 6. eSofe ravra, koX
dp9 pcoTTOv^; irefjiTTovo'Lv ol ^pcoTcov Kvpov rd So^avTa
rfj (TrpaTia. 7. koX aTpariqyov he avTov iiroLiqcre
irdvTcov ocroL et? KacTTcoXov irehiov dOpoii^ovraL. 8. So-
^aiverov 8e rov Srv/xc^aXtoj^ koI l^coKpdrrjv top ^A-^auov,
^4vov<; 6vTa<; kol tovtov^, iKeXevcre rjKeiv^ w? TroXefiT]-
(T(x)v Tca craTpdrrrj. 9. /cat irpwrov fxev irpos tov<;
0pa/ca9 eTToXepnqcra, koI vTrep ttJ? 'EWctSog eripLoypov-
fJLTjv, CAC ttJ? Xeppoi'ijcrov avTov<; e^eXavvoiv ^ovXop.evov<^
di^aipelcOai rov^ evoiKovvTa<i "EXXrjvas ttjp yrjv.
III. 1. They dwelt along the river. 2. Clearchus
is honored by Cyrus. 3. Issus is situated upon the
sea. 4. In Celaenae Cyrus remained thirty days.
5. But through the middle of Tarsus flows the river
Cydnus. 6. But Aristippus happened to be a guest
friend of his. 7. Thence he descended into a plain.
8. Ariaeus was giving his attention to the barbarians.
9. He made him satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia.
10. But he bade Cyrus continue to send ^ for him.
11. And he collects both his barbarian and Greek force
with the avowed purpose of making an expedition
against the Pisidians.
' Use the present.
READING LESSON. 115
285. Translate at sight : ^
The March of Cyrus through Lycaonia and Cappadocia.
Mera ravra i^eXavveu (TTa6yL0V<^ rpel'^ Trapacrdyya^
euKocnv et? ^Ikovlov rrjq ^pvyCas ttoXlv [cif^y ivravOa
ifieive rpw r)fx€pas. ivrevOev SieXavvei Sta AvKaovLa<;
(TTadfJLOV^ irivTe Trapacrctyya? TpLOLKOvra. TavTrjp ttjv
■^copap iireTpexpe hiapTrdcai tol<; '^EWrjcnv cJ? iroXefJULav
ovaav, evTevdev Kvpo^ ttjv KiXicrcrap els rrjv KlXl-
Kiav diTOTTeixTreL t7)v ra^icrTiqv \j^mckest^ ohov • /cat
crvv€7refx\jjev avrrj crTpaTicoTas ovs Mei/cov el)(€ /cat
avTOP Mevojpa • Kvpo<; Se /xera tcov dWojv i^eXavvet
Sid KaTT7TaSoKLa<; o'Ta9fJiov<; rerrapa? \_/oiir'\ napacrdy-
ya<; eiKocri koI irivre 7rpo9 Adva, ttoXlv oiKovyievriv koX
evSaifJiova. ivTavOa ep^eivav rjixepa<; TpeL<; • ip w Kvpos
dTT€KT€iP€ HepcTrjv Meya^ipvqv.
Observe and explain the position of x^pav,^EXX'Y](Tiv,
bhov, ovs, avTov. [55, a, ^.].
^ In this selection and in the exercises of (II.) above, the pupil should
note the arrangement of the parts of a Greek sentence. And in the sub-
sequent selections of connected text be should also note particularly the
order of the Greek, and follow more closely this order in his own writing.
116 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
LESSON XXVII.
PRESENT INDICATIVE OF €t/x,t. — STEMS IN
h V, AND A DIPHTHONG, CONTRACT NOUNS
OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Review 28 (active endings), 102, 103, 1, 2, 3; 104,
1,2,3; 151,1,2; 194,4; 208,«, i5, c; 218, 219, «,^;
221, 3; 223.
286. Verbs like Xvo) are called verbs in cd (21).
Those retaining -fxt in the first person singular of the
present indicative active are called verbs in /xt. In
certain tenses the verbs in /xt add the endings directly
to the theme.
287. Present Indicative of the irregular verb et/xt,
to be.
Paradigm (859).
Sing,
Dual.
Plur.
1.
eLfXL
io-fiev
2.
el
io-Tov
ecrre
3.
icTTL
icTTOV
et(rt
288. The theme of ei/xt is eV- (Lat. es, esse). The
final consonant of the theme, cr, is dropped before the
endings^ -/xt and -cri, and the theme vowel is lengthened
in compensation : elfxC is for ecr-/xt ; el is for eVt,
* Verbs in -fii are older forms, and retain in the singular some of the
earlier endings.
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 117
{i(T-cn) ; i(TTL retains the Doric ending -tl; elcri is for
e-v(Ti.
289. The present indicative of et/xi accents the ul-
tima, and all its forms except el are enclitics. For the
regular accent eari, see 104, 3. The present participle
ti)v retains its accent in composition : 7rap(x)v^ irapovcra,
290. Sterns in t-, u-, and ev- in some of their forms
suffer contraction.
Paradigms.
6 Ix^i"^
7} TToXt?
6 fiao-iXevs
(ixOv)
(ttoAi-)
(^(Sao-iXev-)
fish
city
Singular.
king
N.
l)(dv^
TToXt?
^acnXev^
G.
i)(6yo^
TToXeco?
^acrtXew?
D.
1^0 vi
TToXeu (ttoXcl)
/3acrLX€L{ paciXc I )
A.
l^Ovv
ttoXlp
^acriXia
V.
ixOv
770 Xt
Dual.
^aCTiXev
.A.V.
IxOv^
TToXei (ir6X€€)
/Bao-iXee
G.D.
ixOvoLi>
TToXeOLP
^acriXioiv
N.V.
lxOv€<;
Plural.
TToXet? (iroXccs)
/^ao-iXeis (pa<riX«
G.
ix^viov
TToXecuv
^a(TiXi(x)v
D.
IxOvCTL
TToXeaL
^ao-iXevcTL
A.
Ix^vs
TToXetg (iroXcas) ^acriXeas
a. Observe that the vowel stems have -v iu the accusative
sing., and the pure stem in the vocative sing.
118 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
h. Observe that the final vowel of stems ending in a diphthong
{^aa-Ckev-) is dropped before a vowel of the ending, and is retained
elsewhere; that contraction occurs as in simple vowel stems, ex-
cept the ace. sing, and plur. have -d and -as ^ respectively.
2gi. Most stems ill v are regular like t;(^u5. t^^^^?
the accusative plural, is for ixOv-v<;? Oxjtorie steins in
V have long v in nom,, ace, and voc. sing.
292. Most stems in i- and a few in v-, as Trrjxv'^,
cubit, except in the nom., ace, and voc. sing., insert €
before the t or v, and the latter is dropped : iroXecos.
Contraction then occurs in the dat. sing., nom. and
voc. plur. The ace. plur. irregularly conforms to the
nom. plur.
293. After c the gen. sing, has -wg instead of -09.
The accent remains the same as with -09, and the gen.
plur. follows the accent of the gen. sing.
294. Neuter substantives in l and v have the stem in
the nom. sing. (208, d) : to eirixaph suavity ; to acrrv,
town.
295. Gender,
1. Stems ending in ev are masculine.
2. Stems ending in i with nominative in t? are fem-
inine ; stems ending in v, nominative in V9, are mostly
feminine.
3. Stems ending in t, v, with nominatives in i and
V, are neuter.
^ e-coy, €-d, e-as arise by interchange of quantity from the original forms
Tjo^, -rja, -Tjas. Further explanation here is impracticable. See grammars.
^ vs was the original ending of the accusative plural.
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 119
296. EXERCISES.
I . ej^et TOiv iTnricov tol^lv. 2. avro? et/xi ov 1,7JT€l<;.
3. TTjT/ 8e '^XXr)VLKrjv SvvafiLV rjOpOii^ev oJSe. 4. e)(ei
Se SvvafXLP LTT7nK7)v rjv iravre^
opcjfJiev. 5. afjia rrj rjfjiepa ol
rJK0VT€<; irapa ySacrtXelw? airrfy-
yeWov Kvpo) wepl rrj^ ^acri-
Xecos cTTpaTLOLS' 6. Tov Se
^ap^apLKOV tTTTTCt? €19^ X^^^'"
0U9 '^cra^' ip Sefia. 7. iropev-
erai cu? /BacruXea iTTTrea? e^^o)^
c«J9 TTevraKoaiov^. 8. ra Sa>pa
pofiL^eraL wapa ^acnXei ripua,
9. Tovrou? TOV9 Ix^^^ o^ 2v-
pot ^€0^9 ivopLLiC^ov. 10. ra
apfxara et9 Ta9 ra^eiq tq)v
^^Wrjvotiv iXavvovacv. 1 1. /cat
ivravOa Kvpo<^ i^eracnv koX
5 /) \ '^ «T7\ \ / » / No. 9. 'Ithtcvs.
apLUfJLOP T(t)v tjAKrjvcov €770117-
crez/ €z/ TO) irapaheicro). 12. 6 S' '0/3dj^a9 vojxicra*;
eT0t/A0V9 etz^at aurw rou9 LTnrea^, ypd(j)eL iTTLcrToXrji/
Trapa /BacriXea. 13. ecrrt 8e koL ^acrtXe<w9 ^aaiXeia
iv K€XaLvai<^ iirt tol^ TTrjyaL<; tov M.ap(Tvov irorafiov
VTTO rfj OLKpoTToXeL ' pel 8e kol ot»T09 Slol rrjs TToXeco^s
KOL iix^aXXeu et9 tov MaCapSpof.
II. 1. You are wise. 2. And the military forces
appeared. 3. Yovi have both the force and country
^ (isj prep, govemiiig ;^tXioi;?. Cf. p. 104*.
120 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
of Cyrus. 4. Cyrus sends the tribute to the king
from the cities. 5. And fish also were in this river.
6. And there were horsemen on the left of the enemy.
7. Xerxes made this palace and acropolis of Celaenae.
297. VOCABULARY.
d/CjOOTToXi?, -ew9, 17, acropO' tTTTrtfcd?, -77, -6v^ of ov for a
/2,5(aK:j0O9+7rdA.ig) [aero- horse Q\ cavalry {^nn:eo%).
polls]. tcr^v?, -vo?, 17, strength^
/SacTtXeug, -e(W9, king; with- military force.
out the article, the king l^Oiq, -voq,6,fish [ichthyo-
of Persia ; irapa ^acru- graphy].
Xet, at court [basil, basi- ttoXi?, -ecu?, r), city, state
lica, basilisk]. [police, metro-polis] .
SvvafiLf;, -ew?, tj, ability, rd^i^y -ecu?, 17, arrangement,
force, troops [dynamite]. discipline, rank, line of
i^eTaaL<s,-€o}s»rj, inspection, battle, array, ^ic, [syn-
review. tax].
iTncTTokrj, -rj^, a letter tlijllo^, -a, -ov, valued, ho?i-
[epistle]. ored, in honor.
erot/A09, -7], -ov, or -09, -ov, ypd(^o}, to draw, write
ready, prepared (dat.). [graphic, grammar].
ev(xivvixo<?,-ov, of good name w8e, adv. thus, so, as fol-
or omen, euphemistic for lows (o8e).
dpLO-Tepo^, left ; to evw- 0^9, adv., with numerals,
vvfjLov, the left wing (sc. about ; prep. w. ace, to,
K€pa<;, wing), only of persons.
iinrev^, -ea)9, horseman ; pi.
cavalry. No. 9.
ADJECTIVE STEMS IN V OF THIRD DECLENSION. 121
LESSON XXVIII.
ADJECTIVE STEMS IN v OF THE THIRD
DECLENSION. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
IMPERFECT OF et/xt.
Review, 111, 112, 113, 116 (active
endings), 151,
1,2; 194,4; 290,291,292, 294.
298.
Paradigm.
Taxvs (raxv-) (824)
swift.
Singular.
N.
ra-yy^ Tayeia
Taxv
G.
rax<Eoq rayeia^i
raxeo?
D.
raxel (xaxci) raxeua
raxet (Taxti)
A.
Taxyv Toxe^o-v
Taxv
V.
raxy ^ Tax^'icL
Dual.
raxv
N.A.V.
rax^l (raxec) Ta;)(€ta
raxer (xaxcc)
G. D.
Plural.
raxeoti/
N.V.
raxei? (xaxecs) raxetac
Tax^a
G.
Tax^cov raxeiwj/
Tax^(^v
D.
rax^o-L raxetat?
Tax^o'L
A.
rax €19 raxeta?
Tax^cL
a. Observe that the stem of the masculine and neuter inserts
€ as in 292; that the neuter nora. sing, is formed like the stem
(294); that the gen. sing, is in 09; that the nom., ace, voc.
neut. plur. remain uncontracted.
122
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
b. Observe that the feminine is of the first declension, formed
from a stem in e (292), with the regular ending la (p. 89^).
299. Irregular Adje
dives.
Paradigms.
/xeyas
{fieya-, fieyaXo-)
great.
Singular.
N.
fjL€ya<;
fxeydXrj
ixiya
G.
fxeydXov
lJi€ydXr)<;
fjieydXov
D.
jxeydXco
(xeydXri
fjueyaXo)
A.
fxeyav
fieydXrjv
fjieya
V.
^iyo}
fieydXr)
Dual.
fi^eya
N. A. V.
IMeydXo)
fieydXd
fieydXo)
G.l).
fieyaXoLv
jjLeydXaiv
Plural.
fjieydXoLP
N.V.
jjueydXoL
fxeydXaL
fxeydXa
G.
fieyaXcop
fxeydXcov
fxeydXcjv
D.
fji€ydXoL<;
fjueydXai*;
fji€ydXoL<;
A.
fjL€ydXov<;
fxeydXd^
fjueydXa
TToXv?
{ttoXv, ttoXXo-)
muck, many.
Singular.
N.
TToXu?
TToXXlj
iroXv
G.
TToXXoi)
TroXXrjs
TToXXov
D.
TToXXw
TToXXfj
TTOXXS
A.
TToXvV
TToXXrjv
TToXv
V.
TToXv
TToXXrj
TToXv
^ IxeydXe also appears.
ADJECTIVE STEMS IN V OF THIRD DECLENSION. 123
Plural.
N. V.
TToXXoi
iroXXaC
TToXXd
G.
TToXXoiP
TToXkcJP
TTOXXCOJ/
D.
TToXXots
TToXXat?
TTOXXOL^
A.
TTOWOVS
TToXXas
TToXXd
Observe that in both /^eya? and ttoXv?, the nom. ace. and voc.
masc. and neut. sing., are decUned like the vowel-stems of the
third declension; that elsewhere they are declined upon the
stems fieyaXo- and iroXXo- respectively, like drjXo^ (7^)'
300, Imperfect of elfxC,
Paradigm.
Singular.
Dual.
Plural. .
1.
'^ or 771^
rjiiev
2.
^(T0a
ricTTOv or r\Tov
rjTe or ^crrc
3.
^v
TjaTTjv or tJttjv
Tjcrav
Observe that the initial vowel receives the temporal augment,
and the final a of the theme is dropped regularly before a con-
sonant of the ending ; that -aOa in the second person singular is
for -9.
301
EXERCISES.
I. 1. evTavOa tjv ttoXi? ip^fJ^'^ jieydXr), 2. 7r/)os
TO) TiypyjTL irorafico ttoXi? -^z/ oiKOVfievr), fxeydXyj Kai
evSaifxcov, 3. ej^et ra^v ittttov. 4. 6 oivo<i i^Sus
icTTLv. 5. Sta ra^io)v rov noXefjuov €7rotetro. 6. Tavra
dKov(ravT€<; ol ayyeXoi dmjXavvov, Kal rJKOv T(t)(y,
7. Kupo? yap enefjine ^iKovq rjSeos olj/ov. 8. T(op Se
TToXejjLLcov iTTTrets elcTLv iroXXoL /cat iroXXov ^ afiot. 9. to.
^ Depends upon a^ioi. Cf. 424,
124
THE BEGINNER. S GREEK BOOK.
8' iTTLTijSeLa €)(ei e/c T179 iv /xecro) -^copa^;, iroWrjf; kol
ayaSrjq oxxtt]^. 10. evrevOev e^eKavvei crra^/xoug 1^
ct? KeXatj^a?, r^? ^pvyia^ ttoXlp olKoviJL€P'r)v, fieydXrjv
KOL evSaLfJioifa,
11. 1. The satrap has sweet wine. 2. And the
asses ran swiftly. 3. In that place was a large city.
4. We have many men and much property. 5. The
king with a large army is advancing. 6. But thence
he descended into a plain large and beautiful. 7. He
marches twenty parasangs into Tarsus, a large and
prosperous city of Cilicia.
302.
^t/co?, jar, loine jar,
cf, six [hex-agon] .
iprjiJios, -7), 'OP, or -09, -ov,
^deserted, desert, unin/iad-
ited, toithout, deprived of
[hermit].
VOCABULARY.
Xou afto9, worth much,
valaable, serviceable ; to
TTokv, the (greater part ;
TTokvy adv., much, greatly,
far [poly-syllable, poly-
gon, poly-theismj.
rySug, -eta, -v, siveet [Lat., ra^vg, -eta, u, quick, sicift,
Lat., celer ; 8ta rojyioiv,
with speed ; raxv, adv.,
quickly,
diT-eXavvcoy drive off, march
aioay, yo aioay.
KaTa-paivo), yo down^ de-
scend.
T/ae^ft), run [troche, tro-
chee].
suavis^
ixeya^, fxeydXyj, fjL€ya,yreat,
larye [Lat., maynus ;
MUCH ; o-mega] .
oTj^o9, loine [Lat., vinum ;
wine].
01^09, ass,
7roXv9, TToWrj, TToXu, much,
many, Lat., multus ; iro\-
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 125
LESSON XXIX.
FUTURE OI €i/xt. — TENSES DENOTING COM-
PLETED ACTION.
Review 20, 27, 28, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 135,
191, 194, 1, 2, 3; 195, 197, 198, 229, a, L
303. Bedaplication,
The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect through
all their moods have reduplication as the sign of com-
pleted action.
304. Reduplication consists in the repetition of the
initial sound. Most verbs beginning with a consonant
(except p) repeat that consonant with e : Xvw, XekvKa,
XeXv/iat. This redupHcation appears in several Latin
verbs, as dedi from do, tetendi from tendo, A rough
initial nmte is changed to a smooth : Ovoi^ riOvKa.
305. In verbs beginning with two consonants (ex-
cept a mute followed by a liquid), a double consonant,
or />, the reduplication omits the consonant and consists
of e only : eVrpareu/Aat, i(,7]T7]Ka.
306. In verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong,
the reduplication takes the same form as the temporal
augment : 'qpcoTrjKa, yprjKa.
307. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a
consonant, the pluperfect as a secondary tense prefixes
the syllabic augment (113). Otherwise the pluperfect
retains the reduplication of the perfect unchanged : Xe-
XuKa, iKeXvKr] ; rjpcoTrJKrj ; iaTpdrevfJiai, iarpaTevfJirjv.
126 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
308. Compoimd verbs take the augment and redupli-
cation after the prepositions (135) : Karakvoi, halt, Kara-
XeXvKa, I have halted ; dir-ecnTaKa, I have separated.
309. The steal of the first perfect is formed by affix-
ing the tense suffix -/ca to the redupUcated theme : XeXi>-j
XeXv/ca.
a. A Hiigual mute is dropped before k : ireiOco (ttlO-), ire
ireiKa ; apird^co (apira^-), ijpTra/ca.
310. Some verbs have a second perfect formed by-
affixing -a to the redupUcated theme : ypdcjxD, yiypa^a.
If the theme ends in a labial or palatal mute, this is
sometimes aspirated before -a (plup. -y) or -ei) : dyco,
rjxoL* It has the inflection of the first perfect system
(351,4; 530, 544).
311. The perfect indicative represents an action as
completed at the present time : keXvKa, I have loosed,
312. The perfect, as a primary tense, has the regular
primary endings (28). The thematic vowel -a is changed
to -€ in the third person singular.
313. Conjugate the first perfect active of Xucu, Xe-
XvK-a, / have loosed; 0vo), redvKa; iroUoi, TreTroirjKa
(828).
314. The pluperfect indicative represents the action
as already completed at a given past time ; iXeXvKr), 1
had loosed.
a. The pluperfect calls attention to the completion or the
effect of the act; unless the attention is specially directed to
^his^ the aorist is regularly used,
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 127
315. The pluperfect active changes the final -a of the
perfect stem to -e. In the singular -v is dropped and
-/ce appears as -kt), -ktj, -kel. In the third person plural
the ending -a-av is used instead of -v.
a. In all forms the thematic vowel -et may appear : -eiv^ -et?,
-et, etc.
316. Conjugate the first pluperfect active of Xvco,
iXeXvKrj, ikeXvK€Lv, I had loosed ; TroLeco, eTreiroLTJKr] ;
iparrdo), '^pojTrJKrj (828).
317. The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle
is formed by reduplicating the verb theme, to which the
endings are directly affixed (286) : XeXvfiau, iXeXvfjirjp.
a. These tenses have the -fiL inflection.
318. The endings -crai and -cro of the perfect and
pluperfect middle are retained (27 ; Illy a, b).
a. Remember primary tenses have primary endings, and sec-
ondary, secondary endings (28, 116).
319. 1. Conjugate the perfect middle indicative of
Xvo), XeXvfJiaL ; TTopeijo), /BaaiXevo) ; alpeco, rjprjfjLav
(829).
2. Conjugate the pluperfect indicative middle of Xvco,
iXeXvfjLTjv, I had ransomed ; ^acriXevo), alpeo),
320. The stem of the future perfect is formed by
affixing -cr7e. to the stem of the perfect middle : XeXv,
XeXvcrofjiaL. It has the inflection of the future middle
(195). But a short final vowel is always lengthened
before -cro/iac.
128 • THE beginner's greek book.
a, A few verbs have a future perfect active formed from the
perfect stem : ia-Trj^co, I shall stand.
321. The future perfect indicative represents an ac-
tion that will be already finished at some future time :
XeXvcrofxai, I shall have ransomed.
322. Conjugate the future perfect indicative of Xu<y,
XeXvcro/xac ; TLfidco, 'ypd(l)a) (830).
a. The passive perfect, pluperfect,, and future perfect use the
same forms as the middle.
323. Learn the infinitives and participles of the per-
fect active and middle and of the future perfect middle
(828, 829, 830).
a. Observe that the perfect active infinitive takes the ending
'Vai, and changes a to e : XeXvKevai.
b. Observe that the other infinitives have the regular ending
-aOai affixed to the regular thematic vowel (115).
c. Observe that the perfect active participle ends in -tw? {-or),
(229, a ; 822), but the perfect middle and future perfect parti-
ciples have the regular ending -fievo affixed to the regular the-
matic vowel (229, a, h ; 817).
d. Observe that all infinitives in -ai and -vai and the perfect
infinitive and perfect participle middle and passive accent the
penult (195, <z, 3); that participles in -w?, Xe\v/c(o<;, are oxytone.
324. Future Indicative of elfxt (eV-), to he.
Paradigm (859).
Sing. Dual.
Plnr.
1.
eo-Q/xai
io-ofxeOa
2.
eb-et, ecTT/ ea-eaOov
icreade
3.
ecrrat ea-eaOop
id OPT at
TENSES DENOTING COMPLETED ACTION. 129
Observe that the future has the middle form (195) ; that in
ea-rai (for eaeraC) the thematic vowel is dropped.
Note, earac, like cov (289) keeps its accent in composition :
TrapearaL.
325. The endings -vrai and -vto can stand only after
vowel stems. The third person plural of the perfect
and pluperfect of themes ending in a mute are formed
by the perfect participle and etcrt and rjcrav respectively
(839) : apird^o) (apTraS-), o^pTracr/xeVoi etcrt, t/iei/ have
pillaged ; rjpTracrfjLevoL rjaav, they had pillaged. 8 of
tlie theme is dropped before cr ; elsewhere it is changed
to G-} The future perfect may be expressed in a similar
w^iy ; in the active it is regularly thus expressed : XeXu-
^0)9 ecrofjiaL, I shall have loosed. The themes of some
verbs, as KeXevco, are enlarged by the addition of a in
the perfect middle and aorist passive, and are then in-
flected like themes in 8. The perfect and pluperfect
indicative active are sometimes formed with the perfect
participle and et/xt. The participle here seems to par-
take of the force of an adjective. Other mute verbs
drop (T between two consonants, and -crOov, -a-Orjv, -crde
become -0ov, -erjv, -Be (837, 838).
326. Perfect active 2^ci'^ticiple,
Paradigm (822).
\e\vK(x)<; {\e\vKOT-)
having loosed
S. N. V. XeXv/fo)? \e\vKvia \e\vK6<;
G. XeXu/coTO? Xe\vKVid<^ XeXv/coVo?
K. T. \. K. T. X. K. T. X.
^ The conjugation of the perfect and pluperfect of other mute verbs will
he noiiced later (836, 837, etc.).
9
130 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
«. Observe that the stem of the perfect participle ends in -or
(323, c), and that the a (309) of the perfect stem disappears
before -or.
h. Observe that the forms of the nominative singular \ekv-
Koy;, \e\vKVia, XeXu/co? are irregular. The masc. and neut. are
of the third declension, and the fem. of the first.
327. EXERCISES.
I. 1. 6 Aapeiog i^e^acnXevKei. 2. at d/xafat rjp-
TTacr/ieVat rjaap. 3. ol cTTpaTLOJTaL 7r€7reta'/;teVot elcrCv.
4. TTjv iinaToXrjv yeypa^e. 5. ovirore en earai eVt^
TW dSeX(^(y. 6. r^ 6ho<; earau irpo^ /^acrtXea fieyav
els ^a^v\(hva. 7. 01 he iroXefiLOL re ret? cnrovSas
Kal Tovs opKovs XeXvKacTLV. 8. iravra toIs (TTparr)-
yoi9^ 7re7TOL7)Tai, 9. eTeTifxrjTO yap vtto Kvpov Sl
evvoiav, 10. 6 p^ev roiavra pev TreiroiqKe^ ToiavTa
he Xeyei. 11. 'Op6pTa<; he Ilep<jr]<; TrpocrOev eire^e-
/SovXevKei Kvpco. 12. hajpTTacTTo vtto tov ^acriXiKov
(TTparevparo^i avra Ta ^acriXeia. 13. 6 he Aapelos
eTeTeXevTTjKeL Kal 6 (jarpaTriqs hia^dXXei tov Kvpov
irpos TOV dheX(j>6v. 6 he ireideTaL re koI crvXXap^dvei
Kvpov a)s OLTTOKTevajv.
II. 1. The soldiers will have honor. 2. We had
broken our oaths. 3. The letters he had written to
the king. 4. You will have been honored by Cyrus.
5. But we have pursued the enemy through the vil-
^ 111 tlie power of.
2 The perfect and pluperfect passive may take the dative of agent;
tlie dative implies that the agent has an interest in the completion of the
action.
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 131
lages. 6. The Cilician queen has persuaded the king.
7. Everything had been done by the satrap. 8. Orontas
has ended the war against Cyrus.
328. VOCABULARY.
^acrtXi^09, -TJ, -6v, royal eVt-opAceiw, swear falsely;
[basilica]. mid., perjure ones self
opKO'^, oath. [eVt + o/Ofcos].
aiTov^T], -rjs, libation ; pi., reXevraw, e7id, finish ; intr.
truce [spondee]. end one's life, die \Ti\o^y
ToiovTO'^y -avTT], -ovTov, e7id~\.
dem. pro., such, such 'as ert, adv., yet, still ; with
precedes. iieg., no longer.
Sia-^dWcj, slander [dia- ov-nore, adv., never [ov +
bolical]. TTore] .
irpocr-dev, adv., before, for-
merly, sooner [tt/oo?] .
LESSON XXX.
CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF
THE CONSONANT DECLENSION.
Review 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 217; 221, 1, 2, 3, 4; 223;
295, 1, 2, 3.
329. Stems in tr {^ct- and a<r-) of the Consonant
Declension,
132
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
Paradigms.
6 ^coKpaTT]^ {^(oKpaTea-)
Socrates
%(OKpdTOv<; (Soi/cpctre-o?)
%(OKpdT€L {ScoKpaTe-'i)
XcoKpciTr) {^(liKpdre-a) XcjKpdrrjv ^
^(OKpar€<;
TO evpos (evpea-)
breadth
evpo^
Singular.
N. A. V.
G. evpov<; {evpe-o<;)
D. €vp€L {evpe-'i)
N. A. V. evp€L (evpe-e)
G. D. eupolv {evpi-oiv)
Dual.
N. A. V. evpT] (evpe-a)
G. evpojv (evpe-cov)
D. evpe-au
Plural.
TO Kpia^ {Kpeacr-)
meat
Kp€a<s
Kpea)<; (Acpea-09)
KpeaL {Kpea-'i)
Kped (Kpia-a)
KpeSv (Kped-cjv)
Kpea-ai
Observe that: 1. The masculine stems in a- lengthen the
final vowel like stems in v- and /o- (317). 2. The voc. has the
form of the stem and recessive accent. 3. The neut. has -09
for -€? in the nom., ace, voc. 4. The final a of the stem is
dropped before all case endings, and the vowels thus brought
together are contracted.
^ Proper nouns in -rjs, gen., -eo?, have a form in -riv of the first
declension. Ti(raa<})epvr}s, -ovs has also its vocative Ttaaa^ipvri of this
declension.
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 133
330. Some nouns in -aar have two stems, one in dr-,
gen. -aT09, and another in acr-, gen. a-os, contracted -ws,
declined like /cpea?.
331. Paradigm.
TO fcepa? {KepaT-, Kepaa-)
/wni
Singular.
N.
A.
V.
/cepag
G.
KepoLTO^ (fcepao?)
K€pQ)<;
D.
KepoLTL (/cepat)
Dual.
Kepai
N.
A.
V.
Kepdre (/cepae)
K€pd
G.
D.
K€.paroiv {KepdoLv)
Plural.
Kepcpv
N.
A.
V.
Kepdra (fcepaa)
K€pd
G.
KepaTcov {Kepdcov)
Kepcoj/
D.
KepdcTL
332. Gender.
Neuters are stems ending in a?- and es-, with nomi-
natives in -09 (see also 221, 4).
a. Note that these rules apply to grammMical gender;*
names of males of this class are of course masculine.
333. Give a summary of rules for the gender of
substantives of the third declension.
334. Adjectives with stems in e?- are of two end-
ings. The masculine and feminine have the same form
in -7^9 and the neuter retains the stem in -e?. They
follow the same contraction as the nouns with stems
in €5-.
134 THE beginner's greek book,
335-
Paradigm.
TrXi^pijs (irXry/oecr-)
fall
Singular.
Masc. & Fem.
Neuter
N.
TrXyjpr)^
TrXrjpe^
G.
irXijpovs {TrXtjpe-of;)
D.
Tr\rjp€i [irXripe-'i)
A.
TrXijpr) (TrXijpe-a)
7r\rjpe<i
V.
TrXrjpe^
Dual.
N. A. V. 7T\rjpei {irXijpe'e)
G. D. irXrjpolv {irXripe-oiv)
Plural.
N. irKripei^ {ttXtj p€-e<;) TrXi/jpr) (TrXyjpe-a)
G. 7rXrjp(x)v {TrXrj p€-o)v)
D. TrXrjpecn
A. TrXijpeLS irXrjpy) (TrXtjpe-a)
Observe that the masc. and fem. ace. plur. conforms to the
nominative (292).
336. 1. Decline like 7rXrjpr)<;, KaTa(j)av7]<;, -e?,
acrOevijs, -eg. 2. Decline TLcrcra(f)epp7j<;, opos, pirjKo<;,
337. EXERCISES.
1. Kol KXeapxov tol aXXa Kvpos iTLfXTjcre. 2. 6
■^ctpo? TTorajLLO? 17 J' TO evpos TreVre irXeOpa. 3. Sia
fiicrov 8e pel tovtcov TTora/xos Kdpao^ ovofia. 4. t^
CONTRACTS OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 135
/SacrtXelw? ^PXV '^^V^^'' OLvOpcoircov Icr^poL yjv. 5. rot?
Se ixTjKeai roiv oScov dadeprjf; rjv. 6. ovk dvOpcoTTCJV
dnopcov ^ap^dpcov eljjLL. 7. Kal XcoKpaTrjv tov^ A-)(aiov,
^evov oVra, iKeXevae 7]Keiv. 8. Kvpo<; 8' ovv dva^aivei
iirl rd oprj. 9. ra 8e Kpea tojp dypCcov ovcov rjv rjOea.
10. MeVo)!' 8e kol to arpdrevpia to evcovvfiov Kepas
ecr^e tov '^XKtjvlkov. 11. /cat TrdXt? avTodi coKelTO
fxeydXr] kol evhaup^cov SdxpaKO^ ovopoTi. 12. '^o'at' 8e
/cat aXXat Kcopat TrdXXat 7rXijpeL<; ttoXXcjv dyadwv iv
Tfi> irehico. 13. /xera raC^ra Kupo? i^eXavvei inl top
XdXov TTOTapov ovTCL TO €vpo<; Svo irXedpa, TrXrjpr) 8*
l^OvGiv p^eydXajv, ov<; ol Svpoi ^eoi)? ivopL^op.
Examine the accusatives in 1 (aXXa), 2 (evpof;), 3 (ovofia),
1 3 (eu/oo?), and note that they are used with verbs and predicate
substantives to define their meaning more fully or to indicate in
what respect it is taken.
Rule.
338. The accusative of specification ^ is joined with
verbs, adjectives, or substantives, to denote the parf,
character, or quality to which the expression refers.
Examine the datives in 4 (TrXrjdei), 5 (^iirjKecn') , 11
(ovojjLaTL), and note that they are used with nouns and ad-
jectives to denote in what particular point or respect their
signification is taken.
Rule.
339. The Dative of Respect, as a form of dative
of manner, is used with verbs, nouns, and adjectives
to denote in what particular point or respect tlieii
signification is true.
1 See p. 1011.
136 THE beginner's greek book.
Examine the genitives in 4 (av6 pwiroiv) , 6 (avO ptoircDv) ^
12 (a7a^wz^), and note tliat they depend upon words expressing
fuUness and want.
Rule.
340. Words oi fullness and want take the genitive.
Verbs signifying to Jill take also the accusative of the
thing filled.
341. EXERCISES.
1. They were in plain sight. 2. The soldiers lived
by eating meat. 3. He carried on war with Tissapher-
nes. 4 In that place were many villages full of food
and wine. 5. The country of the king was strong in
extent of territory. 6. Thence he marches two stages,
ten parasangs to the river whose width was five plethra.
7. There Cyrus had a palace and a large park full of
wild animals which he hunted on horseback.
342. VOCABULARY.
aypLO^, -a, -o^, wild. /cpea?, -W9, to, flesh ; pi.
aaOevri^,-i<i,withoat sfren(/th, meat [creo-sote].
iveak, fxecTTos, -t], -6v, fdU fM
eu/009, -ov?, TO, loidth. of, filled loith,
Icrxypos, -d, -6v, strong fJirJKOf;, -ou?, to, length.
\l(Tyy^\ ■ 6po<;, -ou9, to, mountain.
KOuTGr^avri^, -69, clearly rrkiOpov, plethron, 100
visible, in plain sight. Greek feet or 101 Eng-
/ce/oa?, K€pdTO<;, Kepo)<;, to, lish.
horn, wing of an army 7r\rj6o<;, -ov9, to [734j,
[horn, rhino-ceros]. fullness, multitude ; irXij-
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 137
Oei, in number, extent icrOia), eat, live on [eat] .
[plethora]. ^aw, live. Has t) for d in
7T\ijp7j<;, -e^,/iill,^lled with, contracted forms [zoo-
abounding in, complete, logy],
o-rros, corn^ tvheat, food avroOi, adv., in the very
[para-site]. place, here, there [av-
r€t;)(og, -ou§, to, loall, for- t6^.
tress [dike].
LESSON XXXI.
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICA-
TIVE.
Review 28, 32, 116, 189, 1 ; 194, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 208, a ;
223, 229, 3, ^, 6; 260, 323, d.
343. The passive voice uses the same forms as the
middle (20, 111, 322, a) except in the aorist and future.
344. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed
by affixing -6e to the verb theme. In the indicative
and in other moods before a single consonant of the
ending -0e becomes -Or). As a secondary tense it
has an augment in the indicative. It uses the active^
secondary endings (116) : iXvOrjv.
345. Some verbs form a second aorist with the
tense suffix -e instead of -Oe which becomes -tj when-
ever -Oe would become -Orj. i'ypd(f)rjv (652). It has
the same inflection as the first aorist.
346. The stem of the first future passive affixes -o-Ve-
* The tense is distinguished from the active by -^f,and not by endings
as in the middle.
138 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
to the lengthened aorist stem in Or}-, and is inflected
like the future middle (195) : XvOrjo-oixai,
347. 1. Write the aorist passive ind. of Xvw, iXu-
Orjv^ {^^\); Ovcoy iTv07]v ;^ irotea} ; jBovXevco. 2. Write
the future passive of Xvco, XydijcrofxaL (831); Ovco,
TvOyjaofiai ; ^ rt/xaw.
348. Explain the euphonic changes in the forma-
tion of the aorist and future passive of apirdl^o} (apTraS-),
rjpirdadrjv ; 7re/x7rw, iTrejK^Orjv ; dyo), tjX^'^^'
349. Learn the aorist and future passive infinitives
and participles of Xuw (831).
a. Observe that the aorist passive infinitive has the ending of
the perfect active -vat, and accents the penult ; that the aorist
passive participle forms its stem like the active participles bj
affixing -vr to the tense stem, XvOek (XvOevT-^) : that parti-
ciples in -et? accent the last syllable (323^ d).
h. Observe that the future passive infinitive and participle
are formed bj annexing the regular middle endings -aQai and
-iievo (115, 229, a).
350. The aorist passive participle is inflected like
XuVds (229, 3).
Paradigm.
Xv9eLs {XvOevT')
loosed
Singular.
Fem. Neut.
Xvdelcra XvOev
XvOeiaiq^ XvOevro^s
XvOeicTrj XvOevTL
XvOelcrap XvBkv
^ Aorist passive lias no thematic vowel (317).
2 6v- becomes rv- b 'fore -Br^v, -dqs, etc. (304).
Masc.
N. V.
Xv6ei<;
G.
XvOevTO<^
D.
XvOevTi
A.
Xvdevra
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 139
Dual.
. A.V.
\v0€PT€
\v6eL(Ta
\v6ivTe
G. D.
\vdevToiv
XvdeiaaLv
Plural.
\vdivTOiv
N. V.
\v0€VT€<;
XvOelcraL
\v6ivTa
G.
XvdevTcov
\v6ei(j(i)v
\v9evT0)v
D.
XvOelcTL
XvOeiaai^
kvOeicTL
A. \vOivTa^ XvOeLcrds \vOkvTa
a. Explain the formation of the nominative masc, fern.,
and neut.
b. Observe that all participles of the third declension ending
in 9, except the first aorist active, are oxytone.
351. The inflections of the different tense stems
(23, 195, h, fF.) are called tense systems. These are
divided as follows :
1. The present system, including the pres. and impf.
tenses in all the voices ; tense-stem XvVe.*
2. The future system, including the fut. act. and
mid. ; tense-stem Xva"/^..
3. The first aorist system, including the first aorist
act. and mid. ; tense-stem Xvaa-.
4. The first perfect system, including the first perf.
and first plup. act. ; tense-stem XeXvKa- (first plup.
XeXvKT)- or XeXvKei-).
5. The perfect middle system, including the perf.,
plup., and fut. perf. mid. and pass. ; tense-stem XeXv
(fut. perf. XeXvcrVe-)-
6. The first passive system, including the first aor.
and first fut. pass. ; tense-stem Xvde-, XvOrj- (first future
passive Xvdr^cry,.).
140 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
352. Some verbs, as in Latin, are defective, lacking
some of the tense-sterns. Others have second forms
of the same tense, called a secondary tense system,
which snpply the place of the first parts or are used
together with them, but often with a different meaning.
These are the second aorist (203), second perfect (310),
and second passive (345).
353. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the
first person singular indicative of each of the tense
systems used in it. Thus, Xico, kvaco, eXvaa, XeXvKa,
XeXv/xai, iXvOrjv,
a. The second tenses may take the place of the corresponding
.first tenses.
354. Write the tense suffix for each of the tenses
of the different tense systems of Xvw, rt/Actw. 2. Write
the indicative, participles, and infinitives of the different
tense systems of Xvw, ^aaikevo), 7rote&>, apTrdt^o),
Ohserve that the suffixes and redupHcation form the tense
stems, and the augment and personal endings inflect them.
355- Grive the principal parts of 6vo), 7tol€co, TLfidco,
/BovXevcx), dprrdi^ojf KeXevo).
356. EXERCISES.
1. VTT avTOv rjhiKrjOr). 2. r] eTricrrokr) irapd ySacri-
Xea iypd(j>r). 3. Kvpo^ iTTOirjOrj (rTpaT7)yo<; Trdvrcov
ocroL et5 KacTTcjXov neSioi' dOpoit^ovrai. 4. ravra
iv T(p dWcp Xoyo) SeSiyXwrai. 5. dXXo Se o-rpdrevfia
avTo) crvveXeyero TovSe rov rpoirov. 6. to Se o-ufXTrav,
AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 141
Sr]Xo<; rjv Kvpo? cnrevhoiv Tracrav rrji/ oSov} 7. KXeap-
^09 Kol avTco Kol To2<; aXXot? iSoKeu irponiJirjOrjvaL viro
'EXkrjvcov. 8. 6 S' dTLfiaaOelf; jSovXeverai ottoj? fiacn-
Xevaei avT eKeCvov. 9. to fiev ttoXv tov 'FiXXrjvLKov
ovTa}<; eTTeicrOr). 10. €7rt to evcopvfJLO) ro^evdrjvai ottXl-
TT}^ iXeyero. 11. KareTTeyi^Oy) vtto tov ^apeiov aarpd-
77179 AuSta? re koX ^pvyias T179 ixeydXr)^. 12. ol
TTatSe? eVl rat? fiacnXecjs Ovpai^ TraihevOrjcrovTai,
13. eVel 8e '^cra^' eVi rat? 6vpai<s rais TLcr(ra(j)€pvov<s,
ol fJL€v (TTpaTrjyol TrapeKXTJdrjaav elcro), ol Se Xo^^ayot
€771 rat9 Ovpau^ ifxevov.
Examine the accusatives in 5, 6 (a-v/jLTrav) and note that as
accusatives of specification thej express the particular way in
which the verbal notion operates.
Rule.
357. The accusative is used in certain expressions
with the force of an adverb. This is called the adverbial
accusative.
358. EXERCISES.
1. When they had heard, these things they were
persuaded. 2. Thenceforth he commanded, and the
others obeyed. 3. The Greek was shot with an arrow.
4. Miletus was besieged both by land and by sea.
5. But they were not hired for this.^ 6. We shall be
hired by Cyrus. 7. He was made satrap both of Lydia
and Cappadocia by the king.
1 Cf. 93.
* eVi with dative.
142
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
359.
VOCABULARY.
\6yo<;y word, speech, dis- irapa-Kokio), -KaXco, -cKoi-
course [Xeyw].
XoiTTos, -Tj, -6v, remaining ;
TO \oi7r6v^for the fttture,
henceforth, thenceforth
[XetTTO)] .
(rvfi-TTdS) -acra, -av, all to-
Xecra, -KeKhqKa, -KeKXrj-
/A at, -eKkrjOriv^ to call to
one's side, summon, urge
on.
wpo-TlfJido), honor adove,
before; esteem.
gether, entire, all ; to To^evco, shoot iDith arrows,
in shoot \t6^ov\, [in-toxi-
cate] •
euroi, adv., within, inside
of gen.
0770)9, adv., how, in what
wag ; conj., that, in order
that.
(TVjjiTrav, altogether,
general.
dBiK€(o, injure, wrong,
OLTifJidi^o) (artjLtaS-), OLTlfJid-
croj, etc., dishonor [ti/it^].
fii(r66a), let; mid. hire;
pass., he hired [/Atcr^o?].
/cara-Tre/ATTO), send down.
LESSON XXXII.
DEPONENT VERBS.'— IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Review 61, 209, 217, 219, a, b; 221, 2; 223, 290,
a, b ; 293.
360. Deponent Verbs.
Deponent verbs have in general the forms of the
^ Theme KoKe- becomes kKc- by syncope. Syncope is the dropping of
a short vowel between two consonants, Tor the future, see 254.
DEPONENT VERBS.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
143
middle with active signification: ixa^oiiai, Jic/ht ; /3ov-
Xo/xat, wis/i,
361. In most deponent verbs the principal parts are
the first person singular indicative of the tense systems
as they appear in the middle, — the present, future,
aorist, and perfect. A few deponent verbs have the
aorist passive instead of the aorist middle, and are
called passive deponents : i^yeojLiat, rjyTJcrofxai, rfyiqcrd^
fji7]v, rjyrjfjLaL ; /8ouXo/iaL, /3ovkT](TojJiaLj fie^ovXrjixaL^
i^ov\7]drjv.
362. Bpicopated stems in ep-.
Paradigms.
7raT7]p
V M^VP
avTjp
(Trarep-)
(/XTJTCp-)
(avip-)
father
mother
man
Singular.
N. TTarijp f^V'^VP d^VP
G. TTarpo? (TTarepo?) iJir]Tp6<;(iJ-rjT€pos}dpSp6<; {dvepo^)
D. irarpi {Traripi) fjurjTpidxrjTepi) dvhpi [dvepi)
A. TTaripa
V. Trdrep
N.A.V. iraTepe •
G.D. TTarepoiv
N.V. TTarepe?
G. iraTipoiv
D. irarpdcn
A. TTarepaq
fjLiqTepa
. dvSpa (dvipa)
fx^rep
dvep
Dual.
fJLr]T€p€
dvSpe (dvepe)
fJi7)T€pOLV
di^hpolv [dvipoiv)
Plural.
fX7}T€p€<;
dvZpe<; (dvepe^)
fJLTJTepCJV
dv8pa)v (dvipoiv)
fJLr)Tpd(TL
dvhpdcTi
lJLrjT€pa^
dvhpa^ (dvepas)
144
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
a. Observe that iraTrjp and fJi'rjTijp drop e of the stem in
the gen. and dat. sing, and accent the ultima : that in the other
cases they retain e of the stem and accent it except in the voc.
sing., where they have recessive accent and take the form of the
stem ; that in the dat. plur. ep is changed to pa.
h. Observe that av7]p follows the analogy of iraTrjp, but syn-
copates e whenever a vowel follows ep and inserts h be ween v
and p.
c. Observe that in these cases the accent is placed upon the
penult, except in the gen. and dat. sing, and dual and gen. plural,
which are oxytone ; oiv and (ov are circumflex'ed.
EexViaek. In English d is frequently inserted after n-, as,
tender, Lat. tener ; gender, Lat. genus.
3^3- Irregular Nouns.
e
0^
17 y8ou9
7} pads
6 TTOVS
rj yvvrj
6 Xaycos
{fiov)
(yav)
(ttoS-)
(yvvaCK-)
(Aayo)-)
ox, cow
s/iip
foot
woman
Ware
Singular
N.
/3ov<s
vavs
TTOVS
yvvTJ
Xay&i?
G.
poo^
vecos
770809
yvpaLKos
Xayw
D.
^ot
vrjL
TToSt
yvvaiKi
Xayw
A.
^ovv
vavv
TToSa
yvvaiKOL
Xojyoiv or -w
V.
/3oO
vav
ITOVS
Dual
yvvoLi
Xaywg
.A.V.
^6e
vrje
TToSe
yvvcuKe
Xayw
G.D.
^OOIV
veolv
TroSoti^
Plural
yvvaiKolv
\ay(^v
N.V.
/30€9
vrjes
TToSeg
yvvaiKes
\ayco
G.
^0(OV
veo)v
TTohoiV
yvvaiKcov
Xaycov
D.
^OVCTL
vavat
TTOCTL
yvvai^i
Xaycps
A.
^ovs
vavs
TToSas
yvpoLKas
Xayrju^
DEPONENT VERBS. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 145
a. Observe that in /Sou? and vav^ the final u ^ of the stem is
dropped before a vowel (£90, h) -, that they have v in the ace.
sing, and the simple stem in the voc. ; that in the ace. plur,
ySoO? and vav'i are for /Sov-v^, and vav-v^, v being dropped as
in t^^O? (291); that in vav^, va- becomes i^e- before a long
vowel and vr]- before a short vowel, and the gen. sing, may have
-ft)? instead of -09.
6. Observe that in ttou?, o of the stem is irregularly length-
ened in forming the nom. masc. sing. (ttoS-?), (194, 2).
c. Observe that yvvi] is of the first declension, but all other
forms come from a stem in yvvaiK- ; that the gens, and dats.
accent the ultima, and the voc. sing, takes the recessive accent.
364. Xaya)5 is of the Attic second declension, a form
of the second declension having stems in co instead of o.
This 0) appears throughout, but takes i subscript where
the regular endings have l. The genitive and dative
of this declension, when accented on the ultima, are by
exception oxytone. rj eo)?, daw??, has regularly ttjv ico.
365. EXERCISES.
1. TTOLvra afjevafiat. 2. kotttovctl tov^ ^ov<;. 3. Kal
Kvpco^ TTapTjcrav at Ik WeXoTTOvvrjcrov vrje^. 4. naprjp
8e Kal X€LpL(TO(f)o<; eVl tcjp vecop. 5. 6 8' dvrjp avTrj<;
Xayw? edrfpa. 6. €776187) 8' ecD? rjv^ Sie^aivov T7)v
yii^vpav. 7. ava^aivovai napa tov irarepa tov
Kvpov. 8. XafJi^dveL di'Spa<; cJs einfiovkevovTo^ Ttcr-
(Ta(j)epvov<; tols iroXecn. 9. ej(w avTcov Kal 7rat8a9
Kal yvpalKa^ iv XdpSecn. 10. toI<; fiev nocrl^ SpofMO)
^ These stems were changed to ^oF, vaF (f digamma), before a vowel
and the F then went out of use. F is equivalent to v or w.
2 See 212.
* XpanfMai regularly takes the dat. of means or instrument (249).
10
146
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
^pSivrai. 11. i^ovXero rco rralSe diJi<j)OT€p(o iTapeivai.
12. ets Trjv €0) Tj^ei ^acnXevs crvv rco (rrpareu/iaTt
No. 10. Nttvs.
lxa)(oviJL€vo<;} 13. ivravOa 8e iiTopevOrjaav 8ta rij?
MT^Sta? araOfJiov^ If Trapaordyya^ TpiaKovra etg ra?
XlapvcraTiSos Kcofjia<; rrj^ Kvpov kol ^acrtXect)? fJLrjrpo^.
XL 1. But I see many cattle. 2. His wife per-
suaded him. 3. Cyrus sent for the ships. 4. Cyrus
fought with him.^ 5. He was sent down by his father
as satrap both of Lydia and Phrygia. 6. He will
employ those who are obedient. 7. But his mother
begs him off and sends him back again to his province.
366.
dix<f)6T€po<;, -a, -ov,
pred. position.
dvrjpy dvhpo^;, man
hand ; Lat. vir.
^ov?, ^o6<i^ o, rj, ox, coio ;
VOCABULARY.
bothy yvvrj, yvvauKo^, woman,wife.
SpofjLOf;, running, flight;
Spofjio) Oelv, on the run,
double quick [drome-
dary] .
%U8'
pi. cattle [Lat. bos ; bu- ew?, ea>, 17, dawn [east]
colic]. Xayw?, -w, 6, hare.
^ What does fxaxovixfpos express ?
2 See 225, a.
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES.
147
fJt'TJTTjp, fjLTjTpos, mother :
[hat, mater ; mother] .
vojv^y v€(o<;, 77, s/i?^ [Lat. nd-
vis; nausea]. No. 10.
irarrip, irarpo^, father [Lat.
I pater; father].
7rov9, 770809, 6, foot [Lat.
pes; FOOT, tri-pod].
/BovXofiai, ^ovXyjaofjiaL, /8e-
^ovXrjjjLaL, i^ovXijdrjPy
will, wish [Lat. volo ;
will] .
rjyeofxaiy T^yifo'o/x.at, rjyr]'
o-dfjirjVj rjyrjjjLaL, lead,
command,thi?ik,{/o before^
guide^ w. dat. [ayw] .
drjpdco, hunt, chase, pursue
\Or\py idld beast^ .
KOTTTO), cut, jill^ slaughter
[chop ; comma].
jxd^ojJLaL, fxa^ovfJiaL,^ e/ia-
■^eadfjLTjv, pLepud^Tj pLai,
fght^give battle, w. dat.
irdp-eipi, be near, present,
arrive.
Xpdopai, x/>>?a-o/xat,^ ixpy)'
adprjv, KexpyjpcLL, use,
employ, w. dat. Has t]
for d in the contracted
forms ; cf. ^ctw (342).
i/;€u8a>, \j)€vcro), deceive, mid.
lie, cheat [pseud-onym].
LESSON XXXIIL
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENI-
TIVES.
Review 77, 79, a, b; 80, 81.
367. A noun in the genitive may define or limit the
meaning of another substantive. This is called the
Attributive Genitive.
368. The relations of the attributive genitive are
not expressed by the genitive alone, but implied by the
1 See 253, 254, 520, «.
'^ a is leagtlieued to r) contrary to the rule (198).
148 THE beginner's greek book.
relations actually existing between the genitive and the
words upon which it depends. These are generally
translated by the possessive case in English, but may be
sometimes best translated by ofyfor.from^ etc.
369. The most important relations of the attributive
genitive are the following :
1. Possession, or other close relations, as power,
quality, characteristic, etc. : ra Kvpov ^acriXeLa, the
palace of Cyrus ; 6 ^acnXeoj^ d8eX<^09, t/ie brother of
the king : ra Kpea avTcov, their flesh ; y) 18107179 T7}<i
TjSovrjs, the peculia7'ity of its flavor. The Possessive
Genitive.
2. The subject of an action or feeling : 6 Kvpov
0-70X09, the preparation of Cyrus : t) €(j)oSo<; tov arpa-
7evjLta709, the approach of the army ; tov Oecov Tr6\ep.ov
<j)€vya)v, escaping the vengeance of the gods. The Sub-
jective Genitive.
3. The object of an action or feeling ; 8ta 701^ oXe-
6pov TO)v crvarpaTLCJTMv, on account of the destruc-
tion of their fellow soldiers {the enemy destroy their
felloio soldiers) ; Kt}/309 iieraaiv iroLeiTaL tcjv 'EWtJvmv,
Cyrus makes a review of the Greeks. The Objective
Genitive.
Observe that the word upon which the subjective or objective
genitive depends contains an idea of action or emotion^ that this
implied action or emotion may always be expressed in the form
of a verb with the subjective genitive as subject and the objective
as object : o 'Kvpov ot6\o^, Cyrus prepares or makes prepara*
tion; Kvpo<; e^eTaaiv iroielTai rcov ^l^Wrjvcov, Cyrus reviews
the Greeks.
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATE GENITIVES. 149
4. Material or Contents^ including the class, or that
of which anything consists : TreVre dpyvpCov puva^, Jive
minae of silver ; I32ko<; olvovy a jar of wine ; KlXlkojt/
(j)vXaKTJ, a garrison of Cilicians ; (tIto^ jxeXui/r)';, panic
bread. The Genitive of Material.
5. Measure of space, time, or value : 7rora/x,o9 evpo<;
irXeOpov, a river of a plethron in width ; irivre rjixepcov
6So9, a journey of five days ; /xtcr^o? ef jjLrjvojv^ pay for
six months. The Genitive of Measure.
6. The whole after a word denoting a part, or the
relation of the whole to a part taken : Svo \6yoi tov
M.4.v(sivo^ aTparevfjiaTOf;, two companies of Menon's
army ; to ttoXv ^EXXrjviKov, the greater part of the
Greek force ; ol TrpcoTou twv TroXepLicov, the first of the
enemy. Partitive Genitive.
Observe that the attributive genitive has regularly the same
position as the attributive adjective (79) except partitives and
genitives of personal pronouns (1^ avTOiv), which have the predi-
cate position. The objective genitive also frequently has this
position.
370. Predicate Genitive.
With verbs signifying to be, beco^ne, and the like, the
attributive genitive (367) may stand in the predicate in
the relation of the predicate adjective or noun. The
most common forms of the predicate genitive are
possessive and partitive :
1. (Possessive.) at 8e fcw/xat HapvcrartSo? '^aav,
but the villages belonged to Farysatis.
2. (Partitive.) '^v 8e 6 %(0KpdTr}<; rcov d/a</>t MlXtitov
150 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
(TTparevofievcov, hut Socrates was of those taking the field
about Miletus,
371. EXERCISES.
I. 1. TjyeiTO^ rat 5 vavcri. 2. alrei Kvpov irepTe
fir)v(ov fjLLaOov. 3. to T€t;^09 ei)(e KikiKajv (j)v\aKTJ.
4. irvy^ave yap rctft? avrco kiroixivr) tcjp ottXitoji/.
5. Kal yap rjcrav at 7rdX€t9 TLcr(ra(j)€pvov<; to ap^aiov.
6. Tov 8e yiapcrvov to evpo^ Icttlv eiKocn Kal irivTe
7Toh(ov. 7. Tiov yap fJ^oixV ^^^(^^^^^ /^cit to ap^eiv
icTTL. 8. Kvpog yap eirepLire ^lkovs 17860? olvov,
9. /cat avTT] av dWr] Trpdc^acrt? '^v avTco tov aOpoi-
t,eiv^ aTpaTevfia. 10. ot Se Stwfai^re? tcop linTecov Ta^if
iiravovTOy iroXv yap r; aTpovOo^ {ostrich) airecnraTO
(fyevyovaa. 11. xptjfxaTa crvve^aWovTO avTco etg ttjv
Tpo(j)riv Tcov (TTpaTLCJTOJv at TToXet? e/coucrat.^ 12. e/ce-
Xevcrei/ avTov kaix^dveiv [xepo^ nap* iKacTTOv t(x)v
TfyefjiovcoT/.
II. 1. The captains of the Greeks remained at the
doors. 2. He received pay for six months. 3. But the
width of its (fern.) wall was twenty-five feet. 4. But the
fear of the barbarians was great. 5. But the villages
in which they encamped belonged to Pary satis. 6. But
Clearchus at that time made an assembly of the sol-
diers. 7. The CiHcian queen admired the order of
the army.
1 See 366.
^ TOV dBpo'i^fiv gen. (117) depends upon Trpo^ao-iy; as a verbal noun
the infinitive may be used in any case.
* Voluntarily. The predicate adj. sometimes has the force of an adverb
(271).
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 151
372. VOCABULARY.
ap^aLO<;,'d,'Ov, old, ancient; Oavfjid^co [^av/ia8-], won-
To dpxouov, formerly der at, admire,
[archives, archaic]. (TKTjveco, to be in or occupy
lJiipo<^,-ov^,T6^ part, share. a tent, encamp, be en-
7r/3o-<^acrt9, -eo)?, 7), pretext camped [p-Kiqvr}'],
[prophecy] . crvfi-^oiXko), bring together,
(jToko^, preparation, expe- contribute [symbol] .
dition. ^evyo)yflee,
Tpo(f)T]y-'YJ<;^nourishment,sup- /cat yoip, and (this is or was
/^or^(r/3e<^aj)[a-trophy]. so) for, for indeed, for
eTrop.ai, follow, accompany, even; h^t. etenim,
w. dat.
LESSON XXXIV.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
Review 73, 194, 1 ; 266, 344.
373- Verbal adjectives are formed from the verb
theme, usually as it appears in the aorist passive, by
affixing 'Teo<5 and •■to<;. The former corresponds to the
Latin gerundive ; TroiT^reo? (faciendus), that must be
done : the latter has regularly the force of the perfect
passive participle, 770117709 (factus), 9nade ; /xeraTTC/xTrro?
{i7r€fji(j>0r)v, aor.), summoned.
374. There are three degrees of comparison of
adjectives in Greek, — the positive, comparative, and
superlative.
152 THE beginner's greek book.
375. Examine the following : —
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
1. TTLcrro?, faitlifid 7riaT6-Tepo<s Trtcrrd-raro?
(TTtcrro-)
2. d(T(j)a\.ij<;, safe acK^aXicr-repo^ dcr^aXecr-raro?
(aa-^akecr-)
3. TToXefXLoSy liostile TToXefjucjrrepo^ - TroXe/xtw-rarog
(TToXe/xto-)
4. ixaKp6<^, long jxaKpo-repos /xa/cpd-raro?
[jxaKpo-)
Observe that the comparative is formed by adding -repo? to
the masculine stem of the positive, and the superlative by adding
-raro^ : that stems in o, retain unchanged in comparison when
the penult is long (1), or followed by a mute and a liquid (4) ;
otherwise the stem vowel is changed to g) (3).
Rule.
376. Most adjectives are compared by adding to the
stem of the positive -T€po<; for the comparative, and
-raros for the superlative.
377. Some adjectives, chiefly those ending in -vq
and -/305, are compared by adding to the root of the word
-Icov for the comparative, and -lctto^; for the superlative.
378. Certain changes occur when i follows the final
consonant of the stem or root.
1. t after X forms with it XX, fiaXXov (for jxaX-lop),
fidXa, very,
2. t after k, y, ^ forms with them regularly tt\ with
y it sometimes forms ^ : OaTTCDp (rax'icjv), ra^v? ;
ix€^0)v (Ion.), (iJL€y-io)v) , fxiya<;.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 153
379. Examine the following :
1. 9781;? {v^')i rjhicov, T^Stcrro^.
2. Ta^v<; (ra^-), Oolttcov ^ (ra^-l(t)v), tol^'LO'toS'
3. atcr^/309 (atcr^-), alcr^-lcjv, atcr^-tcrro?.
4. ACttACO? (/CafC-), KaK-lCOV, KCLK-LCTTOS.
a. Some adjectives have both forms of comparison, kuko^
has irregular forms, which will be noticed later.
380. Some common Forms of Irregular Adjectives,
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
1. dya^d?
2. /caXd?^
3. ixiya^;
4. TToXu?
KpeUTTCOV
/caXXtoji/
apto"T09
{oLpr-eTrj, fitness)
KpOLTlCTTOfS
{KpdT-o<;, strengtli)
koXXlctto^;
(/cctXXo?, beauty)
/leytcrro?
TrXetcrro?
{tto\^'^ ttXc-)^ (ttXcW)
Observe that the comparative and superlative regularly are
modified forms of -mv and -lctto^ ; that afieipcov is for a/nevLcov;
that t with 7 in fxey-tcov forms f (378, 2).
1 Originally the root is supposed to have been Bax-; by transfer of
aspiration the first aspirate reappears wlieuever the second is lost for any
cause, similar to the change in tcOvku (304).
^ KoKXcoav is formed from the stem of KdWos, beautij, produced from an-
alogy to 378, 1.
2 Syncopated, p. 112^
154
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
381. The comparatives and superlatives in -09, are
declined like Srjkos (73). The comparatives in -lcov are
of the third declension and are declined like evSaLfxajv
(266) ; but shorter forms may occur in the accusative
sing. masc. and fem., and nom., ace, and voc. plural of
all genders.
382. Paradigm (824).
Singular.
TrXelov
TrXeiovos
TrXetovL
7r\eZov
Plural.
irXeiOpes TrXetous
TrXeiovcov
TrXetocrt
7rXeL0va<; ttXciov?
N,
N. irXeLcov
G. irXeLovo'S
D. irXeCovL
A. irXeCova irXeioy
V.
G.
D.
A.
Dual.
N. A. irXeiove
G. D. irX^Lovoiv
irXeiova TrXeico
TrXeLovcov
irXeiocTL
TrXeiova TrXeCcj
a. The shorter forms come from stems in -09 ; -co and -ov<;
are contracted from o-a and o-e?. The ace. plur. conforms to the
nominative, as -ea? becomes -et? in ttoXl^ (292).
383. Decline KaKLCJv, /BeXricoVy fiei^cop, fxaKpoTepo^,
384. EXERCISES.
1. ot 8e Tjcrav Kvpco TTicTTOTaroi. 2. toI<; /xet^ocrt
TToXe/xtoi? ixa)(ovvTaL. 3. ra Se Kpia avroiv T^Sicrra
rfv. 4. 6 ovv Trp€(T/3vTepo<; irapcov irvy^ave. 5. Xa/x-
^dvovaiv avhpa<; otl^ TrXeLCTTov'^ koX /SeXricrrov?.
etc.
^ The sup., as in Latin, is often best translated by very, exceedingly,
2 Strengthens the sup. as ws ; Lat. quam^ as possible.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 155
6. TrXetov? rj Stcr;^i\t06 icTTpaTOTreSevcravTO irapa KXe-
oipX^' ^' Kvpos yap cTre/iTre ^lkov^ olvov tjSlovos
TovTov. 8. 'A/BpoKOfJid^; §e varepiqa-e ri^? P'^XV^ VH^^'
paL<; irivre. 9. XP^^V ^^ 7roXXa> varepov at rd^ei'^
(j)av€pal lyiyvovTO. 10. /cat rwt' iTnreojp ttoXXw dcrc^a-
XearepOL iap^ev. 11. iraprjv XeLpLcro(f)0<; iiri tojv
ve(i)v perdTrepTTTO^ vtto Kvpov. 12. (TvyfcaXei et?
7171^ aK7)pr)i' Uepaas tov^; dpicrrov^ roiv Trepl avrov
lirrd, 13. Aapeuco rjcrav Traiheq 8uo, TrpeafivTepo^s
pev *ApTa^ep^r)s, v€an'epo<; Se Kupo?. 14. TTpcoTOv pev
yap en Trats cot', ot* iiraihevero kclL <tvv tco dSeXc^oj
Kal (Tvv TOLs: dWoLS TTaLcrl, irdpTcov ^ irdvra KpdTLCTTO^s
ivopit^ero.
Examine the genitives in 7 (tovtov), 8 (/xa%T/9), 10, and
observe that they depend upon words denoting comparison.
Rule.
385. All words expressing or implying comparison^
superiority, or inferiority are followed by the genitive
when r\, than, is omitted.
Examine the datives in 8, 9, 10, and observe that they are
connected with comparatives and denote the excess or degree by
which one thing differs from another.
Rule.
386. The dative of manner is used with comparatives
to denote the degree of difference.
^ The partitive gen. may depend upon the sup. of an adjective (369, 6).
156 THE beginner's greek book.
387. EXERCISES.
1. They ran faster^ than the horses. 2. He will use
the most faithful. 3. He sends her back by the quick-
est way. ^ 4. They will make the first clays' stages as
long as possible. 5. Most of the Greeks were thus per-
suaded. 6. Those are by far worse than these. 7. All
these whom you see are more hostile to the king than to
the Greeks.
388. VOCABULARY.
atcrxpo?? -a, -6v, shameful^ later, afterwards [out,
base. utter] .
do'(f)ak'ifj<;, -69, not to he y^povo*^, time, season, period
tripped up, safe, certain. [chronic].
j/€09, -d, -ov, young [neo- o-Tparo-TreSevo), eyicamp,
logy]. usually mid.
trpid^v^, -ec(J9, 6, as adj. in vcrTepeo), he later, arrive
comp. and sup., wpecr^v- after, w. gen. [iWepo?].
Tepo<;, 7rpe<Ty8uraT05, old, ore, conj., adv., w/ien, he-
reverend ; ol TrpecrySets, cause.
ambassadors [priest]. otl, conj., t/tat ; causal, he-
varepoq, -d, -ov, later, he- cause, since ; tostrength-
hind ; as adv., vaTepov, en a sup., asjjc
aiieivoiv, aptcrro?, refers more to excellence,
/SeXTiojv, ^eXTLCTTOf;, refers more to bravery,
KpeLTTajv, KpdTL(TTo<;, refers more to power, strenyth.
389. Translate at sight : —
1 BaTTov. 2 cf. 357.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 157
The Arrival of Cyrus's Fleet.
'EvrevOev i^eXavueu crTaOfjLOv<; Svo irapaadyya*; irev-
reKaiheKa et? 'Icrcrov? 7179 KtXtKtas uokiv^ iirl ry
OakoLTTrj olKoviJiev7]v, yieydkiqv koI evhai^LOva, 'Ei/-
ravda efjueupav r]fjLepa<; rpei^ ' kol Kvpco iraprjaav al
Ik llekoTTovvrjcrov vrjes, rpLaKovra Kai irevre, Kai in
avToi^ vavap-^o<s [admiral) UvOayopa^; AafceSat/xdt^to?.
'Hyetro S' avrals Ta/iw? Alyvinno^ ef 'Ecfyecrov, e^^cov
i^av? erepa? Kvpov irevre koI euKocnv ' ats iiroXiopKeL
MikrjTov, ore Tio-cra^ipvu (f)L\.r) rjv, /cat crvveTrok4p.eL
Kvpcp 77/309 avTov. Hapijv 8e fcat XeLpL(ro(j)o<; 6 Aa-
KeSaLfJL6vio<; iirl tcop vecov, /xeraTre/LtTrrog vtto Kvpov,
€7TTaKO(jLov<; (seven hundred) e)(0)v oTrXira^ oiv ^ iarpa-
TTJyet TTapa Kvpcp. Al Se vrjes ojpiMOvv {lay at ancJwr)
77 a pa Trjp Kvpov (TktjvtJt/,
LESSON XXXV.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Review 9, 10, 24, 28, 70, 102, 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104,
1, 2; 116, 162, 164, 1, 2, 3; 369, 6, obs.
390. The personal pronouns are iyco (e/xe-), /, cru
(ere-), t/iou, and ov (e), gen. 0/ /dm, of her, of it,
* Gen. after verbs of commanding (399.)
158
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
91.
Paradigms.
Singular.
N.
<rp
—
G.
ijJLOV
flOV
crov
o5
D.
€fJiOL
fJLOL
croC
of
A.
if^i
lie
ad
Dual.
€
N. A.
VOi
ar(f)(0
G. D.
v^v
Plural.
N.
Vfiel^
v/xet9
ar^el<;
G.
r)fJiO)T/
VfJLOJV
a^Qiv
D.
rjfilv
VfJUV
cr(j)Lcn
A.
17/xas
v/xas
crc^as
Observe that iy(o is a distinct formation, that the other forms
of the sing, and dual are similar to those of the 0- declension
(61), but those of the plural are similar to third declension,
(223) ; that the stems of the plural are '^f-ie-, vfJLe-, a<j)e- and
that final € is contracted with tlie endings, except in a<f)i(n,
where e becomes I.
Examine the following : —
1 . Tavra SoKel fjuoL, this seems best to me,
2. KoX doi SrjXaxTO) rcLvra^ I will make known to you
these things.
3. '^oK^i KOLfjiol TavTa, this seems best to me also.
4. TTKTTa Xafji^dveL nap* ifxov, he takes pledges
from me.
392. The longer forms of the first person I^lov, i(xoL,
ifxe are more emphatic than the shorter ^ov, [jlol, fjue, and
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 159
are generally used after a preposition (4). The latter
forms, with the oblique cases in the singular of av and
ov, are enclitics except when they are emphatic (2).
Examine the following :
1 . o-vfjifiovXevoiJieOd croL, we ask your advice,
2. TrXota rjfxeLS ovk exojjuepy WE /mve not boats,
3. (TV re yap ''EWr^i' el koX rjfJLeL<;, for YOU are a
Greeks and so are we.
393. The nominatives of the personal pronouns are
generally used only for emphasis. In English the
emphasis would be expressed by a stress of voice
(2, 3).
Examine the following :
1. Xeyerat 'AttoWcov vLKrjcraL Mapavav iptt^ovrd
ol, Apollo is said to have conquered Marsyas, who con-
tended loith him,
2. o Se 7r€L0€TaL, and he believes.
3. ovTo^ iiroXefjirjcrev ifjLOL, he made loar upon me,
4. dTreVe/xTre Tov<i Sacr/xoi;? avraJ, he was sending the
revenues to him,
5. auro? (TV XeyeLS raura, you yourself say this,
394. The forms ov, of, etc., of the pronoun of the
third person are in Attic ^ Greek usually indirect reflex-
ives^ used in a dependent clause to refer to the subject
of the leading verb (1). The nominative of this pronoun
is regularly supplied by the article or demonstrative
(2, 3) ; the oblique cases by avros (4).
* The standard dialect.
160 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
395. EXERCISES.
1. (TV 7re)LL7r€t9 TCOV OTtXlTCOp} 2. 6 TpQTTO<; TTpO^
avOpo)TTO)v icrrl atcr^po?. 3. totjtcov Hei^ta? rjp^ev.
4. rj^iov dSeX<^6? oiv avrov TTepi(^Orjvai of ravTa ra Sojpa.
5. Kvpos rjpX'^ '^^^ \6yov wSe. 6. Trapa Kvpo) ol
ayaSoi dftwrejoa? nixrjq rvy^dvovcn. 7. to Se \017rov
rjfjielf; TreipacroixeOa ravTTj^ rrjq Td^eo)<s. 8. Huyprjf;
XajJi/SdveL Tov ^aj^apiKov arpaTov. 9. i-^ofjievoL Se
avTcov rjaav oirXlTai. 10. 7171' iin/BovXrjv ovk rjaOd-
veTo. 11. a€vo(f)cov v/xd? TrapaKaXelraL iirl rd KdXXi-
(TTa epya. 12. Kv/jo? 7'i79 fCjOav'yi79 d/couet. 13. tovtov
eKacTTO^; iinOvixei. 14. ou/c ohx^Xtjctovt ai rdv aTpaTLco-
Tcop. 15. u/Aets €/xot 0L» OeXeT€ ireideaOai. 16. 6 au-
T09 v/xii' cTToXo? eVrt /cat r)plv. 17. Acat eKcXeve
'KX4ap)(ov [lev tov Se^lov Kepco^; rfyeicrdaiy M.ivo}va Se
TOV SeTTaXov tov evcovvfjiov.
Examine the genitives in 1, 8, and note the signification of the
verbs upon which they depend.
Rule.
396. The genitive is used with verbs whose action
affects the object onl?/ in part.
a. The genitive with many of these verbs originally depended
upon yttepo? as a partitive genitive (371, 12). This principle
applies particularly to verbs of sharing or enjoying.
Examine the genitives in 5, 6, 7, 9 and note the signification
of the verbs upon which they depend.
^ Some of, etc.
personal pronouns. l61
Rule.
397. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to
touchy to take hold of, to begin, to make trial of, to aim at,
to reach, to attain, to hit, to miss.
a. These verbs affect the object only in part.
Examine the genitives in 12, 13, 14 and note the signification
of the verbs upon which they depend.
Rule.
398. The genitive is used with many verbs signifying
the action of the senses or of the mind ; as to hear, taste,
smell, remember, forget, care for, neglect., spare, wonder
at, desire.
a. The genitive with some of these verbs (397, 398) depends
upon the same principle as 396 ; with others it depends upon
the nominal idea of the verb instead of the verbal. When the
verbal idea prevails, or when they affect the object as a whole,
they take the accusative (10), (iirL^ovXt^v).
Examine the genitives in 3, 17, and note the signification of
the verbs upon which they depend.
Rule.
399. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule,
command, to lead as commander.
*
400. 1. The Greeks began the crossing. 2. He
will not neglect the Greeks. 3. He will take care of
the barbarians. 4. But when Cyrus called me I pro-
ceeded. 5. You do not desire to accompany me.
6. He commanded the peltasts. 7. And this one
missed him.
11
162
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
401. VOCABULARY.
ipyop,wor^,deed[Ge-orQe]. d-/x€\ea>, de careless of,
al(TddvoiJiai,perceive,learn; neglect [/uteXct].
w. gen., hear^ hear of eVt-/>L€Xeo/xat, care for, give
[aesthetics]. attention to [/x,e\€t].
dixapToivco, miss, fail or err
in conduct,
LESSON XXXVI.
REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, AND POSSES-
SIVE PRONOUNS.
Review 10, 70, 162, 163, 164, 1.
402. The reflexive pronouns are ifiavrov, iiJLavTrj<;,
of myself ; ceavrov, (reavrrj^, of thgself ; iavrov, iavTrj(;,
iavTov, of himself of herself of itself
403-
Farad
ilGMS.
Sing.
Plur.
Masc
Fern.
Masc. Fern.
r^ »
^
> '^
t <^ »'> e ^ s'^
(jr. efiarrrov
€fjiavTr)<;
i)yiO)v avTOiv rjfKop avTcov
T\ '
r\
S >"
e« »" t'* s*^
JJ. efjbavTO)
efjuavry
TjiXLV avToi9 77/xtz^ avrat?
A '
/
» /
e<^ >/ e^ >.i
A. efjuavTOT/
€fJbaVT7)T/
')7^a9 avrov? rjiJia<; avTa<;
Sin
&.
Masc.
Fem.
G.
^ «
« «
(TeavTOVy (TavTOv
(reavT7)<;, aavrrjf;
D.
(TeavTMy cravTco
(reavrfj, aavrrf
A.
(TeavTOVy cravTov
aeaxjTTJvy (ravnJT/
Plur.
G.
L ^ y ^
« « > /^
VJJLCiJV aVTCx)V
V/Aft)^' aVTdiV
D.
£ « , «
£ « , /^
v^xiv avTOi^
v/xtz^ avrai^
A.
I '^ , /
1 '> > ^
v/xa? aurou?
u/Lta? aura?
REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 163
Sing.
Mase.
Fern.
Neut
;,
G.
iaxjTov,
avTOv
kavrrj^;,
avT7]<?
iavTov,
avTov
D.
iavTM,
avT^
iavTjj,
avrfj
iavTcp,
avTcp
A.
eavTov,
avTOv
Pluk.
avrrjv
iavTo,
e /
avTO
G.
iavTOiv,
avTCJv
kavTcov,
avTojp
eavT(x)Vi
avT(x)v
D.
iavTOL^,
avToh
iavTois,
avroLS
€aVT0t9j
avTol^
A.
iavTOv^,
avTov^
iavTois,
avrds
iavrd,
avrd
Observe that the reflexives are formed from the stems of the
personal pronouns (390) compounded with the intensive auro? ;
that in the plural the two pronouns are declined separately in
the first and second persons, and sometimes in the third.
Examine the following :
1. d(j)L'mr€veL inl ttjv iavrov aKrjvTJp, he rides back
to his 010)1 quarters,
2. ore 6/oai tt)^ creavrov dpyy]v crojlflvTCLy I see that
you retain your own province,
3. Trap ayye Wet Tw 'ApLaTLmra) d7ro7re/x,i//at TTpo<; iav-
rov ro arpdrevfjia, he orders Aristippus to send the army
to him.
404. The reflexive pronouns regularly refer to the
subject of the clause in which they stand. But in a
dependent clause (3) they sometimes refer to the sub-
ject of the leading verb, and are then called indirect
reflexives (394).
405. The reciprocal pronoun is dXXTjXcov, of one an-
other, formed from aXXo? (163) compounded with itself,
dXk-rjko- (for aXX-aXXo).
164 THE beginner's greek book.
406.
Paradigm.
Dual.
G.
dWyjXoLV
dWyjXaiv
dWijXoLv
D.
dWijXoLv
dWrjXaiv
dWyjXoLv
A.
dWyjXoj
dWijkd
Plural.
dXXTjXcj
G.
dWtjXcov
dWijXcDV
dWtjXojv
D.
dWijXoL^
dWnjXaL^
dXXyjXoL';
A.
dWij\ov<;
dXXrjXd^
dXXrjXa
Observe that aXkrjXoiv has the endings
5 of aXXo9; that iu the
accusative
plural neuter.
where the last i
sylh
ible is short, it has
the orifi^inal accent of dWo^.
407. The most common possessive pronouns are e/xd?,
7n?/, ao^, thy, rjixerepos, our, v/xerepo?, your. These
pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pro-
nouns. They are declined like adjectives in -09 (70).
They have nearly the same force as \k\^ possessive geni-
tive of the personal pronouns, but are more definite,
especially with the article.
408. EXERCISES.
1. TToXefjiLOi dXXijXoL<; rjcrav ufxerepOL (jTparioyTai.
2. e'jLto? 8e a8eX(^09 dKovei crov tolovtov; Xoyov;.
3. rJKOvcre Ti(T(Ta(j)€pvov<; top Kvpov cttoXov. 4. fcat
TOiv Trap iavT^ Se ^ap^dpojv eVe/xeXetro. 5. eSofe
TovTO) Tov 7rpo<; ifie TroXefxov iravcracrOai. 6. ivravOa
Si€)(ovaLV dXXijXojv fiacnXevf; re /cat ol EXXrjve'^ W9
TpiaKovra crraSta. 7. avveXe^e to avrov cTTparevixa
;Ycopl9 TMv dXXojv. 8. Upo^evof; kol Mevcov elcriv
rjfxeTepob crTpaTiqyoi. 9. ecrri tco ijjico aSeXt^oi TToXi-
reflexivj:, reciprocal, possessive pronouns. 165
fJLLO<;, ijxoi Se (f)L\os /cat Trtcrrd?. 10. rrj^ e\ev6epia<^
vfjia<; iyo) evSaifJiOPi^a). 1] . o"e evhanxoviaa rrj^ aperrj^;.
12. e/AOt ovp SoKel ov)( (opa eXvai y]p2v dfjuekeiP rjiicop
avTOJv. 13. /cat avyKakel et? rrji' iavTov aKiqvrjv
Uepaas tov^ api(TTOv^ tojv irepi avrov eTrra.
Examine the genitives in 'Z, 3 (TLa(ja(f)epvov^)y and note the
signification of the verbs upon which they depend.
Rule.
409. Many verbs take a genitive of the source.
a. Verbs of hearing, learning, etc._, may take an accusative
of the thing heard and genitive of the person heard from.
Examine the genitives in 5, 6, and note that they express the
point of departure or the idea of separation.
Rule.
410. The genitive is used to denote that from which
anything is separated or distinguished. Thus it follows
verbs signifying to remove, to restraiii, to release, to
cease, to fail, to differ, to he apart, etc.
Examine the genitives in 10, 11, and note that they express
cause.
Rule.
411. The genitive is used with verbs of emotion to
express cause.
Examine the genitive in 7 {aXKfov)^ and note the word upon
which it depends.
Rule.
412. The genitive follows many adverbs of place and
time.
166 THE beginner's greek book.
413. EXERCISES.
1. They encamped near one another. 2. I shall
deprive myself of hopes of safety. 3. He hindered
the army from crossing. 4. Clearclms heard from Cy-
rus of the multitude of the barbarians. 5. Orontas
ceased from war against Cyrus. 6. The two armies
were distant from one another twenty stadia. 7. He
summoned the captain to himself.
414. VOCABULARY.
aperrj, -17s, fitness, virtue, eu-Sat/xo^t^o) (evSat/xo^'tS-),
bravery, valor. count happy, conyrata-
ikevOepia, -dsy/reedom, lid- late [8at/xa>v] .
erty. aTepeco, deprive, rob.
ardhiov, stadium, 600 x^P''^? adv., apart, away
Greek ft., 5821 Eng. ft. fronu
Bl-€X(o, hold apart, be dis-
tant from.
LESSON xxxvn.
THE IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND
PASSIVE.
Review 16, a, b -, 25, 202, «; 304, 343, 344, 351,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
415. The tenses commonly used in the imperative
active are the present and aorist. The present denotes
an action as continued or repeated, the aorist denotes
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 167
a simple occurrence of the action ; the time of both is
the same (202, a).
416. The tenses occurring in the middle and passive
are the present, aorist, and perfect.
417. The personal endings of the imperative are as
follows :
Active.
Middle and
Passive.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Sing. Dual.
Plur.
2.
-Bl
•TOP
-re
-(TO -crOov
-crOe
3.
-TO)
-TO)V
-vTcop or
-Tojcrav
-crdco -(t6o)v
-aOcDv or
-cr6a}(Tav
-61 is always dropped after a thematic vowel.
418. The imperative has the thematic vowel of the
corresponding tenses of the indicative, o before v, and e
elsewhere (25). In the aorist active and middle it is a.
But by exception the second person singular of the aor-
ist active ends in -01/,. and of the aorist middle in -at.
The middle endings, except the second person singular,
differ from the active in having -aS- for -r-.
419. 1. Write tlie present and aorist imperative act-
ive and middle of \vo) : 2. Xvc, 3. \v€T(o, k.t.X. ; 2. Xv-
(Tov, 3. Xvcrctrw, etc. (825, 827).
2. Write the present, aorist, and perfect imperative
middle and passive of Xvco (825, 829, 831):
Pres. Mid. & Pass.
AoR. Mid.
Perf. Mid. & Pass.
Aor. Pass.
2. Xvov
XvcraL
XeXvcro
Xvdr)TL
3. \vicr6o)
\vcrdada}
Xekvo'da)
\v6tJto)
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
168 THE beginner's greek book.
Observe that in the second person singular of the present cr is
dropped after a thematic vowel (27), and eo contracted to ov;
that in the aorist passive the active endings (344) are used ;
that -6l is changed to -tl to avoid the recurrence of a rough
mute at the beginning of successive syllables (304) ; and that 6r]-
stands before a single consonant^ otherwise Be- remains (344).
420. Write the indicative, imperative, participles,
and infinitives of Ovco^ fiovXevco, ^ao-iXevw, dpTrdt^o).
Examine the following :
1. /X17 9aviJbd^€T€y do not he surprised.
2. \i^ov 8e KoX (TV, and do you also speak,
3. Xe^aTO) 6 arpaTLaiT7]<Sy let the soldier speak.
4. 7rp60v^xo<i (jyaivecrOa), let him appear zealous.
Rule.
421. The imperative is used to express commands,
exhortations, and entreaties. Its negative is /xt/.
422. Negatives,
ov is used in denying statements of fact, ixtj in other
cases ; ov is positive and definite, /xt; indefinite.
423. EXERCISES.
1. /at) Xeyere. 2. ov Xeyere. 3. at crTTOpSal fjuepop-
T(i)V. 4. ovTCt) TTjv yv(i)fjL7)v i^€T€. 5. av Xafji/Bave Tov
l3ap^apLK0v crrparov. 0. 6 r}fjL€repo<; (rrparriyo^ iroXi-
fxov TTavadcrdco. 7. riyiiqOivTOJV ol dyaOoi. 8. Ittttov
rjyopacre irivre fivcov dpyvpiov. 9. ecrecrOe dpSpe^; ol^lol
Trj<; iXev9€pLa<; rj<; vfxd^ iyo) evhaifiovit^o). 10. rd 8e
iiTLTyjSeLa TTapei)(ov ttoXXov dpyvpiov. 11. (XTrocrTracrai
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 169
aTTO Tov TTOTafJiov TO Se^LOP /cepa9. 12. ^aackev^ ov
/xa^etraL 8e/ca rjfiepwv. 13. ov ttoWov ^povov tovtov
-qhiovi olvco iireTvyxave. 14. dkka, el /Bovkeu, /xeVe iirl
T(o crr/jarev/xart, eyw 8' iOekco Tvopevecr 6 ai.
Examine the genitives in 8 (fMvcov), 9 {eXevOeplas:), 10 (apyu-
pLov), and observe tliat thej denote price or the worth, value, as
Avorthy of, valued at, etc.
Rule.
424. The genitive is used to denote the price or
value of a thing (301, 8).
Examine the genitives in 12, 13 {xpovov), and note that they
denofe the time within which.
Rule.
425. The genitive is used to denote the ti7)ie within
which an action takes place.
426. The objective genitive follows many adjectives
which are kindred in meaning or derivation to verbs
taking the genitive : joiv el<; tov irokepov ipycop <^iXo-
pa0€(TTaTO^ rjv, he teas most eager to learn military
exercises.
a. The genitive follows adverbs derived from adjectives taking
the genitive : ol ifiTreipco'i avTov e^ovTe^, those who are ac'
quainted with him.
427. EXERCISES.
1. They advanced to the wall of Media. 2. The
man is a valuable^ friend. 3. They buy provisions
^ worth much.
170 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
at a great price.-^ 4. He bids you come during the
night. 5. Let the messenger of my brother be hon-
ored. 6. Procure yourselves provisions. 1 . It seems
best to me not ^ to fight within ten days. 8. Advance
to the mountain, but T wish to remain by the army.
428. VOCABULARY.
yvcofjLr), -179, opinion, plan, ira^iyoi, hold near, offer,
judgme7it [gnome] . furnish, make.
vv^,vvKT6^,j],ni(jht\^mwi\. el, eonj., if,
(j)L\oiJLa07]<;, '€<;, fond of fte^P^' adv., u^) to, until,
learning, eager to learn gen. ; conj., until, Lat.
[fiavOdvo)]. dum, donee, etc.
dyopdi,(o, [dyopaS-], dug, fjutj, adv., not, used with all
purchase [ayo/oa] . moods expressing depen-
iTTL-rvyxdvo), chance upon, dent or indefinite ideas.
meet with, find.
LESSON xxxvm.
IMPERATIVE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE OF
CONTRACT VERBS.
Review 150, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 152, 153, 154, 1, 2, 3 ;
242, 1, 2, 3.
429. Write the present imperative active and middle
ol Tijido), TTOieo), SrjXoo) (843, 844, 845):
1 Cf. 423, 10.
^ (xfj ; the infinitive, bein^ indefinite, will take firj (422).
IMPERATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 171
Active.
2. rifxae, Tifxa Trotee, iroCeL 8t]\o€, SrjXov
S. TlfJiaeTcoy Ti/xdro) Troteero), TroLetTco SrjXocro), SyjXovrcti
K. r. \. K. r. X. K. T. X.
Middle.
2. TlfJLoioV, TLfJiCO TTOlioVy TTOIOV StjXoOV, StjXoV
3. TljxaecrOco, TroieecrOo), STjkoecrda)
rl^acrOo) TTOLeicrOa} Sr)XoTj(rdct)
K.T.X. K.T.X, K.T.k,
430. EXERCISES.
I. 1. rjyefjiova atret Kvpov. 2. (f)i\ofi.aO'r)<; rjv tcop
dfjb(f)l rd^eL^;. 3. rfj Kvpov <^tXta ^prjcrOe. 4. ra St-
rata Troteire. 5. /x'17 77/309 T0V9 ©poLAca? TToXe/xei. 6. TTa-
paKcvkeiTO) rov^ iavrov firj fid^ecrdaL. 7. Trotetro*
iKKkrjo-iav to>v avrov arpaTLayTcov. 8. /xi^ TTOtet ravra,
w KXecLp)(€. 9. pLi(jdov(T0o)v ol crrpartwrat vficov iirl
TovTcp. 10. ci'yAcaXet et? r'l^i' cravrou cTKiqvr^v Ylepcras
TOV<; dpia-TOV?. 11. STyXoU^'TOH^ OV9 TLfJiOXTL. 12. TTCt-
pdaOoiv elcr^dXXeiv 619 ri^z^ KiXt/ciai^. 13. ra a/cpa
p.rjT€ ^ Kvpo<; fjajre ol KlXlk€<; KaraXapi^avovTOiv.
14. KXeap^o^ p^v rov he^iov K€p(t)<; rjyeCcrda), Mevoiv
8e Tov evojvvpov.
II. 1. But choose commanders. 2. Try to conquer
the barbarians. 3. Lead the way^ to the provisions.
4. Fear to embark in the boats. 5. But shout to one
another not to run double quick. 6. Let him make an
assembly of the Greeks and barbarians in the plain.
7. Withdraw from the royal army a journey of five
days.
^ fir}T€ . . . firjre, neither . . . nor. ^ Omit.
172 THE beginner's greek book.
431. The first three chapters of Xenophon's Anaba-
sis, divided into suitable portions, are introduced with
the following lessons. A few sentences, chiefly such as
contain matter irrelevant to the main narrative and rare
words, have been omitted. Sometimes a word or phrase
has been changed for a simpler form, but the text for
the most part has been retained intact. The meaning at
least has in no way been changed.* The selections are
introduced in the order of the narrative as the pupil
becomes prepared to understand their principal con-
structions. They may be omitted until the lessons have
been completed, and then taken with a review of the
lessons. But it is better that they be taken in order
with the lessons, and be read according to the directions
of 55, a, b ; 96, 1, 2, 3 ; 97, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 107, p. IIS^.
The pupil should endeavor to recognize sentences that
have occurred in the preceding selections, and to apply
the rules of syntax to the new ones. With this in view,
rules especially applicable to each selection are given at
the beginning as a review, and such foot-notes as the
pupil should need have been added to aid him in apply-
ing the principles of syntax. The more analytical study
should be deferred to later reading. The meanings of
new words are given in special vocabularies ; but they
should be further studied in connection with the gen-
eral vocabulary.
432. THE STORY OF THE ANABASIS.
In 407 B. c. Cyrus the Younger, the second son of
Darius Nothus, king of Persia, was appointed by his
READING LESSON. 173
father satrap of Lydia, Pbrygia the Greater, and Cappa-
(locia. At this time he was only seventeen years of age,
but even then he aspired to the throne of his father, and
began to prepare, if need be, in the event of the accession
of his elder brother Artaxerxes to the throne, to wrest it
from him by force. When now, at the death of Darius
Artaxerxes became estabhshed in the kingdom, Cyrus
began to execute his plans; and accordingly in the spring
of 401 B. c. he set out from Sardis with a large army.
The first book of the Anabasis, the march upward,
tells the way in which Cyrus levied his Greek army of
over ten thousand, and the incidents of the journey
until they reached the plain of Cunaxa, about fifty miles
from Babylon, where the decisive battle took place. In
this battle the forces of Cyrus were victorious, but
Cyrus himself through his own rashness was slain, and
thus the purpose of the expedition was defeated.
The remaining books, which should be called the
" Catabasis," the march downward, gives an account of
the retreat of the ''Ten Thousand," among whom was
Xenophon, the historian of the enterprise, and of their
adventures until, in the spring of 399 b. c, in Asia
Minor they joined the army of Thibron.
ZJ.33. Accession of Artaxerxes. Imprisonment and Pardon of
Cyrus.
Review 92, 97, 1, 2, 3; 119, 121, 147, p. 11\ 236,
\,b,c', 237, 238, 245, «; 268.
1. Aapetou fcac napucrctrtSo? ytyi^oi^rat ^ TraiSe? Suo,
174 THE beginner's greek book.
eVet 8e -qaOdvei Aapeto? koX vTTCJTTTeve Trjv Tekevrrjv
Tov yStoVj ifiovXero roi iraihe afxcfyoTepcx) Trapclvai.
2. 6 fJb€P ovv TTpecr/BvTepos Trapwv irvy^ave ' Kvpov 8e
fJL€Ta7r€fJb7r€TaL OLTTO TTJS OLp^V^ V^ OVTOV (TaTpdTrrjv inoL-
iqcre? ava^aivei ovv 6 Kvpos ro)v '^Wtjvcov €\o)v
oirXiTas TpLaKocFLOv^, dp^opTa 8e avTcov UevCav Uap-
pdcriov.
3. 'E7r€t8i7 8e ireK^vrrfO'e'^ Aapelo<;, kol i^acriXev
crev^ *ApTa^€p^r]<;, Ticrcra(j>€pv7j<; Sia^dWeu tov Kvpov
7r/)09 TOV dSeX(j)ov co<; iTn/SovXeveL avTco. 6 8e ireideTai
re Kcd G-vWafx/3dv€L Kvpov cJ? aTroKTevcov'^ rj 8e fJ^yjTrjp
i^aLTr)aafJL€vr) ^ avTOv dTTOTrefJurei rrakiv iirl ttjv dp)(7]v.
yiyvoixaitbecome^kappenjde, TeXevTt] -rj<;, end, death.
accrue, he horn, [genesis]. [reXog] .
dadevio), he ill, sick. j3lo^, life., [quick ; bio-
viroTTTevQ), suspect, appre- graphy].
/lend.
^ Explain the tense, and note the recurrence of the same.
^ The aorist in a subordinate clause, especially after temporal or rela-
tive words, as, eVet, ov, ore, etc., frequently has the force of the pluperfect
(314, a). Cf. Lat. historical perfect with postq?/am, etc.
^ The aorist of verbs denoting a continued state generally expresses the
entrance into that state. This is called the mceptive aorist.
4 Cf. 236, obs. c.
s Made intercession for him, lit. having begged him off.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, 175
LESSON XXXIX.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE
PRONOUNS.
Review 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 1, 2; 178, 184, 186,
223.
434. The interrogative pronoun rt?, tl, who, which,
what, takes the accent on the first syllable, and never
changes the acute to the grave (XIV.). The indefinite
ri9, Tt, some one, any one, a certain one, is distinguished
from the former by the accent, which it receives upon
the last syllable. This pronoun is enclitic (102).
435
.
Paradigms.
Interrogalive.
Masc. & Fkm. Neut.
Indefinite.
Masc. & Fem. Neut.
N.
Tt9
Singular.
TL
tU
\
TL
G.
TIVO^^ TOV
TLVO<;, TOV
TLv6<;, TOV
TLv6<^, TOV
D.
TLVL, r<w
TLVL, TCp
TLVL, T(0
TLVL, T(p
A.
TLVa
TL
TLvd
\
TL
N.A.
Tive
Dual.
TLve
TLVe
TLVe
G.D.
TIVOLV
TIVOIV
TLVolv
TLVOLV
N.
TLveq
Plural.
Tiva
TLvi<;
TLvd
G.
TLPCOV
TlVdiV
TLVCOV
TLVCOV
D.
TL<TL
TLO-L
TLCTL
TLal
A.
TtVa9
Tiva
TLpd<;
TLvd
176
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
a. The Ionic has gen. reo^ reO; Attic tov.
436. The indefinite relative pronoun oo-rt9, whoever,
whichever, tvhafever, is formed by uniting the relative
OS with the indefinite rU, Each is separately declined,
but the accent of the enclitic is dropped.-^
437.
Paradigm.
Singular.
N.
OCTTiq
T7Tt9
6tl'
G.
OVTiVOS, OTOV
rjo-TLPO^
oinrLvo^;, otov
D.
^TLVL, 6t(0
fJTLVL
MTLVi, 6t(o
A.
ovTiva
rjPTLva
Dual.
on
N. A.
d}TLVe
aTive
OiTiVt
G.D.
oXvTlVOLV
olvTivoiv
Plural.
oivrivoiv
N.
omz^es
alTiv€<;
OLTlVa
G.
&VTlV(x)V, OTCOV
(LvTLVCJV
d)VTLV(DV. OT0)V
D.
oTcTTiO-L, 07019
alo-TLO-L
olcTTLO-L, OTOi^;
A.
OhCTTLVa^
da-nva'S
ariva
438. Examine the following :
1. icrecrOe d^ioi rrj^ i\evdepia<^ r}<; [for i^v] K€KTr)-
o-0€, prove yourselves worthy of the freedom lohich yoii
possess,
2. crvv oT<^ [for crvv eKeivois oi5s] fidXiCTTa (jyiXeisy
with those you most love.
' When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word, the com-
pound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word : wcr-re-
^ on is thus written to distinguish it from art, conj. thaf, etc.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 177
3. ^ye oaov tjv avTco aTpdrevfia, he led whatever
army he had.
Observe that in 1, 7]v'\?> assimilated to the case of its antece-
dent; that in 2, this assimilation still takes place when the
antecedent is omitted ; that in 3, the antecedent, arpdrev/jia^ is
incorporated into the relative clause.
Rule.
439. The accusative of the relative as object of a
verb is generally assimilated to the case of its antece-
dent, if this is a genitive or dative. The antecedent is
often attracted into the relative clause and agrees with
the relative in case.
440. Examine the follow^ing :
1 . Tt? TrapayyeXKu ; who gives the order ?
2. TtVa yvcjfjLrjv e^^re ; ichat opinion do yon hold?
3. XeyovaC TLve<; raSe, so?ne speak as follows.
4. l^aiv^To dp9p(jj7r6<; rt?, a certain man appeared.
441. The interrogative rt? and indefinite rt? may be
either substantive or adjective.
442. Examine the following : .
1. Ti /SovXeaOe ; what do you wish ?
2. ipoiT(ti(Ti i.Keivov rC ^ovXerat, they ask him what
he wishes.
3. Xeye on ere -^81/07 era, tell what injury I have
done you.
12
178 ' THE beginner's greek book.
Rule.
443. The interrogative tls is used in both direct and
indirect questions. But in indirect questions the indef-
inite relatives are commonly used, 3.
444. EXERCISES.
I. 1. Ilepcra)^ Tive<; €(j>evyov. 2. kol a eXeyov
iKelvo^' oLTTyjyyeXXei'. 3. iirefjieXeiTo on iToirjcrei /3a-
(TtXev?. 4. TL^ ^ovXeraL r^ixiv xprjadai ; 5. ipcora
oTi TTOLure. 6. iSijXcocre tovto ot? eirparre"' Tjj vare-
paCa, 7. ocrri? Cv^^ eiriOvixei, Treipdcrdco vlkolv.
8. eXevOepiav alpov dv9' o)v €)(€l<;. 9. e/xot ovv So/cei
ovK dp^eXelv rifjucov avTcov, dXXd ^ovXevecrOai on ypr]
TTonelv Ik tovtcov. 10. OTTocras €l^€ c^uXa/ca?^ iv rai?
TToXecTLy TrapyjyyeiXe tol<; ^povpdp^oi<^ iKdaroi^; Xafx-
^dveiv dvSpas IIeXo7rovv7)crLov<; on TrXeio'Tov^ kol fieX-
TKJTov^, 11. 6 Kupo9 dTreTTefiTTe tov<; yiyvop.4vov<^
Sacr/Aov? ^acnXel e/c tcop iroXecov o)v^ Ticrcrac^epj/i^g
iTvy)(av€P e)(0)v.
II. 1, Speak whatever seems best to jou. 2. Xen-
ophon asks what announcement^ he is making. 3. Pro-
ceed with those you have. 4. What then do I bid you
to do ? 5. They trusted the guide whom the satrap
sent. 6. But if any one sees any other plan better than
this, let him speak. 7. He orders Aristippus to send
to him the army which he had.
a See the general vocabulary.
1 Cf. 26], a. 2 cf. 342.
® For Ta>u (f)v\aKa)v depending on (f>povp:3pxois (439).
* Explain the case. ^ n : cf. I, 4.
NUMERALS.
179
LESSON XL.
NUMERALS: CARDINAL, ORDINAL, AND
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
445. The most common forms of the cardinals, ordi-
nals, and numeral adverbs are the following : ^
Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
1
€19, fxCa, ev, one
7rp(OTo<;, first
ttTTaf, once
2
hvoy two
Sevrepos, second
St5, twice
3
rpel^, rpia
rpiTo^
Tpl<S
4
rerrapes, rerrapa
Terapro^
T€TpdKL<;
5
irivre
7r€fJLTTT0<S
TreVTClKLS
6
ef
eKTO<;
c^a/ct9
7
CTrra
ifiSofjio<;
eTTToiKLq
8
OKT(x)
oyhoos
OKTaKLS
9
evvia
ivaToq
ivaKL^
10
SeKa
Se/caro?
SeKClKLS
11
epSeKa
€j^8e/caro9
ivSeKciKit;
12
ScjSeKa
SwSeAcaro?
ScoSeKOLKL^
13
Tpel<; Kol 8e/ca
rpiTo^ KOL Se/caros
or TpeicTKaiheKa
14
T€TTape<; kol 8e/ca
Terapro^ kol
Se/caro?
or TeTTapecTKaideKa
1 For complete lists see the grammars. Note the forms in the list that
have already occurred in the Lessons. Commit to memory the first twenty
of the cardinals and the first five of the ordinals and adverbs. Give the
meaning of the remaining forms in the Hst from their composition.
180
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
15
irevTeKaiSeKa
Tre/xTTTo?
K:at Se/caro?
16
eKKaCheKa
etc.
17
kiTTaKaiheKa
18
OKTcoKaiSeKa
19
ivveaKaiheKa
20
eLKOcn{v)
eiKOO-TO^
21
eh Koi eLKocTL
TTpCOTOS /cat €tfC0(7r09
or et/cocrt eh
30
TpiaKovTa
T/)td/coc7Tds
40
TerrapoLKovTa
etc.
50
TTeVTTjKOVTa
500
TrevTOLKoa-LOL, -at, -a
60
e^yJKovTa
600
efd/cdcrtot, -at, -a
70
e/SSofJLiJKovTa
700
eTTTOLKocnoL, -at, -a
80
oySoTJKovra
800
o/crd/cdcrtot, -at, -a
90
iveviJKOvTa
900
ivaKocFLOL, -at, -a
100
eKarov
1000
)(tXtot, -at, -a
200
Std/cdcrtot, -at, -a
2000
8tcr;)(tXtot, -at, -a
300
TpioLKoaioi -at, -a
3000
Tpia-XiXiOL, -at, -a
400
TeTpoLKoaLOL, -at, -
a 10000
fxvpLOL, -at, -a
«. Observe that the numbers from Be/ca to eUoai are com-
pounds ; that in compound expressions like 21, 22, etc., the
numbers may be connected by KaC in either order; but if Kal
is omitted, the larger, as in English, precedes.
b. Observe that : 1. Above ei/cocn the tens end in -Kovra
(Lat. -ginta), the hundreds in -/coaiot (Lat. -centi), and the
thousands in -)(fXiOL. 2. rpidicovra and reTTapd/covra have
d and a respectively before -KOVTa, but the others have r] ;
BtaKocnot^ -ai, -a and rpidicoaioi^ -ai^ -a have d before -koctlol
and the others d. 3. The thousands to fjLvpioL are formed by
prefixing the numeral adverbs to -'xiXioL.
c. Observe that the ordinals with the exception of tt/jooto?
NUMERALS.
181
are derived from the cardinals ; that all except Seurepo?, €/3So-
/xo?, and 07S009 liave the suffix -to^; (Eng. -t/i), and those from
twenty upward all end in -0(tt6^ (Lat. -eswius).
d. Observe that the numeral adverbs, except the first three,
have the suffix -a/ct?, denoting how many times.
446. The cardinals from TreVre to eKarov are inde-
clinable. The higher cardinal numbers in -lol and all
ordinals are adjectives of three terminations of the vowel
declension (70).
447. The first four cardinals are thus declined :
Misc.
Fem.
Neut.
Masc
Fem. & Neu
N.
efs
fjLLa
G.
^ta?
« r
€1^09
N.A.
Svo
D.
fiLa
e /
G.D.
SvOLV
A.
dvoL
fxCav
€V
Masc. & Tem. Neut.
Masc. & Fem.
Neut.
N.
rpeU
Tpia
Terrape?
T€Trapa
G.
TpiOiV
TpiO)V
Terrdpcov
TeTToipcop
D.
TpLCFL
Tpiai
reTTapai
T€TTap(TL
A.
rpeU
TpLa
T€TTapa<;
T€TTapa
a. Observe that eh has endings of the third and first declen-
sions, hvo of the second, and rpel^ and T€TTape<; of the third.
b. The compounds ovhek {ovhe and eh), /jirjSeL^ (/jirjBe and
ets), are declined like eh; as, ouSetV, ovBeuia^ ovhev; ovhevo^^
ovBe/jicd<;., ouSez/09, etc.
448. EXERCISES.
I. 1. ovSeU ravTa eXeyev. 2. rrj SerpLTT} rJKe. 3. rov-
Tov TO evpo^ icTTiv Svo^ irXiOpoiv. 4. kol e^eXavvei
Ota TT]^ AuSta? crra^/xov? rpel? Trapacrdyyas eiKOCTL /cat
^ dvo is often used with a plural noun.
182 THE beginner's greek book.
Svo. 5. ivravO ifieLvav r}[JL€pa<; rpet? Kai ekafx^avov
€/c TTj^ ^(opa^ ra eVtTT^Seta. 6. r^Kev iirl to opos rrj
TerdpTrj rjfjiepa. 7. kol inl tov Bevrepov X6(f)ov ravTa
iyiyvero, 8. virdp^ei yap vvv rjplv ^ ovhkv rwv eVt-
T7]S€Lcov. 9. TTj S' ovv aTpaTid Tore eTrefjLxjje Kvpo<;
ixiadov Terrdpoiv firjvwv. 10. Kvpos 8* ovp dvafiaivei
iirl TOL oprj, ovS€PO<; KoikvovTo^.
II. I. There the army remained seven days. 2. He
asks him for two thousand mercenaries. 3. Socrates,
the Achaean, came with five hundred hoplites. 4. But
in the first day's journey the enemy did not appear.
5. But on the fourth day they descend into a plain.
6. But of the army of the king there were four com-
manders. 7. Thence he marches three stages twelve
parasangs. But in the third stage Cyrus holds a review
of the Greeks and barbarians.
449. VOCABULARY.
Seurepos, -a, -ov, second; Terra/De?, -a,/o^r [tetr-arch,
hevrepov or to hevTepov, tetra-gon],
as adv. or adv. ace, a T€TapT0<;, -rj, -ov^ fourth.
second time [deutero- rpet?, rpta, three [three,
nomy]. tri-pod].
Stcr-^tXtot, -at, -a, two thou- TpiTo^, -77, -ov^ third,
sand. virdpyoi^ begin^ he undery
€L<;, fjiia, ev, one ; Ijat. un us. deonhandySu^port.w.dsit.
ovBeiSy -fjiia, -€P, no one, not iTpwTo^, -rj, -ov, first ; Trpw-
ang, none, nothing ; ovSevy tov or to 7rpa>Tov, as adv.
as adv. ace, ?iot at all. or adv. diQC., first, at first,
1 See 146.
REVIEW. 183
450. Translate at sight :
A Halt and Numbering at Celaenae.
^^vrevOev i^ekavvet crra^/xou? rpet? Trapacrdyya^
eiKocriv €19 KeXatm?, ttJ? ^puyta? ttoXiv oiKovixivrfv,
jjLeydXrjv /cat evhat^ova. ivravOa ifxeive Kvpo^ rjfjLepa^
TpiOLKOvra ' Kol '^K€ K\€ap)(0^ 6 AaKeSaifjiopLOS (j)vyd<^,
^oiv OTrXtra? ^tXtov? /cac TreXracTTag ©pa/ca? 6/cra/co-
CTLOvs KOI T0^6ra<i KprJTa<; Stafcocrtous. a/xa 8e /cai
Swcrt? TTaprjv 6 Svpd/cocrto? e^wz^ OTrXtra? rpLaKoaCov^;,
KOI Soc^ati^ero? 6 'Ap/cas ej^wi^ OTrXtra? ^tXiou?. /cat
ivTavOa K.vpo<; i^eracnv /cat dpiOpLOv tcov 'FXXtjj/cop
iiroLrjcrev iv roJ TrapaSetcrw, /cat ^crav ol crv/xTrai^e?
[/>^^ ?^/^o/^ number] oTrXtrat /xei' fivpLOL /cat ^tXtot, ttcX-
raorat Se a/i,<^t roi)? Stcr^tXtov?.
LESSON XLI.
REVIEW.
Review Lessons XXVIL-XL. in order, with their
vocabularies, and note the allied words in the same.
451. €t/it, enclitics, contract nouns and adjectives of
the consonant declension.
L Conjugate etjott in the present and imperfect.
2. Li the inflection of these tenses, how do the verbs
in -\Li diff'er from verbs in -w?
3. What forms of the present of et/>tt are enclitics ?
4. What forms of the pronouns are enclitics ?
184 THE beginner's greek book.
5. What other enclitics have occurred in the preced'
ing lessons ?
6. Decline 8wa/xt9, raft?, Icrx^^, and iTTTreug.
7. What peculiarities of contraction of most stems
in t of the third declension ?
8. What peculiarity in the inflection of stems ending
in a diphthong of the third declension ?
9. Decline ^ovs and vav<;, and explain the form of
their accusative plural.
10. Decline r)Sv^, ra;^v9, fJieya^, and ttoXv?.
11. Explain the formation of the nominative masc.
and neut. sing, of stems in ecr-.
12. Give peculiarities of contraction of stems in eo-
and acr-.
13. Decline Kepa^, Kpea^, ^coKpdrrjf;, evpo^, 6po<;.
14. Decline TrXtjpr)^, KaTa(f)avT]<^, and compare their
inflection with stems of nouns in e?-.
15. Define syncopated nouns, and give their pecu-
liarities of accent.
16. Decline Traryjp, dvijp, yvvj], and Xayco^.
17. Give a summary of the rules for gender of nouns
of the third declension.
452. Tenses of Completed Action, the Passive Voice,
Imperative Mood, .etc.
1. Define reduplication, and give the different forms
that it can take.
2. How are the perfect active, perfect middle, and
future perfect tenses formed? What do these tenses
denote ?
REVIEW. 185
3. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative
active and middle of fiovXevo), Ova), and ttol€(o.
4. Conjugate the perfect and pluperfect indicative
active and middle of apirdt^cti and KeXevco.
5. Decline XeXvKcos, and state how its stem differs
from the other active participles.
6. In what tenses does the passive differ from the
middle ?
7. How is the stem of the aorist passive formed ?
What personal endings docs the aorist passive use ?
What further peculiarities in its inflection ?
8. Conjugate the future perfect, future, and aorist
passive of Xucu, Travco, and KeXevcj.
9. Explain the consonantal changes of the themes in
irvOrjv, ridvKa, 'qpirdcrdrjp, rjX^W-
10. Give suQimary of rules for euphony of consonants.
11. Decline XvOei^, and give the rule for accenting
its nom. sing. masc.
12. Give the personal endings of the imperative
mood active and middle.
13. Conjugate the present and aorist imperative ac-
tive, middle, and passive of Xvco, ^ovXevo), Ovco, Trotew,
and Sr}X6(o.
14. What does the imperative mood express ?
15. Distinguish between the use of the present and
aorist in the imperative.
16. Disthiguish between the use of fjnj and ov.
17. Define a tense system, and give the tense suffix
of each of the first six tense systems.
186 THE beginner's greek book.
18. What are the principal parts of a Greek verb?
19. What are the principal parts of a deponent verb ?
20. Give the principal parts of ^ovXevco, Trotew, dp-
TTct^o), ayo), ap^cD, pLa^oyuai, ^ovXofxai, ^pdofxai.
21. How does the future tense system differ from
the present ?
22. How does the aorist tense system differ from the
future ?
453 • Compariso?i of Adjectives.
1. How are adjectives regularly compared?
2. What adjectives form their comparison with the
endings -twi' and -l(tto<; ?
3. Compare TroXe/xto?, ttictto?, t^Su?, fcafco?, fcaXo9,
dyaOo^, TToXv?.
4. Decline fxei^cov, rjSLOJV, d/jLeuvcop, KpeiTTOiv.
5. How are all adjectives in -09 regularly declined ?
454. PronounSy Personal, Reflexive, Interrogative, etc,
1. Decline eyw, (tv, o, 09, auro?.
2. When is the nominative of the personal pronouns
used?
3. What supplies the place of the pronoun of the
third person in the oblique cases ? What supplies its
place in the nominative case ?
4. Name the reflexive pronouns and explain their
composition. Decline ifiavrov and iavTov.
5. Distinguish between direct and indirect reflexives.
6. Give the most common possessive pronouns.
7. Decline rt?; ocrris and explain its accentuation.
8. How may the interrogative and indefinite pro-
nouns be used ?
REVIEW. 187
455. Numerals,
1. Write the first ten cardinals, and the first five
ordinals.
2. How are the numbers from SeVa to et/cocrc formed?
How can 21, 22, etc., be written ?
3. Write the endings of the tens above et/cocrt, the
endings of the hmidreds and the thousands.
4. Decline et? and rpets. What other numbers are
declinable ?
456. Sijntax,
1. Distinguish between the use of the dative of re-
spect and accusative of specification.
2. Define the adverbial accusative.
3. Distinguish between the use of the attributive
genitive and the appositive.
4. Define the subjective and objective genitives, and
give examples of each in Greek.
5. Define the genitive of material, of measure, and
the partitive genitive, and give examples of each in
Greek.
6. How can the attributive genitives be translated ?
7. What position does the attributive genitive regu-
larly take ? Give exceptions to the general rule.
8. What verbs may take the predicate genitive ? What
are the most common forms of the predicate genitive ?
9. Give the construction with words implying
fullness,
10. Give the construction with words implying com*
parison, superiority, etc.
11. Define the dative of degree of difference.
188 THE beginner's greek book.
12. Give the construction with verbs affecting the
object only in part,
13. Give the rule for the construction with verbs sig-
nifying to touchy etc.
14. Give the rule for the construction with verbs of
sense perception y etc.
15. What construction do verbs of commanding i^i^^^'^
16. Distinguish between the use of the genitive of
time and the dative of time.
17. Give a summary of the genitives that have ap-
peared in the preceding lessons.
18. Give the construction of the relative pronoun.
Give the rule for its assimilation ?
457. EXERCISES.
1. 1. ot "EXXt^i^c? cLKQvovdi ttj^ t(x)v f^ap^dpoiv Kpav-
y»j9. 2. (TV T€ yap EWr]v el /cat r)fji€L<; rocrourot 6vt€^
ocrov? (TV opa^. 3. tcjp Se TroXefjiicjv tTTTrel? etcrt ol ttXci-
aroL Kfxi TrXeicrrov a^ioi. 4. Sta fxecrov 8e Trj<; TrdXew?
p€i TTorajLto? KvSvo^ opofjua, evpo^ Svo TrkeOpcjp. 5. iv-
revOev i^eXavvei araOfxov eva Trapacrdyya^ irivre iirl tol
Supta? Tei^y). 6. dva^aivei ovv 6 Kvpo<;, KokovPTO^
Tov irarpo'^ avTov. 7. eSofe ravra kol dpSpa^ crvv
KXeap^ft) TrefXTTOvcn ot 'QpcoTCJv Kvpov rd So^avra rrj
(TTpaTua. 8. ot dewj/ rjfxds opKoi kojXvov(Tl TToXefiCov^
elvai dXX7]XoL<;. 9. TTeipdcrovrai kol vfjuv /cat rjfiLP rd
^iXri(TTa aviJL/3ovXev(TaL. 10. ot 8e '^EXXi7^'€9 aurot
icj) eavTOJP iiropevovTo T^ye/xdz^a? ej^o^re?. 11. dye, co
KXeap^e, to arpdrevfia Kara fxecrov to tojv TroXepiiOjp.
12. TjyefjLova aiTTJaovcn ol o^rpartwrat Kvpop ocrrt? 8ta
"REVIEW. 189
(^tXia? TTJ^ ^(opas dnd^ei. 13. 'Aptato? Irvyyav^v tov
Ittttlkov dp^(x)v ' 0UT09 8e ecfyexryev e^oiv /cat to arpd-
Tevfia TTOLP ov TjyeLTo.
11. 1. But those of the horsemen who pursued
quickly stopped. 2. Cyrus had plotted against his
brother. 3. The war against Cyrus has been made
by Orontas. 4. He sent to the men thirty days' pay.
5. Say, therefore, to me what you have in mind.
6. There are many Persians better than this man.
7. And these wagons of flour and wine those^ with the
king at that time plundered.
458. Translate into Greek : ^
Darius and Parysatis had two sons : the elder, Arta-
xerxes ; the younger, Cyrus. But when Darius was ill
and apprehended the termination of his life, he desired
that both of his sons should be present. Now Arta-
xerxes happened to be by him ; but he summoned Cyrus
from the province of which he had made him satrap.
Cyrus accordingly went up with three hundred hoplites
of the Greeks. But when Darius had died and Arta-
xerxes had become king, Tissaphernes falsely accused
Cyrus to his brother, charging that he was plotting
against him. And he was convinced, and had Cyrus
arrested ; but his mother interceded for him, and sent
him back again to his province.
1 See 79, a, h.
'^ The pupil should translate this selection from the dictation of the
teaclier, and then compare his own translation with the Greek of 43^3. In
like manner frequent recompositions of the Anabasis sliould be given.
190
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK..
LESSON XLIL
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF
ADVERBS.
Review 374, 375, 1, 2, 3, 4; 376, 377, 378, 1, 2 ;
379, 1, 2, 3, 4; 380, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 385, 445, d.
459. Adverbs, as in Latin, are frequently derived
from adjectives. Examine the following :
Adjectives. Stems.
1 . /caK09 /ca/co-
2. St/caios Si/cato-
3. fcaXd? KoXor
4. T^Su? TySv-
5. a(j^akr\<^ dcrcjyaXecr-
Observe that adverbs in the positive are formed from adjec-
tives by adding -cd? to the stem, which take the same form as
before -cov m the gen. plur. neut. ; that the adverb is contracted
when the adjective is contracted, 5, and has the accent of the
gen. plur.^
460. Examine the following :
/xeya, fieyaka, ^reatfy*
TTpcoTov, first,
TTokv^ much^ far, a great way*
JEN. PlUU.
Adveubs.
KaKWP
KaK(o<s
SiKaicop
St/catws
KokcOV
KaXa><;
YjSecop
TjSea)^
dcr<f)a\a)p
dcrc^aXw?
TaxVt quickly^ soo7i,
varepov, later, afterwards*
Bfsurcpovyfor the second time*
^ Note that the form of the adverb, including Its accent, may be found
by changing the v of the gen, plur. to y.
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 191
a. The neuter accusative of the adjective, both singular and
plural, ma^ be used as an adverb.
461. Examine the following :
avTov, here, there, gen. of avro?.
TrdvTrj, on all sides, dat. of Tra?.
T€ko<;, at last, ace, of reXo^;.
OLKOL,^ at home, loc. of ol/co?.
a. The oblique cases both of adjectives and nouns are used
as adverbs.
462. Allied to case endings are certain endings mark-
ing relations of place : -dev, whence ; -di, where ; and
-8c, whither. The endings -Oev and -0l are affixed to
the stem, but consonant stems assume an -o- ; the end-
ing -Se (enclitic) is affixed to the accusative : oiKo-Oev,
from one's home ; avro-di, in this or that place ; ot/ca-Se
(irreg.), homeward.
463. Other forms of adverbs are common, with va-
rious terminations denoting relations of place, time, or
manner: ai/w, up; iyyv^, near; /xctXa, very; hOa,
where, there ; eS, loelL
464. Examine the following :
Positive. Comparative. Superlative,
Adj. dcr(f)aXT]^ da'(j)aX€crT€po<; d(T(l)a\ia'TaTo^
Adv. dcr<^aXa)9 d(T(^ake(Trepov dcrcfyaXecTTaTa
Adj. /caXd? KaWtcov AcaXXtcrro?
Adv. Kokcos KoXklov /caXXtcrra
^ Final -01 in oIkoi is regarded long in determiuing the accent (XL, n.).
192 THE beginner's greek book.
a. Adverbs derived from adjectives use tlie neut. ace. sing,
of the adjective for the comparative, and neut. ace. plur. for the
superlative.
465. Examine the following :
1. 17 8e rvyy] icrrpaTijyyjcre KaWiov, hat fortune led
them more honorably.
2. riaav iroXif irpoOvfJiOTepoL, they were much more
zealous.
3. iTokv yap T(ov iinrcov irpe^ov BarTov^for they ran
much faster than the horses.
Rule.
466. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs.
467. EXERCISES.
I. 1. Form adverbs in the positive degree from
fxeyas, /3ap/3apt/co9, 7rp66vfJL0<;, and ra^v?. 2. Compare
T^Selw?, ra^eoj?, ttoXv, KaKco^;, and Si/cato)?.
II. 1. avTov TL dyaSov iiroiei. 2. St/catw? Tavra
TTOtet. 3. TTopeucrd/xe^a oiKaSe. 4. kol ovtcj Sarrov
iravcrovrai. 5. KpaTLcrra ifJid^ovTo. 6. /caXw? €^€1}
7. TOL Trap' ifjLol^ alpov avrl tcov olkol. 8. TIp6^evo<;
'B€vo(j)a)VTa fxeTeiTeiJixfjaTO oiKoOev. 9. ov ^ov\6fxe6a
TTjv j8acriX€&J9 x^P^^ Aca/cws iroielv. 10. TavTrjs rrjq
1 €xa> with an adverb is equivalent to flvai with an adjective.
^ In general, any qualifying word or phrase standing with the article
has the force of an attributive. Here a noun denoting men or things is
often omitted (79, a, b).
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 193
rjixepa^ tovto to t€Xo<; rjv. 11. Kai iroki^ avToOi cpKeuTO
fjieydXr] kol evSaifxcoif @ai/ia/co? ovofjia. 12. a/couoi^re?
TTjv Kvpov dperrjv tJSlov kol TrpoOvixoTepov (TweiTopev-
ovTO. 13. dvhpe^ crrpariwrat, pur) Oavpidt^eTe ort
^aXcTTW? <f)dpo} Tol^ irapovcTL Trpdypaaiv} 14. ov
KLvSvvevcravT€<; roiv dXXcov irXiov TLprjOijcreo-Oe crrpa-
TL(t)T(x)v VTTO Kvpov. 15. Tt ^ ovi', cXcyc 6 KujOO?, dSt-
KrjOel<; vrr ipov vvv to TpiTov eVt/^ovXevet? p^oi. 16. ez^
Tw TTpocrOev ^p6v(o rjpd<; aurou? ei> CTToiet.
Examine tlie accusatives in 1, and note the signification of
the verb upon which they depend, and observe that one of the
accusatives denotes the person and the other the thing ; note
in 9 and 16 that KaKco^ and e^ take the place of the accusative
of the thing.
Rule.
468. Verbs signifying to do anytldng to, or say any-
thing of, a person or thing take two accusatives.
a. ev or KaXo)^, well, or Ka/c(Jt)<;, ill, frequently takes the
place of the accusative of the thing.
6. The accusative of the thing is of the nature of a cognate
accusative ("261).
469. 1. Let it he otherwise. 2. At last they all
also rode awav. 3. And it seemed best to make qnicklv
the treaty. 4. They were proceeding more safely.
5. He desires to do harm to the country, 6. And they
gladly obeyed, for they trusted him. 7. But a moun-
tain surrounds it [avro] on all sides from sea to sea.
^ Explain the case.
^ Cognate accusative (261, a).
13
194
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
470. VOCABULARY.
aX.Xa>9, adv., otherwise, oiKoOev, ^^"^.^ from home,
a(j^oXoi%y?^di\\, firmly .safely , olkol, adv., at home,
avTov, adv., in the same iroivTrj, adv., i?i every ivay,
place, here, there.
8t/cata>9, ^diW., justly.
eS, adv., well, happily.
rjhecof;, adv., gladly.
KaKa><;, adv., ill, badly.
KaXcoSy adv., fairly, well,
KpaLTicTTay adv., in the best jj^aXeTrw?, adv., 2vith diffi-
manner, most bravely, culty, painfally,
vvv, adv., now [now] . KLvBvvevo), be in danger, in-
OLKaSey adv., to one's home, cur dariger.
homeward, avfi-TropevofiaL, accompany.
on all
Tayiio%, adv., Oolttov, rd-
Xt'OTTa, quickly, soon.
TeXo9, -0U9, TO, end ; adv.
ace, at last J finally [talis-
man].
LESSON XLIII.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
Review 10, 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 40, 41, 48, 49,
58, 61, 73, 111, 116, 133, 143, 194, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 195,
208, 223, 229, a; 257, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 373,
375, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 379, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 380, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 402,
403, obs.; 417, 437 ; Lessons XL., XLII.
471. The Greek is developed from a small number
of primary elements. These, divested of everything
that is formative or accidental, are called roots. The
FORMATION OF WORDS. 195
root is properly of one syllable, with a short vowel, and
expresses the general meaning of a word. This may be
modified in various ways, and from the same root several
different words may be formed. Thus, apx^' begin,
dpxy], rule, dpxo^, leader, are all from the root and also
theme (apx")* '^^^^ themes of verbs or stems of nouns
thus formed may in turn be modified : as dp^aio^,
ancient, from (apx^) ^^^ ^^^v^ of apxi-
472. Simple and Compound Words.
A word is either simple or compound. A simple word
is formed from a single stem (133) ; as dKpo-<;, Idghest,
7rdXt-9, city. A compound word is formed by combin-
ing two or more stems ; as a/cpd-TroXt?, citadeL
473. Primitives and Denominatives.
A word formed directly from a root or theme of a
verb is called a primitive ; as dpx^, beginning, (apx-)-
A word formed directly from a stem of a noun or ad-
jective is called denominative ; as dp)(cuo<;, of the begin-
ning, ancient^ from (dpya) stem of dpxV'
474. Prefaces and Suffixes,
The formative elements by which the root is qualified
and new words formed are called affixes. An affix
placed before the principal root is called a prefix ;
placed after a principal root, a suffix.
475. Only the most important suffixes are here given.
These should be thoroughly committed to memory, and
regularly applied in acquiring the meaning of words.
Special exercises will be given in the following lessons
for the formation and grouping of words.
196 THE beginner's greek book.
Frhnitive Nouns,
476. Examine the following :
1 . (^vXarrw/ guard, [(^vXa/c-] ; (j)v\a^,^ a guard,
. 2. KrjpvTTOt), proclaim, [/cT^pv/c-] ; Krjpv^, a herald.
Observe that the noun stems in some words have no suffix ;
the root serves as the stem of the noun.
477. Examine the following :
1. ixau)(o ^xai, Jig ht, fia^', {jxa-^-d') fJioixV^ battle.
2. Tpiiro), turn, Tpeir-, {rpoTT-d-) TpoTTtj, turning,
8. " " (rpoTT-o-) TpoTTo^^ tum, manner.
4. (TTeWot), send, crreX-, (cttoX-o-) (tt6Xo<;, expedition.
Observe that the suffix annexed to the roots in 1,2 is length-
ened to 7] in the nom. sing. (40) ; that the suffix in 3, 4 is 0,
and 9 is added to form the nom. sing. (58) ; that when the suf-
fix is added in 3, 4, e of the root is changed to ; that the
suffixes -a and -0 regularly denote the ahstract idea of the
verb.^
478. Examine the following :
1. TTOteiw, make, iroie-, {TTOirj-rd-) 77011777^9, maker, poet.
2. KeXevo), comjnand, KeXev-, (/ceXev-crrd-) KekevdTrj^,
commander.
3. croitfiy, (Tcoco, save, (roi-, {crco-Tr) p-) awTTJp, savior.
4. rjyeojjiaL, lead, rjye-, [rjye-fjLOP-) TiyefKov, guide,
a. Observe that sometimes when the ending is added, the final
vowel of the root is lengthened, 1, (198); that a consonant is some-
1 See 378, 2. " 2 gee 208, a.
^ In general, the meanings of tlie suflSxes hold good ; but their distinc-
tion as forming primitives and denominatives is not always applicable, and
their meanings in the figurative use of words liave a wide range : as, ardXos
may mean what is sent on an expedition, army^ 7iavij, force, etc.
FORMATION OF WORDS. 197
times added, as in forming the perfect middle and aorist passive,
2, (325). The consonants most commonly added are v, p, a.
b. Observe that the suffixes -ra^ -Tr)p, and -fiov denote the
479. Examine, the following :
1 . Kptvco, decide, Kpiv-, {Kpiv-ai-) ^ptcrt?, decision, trial.
2. Trpdrrwj do, it pay-, {Trpdy-on-) irpa^i^, undertaking,
3. 7r€L0co, persuade, ind', {ttlO-tl-) ttlo-ti^;, belief, faith,
4. 8ea>, bind, he-, (8e-o--/x,o-) Secr/Ao?, binding, band,
5. Tta>, honor, tl-, (rl-/xd-) rlfjiTJ, worth, honor.
Observe that the final consonant of the root is subject to the
regular euphonic changes before a consonant of the ending, 1, 2,
8; that the suffixes -crt, -tl, -fio, and -(id denote action; but
sometimes, as -^d, 5, thej may express the abstract idea of the
verb.
480. Examine the following :
1. -^pdofiaL, use, xP^'j ixPV'H'^'^') XPVP'^^ thing of use,
2. TTpaTTO), do, irpdy-, {iTpdy-fxaT-) Trpdyjia, deed.
Observe that the suffix -fjiar denotes the residt of an action.
Denominative Nouns.
481. Examine the following :
1. 1777709, horse, [77770-, (i7777-€v-) LTTTrev^;, horseman,
2. To^ov, bow, To^o-, {ro^o-rd-) To^6Trj<;, bowman,
3. (TTpaTid, army, crrparia-, {(TTpaTLcorrd-) arpaTLco-
T7]^, soldier.
^ The pupil should explain the formation of the nom. sing, of each
noun in the lesson.
198 THE beginner's greek book.
Observe that : 1. The final vowel of the stem is sometimes
dropped before a suffix beginning with a vowel, 1. 2. The final
vowel of the stem may be changed, usually o to €, and a to o or
CO, 3. 3. The suffixes -ev and -rd denote the person with refer-
ence to his/unction.
482. 'Examine the following :
1. crot^og, wise, ao(j)0-, {cro^o-id-) aocj^id, icisdom.
2. euj'ov?, loell disposed, evi/ov- (evvoo-), (evvo-id-) ev-
voia, good icill (p. 63^).
3. TTtcrro?, faitliful^ ttlctto-, {TTLO-To-rrjT-) 7ricrTorT79j
fidelity.
Observe that the suffixes -id and -Tr]T affixed to adjective
stems denote the abstract idea of the adjective or quality.
Primitive Adjectives,
483. Examine the following :
Roots.
1. aacj)', cro<j)' (cro<^-o- and -d-) (TO(l>6<;,'ij,'6v,wise.
2. KaK- (KaK-o- and -d-) KaKo?, -77, -6v, dad.
Observe that primitive adjectives, like nouns, are formed
from roots or themes by the suffixes -0 and -d.
484. Examine the following :
1. TySo/xai, be pleased, rjh- (rjS-v-), tjSvs, -eta, -v, stveet.
2. Tct;)^©?, swiftness, Ta^-{rax-v-)^ Ta)(y^, -eta, -v, swift.
3. {jjevSofiai, lie, \pevB- (xjjevS-ea-), xpevBij^, -€£, false.
a. Observe that adjectives of the first and third declensions
are formed from roots by the suffix -v, and those of the third
from roots or themes by the suffix -€?.
h. Observe that adjectives derived from verb roots or themes
express relations to the actions or states denoted by the verbs,
FORMATION OF WORDS. 199
and those derived from roots common to nouns express relations
to the persons or things denoted by the nouns.
Denominative Adjectives,
485. Examine the following :
1. ^acriXeu?, king, ^aacXev- (^acrtXe-to-), ySacrtXetos,
kingly.
2. Pao-iXevq, king, ^acnXev- (ySacrtX-t/co-)/ ^acriXifcd?,
kingly.
3. TTokefJios, war, irokeixo- (ttoXc/a-io-), irokefiLo^, hos-
tile,
4. 7rdX€/i09, tvar, TroXejio- (TrpXe/A-t/co-), TroXefiLKOS,
warlike.
5. 0Lp)(7], rule, o,px^' (^PX"^'^^")' o-p^tfcds,^^ to rule.
Observe that the suffixes -lo and -iko express that which per-
tains or belongs to the noun, but -t/co sometimes denotes fitness
or ahility ; that adjectives in -t/co? are regularly oxytone.
486. Examine the following ;
1. yjivdo^, gold, yjpvdo- {xpv(T-€o-), XP^^^^^ iXP'^
croG?), golden,
2. \l6o^, stone, KlOo- (Kido-Lvo-), XlOlpo^, made of stone.
Observe that the suffixes -eo and -ivo denote the material,
487. The suffix -evT- exi:ivesses fullness :
X^p^^i grace, X^P^~ {X'^P^'^^'^')y X^P^^^^? -eacra, -ev,
graceful ; ^apiez^ros, etc.
488. The suffix -repo' distinguishes one of two oh'
jects, and -raro- one oi several :
TTICTTO^? faithful, TTLCTTOTepOf;, TTLCTTOTaTO'? (376).
^ A diphthong is often dropi)ed before a vowel in the ending.
2 Primitive ending (373).
200 THE beginner's greek book.
489. Decline : 1. (j)vka^, ap^oiv, apxV^ X6yo<;, rjye-
ficov, Trpaft?, Trpayfia, 770X17179, tTTTreu?. 2. (T0(j)6<;,
T^Sv?, xlfevSTJ<^, Xvcov, Xvcra?, Xvd/xei/09, rjSicov, ^pvcroG? ;
^apUi^, ^apCeao-a,^ ^apUv,
490. EXERCISES.
Give the meaning of the following words at sigJd,
and show their formation : 1. rptro?, Seurepo?, Xoitto?,
irpcoTO^, 7jfxeTepo<;, vfx€Tepo<;. 2. dpxy], dpxalo^;, dpxL-
Ko?, dpxco, dpxiov, dpx6fJLevo<;. 3. (^uXarrw ((/)uXaAC-),
^uXaf, (l)v\aKT]. 4. (tttopSt], Tipurj, H'dxr), t/)o</)77, Xo-
yos. 5. rd^L<;, otcoftg, 770X1x779, onXirrj^;, KO)fXTJTr]<^.
6. TO^evfxa, <^tXio9, ot^ta, rt/xto9, MiX77(rto9. 7. a/)-
yvpovs, LTTTTLKOS, vavTLKos, y8a/)ySa/)t/co9, Pap/3apiK(oq.
491. Translate the following «^ 6'2y//^, ascertaining the
meaning of the new words by their derivation :
1. ixjjevaOr) tovto, 2. 7ricrT€t9 Xafx^dvei. 3. e/x-
^aivovcTi Ta;^eft)9 €t9 ttXolov. 4. rjKovae Ticra-a^epvov^
Tov Kvpov <tt6\ov. 5. 971^ Icrxy^ avrwv eKarepcodev
[e/caTepo9, ^^/c^^ of two]. 6. et9 ^vyr^v erpexjje T0U9
€faActcr^tXiov9. 7. fcat T0t9 17777019 cLpiara e^yawj^ro.
8. -^z^ 8e ei' Tfo) Se^tft) to ^^WiqviKov TrekracrTiKov,
9. i^TJyyeuXe Toi<; (J)l\ol<5 ttjv KpLaiv rov OpovTa.
10. ixeil^cov 8e 17 7Tpd^L<; t'^9 irpocrdev (j^aCveraL.
11. iTerCfjLrjTO yap vno Kvpov Bl evvoidv re koI
TncTTOTrjTa. 12. 17 /3acrtXew9 «'/>X''7 t^^V^^^ /^^^ x^P^^
Kal dv9p(jm(x)v icrxypd tjv, tols 8e fjaJKeau t(x)v ohwv /cat
rw 8i€or77ao-^at Ta9 hwdp^ei^ dcrOevTJs*
^ -forcra is for -er-ta, a shorter stem giving -o-cr-; i after r and ^ some-
times forms (7o-(378. 2). The dat. plur. masc. and neut. is xaptfo-t- See 824.
DENOMINATIVE VERBS. COMPOUND WORDS. 201
LESSON XLIV.
DENOMINATIVE VERBS.— COMPOUND
WORDS.
492. A verb whose theme is derived from the stem of
a noun or adjective is called a denominative.
493. Examine the following -.
1. Ti/AT^j TLfid-, Tljjida) honor.
2. oT/co?, oIko-, oIk€(o, dwell,
3. 877X05, §17X0-5 817X00), make clear,
4. ySacrtXev?, ^aaiXev-, ^acrikevo), be king.
5. ^ovkij, apian, ^ovkd-, /SovXevco, plan.
6. KivSvvo<;, klpSvpo- KLpSvvevo), run a risk.
a. Observe that the verbs are given as they appear in the
present indicative active ; that of the stem is sometimes changed
to e, 2,
b. Verbs in ev first arose from nouns in -ef?^ 4. Afterwards
by analogy others were formed, h, 6.
494. Compound Words. — First Part,
Examine the following :
1. arpaTO'TreBov (crTparos, crrparo-, irihov, (/round),
camp ground.
2. KO)fjL-dp^y]^ (Kcofjir), Kcofjid-, ap-^co), village chief.
3. Xo^^-ctyd? (Xd;^^^? ^^X^"' compang, dyo^, leader
[ay&>]), captain.
4. o'K€vo-(j>6po^ ((TKevos [cT/cevc?] , baggage^ ^ipoi^
carrg), baggage carrier.
20.2 THE beginner's greek book.
Observe that when a noun or adjective stands as the first
part of a word only its stem is used ; that the stem vowel is
regularly dropped before a vowel ; that stems in <r- may be
changed to o- stems, 4.
495. An adverb may be the first part of a compound
word : ev-vov^, well disposed.
496. A preposition may be the first part of a com-
pound word: eTTi-^ov\ri^ plof.
497. Compound verbs are formed dii'ectly only by
prefixing a preposition to a verb : dva-fiaivo), I go up.
In other cases, compound verbs are denominatives formed
from compound nouns and adjectives : crTpaTTjyeco
{(TTpaTrjyo^;), he general,
498. Inseparable Particles as Prefixes.
Examine the following :
1. aStfco? {a-\hLK'Y)\, justice), unjust [a-theist].
2. dTTopo<; (d- [770^09], tvag), impassable.
8. di^o8o9 (di/-[68o?], icay\ impassable.
4. Suo-TTo/oo? (8u?- [770/309], ^(my, ford), hard to' pass
[dys-pepsia].
5. €v7ropo<5 (eu-TTopog), easy to pass [eu-pbony].
6. rjfXL8eyj<; (T7/xt-[8ew], wanting), 2va?iting a half
[hemi-sphere].
7. a-TTci?, all together.
Observe that: 1. The prefix av- {a- before a consonant),
called alpha privative, has a negative force, like Eng. un-, Lat.
in-. 2. The prefix hva- denotes ill, difficult, and is opposed
to the prefix ev-, well. 3. The prefix rjfjbi- denotes half, Eng.
hemi-. 4. a- (older form a-, akin to a/ia) in avra? is copula-
tive, denoting union.
DENOMINATIVE VERBS. — COMPOUND WORDS. 203
499. Compound Words. — Last Fart,
Examine the following :
1. (rTpaT7]y6<; {aTpaT6<;, (irparo-, ayoi)^ generaL
2. (fnXodrjpo^ ((^(,Xd-9, 67]pd),/ond 0/ t/ie chase.
Observe that the initial vowel of the last part of a com-
pound noun or adjective may be lengthened ; that when a noun
stands as the last part of a compound word its final syllable may
be changed, 2.
500. Compound adjectives in -179, -e? are very fre-
quent, and are regularly oxytone : y)pLi-heri<^, half fall ;
KaTa-(j)avT]S, in si(/ht ; a-<^avr)^, out of sight.
501. In meaning, compound nouns and adjectives
are of three classes :
1. Objective compounds, of which one part is a sub-
stantive and stands to the other part in some relation
expressed by an oblique case ; crTpaT-rjy6<s, leader of an
army ; K(oix-dp)(7]<s, the head of a village.
2. Determinative compounds, of which the first part,
in the sense of an adjective or adverb, qualifies the last
part : d/c/od-7roXt9 (a/cpa-7rdXt9, highest citg), citadel ;
ev'vov;, ivell disposed.
3. Possessive compounds are adjectives in which the
first part qualifies the second as in determinatives, and
the whole describes some person or thing : -yjpvdo-
yaXlvo% {yjpvao^. gold, ^aklvo^, bridle), with a gold-
mo anted bridle ; Icro-TrXevpos (tcro?, equal, TrXevpd, side),
equilateral.
502. Explain at sight the meaning of the following
words by their derivation :
204 THE beginner's greek book.
k6<;, Alyv7rTio<^. 4. crTpdrevfjia, to^ottj^, rdfeu/xa.
5. craTpaTTevco, To^evco, TTOpevoj, Trtcrrevo). 6. vlkolo),
fjLLcrOoo), d^LOO). 7. cJ)l\oklvSvi'o<;, vavap\o<;y (jypovpap-
^os {(l)povp6<^, guardy garrison soldier), 8. rrpocj^vka^,
oTTLaOocj^vXa^ {oTnaOev, i?i the rear\ 7rp60vfjLos {Ovfji6<;,
heart, soul).
503. Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of
the new words by their derivation:
1. TO evpof; irXeOpalov tjv. 2. to evpo^ rjixLTrXeOpov
Tjv, 3. TTiorTevcroiJLev Kvpco. 4. Xvevvecn^ Ittttov XP'^
cro^dXivov irefiTreL. 5. tovtcov ttoXXo, xpijfiaTa e)(pp^^v.
6. (TT paT7]yrj(Tei TavTrjp ttjv (TT paTiqyiav . 7. TroXe/xT^-
crei Ti(jaa(^)epvei avv toI^ ^vyacn twp MiXyjcrLajv.
8. iKeXevcre 8e kol tov<; MlXtjtov iroXiopKovvTa^ avv
avTO) CT paTevecrO ai, 9. Kv/009 ydp e7re/x7re ^lkov^
oivov rjixiSeei^; TroXXctfct?. 10. d(f)L7T7TeveL iwl ttjv eavTov
(TKTjvrjv Sid Tov M.epa}vo<; (rr/aarev/iaro?. 11. ra OTrXa
/cat ra aKevo<j)6pa €)(0PTe<s icTTpaTOTrehevcrapTO irapd
YXedp^co.
LESSON XLV.
GRIMM'S LAW.— WORD GROUPING-.
Review 87, 88, «, 1, ^ ; 189, 1, 2, 3, obs. ; 190;
Lessons XLIII. and XLIV.
504. The English language contains many words
(87), that have been directly borrowed or adapted from
1 -Lov, a diminutive ending, small, etc.
GRIMM S LAW.
WORD GROUPING,
205
the Greek : ima-Tokri, epistle; (f)dkay^, phalanx, dpuO-
/X09, arithmetic. It contains also important words
which have not been borrowed, but which have been
handed down in both languages from the same original
source.^ These are called copiaie} In each language
they midergo certain changes of fortn, and sometimes of
meaning. There is generally a corresponding Latin
and German word : Trarrip, pater ^ vater, father; fJitJTTjp,
mater, mutter, mother.
505. The principle regulating the interchange of
mute consonants in these different divisions of the Indo-
European language is known as Grimm's ■ ' Law of
Pernmtation of Consonants."
506. Examine the following :
OriginAlL Sounds.
1. Rough or (^.^
aspirate. j_ ^^^
r
s
77
K
T
Greek.
drjp
Latin. English.
fero BEAR
{h)anser goose, gan-
fera deer [der
2. Middle or
smooth.
3. Smooth or
surd.
/SovXo^ai (/3oX-) volo will
hvo
genus kin
duo TWO
TTOV? (tTcS-) pes FOOT
Kokeo) calo HAUL
Tpdq tres three
Observe that : 1 . The tendency of consonantal change is from
rough to smooth, and from smooth to rough. 2. In Latin the
rough consonants are represented by the aspirates ^ and h^ some-
LidoEuropean Original Language.'*
2 cf. p. 231.
206 THE beginner's greek book.
times by v} 3. In other cases the mutes are generally the same
in Greek and Latin, but all of the mutes are changed to one
degree in English :^ tt, ^, <j), generally appear in English respect-
ively as/, JO, and d; K,y, %, as /i, k or c, and g -, t,8, 6, as th, t,
and d,
507. The vowels of the roots and stems also undergo
a phonetic change. This is termed Vowel Gradation.
The vowels arranged in the order of their strength,
beginning with the weakest, are i, v, e, o, a; in Latin,
i, u, e, 0, a. ^ change of any vowel into one farther
to the right or into a long vowel or diphthong is vowel
increase; a change to the left is vowel decrease (weak-
ening or loss). The general direction in the phonetic
change of vowels is toward the w^eaker ; and a change
from the weaker to the stronger vowels is generally for
a special purpose. But the principle that underlies
much of phonetic change is the tendency to ease of
utterance, and the particular form of a vow^el depends
greatly upon the influence of the adjacent consonants.
508. Give the Latin and English words cognate with
the following, and apply the principles of phonetic
change both to consonants and vowels : 1. ^4po). 2. Orfp.
3. yevo^. 4. 7rov<;, 5. rpet?. 6. fJLyJTrjp. 7. Trarijp.
8. 0vpa, DOOR. 9. jxTJv, mensis, moon, month. 10. ct/ct;-
VT] (cr/ca-), scena, scene, shade. 1L olvo<; {/tolvo^),^
1 In the middle of a word the aspirates are frequently represented
by the smooth. Other exceptions to the law can best be learned by
observation.
2 They are changed to two degrees in German: Bvyarrjp, daughter,
tochfer.
^ (F) obsolete van or digamma, equivalent to Latin v and English la
(p. I45I).
GRIMM's law. WORD GROUPING. 207
vi7mm, WINE. 12. oT/co? (/rot/co?), vicics, village^ vicida,
villa, -WICK, -wicH, as in Berwick, Norwich. 13. acw/it;
(/ft-, resf), quies, dtvis, home, hive. 14. /3ou9, fio/r-),
dull, cow ; bos, bovis, cow.
509. Give the words ^ cognate with the following :
1. SeAca. 2. ef {(re^). 3. okto). 4. virep.
510. In acquiring a Greek vocabulary, associate with
the Greek words belonging in a group the related Latin
and English. If the student is acquainted with Ger-
man, he should associate also with these the German
words.
511. Groups of related words are given in the fol-
lowing lessons. The Greek groups contain in the main
only such words as have occurred in the preceding les-
sons, except a few needed to show the connection ; but
other related words should be added as they occur in
the subsequent lessons. Compound words and proper
names have generally been omitted. The Latin groups
contain only the most common w^ords ; but other Latin
words should be added by the teacher, if need be," to suit
the larger vocabulary of the pupils.^
In the Greek groups, simple words that are generally
formed on a stem derived directly from a root or from
an ultimate theme are printed in black-faced letter. But
simple words, on the contrary, derived generally from
* Borrowed from the Latin.
2 See the general vocabulary for Latin and Englisli forms.
^ For a fuller treatment of Latin words see Lewis's " Latin Dictionary
for Schools," or his " Elementary Latin Dictionary." For a fuller history
of the English words see Skeat's " Etymological Dictionary of the English
Lansruaue."
208 THE beginner's greek book.
a stem that appears in some preceding word, and com-
pounds, are printed in light-faced type.
In the EngHsh groups, the cognate words are in
light-faced capitals, and the borrowed words are in
black-faced letter.
512. In the following typical group, analyze the
Greek words according to the principles in Lessons
XLIII. and XLIV. Distinguish the case or personal
ending, suffix, stem, theme, or root, on which the word
is made, observing the changes of form. In denomi-
native verbs, point out the ending and preceding stem.
In compounds, give the parts that compose the word.
Note the related Latin and EngHsh words, and when-
ever practicable, apply Grimm's Law.
513. R. ay-y ^J/'> d^'^^^y lead, loeigh, consider. a-y-cD,
drive, lead, bring, carry ; d^-wv, -cjp-os, 6, a bringing to-
gether^ an assembly, a contest ; d-y-po-c, 6, field (a place
where herds are driven) ; ayp-to-?, -d, -ov, living in the
fields, ivild ; d^-d-s, 6, leader ; crrpar-T^yd-?, 6, general ;
(TTpaTTjye'O), be general; err parriy-La, -a<i, generalship ;
\ox-oiy6-<;, 6 (Xoxo'S, R. X^X'^ con)pany\ captain; y)yi-
o-/tat, j70 before^ lead, command, think ; rjye-ixMv, -6v-o<;, 6,
leader, guide ; a|-cov, -01^-09, 6 (dy + cr = df), axle ;
afjL-a^a, -179 (d/xa, adv., together)^ a wagon loith two con-
nected axles, four-ioheeled wagon ; d/>Laf-tT6-9, -ov, passa-
ble by wagon ; d|-io-s, -a, -ov, loeighing as much, worth ;
d^io-o), think iQorthy, demand.
ag-o, lead, drive; ag-men, -in-is, n., army, band;
ag-e-r, -gri, m., field ; axi-s, -is, m., axle.
VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 209
Acre, acorn ; agony, ant-agonist, strat-agem, strat-
egy, etc. ; dem-agcgue, etc. ; axiom.
514. EXERCISES.
Translate at sight, ascertaining the meaning of the
new words by their derivation or by allied forms :
1. rauTa Se ra drjpCa ol iTTTret? iSiojKop. 2. iv Se
rat? oiKiai^ rjcrav ^rjve^. 3. rjcav Se /cat ^de? iv rat?
ot/ctat?. 4. rjfJLels epLKCJfJiev ^aaiXea iirl rat? OvpaLS
avTov. 5. KaraXajji^dveL TrdvTCL<^ evhov rovs /coi/xTfra?
Kal Tov Ko^xdp^Tjv /cat Ty]v Ovyaripa rov Kojfjidp-^ov.
6. irdvTe^ yap ol t(ov dpicFTOiv Hepawv TralSes em rat?
/3acn\eo)<; dvpai<; irai^evovTai. 7. /cat (f>iko6j)p6TaTO<;
Tjv /cat 77/009 ra Orjpia .fievTot c^tXo/ct^'Suj'dTaro?.
8. 'Opdi^ras 8e Tlepcrry? dvrjp, yivei re TrpoarJKcov jBa-
crtXet /cat ra TroXe/xta Xeyd/xe^'09 ez^ rots dpi(TTOi^ Hep-
ao)Vy eTTL^ovkevei Kvpco.
LESSON XLVI.
PRESENT SYSTEM OF VERBS.— VERBS OF
THE FIRST CLASS.i
Review 23, 198, 252, 253, 254, «; 255, 256, 325,
351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; 352, 353.
515. Each tense system is formed by some modifica-
tion of the theme of the verb (23). The present system
^ Heview questions upon the formation of words may be found in
Lesson LXV. (p. 308).
14
210 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
of most of the verbs thus far presented is formed by
adding the suffix %. to the theme : Xvcj, Trotew, Xeyco,
^evcj. Verbs that form their present stem in this man-
ner belong to the Variable Vowel or First Class.
516. In respect to the formation of the present stem
from the theme, verbs are divided into seven classes.
For convenience a few verbs forming their tense stems
from essentially different themes are put by themselves
as an eighth class.
517. The First Class is the most numerous of all the
classes. Most of the verbs of this class are regular, i. e.
they are formed according to the general rules for form-
ing the tense systems, but they may at the same time
be defective, or lack some of the principal parts (352,
353).
518. Conjugate the present system, in the forms thus
far presented, of Xvco, Xeyco, TToieco, TL[jLdo). Explain the
endings -&>, -et?, -et in the act. ind. sing.
519. Give the principal parts of the following verbs :
aireiw, alTrjcrcOy etc. ; St^Xow, St^Xwctw ; iroLecoj TroLrjaco ;
neipda), iravo), /8ov\eva>, Orjpevcoy TratSevw.
520. In some vowel verbs the final stem vowel is
variable in quantity, remaining short in some of the
forms, and lengthened in others.^
1. 0v(o, sacrifice, Ovcrco^ eOvcra, reOvKa, reOvfiac,
irvOrjv,
2. Xvcoy loose, Xvcro), eXvcra, XeXvKa, XeXvfJbaiy eXvOrjv,
^ Eor a more complete list of the verbs of the several classes see the
grammars. Only the most common appear in these lessons.
VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 211
3. Kokeco, call, KaXw, eKokecra, Ke/cX-r^/ca, KeKXyjfjLaL,
iKXyjdrjp.
a. The future of KaXicn and fid'XpiJLaL is formed by dropping
a- and contracting (254).
b. The theme Koke- of KaXeco becomes nXe- by syncopation
(p. 142^), and appears as kXt]- in the last three principal parts.
521. Vowel verbs tbat retain the sbort vowel, and a
few others, add a to the theme in the perfect and
pluperfect middle and passive and in the first passive
system (325, 344).
1. cnrdo), draw, cnrdcra), ecnraaa, ecTTrafca, ecnracr ^xaij
iaTrdaOrjp.
2. TeXeajyJiniskf reXw, ireXecra, rereXe/ca, rere Xecr/xai,
iTeXeadrjv.
3. KeXevo), order, KeXevcro), efceXevcra, KeKeXevKa, Ke-
KeXeva fiai, eKeXevadrjp.
' 4. TTaLO), strike, 7ratcra>, iiraLaa, TreVatfca, inaLaOrji^.
522. Sometimes the present is formed from a longer
theme in e and the rest of the tenses on a shorter theme
without €: So/ceo)^ {hoK€-, 253), 8dfw, etc. But gener-
ally the present is formed on the shorter theme, and the
other tenses or part of them, except the second tense
system (352), on a longer theme in e (198).
1. ^ovXojxaL, tvilly ^ovXijaofJiaL, ^e^ovXrjfjiaL, i^ov
XijOr)}/.
^ Most verbs in -eo have regular stems in e as nou(o.
212 THE beginner's greek book.
2. Sect), need, Sct^ctw, iSerjcra, SeSeT^Aca, 8e8e)7/iat,
3. fievco, remain, e/xei^'a, fJiefjieprjKa.
4. iOeXo) or OeXcOy wish, idekyjaco, i^Oekiqcra, rjOeXrjKa.
5. [Layoiia^i, fight ^ fxa-^ovfiai, etc.
6. /xeXXo), intend, fxeWijaa), iixeWrja'a.
523. EXERCISES.
I. 1. kjvyyave yap 6v6fxevos. 2. Ovofjuevo^ Xeyet
avTft) OTi /BacnXeij^ ov /xa^ecrat 8e/ca rjfxepcov. 3. 77X17-
crtoz^ '^i' 6 crra^/xo? a^^a e/xeXXe KaTaXveti^. 4. avrov
iraUi KoX TiTpcoaKei Sua tov 6a>paK0<;. 5. 8t€T€Xol;^'
-^patfjievoL Tol<^ TOiv TToXefjiLcov To^evfxacTL. 6. j^v^' 8€tTat
KvpQ? eTrecrOai Toi)^ ''EXXrjva^; ettI ^acnXea. 7. ot 8e
(TTpaTLwraL ol T€ at'Tov eKeivov fcat ot aXXot ravra d/cov-
cravT€<; iTrrjpecrav. 8. toj^ jLtez^ KaXa><; TTOiovvra iiraLvet,
TOV 8e d8tfCoi}^'Ta ouk iTraivei,
II. 1. No one fought with him. 2. He will not
fight within five days. 3. The army halted for provi-
sions. 4. And calling the generals he speaks as follows.
5. Clearchus did not desire to withdraw the right wing
from the river.
524. VOCABULARY.
Sect), need, want, crave ; mid.y Kara-Xvo), unloose,. ma/ee an
need, desire, ask, deg ; Sel, end^ halt.
inipers., it is necessary, fieXXco, intend, he about.
one ought. iraioi, strike, hit [ana-paest].
iir-aiveo), -aivicro), -rjvecra, TiTpcocTKO), tvound.
praise, commend, applaud.
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 213
525. The groups of related words that appear in this
lesson and the following should be analyzed according
to the directions given in 512. A faithful analysis of
these groups .will enable the pupil to classify the words
of the preceding vocabularies and greatly increase his
facility in ascertaining the meaning of new words.
526. R. a/>X"? ^^ fi^^^' clpX"^? ^^ fi^^^^ ^^^^y ^^^^ '*
Part, as subst., dpx-(ov, -ovt-os, 6, ruler, commander;
vTT'dpx'Cii, be under as a fomdation, support ; dpx-il? -^7^?
beginning, rule ; dpx^-lo-^, -d, -ov, from the beginning,
ancient; dpx-i'K6-<^, 'V^ -ov, fit for rule ; d/^x-O"?? o, leader ;
v7T-apxO'<;, o, under-ofjicer , lieutenant; dv-apxo-s, -op,
without leaders ; vav-apxo-'^j o {vav^), commander of a
\fleet, admiral ; (j)povp-apxo-^, o {(j)povp6<;, 6, garrison
\soldier\ commander of a garrison ; KcofjL-dpxr}-^, -ov
\{K(ofji-rj, village), village chief
j archi-, arche-, arch-, chief (jpre^x) ; arch-angel, arch-
bishop, arch-duke, etc., archon, archaic, archaeo-logy
\{\6yo<;), archives, archi-tect, an-archy, mon-archy, etc.
LESSON XLVII.
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. — SECOND
AORIST SYSTEM.
Review p. 145^ 203, 290, d ; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6;
352, 507.
527. Second Class. The theme vowel a, l, or v takes
the strong form 17, et, ev. The themes of this class end
in a mute or v : XetVoj (Xitt-); peo) (/>v-).
214 THE beginner's greek book. .
528. The verbs with a weak stern in v originally had
the strong form in ev-, which appeared as ef- before a
vowel, and finally f was dropped : peo) {pv-j^peva-ojiaL,
529. Examine the following :
TUEME,
PiiES. Stem
Tut. Aor.
1.
XetTTO), leave
\iir-
XetTrVe-
Xet^jrco eXiTTOV
2.
TreLOco^ persuade ttlO-
Treiey,.
irelaw eiretaa
3.
<l>€vyco, flee
</)U7-
(t>evr/.-
(^ev^ofiai ^ or ecpvyov
4.
dew, run
ev-
ee^U.
Oevaofjiac
5.
peo), flow
pv-
M^-
pev(TO/xat
530. The second tenses (352) differ from the corre-
sponding first tenses in form, but regularly have like
meaning. When, however, both tenses appear in the
same verb, they often differ also in meaning ; but they
appear only in a few verbs.
531. The stem of the second aorist system is formed
by affixing the variable vowel %. to the theme. Its
tense sign is the short theme vowel :
Indicative. Imperative.
Act. Mid. Act, Mid.
eXt-TToi/ iXiTTOfJirji/ \ltt€ Xlttov
Infinitives. Participles.
Act. Mid. Act. Mid.
XiTreiv XiTreaOaL Xlttcov XiiToixevos
^ Some verbs use the future middle form for the active.
^ Some verbs, besides the regular future middle form -cro/Ltai, have one
in -aeofxm, contracted to a-ov^iai, formed with the sufiix (re%-. This form
of the future is called the Doric.
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS.
215
Observe that : 1. The second aorist, like the other secondary
tenses^ has in the indicative the augment and secondary personal
endings. 2. It has the inflection of the present system, being
inflected in the indicative like the imperfect, and in the other
forms like the present. 3. XLirelv and Xiirov have the circum-
flex on the last syllable ; Xtirdtv is accented like \vdeC<i (350) ;
and XiireaOai is accented on the penult (195, a^-, 323, d ;
349, a),
a. Formulate a rule for the above exceptione to the recessive
accent.
532. Conjugate the second aorist system in the forms
above presented of XetVo) (834).
533. Examine the following common verbs of the
first class that form second aorists :
1. afyoD, lead a^-
2. fyi^vofiat^ become yev-
3. enroyLai^ follow a-eir-
4. e;^(», haiw ^^X'
5. irnTTO)^ fall ireT-
FuT. 2 AoR. Stem. 2 Aor.
a^(o ^Jf^y'^/e- ^yayov
ryevrjo-ofiai ve^^/e- iyevofirjv
ey^o^at <^7r°/e. €(T7r6fJL7jv
€^co or a')(r}a(o o-^%. €(T')(pv
TrecrovfJLaL Treo-^/j. eireaov
(for eirerov)
Observe that: 1. The theme is reduplicated in rjyayov
(ay-ay-) (545). 2. ycyvofjLaL and iriTTTco reduplicate the theme
by prefixing their initial consonants with c and dropping the
theme vowels. 3. In ey^rofiai the rough breathing takes the
place of a ; eaTrofjLrjv is for ia-eTro/jLrjv, the rough breathing
comes from the present. 4. In efo) the rough breathing takes
the place of a; in o-)(^aco the theme vowel undergoes meta-
thesis/ the theme aex becoming (rx^; ea^ov is for ea-e^ov,
5. nreaovfiat is for Trer-o-eofjiai. (p. 214^.)
^ Metathesis is the transposition of letters in a word, generally a liquid
and a vowel.
216 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
534. In giving the principal parts of verbs, the
second aorists are put in place of the first aorists, or are
given in addition if the first parts occur (353, a).
535. The lengthened forms of the theme of the second
class verbs are retained in all tenses except in the sec-
ond aorist and second passive systems, where they have
the short forms a, l, and v.
536. Conjugate the present system of XetVo) and
ireWcj} in all the forms that have been presented (pres.,
impf., imv., inf., and part., act., mid., and pass.).
537. Conjugate the second aorist system active in
all the forms that have been presented of ayco, exo),
and TTLTTTO).
538. Conjugate the second aorist system middle in
all the forms that have been presented of dycjy yCypofjiaL,
and inofiaL,
539. EXERCISES.
I. 1. inecrOe tco rjyovjjievcp. 2. 6 8e KXeap^o? ecr^e
TO Se^LOv. 3. et9 ra? Toi^eL^ eOeov. 4. to §e cTTpd-
Tevfxa 6 crtro? eTriXiirev} 5. tov^ OTrXtra? rjyayov irepl
TTfv aKTjvTJv, 6. dpiOfJio^ iyevETO tcov fxev '^XXtjvqjv
acTTTi? p^vpCa Kai TeTpaKocrCa. 7. ol ^dp^apoi ^o^ov
ifiTreaovTO^; ecj^vyop et? to (TTpaTOTreSov. 8. 8ta fiecrov
Se TTJ^ TToXeoj? pel Trora/io? KvSi/o? ovofia, evpo<; Svo
TT\idpo)v. 9. 'ApLOio^ 6 Kvpov -virapxp^ to evmvvyiov
/c£pa? ^cr^c Tov ^ap^apLKov. 10. dXX' eTrel v/x€ts
iixol ovK iOeXeTe TreiBecrOai ovhe eirecrOaij iya> crvv vfiiv
ejtOfiaL. 11. /cat Toifs tojv 'EXXtjvojv o-TpaTrjyovs e/ce
1 See 314, a.
VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS. 217
Xevcrep OTrXtra? dyayelp. ol 8e raura i7roLr)crav, aya-
y6vT€<; a>? rptcr^tXiov? OTrXtras.
II. 1. They fled from their tents. 2. They followed
the guide. 3. The king and the Greeks were distant
from one another twenty stadia. 4. After they heard
these things, they were persuaded. 5. It seemed best
to them to lead the hoplites. 6. The inhabitants left
their houses and fled to the mountains.
540. VOCABULARY.
TeTpa-KocTLOLy -at, -a, fof/r e/x-7ri7rrw, fall upon, occur
hundred [rerrape? + ^'^a- to.
t6v\. ' ovSe, neg. conj., dut not,
Tpio-'^ikioL^ -ai, -a, three and riot, nor yet, nor, \jdX,
thousand \Tp{i<i-\-^iKioi\. neque, nee ; adv., not
vTT-ap^os, under officer ^ lieu- eve7i, not at alU Lat. ne
tenant. ... quidem [ov + Se].
iK-XeLTTco, i^eXiTTov, leave
out, leave, forsake^ aban-
don., fail [eclipse].
541. Apply Grimm's law to the following:
XetVco linquo lend, loan ; ec-lipse.
Xvd} luo LOSE, LOOSE ; aua-lyze, ana-lysis
TTLTTTa) [Tier-] peto find.
218
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
LESSON XLVIII.
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS,
Review 189, 1, 2, 3; 190, 194, 1, 2, 3; 303, 304,
305, 306, 307, 308, 309, «; 310, 311, 312, 313, 351,
1, 2, 3, 4; 352, 507, 517.
542. Examine the following verbs, and note how they
differ in the perfect from XeXvKa :
1.
2.
ypa(j)co
XeLTTO)
ypa(f)-
Xltt-
iypaxjja
iXiirov
XeXoLTTa
3.
TreWd)
mO-
€7r€L(Ta
TTeireiKa or TreiroiOa
4.
5.
Tpecjico
^evyo)
rpe^
^vy-
€Tpe\jja
€(j>vyov
T€TpO(j)a
6.
7.
ayo)
Slcjko)
dy-
Slcdk-
Tjyayov
8.
TrefjLTTO)
Tre/XTT-
eTrefxxjja
7re7ro/x0a
a. Observe that the perfects of these verbs are regularly
formed by adding the tense suffix -a directly to tiie theme ;
.that some verbs in forming the perfect, as djco and Slcoko),
aspirate their final mute.
b. Observe that the stem vowel e becomes o ; that verbs of
the second class have the strong form of theme vowel, but have
oL instead of et.
543. These are called second perfects (310), and they
have the same force as the first perfects with the tense
sign -fca.
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS. 219
544. The stem of the second perfect system is formed
by affixing the tense suffix -a (phipf. --q or -eu) to the re-
duplicated theme. But some verbs aspirate a labial or
palatal mute at the end of the theme, changing tt, /8, to
<^, and fc, y, to ^. It has the inflection of the first per-
fect system (310).
545. Jtlic Reduplication. Some verbs beginning
with a, €, o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate
the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two
letters ; the second vowel of the resulting form is then
regularly lengthened as in the temporal augment : a/o^-
/coa \aKov(ii {oLKOf-, dKov-)~\.
546. Learn the principal parts of the following verbs,
and explain the formation of their perfects :
1. ayo), d^o), rjyayov, etc. 2. Slcokco, Slcj^co, etc.
3. ex^, i^(o or a^croi [crxe-], ^o-^ov^ Icr^KOi., «^XT
jitat, l(T\iQi)v. 4. Tpeirco, Tpexjjo), etc. 5. Troteiw, ttoi-
yjcrcj, etc. 6. ypd<f)a), ypdxjjoj, etc. 7. XeLirco, Xeu/fw,
ekiTToi/, etc. 8. TreCdo), Tretcrw, eTreicra, etc. 9. ireixTro),
TrefjLxIja), eirepu^a, TreVo/xc^a, TreTre/A/xai,^ iTrefji^drjv. 10. ttl-
TTTco [rrer-, tttc-, ttto-], irecrovfJLaL, eireaov, TTenTcoKa.
11. yuypofJiaL, yevrjO-oyLai, iyevofirjv, yeyova, yeye-
547. Conjugate, in the forms thus far given of the
first perfect, the second perfect system of \diTOi :
^ When /i/A/x occurs, one /t is dropped.
2 lu the perfect the theme 7rcr-(7!Te-) becomes wro-
220 THE beginner's greek book.
2d Perf.
2d Pluperf.
Inf.
Part.
XekoLTra
iXeXoLTTT)
XeXoiirevai
XeXotTTw?
XekoLTTas
eXeX 01777^9
K. r. X.
K. T. X.
548. Conjugate the second perfect indicative of the
following verbs: ayw, Stw/cw, 7r€t(9w, Tre/xTTO), <^€vyo),
yCyvofxai,
549. EXERCISES.
I. 1. OLKTJKOa TTjV K.VpOV OipeTljv. 2. T0U9 '^EXXt]-
va^ TJyaye et? tov<; fiap^dpov<;. 3. ^Opovra^ iyeypd-
<^€i iTrKTToXrjv irapd ^acriXea, 4i. to By) ttoXv tov
EXX7)VLKov ovtcjds TTeVet/ce. 5. €69 (j^vyrjv ireTpoifyeL rovs
€^aKi(T^iXiov<i. 6. ra? olKia^ i^eXeXoLTrecrav ol ivoi-
KovvTe<i. 7. iiroXiopKei MiXr^roj^ kol iTreiparo KaTayeiv
Tov<; €K7T€TTT0)Kora^. 8. iXiyovTO XeXonrivai tov Xocj^ov
OL tTTTTecs. 9. TavTTjv T7)v )((opav i7r€T€Tp6(j)eL SiapTToi-
aaL^ TOLS "EXXrjcFiv w? TroXefiCav ovaav. 10. ti'^ ovv
dSiKTjdels VTT ifXOV VVV TO TpiTOV iTTL^OvXevOJV jXOL (f>a-
vepos yeyovas; 11. 'Aptaio? Se ire^evym eV rw
(TTpaTOTTihco efxeve fieTOL twv dXXcov /BapjBdpcop.
II. 1. They have not escaped. 2. The satrap has
left the heights. 3. He has heard from Tissaphernes
of the equipment of Cyrus. 4. The horsemen had pur-
sued these wild animals. 5. He had sent with her the
soldiers of Menon.
1 Cf. 267, 13.
2 Cf. 467, 15.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF O) VERBS. 221
550. VOCABULARY.
(fyvyj], -r\<i, flight [c^euyoi]. he driven out, banished,
d7ro-(f)ev'ya)y flee hacky es- exiled,
cape. Kar-dyo)y lead down OY back^
iK-TrlTTTO), fall out or down, restore,
551. R. )8oX-, vol; loill, choose, povX-o-|iai, idll, wish ;
Po\)X-ii, -']79, will, plan ; im-povXij, -7J9, planning against,
a plot ; o-v/x-y8ouX-o-9, 6, adviser ; ^ovkev-a), plan ; pcX-
T-ia)v, -ov, gen. -ov-os (stem ^ek-ro-, com p. of aya^ds),
better ; pcX-r-io-Tos, -17, -01/, superl., /5^5if.
vol-o, loilly wish ; vol-un-ta-s, -atis, f., will, choice; vol-
•untarius, willing, voluntary ; vel . . . vel, either . . , or ;
nolo, be unwilling ; malo, prefer.
Will, wild (self-willed), well, weal, wealth.
LESSON XLIX.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF
ft) VERBS.
Review 20, 28, 110, 116, 202, a; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4;
415, 417, 418, 419,, 422, p. 170^ 531, obs. ; 544.
552. The /Subjunctive and Optative.
The subjunctive expresses contingency or the will of
the speaker. Its uses are generally those of the primary
tenses of the Latin subjunctive, but it has neither an
optative (expressing a wish) nor a potential force. The
222
THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
optative takes generally the place of the Latin subjiinc-
jtive after a secondary tense.-^ But it has its proper
optative force, and joined with the particle av it obtains
a potential force.
a. The indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative, as
opposed to the infinitive, are called finite moods. The subjunc-
tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, as opposed to the indic-
ative, are called dependent moods. The indicative expresses the
action as definite and decided in point of fact whether in a decla-
ration or a question.
553;
Subjunctive
• Active.
Conju
igate the following (825, 827, 828,
834, 835) :
Pkes.
1st Aor.*
2d Aor.
Perf.
2d Perf.
\vo}
Xvao)
Xltto)
XeXvKco
XeXoLTTO)
\vr)^
\v(Tr)<;
Vnrrjq
XeXvKTfs
XeXoLTTr)?
\irri
Xvarj
XiTTTJ
XeXvKTj
XeXoLTTJ)
Xv7]-T0V
\v(Tr)TOV
Xi7rr]T0v
XeXvKTJTOV
XeXoLirrjTov
Xvrj-Tov
Xvcr7]T0v
XlTTrjTOV
XeXvKy]Tov
XeXoiiTiqTOv
Xvco-fiev
kixTcofiev
XiTTcoixev
XeXvKoy^ev
XeXoLTTcoyiev
\vr)-Te
J^vcrrjTe
XiTrrjTe
XeXvKTjTe
XeXoLTrrjTe
\.v(jiicn
Xv(Ta)crL
Xl1T0)(TL
XeXvKQjcn
XeXoLTTcocrL
Observe that : 1. The subjunctive has no augment.^ 2. It
has the long thematic vowel instead of the final vowel (7^-, -a, -a)
of the tense suffix ; (o stands before /jl and v and r) elsewhere.
3. The subjunctive uses the endings of the primary tenses, but
with L of the original endings <tl and tl of the singular transferred
^ These supplemental moods are sometimes called " The conjunctive
mood."
^ Tlie force of the subjunctive precludes the use of the future.
' The augment denoting definite past time can be used only with the
indicative.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF (o VERBS. 223
as in the present indicative, giving 779, y (26). 4. The long
thematic vowel "/t,. ^^^y be regarded as the mood sign of the
subjunctive, being used in each tense without variation.
554. Optative Active.
Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 828, 834,
835):
Prjes. Fut.
AOR.
2 AoR.
Perf.
2 Perf.
XvoL-fii XvaoifjLi
Xva-atfJLL
XlTTOlfJLt
XeXvKoifiL
XeXotTTOlfJLt
Xuot-9 \v(70L<;
XvaaL<i
XiTTOt^
XeXvKOi^
XeXotTTOt?
\vot Xvaot
XvaaL
XiTTOl
XeXu/coi
XeXoiTTOL
XVOL'TOV K,T.\,
K.T.X.
K.T,X.
K.T.X.
K.T.X.
\V0L-T7}V
XvOt-fJL€V
XvoL-re
Xvoie-v
a. Observe that the optative has the thematic vowel o in all
tenses except the first aorist, where it has a ; that it adds the
mood suffix -i (in the third person plural -it] changed to -te before
v) to the tense stem, and uses the endings of the secondary
tenses, but has -yitt in the first person singular active.
h. The forms \ucreta-9, Xucrete, Xvaeia-v^ in the aorist are
Aeolic, but are more common than the regular forms Xucrat?,
Xvaai^ Xvcraiev. c. In determining the accent final ot and at
in the optative are regarded long. (XI. N.)
555. The subjunctive and optative are chiefly used
in subordinate or dependent clauses. But some of their
so-called independent uses will be first noted.
556. 27ie Subjunctive as Imperative of the First
Person {Exh ortaiion ) .
Examine the following :
224 THE beginner's greek book.
1. fXTj fxevoiiiev aX\ov<;, let us not to ait for others,
2. dXX' T^/xa? dp^cojjbev tov hia^aiveiVy but let us he-
gin the crossing.
Observe that : 1. Both of these sentences express exhortation.
2. The verbs are used in the first person plural and perform the
function of the first person of the imperative. 3. If the exhor-
tation is negative, [ir] is used as in the imperative and infinitive
(422).
Rule.
557- The first per807i of the subjunctive (generally
plural) is used to express exhortations. Its negative
is ^ri.
558. Subjunctive of Prohibition,
Examine the follovring :
1. firjKeTL fjue Kvpov vofxit^eTey think me no longer
2. \jJr) TTon]crr)<; tovto, do not do this (this particular
act).
Observe that in negative commands or prohibitions the pres-
ent imperative or aorist subjunctive may be used ; that the dis-
tinction between the present and aorist subjunctive is the same
as that between the present and aorist imperative (415).
Rule.
559. In prohibitions [jltj is used w^ith the present
imperative if continuance is thought of, otherwise with
the aorist subjunctive.
560. Subjunctive of Deliberation or Hesitation,
Examine the following :
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF ft> VERBS. 225
1, firj TTOLTjcrcD TovTo \ skall I not do this ?
2. ySouXet ovv TavTa oLTrayyeWcofjLev ; do you wiah
then that we should announce this ?
Observe that these questions do not ask for information, but
imply doubt and hesitation about the course to be pursued.
Rule.
561. The first person of the subjunctive may be
used in questions of appeal, expressing douht and hesi-
tation concerning the course to be pursued.^
a. The question is sometimes introduced by l3ov\eL or ySov-
XeaOe.
b. The third person is sometimes found in these questions,
chiefly with rh.
c. Why does this subjunctive take ^it) ? (422).
562. Optative of Wishing^.
Examine the following :
1. Toiaura rov^ l^Bpov^ ot ^eol iroLTJcreLap, may the
gods injlict such things upon our enemies.
2. TovTov fjLrj evSaLfioj^LcraifiL, may I not count him
Rule.
563. The optative is used to express a wish referring
to the future.
a. Why does this optative take /i?; ?
564. Potential Optative,
1. ovS* avTov aTTOKTeivai av ideXoLfjievj nor would we
ivish to kill him.
■ ^ Generally it expresses necessity of action in submission to some com-
mand or power. It is often called the interrogative subjunctive.
15
226 THE beginner's greek book.
2. o7ra>9 ri? av a7ro(f>evyoL ; kow could one make Ids
escape ?
Observe that the optative with av expresses willingness to
admit a consequence in view of some circumstances as in 1, if we
could, if we should have the power, etc. ; but too vague to be defi-
nitely expressed, and therefore this optative expresses future
action as possible or less j)ositively than the indicative.
Rule.
565. The optative with av expresses future action
as dependent upon circumstances or conditions, and is
translated with may, can, might, could, would, should,
etc. Its negative is ov.
a. Why does the potential optative take ov ?
566. av is a post-positive particle without any corre-
sponding word in English. Tt has a conditional force.
Plere it shows that the predicate Avith which it is placed
is conceived only under certain conditions expressed or
implied, av regularly stands after the verb, but it may
attach itself to any prominent or emphatic word relat-
ing to the contingency.
567. Tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative.
The subjunctive expressing contingency regularly re-
fers to the future. The optative also refers to the future,
but generally with reference to an historical tense.^ In
both subjunctive and optative the tenses chiefly used are
the present and aorist. The time of both is precisely
^ The optative then will regularly denote more remoteness or less prob-
ability than the subjunctive.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF G) VERBS. 227
the same, but the present expresses the action as con-
tinued and the aorist as a simple occurrence. The
perfect subjunctive and optative are rarely used, and
express the action as simply completed. The subjunc-
tive has no future. The future optative is never used
except as the representative of the future indicative in
indirect discourse^ (768).
568. Give the difference in the use of the present
and aorist tenses of the dependent moods not in indirect
discourse.
569. 1. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and
perfect systems active of Kekevco, kcoXvco, Ovco, /BaaiXevco.
2. Conjugate the second aorist active and second per-
fect systems of XetVa), (f)evyo}, dyo).
570. 1. Change the subjunctives in 556, 558, 560,
to optatives of wishing. 2. Change the optatives in
562 to potential optatives, and the optatives in 564 to
optatives of wishing. 3. Give original examples of the
deliberative subjunctive.
571. 1. .Give the synopses in the active of KeXevo),
KcoXvco, 6vo). 2. Give the synopses of the second aorist
stem active of Xeiiro), (fyevyo), and ayo). 3. Give the
synopses of the second perfect stem of Trefjuro), ^evyco,
ypd(f)(o.
572.
EXERCISES.
I. 1.
fxrj
0aVfJLd^€T€.
2. f.^
Oavjjbda-rjTe.
, 3.
fiGvofxep ;
4,
. fjbr) ravTa
TTOirjcro)
; 5. Tov
TTOTafJiOP
1 Here the optative is less positive than the indicative, wliich is fre-
quently retained.
228 THE beginner's greek book.
Sia^aLPiOfxev. 6. ^T/Sel? vfjLcov Xeyerco tovto nepl ifjuov,
7. Koi TO XOLTTOP 6 fieP oip^Ol, 8. TO XoLTTOV KXca/O"
^09 av dp^oL. 9. ov St) ovSe^ tovt^ dv rt? Xefat.
10. Tj'^KTT av OLKovcr aipui Ta tojv dvOpcoTTcov ovofxaTa.
11. TOP yap deoiv irokepLOv ovk av ^evycov rt? d7rocl>vyoL.
12. TTapa TTjv ye(f)vpav TTefjixpcofjiev (jivXaKijv. 13. dno-
(nrdacoixev aTro tov TTora/xou to Se^Lov Kepas.
II. 1. Do not send the soldiers. 2. Let us destroy
the bridge. 3. What shall any one do ? 4. May the
soldiers not end the war. 5. The soldiers would trust
the guide. 6. May he not escape the vengeance of the
gods.
LESSON L.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF clfiC —
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE
AND PASSIVE OF w VERBS. — PRESENT
AND SECOND AORIST SYSTEMS.
Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4; 229, 1, a, d;
287, 300, 317, 320, 344, 346, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ;
531, obs.
573. F resent Subjunctive and Optative of elfxi (eo--)
Subjunctive.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
1.
■T
-?
(0
(ofxev
2.
h
^TOV
t'
3.
V
^TOV
cJcrt
^ Wlien a negative is followed by a compound negative in the same
clause, the negation is strengthened. Cf. p. 266^.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE. 229
Optative.
Sing. Dual. " Plur.
1. eirfv eLTjfjLev, etfxep
2. €1179 eLTjTov, elrov elrjTe, elre
3. elr] elrJT7)Vy €lt7]v eiiqa-av, elev
a. Observe that the subjunctive has the long thematic vowel
"/^. as in (o verbs. (553, obs. 2) ; that w is for eco from eV-oj ; a
is dropped as in 329, obs. 4, and the two remaining syllables are
contracted (151, 3 ; 288).
b. Observe that the optative has the mood suffix -ir} (554,
a) added to the theme, that €tr]V is for ia-irj-v; cr is dropped
(288).
574. The mood suffix -it; is used only before active
endings ; after -117 the first person singular is always -v.
The contracted forms of the dual and plural are more
common than the longer forms with -117.
Sudjunctive Middle and Passive.
575. Conjugate the following (825, 827, 829, 831,
834):
S.
D.
P.
Pees. M. & P.
1st Aor. Mid.
2d Aor. Mid
1.
Xv(y-/iai
Xvcrw/iai
XlTTW/Xai
2.
Urj
XvCTTj
Xlttti
3.
\vrj-rai
Xicrrjrai
XtTrrjTaL
2.
XvTj'crOov
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
3.
Xv7)-(T0OV
1.
Xvcj-fxeOa
2.
Xvrj-aOe
3.
Xv(x}-vTai
230 THE beginner's greek book.
Perp. Mid. & Pass.
1st Aor. Pass.
S. 1.
\e\vfJi.€vo<; [-7], -ov) 3
\v6(x)
2.
h
Xv9fj<s
3.
V
Xv9fj
K. T. X.
K. T. \,
a. Observe that the long thematic vowel *^/^. of the active is
used in the middle and passive ; but in the aorist passive this is
added to the tense stem (344) ; that the forms \v66), etc., are
for XvOeco, etc., by contraction.
b. Observe that the primary endings of the middle are used,
but the primary endings of the active occur in the aorist passive
(344).
c. Observe that the form Xvy is for Xvrj-aat ; Xvaj} for
\v(T7j-aaL ; that a- is dropped aind the last two syllables are
contracted (27).
d. Observe that the present and aorist differ from the active
only in having the middle primary endings.
e. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of
the perfect middle and passive participle and the present sub-
junctive of el/jLi;^ that the participle is declined like adjectives
of the vowel declension (70).
Optative Middle and Passive.
576. Conjugate the following (825, 826, 827, 829,
830,831,834):
Pres. M. & P. Put. Mid 1st Aor. Mid.
S. 1. XvoL-fji7]v Xvcroi-^'iqv Xv(Tai-ixv,v
2. XvoL-o Xvcroi-o Xvcrai-o
3. XvOL-TO Xv(rOL-TO Xv(Tai-TO
K, T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X.
^ Compare the perfect passive in Latin.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. 231
2d Aor. Mid.
Perp. Mid. & Pass.
s.
1.
XLTTOL-fir)!^
XeXv/xeVo? (-17, -ov) el-qv
2.
Xlttol-o
eiTyg
3.
Xlttol-to
" elf]
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
Tut. Perf. M. & P.
1st Aor. Pass. 1st Put. Pass.
s.
. 1.
XeXvaoL-fjLrjv
XvOeiiq-v XvOrj(roL-fJir)v
2.
XeXicroL-o
Xv0€Lr)-q XvOrjcroi-o
3.
XeXvcroL-To
XvOeir) XvOrjCToi-TO
K. T. X.
K. T. X. K. T. X.
a. Observe that the same mood -suffix and thematic vowel
-ot {-ai in aor.) is used as in the active (554), except in the aorist
passive, which has -trj added to the stem (344) after the analogy
of verbs ir-jjh (286), but in the dual and plural, as in etrfv (573),
forms in -t frequently occur ; Xvdelrov for XvdeirjTOV^ etc.
d. Observe that the secondary endings of the middle are used,
but the secondary endings of the active occur in the aorist pas-
sive (344).
c. Observe that in the forms Xvol-o, etc., -a is dropped, and
the last two syllables are contracted (27).
d. Observe that the perfect is a compound form consisting of
the perfect middle and passive participle and the present optative
of el/JLL.
577- Subjunctive and Optative in Clauses expressing
Purpose or Motive.
Examine the following :
1. (J)lXo)v Seirat oj? avvepyovs ^Jfj ^^ needs friends
that he may have co-workers,
2. (j)iXa)v iSeuTo w? avvepyovf; e^ot, he needed friends
that he might have co-ioorkers.
232 THE beginner's greek book.
3. Kvpo<; ra? pads jJLeTeTreixxjjaTO ottw? Toifq OTrXtras
dTro/3i/3d(T€L€v, Cyras sent for the ships, in order that he
might disembark the hoplites,
4. ra nXoia KareKavcrev Iva fjurj Kvpos hia^aivoi, he
burned the boats in order that Cyrus might not cross,
5. Kekevovcri ^vkaTTecrO ai fxr) vfxiv iTnOcjvraL ttJs
vvKTos ol /3dp/3apoL^ they advise you to be on your guard
that the barbarians may not attack you during the night.
a. Observe that purpose is expressed iu Greek as in Latin by
the subjunctive, but after a secondary tense of the principal verb
the optative is used as a secondary tense 2, 3, 4 (552).
h. Observe that a purpose clause is introduced by any of the
particles, ottci)?, cJ?, tm, ywr] ; that the negative is yu?; following
the particle, 4, but sometimes in a purpose clause iir\ alone is
used in the sense of that not, in order that not, 5.
578. The law of sequence of tenses in Latin — -pri-
mary tenses follow primary and secondary follow secon-
dary — becomes in Greek the law of sequence of moods :
the subjunctive follows primary tenses and the optative
secondary.^
Rule.
579. Purpose or motive is expressed by ottw?, oj?,
XvcL^ that, in order that, fxrj, that not, in order that not,
with the subjunctive. But if the clause depends upon
a secondary tense, the optative may be used The neg-
ative is purf.
a. The subjunctive is frequently used after a secondnry tense
to retain the mood in which the thought originally occurred to
the mind.
* The optative is here regarded as a secondary tense (552).
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE PASSIVE. 233
580. S/ibjunctive and Optative in Object Clauses after
Verbs of Fearing.
Examine the following :
1. oKvovcri fjLT) ol '^Ek\.7]V€<; ixeivoicri iv rfj X^P^f ^^^^V
fear lest the Greeks may remain in the country,
2. 0JKP7)aav fjirj ofEXXrjve^ [xeiveLav iv rrj X^P^* ^^^^
feared lest the Greeks might remain in the- country.
3. SeSot/ca^ /xt) ovk ej^eu iK(kvov<^ (J)l\ov^, I fear lest
I may not have friends enouyh.
Observe that the clause expressing the thing feared is the ob-
ject of the leading verb, and is expressed bj /xt;, that, lest^ with
the subjunctive, but after secondary tenses of the leading verb
the optative is used, 2 (578) ; that the negative after /X77 is ov.
Rule.
581. After verbs of feaj^ing, caution, danger , the
object of the fear is expressed by />lt;, that or lest, or /x^
ot>5 that not^ lest not, with the subjunctive. But after a
secondary tense the optative may be used (578).
582. Conjugate the present, future, aorist, and perfect
systems middle and passive of /ceXevo), fcwXuo), Bvoi,
13 aaiXev CO.
583. Conjugate the present and second aorist sys-
tems of dyco, XetTTw, e)^&j.
584. Give the synopses of the first six tense systems
of \vo), KeXevcoy kcoXvcj, Ovco, ^aaikevo}.
585. EXERCISES.
I. 1, ot/caSe rpexpofJieOa rj incofxeOa Kvpco ; 2. Se-
Sot/ca^ fLTj 7) y€cj)vpa XeXv/xeVi] fj, 3. ^ovkevcofieda on
^ Force of the present.
234
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
Xpr) TTOLelv iK tovtcov. 4. v/xa? dyeur LKavol eiiqixev dv.
5. okptJctovctl ol dyyekoi fxr) ov So^rj rjyuv Td<; cnrop^a^
TTOirjO-ao-O ai. 6. wKvr)(Tav fxr) ol ^'EXXr^ve^; tol iiriTrj-
Seta iypiev Ik t7J<s iv /lecrw x^P^^- ^- '^ovto iiroLiqae
Iva TToXXa 7rpo(^aivoiTO toI^ "EXXyjau Seupa els ttjv
TTOpeiav, 8. dXXa ttoXXols 7Tpo(j)da'€LS Kvpo? evpidKev
Iva u/ictg dvdyoL.
II. 1. We would proceed homeward. 2. The
Greeks feared lest the king would advance against their
wing. 3. The king made this trench in order that the
way might be impassable. 4. The king is making
a trench in order that the way may be impassable.
5. Menon desired to rule that he might receive more.
586.
Seii/os, -7], -6v, fearful, ter-
rible ^ skilful ; TO Seivov,
danger, peril [SetSo)] .
TTopeidy -ds^ journey, anarch.
TTOTepos, -a, -ov, toJiich of
the two, whether ; irore-
pov . . » rj, whether . . ,or.
dv-dyoi, lead up, take up.
SetSo), BeiaofiaL, eSetcra, Se-
VOCABULARY.
SoLKa^fear, he fearful; of
reasonable fear. Perfect
has force of the present.
evpicTKO), find, devise, pro-
cure, et- and ei^ are of-
ten without augment.
y), conj., or ; T] , . .17, either
. . ,or ; with comp., than,
Lat. quam.
FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 235
LESSON LI.
FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE
VERBS. — OBJECT CLAUSES WITH ottojs
AFTER. VERBS OF STRIVING-, ETC.—
VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS.
Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 199, 201, 202, a; 351,
2, 3.
Future and First Aorist Systems of Mute Verbs.
587. Some labial mute verbs (252) form the present
by adding rVe- to the theme. These verbs belong to
the third or Tau class.
Examine the following :
Theme.
Pres. Stem.
FCT.
1st Aor.
/COTTTGJ. cut
fCOTT-
KOTTT^I^,
KOXpO)
eKOxpa
KpvTTTO), hide
KpV^
KpVTTTV,.
Kpvxfja)
eKpw\fa
ptTTTw, throio
pi^-
plTTTV,.
pixjjo)
epphpa
Observe that the, final labial of the theme becomes co-ordiiiat€
(194, 1), /3 and cf) change to tt before t of the tense suffix t%-.
588. Object Clauses loith ottcjs after Verbs signifying
to strive for ^ to care for, to effect.
Examine the following :
1. TOVTOv eveKa cfyiXcov eSetro oj? crvvepyov^ €)(oi,for
the sake of this he needed friends that he might have cO'
loorkers.
236 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
2. o-Konelv Bel otto)? tol iiTLTijBeLa e^ofxev, we must
consider how we shall have provisions,
3. i^ov\ev(Tev otto)^ fiyjirore ert ecrrat inL tco aoeX^w,
he planned that he mi(jht never a(jain he in the power of
his brother,
4. iirefjueXeLTo ws TToXefielv LKavol eirjaav, he tooh
care that they might be able to fight,
a. Observe that the purpose clause^ as in 1^ stands in appo-
sition to TOVTQV eveKa,
b. Observe that the clauses denoting the object aimed at, as
in 2 and 3, are the objects respectively of the leading verbs, and
may stand in apposition to an object accusative like tovto in 2 ;
we must consider this, Jioic we may have provisions.
c. Observe that these clauses are regularly expressed by ottg)?
with the future indicative aftei' both primary and secondary
tenses ; that the negative is fjirj,
d. Observe that these clauses implying the end of the action
of the leading verb are closely allied to the purpose clause, and
that when the object of forethought is present as in 4, these
clauses may be expressed as final clauses with oJ? instead of
OTTO)?.
Rule.
589. After verbs signifying to strive for, to care for,
to effect, the object of the endeavor is expressed by the
future indicative with ottw? or ottw? ixtj after both
primary and secondary tenses.
But the subjunctive and optative of the present or
aorist may be used instead of the future indicative, as
in final clauses (579).
590. Conjugate the present system of ayw, Trefiwo),
Olcoko), TreCSct), Ovco, ySacrtXcvw.
FUTURE AND AORIST SYSTEMS OF MUTE VERBS. 237
591. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of ayw,
TTefXTTO), Blcoko), TreCOo), kotttco, and KpvTrrco.
592. EXERCISES.
I. 1. KOTTTOvai Tov^ y8ov9 KoX ovovs. 2. Tov<; Se Kal
i^eKoxjjav. 3. /cat tol KTrjixard rts ov Kvpov^ €Kpv^
TTTev, 4. TOL 8e aXXa els top Trorafiov eppiTrrov,
5. dXV iireLpOLTO ^prfcrO ai toI<; tcov aTTOKpvTTTopiivcxiv
-^pyjfxacTL. 6. Kv/309 eSetcre /xt) ^acnXevs KaraKoxprj to
'FiXXrjvLKov. 7. /3ov\ev€Tai ottws ^acrikeucrei avT
iKeivov, 8. Twi^ Tra/a' eavrw Se ^ap^dpojv iirefxekeLTO
cJ? TToXefxeLV re t/caz^ol eliqaav /cat evvoiKcos €\oi€v ^ avro).
9. Tou? (TTpaTLcoTa^; KaTaKoxjjaL ap irepi 7ravT0<; ttolt)-
craiTO Iva /cat rot? aXXot? ''EXXT^crt ip6^o<; y eVt ySacrtXea
[xeyav CTTpaTeveLv.
II. 1. They cast aside their arms. 2. The Greeks
cut down the barbarians. 3. He feared lest the bridge
might have been broken down. 4. I will take care
that you also will praise me. 5. We must consider
how we may remain most safely.
593. VOCABULARY.
€vvoLKa)Si adv., wit/i (jood diro-KpvTrTa), hide from,
will, friendly ; evvoiKO)<; conceal [apocrypha].
ex^ivj be well disposed, eK-KonTo), cut off ; of trees,
friendly, etc., cat down.
KTTJfia, -aro?, to, possession, /cara-zcoTrrw, cut down, slay,
pi., property [/crao/xat]. kotttco [/cott-], Koxpo), e/coi/io,
1 See 269. 2 gee 579, a. » See p. ]92\
238 THE beginner's greek book.
Ke/co(^a, KeKOjJbfxaif Iko- yoiTrrw, [pt<^-] /ol^w, epplxjja,
irrjv, cut, hewy slauglder ; eppi^a, ep/Di/x/xat, ippi-
of trees, fell [chop, syn- cjydrjVy throw, hurl, hurl
copate, comma]. down^ cast aside.
KpvTTTco, [/cy3V(/)-], KpvxjjQj, (TKOTrio)^ onlj presciit and
€Kpv^a,K€KpvfjLfJiai,iKpv- impf., sp^ out, watch,
^di)v^ hide, conceal consider, observe. (See
[crypt, grotto]. the general vocabulary).
594. R. TTiO-, fid-, bind. ircCG-co [theme ttiO-], ' bind to
one's self,' win over, persuade, mid., be icon over, obey,
trust ; verbal, ireLO-'Teo-v, one must obey ; iricr-Tos, -rj, -6v,
to be trusted, trusty, faithful ; iricrTO-Tiq-^, -177-09, 7),
faithfulness, fidelity ; ttCo-ti-s, -e-o)?, 17, trust, faith ;
in(TTev-o), put faith in, trust.
fid-e-s, f., trust, faith ; fid-u-s, adj., trusty ; fid-o,
trust ; foed-u-s, -er-is, 11., leayue, treaty.
Bind, band, bond, bundle, body.
LESSON LII.
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF
LIQUID VERBS. — LIQUID VERBS OF THE
FOURTH CLASS.
Reviewl51, 1, 2, 3, 4; 152; 153,154,2; 252,255,
256, 257,1, 2,a,b', 378, 1.
595. Fourth Class (Iota Class). In this class the
present stem is formed by adding 1%- to the theme.
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 239
596. Many liquid verbs belong to the fourth class.
X of the thenrie, uniting with t of the tense-suffix tVeo
forms with it XX (378, 1).
Examine the following :
Theme. Pres. Stem. Put. Aor.
aryryeXA,©, announce a^^ik- ayyeW^/^. ayyeXcj rjyyeiXa
ffdXKoi), throw /3aX- fia\\°/^. ffaXo) efiaXov
597. When the theme ends in v or p, i of the present
tense suffix (,%- is transferred and unites with the theme
vowel to form a diphthong.
Examine the following :
Theme.
Pres. Stem.
FOT.
Aor.
fCTeivco^ hill KTev-
/CTetv°/e.
/crevco
cKTetva
arjjJLaLva), arjfjLav-
arjiiaiv'^l,.
aTjfiavo)
ia-ijfirjva
^atvco, show ^av- (f)aiv°l^. <l>ava) etprjva
XaXeTraivco, ')(^aXeTrav- x^Xeiraiv" j ^. x^Xeiravca ixaXeTrrjva
he angry.
598. But when the theme vowel is t or v, it becomes
long when i of the present tense suffix 1%. is transferred,
and the added t disappears.
Examine the following :
Theme. Pres. Theme. Tut. Aor.
ai(7')(yv- aiGyyv"!^. al<T)(vv(o jfo-;j/wa
fcpcv- Kplv°/e. KpLvco eKplva
599. Conjugate the present system of ayyiWco^
^aivoiy and pt^evco.
600. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of
240 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
dyyeXXw, ayyeko), ayyekoiyn ^ or -ovy)v, etc. ; rjyy€.i\a,
dyyeuXcoy ayyeiKaiyn, etc. ; (fyauvo), Kplvoi, fievco, and
alcr^voi (832, 833).
6oi. Conjugate the second aorist system of ^aXKo),
i/BaXov, etc.
602. EXERCISES.
1. at aTTOvSal fievovTcov. 2. airovSa^ 17 iroXeixov
dirayyeXo) ; 3. ^ovXeraC tl TrapayyeiXat. 4. 01 Se
crrpaTiwTaL tol^; (JTparrjyol^ i)(aX4Traivov. 5. to pueyi-
aTov ala)(ypofjLaL on eipevcrfiaL avrov. 6. ovroi (Twe-
KoiXecrav tovs crrpaT'iqyov^ kol Xo^ayous, ti/a dirayyeL-
Xo)cn rd irapd ^acrtXew?. 7. ot ayyeXot coKvrjcrav fxr)
ov ol "EXXT^i^eg diroKpivaivro fiaauXel. 8. ala^vopieOai
Koi Oeov^ KoX dvdpcjTTovs Tavra iroieiv.
Rule.
603. Many verbs governing the accusative in Greek
are translated into English with a preposition. Thus,
alcr^vvoixai^ be ashamed of or before ; (fyevyco, fee from ;
iTTLopKeo), swear falsely by ; pLepco, await for ; Xavd.dvo),
escape the notice of, etc.
604. EXERCISES.
1. We will truly announce these things. 2. There-
upon the horses appeared. 3. Let us announce these
things. 4. What shall I announce ? 5. I would
announce these things. 6. We were ashamed both
before gods and men to deceive him.
. ^ Coutracted form ; explain the contraction in the subjunctive and
optative.
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 241
605. VOCABULARY.
alcrx^vcoy alcr^vvo)^ ^cr^^vra, iK-^dX\(o, throw out, banish,
yaxv^^V^y .9/^^^?^^ ; mid. ea^pel,
as pass, dep., de or feel Kpivo), Kpivco, eKplva, k€-
ashamed. KpiKa^ KeKpupLai, iKpi-
oLTro-KpipojxcLL, malcs answer, 07] v, distingwish, judge,
answer. estimate [critic].
pdWcoy ySaXo), e^akov, /3e- Kjeivoi, KTevco, eKTeiva, 2d
^XrjKa,^ fiefiXrjfjiaL, i^Xij- pert'., diriKTova, MIL (See
^171^, throw y cast, the general vocabulary.)
606. Translate into Greek :^
Thence Cyrus marches a three days' journey, twenty
parasangs, to Celaenae, a populous city of Phrygia,
large and prosperous. Here Cyrus had a palace and a
large park full of wild animals. Through the middle of
the park flows the Maeander river, and its sources rise
under the palace ; it flows also through the city Celae-
nae. The great king also has a palace in Celaenae near
the sources of the river.
LESSON LIII.
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST SYSTEMS OF
MUTE VERBS (co^^mi^ed). — MUTE VERBS OF
THE FOURTH CLASS.
Review 194, 2; 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202,
a ; 204, 309, a ; 351, 2, 3 ; 378, 1, 2 ; 471, 472, 473,
474, 492, 493.
^ The stem suffers metathesis (/3aX-, ^Xa-) (p. 215 ^).
'^ A few verbs in vco drop v in the perfect and first passive systems.
8 Cf. 107, 458. -
16
242 THE beginner's greek book.
607. Many palatal mute verbs belong to the fourth
class, forming the present by adding 17^. to the theme.
K or X unites with the l of this present tense suffix,
forming with it tt, y unites with the t, forming gener-
ally TT, sometimes ^ (378, 2).
Examine the following :
Theme. Piies. Stem. Eut. Aor.
1. rdrTco, arrange ra'y- TaTT°/e. rafft) era^a
2. TT/aaTTOJ, do Trpay- Trparr^/e. irpd^o) eirpa^a
8. ^uXarro), guard (j^vXaK- (j)v\aTT°/e. (f)v\d^a) icfivXa^a
Observe that in the future and aorist k and 7 with a of the
tense suffix 0-%- or aa- form f (194, 2).
608. Many lingual mutes with themes ending in 8
form the present stem by adding the tense suffix tVe..
8 unites with this l forming { (200). These verbs be-
long to the fourth class.
Examine the following :
Theme. Pres. Stem, Put. Aor.
1. aOpoi^oa^GoUect aOpoiZ- aOpoC^^I^. aOpoura) fjOpoiaa
2. dpird^oo^ seize dpirah- dpTra^^/^. dpTrdcrco rfpiraaa
3. davpid^co^ Oavpuah- OavpLa^^/^. Oavp^daopai idavpuaaa
admire
4. vopi^co, iJiinh vopiZ- vopil^^l^. vopLtca evopiaa
5. (Tco^co, save acoS- <jo)f%, o-oxrco ecroyaa
a. Verbs in -l^co of more than two syllables, with themes in
tS- regularly drop -a of the future and insert e, then teco and
teopLai are contracted to lS) and tovp^ai. This is called the Attic
Future (254).
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 243
6og. Two vowel verbs belong to the Fourth class, —
Kaio), bur 71^ and /cXaiw, weep, KaCo) is thus formed :
Theme. Pres. Stem. Put. Aor.
Kaua^ hum Kav- KaC"!^. (for Kav-C^j^^) Kavaca eKavaa
a. V is dropped between two vowels (290, b ; 363, a ; 528).
Attic prose uses kuq} instead of Kaico ; c is dropped between
two vowels and a lengthened.
610. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of
dyco, ap^(t)t Tre/xTTW, rarrw, (^vXoltto), pofXi^o), crco^^co,
KpVTTTQ), and pLTTTCO.
611. Conjugate the future and aorist systems of \vo),
KOiXvco, TTOpevco, Trotco), (f>aLvoj, KTeivo), (TrjfiaLPCo,
6i2. Denominative verbs of the Fourth Class :
1. ipi^o), strive (for ipiS-Loj), from epis [eptS-], strife,
2. aOpoL^o), collect (for dOpoL^-ico), from d9p6o-^
\_d0pO'O-'], in a bodfj.
3. dvayKal^co, comjjel (for dpayKaS-Lco), from dvdyKrj
[dvayK-d'~\ , necessity.
4. ala)(vva)y shame (for aicr)(yv-L(t}), from ala^vy]
[atcr^ui^-d-] , shame,
5. (77) [xaivcoy signify (for crr^/xai^-to)), from arjjxa [o'rj-
/xar-], sign.
G. yaXeiraivo), be angry (for yoX^TTCkv-ioi)^ from yaXe-
7r6<s [xaXcTT-o-], angry.
7. dyyeWco, announce (for dyyeX-icu), from ayyeXo?
[ayyeX-o-], messenger,
a. Observe that e/ot'^o) is formed by affixing the present tense
suffix tVc- to the stem of the noun.
244 THE beginner's greek book.
h. Observe that, by analogy, many denominative verbs in
-tjcw and -afo) are formed, 2, 3.
c. Observe that in like manner themes in -av and -vv of verbs
in -aiva) and -vvo) come from stems without v, 6, 6.
d. Observe that the final vowel of the stem is often omitted
when the suffix 1°/^. is added, 4, 7.
613. SamMary of the Euphonic Changes of Consonants
before t.
1. X with I forms W.
2. After V and p, i j)asses over to the preceding vowel
and unites with it by contraction. But if the preceding
vowel is I or v, it becomes long when i is transposed (598).
3. AC, y, X' ^^id sometimes r and 6, with i become tt,
a. VT with this t becomes va- in the feminine of participles and
adjectives (p. 89^), in which v is regularly dropped and the
preceding vowel is lengthened ; r with i sometimes becomes -crc7-
(p. 200^), %a)0tet9, j^apieaaa, 'x^apUv,
4. 8 (sometimes y or yy) with t forms ^.
614. EXERCISES.
I. 1. TovTo Trpd^co. 2. TTOLvra ecrcacrav. 3. cKaov
ra TrXota. 4. ttjv yecfivpav i(j)vXd^apTo. 5. t^ Se
KtXtcrcra ttjv tol^iv tov crrpareu/xaro? iOavfxacre.
G. o-rjfxavel on XPV '^oielv. 7. ivLKrjO'e Mapavdi^
ipL^opTa ol Trepl cro(j6ta9. 8. ixeit^oiv rj irpd^LS rrjs
TTpoaOev (fyaLveraL. 9. kol ^acrtXeu? Srj, inel rjKovcre
TLO-(ra(j)epvovs top Kvpov arokov, dvTLTTapecTKevd^eTO.
10. ra To^evfjiara r^vdyKal^ov ol "EWrjve'; eK/SdWetv
Tovs fiap/3dpov<;. 11. ravra? rets ct/xafa? fJL€ard<;
aXevpcop Kal olvov TrapecrKevdcraTo.
FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST OF MUTE VERBS. 245
II. 1. They saved their property. 2. The Cilicians
guarded the tents. 3. They admired the army. 4. But
he will signify what he will do. 5. He conquers those
who have been drawn up before the king.
615. VOCABULARY.
dXevpa, -a)v, t a, flour. 7rapa-(TKevd(^a) [-cr/ceva8-],
dvayKoi^a), dvayKacrcoy etc., -daw, etc., ^et ready,
force, compel. prepare ; mid., provide
dvTL'TTapacTKevd^oiJiaL, pre- [crKevy], equipmenf.~\
pare one's self in tarn. arjfjLaLPO), (T7)fxav(t>, etc.,
ipL^o), rjpLaa, strive, con- show hy sign, give signal,
tend, w. dat. signify.
Kaco, Kavcrco, eKavcra, k€- TdrTO), rd^o), etc., arraiige,
KavKa, KeKavpuai, eKav- order, draw up ; mid.
Orjv, hum [caustic]. and pass., he stationed
[tactics] .
616. R. d/c-, ac-, pointed^ sharp, swift. cLk-cov, -ovt-
09, 6, javelin ; dKovTiQcn, hurl the javelin ; d/c-po-s, -a,
'ov, at the point or end., highest ; aKpo-v, to, height, dKpo-
7roXt-9, -€-0)9, rj (770X19, city), upper city, citadel, wk-v-s,
-eta, 'Vy sioift. . iiriro-s, 6, 17 (for t/c-/ro-9)j horse ('the swift
one') ; LTT7r-apxo'<;, 6 (R. dpx; 526), cavalry commander;
(^1X1-77770-9, -ov {^iko%, fond\ fond of horses ; hnr-iKo-^,
-6v, of a horse or of cavalry ; t7777-eu-9, -e-0J9, o, horseman ;
LTTTrev-o), ride ; d(j)i7nrev'0}, ride hack.
ac-ie-s, -ei, f., sharp edge, line of hattle ; ac-er, adj.,
sharp, pungent. eq.u-u-s, -1, m., horse ; equ-es, -it-is, m.,
a horseman ; equ-ester, -tris, -tre, adj., equestrian.
Edge, egg (' Q^g on,' goad) ; acme, acro-bat, acro-
polis, etc. ; ox-ide, oxy-gen, oxy-tone, etc.
246
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
LESSON LIV.
REG-ULAR VERBS IN /xt.
tCTTT^jLtt.
Review 27, 28, 116, 151, 1, 2, 3, 4 ; 153, 154, 2;
229, 3, a ; 286, 287, 288, 300, 309, 315, 323, a, h, c, d;
344, 350, a, b; 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 417, 530, 531,
obs.; 544, 553,obs.; 554, «, i5,c; 573, «,^; 574,575,
a, b, c, d; 576, a, b, c ; 578.
617. Verbs in /xt form their present and second
aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second perfect,
by adding the personal endings directly to the theme,
omitting the variable vowel except in the subjunctive.
Tenses thus inflected are called /xi forms. In other
tenses verbs in /xt are inflected like verbs in w.
618. Monosyllabic themes are often reduplicated :
yiyvofxaL (533, 2), StSw/it [So"]j ^^id tlOtjixl [^e-].
10-717 jutt has reduplication : t for cri, o-L-o-TrjjjiL, theme
crra-(533, obs.*).
619. T/te Active of to-TTj/xt [crra-], place, set (847,
851).
Present.
Ind.
Sdbj.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
S. 1.
t(TT7)fJLl
ICTTO)
IcTTairjv
lo-rdvai
2.
ICTTiq^
IcTTfj^
l(TTaLrj<;
lo-TT)
3.
LOTrja-L
la-TTJ
IcTTaLy]
IcTOLTCti
D. 3.
la-Tarov
K. T. X.
K. T. X,
K. T. X.
Part.
3.
IcTTaTOV
K. T. X.
Icrrds
REGULAR VERBS IN )Ltt.
Imjpf. S. 1. l(TT7]p, 2. Icrry]^, 3. lo-rr).
247
D.
2. ia-Tarov,
Second Aorist.
3. la-TaTT]
V, /c.r.X.
Ind.
SuBJ. Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
S. 1. eCTTTJV
(TTO} cTTaCrjv
arrival
2. €aT7)<;
(TTYJ^ (TTair]^
CTTTJUL
3. eCTTT]
(TTTJ CTTairj
aTTJTO)
Part.
/c. r. X.
K. T. X. K. T. X.
K. r. X.
ora?.
«. The dual and plural of the present and second aorist
optative of the regular [jll forms may be contracted : laralrov,
etc. (573).
b. Observe that : 1. The final vowel of the theme is lengthened
in the singular of the present and imperfect indicative active,
and in all forms of the second aorist before a single consonant,
or wherever the ending is lacking. 2. In the present singular
indicative the endings -fit, and -<7t are retained, and the third
person plural ends in -den contracted to da-t} 3. The third
person plural of the secondary tenses has -aav (116, 300, 573).
c. Observe that : 1. The subjunctive has the long variable
vowel "/^. as in the verbs in a) (553, obs.*), but contracted
with the theme. 2. The contracted forms arise as if from a
theme in e {lare-^ are- which appear in Ionic), (151, 2, 3).
d. Observe that : 1. The mood suffix of the optative is -irj
before the active endings (elsewhere -t) (574). 2. The second
aorist system differs from the present mainly in rejecting the
reduplication 2 (531).
e. Observe that the present imperative Xarrj omits -Oi and
lengthens the stem vowel; that 6l is retained in the second
aorist.
^ -aai is not contracted with other vowels of the theme.
2 Let the pupil form the second aorist from the present system by re-
jecting the reduplication, etc.
248
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
f. Observe that the infinitive has -vai.
g. Observe that the participles have the same stem ending as
the verbs in w {vr), terras (for laravr^^ ; that they have the same
accent as participles in cu9 (350^ ^).
620. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of laTrifjiL {stetu
ecrra- for o-ecrra-).
Ind.
S. 1. (eaTrjKa)
stand.
Second Perfect (855).
Sub J. Opt.
Imv.
2. (ecTTTyfca?) icTTrj^ ecrraiT7S iaraOi
3. (eaTTjKe) ^ctttj iarair) kcTrdroi
2. eararov k.t.X. k.t.X. k.t.X.
3. ecrraTov
K. T. X.
Second Pluperfect.
S. 1. {i(TT7]Kri or elaTTJKr)), stood.
2. (karrjKiqf;) D. 2
3. {iaTTJKei) 3
K. T. X.
Inf.
ecrravai
Part.
ecTTaTov
Observe that the singular of the perfect and pluperfect is sup-
plied by the first forms ; that the perfect has the force of the
present, and the pluperfect of the imperfect.
621. The second aorist of lo-rTy/xt, both perfects and
pluperfects active, and the middle except the first aorist,
* Contracted from iaraas -.
eoTtoy iaraxra iaros, or earas
i(rTS)Tos iaraarjs ecrrairos
K.T.X.
RP^GULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 249
are intransitive. This distinction applies to their nu-
merous compounds.
622. Fassive and Middle of larywLi^ (847, 851).
Present.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf.
S. 1. tcrra/xat tcrrw/iat l(TTa,i\Jjr]v LCTTaaOai
2. tcrracrat IcrTrj tcrrato Lcrracro
3. IcrraTaL larrJTaL tcrratro IcTTOLijOo} Part.
K. T. \. K. T. X. /C. T. X. K. T. X. l(TTdfJLeV0^
Impf- S. ]. la'Td[xr]i', 2. IcrTacro, 3. Icrraro, /c. r. X.
Observe that : 1. In the middle the final vowel of the theme
is not lengthened. 2. The mood suffix of the optative is -t-
(619, d), contracted with the theme vowel, and hence the con-
tracted form takes the accent. 3. In other respects the middle
differs from the active in having the middle endings ; cr in the
endings -crat and -ao is retained in the indicative and imperative
(27, 318), but dropped in the subjunctive and optative.
623. Decline (like XuVa?, 229, 3, a) (823) :
e ji
LcrTa<;
IcTTacra
lo-Tav
to-raz/ro?
IcTTaar]^
laToipTO^
K. T. X.
K, T. X.
K. T. X.
a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this ?
6. Monosyllabic participles are accented in the genitive and
dative on the penult, and do not conform to the rule for mono-
syllables (209).
^ loTj^fiL has no second aorist middle, firpidfxrjv, I bought [Trpta-], is
added (846).
250 THE beginner's greek book.
624. Conjugate the present system of TTi^irXiqyLi'^
[7rX.a-] .
625. Conjugate the present system of 8uj/a/xai^
[Svj^a-], be able, eVto-Ta/iat ^ [eTTtcrra-], understayid.
626. Write the synopsis in the present and second
aorist systems of icrrTy/xt.
627. EXERCISES.
I. 1. laTCJfxeOa. 2. ol Be ^dp^apoi ovk icrTrjcrav.
3. ol 8e TToXeixLOL OVK av IcrraivTO. 4. Karicrrrj et9
T7)v ^aaiKeiav 'Aprafep^T/?. 5. ecrrrjo-e to dpfia irpo
Trjs (j)dXayyo<; fiecrrjs. 6. 6 8e €/x7rt/i7rXa9 dirdpTCJP Trjv
yvcofjLTjv aTreirefjiTTev. 7. irapd KXiap^ov 8e iTvyyave
k(TTr\K(ji%, 8. Tore 8* d<f>€LO'TiJKeaap tt/oo? Kvpop irdcrai
TrXrjj/ MlXtJtov. 9. /cat 'aevCa, 09 avro) TrpoeicrTrjKeL
Tov iv TOLS TToXeau ^evLKOv, '^Keuv irapayyeXXei. 10. ol
8e KoX earacrav diropovvre^ rw rrpdypiaTi. 11. e)^€t 8e
8vvap.LP /cat lirmKrjv /cat vavTLKrjv rjv 7rdvTe<; opcofjuev re
/cat iina-rdfjieOa. 12. aXX' eS ye fxevroL imo-TdcrOoia'av
OTL ov d7ro7re(f)€vya(TLv.
II. 1. Let the soldiers stand. 2. I know how to
be ruled. 3. He will be able to stand. 4. There-
upon the barbarians took their places on the left.
5. Cyrus halted with the noblest and most prosperous
about him. 6. But the horsemen of the barbarian
army to the number of a thousand stood on the right
near Clearchus.
1 The reduplication is strengthened by the nasal fi.
2 Accent the subjunctive and optative as if there were no contraction,
bvvcofiaij dvvaiTo, etc. See eVpiti/xrji/ (851).
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL.
251
628. VOCABULARY.
^aaiXeid, -a9, kingdom^ roy- Ka6-LaT7jfJiLj set doimi, ap-
alfy [^acriXev?]. jjoM ; iutrans., take one s
d(l)-LcrT7jfjLLy remove, make re- place, he established,
volt ; intrans., revolt. 7TLfJiTr\r)ixi,7r\T]cro},^ II [till,
hvpafJLaL, Swrjcrofiai, SeSu- FULL, plethora].
vr)iJLaL, iSvv7]9rjv, he ahle, 7rpo-L(TT7jfXL, put at the head
he capable [dynamic]. of ; intrans., he at the
iyi-TTiixTrhqixi^Jlll up, satisfy. head of command, w. gen .
eV-Tvyx^^^? c//«72C^ upon,
meet,
eTTtcrra/xat, e7ncrT>^cro/iat,
'^'7TL(TT7]6r)v, understand,
know, know hotv.
LCTTiqfJiL, arrjao), €(rTr)cra,
icTTrjv, ecTTrfKa, ecrra/xat,
i(TT(i6'r)v,set, make stand;
intrans., stand, halt.
ye, enclitic and postposit.
intens. particle, even, at
least, indeed ; emphasizes
the preceding word, etc. ;
often to be indicated in
Eng. only by emphasis.
ir\rjv, conj., except, except
that; improper prep.,
except.
629. aXXo9, other. aXXos, -17, -ov, another, other;
dXXa, conj. (neut. plur. with changed accent, in ariother
way), but ; aXXo)?, adv., in another way or manner, other-
wise. SXkO'Oev, adv., from another place ; aXXtiX-cov,
reduplicated stem dXX-T^Xo- (405), of one another. dX-
Xdrro) (dXXay-), make over, change, exchange.
aliu-s, adj., another, other; ali-quis, pron. indef.,
some one ; ali-enu-s, adj., of another, strange, foreign,
hostile ; al-ter, adj., the other (of two) ; alter-nus, adj.,
one after the other, alternate.
ELSE ; all-egory, allo-pathy, par-allel.
:252 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
LESSON LV.
VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS. — PERFECT
MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS.
Review 198, 245, 252, 314, a; 317, 318, 319, 1, 2,
320, 321, 322, a-, 325, 351, 5; 553, 554, 573, 575,
576.
630. Pifth Class (Nasal Class). Verbs of the Fifth
Class form their present by adding a suffix containing
V to the theme.
631. Some verbs add the suffix 1/%. to the theme.
Examine the following :
Theme, Pres. Stem. Fut. Aob,
1. refivco, cut reft- T6fjLv°/^. re^Si erefjLov
era/JLOv
2. ^6 dvco, anticipate (f)da- (j)dav°/e. ^Orjo-oixai €(f)6aaa
3. fiaivco, {/o ^a-^ ^av- ^aiv" I ^. ^rja-ofjiaL efi-qv'^
(for jSav-L''/,.)
4. iXavi^co, march iXa- iXavv^/^. iXco rjXaaa
(for i\a-vv°/^,) (for iXdaco)
a. Observe that ^aivco belongs both to the fourth and fifth
classes, but the liquid form of the stem is found only in the
present system.
b. Observe that iXavvo) is for eXa-vv-co ; that v and v are trans-
posed ; and that its future is formed hke that of KaXeco (254).
^ ^aivo) has second aorist e^rjv of the -/ni form (619, b), e^r^v, ^S), ^airju,
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS.
253
632. Some consonant themes add the suffix aj/Ve-*
Examine the following :
Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aor.
alaOdvofjiai^ alad- alaOav^j^. aladrjao/JLat^ rjcrOofjLrjV
perceive
d/JLaprdvo)^ miss dfJuapT- djiaprav^ I ^. dfiapT'qo-o/jiat^ rjfjLapTov
633. If the last vowel of the theme of verbs taking
the present tense suffix ai^°/,. is short and followed by a
single consonant, another nasal is inserted after this
vowel ; fM^ is inserted before a labial, y before a palatal,
and t* before a lingual.
Examine the following : *
Theme. Pres. Stem.
Fut.
2d Aor.
eXaffov
eXaOov
1. Xafiffdvco, take Xa^- Xa/JLffav°/^. Xrjy^ofJLai^
2. Xavddvco, escape XaO- XavOav^/^. Xrjaco^
the notice of
3. pLavBdv(o^ learn /JLa6- fMavOav°/e. fJLa67]ao/jLai^ efiadov
4. TTwddvofJiaL, TTvO- 7rvv6av°/e. irevao^ai^ eTTvOofjLrjv
learn hy inquiry.
5. TV'y')(^av(o^
TV^' Tvy'x^ai/'/e. Tev^ofjbai €tv)(^ov
634. A few themes add P€°/^.,
Examine the following :
^ The theme assumes e, as in some verbs of the first class (522), in all
the systems that occur except the present and second aorist.
2 The nasal is in fact p changed to /x before labials and y before palatals
(194, 4).
^ Some themes of verbs of this class are lengthened as in verbs of
class 11 (527), in other systems than the present and second aorist.
* See 522.
254 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aon.
1. LKveo/JLaL^ come U- Uve''/^. L^ofiat l/cofxrjv
2. v7r-i(TXveo^ai^ o-e%- -to-;^i^e**/e. -ax^ofMat -eaxofJ^r/V
promise
a. -icrx' of the present stem is from tcr^o), for cnax-, lo'X'
(533, obs.^), the reduplicated theme of e%a>, at-aex--
635. Conjugate the perfect middle system of \vo),
KeXevd), kcdXvci), Ovcoy TLfidco, TTOiid), Sr]\6a) (829, 830,
836).
636. Conjugate the second aorist system of aiaOdvo-
(jiai, Xayi^dvo}^ \av6dvo)^ rvyxdvo), LKpeo/JiaL.
637. EXERCISES.
I. 1. /cat XafiopTe^;^ rd oirXa iraprjaav ets 2a/o8ei9.
2. erv^e ra^^t? avTco eTTOfxevrj t(x)v ottXltcjp. 3. ivravOa
hri Kvpov aTTOTefiveraL r) X^V V Sefia. 4. rjcrOero otl
TO Mevojpof; arpdrevfia TJSr) ev KtXt/cta rjv eicro) tcov
6p4ot)v. 5. TovTov Sta^a? i^eXavveu hid Opvyia?
crra6p})v iva 7rapaadyya<; okto) et? KoXocrcra?. 6. iv
Tavda d(j)LKeTO tj ^vevvecno^ yvvrj tov KlXlkcov ^acn-
Xelw? Trapd Kvpov. 7. ttjv 8e 'FiWrjPLKTjv BvvafJiLP yjdpOL-
l^ev ojg /xctXtcrra i7nKpv7TT6fJLepo<;, ottoj? on aTrapaaKevo-
rarov \d/3oL ^acnXea. 8. dva^aivei ovv 6 Kvpo^ Xa^cov
TL(T(Ta(j)epvrjv w? (fyCXov, kol tcov 'EXXt^z^wj^ Se e^wi^ ottXl-
ra? dvi^y] rpiaKocriov^. 9. TTefjLxjjcjfjiev 8e /cat npoKaTa-
Xrjxjjofievov^ ^ ra aKpa, oiroyq puy) (j)9dcra)crL pLrjre Kv/)OS
jLLT^Ve 01 KtXt/c€? /caraXaySoVre?.*
^ XaiM^vto has second aorist imv. Xa/Sc.
2 Often rendered «?«V^, like excoj/.
8 Sc. ai/Spar. 4 cf. 248, 9.
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF VOWEL VERBS. 255
II. 1. These arrived in Sardis for him. 2. But
Cyrus accordingly went upon the mountains. 3. And
he promised gold to them. 4. And he took the money
and collected an army by this means.^ 5. And Cyrus
learned of the difficulty by inquiry. 6. But he de-
scended through this plain and inarched four stages,
twenty-five parasangs, into Tarsus.
638. VOCABULARY.
a-irapd'CTKevo^, -ov, unpre- /Sa/iat, i^dOrjv, come, go
pared [o-k€u>;, equip- [venio, comE; basis].
ment\. iTn-KpvTTTO), conceal, hide.
dTTO-rejLirft), -Tejicoy cut off, 7r/>o-/caTa-Xa/xy8aj^a>, preoc-
intercept. cupy.
d(j)'LKP€OfJLaL {iKveofjLai, 1^0- TTvvOdvoyiai, TrevaofxaL, inv-
fiat, iKOfJLTjj/, Lyixai), ar- Oofirjv, Trenvo-fJiaL, learn
rive, return. hy inquiry, inquire, ask,
^aiv(x} {/3a-, ^av-), ^rjcro- vir-icrxveoyiaL, -crxV^^ofjiaL,
fJLai, e^iqv, fie^rjKa, ^4- -€(Txofir)v, -ecrxniJ^OLL,
2)7^07nise.
639. R. pLK, IK, vie, arrive, dwell. d<t)-iK-V€-o-fjiat,
come to, arrive ; lK-av6-s, "rj, -ov, coming up to the needs
or demands, sufficient, able, oik-o-s, 6 (/rocfco?), a dwell-
ing-place, house, home ; oiK-Cd, -a?, house, dwelling ; olko-l,
at home ; olko:0€t/, away from home ; ot/c-a-Se, home-
ward ; oIko-v6\lo-^, 6 (t'OjLio?, la?o), one who controls a
household, steward ; olKe-rr)-';, -ov, member of ones house-
hold, servant ; oIk4-co, dwell, have a home.
256 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
vicu-s, -i, in., ahode, village ; vic-inn-s, adj., of the vil-
lage, near, neighboring ; vil-la, ae, f., country-seat.
-WICK, -wich(508, 12), di-ocese, eco-nomy, ecumen-
ical, par-ochial.
640. Cyrus plans to become King, and secretly raises a Greek
Army.
Review 146, 237, 238, 239, cJ? (241), 380, 1, 4 ; 381,
382, on (388), 398, 433, 437, 464, a-, 466.
4. *0 8' (wg OLTTTJXde KLpSvvevcra<5 kol dTLiJiaa6el<;, ^ov-
Xeverau ottw? fjurjirore ert ecrrai eVt ro) dSeXc^w, dXX', rjv
hvv7]Tai^ /Sacnkevaei avT eKeCvov. IlapucraTt? jxev Stj
rj jJLiJTrjp vTrTjp^e tco Kvpco, c^tXovcra avTOv p^aXkov 7) top
jBaa-iXevovTa 'ApTa^ep^rjp.
5. ''Ocm9 S' a(j)LKveLTO tcov irapa pacn\€(o<; 7rpo9
avTov, 7rdvTa<; ovtco Start^et? d7r€7re/x7rero wcr^' avTco
fjbdWov <^iXov9 eivau ^ rj ^acriXei. kol tcov Trap* iavrco
8e ^ap^dpoiv ^ eireixekeiro, cu9 iroXepieiv re iKavol elrjaav
Kai €vvo'lk(o<; e^oiev avrco.
6. Trjv 8e ^EWrjPLKrjv SvvafJLLV rfOpoit^ev w? /xdXtcrra
iovvaTO^ iTTLKpvTTTOfJievof;, oVw? otl dirapacKevoTaTov
Xa^oL ^aaikia. wSe ovv iiroieiTO rrjv crvXkoyTjv.^
OTTOcra? et;^€ (ftvXaKa^ ^ eV rat? TroXecrt, irapriyyeiKe ro2<;
(f>povpap-^oL<; e/cctcrrot? Xafji/Bapetv dvhpa^ liekorrovvT)-
(TLOv<; on Tr\ei(TTOv^ koX ^SeXricrrov?, w? iin^ovkeuovTO^^
^ ^1/ dvvrjrai, if he should be able, if possible (687).
^ Governed by wore, denoting the result which the action of the leading
verb tends to produce.
^ Explain the construction.
* ois ebvvaro, etc., as most he was able.
^ Give the derivation.
« Cf. 444, 10.
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL,
257
TLcr(Ta(j)€pvov<; rat? TroXecTL, /cat yap rjcrav ^ at 'Iw^t/cat
TToXets TLO'cra(f)epvov<; to ap^aiov Ik /SacrtXeo)? 8e8o-
fievai' Tore 8e d<^€tcrT7^/cecra^' tt/dos Kupoit' Tracrat ttXt)!'
MtXT^Vou.
oLTrTJkOe, 2 aor. of arr-ip^oyuai, go away^ back,
ovTO) 8taTt^et9, <^o disposing, pres. part, of hiariOiqpii,
arrange, dispose.
hehojxivai, having been given, perf. part. mid. or pass.
of StSw/xt, yiy^.
LESSON LVI.
REGULAR VERBS IN /xt. — StSw/ii.
Review Lesson LIV., 151, 1, 2, 3; 152, 153,
154, 3.
641. Active o/SiScofiL [So'lgive (848, 852).
Present.
Ind.
SUBJ.
Opt.
IMV.
Tnf.
S. 1.
StSwjitt
8t8ft)
SlSoL7]P ^
hihovai
2.
8t8a)9 •
8t8&>?
81801179
8t8ov
3.
8t8&>(7t
8t8(w
St8ot77
8t8dTa)
Part.
D. 2.
hiSoTOV
/C. T. X.
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
8t8oi;9
3.
SiSoroT/
K. T. X.
1 The impf. ri(rav is used with to apxaiov of a time prior to the main
action, as plupf., but to denote a continued act, — had originally belonged.,
used to belong. The imperfect in this sense is usually preceded bj o5,
ore, etc. (314, a ; 433, N. 2).
2 See 619, a.
17
258
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
Impf, S. 1. eStSow, 2. I'^l^ov'i, 3. eStSov^
D. 2. eStSoTo^', 3. €8180x171/,
k:. t. X.
D.
Second Aorist.
Ind.
SUBJ.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
1. (e8ft>/ca)
Soi
80117 J'
Souj/at
2. (ISw/ca?)
8&J9
806179
809
3. (eSwfce)
^^
80177
8oT&>
Part.
2. €80x01^
K. r. X.
fC.T. X.
K. T. X.
80US
3. cSoTT^^
/C. T. X.
a. Observe that in tlie imperfect indicative active iSiSovv, etc.
(instead of cBlBcov, etc.), are formed as if from a contract verb in
00) (SlBoco for SiScofjii).
h. Observe that oo), 077?, 077 in the subj. of verbs in -ft)/w, are
contracted to w, (»?, « (151, 3).
c. Observe that in the present imperative active hihov (instead
of hihoBi) is formed as from a contract verb in 0© (154, 3).
d. Observe that the part. SlSov^ is for 8tSovT<? (^^^) ff )•
e. Observe that : 1. The singular of the second aorist is lack-
ing, and it is supplied by the first aonst eSco/ca, etc., formed by
the tense suffix -/ca for -era (197). 2. The second aorist by
exception does not lengthen its final theme vowel.
f. Observe that in the second aorist imperative 80? is irregular
for Sodt.
g. Observe that the second aorist infinitive Sovvat (for 3o-
€vai) is formed with the ending -evai. •
k. Observe that the second aorist system difi'ers in the main
from the present in rejecting the reduplication (619, dj 2).
642. Middle and passive of SiScofjn (848, 852).
REGULAR VERBS IN fit. 259
Present.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf.
S. 1. StSo/xat StSw/xat hihoifxrjv SiSoadai
2. SiSocrai StSoi St8oto StSocro
3. StSorat StSoirat StSotro StSdcr^w Part.
/c. r. X. /c. r. X. k. r. X. /c. r. X. hiSofxevos
Imj)/, S. 1. iSiSoixrjv, 2. eStSocro, 3. eSiSoro, fc.r. X.
SECONiD AORIST.l
Ind.
SuBJ.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
S. 1. ihofirjp
8a)/xat
hoifJLTjV
Sdo-^at
2. ehov
Sw
Solo
Sov
3. eSoro
Swrat
Sotro
Sdcr^oj
Part.
/C. T. X.
fC. T. X.
fc. r. X.
K.T. X.
Sofxej/of;
a. Observe that tlie mood suffixes and formation of the middle
are the same as in Larrj/JLL (622, obs. 1, 2, 3).
b. Observe that a of the ending -cro of the second aorist
middle is irregularly dropped^ and that then the two last vowels
are contracted.
643. Decline (like Xvcov, 229, 1; 823):
StSou?
SiSovcra
StSoV
StSdl^TO?
StSoUCTT^?
StSd^TO?
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
K. T. X.
a. How does the second aorist participle differ from this.'
644. Conjugate the tense systems of SiSw^t having
-0) forms.
1 See p. 2472.
260
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
645. EXERCISES.
I. 1. 6 Se Kvpos hiScoaiP avrw els reTpaKicr^ikiovs
KoX e^ firfvcov fiicrdov. 2. Vficov 8e twv ^EkXijvcov olkl-
vaKiqv e/cacrro) ^pvaovv
haxrcx). 3. TavTa Se tol
Bcjpa TrdvTcov^ Sr) /xaXicr^a
Tols (j)i\oLS SuehiSov. 4. ov-
TOi Xiyovai on /BaatXevs
KeXeveu tovs 'EXX7yj/as 7ra-
paSovvai TOL onXa. 5. Trj
8' oui/ ar par la Tore airi-
Sa)K€ Kvpos fJLLcrdov reTToi-
p(OV fJLTjVCJV. 6. ivMiXlJTCO
Se TOL avTOL TavTa ^ovXevov-
raij OLTTOcrTrjv ai^ irpos Kv-
pov. 7. TTpos 8e ^acnXea
No. 11. "AkIvolkt)?.
TrefjLTTOJv Tj^LOv SoOrjvaL ol^ TavTas tols iroXeus (jlolXXov rj
TLa'cra(j)€pvr)i' ap^eiv avT(x)v. 8. tol irXoia KaTetcavaev,
Iva jJLr) Kvpos BiajSr). 9. ra? ctjuafa? fxecTTOLS aXevpcjv
irapeaKevdcraTo K.vpos Iva StaSotTy rot? '^^XXr^criv.
II. 1. He gave to each man five minae of silver.
2. He will be able to pay as much as he promises.
3. He commanded the Greeks to surrender their arms.
4. Tissaphernes and the brother of the king's wife gave
to the generals of the Greeks their right hands. 5. The
Ionian cities formerly had belonged to Tissaphernes,
having been given to him by [e/c] the king, but at that
time they all had revolted to Cyrus except Miletus.
^ Apposition to to. avrd.
^ Depends upon fiaXto-ra.
* Indirect reflexive. Explain the accent.
READING LESSON. 261
646. VOCABULARY.
aKlvdKTj^^j -ovj short sword, pve, allow , offer [Lat.
dagger. do; dose, anti-dote].
a7ro-8i8aj/i6, give hack, re- KaTa-KoLo), burn down, burn
store^pay ; mid., sell. up.
Sta-StSoj/xt, distribute. Tra/oa-SiSw/it, give up, de-
StSw/xt, Swcroj, eSw/ca, 8e- liver over, surrender,
Sw/ca, SeSo/xat, ihodr^v^
647. R. 80-, da-, do. hi'hfu-^i, give ; Trapa-ht-Sco-fiL,
give up, surrender ; 7rpo-hi-^o}-ixi,give over, betrag, desert;
7rpo-S6-Tr}-<;, -ov, betrayer^ traitor ; ixLcr0oS6-T7]-<;, -ov,
one who pays wages^ paymaster [fito-^os]; 8(o-po-v, to, gift^
present.
do (da-re), give ; pro-do, give forth ; tra-do, surren-
der ; pro-di-tor, -oris, m.,a traitor ; do-nu-m, -i, n., gift ;
d5-no, present, donate.
dose, anti-dote, anec-dote.
648. Siege of Miletus.
Review 121, 147, 182, 235, 236, 2; 244, 245, 261,
369, 3, 6 ; 394, 399, 640.
7. 'Ez/ MiXt^tw 8e TLcrcra(l>€pvrj<; 7rpoaL(T66jJL€vo<; ra
avTOL ravra ^ov\€vop,4vov<^^ airocrTrjvai 7rpo<s Kvpoi^^
TOv<; fxev avrwv aTre/cretz^e, rov^ 8' i^e/Sakev, 6 8e Kv-
po9, vTToka^oiv Tov<; <^€uyoi/ra9, crvWe^a^ crTpdTevp.a
inoXiopKeL MiX-qrov koL Kara yrjv KoX Kara OdXaTrav,
^ ^ov\evofi€vovs, agrees with nvas understood, indirect discourse aftei
Trpoato-Boixevos (776) ; in Latin the infinitive would be used.
262 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
KOL iireLpoLTO KardyeLV Toi)^ iKireTTTcoKOTa^. Koi avTiq ^
av dXXrj TTp6^a(TL<; rjv avTco rov dSpoit^eiv ^ (TrpaTevfjia.
8. Upos 8e )8acrtXea TrejjiTrcov r^^iovy dSeXt^o? oiv
avTOV, SodrjvaL oV raura? rds TrdXei? jxdWov 17 Ticrcra-
<l>ipv'r]v dp^eLv avrojv, /cat 7) P'TJrrjp avveTrpaTTev avr^
Tavra' cuo-re /SacrtXevs ttjv jxev irpos iavTOP iTrifiovXrjv
ovK TjcrOdvero, Ttcrcrac^epi/ei 8e ivofju^e irokep^ovvTa
avTOv dfjL(j)l TO. crrpaTevfJiaTa SaTrai^az^ * * wcrre ovSei/
Tf^Oero avTcov TroXefiovvTcov.^ /cat yap 6 Kvpos diri-
TrefXTre tov<s yuyvop^evovf; Sacr/xov? /SacrtXet e/c roil'
TrdXcfui^ wv ^ lidcra^ipvovs "* hvyyojv^v V)(0}v.
Trpo-aLa-OdvofjiaL, observe a-vprTrparTO), do (tl) with,
beforehand. co-operate with, aid,
vTro-Xap^dvco, take under Sairavdo), spend, expend,
one's care, receive, d^Oop^ai^ be troubled, angry
at [awe, ugly],
^ avTH] instead of rovro, agreeing with the predicate noun.
2 See 117 ; 371, 9. 3 See 645, 7.
* hairavav with avrov as subject depends upon evofii^e, indirect discourse
as in Latin (267, 5 ; 723).
5 See 239 ; 236, 2. ^ gee 439.
' Depends upon S)v (369, 1) ; regularly it would limit rav nokeav.
LESSON LVIT.
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. — FIRST AND
SECOND AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEMS.
Review 344, 345, 346, 349, a,b; 350, 351, 6; 352,
353, 417, 418, 419, 2; 557, 575, 576, 579.
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS. 263
649. € as Augment or Reduplication before a Voicel.
A few verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic
augment. These verbs have also e for the reduplica-
tion, and this with initial €- is contracted to et: e;^w,
have, el)(ov (from i-e^ov)}
a. opdca, see, generally takes the temporal augment after e :
ifopcov^ eaypuKa^ ewpajiai,
650. € changed to a. In liquid themes of one sylla-
ble, € is generally changed to a in the first perfect, per-
fect middle, and second passive tense systems : crreXXw
(crreX-), send, ecrraX/ca, ea-rakjxai, iaTokiqv, crTaXyjao-
a. The same change of e to a occurs in a few other verbs,
usually after p\ rpeTrco, rerpafji/jLai, irpdTrrjv; rpecfxo, rerpafi-
fiat^ etc.
b. It occurs further in the second aorist system of T/aeTro),
erpairov ; /cretW, etcravov ; refjLVco^ era/Jiov,
651. Six't/i Class, Verbs of the Sixth Class form
their present stem by adding* -cr/cVe- or -l(tk°I^. to the
theme. The final vowel in the theme before -cr/cw is
generally lengthened.
Examine the following :
Theme. Pres. Stem. Fut. 2d Aor.
1. ryLfyvo)(TK(o^ know yvo- >yLyv(ocrK° / e. yvQXTOfjLat eyvcov
2. evpi(TK(t), find evp- evptaK^/^. evpijaco r^vpov
or evpov ^
^ This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs originally
began with a consonant, for a- (533, obs*).
^ fvpiV/co) has second aorist imv. evpe.
264 THE beginner's greek book.
3. Qv7)GK(d^ die 6av-, Ova ^ Ovr^aK^/^. OavovfiaL eOavov
4. 'ird(T')(a)^ suffer TraO-^irevO-^ 7racr^°/e- TreLo-ofiat eiraOov
(for 7ra6-(TK(o)
5. hihdaKO)^ teach ScSax- St8aafc°/^. SiSd^co iBtSa^a
a. Observe that ytyvSaKco is reduplicated '^ (533, obs.^) ;
that the final vowel of the theme is lengthened, and that the
second aorist is of the -/jli form of inflection (286, 619, d, I,
2,3).^
6. Observe that in evpia/cco the theme assumes e as in several
verbs of the first class (522) in all the systems except the pres-
ent and second aorist.
c. Observe that: 1. 7rda')(a) is iov waO-aica)^ 6 is dropped
before cric (for k becoming %, see p. 153^). 2. Treiao/jiai is
for irevOaofMaL.
d. Observe that BtSd-a/cco is for Bi8a)(;-afcco ; ^ is dropped
before aK.
652. Second Aorist Passive St/stem (842).
Examine the following :
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf.
S. 1. i(f)dvr)v i^avct) . <^aveir)v ^avrjvai
2. i(f)dvr)<s ^avrj<? (^aveirjq (^dvr]Oi
3. i(f)dvr) (l>^T^V 4'aveiy) (^avrJTO) Part.
K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. K. T. X. (j)aV€LS
Observe that the second aorist passive has the same inflection
as the first aorist, and differs from the latter in form by rejecting
1 See p. 2151.
2 The theme assumes tlie form Trei/^ (for navB) ; v is inserted, as in the
fifth class (630).
« This form occurs most frequently in the sixth class.
* €yv0Vy iyvccs, etc., with long vowel throughout (856).
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS.
265
the -0 in the tense sign, and by retaining -6 in the imperative
ending -61,.
653. Second Future Passive {'^4iT).
Examine the following :
Ind.
S. 1. (j)avT]crofjLai
2. (ftavijaeL
3. (fyavrjaeTaL
K. T. X.
Opt.
cl)avr)aoiix'rjv
(])aVlj(TOLO
(jyavija-OLTO
K. T. X.
Inf.
(jyavijaecrOaL
Part.
(f)aprja'6ix€vo<;
Observe that the second future passive has the same inflection
as the first future, and differs from the latter in form bj rejecting
-6 from the tense sign.
654. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed
by adding -e to the theme. This suffix, as with the first
aorist, is lengthened to -rj in the indicative, and in other
moods before a single consonant of the endings.
a. An e in the theme regularly becomes a.
655. The stem of the second future passive is formed
by adding 0-%- to the lengthened stem in -17 of the
second aorist passive.
656. 1. Conjugate the first aorist passive system of
Xvco, TTefXTTO), <^aiv(i). 2. Conjugate the second aorist
passive system of (jyaipco, i(j)dv7jp, etc. ; crrpec^w, icTTpd-
(f)r]v ; Tp€<j)(o, iTpd(^y)v}
^ In the sense of the middle. Let the pupil write the first passiv-e and
then reject the -6 in the tense suffix for the second passive.
266 THE beginner's greek book.
657. Give synopsis in the second passive system of
ypa<^a>; piTrTO), ippL(j)7]v; ttXtJtto) [TrXrjy-'], iirXijyTjv,
in compounds -eTrXdyrjVy i^eirXdy-qv ; kotttw, iKowrjv.
658. EXERCISES.
I. 1. viLOL^ 8t8afft). 2. KoX €v9v<; eyvdicrav 7rdvT€<;
OTL iyyv<; iaTpaTOTreSevero ^acrikeu^. 3. ouS' aXXo?
Se T(i)v 'FikXijvajv iv ravTTj rrj fJioi^rj enaOev ovSels^ ov-
hiv. 4. /cat 01 '^EXXi^j/e? crrpac^eVre? irapecrKevdl^ovTO.
5. ov TToXXco vcrrepov ol Xo^ayot KareKOTrrjcrav.
6. virep yap ttJ^ Kcofxrj^ \6(f)0S rjv, e(^' ov dvecrf pd^iq-
aav ol dficjiL ^aauXea. 7. ovre yap virotpjyiov It
ovhkv i(j)dv7] ovre arparoTrehov. 8. eTrei iinopKojp re
i(f>dvr) Kal rag o-7T0vhd<; Xvcov, e^^i ttjp SiKrjv kol
T€0V7)K€. 9. diToOvria'KOVTO^ yap Kvpov Trdvre^ ol irap
avTov (^tXot diriOavov fJia)(6fX€voL virep avrov TrXrjv
^Apiaiov. 10. TTopevcofxeda ra^elw?, Iva aTrocnraaOcoii^v
Tov ^acTiXiKov (TTpaTevfjiaros.
II. 1. On the third day the enemy appeared. 2. One
hundred hopUtes were cut down by the Cilicians.
3. Many of those about the king were killed. 4. And
this one suffered no harm. 5. But what I wrote, that
the king was terrified at the approach of the army, was
evident from the following.^
^ When a negative is followed by a compound negative or by several
compound negatives in the same clause, the negative is strengthened. All
but the first negative must be rendered in English by an aflBrmative. It is
equivalent to the English phrase, noi at all, etc.
* Dative.
VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS.
267
659.
e<^-oSo9, 17, way to, approach,
avoj-(TTpi^(xi, turn hack, face
about; pass., he turned
hack, rally,
diro-OvrjcrKO), die, be killed ;
often as pass, to airo-
KTeCvo),
BiSdcTKco, StSct^oj, etc.,
teac/i, show [Lat. doceo ;
TEACH, didactic].
iK-irkirJTTcoy strike out of
ones senses, alarm, ter-
rify [77X177x0), strike^
6vtJ(TK(o, OavovfxaLy cOavov,
ri6v7)Ka, die, Pf. has the
force of the present, am
dead, be slain.
VOCABULARY.
TTctc^ct), TreLCTOfiaiy eiradov^
ireTTovda, suffer, experi-
ence, feel ; ev 7racr;(a>,
pass, of eS TToielv [Lat.
patior. pathos, patho-
arpecjxjj, cTTpe^o), e(TTp&\faj
€crr/3a)LtjLcai, icrrpif^O'iqv,
i(TTpd<^7)v, turn, twist;
intr. and in pass., turn,
face about [strophe, apo-
strophe, cata-strophe].
ovre, and not, Lat. neque ;
ovT€ . . . ovT€, neither . . .
nor.
660. R. yi/o-, yvoi-, gna-, (jno-^ perceive, know. 71-
7Vio-crK-o), perceive, know, think ; -yvw-iiti, -17?, means of
knowing, mind, thought, opinion ; o-vo-fia, -ar-o?, to (for
o-yvo-\Lo), name ; €v-(ovvjjlo-<;, -o-v, of good name or oynen;
vd-o-s, contr. voOs, 6 (for yi/o-/ro-9), mind; voi-o), observe,
think out ; KaTorvoe-o), mark well, observe ; ev-voo-^, -oo-v,
well disposed; evvoia, -as, good ivill ; eiri'o-'LK6-<;, -77, -6-p^
kindly disposed ; ev-i^oi/ca)?, adv., ivith good will ; /ca/co-
1^00-9, -oov [KaKo^, bad), ill disposed, hostile,
gna-ru-s (na-rn-s), adj., knowing, skilful ; i-gna-ni-s
(in + gnarus), ignorant ; i-gno-ro, not know, be ignorant
268 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
of ; nar-r-6, make known, tell; na-vu-s (gna-vu-s), adj.,
diligent, active ; i-gna-vu-s, inactive, slothful; no-sc-o,
know; no-bili-s, adj., well known, famous ; no-men, -inis,
n., name.
Can, know, keen, cunning, name, gnome, gnostic,
a-gnostic, dia-gnosis, an-onymous, met-onymy, patr-
onymic, syn-onym.
LESSON LVIII.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Review 236, 6 ; 422, 563, 565, 566.
661. Conditional sentences consist of two parts : the
one, introduced by et, if, states the case or condition ;
the other states what follows under a certain condition.
The former, which usually precedes, is a dependent
clause, and is called the protasis ; ^ the latter is the main
clause, and is called the apodosis?
662. Present and Past Suppositions implying NotJiing
as to the Fulfilment of Condition.
Examine the following :
1. '€t vfjiei^; iOeXere i^opfxav, eTrecrOaiyiJUv ySovXo/xat,
ifgou wish to set out, I am ready to follow you.
2. €t 8e jLtTyrt? /SeXrtoz^ opa, X€ipLO'0(j)os rjyoLTO, hut
if any one does not see a better plan, let Chirisophus lead.
^ wpoTaa-is (nporeivco), a pitting before, a proposal.
^ aTrddoais (aTroSiSco/ii), a giving in return.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 269
3. ei T15 eKCxikvev, ovk rjv elcrekOeiv, if there was any
hindrance J it was not possible to enter,
a. Observe that in all of these conditions the protasis is intro-
duced by et, if J and takes the indicative ; that it states a particu-
lar supposed case in the present or past simply as a fact without
implying any judgment as to its fulfilment ; and that the apod-
osis takes any form of the verb to express what may follow if
the fact be granted.
. b. Observe that the negative of the assumed case is fir}^ and
that the negative of the apodosis, when it asserts a consequence
of the admitted reality of the protasis,, is ov (422).
Present and Past Suppositions with Nothing implied,
— Simple Particular Supjpositions,
Rule.
663. When the protasis simply states a present or
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the
fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with ct.
The apodosis may take any form of verb, but generally
the indicative.
664. The negative of the protasis is regularly jutif,
that of the apodosis is ov.
665. Potential Indicative.
Examine the following :
1. iiroLiqa-e raGra, he did this.
2. €770 LT] ere av raura, he would have done this.
Observe that : 1. In 1, the indicative asserts the action. 2. In
2, the past indicative with av (566) states the action as depen-
dent upon some unfulfilled past circumstances or conditions, i. e.
what would have happened if the conditions had been fulfilled.
270 THE beoinnee's greek book.
Rule.
666. The past tenses of the indicative with av ex-
press a past action as dependent on past circumstances
or conditions. The negative is ov.
667. Present and Past Conditions with Suppositions
contrary to Fact.
Examine the following :
1. iiroLyjcre av ravra, el avTov cfceXevcra, he would
have done this, if I had commanded him.
2. el yLT) vjJLei^; rfkOere, eiropevofieda av tt/do? ^acnXea^
if you had not come, we would be marching against the
king.
3. iiroLei av Tavra, el avrov iKeXevov, he loould he
doing this, if I were commanding him.
a. Observe that in 1, the unfulfilled condition is expressed as
part of the sentence dependent upon iiroirja-e av as the apodosis
which still expresses, like the potential indicative, what would
have happened if the unreal condition had been fulfilled, i. e. the
action did not happen because the condition was not fulfilled.
b. Observe that when the protasis having the past tenses of
the indicative is intended to imply non-fulfilment of condition,
the adverb av is added to the past tenses of the indicative in the
apodosis.
c. Observe that since the condition is contrary to fact, or
implies that the protasis is not or was not fulfilled, past tenses of
the indicative must be used in both protasis and apodosis ; that
the imperfect refers to the present as in 2, 3, the aorist to a sim-
ple occurrence in past time, and the pluperfect (rare) to an act
completed in the past or present.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 271
Present and Fast Conditions with Suppositions con-
trary to Fact,
Rule.
668. When the protasis states a present or past sup-
position implying that the condition is not or loas not
fulfilled, it has the past tenses of the indicative with et,
and the apodosis the past tenses of the indicative
with av.
The imperfect here refers to the present time, or to
an act as going on or repeated in past time, and the
aorist to an act as simply occurring in past time.
Wishes contrary to Fact.
669. When a wish refers to the present or past, im-
plying that its object is not or was not attainedy it is
expressed by the secondary tenses of the indicative with
eWe or el yap : ct^e rovro fxr) eTronycra, that I had
not done this.
670. In wishes unattained the tenses and moods are
distinguished as in conditions contrary to fact.
671. The negative in all wishes is ^iri (422).
672. EXERCISES.
I. 1. eWe Kvpo<^ itj]. 2. Kkeap^o*; iXavvot, 3. KXe-
ap^o? T^Seiw? av ekavvoi. 4. ovhev av KaKov eirparrev.
5. ovhev av KaKov eirpa^ev. 6. 'Opoi/ra? iin^ovXeveL
K-upoj, Kal TTpocrOev irokep/irjcraf; /caraXXayel? 8e. 7. el
KXeavctip eOeXei riyelaOai, eireaOai avrco /Bovkofjiai.
8. ovK av eiroLiqae raura, €t /X17 avrov eKeXevcra. 9. el
e/xo9 dSeX(f)6<; ecrrt, ov Tavr eyoi XijipofjiaL. 1*0. ravTa
enpa^e Oolttov tj rt? av ^ero. 11. el he tl^ aWo opa
272 THE beginner's greek book.
^4\tiov, aXXa)9 exero). 12. ot 8e "EXXt^z^c?, et rt? /cat
dOvfxorepog tjv irpo^ Trjv dvd/Sacnv, aKovopres ttjp Kvpov
dpeTrjv '^Slov kol irpoOvfjuoTepou avveTTopevovTO.
II. 1. He would have been on bis guard. 2. If any
one sees any better plan than this, let him speak.
3. And he would be doing this, if he were seeing you.
4. If Abrocoinas had opposed, Cyrus would have sent
after the ships. 5. It was not possible to capture the
asses, unless the horsemen hunted. 6. If Clearchus
does not wish to lead us back, let the captains lead.
673. VOCABULARY.
rom
d-6i}fio<s, -ov, without heart, fcar-aXXarro), change fi
dispirited [6vp.6^, soul, hostile to friendly terms, re-
hear f], eoncile [aXXctrrw, change
dvd-/3aa-LS, -ew9, rj, ascent, (aXXo?)].
march inland [anaba- oloiLai,think,helieve,\hdX.^
iisj. 02hnor'\ .
SIS
674. R. fcaX-, col-, da-, call. KaX-€-(o, call ; kXti-cti-s,
-6-0)9, y], a calling; iK-KXyj-a-id, -d?, summoned assembly ;
KTipu-|, -vAc-09, 6 (formed on the stem Krjp-vK-), herald ;
KiqpvTTO), be a herald, proclaim; Kpd^o) (formed on the
stem Kpa-y-), cry out, call; Kpavy-yj, -rj^, outcry, shout.
calo-, call together ; kale-ndae, -arum, f., the day of
proclamation. Calends; con-cil-m-m, -i, n., assembly,
council ; cla-mo, cry out; cla-mo-r, -6r-is, m., shout, cry ;
cla-ru-s, adj., clear, famous ; clas-si-s, -is, f., class, fleet.
Hale (i.e. dray), HAL-yard, haul, ec-clesiastic
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 273
675' -^^ Army is collected by Clearchus in the Chersonesus.
Review 66. 146, 212, 357, 648.
9. ^AXXo Se arpaTevfJia avTco crvvekiyeTO iv Xeppo-
vrjaco Tovhe rov rpoirov} KXeayo^o? Aa/ceSai/xdi'tos
(f)vya<; rjv ' tovtco avyyevopievo^; 6 Kvpos ^ydcrOr] re
avTov KoX hihoiCTLv avrco pLvpiov^ BapeuKovs.
6 8e Xa/Bo)!^^ TO xpvcTioi/ o-r/oarev/xa crvve-
Xe^ev OLTTO TovTOiv TO)v ^prjjjLaTcov /cat
iTToXefxei e/c Xeppovrjcrov o^/xw/xei'o? rot?
Spa^l^ TOLS vnep 'FtXXTjcnrovTov * oIkovctl No. 12. Adpct-
KOL aKJyeXei rov<; "EXXT^z/a? ' wcrre /cat XPV' '^^^'
fiara avve^aXXovTO avrco €ts tt^v Tpo(j)rjv tcop arpaTio)'
T(x)v at 'EXXi^o'Tro^'Tt a/cat TroXets e/covcrat.^ tovto S' aS
ovTOj Tp€(j)6ix€vov IXdvdavev avTco to aTpaTevfia,
(Tvy-yiyvo p^ai, meet, become acquainted with,
dyafiai, iQyao-dfjirjp, 'qydcrOrjv, admire (433, N. 3).
Sdpet/cd?, daric. cJc^eXelw, aid^ assist,
^ Which of tlie above rules applies to rponov ?
2 What force has Xa/Sii/ ? * Cf. 79, a, b.
» What does Qpa^i depend upon ? ^ Cf. p. 1508; 371^ ]i.
LESSON LIX.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CON-
TRACT VERBS. — GENERAL CONDITIONS.
Review 28, 114, 115, 116, 150-154, 228, 229, a,b',
230, 242, 417, 418, 552, 553, obs. ; 554, «, <5; 567,
568, 578, 579,
18
274 THE beginner's greek book.
676. Learn the subjunctive and optative active and
middle of Tt/x,aa>, Troiew, and Br]\6o) (843, 844, 845).
a. Observe that o-ei and 0-77 contract to ot (152, d).
h. Observe that in the active these verbs generally have -it]
(574) as mood sign of the optative.
677. The adverb av is regularly joined to et in the
protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive ; d with av
forms eaj/, 171/, or oju (692).
678. In animated language the aorist is used in the
sense of the present. This is called the gnomic aorist^
and is naturally translated by the English present.
679. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used
with the adverb av to denote a customary action (680).
680. Particular and General Conditio7is.
Conditional sentences are either jj articular or general.
In a particular supposition (663), the protasis refers to
a definite act or acts occurring at a defi7iite time.
In a general supposition, the protasis refers indefi-
nitely to any one of a given series of acts occurring
at any time, and the apodosis expresses an habitual or
repeated action or a general truth.
a. This distinction of suppositions as particular and general
may be seen in all classes of conditional sentences, but it is only
in the first class (662) that the distinction is represented by the
form of the sentence.
Examine the following :
1. ka,v TO) VTr6(T\7)Tai tl, ovitotc xjjevSeraty if (ever) he
makes a promise to any one, he never breaks his word.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF CONTRACT VERBS. 275
2. el rep VTTocrxoLTo tl, ovirore ixjievSerOy if [eve?') lie
made a promise to any one, he never broke his word.
P a. Observe that : 1. The protasis implies the occasional or
repeated fulfilment of the condition, and the apodosis states what
happens if the supposition ever is fulfilled. 2. The protasis
takes the subjunctive with idvj and the apodosis has the present
indicative.
b. Observe that when the apodosis as in 2, denotes a con-
tinued or repeated act in the past, the protasis following the
sequence of moods (578), has the optative with et, and the
apodosis states then what did happen if ever the supposition was
fulfilled.
Present and Past General Suppositions.
Rule.
681. When a protasis states a present or past suppo-
sition implying the occasional or repeated fiilfilinent of
the condition, it has the subjunctive with idv after the
present indicative in the apodosis, and the optative with
€t after the imperfect indicative in the apodosis.
a. In the apodoses of general conditions, any form denoting
present or past repetition may be used. Thus, for the present
the gnomic aorist may be used ; for the imperfect, the imperfect
and aorist with dv (679) frequently occur, and sometimes the
simple aorist with ^ often,"* ^ never/ etc.
682. The subjunctive in general conditions never
refers distinctly to the future, but expressing indefinite
frequency, assumes the fulfilment of the condition at any
time.
276 THE beginner's greek book.
683. Give the synopses of the present system of Tt/xaa>,
l3od(x), opdco, TTOLeo), (^t-Xea>, Sofcew, ixicrSooi, STyXdw.
684. EXERCISES.
I. 1. KpaTLCTTa ap fjia^oiixeda. 2. KXeap^o? €(^v-
XdrreTO fxrj Sokoltj ^evyeiv. 3. ILvpov alrcofjiev nXola,
ojg oLTTOTrXeajfJiev} 4. iap ol dp^ovre^ fiecrop €)((oaL to
avTOiVy iv dacftaXea-TdTcp elcrL 5. iSeXofJiev w? rd^icTTCL
TTopeveaOaL et? ttjp *EXXa8a, ei /BovXeraL KXea/j^o?
drrdyeLv. 6. el KXedpcop rjdeXe y^yeicrO ai, erreaOai
avTco i^oTjXeTO. 7. el rt? avTco ^avepo^ yiyvoiTo heivo^
(x)v dp^cov, del irXeLO) TrpoaeSuSov. 8. eTreiSr) Se Kvpo<;
e/cctXet, XajSwi' v/xa? eiropevoyiiqv^ Iva mc^eXoiriv avrov.
9. fcat €t Tt? aurw Sokolt] tcov irpo^ tovto ^ rerayixepcov
KaKo<; elpaiy avrov eiraKTev av.
II. 1. Let us try to conquer. 2. We will be on
our guard lest we seem to flee. 3. If (ever) any one
does me a favor or an injury, I try to sm-pass^ him.
4. If (ever) any one sent gifts to him, he distributed
them to his friends. 5. If Cyrus wishes to be a friend
to any one, he is most able to benefit him. 6. If (ever)
there was a force on both sides of them, they were iu
the safest place.
685. clfia, together^ like [a- for era- (498, obs. 4*), a/x-
for craju,-], sem-^ sim-. d'9p6'0-<; {Opoo^, noise), in a
noisy crowd, in a body ; dOpoit,o)» collect, assemble; d-i^ras,
all together ; dfia, adv., at the same time, together ;
dfi-a^a, -179 (cf. R. dy-, 513), wagon icith two connected
1 Cf. p. 823. 2 Yqx this purpose. » i/t/cao).
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 277
•
i axles ^ four-icheeled loagon ; a/xaft-To-§, -o-j/, jy<255(3;^/^ by
wagons; ctp/x-a/xafa, -179 (of. R. ap',Jlt, 764), covered
' carriage ; ofids, -r\, -6v^ one and the same ; ofiov, adv.,
together^ at once ; 6fJLco<s, coiij., all the same, nevertheless ;
ojJLo-Xoyo-Si 'O-v {\iy(x) [^ey-], sag), agreeing ; ojjLo-Xoye-co,
agree, confess ; ofjio-Lo-^, -d, -ov, like; ojlloiw?, adv., in
like manner^ alike ; ofia-Xo-';, -t], -o-v^ even, level ; ofia-
Xftis, adv., evenlg.
sem-per, adv., always ; simili-s, adj., like, resembling ;
sin-guli, adj., one to each, single ; seuie-l, adv,, once ;
simu-l, adv., at the same time.
Same, some; hom-ilj, homo-geneous, homo-bgoTis,
homoeo-pathy, hom-oiiym, hom-onymous, etc.
LESSON LX.
FUTURE CONDITIONS.
Review Lessons XLIX. and L., noting 552, 557, 559,
563, 565, 566, 567, 579, 581, 589.
686. Future Conditions.
Examine the following :
1. lav fJLOL TreLO-OrJTe, TLfirjOtjaeo-Oe vtto Kvpov, if you
obey me, you toill be honored by Cyrus,
2. lav 8e [Lr\ -qKcofxep, ravTa Trotet, but if we shall not
come, do these things.
a. Observe that: 1. The apodosis in 1 takes the future in-
dicative whose action depends upon the accomplishment of some
future event; the protasis has the subjunctive with av to express
278 THE beginner's greek book.
this future supposition^ vividly or with expectation of fulfilment.
2. The apodosis in 2 takes the imperative for the regular
future.
h. Observe that the adverb av, although modifying the verb,
attaches itself to the conditional particle as in general conditions
(677).
c. Observe that the protasis is translated in English by the
present or by shall or will,
Rule.
687. When a supposed future case is stated vividly,
imiAy'mg pro5adility of the fulfilment of the condition,
the protasis has the subjunctive with dv, and the apod-
osis has the future indicative or some other form ex-
pressing future time.
The protasis is translated by the present indicative or
by s/tall or will.
688. In the apodoses of future conditions, the im-
perative, infinitive, hortatory, and prohibitive subjunctive
may be used as equivalent expressions for the future
indicative. In fact, any clause or phrase that expresses
future time may be so used.
689. Examine the following :
1. Kvpo<; e^ovKevero 7r(o<; av Tr)v jjid^rjv ttololto,
Cyrus was planning how he should make the battle.
2. el ifJiOL 801179 LTTTria^ ^ikiov^, rov^ rcov iroXefXLcov
LTTTreas KaTaKavoLfjn dv, if you should give me a thousand
horsemen, I would cut down the horsemen of the enemy.
^ The future conditions are ideal conditions as the present and past are
fixod
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 279
3. €1 PLK^fiePy ovSepa av KaTaKavoi^evy if we were to
conquer, toe should kill no one.
a. Observe that the apodoses of these conditions- have the
same form as has the potential optative in 1^ and like it_, express
possibility ; that the protasis has the optative with el to express
the supposed case less vividly than the subjunctive (567) or as
possible.
b. Observe that these conditions are translated by should^
would, were to, etc.
Conditions possible} Jpodosis iii the optative with av.
Rule.
690. When a supposed future case is stated less viv-
idly, without implying expectation of its fulfilment, the
protasis has the optative with d, and the apodosis has
the optative with av.
The condition is translated by should, would, were to, etc.
691. It is the mood, not the tense as in Latin, that
determines the condition. The subjunctive regularly
follows primary tenses in the principal clause, and the
optative follows secondary (578) and the optative mood.
692. av is used with the 'subjunctive to represent
the condition as dependent upon circumstances or as
assumed. Hence it is also used to express indefinite
frequency {if ever, as often as). Whenever av is used
in a dependent clause it is always closely attached to
the particle or relative, with which it is often united, as
in iav, orav, eTreihav (677).
^ The future conditions may be also distinguished respectively as more
aiid less vivid, or less remote and more remote.
280 THE beginner's greek book.
693. QUESTIONS.
1. What does the optative standing alone in a sen-
tence express? What would it express with ei? with
dv?
2. What does the first person of the subjunctive
standing alone in a sentence express ? What would it
express with idj/? with Iva, ottcus, etc.
3. How does the present general condition differ in
form from the future probable ?
4. How does the past general condition differ in
form from the future possible ?
5. Which is the principal clause of a conditional
sentence ?
694. EXERCISES.
I. 1. yapiv aoL dp ^xoiyiev SiKaicos- 2. idv 8e firf
8t8w ravra, rjyefJLOva alrijaofjiev Kvpov. 3. idv /caXws
KaTairpd^o) i(j> d crrparevoiJLaL, vfxds Kard^co ot/caSe.
4. el irapd tov<; opKov^ iXve ra? airovSd^, Trjv Blktjp
€)(€i, 5. el aXXT^Xot? fxa'^elaOe,^ ev TrjSe rjfjiepa Kara-
KOTTTjO'eade. 6. /cat rjplv y dv ravT iiroCeL, el ecopa^
r)fjid<^ fxeveiv 7rapaaKeva^ofjLevov<;. 7. el Stcr^iXtou?
^evovi Xd^OLy TTepiyevoiTO dv tcov dvriO'Tao'KDTiov.^
8. et Tt9 ye tl avrco /caXw? vrnqpeTTjO-eiev, del eTrrjvei.
9. ov8' el <^iXo9 Kol TTicrro^ crot yevoLjjirjv, d> Kvpe, aoi
^ The future is sometimes used for the subjunctive in a protasis as a
still more vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feelings, and
in threats and warnings.
3 Cf. 649, a. 8 Cf. 385.
* ovS' limits do^aifiif why ?
FUTURE CONDITIONS. 281
y dv ,7roTe in Sdfat/xt. 10. /cat iav rj Trpaft? fj irapa-
7rXr)aLa olairep ^ kol irpoadev i^prJTo roi? ^€pol<s, liroi-
jxeOa Koi i^/xei?.
11. 1. They will not proceed, unless some one shall
give them money. 2. But if he shall not even give a
guide, let us fall into battle line as soon as possible.
3. But if he shall flee, we will deliberate there about
these things. 4. If we should follow, we would follow
zealous and friendly to him. 5. But we would proceed
homeward, if no one should hinder us. 6. But he plans
that he may be king instead of his brother, if he shall
be able.
695. VOCABULARY.
dvTL-(TTacn(oTrjs, -ov, one of a battle line, fall into hat-
the opposite party, oppo- tie line [syntax] .
nen t [crracrt?, faction~\ . iKel, adv., t/iere, i?i that place.
OLO(T-Trep,-d7r€p,-ov7rep,jiist fxrj-Bi, adv. and conj., but
as, such as, etc. not, and not, nor, Lat.
Kara-TTpaTTO), accomplish. neque, nee ; ne . . . qui-
Trepi-yiyvo piai, be superior, dem, not even.
conquer. irore, indef. end. adv., at
crvv-TaTTO), draw up in ar- some or any time, once^
ray, marshal ; jmd.form ever. See (xTJiTOTe.
696. R. Kpa-, ere- cer-, do, make. avTO-Kpa-rcop,
-op-o^, 6, rj (cf. avT09, self), ones own master; Kpdr-os,
-€-09, TO (fcpa + T-), stre7igth, might ; Kpare-co, be strong^
1 oiaTTfp for oiawfp (438, 2 ; 439 ; 261).
282 THE beginner's greek book.
conquer ; Kpetrrcov, -ov (for Kper-lcov), comp., stronger,
mi(/htier, better ; /c/jar-icrro-?, -77, -ov^ sup., strongest^
mightiest, best ; ey-KpaTrf^, -e?, in the power of, in pos-
session of,
Cer-es, -er-is, f., Ceres (' goddess of creation '), goddess
of agriculture ; cre-6, create ; cre-sc-o, come into being,
increase; in-cre-mentTi-m, 11., growth; cre-ber, adj.
(made to increase), /r<?^^^^;^^, numerous ; cor-p-u-s, -or-is,
n., body.
Hard ; auto-crat, aristo-crat, aristo-cracy, demo-
crat, demo-cracy, pluto-crat, pluto-cracy, etc.
LESSON LXI.
VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS. — RELATIVE
AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Review 178, 184, 351, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ; 515, 516,
517, 530, 544, 545, 649, 654, 655, 663, 664, 668, 681,
687, 690, 692.
697. A few verbs have et- in the perfect instead of
the reduplication (304) :
1. XafJL^dvo) (ka/S), take, elkyjcjia, ethqixyiai.
2. \ey(x), collect (in composition), -eiko^a, '-eiXeyfiaL
or -XeXeyfjiai.
3. [pe-, 698, 2], etprjKa, have said, etprjixai.
698. Mghth Class {Mixed Class), Verbs of this
class form their different tense systems from essentially
different themes.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 283
Examine the following :
1. alpeo) (alpe-y eX-), take,
alprjcrcO) elXov^ {i\(o, etc.), rjprjKa, rjpiqfjiai, ypedrjv.^
2. elnov^ {in- eln-, ip- yoe-), said.
ipw, ehrov (eiiro), etc., irnv. elne), eiprjKa, eLprjixai,
ippyjdrjv^
3. ipxofJ^au^ {^PX'-) ^^^^-') ^^^')y ^0, come,
^XBov (irnv. e'X^e),' iXyjXvOa,'
4. opdo) {opa-, IS-, OTT-), see. Itnpf. icopcov.^
oifjofjiaL, el8ov^ [t8-, f tS-, ifiSov] (iSw, etc., imv. t8e),
iopoLKa and icopaKay icopafjLai and cofifxaL, oj<l)d7]T/,
5. Tpe^oi {rpe-^-, Spa/x-), run,
Spa/xov/iat, eSpafJLOVy-SeSpdfjLTjKa,^ SeSpdfjirjfJLai,
0. (^e/3w {(f>€p-, ol-, iv€K-, iveyK-^^), hear,
oiaot), yjveyKa^^ and TJveyKov, ivrjvo^a^'^ ivTJveyjxai,
rjvexOrjv, ^
6gg. Relative and Temporal Clauses.
Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pro-
nouns or by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner.
They include in their construction temporal clauses.
1 Cf. 649. 2 cf. 520.
^ Cf. 530. The present and imperfect are supplied in Attic by Xcy®,
(/)j;/ii, etc. The theme of H-nov was originally FtTr, contracted from i-cenov
(for i-Fe-Fenov, reduplicated, 533, obs.^). • * See 193.
^ Future in Attic supplied by 6?/ii (739, b).
^ Compounds of oxytone imperatives are regular ; as oTreX^e.
' See 545.
^ Cf. 649, a. The syllabic augment takes the rough breathing from th«
theme. 9 Cf. 522.
^^ A nasal is inserted as in verbs of the fifth class (633).
^^ Aorist irregularly formed without a. ^^ Cf. 545.
284 THE beginner's greek book.
700. A relative clause with a definite antecedent
takes the indicative or any other construction that could
occur in a simple sentence. Its negative is ov (183, 1,
2, 8; 184).
701. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent
(general or not yet determined) has the force of a prota-
sis of a conditional sentence, and is called a conditional
relative clause. Its negative therefore is ixrj.
702. Examine the following :
1. oTco SoKel TavTa, Xefarw, to whomsoever these things
seein best, let him speak (= d tivk Sofcet ravra, Xe^aTO),
663).
2. ovs icopa idiXovra^; Kivivveveiv, tovtov<; dp-vov-
Ta<s i7T0L€L, he made those v)hom he saw loilling to incur
da7iger commanders (= el TLva<; icopa, etc., 663).
3. 6 8' dvTjp TToWov d^LOS <f)iXo<;, co^ dv (J>l\o<; tj^ the
man is a valuable frie^nd to whomsoever he is a friend
(= idv TO) <^i\o^ fj, etc., 681).
4. e7re/x7re ydp /Slkov^ olvov, biroTe irdw rjSvv Xd^oL,
for he was accustomed to send jars of wine whenever he
received any very sioeet (= el irore, etc., if ever, 681).
5. OTL firj i^ovXero Sovvac, ovk dv viricr^eTOy^ he
iDould not have promised what he did not wish to give
(= et Tt pri i^ovXero, etc., 668).
6. Tw r^yejxovL Tno-Te-ucrofiev ov dv Kvpo<; Sw, we will
trust the guide (any guide) tvhom Cyrus will give (687).
7. eTretSa^ SuaTrpd^cofjiaL d Seo/xat, yj^o), when I shall
have accom])lished what I wish, I will return (687).
^ The definite relative for the indefinite. 2 This form is rare.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 285
8. (l)O^OLiJirjv 8' av tco y^yeixovi & Boltj eirecrOaL, I
shoaldfear to folio to the ^ aide whom he would ^ive (690).
a. Observe that a conditional relative clause is introduced by
a relative or relative adverb instead of the particle el, if; that in
other respects they are like the ordinary conditions, the antecedent
clause forming the apodosis.
b. Observe that dv is attached to the relative word (692);
that these clauses can usually be changed to the ordinary condi-
tions by resolving the relative word or the same with dv, into the
conjunction el or idp with rt?, l,2i,S, 4, etc.
Rule.
703. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent
has a conditional force, and may take the form of any
of the ordinary conditions (661 fF.), of which the antece-
dent clause is the apodosis.
704. Temporal clauses with ew?, ecrre, fJi€xph ^XP'"
Examine the following :
1. €cyg fxevofjiev avrov crKoiTeiv Sel ottcos ao'</)a\eo'rara
fxepcojjiev, as long as we remaiti here^ we must consider
how we shall remain most safelj/.
2. iirokifxei to2<; Spa^l ^J^^XP^ Ku/oo? iherjOy) tov
o-jparev^aTo^y he continued to make war upon the Thra-
cians until Cyrus needed the army,
3. €ws av TTaprj rt?, xP^P'^h ^-^ ^ony as any one is
with me, I make use of his services.
4. p^^XP^ ^' ^^ ^y^ 7]K0), at (TTrovhai pevovTOiv, until
I shall have returned, let the treaty remain.
5. irepipevoiev av oi^pi dc^t/cotro KXeap^os, the
would wait until Clcarchus should arrive.
286 THE beginner's greek book.
a. Observe that av is attached to the particle as in 692.
b. Observe that when €(o^, eVre, fie'^^^pi, etc.^ as long as^
while, or until, \, 2, refer to a definite time- present or past, tliey
take the indicative -, that when they refer to an indefinite time,
they take the construction of conditional relatives in general con-
ditions, conditions contrary to fact (rare), and future conditions,
3, 4, 5.
Rule.
705. When €0)9, ecrre, ^^XP^-^ ^XPh ^^ ^ong as, until,
refer to a definite time, they take the indicative ; other-
wise they follow the constructions of conditional relatives
(703), in general conditions, conditions contrary to fact,
and future conditions.
706. Temporal clauses tvith irpCv, before, until.
Examine the following :
1. hie^iqcrav npiv rov^ ak\ov<; aTTOKpivacrO ai, they
crossed before the others replied.
2. ovre ravra iTToiovv irpiv Kkiap^o^ '^k€, nor did
they do these things until Clear chus. came.
3. ov KaTa\v(T€L 77/30 9 Tov<; dvTLCTTaa'icoTa^ irpXv
av Kvpo) crvfji^ov\ev(Tr]TaL, he will not make peace
with his opponents until he shall have consulted with
Cyrus.
4. ov TTpoaOev TTavaerai^ Trplv ap avTov<; Karaydyxj
otfcaSe, he will not cease before he shall have restored
them to their homes.
5. ovK av TTporepov opixyjcaivro, nplv ra iavTcov
wapa(TK€vd(raivTOf they would not set out before their
own affairs were all ready.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 287
a. Observe that in 1, Trpiv, before, deijending upon an aflir-
rnative sentence expresses a simple temporal relation^ and takes
the infinitive.
b. Observe that in %, 3, 4, 5, irpiv, until, before, depending
upon a negative sentence, expresses a limit of time like eo)?, and
takes the same constructions (705).
c. Observe that hi 4., b, irporepov and irpoadev precede irpCv
in the leading clause, but are superfluous in English.
Rule.
707. irpiv regularly takes the infinitive when the
leading verb is affirmative ; and the constructions of ew?
when the leading verb is negative or implies a negative.
a. TTpLv or TTplv Yj is often preceded by irporepov or irpoadev
in the leading clause.
708. EXERCISES.
I. 1. olh^ i.7Tei avTov<; Trpdthoiev^ hilar avro, 2. Trte-
^Ofiepof; VTTO royv olkol ^ avricrracrioiToyv ep^erat Trpos
rov Kvpop. 3. alpTJcroixai vfjias /cat crvv vpZv otl^ av
Sej) TTeLcrofiaL. 4. rj Se KiXtcrcra ISovaa ttjp tol^lv
Tov crrpareu/xaro? iOavfiacre. 5. rr^v IkevOepiav ekoi-
p/r]v av avu (av e^w iravroiv. o. Kvpos oe e^o)v ov5
eLpy)Ka wpfiaro oltto %dpSecov. 7. ^0(j>aLveTOv, ^evov
ovTa Koi TovTov, eKeXevae dvBpa<; Xa/Bovra ekOelv on
TrXeicTTOv^. 8. heir ai avrov * fxr) irpodOev KaraXvcrai
Trpos Tovs dvTL(TTa<JLOirra<; Trplv av avT(a crvpL^ovKevcnqT ai,
^ Force of an attributive, 79, h.
2 So. iTcKTXfLv. 8 See 438, 2 ; 439.
* Cf. 340. Wlien heoiiai means reqttest, it may take gen. of the person
and ace. of the tiling, or the infinitive.
288 THE beginner's greek book.
9. 6 8' dvTjp ^ ^aXe7ra>TaT09 e^^po? w ctz^ TToXe/ito? ^.
10. v/ia? ;)(/)7) Sia/SrjvaL top Ev(j)pdT7jv TTOTayiov irplv
^rj\ov eI^'al o rt ot aXXoi ''¥XKy)ve^ diroKpivovvT at Kvpco.
11. 6 8' di'Spl eKOLdTco Bcocrei irivTe dpyvpiov fJLvds
iiT7]v €19 Bal3vkcova rjKcoaL, Kal rov fXLcrdov ivrekrj jxixP^
av Karao-Ttjcrr) tov^ "EWrjvaf; et? 'Icovidv irdkuv,
12. iyo) yap OKvouqv fiev av et? rd TrXola iiJLl3aLV€Lv
a Ty/xci^ ooLTj, fjLTj rjfjia^ Tai9 vavcri eAry. lo. ov 7r/>o-
repov 7rpo9 ')7/xa9 iiroXefiiQcrav irplv KaXco^ rd kavrcov
TrapecTKevdcravTO.
II. 1. He said these things. 2. He would run for
victory. 3. All the cities chose Cyrus instead of Tissa-
phernes. 4. You will take provisions whenever we do
not furnish a market. 5. I will obey the man whom
you shall choose. 6. But Menon, before it was evi-
dent what the rest of the soldiers would do, spoke as
follows.
709. VOCABULARY.
ivTekrj^, -69, at the end, Trpo-opdo), see in fro7it,
complete^ full [76X09]. before.
^i'i(TTr]ixi,set apart; to stand iireihiv [eVet877 + dv\
apart, open the ranks. temp. conj. w. subj.,
TTte^ft) [7rt€8-], TTLecrco, eVt- as soon as, whenever,
ecra, iTnea-Orjp, to press, after.
crowd; pass., to he hard iirav or cVt^V [eVet + a^],
pressed, oppressed. temp. conj. w. subjunc-
^ What verb must be understood ?
2 Cf. 249. 8 Cf. 579, a.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 289
tive, tchenever, lohen, as irpCp, temp, conj., before,
soon as. until; YjoX,., priusc[iiam ,
oTTOTe, conj., adv., w/ien, Trporepo?, -a, -ov, former,
whenever^ since, because ; previous, sooner ; neut.
Lat., cum, quando. as ^^'^., previously,
ixOpo';, 'd,-6v, hostile, unfriendly ; 6 h^dpo^^ foe, private
enemy ; Lat., hostis, inimcus.
6 7roXefiLo<;, public enemy, enemy in war ; often TroXe/iioi,
the enemy. Lat. hostes,
SetSft), to fear, deliberate and reasonable fear.
</)o/3eo/xai, to fear, instanstaneous and inconsiderate
fear.
oKvecoj to fear, dread, hesitate, shrink from, in a moral
sense.
710. /uiaAc-, mac-, mag-, have power, be great. jjiaK-pd-s,
-a, 'ov, long ; jidK-ap, -a/o-09, 6, 17, poioerful, wealthy,
happy, blessed; fiaKapi^o), esteem happy ; /Aa/capto-ro-?,
->7, -6v, be deemed happy, enviable; liTJK-os, -€-09, to.,
length ; fi-qx-ain^, --^9, means, device, machine ; d-jjajx'
avo-^, 'OP, without means, impracticable, impossible ; iic-y-
a-St fJieyd-Xyj, fjueya, great, poioerful ; fjLeydk(o<;, greatly ;
jiCL^cov, -OP (for iJL€y-l(t)v), comp., greater ; jj.€Y-i<rTo-s, -17,
'ov, sup., greatest.
mag-nu-s, adj., great ; maior (for mag-ior), adj.,
greater ; maximu-s (for mag-simu-s), adj., greatest ;
mag-is, adv. (for mag-ius), more ; mag-is-ter, -tri, m.,
master.
May, MAKE, MIGHT, MUCH, MORE, MOST, MANY, MAIN ;
.macro-cosm, machine, mechanic, o-mega.
19
290 THE beginner's greek book.
711, Additional Forces are collected by Aristippus
and Others.
Review 238, cJ? (241), 245, 269, 369, 5 ; 385, 675.
10. 'AptcrrtTTTros 8e 6 ©erraXo? ^evos ct)v irvyx^^^^
aVTCp, KOL 7rL€^6fJL€VO<;^ VTTO T(i)V OLKOL OLVTLCTTacrLOJTOJT/
ip^eraL 7rpo<; top Kvpov /cat alrel avTov et? ^ 8tcr^tXtoi>9
^epovs^ Koi rpLOJP jjnqpcop^ fiLcrOop, coq ovtco Trepiyepo-
fxepo^^ ap T(op dpTiCTTaaLcoTcop, 6 Se Kvpo<; ^lSojctlp
avTcp €19 TerpaKKT^ikLOv^; koX If ix7)pcop jjllo-Oop, kol
Seirat avTov fjirj irpoadep KaraKvaai irpos tov<s apTiara-
(nctyra<s irplp ap avT(p crvix^ov\evar)Tai. ovtco 8e av to
ip SeTTokCa iXdpOapep avTco Tpe(j>6iJLepop'^ cTTpaTevixa.
11. Upo^epop 8e TOP Bolcotlop, ^epop opTa avTco, eKe-
Xevae Xa^opTa dpSpas otl 7r\eLcrTov<; irapayepeadau,^
cJ? €19 ritcrt8a9 l3ov\6fJLepos (TTpaTeveadaL. ^o(f)aLpeTOP
Se TOP ^Tvix^aXiop koi %0)KpdTr]p top ^A-)(ai6p, ^epovs
opTa^ KOL TovTOv<;, iKeXevcrep dpSpa^ Xa^6pTa<; iXdeip
OTL 7r\eicrToi>95 W9 TToXefXTjaajp ^ TuacracfyeppeL crvp toI<;
^vydcTL Tcop M.LXr)crLO)P. Kat iiroCovp ovtco^ ovtol.
* What does m^C'^ficvos express ?
2 els wlieri used with numerals is a preposition (p. 119^).
* For ^evovs koi fiicrOov cf. 267, 11-
* Syntax?
^ TTfpiyevofxevos av, participle in the so-called indirect discourse (776) :
saying that thus he could overcome, etc. In the dii'ect form, Trfpiyfvolfirjv
av, etc. ; cf. 694, 6 ; 648, n. 1 ; ovtcd implies the protasis.
* TrapayeveaBai is compounded of what ?
' Force of TroXfixrjacov ? Use of as ?
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 291
LESSON LXII.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN /xt. — SUBSTITUTIONS
FOR CONDITIONS. — RELATIVE CLAUSES
OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, AND RESULT.
Review 103, 1, 2, 3, 4; 104, 1, 2; 117, 118, 119,
120, 121, 236, 2, 5, 6; 287, 289, 300, 324, 573, 579.
617, 619, 661.
712. Irregular verbs in fxi follow the analogy of the
regular verbs in fjui in the present and second aorist
systems (617), but are more or less irregular in forma-
tion. Most of them, however, lack the second aorist
system entirely.
713. Conjugate elfXL (859).
a. elvac is for ia-vac ; wz/ for iaoav,
714. Conjugate <^i7/xt [(^a-], sai/ (858). •
a. Note that it is inflected in the main like LaTrjfjLi (619).
d. All the forms of the present indicative are enclitic, except
715. Substitution for Conditions,
The place of a protasis may be supplied by a partici-
ple (236, 6), by a preposition and its case, or implied
in an adverb or some other form of expression (711, n. 5,
end). When a participle takes the place of the protasis,
its tense is always the same as that which the verb itself
292 THE beginner's greek book.
would have had in the indicative, subjunctive, or opta-
tive. The present includes the imperfect. E. g.
Kol avv vfxiv fxev av elrjv TLfJLLO<;, vfjLcov 8e eprnxo^ ojv
ovK av iKavos eL7]v av (J)l\ov (ocjyeXyjcraL, and with yon (if
I should remain with you) / should be honored, hut being
separated from you (et . . . euriv, if I should be^ etc.) /
should not be able to assist a friend.
716. Belative clauses expressing Purpose,
The relative with the future indicative may express a
purpose. Its negative is /xiy. E. g.
riyefiova alrel Kvpov octti^ Sta <^tXta5 TTJq -^copa<;
aTrd^eiy he asks Cyrus for a guide who will lead them
back (to lead back) through a friendly country,
a. After verbs of motion purpose is regularly expressed bj
the future participle (236^ 5).
717. Causal Clauses.
Clauses denoting cause or reason are regularly ex-
pressed by the conjunctions with the indicative after
both primary and secondary tenses. The most common
causal conjunctions are on, cu?, because ; iirei, eVetSif,
&r€, oTTOTe, since. The negative is ov. E. g.
firj OavjxdleTe otl ^aXcTrwg (fyepco toI<; irapovci Trpdy
fxa(TLv, do not wonder because I am greatly distressed on
account of the present affairs.
a. For causes expressing another's reason, see (788).
h. Cause is frequently expressed by the participle (236, 2).
718. Clauses of Result with cjcrre.
Examine the following :
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUS*E; ETC. 293
1. e)^cu yap Tpn]pei<^ cjcrTe iXeuv to eKeivcov irXoiov^for
1 have triremes, (so as to take) so that lean take their boat.
2. Kol T) fJLTJTTjp (JweTrpaTTev avTco Tavra, wcrre )8a-
crtXev? TTjv iiev Trpos iavTov iTn^ovXrjp ovk rjcrOdveTO,
and his mother ivas co-operating with him in this, so that
the king did not become aware of the plot against himself.
Observe that: 1. The infinitive is used with wcrre to express
the result as one which the action of the leading verb tends to
produce ; that (ocrTe here is regularly translated so as. 2. The
indicative is used with ware to express the result as one that the
action of the leading verb does really produce or states it as a
fact, and hence its negative is ov.
Rule.
719. wcrre, so that, so as, with the infinitive ex-
presses the result as one which the action of the leading
verb tends to produce, with the indicative as one which
that action really does produce.
a. In Greek the result clause never has the subjunctive.
720. Indirect Discourse.
A direct quotation gives the exact words of the origi-
nal speaker or writer; as, The king will come at dawn.
In an indirect quotation or question, the original words
conform to* the construction of the sentence in which
they are quoted ; as, He said that the king would come
at dawn (cf. 267, 5).
721. As a verbal neuter noun, the infinitive may be
the subject or object of a verb ; it is qualified by
adverbs, and not by adjectives.
294 THE beginner's greek book.
1. As subject, the infinitive is used chiefly with im-
personal verbs ; as XPV> ^^h ^^ ^^ necessary, or with iarl
(117, 1; 118).
2. As object, the infinitive is used chiefly with verbs
whose action implies another action as its object (119).
3. With the article the infinitive becomes more dis-
tinctly a noun, and it may be used in either of the above
relations, or may depend upon a preposition, or stand
in most constructions belonging to nouns : i. e. r^p^av
Tov Sia^aLpeup (648, N. 2).
722. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used as
the object of verbs of saying or thinkiny^ or equivalent
expressions, and represents an indicative or optative of
the direct discourse.
Examine the following :
1. ol crrpartwrai KareKOTrrjcrav viro tcov KlXlkcov, the
soldiers ivere cut doivn by the Cilicians.
2. i(f)a(Tav Tov<; aTpariajTa^ KaraKOTrrjvaL viro tojv
KlXlkcdv, they said that the soldiers had been cut down by
the Cilieians,
3. 7r/D09 TovTov /3ovkoiJLaL ekOelv^ I desire to go to
this one.
4. 7r/3o? TovTov €(1)7] ^ovkeadaL iXOelp, he said that he
desired to go to this one.
5. VTT^ ifjLov TjjhiKiqTai, he has been wronged by me.
6. pofjiii^ovcn avTov vir* ifjLov rjSiKrjcrOaL, they believe
that he has been wronged by me.
7. (jvv vfiLv OLP €Lr)p Tipiios, wUh you I should be in
honor.
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 295
8. crifv vfjLLV av olfxai elvai TLfJuos, with you I think I
should he in honor.
9. lav Kak(o<; Trpd^o), ov irpoaOev TravcrofxaL irpiv qlv
v/xa9 Karaydyo) ot/caSe, if I shall be successful^ I tvill not
cease before I shall have restored you to your homes,
10. vTricT^eTo avroi?, ei Kakax; irpd^eLev, ov npocrdei/
TravcreaOai irplv avTov<; KaraydyoL OLKaSe, he promised
them that if he should he successful, he would not cease
before he should have restored them to their homes.
11. TovTO TO Tei^o<; /BacnXeo)^ iXeyero (^vkaK-qv (f)v~
XdrreLv, it ivas said that a garrison of the Jdng was guard-
ing this wall.
12. TOVTO TO T€L^o<; ^acTtXeoi? iXeyeTO (f>vXaKrj (f)v-
XdTT€Lv, this wall a garrison of the king was said to be
guarding.
a. Observe that in 1, 3, 5, 7, the words of the original
speaker are given ; that in 2. 4^ 6, 8, the sentences represent
the words of the original speaker changed to conform to the con-
struction of the verb upon which they depend (720).
b. Observe that in 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, tlie infinitives depending
upon a verb of saying^ thinking , etc., represent the verbs of the
direct discourse, and their tenses the corresponding tenses of the
finite moods, the present including the imperfect, and the perfect
the pluperfect.
c. Observe that the leading verb of tlie complex sentence in
9, is changed to the same tense of the infinitive in indirect dis-
course ; that after a secondary tense the verbs of the subordinate
clauses are changed to the optative (578).
d. Observe that civ qualifying the main verb of the direct is
retained in the indirect 7, 8, but av attached to the particle is
296 THE beginner's greek book.
dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the optative in the
indirect 9, 10.
e. Observe that indirect discourse frequently involves a
change of person, chiefly of the first and second to the third,
3, 4/ 9, 10.
y*. Observe that in 12, Xeyerat may take the personal con-
struction for the impersonal (246, 247).
Rule.
723. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used
as the object of verbs of sayincj or ihinMng, or equiv-
alent expressions.^ Here each tense of the infinitive
represents the tense of the leading verb which would be
used in the direct form, the present and perfect includ-
ing the imperfect and pluperfect. If the original had
avy the infinitive retains it.
2. The negative ov of the finite verb is regularly
retained in the indirect, but it is sometimes changed to
\Lri, the regular negative of the infinitive.
3. After primary tenses, dependent verbs in indirect
discourse retain the same mood and tense; after sec-
ondary tenses, they may be either changed to the same
tense of the optative or retained in the original mood and
tense (579, a)\ but dependent secondary tenses^ of the
indicative remain unchanged.-
^ In indirect discourse the subject of the sentence (6) seems to be put
in the accusative as the grammatical object of the reporting verb, while the
verb of the predicate is changed to the corresponding tense of the infinitive
as a verbal noun, and the construction assumes the form of two accusatives
after the same verb (268).
2 Nouns denoting hope^ thought, e^notion, combinations of words ex-
pressing thought, etc.
^ If these were changed they might be caefounded with the subjunctive.
RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE, CAUSE, ETC. 297
a. When a subjunctive becomes optative av is dropped.
724. Verbs of hoping, expecting , promiHing , etc., allow
either the object infinitive or the infinitive in indirect
discourse. Bat in the latter construction the future
infinitive is more common.
725. Xeyw, especially in the passive ; So/ceiw, seems ;
and a few^ others, while allowing either the personal or
impersonal construction, are regularly used personally.
726. EXERCISES.
I. 1. ovTOi yap Kol kiroyLevoi av (J^lXol avrco Kal
TTpoOvfJLOL eTTOi/xe^a. 2. ov yap rjfjieLS^ iKeivov en
(TTpaTLcoTai, CTret ye ov avveTTopieOa avTco. 3. irepovs
rjyeixopa^ eTrefjixpev ot avTov<;, iav cnrovhaX yivcovrai,
a^ovaiv ivOev i^ovcn tol eViTT^Seta. 4. dSt/cetcr^at
pofJLii^eL vcf) rjixcov ' cocTTe Kal /xeraTre/xTTOjiLeVov avTOv ovk
iOeXo) ekOeiv, 5. aoi SoKovp^ep Imrecop ttXtJOov? oltto-
pelv rj ottXltcjv ; 6." tovto (^€to Troirjcreiv 6 Kvpo^;
Tov ^A^poKOfjiap. 7. 6 S' ovT€ TTporepov ov^evi^ KpecT-
Tovi iavTov €t? x^^P^^ iXdelv €(j)r}. 8. evopnt^e yap
6cra>^ OaTTOV iXOoL, Toaovrco aTrapacrevoTepcp /3acrtXet
lia^eiaOai, 9. ol Se <f>aaLP ovS\ el ^ovXolo, Svpacrdai
CLP OLTToSovpaL ocTa viricr^pei.
II. 1. Cyrus so treated^ the satraps that they were
more friendly to him than to the king. 2.^ For he
thought that on this day the king would not fight.
^ What verb must be understood ?
2 Let the pupil give tlie direct form of tlie following sentences.
8 With ets x"pas f^^"" (225). * See 386. ^ diaTierjfii.
* Let tlie pupil first give the direct form of the following sentences, and
then change them to indirect, 723, 1, 2, 3, etc.
298 THE beginner's greek book.
3. And he said that Abrocomas, an enemy, was at the
Euphrates river. 4. For I think you are both my
friends and alhes. 5. He said that he should fear to
follow the guide whom Cyrus would give,
727.- R. <^a-, fa-, shoiD, shine. ^y\-\Liy declare, say ;
<|)d-o-K-(o, say^ allege; <|)d-(rL-s, -e-w?, 17, saying; irpo-
(fiaai-s, -e-cos, r), pretence, pretext; <|)(o-VTJ, -7J9, sound,
voice, language ; <t)aiv(o [<^a + v\, hrincj to light, show,
cause to shine ; <j)av-€p6-s, -a, -6-v^ open to sight, visible ;
^avepm, adv., evidently ; d-cf^av-TJ^;, -e?, out of sight,
invisible, ; KaTa-cfiav-yjs, -€s, in plain sight.
for, say ; fa-ma, -ae, f., report; fa-s, n., divine right.
Ban, banns, pro-phet, pro-phesy, phase, em-phasis,
phenomenon, phantasm.
728. Cyrus assembles his Forces at Sardis.
Review 106, 146, 212, 399, 648, 675, 711.
1 . 'EttcI S' iSoKei auTO) '^817 iropevecrO ai avco, ttjv fjicv ^
7rp6(f)aaLv iiroieiTO ws^ HicriSa? ^ovkofxevof; eK^akeiv
e/c Tyj<; ^wpa? ' kclI d9poit,ei oj?^ cttI tovtov^ to re /8ap-
fiapiKov KoX TO 'EX\r)VLKOv crTpaTevfJia. ivTavOa^ kol
TrapayyeWei tS t€ KXeap^oj \a^6vTL rjKeLv ocrov rfv
avTco (TTpoLTevpLa^ KOL tS 'AptcrTiTTTTw (TvvaWayevTL
7rpo5 Tov<; OLKOL ^ aTTOTrefjLxjjai vrpos kavTov 6 ei^e aTpa-
TevfJba * Kal 'aepua rw 'ApKaSu, 09 avTco TTpoeKTTrjKei
Tov ev rat? TrdXecrt ^eviKov,^ rjKeiv irapayyiWei \a-
^ovTa^ T0U9 az/Spa? ttXtjv ottoctoi^ iKavol rjcrav ra?
OLKpoTToXei^ (^yvkoLTTeiv. 2. eKokeae §e koX tov^ Mikr}-
TOV Tro\iopKovvTa<;, koI tov<; (j)vydSa^ eKeXevcre aw
avT^ aTpaTeveadai, viroaxoP'^^oq avTol^, d /caXws
REGULAR VERBS IN /X,6. 299
KaTairpa^eiei/ e<p a ecTTpareveTo, fxr) wpoatfei/ nav-
aacrdat TrpXv avTov<; Karaydyoi oi/caSe. ol Se T^Sew?
iTreiOopTo ' inLCTTevov yap avTco ' kol Xa^ovre^s tol onXa
naprjaap et? SdpSeis.
^ fx€u is used alone for emphasis ; it implies a clause with Se, but in
truth, etc.
2 Explain the use of o)s.
* las eVi rouTouff, fi^i- ?/'or avotcedly against these.
* ivravOa, there, i. e. at Sardis, the capital of Cyrus's province.
® See o-ui/aXXarro), ^ »i(afy?:^ terms with ; cf. KaraXva-ai, 711, § 10.
« Cf. p. 1922.
' roil ^cviKov, sc. crrpaTevfxaTos, the viercenary force.
8 Xa/3oWa agrees with the unexpressed subject of jj'ffti' instead of with
Sei'ta, since the latter is so far removed in position (780, 2).
^ Sc. TotrovTO)!/ as tlie antecedent of b-noaoi.
^° Changed as in Eiighsh, instead of the optative (723, 3 ; 770).
LESSON LXIII.
REGULAR VERBS IN /xi ; ti^t^/ai. —VERBS OF
THE SEVENTH CLASS.
Review Lessons LIV., LVL
729. Write the present and second aorist systems of
Tiey]p.i^ [ee-\ place (849, 853).
a. In the imperfect active singular, iTid€i<;, irlOet., are formed
as if from a verb in e(o (154, 2). See 641, a.
b. For the second aorist system, see 641, h.
1 Let the pupil inflect this verb entire before referring to the paradigms.
300 THE beginner's greek book.
c. The imperative active, rWei, (for TiOedi) is formed as if
from a contract verb in eo), cf. iroieco (429).
d. The active participles ri^e/? {nOevT^) and ^et? (for Oevrs)
are declined like Xf^et? (350). Tor their formation, see 619, ^;
641, d.
e. The singular of the second aorist indicative active, as in
BiScofit, is lacking, and it is supplied by the first aorist : edrj/ca,
etc. (641, e).
f. The second aorist imperative active is Qh (for Q^dC),
(641,/).
g. The second aorist infinitive active is Sdvai (for Oe-evai),
(641,^).
730. Verds of the 'Theme or Seoenf/i Class.
Verbs of this class form the present bv adding the
personal endings directly to the theme, which is often
reduplicated with t. This class includes all verbs in
/it except those in vv^xi (736). The tense stems of
these verbs, excepting the present and second aorist,
are formed like verbs in w (617).
Examine the following :
1. laTrjfjLL [crra-], sei (621), (rTTJcra), ecrrrycra, i(TT7]v,
icrrrjKa, ecrra/xat,, io-rdOiqv.
2. hvvaixai \hvvci-], be able, hvvrjcro^JLai, SeSvprjfjiaL,
3. iirio-T ayiai [eTrtfrra-], lender standi eTTiorrrjcroiiai,
4. 8t8w/xt [80-], //ive, 8(o(T0)y iScoKa, SeSw/ca, 8eSo/xat,
iSoOrjv.
5. TiOrjiJLL^ l^9e-~\, put, place, Oyjcrco, eSrjKa, riOeiKa^
TeOeufJiaL, Iridiqv.
^ The theme vowel is lengthened to ci instead of ?; iii the first perfect
and perfect middle systems.
2 See 304..
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 301
731. Some common -w verbs that have second aorist
of the -fXL form :
1. /8atVw [/8a-], (631, 3), ^0, e^r]v,^ ^co, ^aiiqv, ^rjOi,
2. yiyvaycKO) \_yvcH\ (651, a), eyvcov, yvco^ yvoirjv,
ypwOi, yvcovai, yvov<;»
'3. ^ddvoi [^^a-] (631, 2), anticipate, i<^d7]Vy^ <^dcoy
(fydairjp, (j>6rjvai, ^da<;.
732. EXERCISES.
I. 1. Kol aycova eOrjKe. 2. ecrre rcov \o^ayo)v
apicrroi, 3. ol dyyeXoL top Tiaaa^ipvov^; dSe\(j)ov
eyvcjcrav. 4. ovhev yap Trj<; oSov eVtcrra/xe^a.
5. Sefta? iSocrav ol rrj^ ySacrtXeo)? yvvaiKo^ dSeX(f)OL.
6. TTjv y€(f)vpav \v(T€i TLO'(ra(f)€pv7]s Trj<; vvkto<;^ idv
SvprjTaL, w? fXTj Sta^^re. 7. ri TTOirjcavTe'^ (^6 da ai
/BovXojJLevoL TTplv TTaOeiv, iiroiiqcrav /ca/ca rov<; ov /xeX-
XovTas roiOVTOv ovhiv^ 8. SeSot/ca /li']^ \a^(i)v fie 81-
/CTyi^ iiTiOfj 0)1/ ^ vop.it^ei VTT^ ifiov rjSLKTJcrOai. 9. T179
fJid^7j<; TTavcrdfievoL dfiffyoTepoL Kara ^(i)pav^ eOevro rd
OTrXa. 10. Tov^ OTrXtra? iKeXeve diaOai rd oirXa nepl
TTjv avTov aKiqvriv, 11. koI KeXevovcri (jyvXdrTeaOaL
fir) vfXLP iiridcovTai rrj^ vvKro<; ol ^dp^apoi.
II. 1. They stood under arms in line of battle.
2. They will attack us daring the night. 3. He said
that he would come with as many horsemen as possible.
4. But there the Greeks halted and rested, grounding
1 Like ^(TTr^v (619, b^). « See 438, 439.
2 Sc TTotcii/. • ^ In their proper place.
302 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
their arms. 5. Leading his line of battle into the
space between-^ both of them, he halted under arms.
6. If he is there, I desire to inflict punishment upon him.
733. VOCABULARY.
ay(xiv, -wvo^, 6, assembly, TiOrjfiLy put, place ; rWefxai
contest, games [agony]. ra onXa, gi^ound arms,
eiri-rWiqyui, put upon, inflict ; stand under arm^ [do,
mid., attack [epithet] . doom, theme, thesis].
734. R. TrXa-, ttXc-, iple-,filL 'iri-iJL-TrXTi-fjLi,^^// (red n pli-
cation strengthened by the nasal fx) ; ir\r\-p-7\^, -e<;, fidl ;
irXTJ-G-a), be full ; ttXtjOo^, -e-og, to, throng, midtitude ;
ir\€-6po-v, t6^ measure of extent, plethron ; 7r\e9pL-alo-<;,
-d, 'ov, of a plethron ; avfi-7rX€cor<;, -o)v,full ; irXeicov, -ov,
comp., more, greater ; irXriv, prep, and adv., except [more
than) ; ttXcio-tos, -17, -ov (for TrXe-icrro-?), sup., 7nost ;
irdX-i-s, -€-w9, 77, city (^ mass,' 'crowd ') ; 770X1-717-9, -ov, cit-
izen ; TroXt-opKe-cu (etpyaj, hem in), besiege; a/cpd-TroXt-?,
-6-609, rj (cf. R. dfc-, 616), upper city, citadel ; iroX-v-s,
ttoX-Xt], ttoX-v, much, many; TroXXa-zct?, adv., many times,
often.
im-ple-6, fill up ; ple-nu-s, adj., fidl; plu-s, adj.,
more ; ple-b-s, -is, f., the common people ; po-pulu-s, -i,
m., people, nation; pu-bli-cn-s, adj., of the people ; am-
plu-s, adj., of large extent.
Fill, eull ; plethora, pleonasm, acro-polis, metro-
polis, cosmo-polite, poly-gon, poly-nomial, etc., di-
ploma.
^ ets TO fjL€(rov. '
REGULAR VERBS IN fJLL. 303
735* "^^^ Character and Number of the Forces assembled at
Sardis. Tissaphemes warns the King.
Review 236, 8; 238, 370, },2; 723, 1; 728.
3. SevCa^ fJL€p 817 Tov<; e/c rcop rrokeajv Xaj^cov irape-
yevero ct? SctpSet? OTrXtra? els rer paKicr^ikLovs^ Tipo-
^evos 8e Traprji/ i^cop OTrXiras p^ev ecs TrevraKoaiovs /cat
^tXtov9, yvpvrjTas Se TrevraKocriovSy ^o^aiveros 8e 6
Srv/xc^aXto? OTrXtra? ej^wi^ ^ikiovSy XcoKpaTrj^ 8e 6
'A;)(ato? OTrXira? e)(a)j/ cu? ^ TrevTaKoaiovs, Hdaicov 8e
6 Meyapev? et? iiTTaKocrLovs e)((j}v dvhpas Trapeyevero '
rjv 8e /cat ovtx>9 /cat 6 ^cjKpdrrjs tcop dp,(j)l MlXyjtov
(TTparevopevcjp.^
4. OvTot /x<ej/ et? Sap8et9 auTw ^ d(f)iKovTO. Ttcrcra-
^ipvTjS 86, KaTavoTjcras ravra, /cat peu^ova^ 'qyyjo'dpevos
etvai^ rj (os cttI ntcrt8a9 tt^i^ TrapacTKevrjv,^ Tropeverai
<y?^ ^acrtXea ^* e8u^aT0 rd^KXTa Imreas i^ojv cos
irevraKoaiovS'
yvpvrjs, 'TjTos, a light-armed foot soldier.
KaTa-poect), observe, consider (cf. R. yi/&>-, 660).
TTapacTKevT], -rjs, preparation (cf. 638).
1 Cf. 297.
2 Syntax?
^ Subject of eivat.
* 5; ihvvaro rdxta-Ta (sc oSm, 249), in whatever way Tie could most quickly^
as rapidly as possible.
304 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
LESSON LXIV.
REGULAR VERB Set/ci^v/xi. — IRREG-ULAR
VERB eTfjLL.
Review 531, obs.; 619, a, d; 630,631,632,633,712.
736. Some verbs of the Pifth or Nasal Class form
the present stem by adding to the theme -w, or after a
vowel -ppv. Most of these verbs end in ^t.'
Examine the following :
1 . heiKvvixi [8et/c-] , point out, shoio, SeC^o), iSet^a.
2. t^evyvvyii [t,yy-~\? join^ yoke, Ij^v^co^ e^evfa.
3. 6\kvfjLL^ L^^"]? destroy, loose, 6\o), cXXecra,* cJXd/xryi'.
737. Conjugate ^eiKvv^i in the present system (850).
Observe that in the present system of verbs in vvjjh, the end-
ings are added to the present stem, and not to the theme as in
617, 619 ; BeL/cvvfjLL, 8e/7CW9, etc.
b. Observe that the subjnnctive and optative are formed as in
-ft) verbs (553, 554) ; heiKvixo^ SeiKvvotfjLL^ etc.
c. Observe that the present imperative rejects -0i and length-
ens the final vowel of the theme, heUvv, etc.
738. SeLKvufjiL has no second aorists. iSvy, the sec-
ond aorist of Svco, enter, is here presented for inflection
(854):
1 These are sometimes called the second class of -\ii verbs.
2 The theme is lengthened as in the second class (527, 535).
^ For oK-w-\ii,
* Tlie theme assumes e as in some verbs of the first class (522).
REGULAR VERB SeUvVfJiL.
305
Ind.
SUBJ.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
s.
1.
iSvv
Svo)
Lacking.
Svj/at
2.
eSvs
Svrjs
Sv9l
3.
eSv
Bvrj
SvTO)
Part.
K,T.X.
K.T.X,
K.T.X.
Sis, hvcra, Bvi^
a. The active participles heiKVv^^ SeiKvvcra^ SeiKvvv^ gen.
BeiKvvvTo<;, k. t. X. and 8u9, hvaa^ Sw, gen. hvvTO^^ k. t. X., are
inflected like tVra? (823).
739. el/xt [t-, Lat. i-re\, go^ has only the present
system (860).
Conjugate the following :
Ind.
SUBJ.
Opt.
Imv.
Inf.
s.
1.
elfJLL
LO)
loi/xt or loiriv
LevaL
9
el
T
LOLS
Wl
3.
elcTL
h
LOL
LTQ)
Part.
D.
2.
3.
Itov
ITOV
K.T.X.
K.T.X.
s.
K.T,X,
Impf.
1. ya or
2. rJ€L<; or
3. fj€L or
K.T.X,
K,T.X.
y€LV
TjeicrOa
yeuv
tc6j/, lovcra, lov
a. Observe that the subjunctive and optative are inflected as
in Set/cvu/jiL or Xvco ; that the imperative retains -6l ; that the
infinitive has thematic vowel e, and the participle thematic vowel
0, as in mv ('^32).
d. The present el/JLL has a future force, s//all go^ and regularly
takes the place of the future of ep^ofiai (698, 3).
20
306 THE beginner's greek book.
740. EXERCISES.
I. 1. aXXa l6vT(jt)v. 2. ol (TTparioyrai ovk et^a-
crav^ livai. 3. /cat aTTiovre^, acrc^aXoi? av aTTioifxev,
4. TovTO T(d ipyco eTreheiKvvTo, 5. oTe Tavra rjv /cat
T^Xto? ihvero. 6. yecjyvpa 8e €77171^ H^evyfievr] TrXotot?
iirrd. 7. €/c Se tovtov Oolttop TTporjecrav avv Kpavyrj.
8. ot 8e avicrravrai iTTiSeiKvvpTe^ ota ecrrt^' 77 aTTopia.
9. ectz/ Tft> (Tvvd(i)piai, ovSev i//6v8o/>tat. 10. hid^aivov
Trjp y4(l>vpav it.evyiiiviqv vrXotot? TpiaKovTa koI kiTTa,
11. /cat aTpaTTjyov Se avrov dneSeL^e irdvTcop octol et?
KacrrwXoi} TreSiov dOpoit^ovrai. 12. eV Se r^ VTrep-
pokrj T(x)v 6pi(x)v Toiv et? to TreStoi/ Svo Xd^ot rou
MeV(uz/o9 (TTparev/xaro? aTTwXot'To. 13. 6 S' oure tt/oo-
Tepov ovhevl'^ Kpeirrovi iavTOv ets ^eipa^ iXOeiv ecfyrj,
ovre t6t€ Kupw ^ tej^at rjOeXe, Trplp rj yvvrj avrov eTreicre
Koi iTiarei^ eXa/Se.
II. 1. They advanced with a great shout. 2. Let
us show our good will. 3. They would go to their
tents. 4. In these marches many of the beasts of bur-
den perished. 5. Cyrus desired to show his army to
the Cilician queen.
741. VOCABULARY.
aTTopid, -d?, difficulty, dv-LaTrjfxi, make stand up,
vTrep'/SoXij, -rj^, crossing, rouse ; mid., stand np,
mountain pass [/SaXXw]. rise.
^ OX) is frequently used with <^r)iii in the sense of den^i where we would
expect yLT] with the infinitive, as in English, / do not think, etc.
2 Follows eis x^'^'P^^ «^^f^'' (726, 7 ; 225).
^ Sc. els xfi^pflf- See preceding note (2).
REGULAR VERB heiKVV^l, 307
ttTT-etjULt, go away or back, eTn-heiKvvyn, point out, make
depart, clear; rnid., sho2u for
diTo-SeLKi/vfjLiy pomt out, ap» one's self, show,
point; mid., declare. t^evyvv^ii^t^ev^o), yoke, join;
aTT-oXXvfiL, -oXo), -coXeaa, of bridges, made of
'(oXofiTji^y -oXcoXeKa, -oXco- [yoke] .
Xa, destroy; mid. w. 2 pf. 7r/)o-€t/xt, go forward, ad-
and plpf. Sict., perish, die, vance.
eTfjLL, go, come, proceed, (tvv-tl07jijll, put together,
en-eiiJiL, be on or upon, be make an agreement, corir
over [et/xt]. tract,
err-et/xt, go or come on, ad-
vance, attack [el/xt],
^aivo), go, walk. ep^ofxai, go, come.
iXavvo), march, make an cT/xt, go, in the wide sense.
expedition.
742. Counter Preparations of the King. Cyrus begins his March
through Xiydia and Fhrygia, and arrives at Celaenae.
Review 92, a-, 93; 107, 186, 249, 340, 369, 1, 2;
409, 677, 703, 735.
5. Kal l3a(TLXev^ fiev Br) eVet -qKovae Tia-aa^ipvov^
Tov Kvpov^ (TToXov, avrnrapccTKevdiC^eTo,
Ku/oo? 8e €^(jiiv 0V9 ^ etprjKa ^ (opjiaTo diro SdpBecov *
Kal i^eXavvei 8ta ttj^; AvStas ora^/xov? rpeZ^ rrapacrdy
ya<; eiKocn Kal 8vo eVt tov MaiavSpov TTorapiOP, Tov-
TOV TO eS/)05 hvo nXeOpa* yecjivpa Se inyjp i^evyfieprj
TrXotots^ eTTTct.
6. TovTop Sta^a?* i^eXavvei Sta ^pvyLa<; dTadyiOV
308 THE beginner's greek book.
eva TTapacrd'yya<; oktco et? KoXocrcraSj ttoXiv OLKOvfJbevrjv.
evSaifJiOpa koL fjbeydXrjv. evravda efxeivev rjixipa^ eiTTOL *
KoX yJK€ M.ivo)v 6 ©erraXog OTrXiras ex^iv ^(tXtoi;? koL
TTekraard^ TrepTaKoauovs, AoXonas kol AlpiavaSf /cat
7. ^YAVTeuOev i^eXavvei crra^/iou? rpeig Trapacrayya?
eLKoaiv ets KeXati^ag, r^J? ^pvyuas irokiv oiKoviLivqv,
IxeyaXrjv kol ivSaifJLOPa. evravOa Kvpoi^ ySacriXeta
rjv KoX TTapdheiao^ fxeya^ dypLcov diqpicov^ 7r\T]p7)<;^ d
eKeivo^ idijpevev dno lttttov, oirore yvpLvdaai ^ovXolto^
eavTOV T€ KoX Tov<; iTTTrou?. Sid /xecrou 8e tov rrapa-
Setcrou pel 6 MaLavSpo<; 7roTafx6<;' at ^e 7T7]yai avrov
eiaiv eK roiv jBacrikeioiv ' pel 8e /cat 8ta tt]<s KeXaLvwp
TToXectj?.
* Syntax.
2 Account for the omission of the antecedent.
8 Give the principal parts (098, 2 ; 708, 6).
* Explain the formation (731, 1).
* Explain the mood.
LESSON LXV.
REVIEW.
Review Lessons XLIL-LXIV. in order, with their
vocabularies, and note the allied words.
743. Formation of Adverbs.
1 . How are adverbs regularly formed from adjectives ?
2. Give the forms of adjectives and nouns that may
be used as adverbs.
REVIEW. 309
3. Give the meanings of the endings -Oevy-Oi, and -Se.
4. How are adverbs compared ? What may adverbs
quahfy ? What force has e^oi with an adverb?
5. State the force of a qualifying word or phrase
with the article, and give examples.
6. Give the construction with verbs of doing any-
thing to, or of saying anything of a person or thing.
Give the force of ev, Kokm, etc., with these verbs.
7. Name other verbs that take a similar construction.
Name corresponding constructions in Latin and English.
744. Formation of Words. — Substantives.
1. Define a root. Define simple and compound
words. Define primitive and denominative words.
2. What are prefixes and suffixes ? Give the most
common suflSxes denoting the abstract idea of verbs.
Give the suffixes denoting agent, and examples. Give
the suffixes denoting quality, and examples.
3. What consonants may be added to the stems m
the formation of words ? What changes occur in the
final consonants of the theme or stem before consonant
endings ?
4. Give the force of the denominative endings -crt,
-ri, -/xo, -/xa ; -/xar ; -€t, -ret, and give examples of each.
5. What endings have adjectives in their formation
common with nouns ?
6. What do the endings -to and -lko denote? -eo
and 'ivo ? -Tepo and -raro ? Give examples of each
of these endings.
310 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
745. Formation of Verbs. — Compounds,
1. Give several examples of denominative verbs. Ex-
plain the formation of those in evco, i^w, and vvo}..
2. Give the meaning of the inseparable particles.
3. State the common ways of forming compound
words, and give examples. What change may the initial
vowel of the last part of a compound word undergo ?
4. Define objective and determinative compounds,
and give examples.
746. Giirmris Law.
1. Define cognate and borrowed words.
2. Give Grimm's Law of permutation of consonants.
3. In the middle of a word how are the rough mutes
frequently represented ?
4. What is the general direction in the phonetic
change of vowels ? In transliteration how are the
vowels changed ?
5. Give the Latin and English words cognate with
(j)€p(o, TTOv^, ixrjrrjp, olvo<;, Se/ca, ef, iiiji^.
6. Give the most common Greek words formed from
the roots : ay-, dp^-, ySoX-, Ik-, yvco-, and irXa-.
747. Classes of Ve?'hs.
1. In respect to the theme ending of verbs, into what
classes are verbs divided ?
2. In respect to the formation of the present stem from
the theme, into what classes are verbs divided ?
3. What verbs are included in the fourth class ?
REVIEW. 311
What in the fifth class ? Define briefly the remaining
classes.
4. Explain the classification of rarrw, dyyeXXw,
<j)aLva), (TrjjJiaLvcOy voyLit^o), alcr^vvcx).
5. Explain the classification of Xay^^dvo), cjiOdvo),
iXavvo), alcrOdvoyiai, VTricr^vioyLaiy SeiKz^u/xi, oXkvjJLL.
748. Subjunctive and Optative.
1. What does the indicative express? The sub-
junctive ?
2. What relation does the optative bear to the sub-
junctive ?
3. What is the mood sign of the subjunctive ? Of
the optative ? What endings does each of these moods
take ?
4. How does the aorist subjunctive diff^er from the
present in form ? In meaning ?
5. Give the synopses of the present system of Xvo),
fceXevw, XetTTO), Troiea), 817X00).
6. Conjugate the present and aorist systems of Xvcw,
KeXevcjy TLfido), SoKeco.
7. Conjugate the future system of <j)aipo), fievo),
dyyekXo),
8. Conjugate the aorist system of c^atVoj, /xeVcw,
dyyeWco, KeXevcoj Tre/XTTO), kottto}, tclttw.
749. Second Tense St/stems,
1. Give the formation of the first tense systems of
verbs.
2. How does the second aorist system compare with
the present in inflection ?
312 THE beginner's greek book.
3. What is the tense sign of the second aorist ?
What exceptions in accent has it ? Conjugate the
second aorist system of Xcittw.
4. Give the synopses of the second aorist system
active of ayw, Trctcr^w, opdo), ep^ofiai, (jyevyco ; the sec-
ond aorist system of Xafji/Bdvco, alpeco, yiyvoyiai,
5. How is the second perfect formed ? How does
the second perfect system compare with the first in in-
flection ? Conjugate the second perfect system of
XetTT&j.
6. Give synopses of the second perfect system of
aya>, Tre/xTTw, ireiOcDy (j)€vyct).
7. Give the synopses of the perfect middle system
of Xvo), dvo), KeXevcoy TrejuTro), TreiOo), dyo).
8. How does the second passive system compare
with the first in inflection ?
9. Conjugate the first and second aorist passive
systems of <^atVft> and arpet^co.
10. Give the synopses of the second aorist passive
system of ypa^a>, rpe^w, kottto) and KarakdrTco,
11. Decline \vdeU, crrpac^et?, and eKirXayeU.
750. Si/ntax of the Subjunctive and Optative — Con-
ditional Sentences, Result Clauses, etc.
1. What does the subjunctive mood express?
2. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in
independent clauses. Distinguish in the use of the
tenses of the dependent moods not in indirect discourse.
3. What principle governs the use of ov and ixTf ?
4. Why has the subjunctive no future ? What use
has the future optative ?
REVIEW. 313
5. State how purpose, and object clauses after verbs
of fearing are expressed, and give examples in Greek.
Give other ways of expressing purpose.
6. Give the law for the sequence of moods, and give
its corresponding law in Latin.
7. Give the two general uses of av. When is av
retained in indirect discourse ?
8. How does the potential optative differ in mean-
ing from the potential indicative ?
9. What special use has av with the imperfect and
aorist indicative ?
10. Why do the simple particular conditions take
the indicative ?
11. How are conditions contrary to fact expressed?
12. Give the uses of the subjunctive and optative in
conditional sentences.
13. Define a general condition. How does the pres-
ent general condition differ in form from the past
general ?
14. How does the less vivid condition compare in
meaning with the more vivid ?
15. What may take the place of a protasis of a con-
dition ? Give examples in Greek.
16. Give examples in Greek of the six ordinary con-
ditions, and translate into English. Into what classes
can they be placed ?
17. How are relative clauses with indefinite antece-
dent classified ? What takes the place of the particle
€t in a relative conditional sentence ?
314 THE beginner's greek book.
18. Write a summary classification of both ordinary
conditional and conditional relative sentences : simple
particular, general, etc.
19. How are clauses with ew?, ecrre, etc., classified?
Give the constructions with irpiv.
20. Distinguish between the use of the infinitive and
indicative with wcrre.
21. How are causal clauses with eVet, oTe^ etc., ex-
pressed ? What other common expressions of cause ?
751. Inflection of the '^JLL Verb.
1. Explain the -{xl inflection of verbs ? What forms
of the -fiL verbs have this inflection ? What peculiari-
ties in endings has the inflection of the -jjll verbs ?
What modifications of the theme vowel?
2. Decline terras, StSovs, and 6ek, and give their
formation and accentuation.
3. What tenses of -o) verbs take the -fii inflection ?
4. Give the synopses of the present and second
aorist systems of lariq^i and StSw/xi, and explain how
the two systems differ in form.
5. How are the subjunctive and optative of -/it verbs
regularly formed ?
6. How does the mood sign of the optative active of
-/xt verbs differ from that of the middle ?
7. What two -fxi verbs have subjunctive and optative
like -ft) verbs ?
8. Conjugate the present and second aorist systems
of TiOrjfJiL.
9. Conjugate the present systems of heUvvyn and
et/x,t.
REVIEW. 315
10. Give the synopses of the second aorist system
active of ^aivo), yLyvcoa-KO), and conjugate the indi-
cative.
11. Give the synopses of the present system of ct/xt
and (l)7]fii.
12. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within
this review.
752. Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. — Subordinate
Clauses,
1. Give the two uses of the object infinitive, and
distinguish between the use of the tenses in each.
2. What verbs regularly take the infinitive in indirect
discourse ? What construction may verbs of hoping,
etc., take ? Explain the personal construction.
3. Explain the use of the negative in indirect dis-
course ; of av.
4. What form do subordinate clauses in indirect dis-
course take ?
5. Translate the following, and explain the use of
the infinitive and optative : (1) €(^17 d Ta> awOolro, ov-
Sep xjfevSecrO at. (2) vmcr^veLTO Se avrw, ei eXdoL, (fyikov
avTov Kvpo) TroLrjoreLP,
753. Formation of Words {continued).
Give the formation and meanings of the following :
1. TpOTTO^;, crrdXo?, r)y€iJL(op, Tipaft?, TUfJirj, crTpaTLcoTr)<;,
xjjevSyjf;, TToXe/ito?, )(^pvcr€o<^. 2. St^Xow, /BacnXevco,
dgioaj, l3ov\eva)y KivSvvevco, dSt/cew, c^tXeo), fXLcrOoco,
TToXe/Aeft), 7T€Lpd(o, oIk4m. 3. aTTopo^y avra?, aSiACOs.
316 THE beginner's greek book.
4. ay(x)v, dypuos, (^povpap^o^i, /cwju.ap^i^?, vTTap^o<;,
eTTi^ovXrj. 5. )(aXe7r(o^, ouKodev, OLKaSe, StKa/ws, ttoXv,
Taxvy TravTYj, jJiaXXov, KdWicrra, KpaTidTa. 6. ySeX-
TidTO^, KTTJfxa, -^pyjixa, TnaTOTiq^^ rd^i^^ (j)vka^,
TTicTTi^, 7. dvayKal^o), ^oKeTraivo}, dyyiWo), KrjpvTTco,
8. ^acrtXtAcdg, </)az/€pd?, KaTa(f>av7]S, evvovs, evvoLa,
dfJLa^a, dixa^iTo^, ovojxa. 9. KpeiTTcov, iKKXrjcTLay
fieyas, TrXijprj^y TrXrjdoSy TrXetcrros, TTokiriq^i virep^oXij.
754. Grimm s Law (continued).
Give the Latin and English words cognate with the
following : 1. XeLTrct), ttlttto), (f)€p(o, fiovXoiJLaL, Tret^w,
yiyvcocTKa), 77X77/0179, KoXeo), Xvo). 2. O^jp, Tpelsj TTaTTJp,
Ovpay oIpos, ef, P'ljpy ttov?.
755. EXERCISES.
1. rjv Se (f>evyyy i^/xetg eKel 77/509 ravra /BovXevaofxeda,
2. €19 TOVTOv Se TOP araOfjiov Tto"0"a(^ep^'')79 ineifxivr).
3. XeyeTO) tl ecrrat tol<; crTpaTLcarai^, idv avrw ravra ^
"^apLcrcopT ai. 4. ^ovXoip.rjv 8' az^ olkovto^^ ^ olttlcjv ^
Kvpov XaOelv avrov oLTreXOcjv} 5. iXeyero Se /cat Sv-
evvecTLS eivai iiri tcop aKpcov (ftvXdrTcop rrjv ela^oXi/jj/.
6. Xa^(x)v vfjid^ i7Top€v6fJir)Vy Iva ei n Seotro ^ ax^eXoLTjp
avTov avtf o)v ev eiratfop vir eKeivov, /. /cat Ki;/)09
1 See 338.
^ uKovTos Kvpov, sc. oj/Tos (239), exprcsscs manner, against Cyruses will
(236, 3).
8 Equivalent to a oTrtotui (236, 6 ; 715).
* See 245, to get off without his knowledge.
^ Might have been the subjunctive, changed according to 579, <? ; 787,
2; 788.
® di^^* Z>v = avTL €K€Lva>v a (438, 2 ; 439), yb/* Me benefits 1 have received
from him, ev iTdaxo>, pass, force (659).
REVIEW. 317
cISe ra? o'Kr}va<; ov ol KtXtAce? i^vXarrov} 8. /cat ovk
icfyacrav levai, iav [jlt] rt9 avroi? ^prjixara StSw. 9. /cat
rairra iiroiiqcre ovk inl fJioixV^ lovTCxyv^ aXka koKovvto^
rov TTaTpos Kvpov. 10. /cat Kpavyr^v TToWrjv iiroiovv
Kakovvres dkXijXovs, wcrre /cat rovs TToXe/xtov? d/coiJetj/ *
cocrre ot /xei' iyyurara tcov iroi^efjiCcop /cat i(l)vyov e/c roij/
aKTjvwv. 11. (j)0^0ifji7)T/ 8' ai^ Tw r)yefx6vL co Solt) ine-
aOai, fXT) r)fJia<; dydyrj 69ev ov^ olov re^ icrrai i^eXOeiv,
12. et ^ovkecrOe ciTrteVat, rjKeiv yjSr) /ceXevet ttJs J^f/cros'
€t Se /xt), avTos a/xa r?J 7)p.4pa aTTteVat (j)r)crLv,
756. The Palace of the King. Cyrus holds a Review of his
Troops.
Review 84, 92, a; 104, 3 ; 107, 394, 450, 725, 742.
8. ^Ecrrt 8e /cat fxeydXov ySacrtXeiw? ySacrtXeta ei^ Ke-
Xat^at? €7rt rat? Trr)yaL<; rov Mapcrvov Trora/xov utto t^
d/cpoTToXet * yo€t 8e /cat ovto<; Std t"^? TrdXewg /cat e//,-
/BdWeu €t9 Toi^ Matai'Spo^' ' rou 8e Mapcrvov ro evpos
icTTLv €tfco(rt /cat irevre ttoScov. ivravOa Xeyerat 'AttoX-
Xo)!'^ €/c8€tpat Ma/ocruai'j vLKrjaa^;^ ipu^ovrd ol irepl
cro(j>La<s, /cat to Sepfia Kpejxdaai iv rw avrpco oOev at
TTiqyai ' ^ 8td 8e roGro 6 Trora/xo? Xeyerat Ma/9orua9.
9. 'E^'rav^a Bep^rj^;, ore eK ttjs *EXXd8o? rjTT-rjOel*;
TTj fJi'd^rj aTre^wpet, Xeyerat oiKoSofXTJcraL raurd re ret
/Sao'tXeta /cat r^^i^ KeXati^wi^ dKpoirokiv. ivravOa ifieive
Kvpo<s rjfjL€pa<; rpidKovra ' /cat 77/ce KXeap^o^ 6 Aa/ce-
8atjLtd^'to9 (j>vyd<;y e^ojv oTrXtra? ^tXtou? /cat TreXracrrds
0/3a/ca9 OKTaKocriovf; ./cat To^oTa^ Kp'^rag 8ta/coo-tov9.
d/xa 8e /cat Xwcrt? iraprjv 6 ^Sv/oa/cdcrto? ej^cwi' oTrXtras
^ See p. 257^. ^ Sc. outwi/, gen. abs. ^ otoy Tf, «5/^, jiossible.
318 THE beginner's GREEK BOOK.
TpLaKocrLOV<;, kol ^o^aCveros 6 'Aya/ca? e^^wz^ OTrXtra?
Xi^iovs. Koi ivravOa Kvpo<; l^iracnv koI apudfjiop^
T(x)v 'FXXyjvcop iiroLTjo'ev iv rw TTapaSeucra)^ kol iyevovTO
01 (Tvp.TravTe^^ OTrXirat^ p^ev pvpioi koX ^tXtot, TreXra-
crraX ^ Se a/>t<^t ^ rov^ hicr\ikiov<^,
iK-^ipo), Jla^ [tear]. • pass, of viKao), be con-
Seppa, -arog, to, hide (epi- quered.
dermis). avTpov, cave. Lat. an-
Kpepdvvvpi, hang up^ sus- truin.
pend. oLKoSopeo), build [Se/xcj,
T^rrcto/xat, rjTTija'opaL, tjt- build\ Lat. aedijicb.
Tiqpai, rjTTTJOrjv, used as
a. Give examples of the review syntax.
^ Supply tiie object of viK^tras.
2 Supply the predicate of Trrjyai.
^ Eng. derivative ?
* oi (TVfiTravTes, subject, the whole body.
^ Pred. nom. with iyevero.
* d/x0i with a numeral is a preposition like us (711, N. 2). The total
is Ijere given in round numbers.
LESSON LXVL
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT
THEMES. — PERIPHRASTIC FORMS.
Review 189, 1, 2, 3, obs. ; 190, 191, 192, 193, 194,
1, 2, 3, 4; Lesson XXIX., noting 325; 521, 545, 574,
650, 697.
757. Conjugate the perfect middle system of the
following (836, 837, 838, 839, 840, 841): kcXcvo),
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 319
KeKekeva-jxaL ; XeiVw, XekeififiaL ; TaTTco, TerayfJiaL ;
TTeWo}, TreVetcr/xat ; dyyeXko), ^yyeX/xai ; (j)aLvojy ttc-
(JyacrfxaL ; Kpivo), KeKpifiai, KeKpuaai, etc.
Observe that : 1. The rules for euphony of consonants (194,
etc.) apply to the concurrence of the consonants of the stem and
endings; cr is dropped between two consonants (325, end).
2. The third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect indica-
tive are formed respectively by the perfect participle and elac
and '^(rav ^ (325). 3. When a liquid verb drops v iu its per-
fect middle system, it is inflected like a vowel verb ; but when
V of the stem is not dropped it becomes cr before /jl, and is
retained before all other endings, wecfyao-fiai, etc.
758. The perfect subjunctive and optative active are
more frequently formed by the perfect active participle
with CO and etrjp than by the forms in co and ot/xt of
the paradigms (553, 554); as, XeXvAcwg c3, XeXvKcos
a. In a similar way the perfect and pluperfect indicative
active are sometimes expressed by tlie perfect active participle
and eliil; as, eKireinaiKOTe^; rjcrav (325, end). The future per-
fect active of most verbs is expressed by the perfect participle
and eao/jLai.
759. Periphrastic Fniiire.
A periphrastic future is formed by the verb fieWco,
intend, he on the point of, and the present or future (or,
rarely, the aorist) infinitive to express the future act as
immediately intended or expected: fieWoj rjKeiv, I in'
tend to coine.
1 The third plural is sometimes found in -arat and -aro.
320 THE beginner's greek book.
760. The agent with the perfect and pluperfect passive
is sometimes expressed by the dative : ttolvS' rjfuv irape-
(TKevao-raL, all things have been prepared hy us (p. ISO^).
761. Conjugate 1. The first perfect system of \toi,
KeXevojy dyyeXXco; Kpivoi, KeKpuKa; fidWco, ^e/SXv/Ka.
2. The second perfect system of irefiTro), XeiiTcx), dyo),
Tpenco, arpi^o}. 3. The perfect middle system of Xto),
dpTTat^oi, rpiira), rp^co, dOpoi^co^ Trefiiro), TreVe/x/xat ^
(7re7r€/x/x-/;tat) ; irpdrTQ), dyo).
762. EXERCISES.
I. 1. fxeXXovcTL TovTo TToidv. 2. ^ Kpioio^ d^eaTTJ-
fet. 3. ol crTparr)yol crvveiXiq^xixevoL rjcrcLv. 4. <^iXo9
'r)ixiv ouSet? XeXeixjjeTaL. 5. dyopdv ovSeU en Trape^eiv ^
€fxeXXep. 6. ol Se irpos tovto Kvpcp TerayfiivoL elaiv,
7. ore S' efo) rov heivov yivoivTo, ttoXXoI avTov dne-
XeiTTOv. 8. ol arparicoTai Tavra rjyyiXKaai irpos
Kvpov. 9. ipcDTa el tJSt] dTroKeKpivrai ol "EXXrjve<s.
10. Tcov dXXcov ■)(^p'r)ixdTO)v rd irXelcrTa hi-qpTrao-pLeva
rjcrav. 11. ol he Trec^acr/xeVoi elcrXv tojv Xo)(^ay(t)v Kal
rcov (TTpaTy)ya)v dpicTToi. 12. tojv ottXcdv toU crrpa-
Ti(DTai<; TToXXd ein dfia^cov tjkto kol vnolvyicov,
13. iveTvy)(avov Td(j)poL<; vSaro? irXripea-iv oJ?^ pLT)
SvvaaOaL StaySaiVetz/ dvev yecfyvpcjp ' dXX' eiToiovvTO Ik
T(x)v SevSpcov d Tfcrav iKTreirTajKora.
^ When fifi or yy would be brought before fi, the first consonant is
dropped (p. 219i).
^ With this exception the future infinitive is regularly used only in in-
direct discourse to represent the future indicative (723).
^ a)s is sometimes used for wore to express result, rarely purpose.
PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF CONSONANT THEMES. 321
II. 1. Very many were likely ^ to see him. 2. The
liorsemeii had been drawn up on the right. 3. He
marches on with all of his army drawn up in battle
array. 4. The soldiers have been drawn up by my
brother. 5. The messengers have been sent back and
Chirisophus with them. 6. The station was near
where they intended to halt.
763. VOCABULARY.
vScjp, -aT09, TO, icater [Lat. e^^w, adv., outside ; w. gen.,
unda^ hydr-ant, hydro- ivifJio?.tt, heyond [exotic,
gen, WATER, wet]. * exoteric].
avevy prep., without, w. gen.
764. R. dp-, ar-, fit^ join. dp-€-<rK-<o, fit^ suit ^please ;
ap-i-o-Tos, -07, -ov^ ^\\\x, fittest, best ; dpO-jid-s, 6 {dp + ^)?
bond, friendship ; dpi6-[x6-s {dp -{- l+ 0), series, number,
numbering ; dp-|JLa, -ar-os, to, chariot, team ; dp^-d/iafa,
-779 (cf. d/xa and R. dy- [513]), covered carriage ; dp-c-ii],
-179, fitness, goodness, valor.
ar-s, ar-ti-s, f., skill, art; in-er-s, adj. (ars), itnskil-
fid, inactive ; ar-tu-s, adj., close, naiTOiv ; ar-ma, -orum,
n., armor, arms ; ar-mo, to arm.
Arm, RIME (rhyme) ; arithmetic, harmony, aristo-
cracy, log-arithm.
765* Cyrus continues his March to Ca3rster Plain. There Epyaxa,
the Cihcian Queen, supplies him with the Money required
for the Payment of his Troops.
Review 244, 246, 247, 201, 369, 5; 756.
10. 'Ez/T€i}^€j' i^eXavveu crTaOfJiov<; Svo irapacrdyya^
8e/ca €is IJeXra?, iroKiv olKovfieprjj/, ipTavd* ifxeipep
21
322 THE beginner's greek book.
7}fX€pa<; rpei? • eV at? BevCas 6 'Apfca? tol Avfcaia^ eOvae
/cat aywva iOrjKe'^ iOecopet Se top dyatva kol Kvpo<;.
ivT€v9ev e^ekavvei cTTadfxov^ Bvo Trapacrdyya^; SoiSe/ca
et9 KepafJL(op dyopdv, irokiv olKovfjievrjv, ia)(dT7)v irpos
Tjj MvcrCa X^P^'
1 1 . 'lEivrevdev e^ekavvei crraOfJiOv^ rpeL<; Trapacrdyyas
rpidKovra ets Kavarpov TreBiov, irokiv oLKovfievrjp,
ivTavO' efjueupev rjixepas irivTe * koX toI<; crrpartwrai?
(o(f>eL\eTO fJLLaOo^ irkeov^ rj Tpicov p.7)v(x)v^^ koI ttoX-
Xct/cts toWe? cttI ra? dvpas dTrrJTOvv. 6 Se eXTrtSa?
Xeycov ^ Surjye koI 8^Xo§ '^p dvLMfxevos ' ov yap rjv irpo^
Tov Kvpov TpOTTOv e^ovTa ^ fJLT) dTToSiSovai.
12. 'Ej/rau^a d(j)LKP€lTaL 'ETTuafa rj Svevpecnos yvvrj
TOV KlXlkojv /SacriXeiw? napd Kvpov ' kol ekiyero Kvpco
Sovvai ^/37;/xara TroXXa. rfj 8' ovp^ crrpaTia Tore
dirihoiKe Kvpo? fJucrOov rerTdpcov ixtjvgjp^ el^e Se rf
KiXccrcra /cat (l>v\aKr)P irepl avTr)p KtXt/ca? /cat
'AcTTrej/Stov?.
Oecopeo), View, witness. dirairia}, ask frorri^ demand,
ea-xaro^,, -t), -op, farthest ; Stayo), iead on, continue,
i(TxdTr)p Trpd?, the last dpldco, grieve, trouble,
on the road to.
^ Syntax of ra AvKaia ?
2 Prin. parts ?
' TrXeov, indeclinable adj. == TrXeSvav.
* Syntax?
^ See 244, continued to express hopes (of paying tliem).
* exom-a, agrees with omitted subject of d7ro8i86vai (728, N. 8 ; 780, 2),
token he had money.
"^ ovVf however that might bsi at any rate, etc.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL AND O)?. 323
LESSON LXVII.
IRREG-ULAR VERB olSa. — SIMPLE SEN-
TENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER
OTL AND w9.
Eeview 436, 437, 438, 1, 2, 3; 439, 443, 561, 565,
620, 6Q6, 668, 721, 1, 2, 3 ; 723, 1, 2, 3.
766. olSa [18-, elS-, cf. elSov (698, 4)], hiow, an ir-
regular verb in fjn, is a second perfect formed without
reduplication, with present meaning ; the pluperfect has
the force of the imperfect. Learn the inflection of olSa
(857). Observe that olSa has mainly the -/xt inflection,
and that the subjunctive and optative are formed upon
the stem elhe- ; that in the forms beginning with 18-, S
of the theme becomes <t.
767. Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse after otl
and &)?.
Examine the following :
1. Trepi (nrov8o)v rJKOfjiep, ive have come concerning a
treat?/.
2. [o) 01 Se \iyov(TL on Trepi (TttovScov rJKOvaLv, thci/
say that they have come concerning a treaty.
(J)) 01 S' eXeyov on Trepl (movScDv '^Kouev, they
said that they had come concerning a treaty.
3. y] 6809 eb-rai Trpog ^acrikia fxeyav, the expedition
ivill be against the greai Jdng.
324 THE beginner's greek book.
4. Kvpo^ ekeyev on 7) 6809 €(Tolto 7rpo<; ^aonXea
fieyav, Cyrus said that the expedition would he against
the great king (567, end).
5. eTTopevofjieOa av iirl /Baa-uXea, we would be advan-
cing against the king,
6. etTrej^ ort iiropevovTo av eTri fiacnXea, he said that
they would he advancing against the king.
7. ov TovT av Tt? Trpd^eue, no one could do this.
8. €LTrev wg ou tovt av rts TTpd^eie, he said that no
one could do this.
9. TL ^ovXeaOe ; what do you want?
10. {a) KXeapxo^; epoira rt (or on) fiovXecrOe, Ok-
archies asks what you want.
{!)) KXeap-^os rjpayTiqcre tl (or on) f^ovXoivTOy
Clearchus asked what they ivanted.
11. TL TToiTjcro) ; ivhat shall I do ?
12. rjiropei tl TroLirjcreLe, he ivas at a loss tvhat to do,
a. Observe that 1, 3, 5, etc., give simple sentences in- the
form of statements ; that 2, 4, 6, etc., givp these sentences with
OTL and 0)9 quoted indirectly.
b. Observe that after primary tenses the leading verb retains
its own mood and tense, 2 {a) ; that after secondary tenses it is
regularly changed to the same tense of the optative (578); that
it may be retained in the original mood and tense for emphasis
(579, a).
c. Observe that the change of the person is the same as in
722, obs. e.
d. Observe that if the optative refers to the future, it is
translated by woidd, etc., otherwise by the past tense of the
indicative.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTL AND CO?. 325
e. Observe that the, secondary tenses of the indicative with av^
5, 6, and all optatives, 1 , 8, are kept unchanged in mood ; and
that if the original had av it is retained.
f. Observe that the principles of changing simple sentences
apply to questions and to the interrogative subjunctive, 10, ^ ;
12 ; that the interrogative pronoun may be changed in indirect
questions to the general relative ^ (443).
768. Indi7'ect Quotations after on and w?. Indirect
Questions. Interrogative Subjunctive.
Rule.
1. After primary tenses, each verb of the simple sen-
tence retains both the mood and the tense of the direct
discourse. After secondary tenses, each indicative or
subjunctive of the direct may be either changed to the
same tenses of the optative, or be retained in the origi-
nal mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the
indicative in unreal conditions (668) and all optatives
remain unchanged.
2. Indirect questions and interrogative subjunctives
quoted indirectly, follow the rule for simple sentences.
3. The negative of the direct discourse is regularly
retained in the indirect form, but indirect questions in-
troduced by el, trhether, may take yLrf.
a. After a past tense the idea of the dependent verb is made
more remote, and the optative is used to represent this remoteness
and greater uncertainty. The optative also disclaims the respon-
sibility of the truth of the statement, thought, or feeling of some
other person presented (567).
^ This applies to all relative words and interrogative adverbs.
326 THE beginner's greek book.
h. The imperfect and pluperfect generally remain unchanged,
but sometimes they become tlie present and perfect optative.
c. on emphasizes the assertion rather than tlie fact.
d. If the original had av, it is retained.
769. Of the three common verbs of saying, —
a. (fyrjixL regularly takes the infinitive.
b. eliTop takes otl or wg with the indicative 01
optative.
c. Xeyo) allows either construction, but in the active
it regularly takes on or cog.
d. Both €17701^ and Xeyco in the sense of command,
propose, etc., take the object infinitive like Kekevo).
770. Sometimes the Greek, like the English, changes
the tense instead of the mood, as the present indicative
to the imperfect, and the perfect to the pluperfect:
TjcrOeTO oTi TO (TTpdrevfJLa iv KtXt/cta yv (for ecrri or eurj,
728, N. 10).
771. EXERCISES.
I. 1. OVK oTSa 0770)9 Tt9 OLP oLTTo^evyoi. 2. TjpcoTTjae
ei^ TL irapayyiWoi. 3. /cat iXeyeTO S€7)d7]vaL^ rj
KiXicraa Kvpov eViSeifai to crTpaTevfJia avTrj. 4. ovk
ideXco i\0eiv SeStw?^ fxr) XajScop fJie Slktjv eTnOrj.
6. a^LovcTLV elSepai tl (Tt^iciv Icrrat, iav KpaTTJacocnv.
6. TrJ 8' vaTepaia rJKev ayyeXo? Xeycov oti XeXoiirco';
€L7] %vevv6cn<; tol aKpa. 7. ovrot iXeyov otl Kvpos
fxev TeOv7)K€v,^ ^ApLOLOS 8e 7re(j>evya)<; elrj. 8. iXeye otl
1 61, whether. 2 708, n. 4. » See S^i'So.
* Force of the present. Why retained in the indicative ? One mood
may be changed while another remains unchanged.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER OTt AND W?. 8.27
ravTTjv TTjv Tjixepav TTepiybeiveiev av avrov^, el fieWouep
rJK€LP. 9. oTTw? 8e KOL elBrjre et? olov ep^eaOe dywi/a,
VjLLct? etS(U9 ScSafw. 10. ^QpamqcTe Kvpop tl^ /BovXowo
Tjfuv ^prjorO at. 11. €z^ tovtoj ^ KXe'ap^o? rJKe, kol rfpco-
T'Y]aev el yjSrj dnoKeKpifjievoL elev, 12. rw dpSpl ov av
eXrjcrOe ireicrofjiaL, Iva elSrJTe otl kol dp^eaSaL ev ctti-
crra/xai.^ 13. et? 8e St^ eiTre,* €i /at) SlSoly) ravrat i^ye-
jLtdt'a airerz^ Kvpov octtls 8ta c^tXtas ttJ? ^((upas dird^eL.^
XL 1. He asked what the watchword was. 2. You
did not know what jou were doing. 3. But he did
not make known what he would do. 4. He knew that
he had the middle of the Persian army. 5. Silanus
said to Cyrus that the king would not fight within ten
days. 6. Some reported that they intended to attack
them.
772. VOCABULARY.
(Tvv'OrjfjLa, -aro?, to, tuatch- strong, rule over, conquer
imrd [rt^T^fLt] . (696) .[^^emo-crat] .
epofxai, Attic only in fut. olSa, 2 pf. with pres. force,
ipTJa-ofiai, and 2 aor. knotv, understand.
iQpofjLYjv, ask, inquire (cf. TrepL-fievco, wait atvund, re*
epcDrdo)).^ main, wait for (603).
Kpareo), KpaTTJacoy etc., be
Xeyo), 1. to say, in a wide sense, Lat. died. 2. to speak,
in general. 3. to speak with art, as the orator.
1 Cog. ace. (261, a ; p. 1458). 4 gee 769, d.
2 Sc. xp6v<o ; cf. €v als (765, § 10). » Explain the mood.
* Know AoWf etc.
328 THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK.
^rifjLt, used in conversation and replies, said /, said he,
etc. It has besides the notion of affirmation, to assert,
affirm,
eiTTop, used with Xeyw and (prjixC to complete them. But
it frequently retains its own meaning, advise, command,
propose (769, d).
773. R. (TTpa-, ster-, stra-, stla-, strew, spread, o-xpa-
Tos, o? (in encamped army, host; aTparo-TTeho-v, to
[irihov, ground), camping ground^ camp ; crTpaT07re-Sev-co,
encamp ; o-r/)aT-7;yd-?, 6 (cf. R. ay (513)), leader of an
armg, general; arpaT-rjyea), lead, command, he general ;
CTpanqyia, -d?, office of general, generalship ; o-rpar-ia,
-a?, armg ; aTpaTioi-T7}<;, -ov, soldier ; o-rpaTev-co, serve
in the army, make an expedition; crTpaTev-fjia, -ar-09,
TO, an armament, army.
ster-n-6, spread oid ; stra-tn-s, adj., stretched out;
stel-la, -ae, f., star; la-tu-s, (stla-tus), adj., hi^oad,
wide; lo-c-u-s, -i, ra. (stlo-cus), place; stru-d, place to-
gether, arrange, build ; in-stru-mentu-m, an implement,
instrument.
Star, straw, strew ; strat-agem, strat-egic, strat-
egist, strat-egy.
774* Continuing his March Cyrus arrives at Tyriaeum, where,
at the Eequest of Epyaxa, he holds a Review of his
Troops.
Review Q^, 106, Lesson XV., 235, 249, 369, 3 ; 765.
13. ^^vT€vOev S' i^eXavvei crra^/xov? Suo Trapacrdyya^
Se/ca et?'* Svfji^pLov, ttoXlp olKovfieviqv. ivravOa tjv
irapa^ rrjv 68ov Kpijvr) rj MiSov KaXovfiepr)^ tov ^pv
READING LESSON. 329
y(t)v fiacn\eoi<;^ e(\> fj Xeyerat MtSas tov Xdrvpov
OrjpevcraL olvo) Kepdaa^^ avnji/.
. 14. 'FiVrevOev i^eXavveu aTa9fjLOV<; Svo Trapacrdyyas
SeKa et? Tvptaiov, tt6\iv oLKovfjievyjv. ivTavOa ifieLvev
rjfJLepa^ rpei?. kol Xeyerau heiqSrjvai r) KtXtcrcra Kv-
pov^ CTrtSetfai to (rrpaTevfJia avrrj. fioyXofxevo^; ovv
iinSeL^aL i^iracriv TTotetrai iv tco TreSico twp 'EWijvcop
KOL T(x)v fiapfidpoiv. 15. iKeXevcre Se tov<; "EXXryj^a?,
w? p6fjio<; ^ avTOL<; ei? p^d^-qv^ ovto) Ta)(6rjvai koL cTTrjvai,
avvrd^ai^ Se eKaarov tovs iavrov. ird^Orjcrav ovv
iirl rerrdpcov ' ^ el^e 8e to pev Se^Lov Mevcov kol ol
(Tvv avTcp. TO 8e evoivvpov KXe'ap^o? koI ol eKeivoVy
TO Se pecrov ol aXXoi crTpaTrjyoL.
16. ^^Oecopeu ovv 6 Kvpo? rrpcoTov pep tovs jBap^d-
pov<; ' ol Se TTaprjXavvov TeTaypevoi KaT tXas kol fcara
Td^€LS' etra 8e TOv<;''EX\.7)vas, irapeXavvoiv e<^' dppaTo^
Koi 7) KiXLoro-a i(f> appapd^rj^;.
^dTvpo<;, the well known lXr],-r}<;,iroop, hand ; KaT
satyr, Sileniis, iXa? kol /caret rd^ei^, hij
KepdvvvpL, mix. troops and hj companies.
v6po<;, custom, usage. elra, then, thereupon.
a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this Lesson (141, 142).
^ Tvapa rrjv ohov.floicing along the road side.
2 Eorce of this participle ? ^ Syntax ?
* See 708, n. 4. ^ Explain the use of the mood.
* eTTi Teirdpcop {avbpcou), on] jjbu?' deep.
330 THE beginner's greek book.
LESSON LXVIIT.
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.^
VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
Review 82, 83, 119, 235, 237, 238, 239, 244, 245,
247, 373, 648, §7; 711, n. 5, 759.
775. Participles in Indirect Discourse,
Examine the following :
1. Kvpo? eV KikiKia rjv, Cyrus was in Cilicia.
2. rjKovcre Kvpoi^ iv KiXiKua ovra, he heard that
Cyrus ivas in Cilicia.
3. Ku/309 redprjKevy Cy^nis is dead.
4. ovK -^Seaav Kvpov TeOvrjKora, they did not know
that Cyrus tvas dead.
5. 0opv/3ov TJKovcre Sua tcov rd^ecov lovto^, he heard
a noise going through the i^anks.
6. avTco Kvpov arparevovTa irpwTO^ TJyyeiXa, I first
announced to him that Cyrus tvas maldng an expedilion.
7. laOi ay ado f; <^v, know that you are h?^ave.
8. (njvoiSa ifxavTM ixfjevcrpLevo^; (or i^evcrfjievco) avrov,
I am conscious of having deceived him.
9. (j)avepos S' '^v Tretpcofjievof; -^prjadat toI*; ^pT^/xao't
(for TreipcjfjiaL ^prj(TOai)y hid it was obvious that he sti^ove
to bring into use their wealth.
a. Observe that in 2, 4, Q, 7, etc., the verbs take the parti-
ciple in indirect discourse.
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 331
h. Observe that the participle in indirect discourse represents
the corresponding tense of the direct ; that it is put in the accu-
sative agreeing with the object of a verb (sometimes called the
subject of the participle) to express a fact.
G. Observe that this participle must be distinguished from the
participle after verbs of perceiving, finding, etc. (244)^ as in 5,
which represents the actual perception of the action by the
senses ; that here verbs of- hearing take the participle in the
genitive.
d. Observe that when the object of the verb is the same as
the subject, the participle is attracted to the case of the sub-
ject, 7.
e. Observe that in 8, with avvoiha and the dative of the re-
flexive pronoun, the participle may be either in the nominative
or dative.
f. Observe that in 9, with 897X09 diii^ <l>av€p6<; elfjLi, the
participle is used personally (247) in indirect discourse, similar
to the personal construction with Xeyerat (725).
Rule.
776. With many verbs of perceiving, hearing, Jcnow-
ing, and ayyiWo), announce, the participle stands in
indirect discourse, and conforms to the rules of the in-
finitive (723, 1, 2) in regard to the tenses, the uses of av,
and the negatives.
777. With verbs and phrases of appearing and show-
ing, such as (j)aLV(o, c^atVo/xat, 817X09 elfxi, and ^avep6<;
elfjii, etc., the participle may be used personally in indi-
rect discourse.
778. Most of these verbs may also take a clause with
oTt or COS in indirect discourse, or the infinitive ; but
332 THE beginner's greek book.
with the latter there is usually a distinction of meaning :
the participle regularly denotes a fact (775, b).
a. ol8a and eiriara^aL with the participle mean know that,
with the infinitive, hiow how ; as, dpxeo-Oac eTrCaTafiai, I know
how to be ruled (771, 12).
779 . Predicate referring to the omitted Subject of an
Infinitive.
Examine the following :
1. Set v/xa? elt'ai aya^ov?, 7/oii must be brave,
2. irreOvfieL yeveadai avrjp, he desired to become a
man.
3. irapayyeWei rco KXedp^oy Xa^ovn yJKeuv oaov rjv
avT^ (TTpdTeviia, he ordered Clear chus to come uith ivhat-
ever army he had.
Rule.
780. 1. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted
because it is the same as the subject of the leading verb
(121), predicate nouns and adjectives are assimilated to
the preceding nominative.
2. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted be-
cause it is the same as the object of the leading verb,
predicate nouns and adjectives are generally assimilated
to the case of this object (121), but sometimes stand in
the accusative agreeing with the omitted subject (728,
§ 1, N. 8; 765, N. 6).
*
a. These principles apply also to a predicate with wv, or with
a participle of a copulative verb (775, 7, 8).
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 333
781. The personal and impersonal Construction of
Verbals in t€o<;.
Examine the following :
1. TTora/xo? 8' aXXo9 rjfXLv iaTL Sia^areo?? hit some
other river must be crossed {is to be c?'ossed) by us.
2. r^ikiv §€ Trdvra TrotT^rea, but everything must be done
by us.
3. avrot? ireiaTeov iaTL tco KXeap^w, they must obey
Clearchus (equivalent to avTovs Set ireideaOaL tco KXe-
oipxcp). Cf. eis parendum est Clearcho.
a. Observe that : 1. The verbal adjective in reo^, \, 2^ is
used personally in agreement with the subject of the sentence,
like any predicate adjective. 2. The copula elfjii is often omitted
as in 2. 3. This verbal has the force of the Latin participle in
das, and takes the agent in the dative.
b. Observe that : 1. The verbal in 3, is used impersonally,
being in the neuter nominative singular (sometimes plural), with
ecrri' expressed or understood. 2. xllthough still passive, as is
the Lat. -dum est, it is practically active in sense and governs the
same case as the verb in the active or middle would take. 3. The
expression is equivalent to hel, one must, with the infinitive, and
takes the agent in the dative (sometimes in the accusative).
c. Observe that the subject of the personal construction be-
comes the object of the impersonal, hence the latter emphasizes the
action rather than the person or thing ; that verbals of transitive
verbs admit either construction, but those of intransitive verbs
the impersonal construction only.^
Rule.
782. 1 . The verbal in Tio<i in the personal construc-
tion is passive in sense, and expresses necessity, like the
^ In Latin this is confined to intransitive verbs.
334 THE beginner's greek book.
Latin participle in dus. The agent is expressed by the
dative.
2. The verbal in the impersonal construction is in
the neuter of the nominative singular, with eVrt ex-
pressed or understood. The expression is equivalent to
Set with the infinitive.
It is active in sense, and takes the same case as the
verb would take.
The agent is regularly expressed by the dative.
a. The negative of the verbal adjective in both personal and
impersonal construction is ov.
783. EXERCISES.
I. 1. ravra ifiol ov TTOirjriov icTiv. 2. /^eXXet
<j)v\aKa<; (j)v\d^€LV. 3. oprj vfiiv opare ovra Tropevrea,
4. TovTo S' iiroUi iK tov ^(aXeTros el^at. 5. u/ict?
ho^ere ayaOoi elvai ap^avre^ tov Sia/SaiveLv. 0. 8rj-
Xos yv oioixevof; ravTrj rfj rjfjiepa ixa^eicrdai ySacrtXeia.
7. Koi iTTefjLxjje riva ipovvra on crvyyevicrdaL avrco
XPTlt^^- ^- '^^^ avTol i^ovkevovTO el tol crK€vo<l>6pa
ivTavOa ayoivro rj aiTioiev iirl to (TTpaTOTreSov. 9. TpL-
7]peL<; ^ rjKOve TreptTrXeovo'a? an 'Iwi^ia? et? KiXiKuav.
10. 6 8' OLTreKpivaTo otl olkovol ^A/SpoKOfiav i^Opov
dvSpa inl Tw EiV(j)poiTrj Troraji^ etpau, 11. /cat icos
fjxvofxev avTov cTKeTTTeov iaTU otto)? dcrc^aXeo-rara fxivci}-
fxev. 12. TTopevTeov'^ 8' rnuv tov<; irpayrovs crTaOfJLOv<;^
^ Inflected like TrXrjprjs (335), but has recessive accent in the gen. of the
dual and plural (821).
2 Sc. eVr/.
3 Cog. ace. (261).
PARTICIPLES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 335
CU5 av SwatfieOa ^aKpoTOLTovf; ^ Iva w? TrXelcrrov ^ airo-
a'JTacrdcjjjLev tov /BaatXiKov (Trparevjaaro?.
II. 1. We must consider how we shall have provi-
sions. 2. I know that right hands have been given by
us. 3. Clearchus formerly was manifestly plotting
against us. 4. Eor I am conscious to myself of having
deceived him in all things. 5. But when Ariaeus per-
ceived that Cyrus had fallen, he fled with all the army
which he commanded.
784. VOCABULARY.
TpLT]pr]<;,Sid'y, Jitied ; rj rpt- ovv-oiSay share in knowl-
yjprjs {vav<;), trireme, edge, he conscious.
tvar vessel (821). xRV^^* (XPV^')^ tvant, de-
irepi-7T\io), sail around. sire, need.
hel, it is a duty, it is necessary. Sei regularly takes the
infinitive subject accusative to exipress.duty, oMi^ation.
With the dative instead of the accusative it more fre-
quently has the notion of need, Lat. debeo, ^prj has
more reference to tise, utility ; it is useful., it is of
advantage, Lat. oportet
785. R. TL', pay. tC-ci), pay honor, value ; ti-jjlii, -%,
honor, worth, value; d-Tlfjio-<;, -o-v, tvithout honor, dis-
honored; drtjLtct^w, dishonor; ^i\6-Tlixo-^,-o-v{ci. <^i\of;,
797), loving honor, ambitious ; Ti/x-to-9, -a, -o-v, vahed,
honored ; Tlfid-cj, value, honor ; rlpL-oipo-^, -o-v (fopo-q,^
^ a)s . . . fiaKpordrovs, as long as possible.
^ m TvkeioTov^ as far as possible ; cf. 384, n. 2 ; 640, 4. Here there is
an ellipsis of some form of hvvayiai. Cf. as in the preceding n. (1).
^ Cf. npa.(0.
336 THE beginner's greek book.
watche?'), upholding honor, avenging ; rifiajp-Cd, -a?, help,
vengeance ; TlfjLcjpe-o), succor, avenge.
timo-cracy, timo-cratic, Timo-thy.
786. Mock Charge of the Greeks. Cyrus sends the Queen home
escorted by Menon, and continues his March to Dana.
Review 141, 142, 239, 261, &; 285, 357, 621, 721,
2; 723,1; 774-
17. 'E7r€t8i7 8e Traz/ra? TrapyjXacrey crrT^cra? ro dpfia
irpo " TTJ^ (jxiXayyo^, 7re/xi//a9 liiyprjra rov ipfirjvea irapa
Tovs (TT paT7]yov<; tcov 'J^XXijvojv iKeXevae Trpo^aXeaOaL
ra orrXa /cat iiTi'^ojprjo'ai oXy)v ttjv i^dXayya. ol Se
ravra TTpoelTrov toI<^ crrpaTtwrat? ' koI iirel io-aXTTiy^e,
irpo^aXXoiievoi rd oirXa iirrjecyav. cac Se tovtov Oolttov
TTpdiovTOiv ^ avv Kpavyfj dno rov avrofxaTov Spofxos
iyivero Tol<i aTparicoTais^ cttI ra? (rKr)vd<;,
18. Twv he ^apfidpcDv^ (fio^o^^ ttoXv?, koL tj t€
KiXio-cra ec^vyez/ iirl Trj<s dpfxafjid^r]^ koL ol e/c rrj^
dyopd<;^ KaTaXnrovTe^; rd oivia e^vyov' ol Se "EXXrjves
(Tvv yiXoiri evri ras CKrjvds rjXOov. r) Se KiA.tcro'a
iSovcra rr)v Xaixnporrjra kol ry]v rd^iv rov (rrparevfxa-
T09 ^ iOavfiaae. Kvpo<; Se rjcrOrj rov Ik r(x)v ^^XXtjvmv ^
ct5 rov? l3apfidpov<; (j>6/3ov IScov.
1 9. 'Eprev9ev i^eXavveu crra^/xov? r/oet? Trapaadyya^s
eiKOcnv et9 'Ikovlov t"^? ^pvyia<; ttoXlv icr^dr-qv. eV-
ravda efxeive rpeZ^ T^/xepa?. evrevOev i^eXavveu Sta ttJ?
AvKaovLa<? crraOfJLOVs irivre 7rapaa'dyya<; rpidKovra.
ravTTjv rrjv ^dipav eTrerpexpe hiapTrdcrai '^ rots '^EXXtjo'lv
0)5 TToXefjLLav ovcrav.^
20. ^Evrevdev Kvpos rrjv KiXicra'av et? rrjp ILiXiKiav
dTTOTTefXTTeL rrjv rax^crrrjv oBov ' ^ koI avpeirefixjjep avrrj
READING LESSON. 337
arpaTLcora^ ov<s MeVwi^ el;)(e koI avrov Mepcova' Kupo?
8e fxeTOL TO)v dkXojv i^ekavvei Sia KaTTTraSo/cta? araO-
/A0U9 Terrapas Trapao-dyyas ei/cocri kol irivre irpos
Adva, ttoXlv OLKovpLevriVy fji€yd\.r)v kol evSaufJiova.
ivravda ifieij/ap rjixepas rpels ' ii^ d)^ Kvpos aTreKTeivev
dpSpa Uepcrrjp M.eya^epv7}v , (jyoLPiKicrTrjp ^aaiXeiov,
/cat erepov riva twp virdp^ajv, aLTLaaafxepos eTTi^ov-
Xeveup avTco.
ipjjirjpevs, -eo)^, 6, interpre- TnyKT7]<;) sounded the
ter (hermeneut). charge.
IT po'l^dWo), throw foi'ivard ; avro/xaro?, -17, -01^ (avrd?),
7rpo/3a\€a6aL rd oVXa, self-prompted; aTro tov
advance their arms for an avrofjidrov, vohmtarilf/.
attack (Eng., charge bay- /cara-XetTro), leave behind y
onets). abandon.
i7TL-)(a)peo), advance. ajpto^;, -d, -op, for sale ; rd
o\o9, -17, -OP, whole, entire ; ^pta, ivares.
6Xr)p rrjp (j)dXayya, the yeXw?, '(aTo<^, 6, laughter.
phalanx in a body [cath- XafjiTrpoTrjs, -r)To^, rj, bril-
olic]. liancj/, splendor.
(TaXTrit,(x), sound the trwnpet; (J)olpIkl(ttij<;, -ovy wearer of
impers., eVet icrdXTny^e, the purple.
when the trumpeter {aaX- atrtao/xat, charge, accuse.
a. Give special attention to the prepositions of this lesson.
^ So. avTMv, gen. absol.
^ Syntax ? TAe soldiers broke info a run ttpon the camp, but below iiri
ras (TKTjvas rjXdov, dispersed to their own tents.
8 Syntax? ^ gc. ^i/.
^ ot cK r^y dyopas i(^vyov ; = oi iv rrj ayn^a efpvyov €K tjJs dynpas.
^ Cf. 79. /j ; TOV . . . (\i6^ov, the terror with which the Greeks inspired
the barbarians.
7 See 267, 13. » Sc. xpoi/o) : cf. p. 327^.
22
338 THE beginner's greek book.
LESSON LXIX.
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX
SENTENCES. — ELLIPSIS, ETC.
Review 720, 721, 1, 2, 3; 722, 723, 1, 2, 3 ; 724,
725, 752, 5, (1), (2); 755, 5, 8, 12; 768, 1, 2, 3, a, h,
c,d; 769, a, h, c, d-, 11^, 776, 777, 778, 780, 1, 2, a.
787. Indirect Quotation of Complex Sentences.
Rule.
1. When a complex sentence is quoted indirectly,
the leading verb foUovi^s the rules for simple sentences
(723, 1 ;• 768, 1 ; and 776).
2. After primary tenses, dependent verbs retain the
same mood and tense ; after secondary tenses, they may
be either changed to the same tense of the optative or re-
tained in their original mood and tense ; but dependent
secondary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged
(723, 3 ; 768, 2, 3, a).
a. "When a suhjunctive becomes optative, civ is dropped
(723, 3, a).
h. One verb may be changed to the optative^ while another
remains unchanged (771, 7).
788. Implied Indirect Discourse,
The rule for the change to the optative (787, 2)
applies also to all dependent clauses which express
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 339
indirectly the thoughts of another person. This con-
struction apphes especially to causal clauses expressing
another's reason (717, a), clauses depending upon final
clauses (755, 6, n. 5), upon the infinitive with verbs of
commanding, wishing, etc. (771, 13), or upon verbs of
emotion, tvonder, etc. : ol 8' ^Kreipov, et akoicroivTOy they
'pitied them if they were to he captured.
a. Upon this principle depends the use of the optative in
final clauses (579^ a), or after eoi? or irpiv, expressing past in-
tention, or expectation (708^ 8).
789. Ellipsis.
1. The subject is generally omitted when it is a pro-
noun of the first or second person, unless emphatic
(393).
2. The nominative of the third person is omitted
when it is implied in the context, and without emphasis :
LKavoiTaTo^ i(TTL €v TToielv, ov av ^ovXrjraL, he is most
able to heneftt ivhomcver he pleases.
3. When it is a general idea of persons : Xeyovcn,
they say.
4. When it is indefinite, or when the verb implies its
own subject. The verb is then said to be impersonal :
H'^XV^ Set, there is need of a battle ; fcaXw? e)^ei, it is
well; icrakiny^e, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet
(786, vocab.).
5. Verbs are called impersonal also that have an in-
finitive or clause as subject : Set, XP'^^ ^^ ^^ necessary, one
ought ; 8ok€l, it seems best, good, etc. (721, 1).
790. 1. The copulative verb is frequently omitted.
340 THE beginner's greek book.
especially in the forms eVrt and eto-t, and with such
words as BrjXo^, eroijxo^, Svi^ard?, wpa, dvdyKT), etc. :
(opa \iyeiv, it is time to speak (p. 288^; 786, N. 4).
2. Any verb may be omitted where it is i*eadily under-
stood from the context, especially the common verbs of
heing^ doing, saying : av re yap ''EWrjv el, kol rjixel^; (sc.
iajjih "EXXrjve^;), for you are a Greek ^ and so are ive
(892, 3; p. 287^ p. 30P).
791. EXERCISES.
1. 817X09 yap on rjjjilp eTTidrjcrei. 2. eSo/cet ovtm
rjSr) TTopevecrdaL. 3. rjSet Trepiyevofievo^ dv ^ tcjv
dvTKTTaCTlOiTO^Vy €t TOVTO yivOlTO. 4. dvdyKTJ St] fXOL
Ty Kvpov ^ikla ^prjcrOai. 5. OKTTe copa Xeyeiv on rt,?
yiypcocTKeL dpicTTOv elvai. 6. ef? 8e St^ elire, idv fiiq^e
TjyepLova 8t8a>, ctvvt drrecr 6 ai ^ rr}v ra^icrrrjv.^ 7. iOav-
p^at^ov on ovSapov Kvpo? (f)aLvoiTo ovh' aXXo? an avTov
ou8et9 7rap€L7). 8. rw KXedp^o) i/36a ayeiv to arpd-
revpa Kara piaov to tcov rro\epio)v^ otl eKel ^acrtXevs
evT). y. Kai rjpLV y av olo otl TavT eiroLei, et ecopa
r)pd<; peveiv TTapa(TKevat,opivov<;. 10. <^avepo<^ 8* tjv
KoXy €t T19 Ti dyaOov rj KaKov iroirjaeiev avTov, viKav
Treip(i)pevo<;. 11. iTriSeL^ev avTov otl irepl TrXeLO'TOv
ttoloIto, €l t(o (TTTeLaaLTO Kal €L Tco vTToa^oLTo TL^ pTjSep
xjjevSeaOaL. 1 2. ovS' ipel ovSels ws iyo) €a>9 pev dp Traprj
TL<; -^pcopaL, ineLSdv 8e diTLevaL ^ovXrjTaL, avXXa^cJV Kal
avTov<; KaK6)<; ttolo). 13. Kal ovk icfiacrav levaL, idv prj
rt9 avTov? ^pTjpaTa 8i8wj wcnrep^ rots TrpoTepoLS p€Td
1 Cf. 711, N. 5. '^ Sc, airou'?. 3 Syntax ?
* See 717, 788. « Sc. edwKe, as he had given it (790, 2).
INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 341
Kvpov apafiacTL irapa top narepa rov Kvpov, kol ravra ^
ovK iirl fjid^Tjp loPTOiP?
II. 1. He desired to live so long a time, until he
should surpass ^ his enemies. 2. He replied to Cyrus
that he would care that it would be well. 3. He said
that if they should obey him, they would be honored
more than the rest of the soldiers by Cyrus. 4. He
said that if he should be there, he desired to inflict pun-
ishment upon him. 5. He announced that if we had
not come, they should be marching against the king.
6. I said to him that he should justly gratify me, be-
cause I first announced that Cyrus was making an
expedition against him.
792. VOCABULARY.
fiekei, be a ca?'e to ; ifiol ^ovkofxac (^ovXtJ), to wish,
fieXeu, it is a care to me, be willing, of choice and
/ take care, see to it. preference after delib-
cnripho),.(nrei(TO), ecTreicra, eration.
offer a libation; mid., iOeXo), to wish, with more
make a treaty. reference to natural in-
ov^ap^ov, adv., nowhere. stinct ; may be used of
ojcr-Trep, conj., adv, like as, man, irrational animals,
fust as, as it were. etc.
Xprj^o), desire, long for.
793 • Cyrus enters Cilicia through the Mountain Pass, and arrives
at Tarsus.
Review 158, 212, 239, 314, a; 369, 5; 663, 758,
768, 1 ; 770, 776, 786.
^ And that too, sc. eiroirjaf. ^ Sc. avTwv. ^ Cf. 10, above.
342 THE beginner's greek book.
21. 'EvTev6ev ineLpcopTo elaj^dWeiv et?" tt^v KtXt-
Kiav' 7} Se elafioXr) tjv 6S65 a/iaftro9 opOia la^^vpcof;
/cat dfjLT])(avo<; elcrekOeiv crrparev/Aart/ el tl<; eKocikvev?
iXeyero Se Kal ^vivvecn^ eivai evrt tcov aKpwv (fyvkdr-
Tcop TTjv ela^okrjv ' St' o ifietvev rjjjbepav iv rco TreStw.
TTj S' vcTTepaia rJKev dyye\o<; Xeycov otl XeXotTTw? eir) ^
%v4vve(TL<^ rd aKpa, CTret rjcrSero on to re MeVwi^o?
crrpaTevfJia yjSr] ev KtXt/cta -^^^^ etcrw rwi' opecov, /cat ort
TpLy]peL<; rJKOve TrepnrXeovaa^^ oltt' *I(ovia<s ets KtXt/ctai^
ras AaKeSaifxovLCJv /cat auroi) Kupou.
22. Kvpo? S' ovp dve^T) inl tol opr) ovSevos kcoXvov-
T09^ /cat €tSe rag aKrjvd^ ov 01 KtXt/ce? iipvXaTTov,^
ivrevOev Se Kare^aivev et? irehiov jxeya /cat Kokovy
SevSpcov^ (TVfJLTrXeayv /cat d/xTreXwi^. opo9 S' avTO^
Trepte^et o^vpov /cat vxltrjXov Trdvrrj e/c dakdrrr]^ els
OdXarrav.
23. KarajSas Se Sta tovtov tov TreStov T^Xacre crraO-
lxov<; rerrapa?, Trapacrdyya^; irevTe /cat eiKocriVj et?
Tapcroifs, Trjs KtXt/cta? ttoXlv p.eyd\rjv /cat evSaifiova.
evTavOa rjcrav rd 'Zvevveo'LO^; jSacrtXeta rou KtXt/c<yf
jSacrtXeoj?* Sta fjiear)s Se T179 TrdXeco? /5et Trora/xo?
KvSi/o9 ovofxa,^ evpos Suo rrXeOpajv.
24. TavTT]!' TT^z^ TToXti' e^iXiTTov ol evoiKovvTe<; fxerd
^vevvecno<^ ets ^(opiov o^vpov iin rd oprj TrXrjv ol rd
KaTTrjXela ej^oz^re? * efxeuvap Se /cat ot Trapa tt7^' ddXar-
rav OLKovvTes ev SdXot? /cat eV 'Icrcrotg.
opOioq, -d, -o^', <s/^^jt?. elcr-ep)(0fiaL, go or co??2^ /w,
dixyj^oLvo^;, -ov, iinpi^actica- enter,
ble, impossible (710). hevhpov, tree.
IRREGULAR VERBS irjIXLy TjjXaL, K€LfXaL. 343
o-u/x-TrXewg, -cov, full, filled injjr)\6<?, -t], -op, high, lofty,
tvith (734). Ka7n)\eiov, to, stall, shop,
aft7reXo9, 17, vine, grape- inn [Lat. caupo, huck-
vine. ster, whence cheap^.
oxvpo';, -a, -6v, tenable, for-
tified hy nature.
a. Note the uses of prepositions of tliis lesson.
1 Syntax?
^ €K(a\vevy attempted action, trying to oppose (114, end).
^ Wliy the optative ?
* What mood would be expected here ?
6 Syntax? (783, 9).
<» See 755, 7. The imperfect, €(f)vXaTTov, expresses continued action
prior to that of the main verb, hence with pluperfect force, had been guard-
ing (cf. p. 257^)- Note that tlie English and Greek pluperfects are not
equivalent terms (314, ci). The English pluperfect expresses mere priority
of time ; the Greek denotes an action continuing in its effect up to the time
of the main verb ; the aorist, on the other hand, denotes momentary or
transient acts (cf. 802, 12).
LESSON LXX.
IRREG-ULAR VERBS ly\[Li, rjfiaL, Keiyuai,
Review 617, 619, a-g ; 712, 729, a-g ; 739, a.
794. Conjugate It^/xi [e-], send; KdOrjixai^ [/caret +
17/Aat, r)(T-~\, sit down ; and Kelfiai [/cec-, k€-~\, lie. (861,
862, 863).
a. Observe that ltjjjll is inflected like Ttdrj/jLLj except in the
third person plaral which has Idcn^ and in the second person
singular of the second aorist middle which has ela-o.
^ Kd3r]uai is commonly used in Attic for ijfiai, sit.
344 THE beginner's greek book.
b. Observe that KaQrjixai has only the present system ; and
that 0- of the theme is regularly dropped before the endings ; the
optative is the same as in oj verbs.
c. Observe that icel^iai has subjunctive and optative as in o)
verbs.
795. EXERCISES.
I. 1. I^VTO wcTTrep av SpdfjiOL ns Trepl vLKrj<;. 2. w?
etSe Tw aTparrjyov SteXawo^ra, ltjctl XWco, 3. §77X0?
Tjfxlv av Tavra ttolcjv, €i ifiepofiev. 4. iypaxjje eTncTTO-
\r)v Trapa /BacnXea otl tj^ol e)(^cov tTTTrea? cu? ap SvprjTaL
7rXetc7T0U5. 5. rrj 8e TpLrr) cttI tov apfxaros KaOifj-
fxevo^ TYjv TTopeiav iTTOielTO. 6. Kvpo? 8e avrd? re
aTridave koX oktcj ol apiaroi twv Trepl avrov eKeivTo in*
avTa>. 7. ovTo<s Kvpw elTrev, el avrco Solt) l7nrea<s X''^^'
OV9, on ^a)PTa<; ttoXXov? avrcop ap ekot. 8. tovtov
epeKo^ ^aaikea VTrcoTrrevep eirl to neSuop to vScjp
a^teiKepai, 9. Sofcet 8e fxoi a^iovp rj TreCa-apTa'^ r}fJia<;
ayeiv rj TreicrOepTa irpo^ ^ikiap a^iipai. 10. ovtol
8e OTL ovK yjOeXe Tovq (j>evyopTa<; TTpoeaOai i(j)ofiovPTo
avTOP,
II. 1. But another and another threw stones at him.
2. But there was a hill above them upon which the
guards were encamping. 3. For now these good things
lie in our midst. 4. But saying, " I see the man," he
rushed upon him and wounded him through his breast-
plate. 5. Very many desired to entrust to him both
their property and cities.
^ ei/e/ca follows its case.
2 Agrees with the subject of ay^iv understood.
IRREGULAR VERBS IriflL, fjfxai, /CCl/xat. 345
796. VOCABULARY.
a<^-t77/xi, send awaf/, let go, Kelfxai, KeCaofiat, lie, lie
let flow, dead; used as the pas-
8i-e\ai>rcy, ride or drive sive of TtOrjfjLL, he placed,
through, he laid, he situated [ceme-
iT^jLtL [e], TjCTO), rJKa,^ el/ca/ tery].
ef/xai, elOrjv, send, throw; 7rpo-L7)fjii, send forth; mid.,
mid., send or th?^ow one's commit, entrust, siuren-
self, rush, charge. der,
KaO-rj yiai, sit down, he
seated, he encamped,
797. (^tXo9, one s oivn, dear. <t)C\o-s, -17? -ov, dear,
heloved ; 6 (^tXo-9, a friend ; <^tX-Lo-9, -a, -o-v, friendlg ;
^lX-lol, -a?, aj^ection, friendship ; c^cXe-cu, love; <^tX-t7r7ro-9,
-o-v (iiriTOs, horse), fond of horses ; (j)LX6-0r}po-<;, -o-v (OTJpd,
a hunt), fond of hunting ; ^iko-Kivhvvo<;, -o-v (kCvSvvos),
fond of danger, adventurous ; (j)Lko-ixa07]<;, -e? {fiavOdvaj),
fond of learning ; <^tXo-7rdXe/x,o-9, -o-v {iroke^xo-^), fond of
war; ^Lk6a-o(^o-<^, 6 {cro(^6-<^), lover of wisdom, a philoso-
pher.
Philip, philtre, sophist, phil-anthropy, phil-ippic,
philo-logy, philo-sopliy.
79o» Menon loses two Companies in the Passage of the Moun-
tains. Cyrus and Syennesis meet. Exchange of Gifts.
Review QQ, 141, 142, 182, 225, 369, 3; 385, 386,
705, 707, 723, 1 ; 793.
25. 'Evruafa 8e rf Sv€vvecno<; yvvrj irporepa Kvpov^
1 See 730, 4, 5. 2 See 649.
346 THE beginner's greek book.
irivre rjixepaL<; ^ et9 Tapcrov? a^iKero ' ev 8e ttj vnep^oXy
TCOV OpCOV ^ TTj els TO TTehlOV SuO \6^0L TOV Mci^wi^o?
(TTpaTevfiaTos olttcoXovto ' ^ ol fxev ec^acrai' apirdl^ov-
Tois TL KaraKOTrrjvai viro tcov KtXt/coj^', ol Se viroku-
(j)0€VTas^ Kol ov hwafxivovs evpeiv to aWo crrparev/xa
ovhe ras 68ov9 OLTToXicrOai ' rjo-av 8* ovv ovtol eKaTov
oTrXirai.
26. Ot 8' aWoi eVet rJKov^ ttjv t€ irokiv SiijpTracrav,
Stct TOV okeOpov T(Dv avaTpaTLCoTcov opyL^^ofxepoL, kol tol
^acriXeia tol iv avTrj. Kvpo<; 8e eVet elcrijXaaej^ €ts
Trjv iroXiPy fjLeT€TT€iJL7r€T0 TOV 'Zvivvecriv irpos eavTov 6
8' ovTe irpoTepov ovhevi^ ttcd KpeiTTOvi^ iavTov^ el<; ^et-
pas iXdelv^ ecfyrj ovTe TOTe Kvpco^ Ikvai rjdeXe, irplv r)
yvvT) avTov eweLcre kol TricrTeiq eXa/Se.
27. Mera 8e ravra CTrel crvz^eye^oi^ro aXXT^Xot?/
Svej/z^ecrt? /xez^ iScoKe Kvpcp ■^pTJjjiaTa ttoXXo, et? t7)i^
(TTpaTLav, Kvpos 8' eKeLvcp^ Scopa d vopiit^eTai irapd
^acnXei rt/xta, ittttoi^ ^ ^pvao^dXivov koI cTTpeTTTOv
Xpvo'ovv Kai {peXia kol aKLvdKTjv ^pvaovv koX cttO'
Xrjv UepG-LKTJv' KOL TTJV x^P^^ p.r)KeTL d(\>ap7rdt,e(T6cLL^
cttoXt], -7^5, robe.
IX7)k4ti, not again (as at Tarsus).
d(j>'ap7rdi^(o, plunder^ pillage.
1 Syntax ? 4 Agreement and force ?
2 Give the prin. parts. 5 cf. 740, 13, n. 2, 3.
8 What force ? See ol 5e, below. ^ Compare and decline.
'' At the Izing's court.
8 One of the objects of eSw/ce ; see 790, 2.
REVIEW. 347
LESSON LXXI.
REVIEW.
Review 723, 1, 2, 3, a; 724, 725, Lessons LXVL-
LXX.
7gg. Perfect Middle System of Consonant Themes, —
Irregular Verbs.
L How is the third person plural of the perfect and
pluperfect middle of consonant themes formed ?
2. Explain the formation of the periphrastic future.
3. Write the perfect and pluperfect indicative middle
of /ceXeuw, dpirdt^coy it4^itto), dyo), (^atVw, and explain the
euphonic changes of the concurrent consonants.
4. Conjugate the perfect middle system of XeCiro),
TOLTTO), and TreCdco.
5. Give the inflection of olSa.
6. Conjugate the -present and second aorist systems
of LTJfJiL,
8oo. Summary of Constructions in Indirect Discourse^
etc.
1. Give rule for the use of the infinitive in indirect
discourse.
2. What verbs take the object infinitive ?
3. Distinguish between the use of the tenses of the
object infinitive and those of the infinitive in indirect
discourse.
348 THE beginner's greek book.
4. Give the rule for changing simple sentences into
indirect discourse after otl and w?.
5. Give the forms of indirect discourse that follow
the three common verbs of saving.
6. What verbs take the participle in indirect dis-
course ?
7. What constructions follow SrjXos elfjn, etc.?
8. Explain the uses of the tenses of the participle in
indirect discourse.
9. Distinguish between the participle in indirect
discourse and the participle after verbs of perceiving,
finding^ etc.
10. Give the principles governing the use of a.v in
subordinate and principal clauses in indirect discourse.
11. What is the principle governing the negatives in
indirect discourse?
12. In how many ways are simple sentences indirectly
quoted ?
13. How are all subordinate clauses indirectly
quoted ?
14. Give the rule for changing complex sentences to
indirect discourse.
15. Distinguish between expressed and implied indi-
rect discourse.
16. Give the formation of the verbal adjectives. Give
the construction of the verbal adjectives in reo^, and
examples in Greek.
8oi. Ellipsis, etc.
1. When can the subject of an infinitive be omitted P
REVIEW. 349
When the subject of an infinitive is omitted, with what
do the predicate nouns and adjectives agree ?
2. When can the subject of a finite verb be omitted?
When can the verb be omitted ? Give examples of the
ellipses of the latter.
3. Distinguish between the use of XPV ^"^ ^^^ > ^^
fiovkofxaL and iOeXcj.
4. Give words allied to crTpaT6<; and <^tXo9.
5. Give a brief abstract of the reading lessons within
this review.
802. EXERCISES.
1. KaKOL ov jxi Woven Troielv. 2. ovtoi npo avTov
^acrtXeaj? rerayyiivoi rjdav. 3. avOpayiro^ tls rjpcoTrjcre
Tov<; (j>vXaKa<; ttov av t8ot Upo^epov. 4. rfpcoTTjcrev el
ol arpaTLCoT ai TreireLCfjievoL enqcrav, 5. fieXXeu rr^v yi-
(^vpav \.v(Tai Ti(T(Ta(^ipvr]<^ Trj<^ vvkto<;, iap SvvrjTat.
6. dWov^ ovTLVOS^ OLP herjcrOe olSa otl cJ? cfyuXov^
Tev^ecrOe Kvpov.^ 7. avicrTavTo ol 8e koX vn i-Keivov
iyKeXevcTTOL iiriheiKvvvTef; ola elrj rj airopia avev T175
Kvpov yv(ofJi7)<; kol yiiveiv koL airiivai, 8. cJ? p^ev
OTpaTrjyrjo'ovTa'^ ifxe ravT-qv Trjv orTpaT7)yiav^ p7)Sel<;
vjjLCJP Xeyero)' ttoWol yap ivopco Si' a e/xoi tovto ov
TTOirjTeov. 9. y^pXv 8e ye, oT/xat, TTavra iroi-qTea w?
p.t]TTOT €771 To2<; ^ap^dpoi^; y€V(op.€6a, 10. Tavrrj^;
ovv ei^eKa ttJ? irapoSov Kupo? tols vav<; /LtereTre/xi/zaro,
oTTft)? PiacrdfjLevoL tov<; 7roXefjLLOv<; irapiXOoiev, el (jyvXar-
^ aXXov for aXXo, obj. of rev^cadf (439), whatever else you need.
2 Syntax ? ^ gee 409.
^ a)s (TTparrjyrja-ovTa, acc. after XeyeTco. The part, with wr approaches
indirect discourse (776).
350 THE beginner's greek book.
roiep eVt rat? Svptai? 7rv\ai<; ' 11. kol ev9v<; iracriv
of? ivervy^avev i^oa kol ^ap^apLKco<; /cat €K\r)VLKco<;,
OTL /SacrtXeus crifv cTTpaTevfjuaTt ttoWS wpocrep^eTaL ws
€l<; fjbd^Tjv 7rapeo'K€vaaiJL€vo<;. 12. eVet 8e 6 Mt^ptSarT^g
KaT€Lk7](j)€L aVTOV^ Kol tJSt) TO^eVfJiaTa i^LKVOVVTO^
i(T7] fJLTjve^ TOL^ "^EXXt^cti ttj crakiTiyyi, koI evOv^ e0eov
Spofjicp ol OTrXiTai kol ol iTTTrec? yjkavvov ' 13. rrpov-
heSdjKecrav 8e avrov<; /cat ol avv Kvpo) ava^dvTef; fidp-
^apoLf fjLovoL 8e /caraXeXet/xjiteVot "^aav ovSe linrea
ovhiva aviMfxa)(^op €)(ovt€s, wore StJXoi/ -^^ ort i/t/cwi/-
7€9 ovhiva av KaraKavoiev, 14. etTrdt'TOS^ Se rou
'Opovra OTL ovhev ^ dSiKrjOels iirL^ovXevajv avrco (f)avepo<;
yeyove. rjpa>Tr)(rev 6* Kvpo^ avTov, *0/xoXoyet5 ovv
irepX ifie aSt/co?* yeyevrjcrO ai ; *H ^ yap dvdyKrj, e(f)r] 6
^Opovra^, e/c tovtov irdXiv rjpcoTrjaev 6 Kvpo<;, ^Ert ovv
av yevoLO^ tco ifico dSeXc^w TroXe/xtog? e/xot Se (^tXo? /cat
TTto'To? ; 6 Se direKpivaTO on ov8' ' et yevoCfJirjVy co Kvpe,
croi y dv irore ert ho^aipn.
803. VOCABULARY.
iyK€XevcrTo<;,^ -ov, bidden, ^idJ^ofxaL [)8ta8-], ^idcrO'
incited, urged on [/ce- />tat, Qic, force one's loay,
Xevw]. /orc^ or compel.
(TctXTTtyf , -tyyo9, 17, trumpet, iv-opdco, see in, see, observe.
1 Cf. 793, N. 6. 8 Syntax?
2 Force of the tense ? * Why not ace. ?
^ ^ yap, etc., sc. iariv ofioXoyelv (790, 1, 2), (j/es), for, indeed, it is
necessary, etc.
^ Explain the mood.
•^ What does o^-Se limit? (694, 9). « Cf. 373, 521.
READING LESSON. 351
i^-LKpeofxai, reach, reach Trpo-hiho)iLL,(/ive up,surren-
the mark, hit, der, abandon. See 647.
ojjio-Xoyeo), agree, confess, Trpoo'-ep^o/xat, come or go
acknowledge . See 685. to or towards^ approach^
irap-epxofiaL, pass by or advance.
along. rj, adv., indeed, really, truly,
certainly.
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS.
804. The Troops refuse to advance. Speech of Clearchus.
Review 120, 202, 249, 269, 432, 439, 579, 581, 681,
687, 690, 715, 721, 1, 2, 3; 723, 1, 2. 3; 780, 2;
790,1,2; 798.
1. 'Ej/rav^a ifjieuve Kvpo<; kol t) crrparia rjiiepa^ et/co-
(TLV' ol yap (Trparioyrai ovk icfyaaap livai rov irpoao) ' ^
vTTCJTTTevov yap rjSr) iirl^ /BaaiXea livai ' fiLcrOooOrj'
^ai 8e OVK inl tovtco ic^acrav. irpcoTO^ ^ 8e KXeap^o^
TOV<; avTov aTpaTLatra^ i^idt^eTo ^ I4vai ' ol 8e avrov
re e/BaXXov Kal to. vTTo^vy la ra iKeivov, eTrel ap^aivTo *
TTpoiiv ai.
2. YLXiap^o'i Se rore ixev fXLKpov i^€(j>vy€ fjirj Kara-
TTcrpoiOrjvai.^ vcrrepov 8', inel eyvo) on ov SvpyjaeraL^
^idcraaOai, (Tvvijyayev iKKXyjcrCai/ tcov avrov (TTparioy
Twv ' Kal TrpcJTOP ix€v iSaKpve ttoXvp "^povop i(XTco<;, ol
8e 6paJVT€^ iOavp^al^op Kal i(n(OTro)v * elra eXef € roidSe '
3. '^AvSpes (XTpaTLcoTaL, firj 6avyidt,ere, otl ^aXeTToi?
^epco To2<; TrapovcTL TrpdyfiacnvJ ifjiol yap Kvpo<; ^4vo<;
iyivero Kai /x€ ^evyovra iK T179 TrarpiSos rd re aXXa
352 THE beginner's greek book.
iTLfXTjo'e KOI jXvpLOV^; eSw/ce SapeiKov<; ' ov9 iyo) \a/3cjp
ovK el<s TO lSlov KareOifxiqv ifiol,' dX\' €is u/xa? iSaird-
vcov.
4. Kat npcoTOv fxev iiri roi)^ Opa/ca? CTToXe/xT/cra kol
vnep rrjq *EXXa8os iTLfjLMpovfjLrjv jxeO^ vfjicov, i.K Trj<;
Heppovijaov avrov? e^eXavvcov ^oyXofxevovf; d(j)aLpel-
aOai Tov^ ivoLKOvPTa^; "Fi\\r)va^ ttjv yrjv. iTreiSrj Se
Kvpo^ iKoiXei, Xa/3(x)v v/xa9 iTropevofJirjv, Iva, el tl 8e-
OLTO, o)(pekourjv avrov avu a)p ev eirauop vir eKeivov.
5. 'Ettci 8e v/xcl? ou ^ovXecrOe crvixTTopevecrOai,
dvdyKTj^ hrj yioi rj vfjbd^ irpo^opTa^^ Tjj Kvpov (j^tXia^
^prjdOai rj irpo^ i.Kelvov xjfevcrdixepop ^^ /xe^' vficop livai.
el jxev St) SiKaua iroiyjaa) ovk olSa, alpyjcrofjiaL 8' ovv
U/Xa?, KOL (TVV VpZv OTL^^ OLV 8el7* TTetVo/Xai. kol OVTTOTe
epel ouSet? co? eyw, '^EXXr/i^a? dyayciiv el<; tov<; ^ap^d-
pov9, 7rpo8ov9 ^^ Toi'9 "EXXT^i^a? ttjp tcov fiap^dpojp
(fnXuav elX6iJir)v.
0. *AXX' irrel v/xetg ifJLol ' ov deXere ireWecrO ai ovSe
eirecrBaL, iycj crvv vplv opofjuai Kal on av Sey 7retc70/xat.
vofxCi^ct) yap v/xct? ifiol elvau kol TraTpuSa kol (J)lXov^ kol
crvfJLfjid^ovs, Kal crvv vfjilv ^^ fjuev av oT/xat elvai ^* ri/xto?
OTTOV aj' 0), vfJLcov oe ep7][xo<; (ov ovk av iKavo<; eti^at
ovT av <^iXov (o^eXrjcrai ovr av^^ e^Opov dXe^acrS at.
«j^'?>/ 17'!' "^ ^''^IS'" ^
CO? e/xov ovv lovTos otty) av /cat v/xec9; ovrcj ttjv
yv(i)ixrjv ex^Te.
TTpoaco, Sidv., forward. crvv-dycj, bring together ,
KaTa-ireTpocOy 'eTreTpdtdrjv, call,
stone to death [7rer/oo9, haKpvoi^ weep [tear].
stone ; petrel] . cncoTrdajy he silent.
RETROVERSION. 353
lSlos, -a, 'Ov, personal, to my own personal use
private ; to lSlop, ones [idiom].
own property, benefit; KaTa-TidrjiJiLj place away^
ct? TO ^lov . . . e/xot, hoard,
a. Note the use of the pgposiui-'ins of this lesson.
^ Tov 7rp6(ra>j prose use 6t the gen, of place, as the adverbs in -ou, —
rrov, avTov, etc.
2 irpmTos, he was -the first to undertake it ; Trparop would mean that he
did this before something else.
8 Give force of the imperfect. » Cf. 791, 4.
* Explain the mood. lo What case would be expected ?
s See 119. 11 See 708, 3.
^ What mood might have been used ? i^ What force ?
' Syntax ? i8 What force ? (716, end.)
8 See 755, 6. " Explain the mood (722, 7, 8).
1^ oTTov av Si, whenever I may be, represents the supposed future case
more vividly than the more regular ottou ciiyi/ (686, «). This condition, hav-
ing protasis and apodosis of different forms, is called a mixed condition.
1® av belongs to uvai, repeated for emphasis.
i"* (Uff efiovodu lopTos, gen. absol. with a>s (802, 8), ejxe U'vai, might have
been used.
1* What verb is understood with vfxcis ?
805. Translate:^
1. The soldiers refuse to go against the king. 2. For
they said that they had not been hired for this. 3. Cle-
archus was the first to begin to advance. 4. The sol-
diers wondered that Clearchus was distressed at the
state of affairs. 5. Clearchus did not lay up the darics
for his own use, but expended them upon his soldiers.
6. I will join ^ Cyrus, that, if he has any need of me,
I may aid him in return for the benefits I have received
1 Most of the words in these exercises appear in the Greek narrative.
^ rropevofiu.
23
354 THE BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK.
from him. 7. Clearchus said that he would choose his
own soldiers instead of Cyrus, and in their company
would suffer whatever might be necessary.
80 5. The Soldiers approve, riaeailjiip sends a secret Message
to Cyrus, and makes a Second Address.
Review 369, 3 ; 370, 1, 2; 398, 581, 589, 681, 705,
717, 725,739,5; 790, 1, 2; 804.
7. Tavra elirev ' ol 8e (rrpartwrat, 01 re avTov iKeCvov
KOL ol dWoi, TavTa oLKovcravTe^; iirriveo-av ' napa 8e
Beviov Ko^l Ila(Ti(ovo<; TrXetov? ^ rj SiO'x^^f'OL Xa^opre^
TOL oTrka /cat ra aKevocfyopa io-rparoTrSevaavro irapa
KXedp^co.
8. Ki}po9 8e To-uToi^'^ diTopoiv^ re koI XvTrovjJievo^
/xereTre/xTrero tov KXeap^ov ' 6 8e teVat fxev ovk rjdeke^
\d0pa 8e T(t)v <JTpario)TO)v^ irefjiTrcov avrw dyyeXov eXr.ye
Oappeiv oj? Karacrriqo'op.evaiv ^ tovtcov et? to heov * I
fxeTaTrep^TrecrOai 8' iKeXevev avrov ' avro? 8' ovk €(1)7)
ievai,
9. Mera 8e raOra (Tvvayaywv tov<; fxeO^ iavrov crrpa-
TiftJra? KOL Tov<; TTpocreXOovra^ avru'^ kol tcop dXXcov
TOV /BovXofJievop eXe^e TOidSe '
"AvSpe^; (TTpaTLCJTai, tol p.ev Stj Kvpov 8rjXov^ on
OVTO)^ €X€L^ 7rpO<? T^jLtOL? MO'TTep TOL r)fJL€T€pa 77/909 eKelvOV '
ovT€ yap r)iJLeL<; iKecvov^ €Tl crrpartwrat, eVet ye ov
(Twerroyieda avT^^ ovTe eKeivo^ ert r^fxlv^ fjnarOoSoTr)^.
10. ''On fJuevTOL dSLKeicrOai vopLit^ei v(j>^ rjfJLcov olSa'
wore KOL iieTaTrepLTrop^ivov^ avTov ovk iOeXco iXdelv, to
fX€v fieyLCTOv^ al(j^v6p.evo<; otl (TVPOuSa i/xavTM irdvTa
READING LESSON.
355
ixjjevcrixevo^ avrov, eTretra /cat SeStw? /X17 Xa^cov^ /x€
Slktjp iTTiOfj ^ £v^ vofiii^eL VTT ifjLOV rjSiKrjcrOaL.
11. 'E/xot ovp So/c€t ou^ w/aa el^at ^*^ tj/jllj/ KaOevSetv^^
ovS' dfieXelp rjjJLwv avroiv^ aXka /BovXeveadaL on '^prj
TTOieiv e/c TovTOivy^ kol eo)? ye fjiepofxev avTov, (TKeirTeov
jjLOL SoK€L elvai ^^ OTTOJ? w? dcr<^aXeo"Tara fievajfievy^ et
T€ T^Sr^ 8oAC€i amivai^^ 07ra)<; ojs dacfjaXeo'TaTa dirLfJiev,^
Kal OTTcos TOL eTTtTT^Seta e^ofiev ' avev yap tovtojv ovre
(TTpariqyov ovre aTpanoyrov 6(j>eXo<; ovSeV.
12. *0 8' dvTJp^ TTOXXOV^ fJL€V d^LOS (/)lXo9 m'^ dv
<^t\o9 y,^ xaXeTTcoTaTo<; S' i^Opcx; S dp TroXefXLOS y-
eyei 8e SvvafJiLP kol Trelirjv koI pavTLKrjv kol LTnnKrjv,
rjv 7rdvT€<; ojutotw? opcojxep re kol eTTi(Trdp.e6a ' koI yap
ovSe iroppot) hoKovfiep ^^ jxol avrov ^^ KaOrjcrd ai. (Sare
oipa'^ Xeyeiv on n<; yuyvatcrKeL dpiarov elvaL. Tavra
eiTTOiv eTTavaaro.
Xvireo), pain, grieve.
XdBpay adv., without the
knoicledge of (Xavdavo)).
Oappeo), he of good courage.
et9 TO Seov {Seco), in the
right wag, satisfactorilg .
fjLLo-Oo-SoTTjf;, 'Ov,pag?naster
[647].
e7r-eLra,adv., then, moreover.
Ka6-ev8(o, sleep, lie idle.
6(f)eXo<;^ TO, advantage, use.
776^09, -T), -6v, on foot ; 6
7r€^o9, foot-soldier ; ol
iret^oi, or 7re^i7 hvvapn^j
infayitrg,
ojLtotcej?, adv., in like man-
ner, alike [685].
TToppo), adv., forwards, far
froyn.
^ Compare and explain the form.
2 Syntax ? * Depends upon XdSpa.
• Force ? ^ Syntax and force ?
« Cf. 1921.
' Cf. 172, a.
356 THE BEGINNER S GREEIv BOOK.
8 Chiefiy, adv. ace. What is its correlative ?
^ Explain the mood.
1° SoKeo), to seem, takes the infinitive in indirect discourse; hoKioi^ U
seem good or best, does not take the infinitive in indirect discourse ; but in
either case the infinitive is the subject except when So/ce'co, seems^ has a per-
sonal subject (725). For a-KeTrreov . . .. flmi, below, see 783, 12.
1^ Depends upon apa. Give the rule.
^2 eK TovT<ov, in these circumstances.
^^ avTov depends upon noppa. Give the rule.
807. Translate :
1. Both the soldiers of that one himself and the
others, praised these things. 2. Since Cyrus was
troubled about these affairs, he kept sending for Cle-
archus. 3. But secretly sending a messenger to him,
Clearchus bade him to be of good courage, since these
matters would be settled satisfactorily. 4. Although
he keeps sending for me, I do not wish to go ; for I
fear lest he may seize me and inflict punishment upon
me for the wrongs he has suffered from me. 5. It is
not a time for us to lie idle, but to consider what it is
necessary to do in these circumstances. 6. Clearchus
said that Cyrus was a valuable friend to whomsoever he
was a friend, and a most bitter enemy to w^horasoever he
was an enemy.
808. Plans proposed by the Soldiers. Clearchus refuses to lead.
Review 236, 5 ; 238, o5g (241), 245, 579, 581, 663,
687, 703, 716, 768, 1, 2; 769, d; 778, a; 782, 1, 2;
788, 8o6.
13. *Eac Se TovTov avLO'TavTO ol fxev i.K rov avTO/JuaTOVy
Xefoz^re?^ a iyiyvoxiKOv^ ol 8e /cat vtt iKeCvov iyKe-
READING LESSON. 357
XevcTTOL, i7nS€LKvvvT€<; ^ Ota €117 ^ Tj OLTTOp ia avev ttJs
Kvpov yv 0)^.7]^ KaX jxeveLV kol ainivaL.
14. Ef?* Se 817 etTre,^ irpoo-TTOLovfjievos cnrevBetv &j5
rd^LCTTa TTopevecrOaL ^ et? Ti7t' 'EXXaSa, arpaTrjyovs fiei/
iXecrOai^ dXXovs ojg Ta-^icrra, el fxr) ySovXerat^ KXeap-
)(o<; dirdyeiv ' tol 8' imTijheLa dyopd^^ecrOau^ — 77 8' dyopd
Tjv iv T(p pap^apiKCD crrpareu/xari — kol avcTKevdt^eo'OaC^
iXOovTa^ ^ 8e Kvpoi^ alrelv 7rXo2a, (o<; dnoTrXeoLev ' ^ idv
Se fjirj 8t8(w ^ ravra, rjyefJLOva aiTelv ^ Kvpov ocrrc? 8t(x
<^tXta9^ T-i^S xcopa^ aTrd^ei'^ idv 8e /xT78e rjyejjiopa
SlSco, crvvrdTTecrd ai^ Tr)v raxicrT-qv,^ Tre/xi/zat^ 8e Acal
TTpoKaTaXy]\\fopLevov^ ^ tol aKpa, ottco^ jxt) (jiOdcrcocn ^ fJi^jre
KOpo? [jL7]Te ol KlXlk€<; KaraXa^ovre^} ovto<; fiev 817
TOLavTa etire' [xerd 8e tovtov KXeap^o? eiTre^ rocrovro^'*
io. Us ix€v <TrpaTy]yr](TovTa e/x€ Tavrrjv ttjv arpa-
T'qytav fxrjBelf; vfxcjv Xeyerco ' iroXXd yap ii/opco St a
ifjLol TovTo ov 7roLr)T€ov • cjs ^^ 8e Tw dvSpl ov dv iXr)-
cde Treio'o/xat^ y SvvaTov^ fidXicrra, Iva elhrjre^ on
KoX ap^ecrdau eViVrajLiai ^^ w? ns zeal aXXos-
TTpocr-TTOLeofxaL, profess, pretend.
Sui/aros, -77, -OP, able, possible {hyvayLai),
^ Force ? 2 Principal parts ?
* Explain the mood.
* eh 8e dr), etc., one in particular^ etc.
s Cf. 771, 13. 8 Of. 791, 6.
« Syntax? (7G9, ^.) « So. ^i^Spas (637, 9).
7 Explain position ? 10 Cf. 802, 8.
^^ Sc. exaaros XfyeVo).
^2 Sc. eWi ; cf. 735, N. 4, to the best of my ability.
^^ Cf. 778, a. I know how also to be governed, Kai is emphatic here as it
is before aXKos, — cos tls koX ciXXhs (as well as^ any other man.
358 THE beginner's greek book.
809. Translate :
1. He showed that it was not possible to go back
without the knowledge of Cyrus. 2. One pretended to
be eager with all possible speed to proceed to Greece.
3. Let us choose other commanders, if Clearchus does
not desire to lead us back. 4. A certain one urges
them to go to Cjrus and ask him for boats, that they
may sail away. 5. Clearchus said that he w^ould
obey the man whom they might choose. 6. He pro-
posed that they should send men to preoccupy the'
heights, in order that Cyrus might not get possession
before them.
810. A Plan to treat with Cyrus is proposed. It is accepted,
• and the Greeks agree to go on.
Review 172, 182, 225, 239, 249, 385, 581, 687, 690,
715, 723, 1, 2, 3; 724, 768, 1, 2, «; 778, 787, 1, 2;
808.
16. Mera tovtov aX\o9 avecTTT), imSeLKvyf; fjuev Tr)V
evTjOeiav rov tol TrXota alreiv /ceXevo^'TO?/ axnrep TTokiv
TOV (TTokoV KvpOV TTOLOVfiePOV,^ eTTtSct/fW? 8e W9 €V7)0e<;
eur)^ rjyefjiova alT€iv^ irapa tovtov^ w^ Xv/xatz^o/xe^a Trjv
TTpa^Lv. el 8e kol tw rjyepiopL^ TTLCTTevcrofjiev^ ov av
Kv/)09 8w,^ Tt KOiKvei /cat ra aKpa rjfuv ^ KeXeveiv Kvpov
TTpoKaTakafJi^dveLV ; 1 7. eyw jxep yap oKvoiiqv av €19
ra irXoia ifx/SaCveiv a rjfjbip Solt),^ fxrj r)fjia<; rat? Tpnj'
pecTL^ KaTaSvar) ' ^ (l)o/3oiiJir)v 8' av tm rjyejjLovL^ w" 80117 ^
iirecrO ai, firj 7jfjia<; ayayrf' oOev ovk ecrrat i^eXOeiv'
^ovkoip/iqv 8' av, aKOVTo<;^ d7na)v^^ Kvpov, XaOelv avTOV
direXOcov ' ^^ o ov hvvarov icTiv.
READING LESSON. 359
1 8. *AXX' eyw (f>7]iJii ravTa fiev (j)kvapia<; etvai ' SoKei
8e fJiOL dvSpas ^ iX$6vTa<; ^^ Trpo? Kvpov, olTLPe<; ^^ iin'
TyjSeiOL, (Tvv KXedp^o) ipcordv eKeivov ri^^ ^ovXerai
rjixlv -^pyjaOai ' kol idv pikv rj Trpd^is rj ^ TTapaTrXrjcrLa
oiairep ^* koX irpocrOev expyjro toI's ^€vol<;, eireaOai /cat
rjfxdf;, KOL fxrj KaKiov^ elpat tcov npoadev tovto)^
crvvava^dvToyv'^ 19. edv Se pieit^cov rj 7rpd^L<; Trj<;
TTpocrOev^^ (f>aivr)Tai^ /cat iirLirovcoTepa /cat eiriKiv-
vvoTepa, agcovv rj TreiaavTa 7)ixa<; ayeiv rj Treio-uevra
7rpo<; (fjikiav ac^teVat * ^ ovrco yap /cat eTrofiepoL ^' av
^ikoi avTa> ^ Kcd TrpoOvjjLOi eTroLfxeOa /cat aTTtorre? ^^
acrc^aXw? ap dTTioLjiev ' on h^ av tt/oo? raura Xeyry,^
aiTayyeikai oevpo r}fJia<; o aKov(ravTa<; 7rpo<; ravra
jSovXeveaOaL.
20. ^ESofe raOra, /cat a^'8/)a9 eXojjievoi crvv KXedp)(^(p
TTefiTrovcTLv 6l '^pcoTcov Kvpov ra ho^avTa^ rrj cTTpaTia}
6 8^ direKpivaro^ on d/couot^ 'A^poKOfiav, l^Opov^
di/8pa, CTTt T(p ^v^pdrrj ^ TTorajJi^ elvai,^ aTri^ovTo.
S(jtj8e/ca (TTaOfiovf; ^ ' Trpo? tovtov ovv e^r) ^ov\e-
o-Qai iXOelv ' ^ kolv fjbkv y^ e/cet, rrjp Slktjp i(f)r] ^prji[<eiv
eTTiOeivai^ avrco,^ rjp 8e (f)€vyrj,^ lyjLtet? e/cet 7r/)09 raura
^ovXevaofieOa}^
21. 'A/covcra^re? 8e ravra ol alpeTol dpayyeXXovcn
rot? (TTpaTKiyr ai^ ' ^ toI<; 8e viroijjLa jxep rjp on dyei ^
TTpo<; ^acrtXea, ojLtw? 8e e8o/cet eirecrOai. TrpocraiTova-i
8e fJLLadop ' 6 8e Kvpo? vTrKT^peLTai rjfjLtoXiop Trdcrt
Swcreti^ ^ o5 ^^ TTporepop €(j)€pop,^ dprl Sa/oet/cou r/)ia
rjixiOapeiKa tov [xrjpo^ t<o CTTpancoTr) on oe eiri
/SacrtXea ayot^ ouSe evravOa '^Kovcrep ovSet? €P ye Tq
<j>apep<o.
360
THE BEGINNER S GREEK BOOK,
einjOeia, -ds, /^%, swipli-
city.
ev7J07}^y -69, stupid J foolish.
Xi//xatVo/xat, ruin, frustrate.
Kara-Bvoty sink,
iiri-TTovoSy 'OVy toilsome, la-
borious [ttovo^;, toif\.
iTTL-KUfSvvo^, -ovy dangcr-
ous.
^Xvdpid, -ds, nonsense, hosh .
Sevpo, adv., here.
aTT-ej^w, he away from, dis-
tant.
alperosy -yj, -6v, chosen ; ot
alpeTOL, the deputies
\_alpe(o] .
vTT-oxpLd, -d?, suspicion
[opdcj].
ofjicosy adv., nevertheless
[685].
Trpocr-aiTeo), ask for more.
i^/i,i-dXto§, -d, -ov, half as
much again (^oko%, 498,
obs.^).
r^pji-SdpeiKov, halfdaric
(498, obs.3)
^ Syntax?
^ Construction ? Just as if Cyrus were marching home again, i. e. to
renounce the expedition, and would not longer need his boats as tenders
to his army. ^ Explain the mood.
* What construction might have been used ?
5 What dative ?
* Principal parts ? ' Explain the case.
* What other mood might have been used ?
9 Cf. 755, 4.
^<* What does this participle express ? (755, 4.)
" Force ? is cf. 771, 10.
12 What verb must be supplied ? " Cf. 694, 10.
1^ Sc. irpd^eoas. Syntax ?
1^ I. e. by holding out higher pay ; cf. 795, 9.
" Force? Cf. 726, 1.
1* What is the subject ? What other infinitives have the same subject ?
What other infinitives have the same dependence ?
1® Could the infinitive have been used ?
^^ What other mood might have been used ?
21 The gen. depends upon rjfiidkiou, implying comparison, for tovtov
(/iia^oC) ov.
22 T<B, each, the article here has the distributive force ?
REVIEW. 361
8il. Translate :
1. Cyrus himself will need his boats. 2. Cyrus
will not give us. a guide, for in going back ^ we will
ruin his expedition. 3. If we should embark in the
boats that Cyrus might give, he would sink us with his
triremes. 4. And if we should follow the guide that
he might give, he would lead us to a place from which
it would not be possible to escape. 5. And I say it is
not possible to get off without the knowledge of Cyrus.
6. But it seems best to me that we should go and ask
Cyrus what use he intends to make of us. 7. If the
undertaking appears greater than the former one, let us
demand additional pay. 8. This seemed best, and the
deputies asked Cyrus the things which were agreed
upon by the army.
LESSON LXXII.
REVIEW OF THE ANABASIS, I. I. II. III.
8x2. I. Review the Anabasis I., 1, 1-6; 432, 433,
458, 640.
II. Translate: I., 1, 1-6.
1. Aa/oetov kol Ilapvo'aTiSo? yiyvovrai TraiSe? hvo,
7r/>€cr^uT€/)09 ixev ^ ApTa^€p^r)<;, vecorepos Se Kvpo<;.
'Ettci 8e r^crOevei Aapeio? koX VTramTeve Tekevrrjv rov
^Lov, i/BovXero t<u TratSe dfjL(j)OT€pa) irapeivai.
2. 'O ixkv ovv 7rpecr^vT€po<; irapcov ervy^ai^e * YJupov
362 THE beginner's greek book.
Se fieTaTrefjiTreTai diro ttJs oipxvs ^79 avTov oraTpciTTrjv
i7T0L'r)cre, kol crrpaTrjyoi/ 8e avrov oLTreSei^e TrdvTcxiv
ocroL €19 KaaTcoXov Trehiop dO poit^ovr ai. dva^aivei
ovv 6 Kv/309, Xa^wz/ TL(ra'a(f)epv7)v oj? (fyCXov, kol twv
'EWijvcov 8e ixoiT^ OTrXtra? dve^rj TpLaKoaLOvs, dp^ovTa
Se avTwv 'B^viav Jlappdaiov.
3. 'EttciSt) hk ireXevTiqae Aapeios kol KaTiarr) et?
TTjv ^aaikeiav ^ApTa^ep^r)^, Ti(T(Ta(^ipvr)^ hia^dWei
Tov Kvpov 7rpo9 Tov dSeX(f)ov, oj9 iTn/^ovXevoi avTco. 6
8e TreiOerai re Kai (TvXXapu^avei Kvpov a)<; diroKrevcop '
7) Se p^yjTTjp i^aLTTjcraiJievrj avTov aTroTre/xTret rrdXiv iirl
T7)V dpxv^'
4. 'O 8' o59 dnrjXde KLvSvvevcra<; kol drt/xacr^€t9, ^ov-
Xeverat 07ra)9 fiyjirore €tl ecrrai inl tco aSeXc^w, dW, tJi/
SvvrjTai, /BacnXevaei dvT eKeivov. na/3i;(Tart9 /xet* 817 17
p^rjTiqp vTrrjp-^e rw Kupo), <j>iXov(Ta avrov fxdXXov rj tov
fiaa-iXevovra 'Apra^ep^iqv.
5. '^Oo'TL<; 8' di^iKvelro twv irapd fiaauXeco^; 7rpo<;
avTov, TrdvTas ovtcj 8taTt^et9 dTreTrefJUTrero, (^are avrco
fxdXXov (f)LXov<; etvai 17 ^acnXel. kol tcov Trap' eavrut
8e fiap^dpcov iirep^eXelTO, oj? TroXefielv re LKavol elrjaav^
Kai evvoLKCJf; ^^oiev avT(o.
6. T'Y)v 8e 'EXXi^z^tfci^^' SvvafjLLv yjOpou^ev (os fidXicTTa
iBvvaTO iTTLKpvTTTOfJLevo^;, o7r(W9 OTL dirapacTKevoTaTov
Xd/BoL ^acTiXea. coSe ovv iiroieLTO ttjv (rvXXoyrjv.
oTTocra^ cT)(€ (j)vXaKd<; iv tol^ TroXecrt, irapriyyeiXe rolq
(j)povpdp-)(^OL<? eKdcTOL^ Xafi/SdveLv dvSpa<; UeXoirov-
V7)(TL0V<5 OTL 7rXeL(rT0v^ KOL PeXTL(TT0v<;, 0)9 iTTi/SovXevov
ro9 Tio-cra(f>€pvov<; Tat9 TroXecri. kol yap rjcrav at
loiViKoX 7rdX€t9 TLa(Ta(f)€pvov<i to dp^alov, eV ^aatXecjs
REVIEW. 363
SeSo/xeVai • rore 8' d(l>eL(TTy]Kecrap 77/309 Kvpov iracrcLL
TrXrjp MlXtJtov.
III. 1. The mother of Cyrus sent him back to his
province, because she loved him better than the ruling
Artaxerxes. 2. But when he had gone back, after he
had been in danger, he planned that he might be king
in place of his brother. 3. He was said so to dispose
of both the barbarians and the Greeks that they were
more friendly to him than to the king. 4. And he also
cared for the barbarians about himself that they might
be able to fight. 5. He collected his Grecian force
secretly that he might take the king unprepared. 6. He,
therefore, kept finding many pretexts for collecting his
army. 7. He ordered the commanders of the garrisons
which he had in the cities to enlist the best men pos-
sible, on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting
against the cities.
813. Review the different selections of the Anabasis,
and apply the principles of syntax given both by Greek
and Enghsh translations. For the selections see the
English index.
APPENDIX.
PARADIGMS OF THE SUBSTANTIVES.
NOUNS.
814. A Declension. — Feminmes.
i\ o-Tpa,Tia T| x^pcL 1^ 'Y€<|)\)pa
i\ TliiTJ i\ dp.a|a
arm;^ land bridge
honor
wagon
8, N.V.
(TTpaTLd X^P^ y€(f>vpa
rlfxrj
afxa^a
Gen.
cnpaTios x^P^^ y€cf>vpds
Tlflij?
dp,a^7ys
Dat.
(TTpaTia X^^P^ yecjivpa
'rlf^V
dp,diy
Ace.
(TTpaTidu ^(opdv yecfivpav
TLfJLrjV
afia^av
D. N.A.V.
, arrparLa X^P^ y€cf>vpd
rlfxa
dfidid
G.D.
OTpariaiv ;;(djpati/ yecftvpauv
TLfXaLV
dfid^aLV
P. N.V.
o-T/oartat ;(wpat yecfivpat
Tl/xat
a/xa^at
Gen.
(TTpaTLiiiv x^pwv y€<pvpii)v
ripLQiV
dfJia^oiv
Dat.
(TTpaTLaiq ^wpats y€<j>vpaLq
Tt/xats
dfxd^aL%
Ace.
o-rpaTtds x^P^^ y€<f>vpd^
yi Declension. — Masculines.
Tl/Ltds
dfidi^ds
815.
6 v€dvCds 6 caTpdinis
6 O-TpaXKOTTlS
yoMwy man satrap
soldier
S. N.
vcdvtds (TaTpaTTrj^
(TTpaTLtiiTrjg
G.
vedviov o-arpaTTov
(TTpaTLWTOV
D.
vedvta o-arpaTn;
(TTpaTLWTr^
f
A.
vedvtav craTpaTnqv
(TTpaTLorr-qv
Y.
vedi/td crarpaTny
(TTpaTLwra
7). N.A.V. veavLd orarpaTrd
(TTpaTLiJiTd
G.D. vedviaLv aarpaTraiv
<TTpaTL(jnaiv
P, N.V. vedvLat o-arpaTrat
CTTpartcuTat
G.
vedi/tojv o-arpaTTwv
O-TpaTtWTOiV
D.
vcavtats (rarpaTrais
o-Tpartwrats
A.
vcdvtds (TaTpaird<i
(rTpaTL(i)Td<:
366
APPENDIX.
8 1 6. Declension.
6 oTvos
6 dvepwTTOS
n686s
TO 8(DpOV
wine
man
way
9>St
s.
N.
oXvos
avOpum-o^
68os
Swpov
G.
olvov
avOptxyirov
6801!
Biopov
D.
olvta
avOpomio
68a;
Swpio
A.
oXvov
avOpiHTTOV
6801/
Swpov
V.
oXv€
dvOpuiTre
68e
Bwpov
D.
N.A.V.
OLVtl)
dvOpwTTio
68w
Hwpo)
G.D.
olvOLV
dvOpttiTTOLV
68oti/
S(i)potv
P.
N.V.
oXvOL
dvOpCOTTOL
68ot
Swpa
G.
olviiiV
dvupMTroiV
68(01/
8(x)p(i)V
D.
olvoi'i
dvOp<jiiroL<i
68019
Swpots
A.
olvovs
dvOp(j)7rov<s
680VS
8ojpa
817. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension.
SiiXos
a|ios
clea?'
worthy
s.
N.
brjkos
SrjXrj
SrjXov
dito.
dtia
d^LOV
G.
hiqXov
hrjXrjs
817X01;
diiov
dlc'ds
d$LOV
D.
hrjXta
SrjXy
OrjXu)
d^io)
^ik
diiio
A.
hrjXov '
Si^Xrjv
BrjXov
diiov
diidv
d^LOV
V.
^Xf.
S^Xr)
^TJXov
diic
d^ia.
diiov
D.
N.A.V.
hrjXw
^rjXa
B-qXu)
d^io)
diid
d$L(a
G.D.
hrjXow
Si^XaLV
St^Xolv
d^iOLV
d^taw
d^LOL]
P.
N.V.
hrjXoi
SyjXai
S^Xa
diioi
diiai
dita
G.
8ryAa)V
BrjXwv
SyjXwv
d^iuiv
d^ioiv
d^twv
D.
8>yAois
8ryA.ats
SyXoL^
d$Loi<s
d^iaiq
d$tOL<i
A.
^r}Xov<:
SryAd?
SrjXa
d$tov<s
d^id<i
diia
APPENDIX.
367
8l8. Contract Nouns of the Vowel Declension,
11 |JLVd.
r\yi\(yed)
6 voiis
mina
earth
mind
s.
N.
fjivdd
fJLva
-fy
v6o%
vovs
G.
fjLvaas
/xvas
y^s
vdov
VQV
D.
[jivda
ixva
y»
vdi^
vo)
A.
fivaav
fjivav
y^v
voov
voxv
Y.
fJLvdai
fxva
VI
voe
vov
B.
N.A.V.
fivaa
ixva
vow
Via
G.D.
fjLvdaiv
jxvaLV
vooiv
VOLV
P.
N.V.
fJLvdai
/XVOL
vdoi
VOL
G.
fxvaoiv
jlVUiV
VOfsiV
vwv
D.
fjLvdaL<s
fivai';
voots
VOtS
A.
fjivdas
/xi/as
voovs
VOVS
819. Contract Adjectives of the Vowel Declension,
N.
G.
D.
A.
N.A.V.
G.D.
N.
G.
D.
A.
XpvcroOs
golden
Singular.
;(|0U(r€O5
^va-oxk
yjiVdka.
XpV(T7}
Xpv(T€ov ;)^v(rovv
•)(OV(T€OV
-^vcrov
Xfjv(T€a<s
XPvo-r}'^
Xpvcreov ;(pi}o-ov
XpV(T€<a
;^i}o-(3
Xpva-ia
Xpva-fi
Xpva-ew XP^^^
Xpvcreov
)(pV(TOVV
)(pv<redv
Dual.
Xpva-^v
XpyfTiov ^(/avo-ovv
)(^pV(T€OJ
Xpvcru)
Xpvcrid
Xpva-d
Xpvcreo) XP^^^
ypva-iotv
)(pV(TOLV
Xpva-iaLV
Plural.
Xpvoratv
Xpvcr^OLV XP^<^OLV
)(fJV(T€OL
Xpva-OL
Xpva-eai
Xpva-at
Xpv(T€a XP^^^
-^pvcriijiv
Xpva-Siv
ypvcrioiv
Xpvorwv
Xpvaritxiv p^pt'o-wi/
Xpva-ioLS
Xpva-oi^
Xpvo-€aL<;
XpvaaL<;
Xp^<j(.oi<; XP^^OLS
)(pv(xiov<s )(pv(rov<s
Xpvdid^
XpvcoiS
Xpvo-ea p(/)€-o-a
368 APPENDIX.
€iivo\)S
welld
isposed
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
N.V.
evvovs evvovv
evvw
cvi/oi evvoa
G.
€VVOV
evvoLV
evviov
D.
€VV(0
evvoiv
evvoi<s
A.
evvovv evvovv
cww
evvovi evvoa
820. The Article, Adjective, demonstrative, and 'Rel-
ative Pronouns,
Singular.
Singular.
N.
6
V
TO
aVT09
avrrj
avTo
G.
TOV
T^S
TOV
avTov
avTrj^
avTOV
D.
TW
-^v
T(3
avTM
avTfi
avTio
A.
rov
TYIV
Dual.
TO
avTov
avrrjv
Dual.
avTO
N.A.
Toi
TW
TW
avTw
avra
avTO)
G.D.
Tolv
Tolv
TOtI/
avTolv
aVTOLV
avTolv
Pi URAL. Plural.
N.
oi
a^
TCt
aVTOL
avTai
avrd
G.
TWV
TWV
TWV
avToiV
avTu)v
avrCov
D.
TOtS
Tats
TOtS
avTot?
auTOt?
avTOts
A.
TOVS
TOS
rd
avTOvs
avras
airra
APPENDIX.
Singular.
N.
0VT09
avrrj
toi5to
G.
TOVTOV
ravrrjs
TOVTOV
D.
TOVTOJ
TaVTTf
TOVTCU
A.
TOVTOV
ravTTjv
TOVTO
369
N.V.
G.D.
Dual.
TOVTft) TOVTW TOVTO)
TOVTOLV TOVTOIV TOVTOLV
Plueal.
OVTOt aVTttt TaVTtt
TOVTWV TOVTCOV TOVTOiV
Tovrous TavTttts totJtois
TOVTOVS TttVTds TttVTa
Singular.
oSc
^Sc
ToSc
TOvSe
T^O-Sc
TOvSc
TwSc
ryhe
TwSc
TOvSc
TT^i/Se
Dual,
ToSc
TciSc
T(o8e
TwSc
TOiySc
TotvSc
ToZvhz
Plural.
atSc TttSc
TwvSe TwvSc
oiSc
TtOl/Sc
Toio^Sc Tttto-Se Toto-Sc
Tovo-Sc TttCrSc TttSc
Singular.
eKctvo?
eKCLvrj
iK€LVO
€K€tVoV
iK€lV7J9
CKCtVoV
€K€tVa)
iK€ivri
€K€LVW
cKCtvqv
iK€LV7]V
€K€tVO
Singular
.
59
V
o
o{;
^
oO
9
V
»
<?
riv
o
CKCtVO)
Dual.
kKUvta
Plural.
€K€tV<l)
€K€lVoiV
otv
Dual.
«f
to
oXv
Plural.
CKClVOt
CK€tvat
cKctva
Ol
at
a
iKCLVOiV
€K€tVwV
cKeiVojv
u>v
S>v
^1/
€K€tV0l9
€K€lVat9
€K€tVotS
oh
ah
ots
€K€tV0V9
€K€tVds
€/C€tva
24
. o^s
as
or
a
370
APPENDIX.
821. Consonant Declension. — Variations in the Sin-
pilar.
6 T]'Y€|i(aV
6 \Lr\v 6 8aCp>v
ilXapis
r\ cXttCs
(lyye^ov-)
(fJi'rjv-) (Saifxov-)
(xaptT-)
(cAttiS-)
guide
month divinity
grace
hope
8, N.
riy€jjLU)v
^yv haipniiv
Xdpts
IXttls
G.
rjycfjiovog
fJLTJVOS SaLfXOVOS
Xa/otTOS
eA^riSos
P.
riycfiovL
fl7]vl SaiJXOVL
XaptTi
^AmSt
A.
rjye/MOva
firjva Bcufxova
Xaptv
cATTtSa
V.
rjyefxwv
ixiqv BoLfxov
X'^P'^
IXttl
D. N.A.V.
rjycfiove
fxrjve Saifiove
XapLT€
iXTTiSe
G.D.
rjyefjiovoLV
fji-qvoLv SatfiovoLV ;(apiToti/
cAmSoti/
P. N.V.
■^y€ix6v€<;
fl7Jv€<S BaLfXOVi^
Xaptrcs
cATTtSes
G.
. T^yc/xovwv
fX7)vC)V SaLflOVOiV
' x^P"'^"'
cAttiSwv
D.
rjyeiioa-i
fvqa-i haifxocri
Xopto-t
iXTTLO-L
A.
Yjyeixovas
lirjva? 8at/xovas
Xa.pi'Tas
iXmBa<s
6 apxcov
r\x^^9 1] TpiTipiis ^ (sc. vavs)
(apxov-)
(x«p-) (
[rpirjpes-)
commander
hand
trireme
S. N.
apxoiv
X^'P
rptrjp-q^
G.
OLfiXOVTOq
X«/)os
Tpirjpov^ (rpujpco?)
I>.
apxpvTi
X€ipL
Tpi>7P« (^pt>ip")
A.
apXOVTU
Xclpa
Tpt>^p77 (rpn/jpea)
V.
apxoiv
X«P
TpLtjpiS
D. N.A.
apxovT€
Xelpe
rptripet (rptijpcc)
G.D.
apXOVTOLV ^(6^011/
rpL-qpoiv (rpirjpioiv)
P. N.V.
apxovTcq
XeTpc?
Tpiiqpu^ (Tpirip€€^
G.
apxovTdiv
X€ipC>v
TpLTjpoiv (rptrypcwv)
P.
. apxov(TL
Xepcrt
Tptrjpeo-t
A.
apxovra?
X^rpas
TpLT^peL? (rpLT^peas)
' Has recessive accent in the genitive dual and plural.
APPENDIX.
371
822. Participles, — (o Verbs,
XVWV (\V0VT-)
loosing
Singular.
N.V. Xvbiv Xvov(Ta Xvov
G. AvovTos \vov<Trj<i Xvovro^
D. XvovTL Xvovcrri Xvovri
A. Xvovra Xvovdav Xvov
Dual.
N.A.V. Xvovr€ Xvovcra Xvovre.
G.D. XvovTOLV Xvov(raiv Xvovtolv
Plural.
N.V. A.voi^€s Xi;ovo"at Xvovra
G. XvovTdiV ^vova-ixiv Avoi/twv
D. XvovcTi Xvovtrats 'Xvovcri
A. Arovras Xvovtrds Avovra
Xvo-as (Xvo-aia-)
having loosed
Singular.
AvcravTOS Avo-aoTys Xvctovto^s
XvcravTL Xvaao-y Xva-avri
Xvcravra Xvcaxrav Xvaav
Dual.
Xv(TavT€ Xv(ra(rd Xva-avre
XvadvTOiv Xvaaa-aiv Xv(rdvTOii
Plural.
Xv(ravT€<s Xvcrdo-aL Avcrai/ra
XvcrdvTOiv Xvadcrwv Xv(rdvT(ar
XvadcTL XvaaaraLs Xvadcri
XvaavTas Xvadads XvcravTa
XcXvKcas (AcAvKOT-)
having loosed
Singular.
N.V.
AeAuKws
XcXvKvta
XeXvKoq
G.
AcAvKOTOS
XcXvKVLd<s
AcAvKOTOS
D.
XeXvKOTL
XeXvKVLa
XeXvKOTt.
A.
XeXvKOTa
XcXvKvtav
Dual.
XeXvKOi
N.A.V.
XeXvKore
XcXvKvid
XeXvKore
G.D.
XeXvKOTOLV
XeXvKviaiv
XeXvKOTOlV
Plural.
N.V.
AcAvKores
XcXvKv7aL
XeXvKora
G.
XeXvKOTKOV
XeXvKvuiiV
XfXvKOTfOV
D.
XeXvKoa-L
XeXvKVLais
XeXvKoa-L
A.
At-AvKoras
AcAv/cvtas
AcAvKora
372
APPENDIX.
Tljliov (rifia-ovT-)
honoring
Singular.
N.V.
tI/awv Tt/two-a Tl/XWl/
G.
TLflWVTOS TlfJLOJ(rr}S rlflWVTOS
D.
TLfXWVTL Tl/JiMa-r) TtjMO)VTL
A.
rlfiwvTa rlfJiwaav rl/xiov
Dual.
N.A.V.
TijotwvTe rlix(ji<Td TifxCyvTe
G.D.
TlfxwvTOLV TLixwaraiv rlfX(i)VTOLV
Plural.
N.V.
TlfiwvTeq Tt/i-wo-at rifxC)VTa
G.
TlfJLWVTOiV TlfX0i(TCOV Tl/XtOVTWV
D.
rlixoio-L TLfKoa-aiq Tlfiwa-L
A.
TL/JLUtVTaS TLflWad? TlfJiWVTa
TTOIWV (ttoic-ovt-)
Singular.
TTOIWV TTOLOVCra TTOLOVV
TTOIOWTOS TrOLOVCYjS TTOtOWTOS
TTOLOVVTL TTOlOVCTrj TTOlOVVTi
TTOLOVVTa TTOLOXXraV TTOLOVV
Dual.
TTOLOvvre Trotovcrd Trotowre
TTOLOVVTOLV TTOtOVCTatV TTOtOWTOtiJ
Plural.
TToiovvres Trotovo-at Trotowra
TTOtOWTWV TTOtOVCrtOV TTOtOWTWl/
7roioT)a"t TTotovo-ai? Trotovcrt
TTOtOWTttS TTOlOVO-ds TTOtOVJ'Ta
823. Fartici;ples. — [ll Verbs,
OSV (oi/T
-)
SlSoiJS (8t8ovT
-)
being
giving
Singular
Singular.
N.V.
wv
ovo-a
5v
hihov^
SiSovcra
8t8ov
G.
OI/TOS
ovot;?
ovTog
StSwTOS
^lhoV(T7}S
8t8oi/Tos
D.
OVTl
ovo-t;
OVTl
8l8oi/Tt
8t8ovo-T7
8t8oi'Tt
A.
ovTa
ovcrav
Dual.
6v
8t8oVTtt
8i8oi)o-av
Dual.
8i8dv
N.A.V.
6vT€
ova-d
6vT€
8t8dj'T€
8t8oro-d
hl^6vT€
G.D.
OVTOIV
ova-aLv
Plural.
OVTOIV
8t8wTOtV
8t8oucraiv
Plural.
^ihoVTOlV
N.V.
vvres
ova-ai
ovra
8t8oVT€S
8t8ovo-at
St8di/Ta
G.
6vro>v
ovtrwv
OVTOiV
81801'Ttov
8t8oi;o-t(jv
8i8d^'Ta)i'
D.
overt
ovcrats
oval
8i8ovcrt
8t8ovo"ai9
8t8o{)<Tt
A.
ovTa<;
ovcrds
ovTa
8iSoi/Tas
St8oi;o-ds
8t8di'Ta
APPENDIX.
37a
l<rras (to-ravT-)
erecting
Singular.
N.V. ttrra? icTTao'a torav
G. to-ravTOs lo-rdo-rys tcTTai^ros
D. {(TTavTL icTTdcry Icttolvtl •
A. ia-TOLVTa la-Taa-av Icttolv
Dual.
N.A.V. tOTCtVTC i(TTd(Td l(TTOLVT€
G.D. tcrravTOtv lo-racrati/ la-TavTOLv
SciKVVS (8€tKia;i/T-)
Plural.
N.V.
G.
D.
A.
tcrraKTCs LaraaraL urravra
l(ndvT(jiv LcrraxTOiV icrravrtiiv
l(TTdcn to-Tdcrai9 IcrTdcn
tcrravTas tcrracrd? IcrroLVTa
Singular.
h€LKVV<S
SeLKvva-a BetKvvv
SeiKVVVTOS
BeLKvvar]^ BecKvvvTos
SUKVVVTL
BeLKvvcn} BeiKvvvTL
BcLKVVVTa
B€LKVV(raV bcLKVVV
Dual.
SeLKvvvre
ScLKvva-d SeLKvvvTe
BaKvvvTOLv SeiKvvaaiv BeLKVvvTotv
Plural.
BcLKVVVTe^
SiiKvvaaL BeiKvvvra
S€LKVVVT<J)V
SeiKVVaiOV BcLKVVVTiOV
B€LKVV(TL
BeiKvvcraLS BetKvva-L
SetKvwras
SctKvvcrds BcLKvvvTa
824. Adjectives of the Consonant or Consonant and
A Declensions.
€K<OV {kKOvr-)
XapiClS (xaptcvT-)
Singular.
Singular.
N.V.
CKWV
€Kova-a
CKOV
XO-pLCL^ ^apUcTO-a
XapUv
G.
D.
CKQVTO?
€/COVTt
cKOvcrr)
CKOVTOS
Ikovtl
XapUvTOS X'^pl€(T(Ty]^
yapUvTL )(apLi(T(Trj
XapUvTog
XapicvTL
A.
CKOVTtt
iKOva-av
Dual.
eKov
■)(apUvTa \apUcrcTav
Dual.
Xapcev
N.A.V.
CKOJ/T6
cKovcrd
C/COVT€
Xaptevre ^apLea-o-d
XapL€VT€
G.D.
Ikovtoiv
€Kov(raLV
Plural.
' €k6vT01V
XO-pt^.vroLV xs^pif-cra-aLV
Plural.
X(ipL€vroiv
N.
G.
D
A.
l/COVTCS
Ikovctl
c/covra?
€KOVO-at
cKovcrCiv
iKova-ats
€Kovads
CKovra
CKOVTtOV
iKOVCTL
CKOVTtt
XOipL€VT€<s )(apU(rcraL xP^pCevra
XapiivTWv xapL€a-CTOiV x'^pLivTtav
XpipUcTL ;(a/3tccro-ats xapU(TL
XCipL€vra<; ;j(apteo-o-ds ;(aptci/Ta
374
APPENDIX.
iraS (jravT
-)
€ll6ai|JLa)V {ivBaLfMOv-)
all
fortunate
Singular.
Singular.
N.
Tra?
irdora
Trdv
ivBaifiwv e^Sat/xov
G.
TravTO^
TrdcTT^S
Traj/Tos
€v8aLfXOVO<i
D.
TVaVTl
Traarj
TravTC
^vSaLfXOVL
A.
Trdvra
Traxrav
Trdv
evSaifxova evSaifxov
V.
evBaijxov
Dual.
N.A.V.
€v8aLfXOl^€
G.D.
Plural.
evvaiixovoLV
Plural.
N.
TTCtVTCS
Trda-at
TTOLVTa
ev8aLfxov€<s ivhaifxova
G.
TravTiov
Trdcrwv
TrdvTtnv
evSaL/xovwv
D.
iraa-L
TTacrats
Trdori
€vBaifJioai
A.
TrdvTa<s
Trao-d?
Trai/ra
ivSaLfMovas €vSaifiova
•iiSiis (-nBv.
■)
fJL€C1^(0V (fJL€L^OV-)
sweet
greater
Singular
Singular.
N.
^8i5s
TjSeia
■Y)^V
/ACi^cov jxei^ov
G.
^Seos
^8€tas
^Uos
/Aet^ovos
D.
^Sei (^Set) "^Scia
yfUi(yjUi)
fiction
A.
'fjSvv
T^Seiav
y)^v
fiei^ova, fxei^ui fxct^ov
V.
^8v'
Dual.
■Y}hv
Dual.
N.A.V,
. rj8€i(rjM€) rjScLd
rjSel (i^Sec)
jxcL^ove
G.D.
rj8eoLV
Plural.
r)SeoLv
IXuCflVOLV
Plural.
N.V.
rjhcts {rjB
€cs) rjBcLai
rjoia
/X€L^OV€S, fX€L^OV<i /JLCL^OVa, fXU^Oi
G.
rjSiuyv
TjScLWV
r]S€(DV
lXCit,6vOiV
B.
TjSeaL
rjSeiais
rjSia-L
/JLiL^Oa-L
A.
^Scts
rjSeid^
rjBia
fiei^ovas, fiii^ovs fiu^ova, fiei^u)
APPENDIX.
375
PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS.
825. Present System o/Xvo), loose.
Active.
Present.
Imperfect.
Middle and Passive.
Present. Imperfect.
r S. 1
XvOtf
eXvov
Xvofiai
iXvOflTJV
2
Xuets
eXves
Xiei
^X^ov
6 3
Xdet
eXve
Xverai
4Xv€TO
'^ D- 2
Xveroi
> eXverov
XvcaBov ^XvfaSov
•^ 3
Xvcro*
' iXveTTjv
XveaBov <Xvi(r6r]v
^ P. 1
\vOIX€U €\vOfl€V
Xv6fi€6
a fXvofieBa
2
^ . 3
Xuere
iXvere
Xveadt
dXvfade
Xvouo-t eXiJoi/
"KvOVTOl ^XVOVTO
Present.
Present.
f S. 1
2
Xvw
IXvafiai
Xvr]S
^VT]
^ 3
Xtri
}\.VT]T(n
D. 2
Xvt]TOV
^vri^Oov
1 ^
XvTJTOV
'
>.vr}(r6op
-^ P. 1
T 2
Xva)H€P
^vonfieda
Xvrjre
T^vrja-de
I 3
Xvaxrt
Tivannm
r s. 1
Xvocfii
XvoiixTjv
2
Xvois
'Xvoto
03 3
Xioi
7<VOLTO
•^ D. 2
XVOITOP
\6oicr6o9
t 3
XvOtTIJV
T^voicrOrjv
P. 1
Xvoifiev
XvoifieOa
2
XvOlT€
XvoKxde
3
Xvoiev
^VOIVTO
f S. 2
XOf
Xi5w
^ 3
\V€T(0
Xvea-Bu
■^ D. 2
Xverov
T^vetrdov
I 3
XveTcov
"XveaBcow
S P. 2
X^ere
-XieaBe
T 3
Xvovrav
"kveaBav
Infinitive.
\i)€CU
XveaBai
1
Participle.
Xvo)!', -ouo-a, -ov
Xvofi^vos, -7, -ov
376
APPEI^DIX.
826. Future System
of \vtA.
827. First Aorist System
of Avw.
Active.
Middle.
Active.
Middle.
¥uture.
First Aorist.
r
S. 1
Xi(Ta>
Xixrofiat
tXitra
f\v(rdfiT)v
2
Xwrf49
Ua€L
eXvaas
iXvcra
i
a
Xvcret
Xvaerat
eXvo-f
eXvaaro
*"E
D. a
XvO-fTOI*
\v<t€(tBov
fXiaarov
iXvaraadov
.2
rc3
3
Xvaerov
XvaeaOov
(XvaaTriv
iXvadadrjv
p. 1
\v(TOllfU
XvaofifBa
eXTuaafieu
fXvadfieda
.
s
XvafTC
Xuo-eo-^6
eXvcrare
fXvaao-de
3
Xvaovai
Xvaovrai
eXiicrav
tXvaavTo
r
S. 1
Xiaco
Xvaoifun
1
2
Xva-rjs
Xvaj)
a3
3
Xvarj
'hvarjTat
"1
D. 2
XvarjTOV
Xwrrja-Oop
S
^
3
XvajjTov
Xva-rja-dov
c^
P. 1
Xvaafxev
Xvadiixeda
2
XvaijTf
Xvarjade
l
3
XvamtTi
Xvo-atmat
■
S. 1
Xvaotfxt
Xva-otftrjv
Xv(ratfit
Xva-aifxrjv
2
XvaoLs
Xvaoio
Xv(T(tas,Xv(raii
Xv(rato
2^
3
XvtTOI.
XvaoiTo
Xv(rft€, Xwrai
XvcraiTO
__>
D. 2
XtaaiTov
\vaoia6ov
XwratTOV
XvaataBov
'B*
3
XvaoiTrjv
\vaoL(Tdr]v
XviTairrfV
Xvaaiadrjv
i
F. 1
Xuaot/Mfi*
XvaoifxeBa
Xvaaifiev
XvcratfieBa
2
Xuaoire
Xvaoiade
Xv(raiT€
XvaaKrBe
I
3
Xiaoiev
XvaoiVTQ
Xvactav,Xvaat€v
Xva-aivTO
r
S. 2
Xva-ov
Xvarai
3
Xva-arco
XvadtrOto
'■^
D. 2
XwraTov
XvcracrOov
ft
a.
3
Xv(T&ra>v
XxxrdaBwv
1
P. 2
XvaoTf
XvaaaOe
I
3
XvadvTOiv
Xvo'da-dcDV
Infinitive.
Xva-eip
XvaeaOat
Xva-at
XvaaaOai
Participle.
Xvcrcoj*, -ovcaj
Xvaofjifvos, -rj,
Xvaas, -traaa,
Xvo-a/ifws, -ly,
APPENDIX.
377
828.
First Perfect System
of Xuw.
Active.
829. Perfect Middle Si/s-
tem of Xvta.
Middle and Passive.
First Perf. Pirst Plupf.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
•
S. 1
XeXv/ca
iXiXvKT), -(IP
XiXvfiai iXeXvfirjp
2
TieXvKos eXeXvKTjs, -fis
XcXvaai iXeXvao •
^
3
XeXuKe
eXeXvKd
XeXvTui iXeXvTO
'"i
D. 2
XeXuKaroi/ eXeXufceiroj/
XeXvadov iXeXvaOov
r3
3
XeXvAcaroi/ eXeXvKeirrjv
XeXvadop fXfXvaBrjp
1
P. 1
XeXvKafiev eXeXvKci^fv
XeXvfieOa eXfXvfifOa
2
XeXvKQTc iXfXvKeiTe
XeXvade eXeXvarde
3
\e\vKaai iXeXvKcaau
XeXvprai iXeXvirro
First Perfect.
Perfect.
r
S. 1
XeXvKCi}
XeXvfiiPos (-T), -op) S>
1
2
XeXvKjjs
h
•ri
3
XeXvKTj
s
•^
a
D. 2
XeXvKIJTOV
XeXv/ieVo) (-a, -(o) rJTov
113
3
XfXvKTfTOV
^TOP
:3
C/3
P. 1
XeXvKconfV
XfXvfiepoL (j-ai, -a) 2>fi€P
I
2
XeXvKTjTe
^re
3
XeXvKOiai
2>(ri
-
S. 1
XcXvKOlfJLt
XfXvfiepos {-r), ■ op) etrjp
2
XeXvKois
firjs
(U
3
XeXvKoi
/^rj
•I
D. 2
XeXvKOtrov
XfXv/MeVo) (-a, -a?) elrop or (Itjtop
^
^
3
XeXvKOlTTJP
" flTTjP flrjTTJP
O
P. 1
XeXvKoifjiev
XcXv/ievot (-at, -a) elfx^p f'lrjfifp
1
I
2
XeXvKoire
" cIt€ flrire
3
XeXvKoiep
" fhp fXrjaap
r
S. 2
XiXvKe
XfXvao
ai
>
3
XcXvKerm
XeXvaOo)
D. 2
XfXvKerop
XeXvadop
P.
3
XeXvKercop
XeXvadojp
s
P. 2
XcXvKfTf
XeXvcrBe
t
3
\eXvK
fTioaav or XeXvKovrtop
XeXvaOdP
Infinitive.
XeXvK€Pai
XiXvaOai
Participle.
XeXvKas, -Kvla, -kqs
XfXv^epos, -T}, -OP
378
APPENDIX.
830.
Ferf. Mid. Sifstem
831. First Passive System
ofXtxo (Fut Perf.).
ofkim.
Middle aud Passive. Passive.
Future Perfect.
First Aorist.
First Future.
' S. 1
\e\vaoyMi,
iXv6r)V
XvOfja-ofiai
• 2
\(\v(rei
iXvdrjs
XvOrj(T€l
<
3
XeXvcrerai
iXvOr)
Xvdrj(TeTai
'■+■
a
I D. 2
\e\vaea6ov
iXvOrjTOV
Xv6rjcr€(r6op
3 3
XeXvaea-dov
tXvdrjTTjV
XpOrjo-eaSop
1
3 P. 1
XeXva-oneda
eXvdrjuep
XvBrjaofieda
2
XeXvaeaOe
iXvOrjTe
Xvffrjo-ea-Oe
3
XeXvo-oPTM
iXvBrjdav
XvOtjaovTcu
r s. 1
2
XvdSi
Xvdfjs
? 3
Xvdfj
t
I D. 2
XvO^TOP
• 1-
I 3
XvdfJTOP
^
I P. 1
Xv6a)fxep
a
2
3
Xvdrjre
XvdaxTi
' S. 1
XeXvaoiixrjv
Xvdeirjp
Xv9r]aoifiT]p
2
XeXvaoio
XvOeiTji
Xvdrjaoio
1
a
3
XeXvaoiTo
XvOetr)
Xv6r](TOLTO
(3
i D. 2
XeXvaoia-dov
Xvdelrov or Xv6eifjTop
Xv6j)(JOi(TdoP
+
I 3
XeXvaoiaOrju
XvdeiTTJP XvdfirjTTJP
XvdrjcroiaBrjp
C
> P. 1
XeXvaoi^eda
Xvddfiep XvOeirjixep
Xvdria-oifieBa
2
XeXva-oiaOe
XvOelre XvOeLrjTe
XvOrja-oiaOe
3
XeXvaoivTo
XvOeiep Xv6drj(Tap
XvOrjaoiPTo
.(
' S. 2
XverjTi
J
3
XvOfiToa
1
D. 2
XvdrjTOP
a
. 3
XvdfjTap
1—
P. 2
Xv6r)T€
I
3
XvOeuTcop
Infin.
\€Xv(T€(r6ai
Xvdiivai
XvOfja-ecrOai
Partic.
XeXva-ofxcpoi, -77,
-ov
Xvdeii, -€io-a, eV
XvOrja-ofxepos, -fjt
-OP
APPENDIX.
379
832. Future System of Liquid
Verbs : dyye'AAoj (ay-
ycA-), announce.
S.
S.
■^ D.
S.
Active.
dy-yeXco
dyyeXeiff
dyyeXei
dyyeXeiroi'
3 dyyeX 61701/
1 dyyeXoO/Lifi'
2 dyyeXfire
3 dyyeXovcrt
1
3
1
2
3
1 dyyeXoi/it,
dyyeXoiJji'
2 dyyeXotS",
ayyiKolr]^
3 dyyeXoi,
dyyeXoi'/;
2 dyyfXoIroi'
3 dyycXoiTT/y
1 dyyeXoT/x€i/
2 dyyfXoire
3 dyyeXoTfi'
f S. 2
^ 3
-§ D. 2
I P. 2
I 3
Infill. dyyeXfti/
Partic. dyyfXo)!/,
-o{)(ra, -ovv
Middle.
dyyeXov/xat
ayyikel, ayyikrj
dyyeXeirat
dyyeXfiCT^of
dyyfXelo-^oi/
ayyiKovfjLe6a
ayyikclcrde
ayyekovvTM
dyyiKoiiirjv
dyyeXoIo
dyyeXoTro
dyyeKoladou
dyyeXoiadrjv
dyyeXoifieda
dyyeXolaSc
dyyckdivTO
dyyiKflcrBai
dyyikovjxivoSf
833. First
Liquid
(dyycX-
Active.
^yyetXa
fjyycCKas
rfyyeiXe
TjyyfiXarov
TjyyeiKaTTju
riyyeiXafxev
rjyydXaTi
rjyycCKav
dyyftXo)
dyyetXi/ff
dyyf/Xj;
dyy^ikqTOV
dyyeiXrjTov
dyyeiXcofxeu
dyyeiXj/re
dyyeiXcofft
Jorist System of
Verbs : dyyeXAw
■), announce.
Middle.
^yyetXa/Ajyv
r/yy€iXa>
^yyetXaro
rj-yyeiXaa-Oov
TjyyeiXdadrjp
TjyyeiXdixeda
rjyyciXacrOe
TjyyeiXapTO
dyyeiXco^ai
dyyfiXiy
dyyfiXijTai
dyyfiXrjarOov
dyyfiX-qcrQov
dyyciXoiyifOa
dyyelXrja-Oe
dyyfiXavrai
dyyeiXaifii dyyeiXaifirfV
-ri, -ov
dyyeiXais,
dyyciXeias
dyyeiXai,
dyyeiXeie
dyyeiXaiTov
dyyeiXaiTrju
dyyeiXaifiev
dyyeiXuLTe
dyyfiXaiev,
dyyfiXetcw
&yy€i\ov
dyyeiXdra
dyyeiXaTov
dyyeiXdrayv
dyyeiXare
dyyfiXdvTav
dyyeiXat
dyyeiXoff,
-da-a, -av
dyyeiXaio
dyyeiXaiTO
dyy^CXaiaOov
dyy(iXaL(r0r)V
dyyeiXaifieBa
dyyeiXaiade
dyyeiXaivTO
ayyeiXai
dyyeiXdaBo)
dyyiiXaaOov
dyyeiXdcrBoiv
dyy€iXa(rde
dyyeiXdcrBav
dyyeiXacrdai
dyy€iXdfJLevo5t
-r), -ov
380
APPENDIX.
83 4 . Seco nd Aorist System
of \€LTro) (AtTT-), leave.
Active. Middle.
835. Second Perfect Si/stem
ofXuTTdi (AtTT-), leave.
Active.
Second Aorist.
Second Perf. Second Plup.
f";
eXmov
eXiTTOfJii^u
XeXoiTra iXfXoiTrrj, -eiv
TKnres
eXiTTov
XiXomag iXfXoiTrqs, -ets
i 3
eXiTTf
eXlneTo
XeXoiTTf eXfXoiTrei
•| D. 2
iXiTreTov
eXineaBov
XeXoinarov iXfXoineTov
;§ 3
i\m€Tr]v
iXnreadrjv
XeXcLrraTov eXeXonrfTrjv
^ P. 1
iXiTrofJLfv
iXtTTOficda
XeXoliraixeu iXtXoiTreiJLfv
I I
eXiTrere
iXineo-Oe
XeXolnare eXeXolnere
eXiTTOv
iXlTTOVTO
XeXoiTrdai iXeXoineaap
Second Perfect.
['■I
XlTTO)
Xinayfiai
XeXoiVo)
"kiTTIJS
Xiirrj
XeXoiTTrjs
> 3
\i7rr}
XiinjTai
XeXoiTTTj
1 D. 2
\l7rr]Tov
XiTTr^aOov
XeXoinrjTov
1 P-1
Viivr^TOv
XiTTTja-Bov
XeXoinrjrov
Xiiroifxcv
XiTTOifxeda
XeXoiTrafjLfv
'^ 3
\inr]Te
Xinija-de
XeXoiTTrjTe
XlTTOXTl
\ina)VTai
XeXoiTrtofTi
r s. 1
XlTTOlfll
Xiiroifirjv
XeXoiTrot/it
2
XlTTOlP
Xiiroio
XeXotTTois
« 3
X ITTOL
XlTTOlTO
XeXoiTTOl
•5 D. 2
\liroiTOV
XlTTOlO-BoV
XeXoinoiTOP
4 3
Xnrolnju
Xittoio-Btjv
XeXoLTTOlTTjV
p. 1
XlTTOllXfV
XtTTOLfxeBa
XeXotTToi/ifi/
2
XtVotTf
XiTTOiaOe
XeXoiVoiTf
I 3
Xinoiep
XinoivTo
XfXoinoicv
r s. 2
XtTTf
XlTTOV
[Xe'XotTre
gi 3
XtTTfTO)
XiTTfo-day
XeXoineTca
*^ D. 2
XlTTfTOI/
XineaBov
XeXoiTTCTOV
1. 3
XiTrero)!/
XiTTicrBaiV
XeXoinerau
S P. 2
XtTTfTf
XiTreaBe
XeXoiTrere
L 3
Xtn'OKTO)!/
Xinea-Bmu
XeXotnoirroiv]
Infin.
XtTreii*
Xmea-Bai
XeXoiTTevai
Partic.
XiTToyv, ovaa,
XlTTOfxeVOS,
XeXonras, -via,
•6v
-T], -ov
-6s
APPENDIX.
381
836. Perf. Mid. Sys. of Pure
Verbs with added a-: kcAcvcd
837. Perf. Mid. Sys, of
Labial Mute Verbs :
(kcAcv), command.
XctVo) (AtTT-), leave.
Middle and Passive.
Middle and Passive.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
s.
D.
P.
1
2
3
, 2
3
1
2
3
KCKiXfvaixai
KCKeXevaat
KeKfXevcTTai
KeKcXevadov
KfKeXevaBov
KfKeXfvaneBa
KeiceXevo-de
K€KeXev(rfi€Voi
fKeKeXeva-firjv
fKeKeXevao
eKCKeXeva-TO
eKeneXcvcrdop
eKeKfXevaOrjv
€K€K€XeV<TfXf6a
€K€K€X€V(t6€
K€KfXfV(TfXeVOl
XeXeifxiMat
XeXeiyjrai
XeXenrrai
X€X€icf)Bov
XeXci(p6ov
XeXeifififBa
XeXeicpBe
XeXeififisvoi
eXfXeififirjv
iXeXeiyIro
iXfXcilTTO
iX€X(l(l>0OV
eXeXfiipetjv
eXcXeififxeda
iXeXeKpOe
XeXeififxhoi
€l(ri
^(Tau
uai
rja-av
Perfect.
K€KfXevcrfi€voi 2i, etc.
KeKeXevafxevo) rJTov, etc.
KCKeXeva-fievoi S)fX€V, etc
Perfect.
XeXeifXfieuos &, etc
XfXdfifiepco rjTOV, etc.
XeXet/ix/iei'ot Ziyifv, etc.
K^KeXcvayxvos f'lTjv, etc.
K€KeX€V(rfi,€VCt} €LTOV, CtC.
KfKeXeva-fxevoi eififp, etc.
XeXei^jxeuos eirjv, etc
XeXeififxevo) eirou, etc
XeXeiufxevoi €i/X6i/, etc.
f S. 2
K€KiXev(ro
XeXfi-v/ro
t 3
KeKeXevado)
XeXeiijidco
i D. 2
KeKeXevaBov
XeXci(f)dop
I 3
KeKeXevaOcdv
XeXeicfydtap
s P. 2
KfKeXevcrOe
XeXei0^6
I 3
KeKcXevaBoiv
X(X€l(f)da)P
Infin.
KfKeXevadai
XeXc^Bai
Partic.
KeKeXevcfievos, -t], -ov
XcXet/i/ifi/oy, -1], -ov
Future Perfect.
Future Perfect.
ndicative.
KCKiXfiKrofiai, etc
XeXeiyj/ofiai, etc
>ptative.
KfKiXcvaoifirjv, etc
. .XeXfiylroifiijp, etc
nfinitive.
KfKiXev(T€(T6ai
XeXelyj/caBaL
*articiple.
KeKfXevaofifvos, -rj, -op
XeX€i\l/6fi€Pos, -Tj, -o¥
382
APPENDIX.
838. Perfect Middle System
of Palatal Mute Verbs :
TdtTTO) (ray-), arrange.
839. Perfect Middle System
of Lingual Mute Verbs:
irudta (ttlO-), persuade.
O
I
Middle and Passive.
Middle and Passive.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
S. 1
2
rerayfiai
rera^ai
eTerdynrjit
CTCTa^O
TreneLO-ixai
ir€ireL(raL
€7r€7rei(Tiir]v
€7r€7T€l<TO
3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
TeraKTai
reraxdou
TiTuxOov
Terdyixeda
TCTaxBe
eTeraKTO
ereraxdov
eT€TdxOr]v
ererdyufBa
ereraxOe
TreTTftcrrai
ireTreiadov
TreiTfLaOov
TTeireia^eda
neneiade
enenfiaro
eTTeneia-dou
fTrenfiaOrju
encTreiofifda
3
T€Tayfxevoi eicri
or TerdxaTai
rerayixevoi rjcrav
or irtTdxcLTo
TTeTTfLO-fieVOl
elai
Trenetafievoi
■qaav
Perfect.
Perfect.
S.
D.
P.
T€Tayn€vos &, etc.
TSTayfievco rjTOV, etc.
TCTayfievoi Sifiev, etc.
n(7rei(TH€vos
TreTreicr/MeVcD
TTfnCKTfJLeVOl
a, etc.
rJTOV, etc.
afxcp, etc.
s.
D.
P.
r s. 2
^ 3
I 3
B P. 2
L 3
lufin.
Partic.
TfTayfxevos ftrjv, etc
T€Tayfxev(o cltov, etc.
rerayfievoi elfiev, etc.
Tera^o
T€Tdx0<o
T€TaxBov
Terdx^ciiV
Terax&c
TCTdxOav
rcTaxOai
TeTayfievos, -tj, -ov
TTfTTdO-fXiVOS ftr]P, etc.
Trene Lo-fievo) etroi/, etc.
TreTreio-fievoi eifiev, etc
TreTTft (TO
ireTreiaOco
iriircKTBov
TTfTreicrdayv
TieTreicrde
TTfTTUaBai
TreTTfia-ixevos, -rj, -ov
Indicative.
Optative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Future Perfect.
reTo^ofiai
rera^oifiijv
reTa^eaOai
T€Ta^6fX€U0S, -T], -OV
Future Perfect.
No Future Perfect.
APPENDIX. 383
840. Perfect Middle System 841 . Perfect Middle System
of TAquid Verbs : of Liquid Verbs :
dyyeXXo) (dyycX-), announce, ^atVw (<^aj/-), show.
Middle and Passive. Middle and Passive.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
j
S. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
3
^yyeX/iat f}yyeXfxr]V
rjyyeXa-ai ^yyeXao
rjyyiXraL ffyyeXro
rjyycXBov rjyyiXBov
rjyyeXBov rjyyeXBrjv
TjyyeXfifBa rjyyiX^eBa
rjyyikBe yyyeXBe
fjyyfXfievoi rjyyeXfjevoi
rrecfyaafjiat. enetpdafJLrjp
7r€<f>aPTai iir€(f)dpTo
7recf)apBop fjreipdvBop
7re<f)apBop (nf(pdvBr)P
iT€cf)d(rn€Ba en€(j)d(TH(Ba
necfiapBe errecjiavBe
Trecfiaafifpoi irecfiao-fievoi
€io-( ^aap
fiai ^crap
Perfect.
Perfect.
r
S.
D.
P.
^yycX^epos a, etc.
rjyyeXfiepo) tjtop, etc.
rjyyeXfi^poi afiep, etc
7r€(})a(TficP05 S), etc.
7r€(f)a<Tixepa) ^top, etc
7r€cl)a(rixipoi &fi€Uf etc.
r
S.
D.
P.
^yyeX/xevo? f tTyi/, etc.
rjyycXfxePco €itop, etc
fyyyeXfxePoi fifxtp, etc
7re</)ao-fiei/op firjv, etc
Trapaa-fiepoi citop, etc
nfCJyaafiepoi tlfievy etc
r
i
S. 2
3
D. 2
3
P. 2
3
^yyfXo-o
^yyeX^oj
^yyfX^oi'
^yyfX^Q)!/
rlyy€\B€
r]yyeXB(op
Lacking.
ire(f)dpB(o
7re(f)apBop
Tr€(f)dpBa)V
7re(f)apB€
7re(f)dvB(ov
Infin.
rjyyeXBai
TTfcfiduBai
Partic
ffyyeXfUPos, -?;, ov
ire(f)aa-iJL€POS, -7, -ov
No Future Perfect.
No Future Perfect.
384
APPENDIX.
842. Second Passive System of ^aiVw (^av-), show.
Passive.
Second Aorist.
Second Future.
r s. 1
2
€(f)dvtjv
(f)avfj(rofiai
i<pdvrjs
(f)avr]aeL
6 3
€(f)dvr}
cf)apr]<TeTai
■^ I>-2
e(l)dvr]Tov
(f)avria€a6op
1 3
€(f)aVTJTT]V
(f)avr)(T€(r6op
A T.1
€(f>dvr]fi€U
<}>avT)a6fie6a
2
3
ecf)dvr}r€
<f)avrjUfad€
€(f)din}(rav
<j)apT]a-oPTai
f S. 1
2
(f)av(o
<f>avfjs
.■■
t 3
ipavsi
"1 I>-2
(fiavrJTOP ,
.1 3
(jiav^Tov
1 ^-1
<f)avS}fi€v
"^ 2
3
^avrJTe
(^avSxTL
r ^- ^
2
<f)aVHT)V
<f>aprj(roifj.r)P
<pav€ii]s
(papf](roto
(paveiT)
<f)aP1](TOlTO
.§.D. 2
(jiavelrov or <l)av€iT}TOP
<Pavr]crota6op
% ^
tpaueiTrjv (f)avei^Tqv
<j)apr](roi(r$r}P
9 P. 1
<j)av€7fiev (j)av€ir}ix€P
<f)avr}(TOLix€0a
2
(jjavclre (pavfLrjre
(pavrjaoia-de
L 3
(^ave^ev (jiaveirjaap
(jyaprja-otPTO
r s. 2
^ 3
cjidvrjdi
<f)apr}T(o
2 D. 2
(j)dvr]TOP
1 ^
<pavr)T(OP
^ p. 2
({)dv7)Te
I 3
(jiaP€VTa>p
Infin.
* (fiaPYJpai
(ftap^a-eaBai
Pariic.
<f)ap€is, -ei(ra, -tp
(f)airr)(T6fjLfpos, -rj, -oP
APPENDIX.
385
843. Present System o/Tlfidio, honor.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
r s.
1
2
3
(rTfidoi)
(rlixdeis)
(rTfidei)
Tl/XO)
rlfxa
(TijUaojLiai)
" (rifxdei, Tifidjj)
(rifideTai)
TlfiaTai
D.
2
3
(zLiideTOp)
(rlfideTOv)
Tlfxarov
TLjJ.dTOV
(Tlfid€ar9ov)
{Tifidca-dov)
rliddadov
rlfidaOov
P.
1
2
3
(rTlidofxev)
(rlfjidere^
(rlfidova-L)
rlixay/jLep
Ti^dre
(rTixaojjLeOa)
(Tiixdea-de)
(rifidovTai)
TLfiayfjLfda
Tifxccvrai
-3
Imperfect.
Imperfect.
s.
1
2
3
(fTifiaov)
(irtfiafs)
(cTt/x.af)
erifids
eTifxa.
(^eTifidov)
(eVr/iaero)
€TllJ.O}fiT]V
fTlfJLO)
erifMaTo
D
2
3
(cTifideTov)
(Jrlyiairr^v)
CTLfJidTOV
eTLfidTrfv
(eTLfidfadou)
(irlfJiaeaBrju)
€Ttnd.(r6ou
iTLfiaaOrjv
P.
1
2
3
(^eTifidoixev
(eVt/xdere)
(eVt/xaof)
€TlfxS)fl€V
erTixdre
(JrlixaoiJLfda)
(^Tlixdeade)
(jTljxdovTo)
€TiiJid(Tde
€Ttfia)VTO
Present.
Present.
- S.
1
2
3
(rTfidoi)
(TTfidrjs)
(Tl^idrj)
rTfxag
rTixa
(ri/iacD/iat)
(jTudrj)
(jlyidrjTai)
TlfiafJUll
rljjiaTai
1 ^
IS*
2
3
(rTnarjTov)
{rtfidrjTOv)
TL^drov
(TLfxdrja-dov)
(TlfxdT)<T6ov)
rX^daBov
rl^dcrBov
^ p
1
2
3
(TlfldiOflfv)
(TlixdrjTe)
(rindaxTi}
TLfl&IJLeV
rlixdre
25
{TLfiad)ixfda)
(rTfjidrja-Be)
{rlfidcovTai)
TinoDfxeOa
TTfxdcrOe
TljJlCOVTai
386
APPENDIX,
S. 1
2
3
D. 2
P. 1
2
-4-3
a,
o s. 1
2
D. 2
P. 1
2
3
Present Sydetn of rlfxam). — continued.
Active.
Present.
(r'yidoijxC)
(Ti/iaot)
{rifxdoiTov)
(rifiaoLTrjv)
(rTfjtdoiixeu)
(ri/idoiTe)
{Tifxdotev)
or
(jlyLaoLTjv)
{TifiaoiTjiy
(rlfiaoiT})
{TtfUtOlTfTOu)
(rTfxaoirjTrju)
(rifiaoirjfifv)
(rTfiaoirfTe)
{rlixaoirja-av
TtfAWS
TtfiaTOV
TlfKpTTJV
TtfimfJiev
TlflCOTJU
TtlXtpTJS
[rlfiarfTou
TifimrjTTjv]
Middle and Passive.
Present.
(rtfxaoinTjv)
(TLfxdoio)
(jLiidoiTo)
(jTudoKTBov)
(jl^ao'i(r6r)v)
(TTfxaoiixfBa)
(jlfxdotcrBi)
(jifxdoivTo)
Tifxafxrjv
r s. 2
k ^
I D. 2
^ p.
(jtfJiafTco^
(TLfJideTOu)
(rlfiasTcou)
(r'udfTe)
(rlfjiaovTcov)
Tifia
rlfiaTM
rTfioTov
Tifxarav
rlixare
rTjXOiVTOiV
(r'udov)
(rtixaeo-Boi)
(rtjudfo-^ov)
{TLfxafO-Owv)
(rtixdeo-Be)
(jlfxaiaBuiv)
Tifxa}
TifidaBbJ
TifiaaBnu
Tiix&aBoou
Infin.
(rCfideip)
Tifxav
(rtfjidecrBai) TifiaaBai
Partic. ] F.
(N.
(tipimv)
tifiSiv
(rTfia&fx&tos^)
TipLCdHtVQf
(tifMdovffa)
Tificiaa
(TlfiOOfl&^tf)
Tl,fi.(Ofl€Vr)
(rindov)
Tlflibv
(rTfino^fuov)
TIfJidiflfVOV
APPENMX.
as?
844. Present System ofirouia, do^ make.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
'S.
1
2
3
(jrouai)
(TTOtcVts)
(TTOieet)
TTOlS)
TTOlds
TTOtel
(nouec, TTOierj)
(rroUeTai)
til
D.
2
3
(TTOi/eroi')
(Troteeroi/)
Troielrov
TTOielrov
(noueadov)
(jrouiaOov)
noi€i(r6ov
TTOLflaOoV
P.
1
2
[noiioiievy
TTOtetre
(TToifOfieOa)
TroLOVjjicOa
iroielaOe
c
3
(noieova-i)
TTOtOVO-t
(iroUoPTai)
noiovuTai
Imperfect
Imperfect.
H
's.
1
2
3
(eTToUov)
(eVoiees)
(fVoi'ee)
€irOLOVU
enoieis
eiroiei
(fnouofiriv)
(enoifov)
eiroiovfirjv
erroiov
D.
2
3
(cVoteerov)
iiroifiTov
cTTOLeirrjv
(JnoueaOov)
QfToifeadrjv)
inoulaOov
enouiaOrju
P.
1
2
inoiovfieu
(eVotfo/Lie^a)
(eVoteeo-^e)
€7roiovfie6a
,
3
(iiro'ieov)
inoiovv
(eVoteoKTo)
iiroiovvTO
Present
Present.
' s.
1
(rroifo})
TTOIO)
(noUoifiat)
TTOtW/iat
2
(7rOL€T)s)
iroifis
{noieij
TTOirj
3
(noier])
TTOLTJ
(iroierjTai)
TioirJTai
1 ^'
2
(noLcrjTOv)
noirjTov
(jTour}(T6ov)
TToi^a-dov
3
(noi€T}TOv)
TTOlfjTOV
(noUrjadou)
TToirja-Bop
f P..
1
(TrfttLcfitv)
voiafxev
- X^oitafif^a)
iroiui^LeBa
2
(noitriTf)
TTOl^Tt
(TTOitrjaOe)
TrmrftrBe
,
3
(noucoai)
TTOiaXTl
(TTOieoJi/rat)
noiwvrai
388
APPENDIX.
Present Sptem of-n-oiiw.
Active.
— continued.
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Pre>
sent.
s.
1
(TTOlioifll)
\jTOLo2fll
(TToieoiiJLrjv)
iroi.oiiJ.rjv
2
(TTOieois)
iroiols
{noLeoio)
noLoio
3
(nuieoi)
noLol]
(noUoiTo)
ttoioIto
D.
2
(Troi.eoi.Tov)
ttoioItov
(ttoUoktOov)
7roioicr6ov
3.
(TTOieoiTrjv)
TTOioirrjv
(7rouoi(T$i]v)
noioiadrjv
P.
1
2
(nOt€OlfJi€v)
(ttoicouc)
TTOlolflCV
TTOLolre
(nouoifxeda)
(TTOieoiade)
TroioifieSa
TTOLolade
3
(nuieoiev) iroioUv
(noieoivTo)
TTOlolvTO
S.
1
2
3
(TTOieoirjv)
(TToieoirjs)
(TToieoir))
TToioirju
TTOioirjS
noioiT)
•
D.
2
3
(noicoiijTov) [TroioiTjTov
(irOlCOirjTTjv) TTOlOirjTTJu]
P.
1
iirouo'ir^ficv) \_7roLoir)^€v
2
(noieoirjTe)
noioir]T€
3
{TTOUoir](Tav)
TToioirjaav^
S.
2
(iroUe)
noUi
(TToteov)
ITOIOV
3
(jroi€eT(o)
TTOieiTO)
(noieeo-Oai)
Troieiada)
D.
2
(noiefTov)
tvouItov
(noieeaOov)
noLela-dov
3
(iroiefTtov)
TTOKITCOV
(n0l€€(T6(0v)
noLeiadcov
P.
2
(TTOieere)
TTOlUTe
(noueo-dc)
TToiflaBe
3
(jroicovTav)
TTOlOVPTOiP
(TTOiecadcov)
TTOiciadcov
(iToieetv) noielp
iroikecrOai
7TOi€ia6ai
r M. (jrroieav) Trotmv
Partic. < F. (Troieovcra) Troiovcra
V N. (TTOteOJ/) TTOIOVU
(iroieofifvos) TTOiovfievos
(TTOieofxevT}) TroiovfxevTi
(TTOlfOfXeuOv) TTOlOVfieVOU
APPENDIX.
389
845. Present System ofSrjXou), make clear.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
S. 1
2
3
(8i]X6a>) 8riXa>
(5?;Xdeiy) 8qXols
(S^Xdtt) brjXol
(8r]X6oixaL)
(fij^Xdei, 8r]X6r])
(8riX6€Tai)
8rjXoviJiai
8r)Xoi
8rjXovTai
D. 2
3
(drjXoeTOv) drjXovTov
(8r]X6€TOu) driXovTov
(8TjX6ea6ov)
(ST/Xdecr^oi/)
8r)Xov(r0ov
8rjXovo-6ov
P. 1
2
3
(^8r)X6ofi€v) 8T]XoVfl€V
(SfjXdfre) 8r)XovT€
(PrjXoovai) 8T)Xovai
(8riXo6fX€ea)
(SjyXdeo-^e)
(^8rjX6ovTai^
8r)XoviJ.(6a
8T]Xova-6€
8r)XovvTai
Imperfect.
Imperfect.
s.
1
2
3
(f8f]Xoov)
(e8T]Xo€s)
(ea^^Xof)
€8f]X0VP
e8r)Xovs
e'SjjXov
D
2
3
(eSi/Xderoi/)
(€8i]XoeTTjv)
€8l]XoVTOP
eSrjXovTTjp
P.
1
2
3
(efij^Xdo/iei/
(efi/^Xdere)
(e8rjXoop)
e8rjXovn€P
€8r)X0VT€
€8rjXovP
(eSrjXoofirjp)
(eSj;Xdov)
(eSj^Xdero)
(eSj/Xoftr^oc)
(^e8r]Xo€(xdr]py
(eSjyXod/xe^a)
(e8r]X6ea6e}
(eSi/Xdoi/ro)
€8rjXoviJ.r)p
f8T}Xov
e8TjXovTo
€8r]XovaBop
€8t}Xov(t6t)p
€8T]Xovix(da
e8r)Xova6€
€8tjXovpto
r ^-^
I 2
>
I D.2
-% 3
Present.
(S»;Xda)) 8TJXa
{8r}X6T)s) 8t]Xois
(8tjX6t]^ 8t]Xoi
(8r]X6r]TOp) 8rjXci)T0v
(8T]X6rjTOp) 8i]Xc!)TOP
(^8r}X6a)iJL€u) 8rjXa)fi€P
{8r]X6r}Te) 8T}Xa)T€
(^8rjX6a>(Ti) 8r]Xco(Ti
Present.
(S7;Xd(»jLiai)
(8T]X6rj)
(^8T]X6r]Tai)
{8r)X6rjcr0op}
(^8T]X6r)(T6ov^
(^8T]XoQ)ixe3a)
(8r]X6r](re€)
(8r)X6a>vTai)
ST^X&j/iat
8TJ\oi
8r]Xa)Tai
8rjXa>crdop
8r)X(i)(r6op
8T)Xa)fxeda
8r]Xa)<r6€
8r]X(Ji)PTai
390
APPENDIX.
Present System ofBr)X6(jD — continued.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
r s. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
I
O
S. 1
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
3
Present.
(8r]\6oifu) [drjXoiiii
(dijXoois) dq'Kois
(SiyXoot) 8i;XoTj
{8t)\6oitov) br)\oiTov
{8T]\00lTr)v) drjXoLTTjV
(8i]\6oiiJi€v) dq\olfi€P
(drjXooiTe) drjXoire
(^dqXooiev) Sj^Xotfi/
Present.
(8q\ooir)v)
(8r)\ooLrj5)
(S/^Xooij^)
(8r]\oo[r]Tov)
(drjXooifjrrjv)
(dr}\ooLr)fX€v)
(8rj\ooLr)Te)
(^dqXooiTjcrav)
drjXoirjp
drjXoirjs
drjXoirj
[^br)Xoir)TOU
drfKoiTjTTju^
[8r)Xoir)nep
8r]Xoi1]T€
drjXoLTjaavj^
(BrjXooifirjp)
(^brfKooio)
(^brjXootTo)
{drjXooicrdov^
(^rjXooia-drjp)
{drjXoo'ifxeda)
(^^rjXooiaSe)
(Pr)X6oiPTo}
8i]XoLfir)v
drjXolo
dljXolTO
drjXoiadop
SrjXolo'Brjv
drjXoifJifda
dr]XolpTO
S. 2
^ P. 2
(Si^Xoc) 8rjXov
(Si^Xoerco) 8t]Xovt(0
(SiyXoeroi') drfXovTOP
{br]Xo€Ta>p) drjXovTcop
(SjyXdere) drjXoiiTe
{8rjXo6pTa>p) brjXovPToup
{hrjXoov)
{brjXoiaQui
(8r)X6((rdov)
(^drjXoea-dcap)
{drjXoea-de)
(^brjXoe aBcdp)
BrfKov
drjXovcrda)
drfXovadop
drjXovadojp
drjXovade
drjXovcrBmp
Infill.
r M.
Partic. 5 F.
C N.
{BrjXodp) drjXovp
(8r]X6(op) 8r)Xa>p
(8r)X6nv(Ta) dr)Xov(ra
(817X001/) 8t]Xovp
(drjXoeaOai) 8rjXov(T6ai
(8r)Xo6fj.evos) brjXovixfPOS
(^drjXoonevr)) drjXovfxevrj
(^BrjXodfjLCPOP^ brjXovfiCPOV
APPENDIX.
391
846. The Regular -/xt VerU.
SYNOPSIS.
Since the second aorist middle of la-njiii is lacking, irrpidfirjVf I bought,
is added. Since the second aorist active of deiKvvfu is lacking, edvv, 1
entered, is added.
Pres. -
Impf.
2 Aor.
Active,
Indie.
Subj,
Opt.
Imper.
Infitt.
Partic.
liTTrffU
lata
laTalrjV
iO-T7
iaravai
i(TTas
didcofii
di8i>
dl8oiT}U
dl8ov
8i86vai
didovs
Tidrjui
TlOSi
Tideirjv
TlSfl
TLSevai
Ttdeis
deiKVVfxi
dtiKVvai
BeiicvvoifLi
d£iKl>V
deiKVvvai
beiKvvs
iaTT]V
edidovv
eTiOrjv
edciKVvv
'eanjv
<rT(a
<TTalr]p
<rTT]6i
KTTrjvai
<TT&S
{edoTOp)
fi«
hoirfp
dSs
SoVPM
hovs
(edfTOv)
es.
Seiijp
<9ej
Sflvai
e,k
J8vp
dva
._ .
Bv0i
hvvm
d^
Pres.
Middle and Passive-
7arap,at Icrrafiai laraiixrjv icrraiTo 7(Tra(T^at IcrTdfifPos
di8ofjLai 8i8«ojtAat SiSolijrjp Si8o&o 8i8o(rBai 8i86nevoi
TiOfpLai TiOwfxai Tidfifirjv ridecro TiOfadai TiBi^ifPOi
bfiKWfxai 8€iKvva>}iai. BeiKPvoiiJ.t]P deUvvtro btiKwaOai deiKVv/ievos
Impf. -
iaTafxrjp
€di8()fir)P
fTidefxriP
JdfiKVvfirjp
€7rpidiJit}y irploifxai
Trptaifirjp
irpiat
nplaaBat
7rpiap€Pos
2 Aor.
edofXTjp dwfxat
8oipr]P
80V
doaSai
86p€POi
Mid.
(BefiTjp BcofJLUi
Biip,r]P
6qv
Seadat
6(fl€P0S
392
APPENDIX.
Verbs in /it.
847. Present System oftarrrjfxi (a-ra-), place, set.
ACTITE.
Present. Imperfect.
r 8. 1
urrriiit
ICTTrjV
2
loTTJS
iarrjs
i s
iarrjac
ioTT}
-^ 1>. 2
"laraTov
icrraTov
;§ 3
la-Taroy
ta-Tdrrji^
.5 P. 1
la-rafxev
iarafxeu
2
1(TTaT€
foTare
I a
iardai
iaraa-av
Present.
r SI
I 2
lorrei
iar^s
^ S
laTTJ
1 I>*^
ia-TrJTOU
-1 ' ^
ia-TrJTOv
1 ^-^
I 3
iaTa)iJL€v
IcTTcoaL
r S. 1
iarairjv
2
laTairjs
P ^
icTTalr}
-5 D. ^
laTOLTov or laTairjTov
■1 ^
i(rTaiTr)v ia-TatrjTrjv
P. 1
ia-ToifJkeu icTTalrj^ev
2
loraire icrTcu.rfT€
I $
laralev icrTairjcrccv
f S. ^
laTT}
^^ 3
torraTto
1 D. 2:
icrraTov
1, 3;
'uTTaTODV
^ P. ^
tcrrarf
I 3
iaravrtav
lufin.
icTTavai
Partic.
iffTdy, -acra, -dv
Middle and Passive.
Present.
tora/iai
laraaai
taTarai
IcTTacrdov
laraaOov
larafx^Ba
laTavrai
Imperfect.
fcTTdfiTjU
i(TTa(TO
icrraTo
IcrracrOov
ia-TdaBrjv
iardfieda
iaraaOe
icTTavTO
Present.
ia-Tji
IcTTrJTai
larrjadov
i(TT^(r0ou
larrjaOe
la-TaPTtxi
laraifiTjv
IcrToio
laralTo
laToia-Bov
IcrraiadTjp
laTaifieda
laraiade
lo-raivTO
taraao
iardcrday
IcrTaadov
[(TTdcrBoiv
Icrraade
ia-rdcrOav
XcrraaBai
tardfifuos, -t},
APPENDIX.
393
848. Present System o/BlBwixl (So-), (/ive.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present. Imperfect.
Present. Imperfect.
s.
1
6tSa)/it eBidovv
8i8oixai €8i86fiT)v
2
dld(i)s edidovs
8i8o(TaL €8i8oao
3
di8a>(n edldov
8i8oTai (8i8oTO
D.
2
St(^oroj/ edidoTou
8i8uo6ov e8l8oaBov
3
8180TOV (dldoTTJU
8l8o(t6ov €8i86(Tdr]v
P.
1
8i8oiJ.€V ebidonev
fitSo/xe^a e8L86fX€da
2
8180T€ f8l8oT€
8i8oae€ e8i8o(Te€
3
di86d(ri edidoaav
8180VTO €8i8oVTO
Present.
Present.
S:
1
8i8S>
8i8Sifiai
2
diSoisr
818^
3
8t8a
8i8coTai
D.
2
8i8a}TOv
8i8a}a6ov
3
Sidayrov
8i86i)adov
P.
1
8i8a)ii€u
818(1) fx( 6a
2
diSare
8i86^ade
3
Stfiebcrt
8i8a)VTai
S.
1
didoiijv
8i8oifiijv
2
8i8oir)s
8t8oio
3
8i8oirf
StSoIro
D.
2
81801TOV or 8i8oir]Tov
8i8o:(tBov
3
8i8otTr]v 8i8otrjTr)v
8i8oi(r6rjv
P.
1
8l8o1n€U 8l8oiTJfi€U
8i8oifi(da
2
8l8o'iT€ 8l8oirjT€
8L8ol(re€
3
8i8aUv 8i8oLrja-av
8i86lvTo
S.
2
8l8ov
8l8o(to
3
8186x0)
di86(r0co
D.
2
8180TOU
8i8oa6ov
3
8i86ra)V
8i86cTBa>v
P.
2
8I80TC
8i8oae€
3
8i86vTaiP
8i86a6cov
lufin
I.
8i86uai
8i8oa6ai
Partic.
8180VS, -oCcra, -ov
8i86ix€vos, -1], -OP
394
APPENDIX.
849. Present System ofriOrjixi {6€-),put, place.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present. Imperfect.
Present. Imperfect.
{'■
1
TiOrjfit erldrjv
TldefXai €Tl6€fiT)V
2
ridrjs erideis
TideaaL irideao
6
3
Tidrjcri eriOei
rideTat iriBero
•| D.
2
TiOeTov iriOeTov
ridearQov iridcaOov
.^
3
TlBeTOV eTldcTTjV
riOeaBov eriBeaBrju
I P-
1
rldefiev eTtSefiev
TiBefifOa CTiBefjieBa
.
2
TiOere erideTe
TiBcaBe €TiB€(tB€
3
Tidedai irldecrav
TiBcPTcu iriQevTo
Present.
Present.
■ s.
1
ri65)
TiBa}fxai
2
Tl6fjS
TlOff
ai
3
TlOfl
TiB^rai
1 ^-
2
TLdrjTOV
TiBrj<rBov
a
3
TldrJTOU
riOrjoBop
¥ P.
1
Tl6a)fJi€U
riBafifOa
1
2
Tl6r}T€
TiOfjcrdf
3
tlOoxti
TLOatvTat
■ S.
1
TlB(iT]U
riBfifxijv
i
2
TideiTjs
TiBelo
S'
3
Tideir)
TtBeiTO
•^ D.
2
Ttdeirop or TiOelrjTOv
riBfiaBov
%
3
TiBeiTTju TideirjTTju
TiBeiaBijv
P.
1
Tide^fiev Ti6fir)fi€v
TiBeiixcBa
2
TI$(7t€ Tl6(ir)T€
TiBetaBe
-
3
tideUv TiOeirja-av
riBflvTo
r s.
2
TlBfl
TiBeco
«5
3
TiOero)
riBidBoi
1 !>•
2
TiOerov
TiBeaBov
I
3
TldcTCOP
TiBeaBoiV
& ^^
2
ri6(Tf
TiBfirBf
L
3
TlOePTCOV
TiBeffBoiV
Infin.
Ti6epai
TiBca-Bai
Partic.
Ti6eis, ettra, -ev
TiBtfievos, -rj, -01
APPENDIX.
395
850. Present System of SetKvv/xi, show.
Active.
Middle and Passive.
Present. Imperfect.
Present. Imperfect.
^ S. 1
2
deiKvvfii edeiKUVv
beiKvvfiai, eSfiKVVfxrjv
deiKvvs edeiKvvs
deLKwaai edeUvvao
i 3
deiKvvai eddKVv
deiKvvTai edeiKVxrro
■% D.2
deiKvvTov ibelKvvTov
deiKvvadov ebe'iKvvcrOov
1 3
deiKvvTov ideiKvvTTjv
biLKvvaOov edeiKuvaOrjv
1 P. 1
deiKvvfxev ibe'iKvvfxiv
deiKvvjJieda edeiKvvfxeda
OS to
beiKVVTi ihc'iKvvre
deUwade edfUvvaOe
deiKvvdai ibciKwaav
deiKvvvTCU ibfiKwino
Present.
Present.
r S. 1
2
bflKlfVOi
hfiKvvaifxai,
dflKVVrji
deiKvtiTj
^ 3
bdKVvrj
bcLKvvrjrai
1 D.2
1 3
beiKvvrjTov
deiKvvrja-dov
BeiKVVTjTOU
deiKvvijadov
-^ P. 1
dflKVllQilJieP
beiKwa^eOa
I 3
bftKVVr)T€
dfiKVvrja-de
8eiKUl)(0(Tl
beiKvvcovrai
r S. 1
2
03 3
dflKVVOlUt
beiKuvoifirjv
BflKVVOlS
deiKuvoio
dflKVVOt
deiKVVOlTO
•5 D.2
beiKVVOLTOV
beiKvvoKrBov
t 3
deiKtWOlTTJV
beiKwoiaOrjv
P. 1
ddKVVOlflCV
beLKVvoififOa
2
I 3
BciKVVOlIf
beiKPifOia-dc
bfiKvvoiev
beiKVVOLVTO
f S. 2
bflKVV
buKVV(TO
g 3
deCKVVTQ}
bcLKvva-Boi
■^ D. 2
p. ' 3
be'lKVVTOV
beiKwadou
deiKVVTCOU
beiKVvardcop
S P. 2
SflKVVTf
beiKWcrOe
^ 3
bflKVVVTfOV
beiKvva-Bcav
Infin.
deiKvvvai
beiKwa-Bai
Partic.
bfiKVvs, 'vaa, -vv
b€iKvvfX€vos, -rj, -ov
396
APPENDIX.
851. Second Aorist System 852.
of LCTTTjfXL (crra-), set.
Second Aorist Si/stem
o/StSw/xt (80-), ffive.
Active.
Middle.
Active.
Middle.
S. 1
I D 2
.2 3
^ p 1
\ I
S. 1
^ D. 2
I ^
-§ P. 1
02
S. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
3
O
earrju
earrjs
ea-TT]
earrjTOu
i(TTr)Tqv
((TTTJfXfP
€(rTT}T€
earrjcrau
aTT]S
arfi
crrriTOV
a-TrJTOV
CTTrJTe
(ttSxti
eirpiafirjv
inploi
iirpiaTo
enplaadov
eTrpidadrjv
iTTpidpcOa
enpiaa-de
inpiavTO
7rpL(oiiai
TTplT]
npiijTai
TrpiTjaSop
TTpirjcrdov
npidyp-eOa
npirjorOe
TTpicovrai
arairjv Trpiaifiijv
aralrfs irpiaio
(TTairi rrpiaiTo
a-TOLTOv or arTairjTov irpiaiadov
araiTrjv araifjTrjv TrpiaiaBijv
(TToipev (TTaLr)p,€v TTptaipcda
oratre a-Tairjre TrpiaicrBe
(rraUv. arairjaav npimvTO
(edcoKa)
€86pr}v
(edaxas)
edov
(edcoKe)
(doTO
edoTOV
ZboaQov
edoTTjv
ibocrQ-qv
edofiev
edopeda
edore
edoa-de
e8o(Tau
eSoi/ro
ss>
8a>pai
s^
da
if
8a>Tai
hCnTOV
daiaBov
8S>TOV
baxrQov
batp^v
boipcQa
dS>Te
baxrOc
bSxrt
boavrai
doirjp
boiprju
boirjs boio
boil] boiTo
boiTov or boirjTov boladov
boiTTjv botr)Tr)P boicrdrfP
boipep boir)p€V bolpfda
boire boirjTc boio-Of
boUp boirj(rav botpro
f S. 2
t 3
'^ D. 2
I 3
.2 P. 2
Infin.
(TTrjTa)
O-TrjTOP
(TTT^TCOP
CTTrJTe
tTTOVTUiP
CTTrjvai
TTplOi
TrpidaOco
TTpiaaBop
•n-pida-Boap
npiaade
TrpLda-Boup
irpi
aaBai
Partic. aras, OTTda-a, (ttop npidpepos,
-T], -OP
bds
bov
boTto
boaBo)
boTOP
boadop
borap
boa-dcop
bdre
boa-Be
bovToap
boaBap
be
boaBc
bovs, bovcra, bop bopepos,
-7], -OP
APPENDIX.
397
853. Second Aorist Sys
■ 854. -i
Second Aor.
855. Second Ferf. Sys-
ttm
o/Tt'V^ (^0
Si/ste?n of
tem of iCTTrjIXL (o-Ttt-),
place f put.
Svo), enter.
set. See 620.
Active.
Middle.
Active. Active.
.
2d Aor.
2dPerf. 2dPlup.
[ S. 1
{tOriKa)
eBefxrjv
edvp
{eaTrjKo) (icrTqKrf)
2
(edrjKas)
iOov
edvs
(eo-TT/Kas) (eaTrjKijs)
6 3
{eOnKe)
€6(TO
edv
{eO-TTjKe) {idTTJKd)
1 1^-2
Werov
fdeadov
edvTOP
eararop eararop
1 3
idiTTjV
edea-drjv
idvTTjP
eararop iaTanjv
1 P. 1
idefiev
idefieBa
edvfiep
earafxep ecrra/xev
2
e^ere
edeade
mre
e(TTaT€ ea-rare
L 3
cdecrav
edcvTO
idvaap
cffTacri ea-Taaav
2d Perf.
r S. 1
2
65}
6S>fiai
8va)
iara)
6fii
Sj,
dvrjs
ea-T^s
i 3
On
OrJTaL
8vrj
i(TTfl
-S D. 2
OriTov
Orja-Bov
dvrjTOP
eOTTjTOV
§ 3
SfJTOV
Orjadov
bvrjTOP
earriTOP
-f P. 1
6a)fxev
BoifxeBa
dvoifiep
€(TTci)fl€P
^ 2
3
O'rjTe
BfjaBe
dvTjre
earrjTe
OoJai
BwvTaL
bvaxri
iaruxTL
r S. 1
2
d€tT)V
BeifiTjv
eoTairjp
BciTJi
Belo
See 738.
iaraiTjs
«■ 3
eeirj
Bflro
iaraiT)
.>, D. 2
Belrov or 6dr)Tov
BelaBov
iaraiTov or caTairjTov
J 3
.
Behrjv OeirjTrjv
BeiaBrju
iaraiTrjp eoTairjTrjv
c^P.l
del^eif Beii][X€p deifieOa
€(rTal^€P €(TTaLT]fl€P
2
delre deirjTe
BelaBe
ea-ToiTe eaTairjTe
3
BeUv Oeirjaav delvTO
ea-Toiep iaTairjaav
f S. 2
ees
Bov
dvBi
fCTTaBl
i 3
0eT(o
BeaBco
8VT(0
ia-TaTO)
1 I>-2
BeTov
BeaBov
BilTOP
eararop
1. 3
0€T(OP
BiaBwp
8vT(OP
iaTarap
S P. 2
Oere
BtaBe
8vT€
ea-Tare
T 3
6fVT(OV
B(aBa>p
dvPTCOP
ea-TaPToyp
Infin.
Belvai
BeaBai
Bvpai
icrrapai
Partic. ^et'ff, Biiva, Biv Befiepos,
-rj, -OP
dvs, dvaa, ioTTas. earmaa, earoi
8vp
398
APPENDIX.
Irregular Verbs in MI.
856. Second Aoriat Sys-
tem
of yiyviJia-Kiii S^J. olBa (IB-), know. 858. ^77/At (^a-), Sfl'y.
{yv
W-), ^WOM?.
Active.
Active.
.
Active.
2dPerf. 2d..Pli
ip.
Present. Imperf.
' S. 1
eyi/cor/
oiSa x)^ or
^8eiv
<pT}ixl e(f)rjv
2
cyi/cos-
oXffQa ^dr)a6a
or
(f)r]S or e(f)r)a6a or
3
eyv(o
oiSe fjBeiada
(pr)s e(pT}s
>
^dfi or
^deip
(jiTjai €(f)T}
g D. 2
tyvcoTov
Icrrov fi(TTov
cjiarov ecparov
1 3
eyuMTTju
ICTTOV TjO-TTJV
(jiarov ecfidrTjv
h-
^ P. 1
€yva)nev
KTfieu fjaixev
(fyafxev €(f)afiev
2
typcore
tore ^(TTe
(pare €(paTe
3
tyvaxrav
to-axTi Tjcrav or ^beaav (^dm €(j)aaav
2d Perfect.
Present.
\'-l
yvS)
eidS)
06)
yvas
eidfis
<f)flS
^ 3
yu^
d8n
<t>fl
1 ^^-2
yucoTov
fidrjrop
(prJTOV
• H, 3
yvtoTov
elbfJTOv
(PrjTOV
yvcofiev
fidmfiev
(^oi^ev
•^ 3
yvS)T€
eld^T€
• (p^re
yvaxTt
fldwcri
<f)a)ai
r s. 1
yvoiTju
dbeirjv
<Pair)v
2
yvolrjs
ei8eir)9
(paiTjs
6 3
^ yvoiri
eldeiij
(jyairj
S D. 2
yvoLTOv or yvoirjTov
ciSftToy
<PaiTov or (f)air)TOV
t 3
yvoLTTjv yvoirjTTjv
elddrrju
(fyaiTijv <f)aiT]Tr]u
P. 1
yvolfi€V yvoir]fxev
elbe^fiev or eldelrjfiev
(paifiep (f)alr)fiev
2
y voire yvoiijre
eidflre fide
'■qre
(palre (fiaLijTe
3
yvoUv yvoirjaav
elde2ev eibet
rjaav
(f)alev cf)air]aap
f S. 2
yvw6i
U6i
<f)adi or <pd0t
^ 3
yvooTco
'ia-Tco
<j)dTa>
1 I>- 2
yvwTov
'kttov
cpdrov
1, ^
yvcuTtiiV
iartau
(paTav
S P. 3
yva>T€
l(TT€.
(f>dTe
"^ ^
yvovTOiv
Xaroiv
(fidvTOOV
Infin.
yvtovat
elbevaL
<f)dpai
Partic.
yvovs, -ovaa, -6v
elda>s,, -via. ■
OS
APPENDIXo
399
859. ilfiL (co--), l>e.
860. ct/xt (t-), (/O.
Active.
Active.
•
Present. Imperfect.
Future.
Present. Imperfect.
r S. 1
2
tlfii
rj or ^v
f'aoixai
€t/Ul
fja or fjciv
€?
rjo-Ba
eacL, earj
ft
rjeis jjeKrOa
^ 3
eari
TJV
carai
eiat
»"^ »""
*^ D.2
iaToi
' rjOTov or
^TOV
€ar€(r6ou
Itou
rJTOU
^ 3
ea-TOV ^(TTTjV
iJTTlV
eaeadGV
Itov
fJTTjV
^ P. 1
icr^iiv Tjficv
iaofieda
t/JLeu
W^v
2
L 3
tare
rjCTTi
?re
eaeaBe
ire
rJT€
flat
^aau
eaovrai
XcUTi
ycrav or fjeaav
Present.
Present.
r S. 1
1 2
S>
ceo
h
ks
>■ 3
♦
n
?
c D. 2
^TOV
LTjTOV
1 ^
rjTov
irjTov
1 ^-1
a)fX€U
toifiev
I 3
{re
1t]T€
aari
toxrt
r S. 1
2
(irjv
€(ToiflT)V
loifjLi or loiiju
firjs
fO-QlO
lot.
i 3
.Ir,
((TOITO
lOl
.S D. 2
flTOV or flTJTOtf
Z(toi<t6ov
loiTOV
t 3
flrr^v (IrjTTjv
€(ToiaOijp
loiTrjV
Q P. 1
• fljltV CtT)H€l/
(aoifxcOa
Xotfl€P
1 '
I 3
elr.
(irjTe
eaoi(T0e
7oiTe
,Up
ftrjaav
eaoivTO
lOUV
r s. 2
ta-Bi
XOi
i 3
((TTO)
Zro,
1 D. 2
fCTTOV
Xtov
1 3
ta-TOiV
Itchv
B p. 2
tare
\t(
I 3
(CTTiOV
loPTap
iufi.11.
itvat
hA<fB(U
Upm
Pavtic.
u>v, ov(ra^ ov
i<r6fA€vos, -7/, -ov la)v, lovaa, I6v
400 APPENDIX.
86 1. LTjfiL (c-), send.
Active.
Mid. and Pass.
Active.
Middle.
Pres. Imperf.
Pres. Imperf.
•
Second Aorist.
■
S.
1
Irjfxi irjv
Ufiai Ufirjv
(^Ka)
eifiYjP
2
ir]S lets
feo-at i'ea-o
(V<a^)
elao
6
3
ir)(ri ret
ierai lero
(^<e)
tiro
'■^
D.
2
[€TOV ieroi*
feaBov ieadov
eiTOi'
fladop
a
3
Terov ierrjv
teaOov U(r6r]V
flTrjv
eladrjP
^
P.
1
iffiev iffiev
U}xi6a UfifBa
€Lfl€V
elufda
2
iere Tere
feo-^e leo-^e
eire
eto-^e
3
idai ieaav
Present.
UvTai levTO
Present.
eiaav
elpTO
r
S.
1
i&
iatfjLai
<s
cSuai
2
ifi^
in
S
OJ
3
in
ifjrai
?
^Tai
D.
2
i^TOV
irjdOov
^TOP
TjaOop
s
3
{rJTOV
irjcrOov
^TOP
r/adop
I
P.
1
i&fiev
iuifxeOa
mfi€P
S/xeda
2
ifJT€
ifjaOe
^re
Tjo-Qe
3
Two-l
icovTai
cSo-i
oivrai
r
S.
1
Uirjv
U'lfxrjv
elrjp
fl^r)P
2
ieirjs
Ulo
ftrjs
Jo
OJ
3
teiT]
WiTO
€lr)^
eiTO
^t*
D.
2
UItov, ielrjTov
ifla-dov
€IT0P, fllJTOP
elcrdop
1
3
Uirrjv, tfirjTTjv
Wiadrjv
(Irrjv, eirjTTjp
fladrjp
o
P.
1
Wi^eu, ieiTjfifv
UijjLida
clfifv, elrjfiep
elfieda
2
i(lT€, Uirjre
UlaOe
fLT€, elrjre
elaBe
■
3
icUu, ielrjcrav
UlVTO
€L€P eiTjcrap
flvTO
r
S.
2
. l€l
retro
€S
o^
>
3
Ura
Uae<o
€Ta>
eaOco
•43
D.
2
Urov
ieaBov
erop
eaBop
3
Utcov
UdOoav
ero)!/
eaOcop
P.
2
fere
UaOe
eVe
ea0€
I
3
tevTcov
UaOoiU
€PT<OP
eaBap
Infi
Q.
iivai
haOai
eiPUL
eadai
Par
tic.
teii, iflaa, Uv
iefl€V09, -T], -OP
eis. eiaa, ev
efxevoi
APPENDIX.
401
862. KaO-rj/xaL (J](t-)^ sit down. 863. Kct/xat {kcl-), lie.
Present.
Imperfect.
Present. Imperfect.
r s. 1
Kadrf^ai
€<aBr)fir]v or Kadfjfxrjv
2
KaOrjaaL
€Kd6r}(ro
KaBrjcro
i 3
Kd6r}Tai
eKadrjTo
KaBfja-TO
•^ B. 2
KaOrjadov
eKadrjaOop
KiiBrjcrBou
.2 Q
KaOrjcrBov
€Ka0r]<T6r]V
KaBrjcrBrjv
.5 P. 1
KaOrjfieda
fKadTjfxeOa
KaBrjfjLfBa
2
I 3
KaOrjade
eKadrjcrde
KaBrjaBe
KadrjVTat
eicddrjVTo
KaBfjVTO
Present.
r S. 1
2
Ka6a>iJ.ai
KaBfi
^ 3
KaOfJTai
1 1^-2
KaOrjoOov
1 ^
KnOrj'jBof
-§ P. 1
T ^
KaOoineBa
KaBfjaBe
I 3
KaBSivraL
r s. 1
KaBoijxrjV
2
KaBoio
i 3
koBoIto
•5 D. 2
KaBolaBov
t 3
KaBoiaBrjv
P. 1
KaBoificBa
2
KaBoiaBc
3
KoBoivTO
r s. 2
KaBrja-o
^ 3
KaBrjaBoi
•^ D. 2
KaBrjaBov
a 3
KaBrjaBoou
S P. 2
KaBrja-Be
L 3
KaBrjaBav
lufin.
KaBrjaBai
Pai-tic.
KaBrjfxcvos, -r),
-ov
26
Keifxai
€K(lfir}V
Kclaai
eKetcro
Kiirai
CKeiTO
KflaBov
€K€caBov
KflaBov
€K€1(tBiJU
Kfi/xeBa
eKeijjLeBa
KciaBf
cKeiaBe
KeivTai
eKCLVTO
Present.
Kcafiai
Kerf
KerjTai
KerjaBop
KerjaBov
KCCDfxeBa
KfTjaBe
K€a>PTai
K(OLp.r]P
K€OlO
KeOLTO
KeoicrBop
KeoiaBrjp
KeoififBa
Kfoia-Be
Keiaro
KeiaBio
KfivBop
K€1(tB<OP
Kc^arBe
Kela-Boip
h(tBc
Keifiepos, -rj, ov
VOOABULAEIES.
INDEXES.
ABBREVIATIONS.
ace. = accnsative.
act. = active, -ly.
adj. = adjective, -ly.
adv. = adverb, adverbial, -ly.
a., aor. = aGrist,
apod. = apodosis.
art. = article.
attrib. = attributive.
cf. = confer, compare.
comm. = commonly.
comp. = comparative.
cond. = condition, conditional.
conj. = conjunction.
const. = construction.
contr. = contraction, contracted.
dat. = dative.
decl. = declension.
def. = definite,
dem., demon. = dcnioustrutive.
dep, = deponent,
der, = derivation.
dir. = direct.
disc. = discourse.
Dor. = Doric.
e. g. = for example.
end. = enclitic.
Eng. = English.
esp. = especially.
etc. = and so forth,
ex. = example.
exc. = exception.
f., ff. = following.
fern. = feminine.
fut. = future.
gen. = genitive,
i. e. = that is.
impers. = impersonal, -ly.
impf., imperf. = imperfect.
imv. = imperative.
indec, indecl. = indeclinable.
indef. = indefinite.
ind., indie. = indicative,
indir. = indirect.
inf., infin. = infinitive.
interr. = interrogative, -ly.
intr., intrans. = intransitive, -ly.
Lat. = Latin.
masc, = masculine.
mid. = middle.
N, = note.
neut. = neuter.
No,, Nos. = Number, Numbers.
nom, = nominative,
obj. = object.
obs. = observation, observations.
opt. = optative.
p., pp. = page, pages.
part. gen. = partitive genitive.
part , partic. = participle.
pass. = passive, -ly.
pf., perf. = perfect.
pi., plur. = plural.
plpf., plupf. = pluperfect.
post-posit. = post-positive.
pred, = predicate.
pred. posit. = predicate positioo*
prep. = preposition.
pres. = present.
prin. = principal, principally.
pron. = pronoun.
prot. = protasis,
q. v. = which see.
R. = root.
reflex. = reflexive, -ly.
reg. = regular.
rel. = relative, -ly.
rem. = remark.
rev. = review.
%c.— scilicet, understand.
2, sec. = second.
sing. = singular,
subj. = subject.
subjv. = subjunctive.
subst. = substantive, -ly,
sup., super. = superlative.
suppl. = supplementary.
syn. = synonyme.
synt. = syntax.
tr., trans. = transitive, -ly.
voc. = vocative.
vocab. = vocabulary.
w. = with.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
This vocabulary includes both the words of the special vocabularies, and those
which have been used in the exercises and reading lessons. They are here given
with their definitions, cross references, and related words, etc., but geaerallj with
a fuller treatment.
The verb stem and class follow immediately the present indicative of all verbs
whose formation presents any difficulties, and whenever additional references are
introduced, they follow generally a like order of application. This arrangement will
not only review the references of the words in the order in which they first appeared,
but will furnish the most natural order for consultation.
Derivations of the more obviously related words are further indicated heie by the
dagger pointing up (|) or (f) or in both directions (J) to a simpler source. While
in the special vocabularies, the genitive of the O declension, and the gender of nouns
coming under the general rules, were mostly omitted, they are here generally
indicated in the usual way.
a-
Or (du- before a vowel), an insepara-
ble particle called alpka pricative,
{a) negative, (i) copulative (498,
obs.). a-theist.
*A^poK6p.dS) -a (Dor. gen.), (49, obs.
1, 2) ; Abrocomas^ satrap of Phoe-
nicia and Syria, and commander
under Artaxerxes.
d7a86s, -17, -6v (com p. 380, 1), good,
iioIjIp, brave ; fertile.
a-yatiai (675, vocab.), -aadfirjv, rjya-
adtjv, admire, esteem.
t d776X\co (ayyeX-, iv.), (596,612, 7);
drffikSi (255) ; ^yyeiXa (256); ^y-
y€)^Ka, ^yyfXfiai, rjyyeXBrjv, ati-
fiounce^ report, carry news (188).
a^-yeXos, ^v. 6, a messenger (14).
angel, e\-angeli»t.
aSeXc^d?
dyopo, -ai, t], place of assembly^
market-place^ market ; as a mark
of time, dyopa ifKrj6ov<ra, the time
oj fall market^ i. e. from nine
o'clock till noon.
Idyopo^u {ayopa^-, iv.), -a<Fa>, fre-
quent the market, buy^ purchase.
f d^ptos, -la, -top, living iu the fields.,
wild, savage (513).
*7<*7 "^<«»> ^yayov (533, 1), ^;^a
(542,6), rjyfjMU ^x^tjv, lead^ bring ;
carry^ march, axiom (513).
4. d-y«tv, -^for, o, an assembly at the
games ; a contest^ games, agony
(513).
dS€X<|>o's, -oO. 6 a brother; voc.
ad€\(j)f. Adelphi, Adelphiaii,
Phil-adelphia.
dS
LK€(0
406
a/xa
'|'»8iiKci>, -^aat, rjdiKriaa, etc., to ad
unjustly, wrong., injure; pres.
may have the sense of the pf. /
do wrong y or / have done wrong,
am in the wrong.
a-SiKos, -OP, unjust, wrong (498, 1).
6Aiy adv., always, from time to time,
ever, constantly, ever, aye.
oETos, -ov, b, an eagky an eagle as a
standard.
*AOf|vai, wif, aX, Athens.
^'AOijvatos, -ala, -aiov, Athenian ; 6
*A0r]vaios, an Athenian,
d0poCt« (a^pot§-, iv. (608, 1)),
(dOpoost close together), (612, 2),
ddpoiao), etc., collect^ assemble, lery
forces ; mid. muster, Lat. cogo.
aOviJLos {dvfios, 673), without
heart f dispirit ed^ depressed (498,
obs.).
At-yvvTiost-co, -Lov {Atyxnrros, Egypt),
Egyptian.
Atvioves, -ap, oi, Aenianians, a Thes-
salian tribe.
I aipcrds, -Tj, 6p, ehosen ; oi aipeToi
the persons chosen, deputies, dele-
gates.
aipeo (aipe-, i\-, viii.), -rjam, elXov,
rfpr)Ka, ^pT]fiai, tipedrfv (698, 1) ;
tahe, seize, capture ; mid., choose.
di-aeresis, heretic, heresy.
al(r6dvo(jLat (alrrO-, v.), (632) ; ai-
aOiiaopai, ^a66p.T)v, ^aOTjfiai, per-
ceive or apprehend by the senses ;
learn, see, become aware of; w.
gen., hear, hear of. aesthetic.
aUrxpos, -A, -dp, shameful, base, dis-
graceful, infamous; alaxicop, ai-
aXt(rTos (379, 3).
4 al<rxvv» (alfrxvv-, iv.), (598, 1),
{al(Txvvrj, shame {io\'^,^)\ -vw6!>(255),
^vx^va (256), ^<Txvv6r)p (605),
shame, disgrace, dishonor ; mid.
as pass, dep., be ashamed at, feel
shame before, stand in awe of
Synt. 603.
atT€ci>, aiT^cro), etc., «5^, demand; with
two ace. , ask a person for some-
thing (269); mid., ask for one's
self entreat, beg. Syn. 271.
alTido|j.ai, -aaofiai, ■^riao'dp.riv, re-
proach, blame, accuse.
dKlvttio]S| -ov, 6, a short sword, dag-
ger. (645, No. 11.)
dKOvo), -(TOfiai, rjKovo-Orjv, ^Kovaa, w.
both gen. and ace. hear, hear of,
learn ; with gen. alone, hear, obey^
listen to. acoustic,
dKpo-iroXts, -ea)s, x] {aKpos, TrdXt?,
(501,2)); an acropolis, a citadel.
acropolis.
oLKpos, -a, ov, at the end, extreme,
outermost, topmost, highest ; to
uKpop, summit; Ta aKpa, the heights,
etc. In the pred. position, the
end of. {^\^^).
uKcov, aKovaa, okov (eKcav), umcill-
d\e^(o, mid. dXe^ofxai, rj\e^dp,rjv,ward
off, avenge one's self on, requite.
dXevpa, -a>v, rd {^1^), fine four.
f dXXd, adversative conj., expressing
opposition more strongly than hi,
but, otherwise, on the contrary ; yet,
hoicever (629).
"f dXX^Xuv (405), reciprocal pro-
noun, of one another, each other.
par-allel.
oXXos, -x), -o(629), indef. pron. other,
another ; 6 oXXos or oi aXXot, the
restof{\l\).
\ dXXcos, adv. (470), otherwise, in
another way.
dfia, adv. at o?ice, same time (227), w.
dat. at the same time with (225) ;
dpa TTJ finfpa, at daybreak ; apa
a/xafa
407
a^LO
LOO)
Tfj (TTiovarj fjiiepa, at the dawn of
the following aai/ (()85).
a|i-a|a, -?;?, ^ (afia), (il), a wagon
(513).
\ dji-aliTos, 6v passable for wagons ;
odus dua^LTos, wagon road.
djiapTcLvw {afiapT-, v.), (632), dfiap-
T-qaojiai, fjfiapTou, rip.dpTi]Ka miss,
fail, or err in conduct.
dfjLcivwv, -ov, comp. of ayaBoi (380,1).
Syii. 3SS.
d-jjucXeo) (/ie'Xei), be careless of neglect.
d-|iiix°-vos, -oi/, difficult, impossible ;
odos dfjLrjxavos, a difficult road,
impracticable (710).
dfiircXos, -ov, 17, a vine, grape vine.
f d(jL<j>£ (141), primarily signifies on
botK sides of; w. gen. and dat.,
about, concerning, on account of ;
mostly w. ace, around, about, near.
f dji<j)6T£pos, -a, -ov, both ; pred. posit.
f d|i<j>0T€p<«)9€v, adv. on both sides, at
both efids.
d}ji<|>a), gen. and dat. same form in
all genders, both. both.
dv (566) is joined : (a) to all tlie
secondary tenses of the indie,
and to the optative, infinitive, or
participle, to denote that the ac-
tion of the verb is dependent on
some condition (565, 668, 690) ;
(/>) it is joined to el, if, and to all
relative and temporal words (692);
(c) it is used in iterative sentences
. (679^.
av, contr. from iav.
dvd, prep., ace up, over, by. on.
dva-PaCv«, go up, ascend, mount,
march inland, up, etc.
\ dvd-Pa(ris, -feos, r], the march up,
i)iland ; ascent {(\T^). anabasis.
dv-a^-yeWw, bring back word, report
(188).
t dva-yKd^w (dmyKaS-, iv.), {dvayKt],
(()12, 3)j ; dvayKd(T(i>, etc., force,
compel.
dvdYKT], -r)s, t] (123), a necessity ;
dudyxr) iari, it is necessary (790).
dv d-yw, lead up or back ; take up.
dva-iravo), cause to rest ; mid. rest,
halt.
dva-o-Tp6<|>« (659), turn back, face
about; pass., rally, be turned back.
dv€v, prep. w. gen., without.
dvifjp, dvhpo^, 6 (362), a man, hus-
band ; dudpes arparicoTai, felloio-
soldiers. Lat. vir.
dvOpwiros, -ov, 6, r]^a human being, a
man. Lat. homo, phii-anthropy.
dvido), -d(r(ji, rjvtacra, fjviddTjv, grieve,
trouble.
dv-Co-TTUJii (741), make stand up,
raise up, rouse ; iutrans. in mid.
w. 2 a , pf., and plupf. act, stayid
up, rise.
ttv-o8os, -ov, f} [6b6s~\, way up, march
inland..
dvrC, prep., w. gen. (141), [^over
against'\, instead of, against, an-
swer, anti-pathy, anti-dote(188).
dvTi-irapa<rK6vd|o|xai, to prepare
against, or one^s self in turti.
dvTi-o-Taoriwrris, -ov, 6 (695), an op-
ponent, one of the opposite party.
dvTf ov, -ov, TO, a cave. Lat. antrum.
dvco, adv. {dva) (463), vp, above;
conip. ai/torfpo), sup. ai/ajrdro).
d|ios, -la, -ov (817), of like weight,
worth as much, w. gen. ; worthy,
valuable ; ttoXXov a^tos, worthy
of much, great value (513).
I d|i6&), -wo-ft), etc., think or deem
worthy of a thing (241) ; w. ace.
and inf. ; think worthy to do or be;
claim, demand, ash (269). Syn.
271.
OLTTayyiWoi
408
apirdt,
CO
dir-ayyeXXw, brin^ back word, an-
nounce from, report (188).
dir-dY", lead back or away, off, march.
dir-aiTcot, -jjcra), demand, demand
back.
d-irapd(rK€vos, -ov (63S), unprepared^
d-u'ds, anaaa, anav (d + tras),
streiigtheued form of ttos (498,
obs.^), all, quite all, all together.
dir-eiiu (ei/xt), (741), go away or
back, depart.
cnr-cXavvo), dislodge, drive away or
off, march away, ride or go back.
dir-epxo(iai, go away, depart from,
go over.
&.'K-4\<ii, hold back, be distant ; mid.,
abstain or desist from. Synt. 410.
dirf]\0ov, see dire'pxoixai.
d-iro, prep. w. geii. oiilj (141), from,
away from (123). Lat. ab, apo-
logy, apo-stasy, off, of.
diro-SeiKvvni, point out, show forth,
appoint; mid., express one^^ opin-
ion, declare. Synt. 268,.
diro-8C8&)|jii (646), give back, restore,
pay ; mid., sell.
diro-Bv^o-Kci) (659), die, be killed ;
used ill Attic as pass, to anoKr^va.
See 0v^o-Kw.
d/iro-Kpivo(xai, anoKpwov\iai (255),
reply, answer. Lat. responded.
diro-KpvirTft) (593), hide from, con-
ceal, apocrypha.
diro-KTcCvw, kill, put to death; for
pHss. see diroev^o-Kft). (263),
diro-Xciiro), leave behind, abandon.
dir- dXXwjii (741), cnroK e crco o r -ok at,
dTroXtoX-^Ka, oTToXcoXa, destroy ut-
terly, slay, lose ; with mid., 2 pf.,
and 2 plupf. act. (as pres.), perish,
die.
'AiriXXctfv, -o)i/os, 6, voe."A7roXXoy,
Apollo, god of music and poetry.
diro-irc'ijnra) (68), send off or away,
send home or back ; mid., dismiss.,
diro-irX€« (p. 82^), sail away or home
(214).
-}- d-irope'w, -^o-co, etc., be in tcant, be
perplexed, in doubt, without means;
be in want 0/(340).
■f- d-^opid, -as, f), diff cully.
d-iropos, -ov Qnopos, passage), im-
passable, impracticable, difficult
(498, 2).
diro-o-irdw (27 i), -ffTrao-o), -kfxiraaa,
-ianaKa, -eo-naa-nai, draw away
or off, separate, withdraw.
diro-o-Tc'XXft) (650), send aicay, send,
despc(tch. apostle.
diro-Tc'fivM, cut off, intercept.
airo-^ivyoi, flee back, escape.
diro-x»P««*> -^o-o), etc., withdraw,
retreat.
'ApaPid, ay, 17, Arabia.
dp-yvpcos, d-, 'OV, contr. dpyvpovs,
etc. (170, 2), of silver.
dp-yvpiov, -OV, TO, a piece of silver,
silver money.
dp€T^, -^y, fi, fitness., virtue, good con-
duct, bravery, valor (764).
'Apvaios, -ov, 6, Ariaem.
dpi6|i6s, -ov, 6, number, enumeration.
arithmetic (764).
dpi<rT€p6s, -&, -ov (227), left ; iv
dpia-repa (sc. X^*pO> ^^^ ^^^ ^^f^'
Lat. sinister.
*ApurTnriros, -ov, 6, Aristippus.
dpiCT-Tos, -»;, -ov, ^^,9^, noblest ; sup.
of dya^o? (380, 1) ; apiora, adv.,
«^ ^/^^ best way. Syn. 388.
'ApKds, -dbos, 6; (7;/. Arcadian.
dpp.a, -aros, rd (764), « chariot.
(•214, No. 7).
j dp|x-dp.a|a, -■qs.fi, a covered carriage,
dpirdto) (dpTraS-, iv.), (608, 2),
apTrdcro) (200), ^pTracra, ^pnaKO
' ApTa^€p^rj<;
409
fiaiva)
(309, d) ; rjp7ra<TiJ.ai, fjpndadrjv,
plunder, seize, carry ojf. harpy.
ApTa|€'p|Tjs, -ou, Artaxerxes, Artax-
erxes II., a brother of Cyrus (432).
+ dpxaios, -a, ov (372), from the
beginning, old, ancient ; to dp-
Xaiov, formerly, archaic, ar-
chives .
t ^PX^j-^S) hi beginning, government,
empire, province, satrapy,
f dpxiKos, 17, -6v, fit to rule (485, 5).
«4>X". ^P^^i m^^^i WX«» ^pyM«t.
rjpxOr]v, begin, gooern, rule, com-
mand, arch-, in compounds
(525).
I apx^Vj oi/roy, 6, leader, ruler, com-
maii'ler, chief. Svn. 227.
t d-cr9£V6'», -j](r(0, to be weak, ill, sick.
d<r0£Vi}S, e'ff (adeuos, to, strength),
iDitliout strength, weak, feeble.
'Ao-ire'vSios, -ov, b, an Aspendian.
dxiris, -I'Sos, ff, a shield (227, No.
8) ; d(jiv\s fivpia, ten thousand
shield, i. e. nhield-bearers (Nos.
1,8).
d-(r(|>aX'^S, -es (o'</)aXXfi)), (388), ^r/?* ;
sure, trusty ; certain.
jf d-(r({>aX.us, adv., firmly, securely,
safely ; dcrcfiakea-Tepov, -earara,
(404).
d-Tl{j.a^(i>, (drt/jaS , iv.), (rifiri), dri-
fxdarco, rjTlpaa-a, r]Tip.a(rp,(u, to dis-
honor (785).
av, adv., again, back, in turnj more'
over.
■j- avT60i, adv. in the very place, here,
there.
•j- avTO [laros, -ov (786, vocab.), act-
ing of one's own will, self-prompt-
ed ; OTTO 70V avTopaTov, of 09ie's
07cn accord, automaton.
avTos, -q, -6, inteus. prou., self Lat.
ipse; with the article, the same; iu
the oblique cases, him, her, it,
them (164, 1, 2, 3; 174). auto-
gniph, auto-crat.
.j-avrov, adv. (461), here, there, in
the very place, same place,
avTov, -rfs, contr. from iavTov, rjs.
d(}>-aipca>, take away, deprive ; mid.,
rob.
d-^aWJ9, -«, unseen, out of sight, in-
visible.
d()>-apird^a>, -dtro) or -dxrop^i, steal
from, plunder, pillage.
6i^ir\yx, d(fiT)(ra), d(pfJKa d(f)€lKa, dqbei-
fiai, d(p€LdT]v, send away, let go,
dismiss, suffer to escape, allow ;
npos (j)i\iav d(f)ievat, let depart in
peace.
d:)>-iKveo[iai (638), -i^opat, -Uoprju,
-lypai, come to, arrive, return
dt{}-i'n-ir6V(i), -eua-o), ride back, ride
away.
d4>-i(rTTip.t, separate, remove, to make
revolt ; intrans. in the pass., 2 a.
act., pf., plupf., and f. mid., stand,
withdraio from, revolt, apostate.
'Axaios, -ov, 6, an Achaean.
ckx^OK-<^t> dyBitropai., fjxSeaOrjv, be
displeased, troubled, angry at,
AWE, UGLY.
dxpi, before a vowel a^pi^, adv ,
up to, until, w. gen. (412); conj.,
until ; see 705.
BaPvXwv, -(Si'o?, 1], Babylon, capital
of Babylonia.
pa(vco Oa-, iv., v.), (631, 3). ^^ao^ai,
€^r]V (;731), ^€^n<a, /Se^a/uai.
fIBddrjv, go, step, walk, syn. 741 ;
^rja-o), f^rjo-a, cause to go.
I3d\\a)
410
yiypofiat
Lat. venio, come, come, basis
(6:58).
poXXo. (/3aX-, iv.), (596) ; /3nXt5
(255) ; e/3aXoi/, ^e^XrjKa (005) ;
^e^Xrjixai, ejdXrjdrjv, Ik/ViV, hurl,
throw at, hit ; Uie object tlirown
(188) is in the dative, sym-bol,
para-ble.
-j- Pap^apiKos, -J7, -di/(214), barbarian.
\ PapPapiKws, adv., in a barbarian
lumjaaye (e. g. Persian).
pdpPapos, -01/ (123), barbarian, not
Greek, foreign ; ^dp^apos, 6, a
barbarian.
f PcuriX€(d, -dy. 17, (5r kingdom, sover-
eigiity.
tPoo-CXeios, -ov (109, 485, 1), be-
longing to a king, royal ; to ^aai-
\eiov or TO. ^aaiKeia, palace ',
fj jSao-iXeia, t/ie queen.
Pao-iXcvs, -etas, 6 (297), a king; with-
out the ai-tielo, the king of Persia ;
nnpa ^aacXel, at court (798, § 27).
basilisk.
\ Pao-iXevo) (493, 4) , -ivcra, be king,
reign.
4 Pa<riXiK<Js, -x], -6v (328, 485, 2),
royal, of a king, basil, basilica.
pcXrtcov, ^eXrlov, comp. of dyaSos,
better, braver {3S0, 1). Syu. 388.
pidSojjiai (jSmS-, iv.), (jSta, /orc^),
(803), -daop.ai, etc. ; yb;r^, owr-
power, compel.
PtKos, -ou, 6, a large earthen vessel,
jar.
Ptos,-ou, 6, /e/€. QUICK, bio-grapliy.
Podo), rnid. -fjaofxai, shout, cry out.
BokotCo, -as, f), Boeotia.
j BoiwTios, -ou, 6, </ Boeotian.
f povXevb) (493, 5), -ev(ra),».etc., <?02^;^-
sel, advise, plan, plot (34) ; mid.
deliberate, consider, plan, resolve ;
ra avTO. ravra /SouXeuo/xeVous,
plotting these same things (648,
§7).
f PovX'/j, will, plan.
PovXojJtai (366), ^ov\r](rop.ai (522, 1),
willj wish, be willing, prefer,
choose; syn. 792. Lat. void;
WILL (551).
Povs, /3oos, 6 or ^ (363), an ox 01
cow ; pi. cattle. Lat. ^05, co«^.
cow, bu-colic (508, 14).
r.
■ydp, post-posit, cow]., for, because,
certainly.' Lat. enim. Kai yap,
for indeed, for, and really (Lat.
etenim), regularly denotes an ellip-
sis, this is or was so, for . . . (372).
ravXiTqs, -ov, 6, GauUtes.
■ye, enclitic and post-posit, intensive
particle (628), even, at least,
too, indeed, emphasizes preceding
word, but often rendered only by
emphasis. Lat. quidem.
•ycCTwv, ovos, 6 or r\ (y^), (227), a
neighljor ; as an adj., neighbor-
ing, w. gen. or dat. (225). Lat.
vlcinus.
^e'XcDs, -0)70?, 6, laughter.
■yc'vos, -eoy. -ovs, to (yiyvopai), birth,
descent, family, race. Ltnt. genus,
KTX.
-yf'cjjiJpa, -as, f} (41), a bridge.
"i^i -^s (contracted from yea), rj
(170, 1), earth, land ; koto, y^v,
by land. Lat. terra, ge-ology,
ge-ometry, ge-ography.
]. •yi?|-Xo<j)os, ov, 6 (\6(f)os, crest), a
hill.
'yt'yvop.ai (yei^), (533); yfvi](Top.ai,
eyevoprjv, yeyova, yeyevrjpai (433,
vocab.), become, be, happen, amount
yiyvo)(TK(i}
411
8
€0i
tOy accrue, be horn, come. Lat.
gigno, kin, kind, king, liydro-gen,
genesis.
■yi-yvwo-Kw (yi/o , vi), (651, 1), yv(o-
aoixai, eyvaof (731, 2), i'yvaxa,
eyvcoafiat, eyvaadrjv, know (by ob-
servation), understand, recognize^
judge, think. Lat. tiosco, gnostic
(660).
rXovs, -ou, 6, Olus., an officer on the
staif of Cyrus.
•yvovs, 2 aor. partic. of yiyuma-KO).
•yvufiT), -r)s, ^, opinion, Judgment, plan
(660). gnome.
■ypd<t>ci>, ypd^a, eypayfra, yeypa(})a,
yeypapfiai, eypcKprjv, write, paint,
engrave, grave, graphic, photo-
graph.
■j" -Yvuva^w (yvfivab-, iv), d(ra), etc.,
exercise, train, gymnastic.
yujii^s, -riTOi, or "yvjtvfiTTjs, -ov, 6,
a light armed sold if r.
•yvWi, gen. yvvaiKos, t) (363), (71-
yvofiai), woman, wife, queen.
A.
8ai(ift)v, -ovo%, 6. a divinitij, spirit.
demon.
8aKpva>, -vera), iSaKpixra, dedaKpvfiai,
irepp. TEAIl.
Adva, -0)1/, Tti, Dana, a city.
8airavao>, -770-0), etc. , incur expense ;
mid., spend of one's own.
8dp€iK6s, -ov, 6, a daric (675, No,
12) ; a Persian gold coin = 20
Attic drachmae, about ^5.50 in
American gold.
Adp€tos, -ov, 6, Darius, king of
Persia (432).
ScurfMSs, -ov, 6, fax, revenue, tribute.
86, post- posit, coiij., not so adversa-
tive as oKkd^ hut, on the other
hand, still; it often serves to
distinguish one thing from an-
otlier, then rendered and, further,
for ; with correlative p.€v, fiev . . .
de, on the one hand . . . on the
other, on the contrary, etc. ; Koi
. . . 8e, 8e . . . Kai, and also (109).
8€SoiKa, see 8eC8a>.
861, , see 86'«,
86i8« (prcs. is not Attic), Beiaopat,
edeiaa, dtdoiKa (586) and 6c8ta
(as pres.),y^«r, be fearful (of rea-
sonable fear). Syn. 709.
86£kvvjii (8etK-, v.), (736), Sfi'^cD,
eSft^a, dedeixcij dedfiyfiai, c8ci)(6r)v,
show, point cut. teach.
86iv6s, -rj, -01/ (8fi8a)), terrible, fear-
ful, wonderful, skilful ; to 8fiv6v,
danger, peril.
SiKa, indeclinable, ten. Lat. decern,
TEN, decade.
Se'vSpov, -ov, TO, a tree.
86|i6s, -a, -ov, right ; iv he^ia (x^ipt),
omthe right hand ; deltas tdoaav,
they gave their right (hands) or
pledges. Lat. dexter.
86'o|xai, see %iia.
f 86'p|jLa, -QTOi. TO (756, vocab.), skin,
hide, epi-dermis.
86'p«, b€pm,Jlay. See 6K-8€'pw.
86(r)i6s, -ov, 6 (479, 4), a band, chain,
strap.
'86vpo, adv., hither, here.
86VT6pos, -a, -ov (8uo), second; 5fv-
Tcpov, as adv., second time (460).
deutero-nomy.
86'a> (524), Berjcrco, iberjaa, BebeijKa,
dederjpai, ederjdrjv, want, need
. (340) ; mid. fieo/xat. ask, beg, want
hack ; w. gen. ; 8eTrat avrov, he
asks him (708, 8); impers. Set,
there is need, one ought, must
(524) ; TO beov, the needed or
Sv
412
8v
VCTTTOpOS
proper tJihig (806, vocab.) ; syii.
784 ; Kox avv vfuv on av derj Tret'cro-
ftai, and with you I will suffer what-
eoer may be necessary (708, 3).
Sif|, intensive particle, post-posit.,
noiD, already, truly., indeacU surely,
accordingly.
8t)Xos, -17, -ov (73, 8\7), plain, cl^ar
manifest, evident ; 8^Xds etfii
4 8n\6w (154, 3), -wo-o), etc. (IGO),
show, make clear, declare,
8id, prep. (141) with gen. between,
through, of time, place, means ; w.
ace, on account of. dia-meter.
8ia-Pa(vw, _^o through or over, cross ;
AV. ace.
8ka-pd\\ci>, throw across, comm. slafi-
der, .accuse falsely . diabolical.
8i-d-y(i) (765, vocab.), lead through
or across^ continue; of time, spend,
lioC'
8ia-8C8a>)i,i, distribute.
Sid-Koo-ioi, -ai, -a, two hundred.^
8i-ttpTrd5« (188), -apiraxfoi, tear in
pieces, lay waste, plunder, carry
off as plunder, sack, ravage.
8ia-a-ird(o, draw apart, scatter, sep-
arate.
Sia-TeXf'ft) (251),-TeXw, finish^ get to,
arrioe at, continue doing.
8ia-Ti0T)}jit, arrange, dispose, manage;
ndvTas ovrto biaridels dneTre^rrcTO,
so disposing all, he sent (them)
back (610, § 5).
8i8do-Ka) (Max-, vi.), (651, 5),
-d^(o, -axa, 8e8tSay/iat, eStSax^'?",
tearh, show. Lat. doceo, didac-
tic (G59).
8iS»}ii (So-, vii.), (730. 4) ; edcoKa,
dedoxa, dedofxai, edodrjv (641),
gii^e, allow, offer, present. Lat.
do; dose, anti-dote (647).
Si-cXavvo), drive or ride through.
8i-£xa), hold apart, be distant from,
separated from. Synt. 410.
8t-£o-TTj|ti, set apart ; intrans. in the
mid., and 2 a., pf., and plupf. act.,
stand apart, open ranks,
SCKaios, -aia, -aiov, just, right.
\ SiKaCws, adv. (459, 2), justly,
rightly.
%iw\, -r)i, T} (46), right, justice ;
a penalty, punishment, deserts.
theo-dicy, syii-dic.
8iorxtXioi, -ai, -a, t>co thousand.
8i(0K0>, -^0), -^a, 6eSt<B;^a, ibia>)(6qv,
pursue, chase, hunt.
4 8ia)|is, -ccos, 7) pursuit.
8iwpv|. -vxos, T}, trench, canal, ditch.
8o0f]vai, see 8i8a)|xi.
8oK£(i> (160, 522), Sd^o), edo^a, dedoy-
fxai, ih6x&T)Vy think, suppose ; iulr.,,
seem, appear, seem best or good,
be voted, ortho-dox, para-dox,
dogma.
AoXoires, -a>v, 01, Dolopians.
8p6|xos, -ov, 6, running, flight ; bpoixco
Oelv, to run hastily, at fall speed,
double quick, dromedary.
8vva|jLai (Sum-, vii), (730, 2), hv-
vrjaofxai, deduvrjixai, €8vvi]6t)v, be
able, can, have the power, dy-
namic.
4. 8vvanis, -fO)y, 17, ability, power,
force, military power ; koto, hvva-
ixiv, to the best of one's power.
dynamite.
1 8vvaT6s, -rj, -6v (808, vocab.),
possible, practicable, able.
8vv(i>, .sr^ ; see 8va).
8uo, bvolv (447), two. Lat. duo,
TWO.
8v<r- (498, obs2.), hard, ill. dys-
pepsia.
8v<r-'iropos, -ov (498, 4), hard to pass.
8^
V(0
413
iKKkr]crid
8v«, Scffo), edva-a, make e/ifer, put on ;
mid. and 2 aor. %hvv (738), comra.
enter ; of the sun, ^«^^r, net.
8i&-8£Ka, indeclinable, twelve.
Swpov, -ou, TO, « yz/if, present. Doro-
tiiea (647).
€w (ei + av\ coutr. ^i/, ai/, if, used
w. subj. ; see 677, 692.
€avTOv, -x]^, -oC, or avrov^i avrrj^i av-
Tov, reflex, pron. (403), of him-
self herself itself his oicn, her
own.
^yyvs, adv., near, niyh at hand ;
eouip. eyy VT€ pa) or -rfpor, sup.
eyyuraro) or eyyvrara.
kyiviTo, sec •yiYVOfxai.
e^-KcXcVO-TOS, -OV (803), {k€\(V(o),
hidden, incited, urged on.
l-y-KpaT^s, -€s, master of w. gen.
67« (391), /. Jjat. ^/^o, I, ME.
eOeXo) or e€'\«, iBeXrjaco (198, 522),
rjOeXrja-a, rjOeXrjKa, wish, be willing.
Syn. 792.
€l, conj. if with indie, or opt. (661,
663, 668, 681, 690) ; in yidirect
questions, ichether (p. 326^) ; el
fiTf, ifnotf unless (791, 13). Laf.
nisi.
d yap, if . . .^ that . . . ! would
that . . . ! see 669. Lat. utinam.
€T8ov, see opcuo, see, know. Lat.
video, WIT, spher-oid.
€t0€, inter] . that! would that!
see 669. Lat. utinam.
ctKoo-i, indeclinable, twenty, twenty.
€l\ov, see alpeo).
6l|xi (eV-), (288, 859), ^aofxai, he, exist ;
w. gen. or dat., belong to, have, pos-
sess (1 06, 370, 1 ) ; eoTi, it is possi-
ble, one can (104, 3). Lat. sum.
ctjii (i-), (739, a, b ; 860), go, eome^
proceed. Syn. 741. Lat. r-b, ire.
€tirov (eV-, fV, viii.), (698, 2), 2 a. i
said; the pres. is supplied by
</)i7/ii, Xe-yo) (p. 2833), iiie f^t. and
pt'. by epco, f'lprjKa, etc. For the
use of elivov, (f)r}fii, Xeya, in con-
struction of indirect discourse, see
769 ff. Lat. voco, word.
els, prep. w. ace. only (141), into, to,
among, against ; up to, for ; to
the number of
els, pia, ev (447), one. Lat. unus.
6l<r-P(iXXw, throw into, enter, invade
(157, 10) ; of rivers, emply.
jclo-'PoX^, -fjs, T) (160), entrance,
pa.s.s\
€l<r-€Xavva), ride or march into.
eUr-€pxo|xai (793, vocab.), go or
come in, enter.
AiTUi, adv. (eV), within ; w. gen.,
within, inside of (412).
clra, adv., then, thereupon.
€£t€, disj. conj. ; el're . . . eire, tire
. . .% whether . . . or, either . . .
or.
Ik, before a vowel 4^ (46), w. gen.
only (141), /row, out of ; ck tovtov,
after this, hereupon. Lat. €.r, e.
J'Kao-Tos, -r), OV (241), eaeh, eoerjj ;
pi., each, several, severally.
€KaT€pii>-6ev, adv. {iKarepos, each of
two), on both sides.
tKarov, indecl., one hundred.
lK-PaXX(i», throw outy banish, expel.
4K-8€pa> (756, vocab,), -depot, -edeipa,
■Bedapfiai, eddpr}v, skin. fay. tear.
Ik€i, adv., there, in that place.
€K€ivos, -r], -o, dem. pron. (180),
that, he. Lat. Ule ; frequently
best rendered he, she, it (188).
cK-KXtio-id. -a?, ^, an aasemhly, meeting
(674). ecclesiastic.
eKKOTTTCO
414
i^LKveofiai
cK-KdiTTw, cu^ out, off, or down.
CK-Xetirw (540), leave out, leave,
abandon, forsake, fail, eclipse.
kK-ttiTrTVi, fall out or down; as pass.
to cK^aXXca, be driven out, be
banished.
Ik-ttX^ttw, -TrXjy^o), e^eVXry^a,
•^iiikriya, -neTrXrjyfjiai, -eTr^dyrjv,
strike out of one's senses, confuse,
alarm, terrify, flag, aj)()-plexy.
iK-^tv'^a, flee forth, escape.
6K(&v, -ova-a, -6v (265), willing ; in
pred. willingly (27]).
4'XaPov, see Xa|ipdv(o.
IXavva)(€Xa-,v.),(6ai, 4), eX«(520//);
rjkava, eXtjXaKa, e\r)\afiat, rjXd-
6t]v, drive, ride, sc. dpfxa or Imrov,
ride, march. Syii. 741. elastic.
cXecrOai, see alpew.
IX€vO£pid, -as r], freedom, liberty.
f 'EXXos, dbos. fj, Greece.
"EXXtjv, -rjvos, 6, a Greek.
\. 'EXXt]vtK6s, -j^, -6v, Grecian, Greek;
TO 'YXKriviKov {(TTparevyLo), the
Greek army. Hellenic.
4 'EXX-qviKws, adv., in Greek.
f *EXXT]<nrovTiaK6s, -^, -6v, situated
on the Hellespont.
'EXX'^o-'irovTOs, -ov, 6, Hellespont,
Dardanelles.
IXirCs, -ihos, ri (227), hope.
i\i.avrov, rjs (403), reflex, pron., of
myself.
IjA-PaCvo) (183, 3), -^■fja-Ofiai, -e^rjv,
■^e^TjKa, go into or on board,
embark.
'4p,-P(xXX6) (188), throw in; empty ;
■ inflict ; make an attack, invade.
l|jLoO, IfjLot, Ifjie ; see l-yw.
In6s, -T], ov (407), wy, mi??e. Lat.
tneus, MINE, MY.
Ift-irCirXfjiii, -nXrjcrco, -eTrXfja-a, -rre-
TrXrjKa, flll tip, satisfy.
k^-':ti'trr<a,fall tipon, occur to.
€|x-irpo<r96v, adv. w. geu., before^ in
front 0/(412).
€v, prep. (141) w. dat. only (46), in,
at, by, 071, among, during ; iv 8(-
^la, on the right ; iv w (;^poi/a)),
while. Lat, in.
cvSov, adv. {iv), within, inside.
6V€Ka or 4'v£K€v, post-posit, prep , w.
5?eu., on account of, for the sake of
€v0a, didiV. ,whe}'e, there, here,whither;
when, then, thereupon.
j €V0ev, adv., thence, whence; of
time, thereupon.
kvvio., indecl., nine.
€v-oiKeb>, -jjo-o), live in, inhabit.
lv-opau>, see in a person or tiling.
cvravOa, adv. (evda), there, here;
then, thereupon, hereupon.
€v-TeX'^s, -es (709), {jiKos, end), at
the end, full, complete.
€VT€ii0€V, adv. (ev3a), thence, hence,
thereupon.
iv-rvyyjivM, happen upon, fall in
icith, meet, flnd. Synt. 147.
4|. prep. ; see ^k.
c'l, indecl., six. Lnt. sex, six, hex-
agon.
4|-a'y"y€XX«, bring out word, report.
c|-aiT€o> (241), ask from, demand ;
mid., beg off, intercede, gain a
person's release. Syn. 271.
6^aKi<r-xtXioi, ai, a, six thou-
sand.
€|a-K6orioi, -at, -a, six hundred.
l|-€Xavva) (95), drive out, expel; intr.,
ride, march forth or on, proceed.
^^%-^9y>PV-^^> [/o or come out, escape.
€|-€Ta(ris, -fcos, f], a military inspec-
tion or review.
4^-iKVCO(iai (634), -l^oixat, -iKOfirjv,
'tyfiai, come forth to, reach, reach
the mark, hit ; amount to (803).
ef
ecoj
415
epojjLai
4'|«, adv. (763), without; w, gen.
(412), outside of, without, heyotul.
€ir-aiV€W (524), -etro), eTr^veaa, eV/y-
v€Ka, praise, thank, applaud, com-
mend.
^ircjy (eVei -f" a*')} 'when, whenever, as
soon as.
kird, coiij. (709), when, after, since.
eirciS-dv {ineLhr] -\- av), temp, conj.,
(709), wheii, whenever, as soon as,
after that.
4ir€i-8^ (hry), when, when 7iow, since,
now indeed.
€ir-€ip.i («/At), (741), be upon ; over.
eir-cifjii (eliM), (741), ^o or come on,
advance, attack.
6ir-€iTa (tTTi -J" €ira), then, thereupon,
moreover.
Iir^v, temp. conj. (709) ; see cirdv.
Iir£, prep. (141), upon : w. gen , upon,
at, near, for ; eir\ tovtov, for this
purpose {14:2) ; em TeTrdpoiv, four
deep, cf. 774, N. 6 ; w. dat. 7iear, on,
eVi OaXaTTT), on the sea; of hostil-
ity, against ; of time, in, on, by,
or at ; eVt tovt<i^, upon this, there-
upon ; in the power of, eVi rw abek-
(f)a, in the power of his brother ;
w. ace., upon, on, to, towards,
against, epi-gram, epi-Iogue.
f liri-povXevw (149), plan or plot
against, design. Synt. 147.
€Trt-PovXi^, -^s 17, a plot.
liri-8€CKVv|jLi (741), show, point out,
exhibit, make clear; mid., show
for one's self show.
C7ri-0v|i€(0 (Ovfios, soul), (251), -iJtos,
to set one's heart upon a thing,
desire eagerly, wish.
Iiti-kCvSvvos, -ov, dangerous, insecure,
perilous.
liri-KpvirTw (638), conceal, hide.
4m-\€£ir<tf, leave behind^ fail, he left.
liri-ficXeoixai (/xeAet), -fMeXfja-ofxai, -fit-
jjLeXrjfjLai, -efifXrjdrjv, care for, take
care of, observe carefully, give at-
tention to.
Im-opKc'o) (opKos), -^a-o), etc. ; swear
falsely; mid., perjure one's self;
synt. 603.
iTTi-irovos, -ov (ttoVos, toil), painful,
toilsome, laborious.
cirio-Tafiai (eVttrra-, vii.), ema-Trjao-
fxai, TjTTiarT^Orjv (730, 3), under-
stand, know,, know how.
liri-o'ToX'^, -^y, 17, a letter, epistle.
liriTi^Scios, -a, -6u, suitable, fit ;.
neut. pi., provisions. Lat. ido-
VP.US.
^iri-TiOrini, place upon, hifiict, im-
pose ; mid., attack, epithet,
4iri-Tp€'ir«, turn over to, permit, in-
trust, commit.
liri-TVYxdvw, chance upon, fall upon,
find, meet with.
^iri-(|>a£vo(iai, appear.
ciri-xwpc'w, -^o-o) (786,vocab.),a<fw<?'«<r<?.
I'lrojiai, eyjrofxai, tGiv6p.rjv (533) ; fol-
low, accompatiy, pursue ; w. dat.
iirrd, indech, seven. Lat. septem.
hepta-gon, seven.
\. eirra-Kdo-iot, -at, -a, seven hundred.
'Eirva^a, -i;?, ^, Epyaxa, wife of
Syennesis.
IpYOv, -ov, TO, work, deed, execu-
tion, en-ergy, Ge-orgic, Ge-orge,
WORK.
€pTi}ios, -»;, -ov or -os, ov (302) ;
deserted, uninhabited, without, de-
prived of hermit.
6>(t« (e>'S-, iv.,), (612, 1), -t'o-6),
fjpiaa, contend tcith, strive; w. dat.
€p}iTjv€vs, -ecus', 6, an interpreter.
hermeneutic.
€po|i.ai, (772), fpriaopai, fjpofJLrjv, ask,
inquire ; cf. iparaoa (271).
epxoH^ai
416
(^do)
epxoHKU (epx; fXvB-, viii), eXevao-
fiai £Xr]Xv6a, rjkdov (698, 3), come^
ijo ; ill Attic prose, t i/xt is used
for iXevaofiai (739, b^ Syii. 741.
pros-elyte.
ipuTdo), -^o-o), etc., 2 a. rjpofirju,
ask, as/c a question, inquire ; cf.
?/3o/Liat(77'2).
I<r0ift) (eV^t-, eS-, <^ay-, viii.), edofiai,
f(f)ayov, edrjboKa, edr]d€a[jiai, rjde-
aBrjv, eat, live on (342). EAT.
e<rT6, coiij. (705), until.
ecrxaros, -r\, -ov {i^), furthest ; high-
est, lowest^ like Lat. summus, ex-
treme, last, worst ; noKiv iaxa-
Tt)v, a frontier city.
Irepos, -a, -ov^ the one or the other
of two. Lat. alter ; without arli-
cle, another, other. Lat. alius,
hetero-dox.
tr\., adv. (328), yet, as yet, longer,
still ; w. a ueg., no longer, at all,
never again.
lroi|ios, -i;, -ov, or os, ov, ready,
prepared.
€v, adv. (470), well, happily; ev
jroicti/, do well by (4<68, «). eu-
phouy.
f «& S(U{i«vC|a) {(evhai\Lovih-, iv.),(4l4),
-to-©, esteem or <?0i!^y2^ happy ^ con-
gratulate.
ci-8aC(i,ci)v, -o»', -oi/os (8at/iA0)j'), of good
fortune, fortunate, happy, prosper-
ous ; -ovicrepos, -oveararos.
f cv-'fjOcio, -as, T], goodness of disposi-
tion, simplicity ; \\\ a bad sense,
silliness, stunidity, folly.
ci-'fj8T]$, -€s {r]6o9, character), well
disposed, simple-minded ; \n a
bad sense, simple, silly, foolish.
ethics.
fiOvs, adv., straightway, at once, im-
•j- €v-voia, -as, rj (482, 2), good-will,
fidelity.
f €iJ-votK«s, adv. i^^Z), friendly ; fv-
voiKws exoiev airrtOf that they might
be friendly to him (592, 8).
6V-V0VS, -ovv (170, 3), well-minded^
well or kindly disposed, attached
to one.
cv-iropos, -ov, easy to pass through.
evpifTKb) {jivpr, vi.), evpijao), evpov
(586), Of rjvpov, evprjKa, evprjfiai,
evpfdrjv (651, 2), find, discover,
devise, procure.
€vpos, -€os, -ou?, -TO (jevpvs, broad),
(329), breadth, width.
Ev<{>pdTT]s, -ov, 6, Euphrates.
€v-(i)VV(iOS, -ov (eu + ovofia)^ (297)» of
good omen or name, left ; euphe-
mistic for the ill-omeiied word
dpicTTcpo^, left, on the left hand ;
TO €va>uvpov (/c/pas), the left wing.
"E<|>eo-os, -ov, fi, Ephe.ms.
4'<}>-o8os, -ov, rj, way to., approach.
«X^P°S, -a, -ov, hostile, unfriendly ;
comp. 379, 3 ; 6 ixQpos,foe, enemy.
Lat. hostis. Syn. 709.
€X« (or€;(-), e^a» c\x tTxj\<T<ii [holdimf),
(O-xov, €(rx^Kci, ea-xrip-ai, €(rxe6r]v
(538,4); imp., elxov (649), have,
hold; mid. w. geu., cling to;
gen. intrans. with adv., 6e ; ^x^iv
KokSa, be well (p. 192^). Lat.
habeo ; scheme, hectic.
e'ws, «», if (364), dawn, morning.
EAST.
6«s, adv. and conj., as long as, while,
until ; see 705.
^dtw (342). Ch^oi, live, be alive. Zo-
diac, Zod-logy.
i^evyvufJLL
417
(9.
€09
Setryvvnt (Cvy, v.), (730, 2), C^v^ca,
yoke ijoln o r ^ *V^^ ; luuUe u/\i^[).
YOKE.
^Tiv, t«v ; see 5<"«»-
Zcvs, Aioff, 6, ^«?<!^5 ; voc Zeu. Lat.
Jupiler, Tues-day.
XryriiHf -rja-o) (241), seek, ask for.
t>yu. 271.
H.
rj, conj., or ; rj . . . ^, either . . . or ;
TTorepov . . . ry (586), whether . . .
or ; interrogative iu indirect or
direct questions, whether ; com-
parative, than (586). Lat. quam.
1], adv. (S03), truly ^ verily ; in \\\-
terrof^. sentences = Lat. -ne ?
what ? pray ? yea.
B. dat. of OS, often used adv. (so.
oSg)), in what way, where ; jj
ihvvaro raxt(rTd, as quickly as
poHsihle (p. 80.>^).
■f i|7€)t(Gv, -ovos, 6 (227), guidej leader
(513).
ij^ycofiai (361), -rjaoixai, etc ; rjyrjixai
(366), (/o before, lead ; w. dat.,
go before; w. gen., lead, com-
ma nd ; decide (513).
ijSc'ws (i^Svs), adv. (459, 4), with
pleasure, gladly ; rj8i.ov, ' fjtta-Ta
(464, a).
iqSti, adv., already, now. at once.
i^So(j,ai, fjaOfjaofjLat, rjaSrjv, be pleased
irith, glad.
|tj5us, -ela, -V (484, 1), sweet, agree-
ahle, pleasant (302) ; ijSto)./ (382),
fjbia-Tos (379, 1). Lat. sudvis,
SWEET.
tfXOov, see cpxopiai.
i^'xw (95), inipf. riKov. rj^cd, the pres.
indie, is used as p!'., and the impf.
comm. as plupf., come, have come;
return, come back. Lat. adsum.
■qXios, d, the sun. peii-helion, helio-
trope.
TJf&cpa, -as, r] (46), (/<^^ ; c^La rfi rjfiepa,
at daybreak (224, 7). epli-emer-
ral.
i](i.ETepos, -a, -oj/ (^juieTv), o«/- ; to ^/i«-
repa, o«/* affairs.
TJjjti-, only in composition, ^a^(498,
obs.8). Lat. semi-, Eng hemi-.
^ i]|Ai-8apciK6v, -ov, TO {ddpeiKos)^
half-daric.
4 ij|jii-8€Tis, -€s (Sew), wanting half
half full (498, 6).
I ij|u-6Xios, d, -ov (oXos), (810,
vocab.), whole and a half, half as
much again.
\ ijp,i-TrXc0pov, -ov, TO, half a pleth-
ron, ffty Greek feet.
iqv, = Idv, q. V.
ifv, sec cljiC.
TJpo'}i.Tiv, see epop.au
i]TTaop,ai (756, voca}).), ^TTrjaofiai or
rjTTrjdfjaofiai, rJTTrjfiai, rjTTrjdrjv,
used as pass, to vikoco, be inferior,
be conquered.
0.
OotXaTTa, -i;s, r] (46) sea ; Kara 6a-
Xarrai*, by sea.
OappEu, -r](T(ii (806, vocab.), A<? of
good courage, be bold.
eaujio^o) (6avfia8-, iv.), (608, 3) Oav
fxaaofMai, iOavfiaaa, reBavfiOKa,
edavfxaadrjv, wotider, admire, won-
der at, be surprised or astonished
(420, 1); 467,11,13.
Oatf/OKOS, -ov, rj, Thapsacus.
OeXo), see lOcXw.
6€o's, -ov, 6, rj (371), god, goddess.
a theist, theism, theo-logj.
27
BerraXLCt
418
KoiOrjixai
0€TTaX£tt -as, ff, Thzssaly.
©CTToXos, -ov, 6, a Thesaalian.
6€a> (^v, ii.)) (529, 4), Oevaoixai, run,
charge. See Tpex<i>'
Oeupeo), -^(7», »/(?«^, observe, review.
theorem, theory.
Otjpcuo (^^pa {6rip), a hunt), (366), -a<7&),
etc. ; hunt or <?^«a'(? wild beasts,
\ Otipevo) (123), -(ixrat, etc., /^«^^,
I Otiptov, -oi;, TO (123), «>i7c? animal,
beast.
6ir/j(rK(a (^ai^-, vi.), (651, 3), Bavovfiai,
fOavov, Tf0vr)Ka, die, be slain ; used
as pass, to aTroKreivat ; pf. has force
of the pres. (659).
®P9l» OpaKos, 6, a Thracian.
OiryctTTip, -T/jos, ^ (362), a daughter.
DAUGHTER.
0v)&Ppioy, -ow, TO, Thfmbrium.
e«pd, -ds, 17 (46), a </oor ; cVi toIs /3a-
aiKeas Ovpats, at court ; so ^upat
denotes a general's headquarters.
Lat. /bm, door.
0vti>, 6va-a>, ZOvaa, reOvKa, ridvixat,
hvOiju, sacrifice, celebrate with
sacrifices (259,8) ; mid., to sacri-
fice in order to read the future.
t OwpaxCtw {6a>pciKi8-, iv.), -iaco, arm
with the breastplate.
e»pfi|, -5/C09, 6 (214, No. 6), « hrea&t-
plaie. thorax.
ISctv, I8«v, see opoua.
tSios, -id, -OP, private, personal ; as
subst. TO Xbiov ; els to 'idiov, for
one's private use (804, vocab.).
idiom, idio-syncrasy.
Irijii (€-),( 796), ^o-ci), ^/ca, ei/ca, ct/nm,
fii^i', *^«^, throw; mid., n«'/^,
r/jr//v7^ (861).
f ixavo's, -17, -oi'(123), -dyrepos, -mraTOS,
sujjUcient, able, enough, fit {jS'6'd).
lKV60[jLai (t/c-, v.), t^ofjLcu, come (639).
*Ikoviov, -ov, to. Iconium.
iXtj, -);s, ^, a crowd, a band, company,
a troop of cavalry (774, vocab.).
iva, final conj., that, in order that
(579). ^
-j- lirircvs, -€0)5, 6 (481), horseman;
pi. r«<;«/ry (297, No. 9).
f linriKos, -r], -6u, of a horse or ho7'se-
man ; to linrKov, cavalry.
tinros, -OK, 6, jj, «5 horse, a mare;
ano or t'c^' ittttov, o;? horseback
(616). hippo-potamus.
lo-o'-'irXevpos, -01/ (TrXeupa), (501, 3),
^f'^Y/^ «?^«#«/ sides, equilateral.
*I<r<roC, -wv, ol, Issi, commonly Isms.
Ko-Tiin,i (ora-, vii), (730, 1), CTrjaa),
eaTTjaa, caTTjv, earTrjKa, earafxai,
(OTadriv ; f . pf. iaTrj^co, place,
station, set, make to stand, make
halt (Lat. sisto) ; intrans., iu 2
aor., pf., plupf., and fut. pf., act.
and mid., except aor. (621), stand,
halt, be set or stationed (Lat. sto) ;
the pf. and plupf. are used as pres.
and impf. (620, obs.). stand, stay.
f IffXvpos, -4 Of* strong, powerful.
^ Icrxvpws, adv., strongly, exceed-
ingly, very severely.
Icrxws, -vos., tj (290), strength, military
force.
i\Qvs, -vos, 6 (297), a fish, ichthyo-
'Iwvio, -as, T}, Ionia.
I'lwviKo's, -r), -6v, Ionian.
KaOfvSo), lie down, sleep, lie idle.
Kcij9-Tjnai (796), sit doicn, be seated^
be encamped (862).
KaOtaTyifJiL
419
KdOi
Ka0-£o-nj|jii (628), sei down, appoint,
Ma/ce, arrange ; iutrans. in 2 aor.,
pf., and plupf., and in all tenses
of mid. except aor. (621), take
one's place, be placed, set down^
be established.
Ka£, conj., and (Lat. et^ ; intens.
also, too, even (Laf. etiuni) ; Kai d,
even if, Kai yap (372), see "ydp ; koI
. . . Kai or Te . . . Kai, both . . . and,
not only, but also (109).
KaCti), see Kdw.
KaKo's, -j), -ov (271), bad, wicked ;
base, cowardly ; to kukov, evil,
harm ; KaKi(ov, KaKia-ros (o79, 4).
|KaK«s, adv. (459, 1^, ill, badly;
noulv KUKai, to treat ill (468).
KoXeo), KaXcVo), KaXw (254), e^caXftra,
KCKXrjKa (p. 142^), K€K\r}fiai, ckXt]-
6r]v, call, summon, name ; Kptjurj f)
Midov KaXovfxe'vr], the so-called
spring of Midas (774, § 13). haul,
PC clesiastic (074).
KoXo's, -i}, -6v, beautiful (Lat. pulcher);
fair, favorable ; honorable, noble ;
of sacrifices, anf<pirious, favora-
ble ; KaKKioiV, KaXXtoTos (380, 2).
HALE, WHOLE, HOLY, calU-grapliy.
4 KaXws, adv., fairly, well ; KaXcos
c;(fti/, to be well (p. 192^) ; Kok-
Xlov, /caXXtora (404).
Kdv = Kai av, iav, and if
Ka-rrT^Xetov, -ov, to (793, Vocab.),
sh/fl. shop, inn.
Kair-iraSoKid, -ay, f}, Cappadocia.
Kapo-os. -ov, o, the Carsns.
Kao-TwXo's, -oC, fj, Castolus ; Kaaro)-
Xnv Tvebiov, the plain of Castolus.
Karol, prep. (141), down; w. gen.,
down from, down, down upon ; w.
ace., down, down along, along, over,
throughout ; overagaitist, opposite,
against ; according to, by ; KaTo.
yijv, by land; KUTa tXas, by or
in companies, cata-strophe.
Kara-Paivw (302), go down, descend,
dismount.
KaT-a-yo), lead down or hack, restore.
Kara-Svo), malie go down, sink.
Kara-Kaivo) (/cay-, iv.), -Kap5>, -eKavov,
-K€Kova, cut down, kill, slay.
Kara-Kaa), burn down or np, destroy.
KaTa-Ko'iTTw, cut down or in pieces,
slay.
KaTa-Xa|xpdv(o (251), take, capture,
seize, preoccupy, overtake, fall
upon, find, catalepsy.
Kara-Xeiira) (786, vocab.), leave^
abandon ; pass., be left, aban-
doned ; stay or remain behind.
KaT-aXXttTT« {SKkos;), (673), -aX-
Xa^o), -^XXo^a, -jJXXap^a, -^XXay/iat,
-r)tCkayi]v, change, reconcile (629).
Kara-Xvo), unloose, destroy, break
down; make an end; mid., sc.
TrdXe/ioi/, make peace ; w. Trpos and
ace, to terminate the war against,
to come to an agreement with
(708, 8) ; sc. Ititzov^, unyoke,
halt, rest (523, 3).
KaTa-vo€« (i/dos), -^(ro), observe well,
consider.
KaTa-ir€(ji'Tra), seyid down.
KaTa-ir€Tpdc«), (neTpos, stone), -ene-
Tpa>dr)v, stone to death, petrel,
petrify.
KaTa-irporTCD, execute, accomplish.
KaTa-Ti9ii|j.i (804, vocab.), ^i^^ or lay
down ; raid., place away, hoard.
KaTa-<{>avi^S, -€? (<\)aiva>), (842),
clearly visible, in plain sight'
Kara-^tvyta, fee for refuge, escape.
KaT-e'xw, hold down or back, restrain.
KaiicTTpov TcSCov, -ov, to, the plain
of Cayster, Caysterfield.
Kdu), Att. for Ka(o> (*cau-, iv.), (609, a);
KeufiaL
420
Kvpos
Kavaco. €Kav(ra, KtKovKa, KiKOVfiai,
€KavBr]v (015), bum, kindle, set on
fire, caustic.
Kctfiai (868), imperf. eKe'ifjirju, Kciao-
fiai, lie, lie dead ; used as pass,
to Tt(9?;fti (796). cemetery.
KeXaivai, -coj/, at, CeUence.
KeXevci) (830), -eucrco, e'fceAevtra, xe/ce-
AevAca, KeKeXevafxai, (325, mid.), ckc-
\eva6r]v (521, 3), command, bid,
urge. Lat. iiibeo.
Kepa^jLov d-yopd -as, x], the market of
th:; Ceramians, Cer anion Agora.
K€pdvvv|xi {K€pa , v.), (774, vocab.),
Kfpdaco, CKtpaaa, KeKpofxai, e'fce-
pdaOrjv or eKpaOijv, mix, mingle.
crasis.
Kcpas, -aros, -aos, -cos, to (331), a
horn, the wing of an army, l^at,
cornu, HAKT, rliiuo-ceros.
K{)pv|, -vKos, 6 (476, 2), a herald
(074).
\. KTjpiirTO) {KrjpvK-, iv.), -^o), eKrjpv^a,
etc., be a herald, 'proclaim.
t KtXiKCd, -a?, ^, Cilicia.
K£Xt|. Kt'XtKof, ^, 6, a Cilician.
\ KCXio-o-a, -d? or -lyy, ^, Cilician
woman or queeti.
f Kiv8vv€iJa) (493, 6), -ev(T(o, etc., /5^«9
m danger, incur danger, run a,
risk.
kCvSvvos, -ov, 6, danger, risk.
ElXeavcop, -opo9, 6, Clednor.
KXcapxos, -ov, 6, Clearchus, a Spar-
tan commander ia Cyrus's ser-
vice.
KoXoo-oraC, -oav, at, Colossae.
KOTTTO) (kott-, I'ii.), (587, 1), cKoyp-a,
KcKocfia, KCKoppai, fKOTrrfv, cut, hew,
slaughter; of trees, fell (593).
CHOP, comma, syn-cope, syn-
copate.
Kparco) {Kparos, strength), -rj(T(o, etc.,
be strong, rule, conquer, become
master of, hold (696). demo-
crat, etc.
KpdTwri'os, strongest, best ; sup. of
dya66s (380, 1) ; Syn. 388 ; Kpd-
Tiara, adv. (464, a), in the Lest
manner, most bravely.
Kpav-yi^, -^s, r], a shout, outcry, clamor.
Kpc'as, Kptois, TO (329), fieshy meat
(342). creo-sote.
KpttTTCDv, stronger, better ; comp. of
dyaOos (380, 1; 388).
Kp€(idvvu;ii (Kpepa-, v.), (756, vocab.),
KpepS) (254), €Kpefxaaa, hang up^
suspend.
Kp^vT] -rjs, fj, fountaiti, spring.
Kp'iis, KpT^roy, 6, a Cretan.
Kptvw Upiv-, iv.), (598), ffpti'co (255) ;
eKpLva, K€KpiKa, eKpipai, eKplSrjv
(605), distinguish, judge, esti-
mate. Lat. cerno, critic.
JKpio-is, -ecos, 17 (479, 1), decision,
trial, crisis, hypo-crite, etc.
KpvirTO) (Kpv(f)-, iii.), (593), -■v//-©,
-yjra, -(fid, -(pOrjv, KeKpvppai, cKpv-
(jjrji', hide, conceal. Lat. tcgo,
crypt, grot, grotto.
KToLofjiai, KTrjanpai, €KTr]adpr)v, KeKTrj-
pai, €KTr]6r]v, acquire, gain, win ;
pf. as present, possess, enjoy ;
plpf. as impf. ; fut. pf. as fut.
KT€£va) {kt^v-, iv.), (597, 1), Kr^voa,
(255) €KT€iva, €KTova, kill; rare
as simple veil) ; see arroKTcCvw.
KTfJiJLa, -aTos, ToiKTaopai). (480, obs.),
possession ; pL, property (593).
KvSvos, -ov, 6, Cydnus.
kvkXos, 'OV, 6, circle, cycle, bi-
cycle.
Kvpos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. Cyrus the
Younger, the younger brother of
Artaxerxes, whom he attempted
to dethrone (432).
Xv(
KCJAVO)
421
M
aiaz^i
Spo9
Kw\^ (123), -i;o-(B, etc., hinder,
oppose ; w. geu., hinder one from
doing a thing.
f KWjji-apxTis, -ou, 6 (501, 1), village-
chief.
K(6|ii), -j;p, ^ {Keifiai, lie), a village^
■ Lat. <?m5, « villager; hive,
HOME, comic, com-edy.
I Ka)|i^Tt|s, -ov, 6 (481, obs.), villager.
A.
XaPeiv, XajSaJi/, see Xafi^dva.
Xa-yws, -«», 6 (363), « /^«/r.
XoBpa (Xai/^ai/o)), adv., secretly ; w.
gen. without the knowledge of.
AaK€8ai|jLovios, -a, -ov, a Lacedae-
monian ; w. 6, a subst.
Xa|ipdv« (Xa^-, v.), (633, 1), \^^o-
liai, eXa^ov, eiXijcpa, etXrjUfxai,
iXrj(f)dT}v, take (Lat. capib) ; re-
ceive (Lat. accipio) ; obtain^ get,*
etc. ; overtake, find, seize, cap-
ture (52) ; XayL^dv€iv audpas, en-
list men. di-lemma.
XaiJLirpoTTjs. -r]Tos, fj, splendor.
XavOdvu) {XaO-, v.), (633), Xrjao),
eXaOov, XeXrjda, XcXj/cr/xai (Lat.
la tea), lie hid, escape the notice of
(251), Syiit. 603; mid, forget ;
Tpc(p6iJ,€vov iXdvdaveu, was secretly
supported (245). lethargy, lethe,
lethargic, etc.
Xe'-yw, Xe'^o), eXe^a, XeXey/xai, eXc-
;(^)7i' (for pf. and 2 a. act. etprjKa
and ftTToi^ are used), (698, 2),
say, speak, mention ; bid, propose
(769, d) ; Xeyerai, it is said,
reckoned, considered (725). Syn.
772. Lat. died.
\iyoi, gather ; see a-vX\4y<a.
Xiiiroi (XtTT-, ii.), (529, 1), eXiirov,
XeXoiTra, Xe'Af t/ijuai, iXeicfiOrjv, leave,
abandon, forsake; pass. ^(9 /<?/)f,
i^*-? /(j/lf over, survive. Lat. linqu.b
(541), LEND.
t XiOivos, -?;, -01/, of stone.
Xi0os, -ov, 6, a stone, litho-graph.
Xd-yos, -ov, 6 (359), « e<?or(/, a?/*-
course, speech, argument, logic,
dia-logue, bio-logy, eu-logy.
Xoiirds, -17, -6v (XeiVo)), (359), left,
remaining, the rest of ; to Xoittov,
for the future, henceforth.
Xo(t>os, -ov, 6, a ridge, hill.
f Xoxayo's, -ov, 6(494, 3), a captain,
tlie commander of a X6)(o<i (513).
Xo'xos, -ov, 6 (Xeyo), /6<i^, gather), am-
bush, men in ambush, a company
composed of about one hundred
men. lie, log.
AvSid, -ds, 17, Lydia.
AvKttios, -d, -ov, belonging to Mount
Lycaeum, Lycaean ; Oveiv ra Av-
Kaia, to celebrate the Lycaea with
sacrifices (263), a festival cele-
brated by the Arcadians in honor
of Z?!US.
AvKoovid, -Off, f], Lycaonia.
AvKios, -ov, 6, Lycins, a Syraciisan.
Xv^aivo|xai {Xvp,av-, iv.), Xvpavovp.ai,
XeXvpa(rp,ai, treat with indignity,
outrage, spoil, frustrate, ruin.
Xwrc'ft), -jjo-o), annoy, grieve, harass.
Xvw (31). Xvcro), eXvcra, XeXvxa, XcXv-
/xai, i\vBr]v, loose, break a treaty
or otfM, destroy, break down. Lat .
lub, LOSE, LOOSE, ana-lyze (541),
(20, 825-831).
M.
Ma£av8pos, -ov, 6, Me Maeander, a
river separating Lydia from Caria,
of windinjc course, meander.
fjLaKpo^
422
MiqStd
|jLaKpos, -d, -6u, long ; ftaKp&repos,
HaKpOTUTOS (375, 4).
|Mi\a, udv. (463), very, nmc/i, ex-
ceedingly ; fiaXXov (378, 1), more,
rather ; fxaXiaTa, most, especially.
|jiav6av(i> {fiad-, v.), (633, 3), fiadrjxro-
fxai, efxaBov, yif^aOrjKa, learn by
inquiry, understand, hear of.
mathematics.
Mapo-vos, -ou, 6 (756, § 8), Marsyas,
a Plirygian satyr (52) ; the Mar-
syas, a small river of Phrygia,
flowing into the Maeander.
MouTKds, -a, 6, the Mascas.
V-^\% -V^> V i^TT^ l)j battle, fight.
Iiiaxofiai (361), fiaxovfiai (520,
4, a), fiejJLdxrjfiai, ejxaxfo-dfirjv
{'SQG), fight, fight with, give battle,
w. dat. (225, a) ; w. Trpds, against;
w. otJc, with the aid of.
ljiiy6X<a9, adv. (459; obs.), greatly.
Me-yapcvs, -ecot, 6, a Me g aria n.
I&c'yas, fieydXr}, fxeya (299), great,
large; important , potaerful ; fxet^oiv
(378, 2); fieyiaros (3S0, 3) ; fitya,
fieydXa, often adv. (460), greatly ;
TO ixeyia-Tov, chiefiy. Lat. magnus,
MUCH, 0-mega (710).
M€-Ya(t>fpin]s, -ou, 6, Megaphernes.
|uX€i (792), /lieXj^o-ft, efjiiXrjo-e, fieixe-
XrfKe, impers., it is a care, it conr
ceryis ; e/Lioi ixikricrtt,, I will see to
it (589).
)t€\\«D (522, 6), yifWr](ru), €fieXXr](ra,
intend, be about, or likely to do
anything (523, 3).
|uv, post-posit, adv., indeed, truly ;
now, on the one hand, first (728,
N. 1) ; yet, however, still, neverthe-
less. Used comm. merely to show
some relation between its clause or
word and another which follows :
the latter is generally introduced
by the correlative 5e, but some-
times by aXXd, fievroi, eneiTa
(109) ; 6 fxiv ... 6 de, the one
. . . the other ; the former . . . the
latter (182).
|ji€VTOi, adv., in truth, really, cer-
tainly ; con]., yet, still, however.
(t€V« (522, 3), nfvS) (255), ffxeiva,
p.€fifpr)Ka, remain, wait, tarry, Lat.
fnaneo ; await, wait for ; w. ace.
Lat. exspecto.
Me'vuv, -coi/os-, 6, Menon.
|j,epos, -ovs, TO, a part, share,
(jLeVos, -T), -ov, middle ; comm., cen-
tral, between ; in predicate posi-
tion, the middle of (107) ; fiea-ov,
with or without to, the centre^
middle, space between ; hia fieaov
rovTcav, between these (337, 3).
Lat. medius, mid.
ftecTTos, -T], -6v,full of, w. gen. (340).
•n€Td, prep, {among'), (141), w. ^^\\.
with, in company with, in com-
mand of (J ^Qt, % '20)', w. ace, in
quest of, among, after ; next to,
next ; fi€Ta Tavra, after this.
meta-phor, meth-od.
IxeTa-irfnirw, send for or after ;
comm. in the mid., summons.
\iixp\-, adv. (428), np to, even to ; w.
gen., until, as far as (412) ; conj.,
until (JOo). Lat. dum, donee, etc.
[i-f], adv., not ; conj., lest, that not ;
ft fXTf, see el ; see 422, 428. Com-
pounds of fir} follow the usage of
the simple word.
fjiTj-Sc, adv., conj. (695), and not,
nor, but not, not even.
(ii^SeCs, ixrjdefxia, fxrjbev (fls), (447, b),
no one, none, nothing ; ixrjdiv, adv.
ace, m no respect, not at all,
Lat. nemo, mlllus.
M-qSCd, -ay, r), Media.
firjK€TL
423
oSc
\Kt\K4Ti (firi+K + eri) , adv., not again,
no longer.
fifiKos, -60S, ro, length, height.
fjiT|v, /:i»;i/ds, 6 (220, 227), a month.
Lat. mensis (508, 9).
fi^-iroTC (/xt; + TTore), adv., ^.?w^r.
Lat. nunqtiant.
p,T]T6, «;«(af ;«o^, ^«or; /ujyre . . . /ijjrf,
neither . . . ^o/" (430, 18).
iwirrip, /bi7;rpos, ^ (362), a mother.
Lat. Wfl/er, MOTHER.
MCSas, -ov, 6, Midas.
MiOpiSdn^s, -ov, 6, Mithriddtes.
(iiKpo's, -a. -01/, .s»?tf//, /«7/'/.9 ; neut.
as adv., fUKpov, narrowly., hardly.
f MiXtJo-ios, -a, -oi/, Mileaian.
MiX-HTos, -ov, 17, Miletus.
p,i<r0o-8o'TT]s, -ov^ 6, paymaster.
fti<r0o'5. -01', 6, ;?6'y, wages., reward.
4. ixwrOo'ci) (350), -oxrw, etc ; let out
for hire; mid.,^//-(?; pass, be hired.
(Jivd -ay, ^ (170, 1), « »//;?-«, $18.
jio'vos, -7;, -ov, /3!/o;?^, o;?/y (227), neut.
^ovov, adv., solely, only.
(ivpios, -a, -ov, countless ;■ fivpioi, -at,
-a, /^;« thousand, myriad.
Muff-ios, -a, -ov, Mysian.
f vav-apxos, commander of a fleet,
admiral..
vavs, i/fobp, x] (363), « 5^/;?. Lat.
ndnis. nausea, No. 10.
\ vavTiKo's, -J7, -6v, naval, nautical,
vc'os, -a, -01/, young ; new, fresh ;
v€a)T€pos, -araTos (376). NEW,
neo-logy, neo-phyte.
f viKcuo (160), -170-0), etc. ; conquer,
surpass, outdo ; the pres. often has
the force of the pf., am victorious.
Lat. vincd.
v^KT], -ij*, 17, victory. Nicholas.
vo|JLit<«> (i/o/uiS-, iv), j/o/itw (608, 4, «-) ;
evofJiKTa, vfvofiiKa (309, a), vevo-
fiia-fiai, €vofiia6riv, hold as a cus-
tom, think, consider, believe ;
vofii^erai, is customary, is usually
recognized (798, § 27).
vo'p.os, -ov, o, a custom, a law.
vovs,-oi), 6 (170, 1), mind, attention;
iv M» 6;^a), have in mind, intend.
L-\t. mens.
vvv, adv., now, just now. Lat. nunc,
xow.
vv'l VVKTOS: rj (428), night. NIGHT.
a.
QcvCds, -ov, 6 (48), Xenias,
f ^cviKo's, -17, -ov, foreign mercenary ;
TO ^eviKOv (sc. arpdrevfia), the
mercenary force (728, N. 7).
gcvos, -ov, 6, « stranger, guest, host, a
mercenary.
^evo({>cov, -wKTOff, 6, Xenophon, an
Atlieiiian. See 432.
g€p|T]s,-ou, 6, Xerxes I. (766, § 9).
O.
d, ^, TO (9, 10), Me ; 6 fteV ... 6 Sc,
Mis one . . . Ma^ one ; 6 8«, anri
he (182) ; for its use before a
participle (234, 4 ; 235) ; used
with persons or things to mark
them as well knoM^n (p. 30^) ; t^
ixdxu, in the well known battle
(756, § 9), with a distributive
force (p. 3602'-2); Avith numerals
to denote an approximation
(p. 318«).
o8£, r\h€, r6h€ (176), //<«>, what fol-
lows : Tovde Tov Tpowov, in the fol-
lowing manner (180).
686
OS
424
opaco
dSo's, -oO, ri (61), a toay, road, route ;
a march, expedition. Lat. via,
meth-od, ex-odus, peri-od.
i'-Oev, rel. adv. (462), whence.
ol8a (766), 2 pf. with present force,
k7iow, understand (by reflection).
f otKtt-Se, adv. (462), homeward, to
one's home.
folKEw (493), -wco, inhabit, live,
dwell, occupy; pass, be inhabited,
be situated ; peopled, populous.
f olK(d, -as, fj, a house, dwelling.
•f olKO-8oHi€« (756, § 9), -r}a(o, build.
hdit. aedijicd.
t o1:ko-06v, adv. (462), /rom home.
fotKoi, adv. (461), at home.
oIkos, -ov, 6, house. Lat. vlcus, Eng.
-WICK, -wicH, — Ber-wicK, Nor-
wiCH ; eco-nomy (639).
otvos, -ov, 6, wine. Lat. vinum,
WINE (508, 11).
OiOfiai, or ot)xai, olrjaofxai, (ofjBrjv, sup-
pose, think, believe. Lat. opmor.
olos, ola, olov, rel. pro., of what
kind, suck as, as; Lat. qudlis ;
oios T€, able, possible.
^ oloo-'ircp or oloo'-'ircp, -ancp, -ovTrep
(695). /ws^ as, such as, etc.
OKV6CI), -rj(ra>, shrink from, hesitate,
dread, fear ; oKvdirju av^is to.
frXola ffji^aiveiv, I should fear to
embark in the boats. Syu. 709.
f oKTa-KoVioi, -at, -a (445), eight
hundred.
6kt», indecl., eight. Lat. octo, eight,
octa-gon.
oXeOpos, ov, 6, destruction, loss.
^Wvfii (o\-, v.), oK5> (254), &\(aa,
okoikiKa, oXcoXa ; mid., oWvfiai,
oXoO/xai, coiXofiriv (736, 3) ; act.,
destroy , lose ; m\{\., perish ; 2 pf.
-, iiitrans., / am ruined ; in prose
arr6XKv}ii.
oXos, -T), -ov (786, vocab.), whole,
entire, all ; comm. in pred. posit.
cath-olic.
*OXvv9ios, -ov, 6, an Olynthian.
f d[jkoi(i)s, adv., in like manner, alike.
f duo-Xo-yeo), -rja-o}, a>jxoK6yr)aa, qj/lio-
\6yr]Ka, agree, confess, acknowl-
edge.
d|xov, adv. (685), together, at once.
\. on«s, yet, still, nevertheless, how-
ever.
ovojia, -uTos, TO (208), a name.
Lat. nomen, an-onymous, syn-
onyme (660). .
ovos, ov, 6 or 7, an ass. ass.
OTTT), rel. adv. (^04, § 6), where,
wherever, in what way, how, as.
Lat. qua.
d'in<r0o-<j>vXa|, -aKo^^ 6, rear guard.
f dirXtSw (67rXiS-, iv.), (608), (ottXoi/)
(612, b), co7r\L(ra, coTrXianai,
oiTrXio-Brjv, arm, equip.
f dirXiTTis, ov, 6 (48), a heavy-armed
foot-soldier, hoplite ; pL, infantry.
No. 1.
oirXov, -ov, TO, implement, arms,
armor, pan-'oply.
diroios, -d, -OV, rel. pron., of what
sort, kind, or quality. Lat. qudlis.
dirdo-os, -r), -ov(p -\- ttoo-os), rel. pron.,
as many as, whatever, as large as ;
iu indir. questions,^oie much, how
large or many. Lat. quantus.
diroTc (699), lohen, tvhoiever, since
(709). Lat. cum, quando.
oirov, rel. adv. (804, § 6), tvhere,
loherever. Lat. ubi.
6'ir(os (359), adv., how, in ivhat vxiy,
w. fut. indie. (589) ; conj., that,
in order that (579).
dpd'j) {6pa-, 18; oTT-, viii.), (698, 4),
oylrofxai, ddov, eoypaKa or copdrM,
edypdpai, S>ppai, axpOrjv, see, be
opyC^i
0)
425
TTaico
hold, perceive, observe. Lat video,
EYi, optic, aut-opsy, pau-orama.
opYiJw (opytS-, iv), (241) ; in the
Anabasis opyi^ofxaL, -laoiiai or
-toC/iat (60S, a), make angry;
mid., be angry at, be in a rage.
opOios, d, -ov, siraight-up, steep.
opKos. -ov, 6 (328), oath.
dp|idu (251), -ri<j<ji, etc., put in mo-
tion, start, rush ; mid., set forth,
start.
dpjie'ft), 'j](T<i>, be moored, lie at
anchor.
'Opo'vras, dor -ov, 6 (52), Orontas.
opos, -ovs, TO (342), a mountain.
OS, i), o (178), which, what ; koi os,
and he.
oo-os, ij, -OP (271), rel. pron. of
quantity, so much or many as, as
great as ; rel. prou., as many as,
as ; how much, hoio great ; after
Tias, who, etc.
oc-ircp, jjiTTcp, oTT€p, the vcry person
who or thing which ; who, which.
00--TIS, rJTis, oTi (437), whoever, who,
whichever, whatever ; in indirect
questions, who, itihich, what.
oTttv = ore (iv, whenever.
oT€, couj., when, since, because.
6'ti, conj. (388), (orig. neut. of ocrrts),
that, because, because that, Lat.
quod ; in quoting another's words
(708) ; w. a sup. intens. like Lat.
r/uam ; on dirapaa-KevoTaTov, as
unprepared as pvssible (637, 7)-
ov, ovK, ov\ (68, 422), neg. adv.,
marking tlie negation as absolute.
Lat. non.
ov (os), adv., of place, where.
o^ i-m), pers. pron., dat. of (394).
ovSa}io€, adv., nowhere.
ov-Se {ov + ^c), (540), neg. conj., but
not, and not, nor as; Rd\.,'notatall.
ov8-€is, ovdefiia, ovbev (447, &), no
one, not any, none, Lat. nullus ;
nobody, Lat. nemo; nothing, Lat.
nihil; ovdev, adv. acci, 7iot at all
(449).
ovK, adv., not', see ov.
ovv (241), post-))Osit. couj., therefoi'e,
then, accordingly, at any rate,
moreover,
ov-iroT6 {ov -f TTore), (328), adv.f wo/
ever, never.
0V-T6, neg. conj. (797, § 26), and
not, nor; ovre . . . ovre, neither
. . . jior. Lat. neque.
O^TOS, aVTTl, TOVTO (181 tf., 188, 820),
deni. pron., this.
ovTCDs (188), adv. of ovtos, ouro)
before a consonant, in this man-
ner, thus, .so.
ovx, not ; see ov.
d<|>eiXa) {o(f)e\-, iv.), (95), -etXjjo-co,
&)<^6tXr;cra, a>(f)eXov, d>(p€iXr]Ka, etc.,
otve, be indebted, Lat. debed :
pass, be due; in wishes, would
that (669).
o<)>€Xos, TO, only in nom. and ace,
advantage, use.
©xvpo's, -d, ov, rugged, strong, ten-
able, fortified by nature.
n.
f iraiScvd) (271), -a-a>, bring up a
child, educate. Lat. institud,
cyclo-paedia.
f iraiSiov, -ov. to, infant, little child.
irats, TTaibos (271), 6 or 17, gen. dual
iraidoiv, gen. pi naidojv, boy, child;
in Anab. masc. in the sing., boy,
son. Lat. puer. ped-ngogue.
iraCo), TTatcra. (iraiaa TviiraiKa, iirai-
cr6r]v, strike, smite, icuund, strike
at. aua-paest.
TTOklV
426
iOi
'7r€LU0)
irtiXiv, adv., back, back again, Lat.
rursus ; of time, once more, Lat.
iteimm. pal-aestra, palin-drome.
itoXtov, -oO, to, lance, javelin, spear.
irdvni (461), adv., in every way,
everywhere, on all sides.
irapa, prep, (beside), (141); w. gen.
from beside, from ; w. dat., by the
side of, near, at, on, with ; w. ace,
t9 the side of, to, towards, along,
beside; against, beyond, contrary
to, napa ras (nrovdds, contrary to
the treaty (142, 4). paragraph,
para-ble.
irap-aY^eWo) (214), pass an order
along; to give the watchword:
send orders, command, order,
announce.
irapa-'yi-yvonai, be present, come,
arrive.
irapdSeuros, -ov, 6, a park, para-
dise.
irapa-8i8(<)|j.i f 646), deliver up, give
over, surrender.
irapa-KoXew (3.59), call to one's self
summon, exhort, urge on.
irapa-irX'fjo-ios, -d, -ov (227), near by,
nearly like, similar.
irapao-d-yytis, -ov, 6, a parasang,
— 80 stadia, about three and one
third miles.
f irapa-a-Kcva^o) (a-Kevad-, iv.), (615),
-da-uii etc., prepare, get ready ;
mid., provide, make ready, be
ready.
irapa-o-KcvT], -i)j, ^ (735, § 4), prepa-
ration.
irap-ei|jii (elfxi), be near or present,
have come, arrive ; ra irapovra, the
present affairs. Lat. adsum.
irap-€\avv(i>, march or ride by, re-
view.
irap-cpxop.ai, pass by or along, pass.
vap-4\w, hold near, offer to, fur- j
nish, supply, provide, produce, i
make; npayfiara napfx^iv, give
trouble.
irdp-oSos, -ov, rj (obos), (86), a way
by or past, passage, pass.
Ilappda-ios, -ov, 6, a Parrhasian.
IlapvcraTis, -tSos, fj, Pary satis.
irds, irdo-a, irdv (265), all, the whole,
Lat. omnis ; without the article,
every, Lat. quisque ; w. the art.,
generally in predicate position
(271) ; in attrib. posit, to denote
totality, whole ; Trepi iravro^, of
the highest (ulmost) importance.
pan-theist, pan-demonium.
Ilao-CcDV, -covoy, 6, Pasion.
irdo-xw {iraO-, vi), (651, 4), TreiVo-
fxai, enadou, neirovOa, suffer, expe-
rience, feel ; ed or KaKcos ndo-xfiv,
be well or ill-treated, pass, to tu
Troteif (659). Lat. patior, pa-
thos, patho-logy.
irttTTJp, narpos, 6 (362), a father.
Lat. pater, father.
\. irttTpCs, -idoi, f), fatherland, native
land.
iravo) (251), 7rav(ra>, tnavaa, nenavKa,
TreTTavfiai, eiravdrju, cause to cease,
end, stop ; mid., cease, stop, desist.
Lat. pausa, paucus, pause,
FEW.
TTcSfov, -OV, TO (jrebov, ground), plain,
level, ground. Lat. campus.
ireto's, -f], -ov (ttovs), (806, vocab.)^
on foot ; of infantry ; jd., foot
soldiers, infantry.
ircCew {ttlO-, ii.), (529, 2), Trft'tro),
€7rfi(ra, ireneiKa, nenfia-pai, eVfi-
a$qv, win over, persuade ; pass,
and raid., be won over, be con-
vinced (433, § 3). believe, yield,
obey. Lat. pared (594).
Trei/oa
427
TT
Xtjv
irtlpa, -as, fj (46), trial, proof, ex-
perience, em-piric.
^.ireipoui) (160), comm, neipaofiai,
neipdaofiai, iircipaadfxr^v. neneipd-
fiai eneipadrju, attempt, endeavor;
make trial of, test, pirate. .
IIcXoirovvTJo-ios, -a, -ov, Peloponne-
sian ; as a subst. a Peloponnesian.
ILtXrai, -Siv, al, Peltae.
f ir6\Ta<mfs, -ov, 6 (52, No. 2), one
who hears a light shield (neXrr}) ,
peltast, targeteer.
J ireXTOo-TiKo's, -f), -6v, belonging to a
peltast ; to TreXraorncdy (sc arpd-
Tevfxa), the targeteer force.
ire'Xrn, -r]s, rj, a small, light shield
carried by the peltasts, shield,
target. No. 2.
trf\i.iroi, -\j^<o, -^a, nenoficfia, TrtVe/x-
/xai, €7refj.(f)6r}v (546, 9), .send,
despatch, pomp.
f ir€VTtt-Kd<rioi, -ai, -a, five hundred.
ir€'vT€, indecl., five, five, penta-
gon.
I irevTc-Kat-ScKa, \\\^e.Q\., fifteen.
-irep, iutens. eiiclit. part.,yMS«, very,
even.
TTspC, prep. {\^\), {around, about); w.
gen., about, concerning, above,
for (Lat. de) ; irtpX irXeicrTov or
TTfpl TraiTos TTOielcrdai, to consider
of the highest {utmost) importance ;
w. dat., around, near ; w. ace,
about, all around; in respect to.
peri-od, peri-meter.
•ir€pi-"yC"YVO|iai, be superior, conquer.
Trepi-t'xw, surround, encompass.
ir£pi-pLe'va>(772), wait around, remain,
wait for ; w. ace. (603).
ircpi-irXe'oj, sail around (783, 9).
See irXew.
rEcpo-ns, -ov, 6, a Persian.
t IIcpo-iKo's, -i), -OP, Persian.
•mTyri, -^s, f], fountain, spring ; pi.,
the sources of rivers.
n£"YpTjs, -r)Tos, 6, Pigres.
irUlta (nud-, iv.), (709), -faa, enl-
eaa, iren ieafuu, inUarOriv, press,
crowd; pass., he hard pressed,
oppressed.
irC|iirXT]p.i (n-Xa-, vii.), TrXj^ato, enXrja-a,
nenXrjKa, nenXTjapai, iTiXTjaB-qv, fill
(734); w. acc. and gen.; w. ace.
of person, fill full, satisfy. Lat.
impleo, FILL, FULL, plethora.
trtlTTft) (tTCT-, TTTOr), (533, 5), TretToO-
p,aL, eneaov, irenTOixa, fall. Lat.
peto, FIND, s_ym-ptom.
nio-CS-qs, -ov. 6, a Pisidian.
t •jna-Tivo), -eva-fo (149), ti^ust, believe.
firuTTis, -eo)s, Tj (479, 3), faith,
pledge.
4 irwrros, -j), -df (594), faithful,
trusty ; trustworthy, sure : as
subst., pledge ; Trtora hovvai Koi
Xa^eiv, give and receive pledges.
\. ttio-to'ttis, -t]tos, r} (482, '6), fidelity.
f irXeOpiaios, -d, -ov, of a plethron.
irXe'Opov, -ov, to (342), a plethron ;
one hundred Greek feet, or one
hundred and one English feet.
irXcCwv or irXc'wv, more, larger {^S2),
and TrXela-Tos, most ; conip. and
sup. of noXvs (380, 4).
trXe'w {nXv-, ii.), (214), frXevaoinai or
TrXevaovfiai, cTrXevtra, nenXevKa,
TreirXeva-fiat, sail, take ship. Lat .
pluo, FLOW, FLEET.
vX'i)6os, -eos, TO {Si2), fulness, mul-
titude ; length of time (734). ple-
thora.
jirXijOw (734), be or become full.
Lat. pleo.
irki^v, adv. w. gen., except, save;
conj., except, but, except that,
save that.
TrXyjpr)^
428
TrpaTTco
irXripris, -es (335), full, full of filed
with, complete, hat. plenus (734).
f ir\Tl<riat(<> (TrXjyo-taS-, iv.), (227),
draw near, approach.
<ir\T|<rios, -d, -ov (227), near, neigh-
boring; TrKrfaios, a neighbor; adv.,
TrXijcriovi near^ hard by, at hand. '
irXTiTTa) {n\r)y-, iv.), (657), ttX^^o),
eirXtj^a, TreTrXrjya, Tveiikrjyfxai,
enXrjyrjv, iu COmp. iiikdyr^v (650,
a), strike, smite. apo-plexy.
See lK*irXT]TT«.
irXoiov, -ou, TO (TrXto), .sa^7), (68), a
vessel, boat.
iroico) (154, 2), -j/o-o), elc. (198),
make, appoint, do, accomplish,
cause; ttoicIv ev or kukcos, treat
luell or ill (468, ci) ; for Trept
TrXeiVrou, etc., see ircpC. Lat.
facio, poet, poem.
tiroX€(i€« (160), -lyo-co, etc. (198),
M;«r, carry on, make, or z^rt^ye trar,
fight with; w. dat. or w. Tr/aoy and
eVt w. ace, against.
f iroXcfjiiKos, -^, -6v (485, 4), of war,
warlike, skilled in war. polemic
f iroXe'iiios, -d, -oi; (485, 3), hostile;
subst., an enemy in war, ol irokf-
nioi, the enemy. Syn. 709.
iroXcfios, 6, icar, hostility, enmity,
vengeance.
iroXiopK€o> (174), -r)(Ta), etc. (198),
hem in a city, besiege.
iro'Xis, -ews, r) (290), a city, state.
policy, police, raetro-polis.
iroXiTiis, -ov, 6, a citizen, politics.
t iroXXoKis, adv. (445, d), often,
many times;
iroXtis, ttoWt), ttoKv (299), much,
great, large, many (302) ; of
space, large, far, wide; Lat.
multus ; TTo'X'Kov a^ios, ivorth
much; ol TvoWoi, the many,, ma-
jority ; as adv. in neut. sing, and
pi., TToXv, TToXXa. much, many
times (460) ; to ttoXv, the greater
part ; em noXv, a great distance,
or over a great extent ; for Trcpt
nXdopos, etc., see ircpt ; w. com]),
and sup. intens. iroXv 6aTTov,far,
or much quicker (465, 3) ; nXeicov
or TrXeo)!', TrXeioros (380, 4).
poly- in compounds, — poly-gon,
poly-theism ; pleonasm.
iropcid, -as, rj, journey, march.
iropcvo) {rropos, passage), (34), -€v<t<o,
make go, carry ; comra. pass. dep.
nopevofxai, Tropevcrofiai, inopevdijv,
be carried, march, go, proceed,
advance. Lat. iter facio, fare,
FERRY, pore.
iropr^b) (TTopid-, iv.), TTopio) (608, a),
furnish, provide; mid., procure,
get.
iro'ppo), adv., far, far from, farther.
irorapios, -ov, 6, a river, hippo-
potamus.
iroTc, end. adv. (695), at any time,
once, ever.
iroTcpos, -a, -ov (586), which of the
two ? lohelher ; Lat. uter ; norepov
. . . rj, whether . . . or.
TTov, interrog. adv., where ? Lat. ubi.
irov, end., indef. adv., somewhere,
anywhere.
irovs, TToSdy, o (363), foot. Lat.
pes, FOOT, tri-pod.
firpa^iia, -aros, to (480, 2), a thing
done, a deed ; plur. affairs, dif-
ficulties, trouble (227)- prag-
matic.
t irpdlts, -eas, tj (479, 2), doing, ac-
tion, deed, undertaking, praxis.
irpaTTft) {irpay-, iv.), (607, 2), Trprz^o),
enpa^a, pf. 7re7rpa;^a or Trenpaya.
7r€7rpa:yp.ai, iirpcixBrjv, act, do, per-
7rpia^v<;
429
7rpo-(l)vXa^
form ; accomplish ; ev Trpdrro),
fare well, be fortunate, practi-
cal, practice.
irpeVpvs, -eojy, 6 (388), old man ; as
adj., old, reverend ; ol npea^eis,
elders, ambassadors ; as from an
adj. come the degrees of compari-
son, comp. irpea^vTepos, sup. npe-
a^vTUTos. presbyter, priest.
irpCoo-Oai,, 2 a. iufin. of coueopai, buy ;
2 a. indie, iupiaprjv ; see 846.
irpCv (705), adv., sooner, before;
coiij., before that, sooner than,
until. Lat. prius.
irpo, prep. w. gen. only (14-1), before,
in front of (160) ; in preference
to, in behalf of, for the sake of
(142, 2). pro-phet.
irpo-ai<r0dvo|j.ai, observe beforehand.
irpo-PaXXci) (786, vocab.), throw for-
ward ; mid. with ra onXa, present
as for an attack, problem.
irpo-8C8(0|j.i (803), give over or up,
surrender, desert, abandon, be-
tray.
irpa-cip.i (e?/ii), (741), advance, go
forward, come on.
irpo-€iirov, say beforehand, an-
nounce.
irpo-9vnos, -ov, ready, willing, ea
ger.
^ irpo-0v|ici)s, adv., willingly, eager-
ly ; comp. -orepov, sup. -drara.
irpo-tiws.i (796), send forth; mid.,
commit, entrust, surrender.
irpo-Co-TTiiii (628), place at the head
of, place before ; intrans. in mid.
with 2 aor., pf., and plnpf., act.
stand before, or be, at the head of,
command ; w. gen., command.
irpo-KaTaXajiPavw (63S), seize upon
beforehand, preoccupy.
IIpo'|«vos, -ov, 6, Proxenus.
irpo-opd'i) (709), see in front, be-
fore.
irpds, prep. (141), (in the presence
of), (142, 5); w. gen., in front
of before, from, in accordance
with ; w. dat,, near, at, in addi-
tion; w. ace, towards, to, against,
about, in respect to (206) ; Trpos
(f)i\iav, in a friendly manner.
pros-ody.
•irpocr-aiT€«, ask in addition.
irpo(r-8£8a)p,i (647), give in addition,
add.
'7rpo<r-fepxo|iai, advance, come to or
on, approach.
irpocr-cxw (174), hold, apply, direct.
Trpoo--T{Ka», come to, be related to ; w.
dat.
irpoVOev (Trpd?), (328), adv., before,
in front of; formerly, previously^
sooner ; •npotrOcv . . . npiv, before,
until (707, a).
'7rpo<r-'7row'op.ai, assume, pretend ; els
8e 8r) (iVe, ivpocnioiovjxevos anev-
deiv, but then one of thcKC in par-
ticular said, pretending to be in
haste (808, § 14).
irpdo-w, adv., forward, omvard ;
levai Tov irpocrco, go forward, fur-
ther (804, § 1).
irpoTcpos, -a, -ov (709), former,
sooner ; previous, before ; w. gen.,
before; Lat. prior ; adv., irpore-
pov, before, previously (70?, a).
irpo-Tlfioiw (359), honor more, above,
before ; esteem.
irpo-()>aCv(i), show forth, show before,
declare ; mid., appear before, ap-
pear in the distance, appear.
irpo'-<|>a<ris, -ecos, 17, a pretext (372).
prophecy.
irpo-<t>v\a^, -aKosi 6, out- guard ; pi,
picket.
7Tp(Jt)T0<S
430
cnrevoa)
:•§<
vpwTOS, -rj, -ov (449), Jirat, foremost
(804, N. 2) ; 7rpa)Tou, to npwTov,
as adv., in the Jirat place, Jirst,
at first.
ni)9a7opds, -ou, 6, Pythagoras.
IlvXai, -a)!/, at, Pylae.
irvv6avo(iai (ttv^-, v.), (633, 4),
Treixrofjiat, eirvdofirjv, TreTrvcr/Liat,
learn hy inquiry^ inquire, ask
(638).
v&, iiidef. end. adv., up to the pres-
ent time, yet.
irws, adv., how ?
ir«s, indef. end. adv., somehoio, in
some way, in any way.
P.
(tifn (pv-, ii.), (529, 5), pevo-o/iai,
ippvrjKa, eppvijv, flow, run (188).
iidUflud, sTiiEAM, rheum, ca-
ta-rrh.
ptirTw (pi(f)-, iii), (587), pt\//Q),
eppl^a. eppTcpa, epplfxpai, €ppi<pdr)v,
€ppi<j)r]v (593), throw, cast, hurl,
cast away or aside.
'PwfjiTj, -ris, T], Rome. Lat. Roma.
S.
o-oXm'vl, -tyyos, 17 (803), a trumpet.
<ra\7rr^a> (aaXTrtyy-, iv.), iffaXiny^a,
sound the trumpet; impcrs. aak-
TTt'^fi, the trumpet sounds (786,
vocab.).
ZopSeis, ecav, ai, Sardis, capital of
Lydia.
f craTpairevo), -fvo-w, be a satrap;
rule as a satrap.
o-aTpairrjs, -ov, 6 (48), a satrap, a
Persian viceroy.
Sarvpos -ov, 6, the satyr Silenus.
<r€-avTov, -rjs, contr. aauroi), -^y(403),
reflex, pron., of yourself.
(TTjjiatvw (arjfiai^f iv.), (612, 5),
<T-qp.ava) (255), ia-qprjva, show by
a sign, give signal, signify (615).
SlXdvds, -ov. 6, Silanus.
criTos,-ou, 6 (342), co?'n. wheat, food.
(Titfirab) -Tjaopai, ccrtcoTrr^ora, creaKt)-
TrrjKa, be silent; trans, keep si-
lence, be silent.
o-Kc'iTTOfjiai, see c-Koirew.
o-K€vo-({>opos, ov (cTKevos + ^^p<*>),
(494, 4), carrying baggage ; subst.
baggage carrier, sutler ; to. (tkcvo-
cfiopa, baggage animals.
•\a-Kr\viia (372), -j^cro), encamp, be
encamped.
o-Kt\vr\, -rji, 7). a tent, shed, scene.
o-Koirew (593), only used in pres.
and impf., the other tenses, o-<e-
yj^op-ai, €(TK€*^dp.r}v, €(TK€ppai, aie
supplied by aKeirTofim, see, view,
look at or observe carefidly, spy
out, watch, consider, sceptic.
SdXoi, -0)1/, oi. Soli, a city of Cilicia.
solecism.
So<j>a(v€Tos, -ov, 6, Sophaenetus.
f o-o<}>id, -as, T) (482, 1), wisdom.,
skill; skill in music (756, § 8),
sophist.
cro<[>o's, -r}, -ov, wise, clever, skilful.
philo-sophy.
SirapTTj, -rjs, 17, Sparta.
crira'u), (tttclctco, eanaa-a, eanaKa^
(CTTracrpai, icnrda-Orjv., draw.
SPEED, spasm. See diroo-iraw.
o-ircvSo) (792), (T7r(i(rco, eaneiaa,
eaneiKa, offer a libation, make a
drink-offering; mid., make a
treaty.
<nrev8ci), -fuo-o), eaneva-a, urge or
press on, hasten, be in haste.
(TTTOV
Slj
431
crvfi-TropevoiJLaL
o-irovS^, -fjs. rj (cmevdoi), a libation ;
pi. anovdai, a treaty or truce.
spondee.
(rrolSkov, ou, to (414), a sfade, a fur-
long, nearly 600 Greek feet, or
582i English feet.
(TTaOjjw's, -ov, 6 {lo-TTjiJLi), Stopping
place ; a station, day's march.
Lat. stahulum.
cTTcvos, -fj, -6v, narrow. steno-
gr;ipliy.
orT€p€« (414), aT€pr)(T(o, ((TTipriaa,
-eaTepTjKa, deprive, rob.
irroXi], 'fjs, 17 (oTc'AXo), send), robe,
garment, stole.
.(.oTo'Xos, -ov, 6 (477, 4i}, preparation,
equipment, military force, expe-
dition (372).
j" OTpdT€V(i,a, -arcs, to (773), «u
army, host, division of an army.
Syn. 214.
I oTparcvw (206), -€vaa>, make an
expedition, make war, of officers ;
raid., serve in the army, make an
expedition, take pai-t in an expe-
dition, lead an army, march, of
officers and soldiers ; ds or iiri
TivOf against any one.
■j- o-TpaT-iryew, -r](T(o ("263), be a gen-
eral, lead; w. gen. command.
f o-TpaT-Tj-yid, -df, rj (263), general-
ship, command.
f trrpaT-Tj-yos, -ov 6(501, l\ general,
commander (513). Syn. 227.
stratagem.
f (TTpaTio, -as, 17 (41), an army, host.
Syn. 214.
f oTpaTiwrqs, -ov, 6, soldier; pi.
troops.
+ oTpaTo-ircSevci), -fvo-o), to encamp ;
coinm. in the mid.
■f oTpaTd-ircSov, to (widov, ground),
a camp, an encampment.
q-Tparo's, -ov, 6 (773), encamped
army, aryny, force. Syn. 214.
o-Tpcirros, -T), -ov, easily bent, twisted ;
6 (TTpenTos (174), a twisted collar,
necklace. No. 4.
<rTp€<|>a> (659), o-Tpeyjra), eaTpeyJAa,
((TTpo(f)a, earpapp^i, ((TTpecpOrjv,
((TTpcKpTjv (650, a), turn, twist;
intr. and in pass., turn or face
about, cata-strophe, apo-stro-
phe.
STujjL<j>tt\ios, -ov, 6, a Stymphalian.
o-v, <rov (391), thou. Lat. tu, thou.
o-u-y-'yi'yvojjiai (675, § 9), meet, be
with, confer with, become ac-
quainted with, be intimate with.
<ruY-KaXeo> (174), call or summon
together, assemble, cotivene.
Sv€vv€<ris, -toy, 6, Syen7iesis, king of
Cilicia.
(niX-Xa}i.^vci> (109), seize, arrest ^
apprehend, syllable.
orvX-Xe-yw, gather together, collect;
pass., assemble.
\. otjX-Xo'y'^, -?)y, r), a gathering : a
levying of soldiers, levy.
(rv|x-PaXX(i> (372), bring together;
mid., contribute, symbol.
o-vix-PovXevo) (149), advise, counsel ;
mid., consult together, confer with,
deliberate, ask advice : w. dat.
(rv|ji- (taxes, -ov (paxtj), in alliance
with ; avppa\os, 6, an ally.
o-vji-jit'yvvp.i, mingle with, Join.
orv}i-irds. -Trdo-a, -7rai/'(359), all to-
gether, all, entire ; to o~vpnav,
altogether, in general.
orv^.-ire'ii.'n'w (149), send with.
o-vii-irXcws, -0)1/ (734),/m//, very full,
abounding in.
<rv(i.-'iroX€|x€«(174), 7nake war together
ivith, aid in war.
(rv)i.-irop€vo|j.ai, accompany.
(TVfl-TrpaTTO)
432
<rv\i.-vpd.Tr<a, do with, help, assist^
co-operate with, aid, w. dat., or
w. dat. of person and ace. of
thing (648, § 8).
trvv, prep. w. dat. only (141), with,
in company with, with the aid of.
Lat. cum. sym-metry.
trvv-dya, bring together, call to-
gether^ Join.
crvv-aXXaTTft) (oXXay-, iv), -d^co,
-TjXka^a, ■r)XXa)(a, -r]Wayyiai, -rjk-
\dyr)v, reconcile ; mid. and pass.,
make terms with, he reconciled.
orvv-ava-Pa£v«, go up with.
orvv-tTro|iai, follow with, accompany.
o"vv-6Tj|ia, -uTos,. TO {TL^Tjfxt), thing
agreed upon, signal, watchword,
countersign.
o-vv-oiSa (784), share in knowledge,
he conscious.
<rvv-TaTT<o (695), draw up, marshal ;
mid , place one^s self in military
order, form a battle line, etc.
syntax. (808, 14.)
0-vv tCOtihi (741), put together ; mid.,
make an agreement, contract.
synthesis
SwpdKoVios, -ov, 6, a Syracusan.
-(-5Iypid, -as-, fj, Syria.
Svpos, -ov, 6, Syrian.
<rv-o-K€va|o}jiat, -dcro), make prepara-
tions, pack up.
<rv-{rTpaTi«TT]s, -ov, 6(77^), a fellow-
soldier.
a-&lw (o-coS-, iv.), (608, 5), aaxrco,
ea-cocra. aeacoKa, crea-cocrfxai or ae-
trcofiai, €(rd}6r]v, .<iave, rescue, pre-
serve, conduct safely ; mid., save
one's self, escape, return safely.
soz-odout.
SwKpoiTTjs, -ovs, 6 (329), Socrates,
au Achaean, one of the Greek
generals.
Swcris, -€a>s, 6, Sosis.
<ra)TT|p, -^pos, 6 (478), savior, de-
liverer.
cra)TT]pid, -as, fj (ctco^q)), means of
safety, safety, deliverance.
ToXavTov, -ov, TO, talent, equal to
sixty miuas or about $1080. See
|xvd.
Tap,(6s, -w, o, Tamos.
rd^is, -fcoy, r) (rarro)), (297), an ar-
rangement; esp. of troops, disci-
pline, order, rank, line of battle,
cohort, company, array {77^, vo-
cab.). syn-tax.
Tapcot, -Qiv, 01, Tarsus, chief city
of Cilicia.
TCiTTO) (ray-, iv.), (607, ]). rd^oi,
era^a, reraxa, Terayfiai, irdx^rju,
(615) arrange, draw up in mili-
tary order, appoint, order; mid.
and pass., take oneh post, be sta-
tioned ; Teray/xfvoi, drawn up
(774:, § 16). tactics.
TavTT), adv., in this or t?tat way or
manner, here.
Td<|>pos, -ov, T], a ditch, trench.
fraxews, adv. (4:70), swiftly, quickly,
soon.
ra\vs, eTa, -V (298), swiff, quick ',
raxvi adv., swiftly, quickly, soon ;
bia Taxe<ov, with speed (.'^02) ; Odr-
T<ov and raxtcov, rdxicrros (3/9, 2);
o)s rdxia-ra, as quickly as possible ;
Tj ibvvaTo rdxKTTa, as quickly as
he was able (735, k. 4). Lat.
celer.
ri, post-posit, eucl. couj., and, like
Lat. -que ; re . . . /cat, both . . . and
(109).
rei^o?
433
Tp€7rco
Tcixos, -eos, -ovs, TO (342), a wall,
fortress. DIKE, DIG.
-j-Tc\€VTd», -fjaco, etc. (reXos), (328),
end,Jimsh, end one's life, die.
■friKtvrfi, -rjs, r}, end, completion,
termination, death.
-j-TcXew {2^?}), finish, fulfil an obli-
gation, jmf/.
TcXos, -€os, TO, an end, result ; adv.
ace, at last, finally, talisman.
TCfivto (rejLi-, v.), (631, 1), re/i« (255),
cTOfiov (650, b) or *T€fiov, TeTfir^Ka,
TeTfiTjfJLai, €Tfj.rjdT]v, cut, wound.
a-tom, ana tomy.
•j-TcrapTos, -T). -ov, fourth.
■j" TCTpaKwr-xtXioi, -at, -a, four thou-
sand.
-}■ Terpa-KoVioi, -ai -a, four hundred.
TCTTapes, -o {4:^7), four, tetr-arch,
tetra-gon, rouB.
Ti-ypTjs, -r]T09, 6, the Tigris.
Ti0T]|xi (^e-, VII.), 6r](TO), edrjKa, TedfiKa,
TeBeifiaL, tTedrju (/ 30, 5), put. place,
set; inid., put, place (for one's
self), (733); for pass, /cctfiai is
comni. used ; Ti6eo-6ai to. orrXa lias
tliree senses: (') ground arms,
OifxevQi to, OTrXa dvenavovTO (732,
11. 4); (2) order arms, halt, or
s/a^*"/ under arms ready for action
(733, 10); (3) generally take up a
military position, draw up in order
of battle {7'62, 9); eV Td^ei 6ta6at
oiika, place one's self in order
of battle ; with ayava, appoint,
institute (732, 1). deem, do,
DOOM, theme.
•|-TT(jtou«) (154, 1), -^(To), etc., value,
honor, esteem.
Tiji'/j, -^s, fi (41), honor, worth,
value (7S5).
Itthios, -a. -ov, held in honor, val-
ued, honored.
\. Ti(j,-wp€a), -jjo-co (241), avenge, pun-
ish : mid., take vengeance on
(785).
tCs, Ti (435), interrog. pron., who?
which? what? tl often as cog-
nate ace. (261, a).
tIs, t\ (435), indef. pron. enclit.,
any one, some one, something,
anything ; as adj., any, a, a cer-
tain, a kind of.
Tiorcra<})€'pvTis, -eos, -ovs, 6 (p. 132^),
Tissaphernes, satrap of Caria.
TiTpcoo-KO) (t^o-, vi.), (651) rpaxroj,
erpojo-fj, T€rpo)fxai. eTpadrjv, Wound.
TOio'o-Se, Toiade. Toiovde, dein. pron.,
such, of such a kind, nature, qual-
ity ; somewhat as follows.
TOiovTos, ToiavTT), ToiovTov, dcni.
j)r<)n., such, of such kind, nature,
or quality, such as precedes.
f To§€vp.a, -uTos, TO (480, obs.), an
arrow.
-j-To^evo), -ciKTci) (359), hit with an
arrow, shoot with arrows, shoot.
in-toxicate.
To|ov, -ov, TO (52), bojv.
^to^o'ttjs, -ov, 6 (481, 2), a bowman.
No. 3.
Too-ovTOS, ToaavTr], ToaovTov, dem.
pron., so or thus much (808, § 14),
so large, so great, so many, Lat.
tantus ; oaa> . . . to(tgvt(o, lit., by
how much the sooner . . . by so
much the more, i, e. the sooner
. . . the more (726, 8).
to't€, adv., then, at that time.
Tp€is, rpla (447), thi'ee. Lat. tres,
THREE, tri-pod.
Tp€'ira), Tpeyf/a), iTpc^a, cTpanov
(650, b), TeTpo(})a, TCTpafifxai, €Tpd-
TTTjv (650, a), eTp€<p6r]v, turn, turn
aside or back ; mid., turn, betake
one^s self; put to flight, rout;
28
TfX€(f)
Q)
484
vcTTepeo)
rpeirdv cts (f>vyr]v, put to JligJit.
THREAD, THllOJS'G.
ro£<|>(i> (Tp€(f>- for 6p€<p-, p- 15 3^),
6p(^a>, (dpf\l/a, T€Tpo(f)a, TtBpap,-
fiat, €dp6cf)dT]v, eTpd(pT}v (650, a),
nourish, rear, support.
Tp€x« (rpex" for Bpex'-: P- 153^, viii.),
(698, 5), Bpafxovpai, (bpap.ov, be-
dpafiTjKa, debpaprj/jLai, run, the
general word. $ea> denotes liaste
and speed, usually of men. Lat.
curro.
Tpidxovra (rpels), indecl., thirty.
rpid-KOcrioi -at, -a {rpfis -\- tKarov),
three hundred.
Tpi-^pris, -ovs, ^ (821), ndj. triply
fitted ; as subst. sc. vavs, a galley
with three hanks of oars, galley,
trireme, war vessel (784).
Tpwr-xtXioi, -at, -a, three thousand.
TpCros, -77, -ov (rpels), (445), third;
TO rpirov, adv., the third time.
TpoTT^, -^y, ^(477,2), a turning, a rout.
4-Tpo'iros, -ov, 6 (477, 3), one's turn,
manner, character (251). trop-
ic, trophy, trope.
rpo^i], -rjs, f] (rpecfja)), nourishment,
support, a-trophy,
Tvyx^vw (ru^-i v.), (()33, 5), Tcv^ofim,
iTvxovy T€Tvxr]Ka or T€Tfvxa (251),
hit, hit upon, meet with ; gain,
obtain; intrans., happen; w. a
participle (245), happen, hy
chance, Just, now, napcov irvy-
Xaff, happened to he present
(250, 3).
Tvpiaiov, -ov, ro, Tyriaeum.
Y.
ilSwp, vbaroi, to (763), ux^ter. Lat.
imduy hydr-ant» water, wet.
v|jLeT€pos, -o, -ov (407), your.
dir-apxos, -ov, 6(540), a suhordinate
officer, lieutenant.
vir-£ipx« (449), begin, he under as
a foundation, be, exist ', he devoted
to, belong to, favor, support.
virc'p, prep. (141) w. gen., over,
across, beyond ; for, in defence of
in behalf of ; w. ace. over, beyond;
of number, above, upwards of
more than (149). Lat. super,
hyper-bole, over.
vircp-PoX^, -ijs, fj (/SaXXo)), the act of
crossing or of passing, passing
over ; mountain passage or pass.
■\ vir-T]pirio>, -r](T(o, serve as a rower ;
serve, aid, supply.
vir-"»]p6'TT|s, -ov, 6, an under-rower, a
sailor, servant, attendant.
vir-iorxve'ofjiai (634, 2), vno-axwo-
jjLai, VTT-eaxoprjv, vn-eax^f^ai- (638),
hold one's self under, promise.
Synt. 724.
viro, prep. (141), under (263) ; w.
gen., from under; of agency, by,
through, from ; w. dat., under,
beneath, at the foot of, under the
power of; w. ace of motion or
extension, under, beneath.
viro-tv-yiov, -ov, to (188), a beast of
burden, a pack-animal.
vTro-Xa^jipdvcD, receive, take under
one's protection, answer.
viro-XeCiroi, leave behind.
vir-OTmv<a, -evaco, impf. vTr-aTTTevou,
suspect, apprehend.
viro-xwpt'w, -rjdo), withdraiv, retreat.
vir-oxj/id, -09, 17 (opdco), suspicion ,
mistrust.
•j- v(rT€paios, -d, -ov, following, next ;
TTJ voTcpaia (sc ^pepa), on the
following day.
f vo-rcpe'tt (388), -rjato, be later, arrive
after, w. gen.
VC7TC/>09
435
<^uXaf
I vc-Tcpos, -a, -01/ (38S), Za«er, behind,
' kuer ; w. gen., /a^er than; vare-
pov, adv. (460), ^afer, afterwards.
OUT, UTTER.
i5\|nf|\ds, ->7, -oV, ^/^/«, ^f^^^^-
*.
^oXvta ((f)av-., iv.), (597), ^a^w €(f)r]va,
TTecpayKu or 'n€(f)Tjva, 7T€<pacrfxaL,
€(t)dvdr]v, e(fidvr]v, make appear,
show, make known ; mid. and
pass., appear, seem, he seen ; witli
a part., evidently, manifestly
(777)- phenomenon.
<}>a\a"y^, -ayyos, rj (208), a line of
battle, a phalanx, phalanx.
<}>av£pos, -a, -6v ((f)aLvco), (251), in
plain sight, visible, manifest,
evident ; (pavepos el/xi (777)-
<|>€pti) (0ep-, ol- iv€K-, viii.), (098, ^)),
ot<TQ), fjV€yKa, fvrjvoxa, eurjueypai,
r]V€x6iiu, bear, bring, carry (08),
Lat./ero/ of wages, ?-fce?"r<?: jjro-
duce, yield ; ;^aXf Troas <f)epetv, be
troubled (467, II. 13). liEAU,
BURDEN, meta-phor.
<}>£V"y« (4)vy-, ii.), (529, 3), (}>€v^o-
fxat or (fiev^ovfj-ai, €(f)vyov, ne-
(f)€vya, flee, be an exUe ; ol
(fxvyovres, the fugitives, the exiles
(241) ; the pres. may have the
sense of the pf., I flee, am in ex-
ile. Synt. 603. Lat. /w^rio, bow,
BAIT, Bux-om.
<j)T)|j.C (714), (f)r](Ta), €(f)r}(ra. say,
affirm, declare, speak ; syn.
772. Syut. 769, a; (727).
Lat. died.
(|>Odva> (cfyBa-, v.), (631, 2). -rjo'op.ai
or <f>Sd(ra>, €(f)dacra, f(f)dr}v (731,
2), co7ne before, arrive before,
anticipate (251) ; witli a part.
(245) frequently best translated
before, quicker, sooner, first
(248, 9).
-f-<|>i\eci>, -lyo-o), etc. (206), love, of
family and friends (797). Lat.
dlligo.
•f <{>iX£d, -as, rj, friendship, affection ;
•npos (f)i\iav, in a Jriendly man-
ner.
f <}>i\ios, -a, -ov (86), friendly, at
peace, used esp. of countries.
■\ c}>iXo-9t]pos, ov, fond of the chase.
-}■ <}>i\o-Ktv8i;vos, -ov,fond of danger ^
adventurous.
f <|)i\o-p.a0'^S, -69 (335), (p,av6dvai),
fond of learning or eager to learn.
<j>i\os, -jy, -ov (86), dear, friendly,
kindly disposed, phil-a nth ropy,
Philip, phil-tre (797).
4- <}>iN.os, -ox,, 6 (SO), friend.
•f ^o^4<a, -r)(r(o, €cf)6j3r](ra, frighten^
terrify, Lat. terreo : conim. pass.
dep.,fea7', be afraid, dread, Lat.
timed. Syn. 709.
<|>oPos, -ov,^ 6, fear, fright, dread.
hydro-phobia.
^oiviKt], -qs, f), Phoenicia.
I <|>oiviKto-Tif|s, -ov, 6 (786, vocab.),
ivearer of the purple; courtier.
<f)pot)p-apxos, -ov, 6 {cf)povp6s or
(fypovpd, garrison), (502, 7),
commander of a garrison or
fortress.
f 4»pvYid, -a?, 17, Phrygia.
4>pv|, -vyo?, 6, a Phrygian.
f <|)VYas, -dbos, 6 (208), fugitive,
exile.
^v>{i\, -ris, 17 ((pevyca), fight, rout.
■f^vXaKf], -^s, f] (46), guarding,
iiyafch, guard ; jarrisou.
•|-<j>'u\a|, -aKos, 6 (476, 1), watch-
man,^uard; pi. body-guard.
^vkOLTTO)
436
xjjekiov
^vkdma ((j)v\aK-, iv.), (607, 3), -^co,
e<f)vXa^a, Trc^uXaxa, etc., guard,
watch, defend (123) ; intraus.,
keep guard (793, § 22) ; mid., be
on one^fi guard, guard against,
Lat. custodio.
•\ \oXercaLvui (xaXenav-, iv.), (612, 6),
-avo) (255), exoXenrjva, exaXerrdu-
Orjv.be severe, be angry ; pass.,
be offended (149). Synt. 146.
XoXciro's, -T), -ov, hard to bear, griev-
ous, difficult, hard to deal with,
Lat. difficilis; of persons, severe,
bitter, hostile, dangerous ; oi x^-
XeTTOi, dangerous enemies ; coinp.
■doTcpos, sup. -coTaros'.
\. xaXeirtos, adv. (470), with difficulty,
hardly, painfully, severely.
XaXKovs, -rj, -ovv (174), of bronze,
bronze.
XdXos, -ov, 6, the Chains.
-j-Xo-pUis -eaaa, -ev {4tS7), graceful,
pleasing (824).
txaptSojiai (x«ptS-' iv.), (608),
-lovfiai (608, a), €X('pi'0'dp.T]v, K€xd-
pifffiai, favor, please, gratify ; w.
dat., or w. dat. and ace, gratfy
a person in regard to anytliiug,
oblige.
Xapis, -iTOi, T] (^20), favor, gratitude,
thanks.
\dp, x^i-pos, T) (220), the hand, wrist
(821) ; 6ty ;(eipa? i\6eiv rivi,
come into the power of any one
(726, 7). chiro-grapby.
XeipC(ro<f>os, -ov, 6, Chirisophus.
X€ppovT](ros, -ov, r), the Thracian
Chersonesus or Chersonjese.
X'h'v, XV^'^^f Oj ^» goose. Lat. anser,
GOOSE, GANDER.
X^Xioi, -at, -a, a thousand.
Xpaop.ai, xPWop.at (366), ixpr)(rdp.r]v ,
Kexprjiiai, ixPW^V^i "•'^^j employ ;
enjoy, have (804, § 5) ; w. dat.
(p. 1458). Lat. utor.
XpTJ, impers. (123), iufiu. xp^""*; ^^
is necessary, it is needful; w.
ace. and inf. one must needs do a
thing. Syn. 784.
XPTl't" ixPV^'^ ^^'h (784), need, lack,
wish, desire. Syn. 792.
XpfJiAtt, -aros, TO (480, 1), thing used;
pi., goods, property, money, re-
sources (214).
Xpovos, -ov, o, time ; season, period.
Lat. tempus ; chronic, chron-
icle.
f Xpvo'ovs, -rj, -ovv (486, 1), of gold,
golden (170, 2; 174).
f Xpvo-iov, -ov, TO (174), piece of
gold, gold, coin, money.
Xpvo'o's, -ov, 6, gold, gold, chrys-
alis.
4- XP^'^'O'X'^^i'Vos, -ov (501, 3), ivith
gold-mounted bridle.
fx^P^j ■««■) "7 (11 )^ « place, post,
position : ds rfjv eavrov x^p<^v, to
his own position (732, 9) ; esp.
land, country, territory.
\(apiov, -ov, TO,, a place, position,
stronghold ; space.
X«pis, adv., apart ; \v, (^q\\. (412),
without, apart from.
^apos, -ov, 6, Psarus, a river of
Cilicia.
i(r€\iov, -ov, TO. a bracelet (174,
No. 5).
xI)€vStJ<S
437
O)
(f)€ke(o
f \|/€v5tjs, -€S (484, '6), false, lying.
>|/€v8(D (366), -^evcroi, e^eva-a, e-^ev-
afxai, €\lA€va6T]u, deceive, be false,
Ltdt.falld; mid. cheat, lie, deceive.
pseudo-uym.
n.
w, interj. (52) ; with voc. (56).
cSSc {odt), (297)} ^^w-5, so, as follows,
in the following manner.
MV60)jiai, rjcrofiai, eMvrjjxai, ecovfjBrjv
(649), bill/, purchase ; iirpicnir^v is
used as 2 aor. (846) ; for accent,
see 851.
j. wvios, -d, -ov, ybr sale ; ra apia,
leaves, goods.
oipd, -as, f], time, season, proper
time. Lat. hora; year, hour,
horo-scope.
«s, lelat. adv. (241), when, as ; 6 8'
ebs aTr^X^ei/, &m^ when he departed
(640, § 4) ; as coiij., that ; ©y
eTTL^ovXevoi, (saying) that he was
plotting (433, § 3 ; 812, II., § 3) ;
before a partic. to express the
purpose or pretext of the subject
of the leading verb, without imply-
ing that it is also ihe idea of the
speaker or author (241), as if on
the ground that, with the intention
of pretending that, etc., a>s els
TlKTidas ^ovXaixevos (TTpaTeveadai,
pretending that he ivished to lead
an army against the Pisidians
(710, § 11) ; (OS cfiiXov, as a
friend (637, 8); w. sup., Lat.
quam, as rdxia-ra, as quickly as
possible (637, 7) ; w. numerals,
about ; w. infiu., denoting purpose
or result, so that, so as; final, Lat.
ut, that, in order that ; causal
conj., because; temporal, when;
as prep. w. accus., used only be-
fore names of persons, to (297).
<do— ircp, rel. adv. (cos), just as ; as,
like as, even as ; as if, as it were.
wo-Tc, conj. w. infin. or indie, so
that, so as (719).
(a^ikda, -r](TQ), etc., assist, aid, ben-
eft.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
In this vocabulary no word appears that has not been previously given. The
etymology of the words has here been briefly stated; but for a more complete
treatment of the forms, and fuller meanings and uses of Greek words, consult the
Greek -English Vocabulary and the Greek Index.
Abandon
A.
Ariaeus
Abandon, XeiVo) (XtTr-), Xei\/^a>;
e/c-XetTTO), leave a place ; ano-
XeiTTO), Kara-XfiTTO), desert a {)er-
soii or cause ; npo diSoofxi (So-,
vii.), -Ba)(ra>, etc., betray.
Able, Uavos, -fj, -6v] be — , iKavos
About, dfxcjii, TTfpi; be — , jueX-
Xo).
Above, vrrep.
Abrooomas, 'A^poKopcn, -a.
Accompany, enofiat (aeir-), e'^o-
fxai, €an6jxr)v\ crvfnropevofiai.
Accordingly, 817, ovp.
Achaean, *Axo.i6s.
Acropolis, oKpoTToKis, -ecos^ fj.
Admire, davp-d^co (Oavpad-, iv.),
6avp.d(Topai.) etc.
Advance, rropevopau -Kopcvaopai ;
npo(T-€pxopat, -rjXOov ; e7r-etfii (t-).
Advise, crvp-^ovXevco, -cvaoa.
Afraid, be — , (f)o^eopai. Syu. 709.
After, /Lif ra.
After-wards, varepov.
Again, TrdXiv.
Against, eVi, npos.
Aid, ox^eXeci), d)<pe\r}(rQ).
All, nas, TTCKTa, ndu.
Ally, (Tvppaxoi, ov, 6.
Alone, povos, -rj, -ov.
Along, or beside, napd.
Already, ^8rj
Also, Kai
And, Kai, 8e.
Angry, be — , be offended, ;^aXe-
naivco (;^aXe7rai'-, i\ .), ;^aXe7raj/».
Animal, wdd — , Srjpiou. -ov. to.
Announce, ayyeXXco (ay-yeX-, iv.),
dyyeXo), etc. ; dn-ayyeXXa).
Another, aXXos, -q, -o; one — ,
aXXi^Xa)!/ ; of two, €T€pos, -a,
-ov.
Answer, dno-Kptvopai (^Kpiv-, iv.),
dTTO-Kpivovpai.
Anxious, be — , be troubled, dvTdo),
dvlacroi), etc.
Any, TLs, t\, gen. nvos ; anybody
or — one, rh ; anything, t\.
Appear, (fialvopai ((f)av-, iv.), <^a-
vrjaopaL ; em (paivopai.
Applaud, CTT-atveo), -r]aa), etc.
Appoint, dno-BeiKwpi (8«k-, v.),
aTTo-bei^ouni, etc.
Approach, ec^-oSo?, -ov, fj.
Arabia. 'Apn/Sta, as. rj.
Ariaeus, 'Aptato?, -ov, 6.
Arise
439
Breastplate
Arise, dv-iaTafiat {(xra-y vii.), dva-
arfjaofJLai, etc. ; yiyvofxat (yep-), ye-
PTjaofxai, etc., oi" distui-bauce, feic.
Aristippus, ^Apia-rnriros, -ov, 6.
Arm, onXi^di {6nXc8-, iv.), ottXiVo),
etc. ; arms, armor, onXa, rd .
Army, arparid, -as, ff ; a-Tpdrevfia,
-aros, to; arparos, -ov, 6. Syii.
214.
Arrangement, rd^is, -ems, f).
Array, to — , TarTti) (ray-, iv.) ; in
battle — , (rvv-TeTayp,€uos, -rj, -ov.
Arrest, arvWapl^dvo) (Xa^-, v.),
-Xrjyj/'opat.
Arrive, d<l>-LKveopai {Ik-, v.), d(f)i^o-
pai, etc- ; 7rdp-€Lp.i, -fcrofiai.
Artaxerxes, ^Apra^ep^rjs, -ou, 6.
As, a>s ; — much — , oaos ; — ...
— possible, oTi or on with the
superlative; — follows, rdbe ; —
to, a>(TT€.
Ashamed, feel — , ai(rxvvopai
{alaxyv-, iv.), alcrxvvovpaL.
Ask, epoardco, epcoTrj(rco, inquire;
alreu), alTr]cr(o, ask, demand. Syii.
271.
Ass, ovos, -ov, 6.
Assembly, iKKkqa-ld, as, fj.
At, eVi, Tvpos.
Athens, ^Adfjvai, -a>v, ai.
Attack, eTrt-Tidepai {Be-, vii.), eni-
Oqaopai.
Attempt, TT€ipdopai, Treipda-ofiai
Attention, give or pay — , npotr-
€X<>> TOP vovP, TTpoare^o), etc.
Away from, dno.
B.
Babylon, Ba^vKSv, -atpos, fj-
Back, TrdXiv.
Bad, KaKos, -r), -OP.
Barbarian, ^dp^apos, -op; ^ap^a-
piKos, -^, -6u ; ^appiapiKoos.
Battle, pdxr], -rjs, fj; in — array,
avv-T€Tayp€vos, -»/, -ov', give — ,
pd^opai, paxovpai ; Jail into —
line, avp-rdTTOfxat {ray-, iv.), -rd^o-
pai.
Be, flpi {((T-), ea-opai', — present,
yiypopai (yep-), yep^aopai, ndp-
eipi ; — upon, eircipi (eV-) ; being,
a>p, ovaa, ov, gen. optos.
Bear, (pepco, o\(r<o.
Beast, Srjpiov, -ov, to ; — o/burden,
vTTO^vyiov, -ov, TO.
Beautiful, kuXos, -t), -op.
Because, on, cos, ore.
Become, yly vop.aL [yev-), yepfja-o-
pat, etc.
Before, np6, rrpoa-Bep, irpiv.
Beg ofif, e^qiTeopai^ -aLTrjaopat,.
Begin, ap^opai, dp^opai, — for
one's self; apxco, dp^<a, etc., take
the lead.
Believe, ^yeopai, fyyijiropat ; vopi((o
(i/o/itS-, iv.), voptu).
Benefit, w^eXeco, dxpeXfjcra), help,
assist ; ev ttoi/o), noirjaoi, treat
well.
Besiege, noXiopKeo), -rja-o).
Bid, KfXevco -evcrco ; Xeyto, Xe^co.
Boat, ttXoiop, -ov, to.
Boeotia, BotcoTi'd, -as, rj.
Both, dp(f)6T€pos, -a, -ov; on —
Jlanks, iKUTepcoOev; — ... ami,
Ka\ . . . Koi, or T€ . . . Kai.
Bow, To^op ; use the — , ro^evat.
Bowman, to^ottjs, -ov, 6.
Boy, nals, Traibos, 6.
Brave, dya66s, -rj, -op.
Bravely, KaXa>s.
Break, Xvco, Xvaa*.
Breastplate. 6d>pd^, -kos', arm with
— , BcopoKi^o) {BiopoKid-, iv.), -laa.
Bridge
440
Cowardly
Bridge, yecfivpa, -as, rj.
Bring, ayo), a^oa ; — hack icord,
dn-ayyeWoo (d-yyeX-, iv.), -oyyeXw.
Bronze, ;^aX/coi5y, -^, -ovv.
Brother, adfX^us-, -ov, 6.
Burn, Kcto), Kara Kaon {kuv-, iv.),
Kavaco.
But, eiXXa, fie.
Buy, dyopd^oi (dyopab-, iv.), dyo-
/[>d(ra).
By, eVi, vrrd w. gen. of the agent ;
— fhe side of, napd: — tueans of,
dno, 8td ; — land and sea, Kara.
y^p Kol Kara OdXaTrav.
Call, /caXfcd, KoXoi', — out, ^odco,
^orja-ojjLai ] — together, (rvy-Ka-
Xe'o).
Camp, (7T paTOTTfbov, -ov, to. .
Cappadocia, KaTrnadoKid, as, fj.
Captain. Xo;(dydy, -ov, 6.
Capture, \ap^dv(o (\a^-, v.), X7y\//-o-
fxai ; alpeto, alprjcra), etc
Care, take — of, eTn-fxeXeopai, fVt-
fXf\r}(rofiai ; take — , fxeXei, peX^-
Carry, «ya>, a^a> ; — aimi/, dpTrd^w
(dpTraS-, iv.), dpnacrai ; — o/i
t6'«r, TToXffieo), TTo\fprj(r(i>.
Cast aside, away, piirTOi {pi(ji-, iii),
Carsus, Kdpo-os, -ou, 6.
Castolus, Kao-TcoXdy, -ov, 6.
Catch, 6-qpeva), -eucrco ; 'kafx^dvo)
(Xa/3-, v.), "K^ylAOfiat.
Cattle, /Sovs. 3ods, 6, ^.
Cavalry, jVTrety, -e'coi', ot ; — man,
linrevs, -ecos, 6 ; ImriKos, ■ rj, -6v.
Cease, iravopat, navcropai.
Celaenae, KeXaivai, -av, at.
Charge, 'lepai (e-) ; — double quick^
8p6p(o Oeoi, {6v-, ii.), Oevaoixai,
elc.
Chariot, dppa, -qtos, to.
Chase, Sicokco, fiico^o).
Chersonesus, Xeppourjaos, -ov, rj.
Child, nais, iraidos, 6, tj ; naidiov,
-ov, TO.
Chirisophus, Xeiplaocpos, -ov, 6.
Choose, atpeopai, alprjaopai.
Cilicia, KikiKid, -as, rj.
Cilician, Kt'Xi^, -ikos, 6 ; — queen^
KiXicraa, -r)s, r).
Citizen, ttoXitj;?, -ov, 6.
City, TToXis, -cats, T).
Clearchus, KXeap;^os, -ov, 6.
Collect, ddpoi^(o (d6poi&; iv.),
ddpoLcro); avX-Xeyco, -Xe^ca.
Colossae, KoXoaaai, -oiv, at.
Come, epxopai, rfkOov \ rJKO) ; have
— , rJKCo; — on, 7rpo(T-epxopat,
7rp6-€ipi (7-).
Command, KeXevo), -fvcroi ; Tdrrco
(ray-, iv.), rd^o) ; rjye'opai, j]yff
aopai, order : dpx<^, dp^co, rule.
Commander, dpxf^v, -ovros, o ;
(TTpaTTjyos, -ov, 6. Syn. 227.
Company, \6xos, -ov, d ; in —
trith, rrvv.
Conquer, j/t/cdca, VLKrja(o ; KpaTeoo,
KpaTTja-coy etc.
Conscious, be — , o-vv-oiba.
Consider, aKoneco ; aKenTopai
(aK€7r-, iii.), (TKe-^opai ; /SouXfuo-
fxai, -evaopat.
Consult, — with, avp-^ov^evopiai.
Continue, Sm-rfXeco; bi-dyto -d^(o.
Contribute, avp-^dXkco OaX-, iv.),
-j3aX&>.
Counsel, avp-^ovXevo), -fyerco.
Country, x<«pd, -ds, 17 ; into the — ■
of, els.
Cowardly, kukos, -t), -6v.
Cross
441
Error
Cross, or — over, 8ca-^aiu(o (^a-,
iv., v.), -^rjo-ofiai.
Cut, — to pieces or down, Kara-
KQTrr<o (kott-, iii.), -/cov/^o) ; —
down, iK-KOTTTca.
Cydnus, Kvdvos, -ov, 6.
Cyrus, Kvpos, -ov, 6.
Damage, do — , KOKai noUo), -^ao).
Danger, kiv8vvos, -ov, 6.
Daric, dapeiKos, -ov, 6.
Darius, Adpelos, -ov, 6.
Day, ^fiepd, -as, r] ; on the following
— , TTJ va-T€paia ; dat/''s march,
(TTadfioi, -ov, 6.
Deceive, yj/evdco, yj/evao).
Declare, dno-hilKvvfxi {bciK-, v.),
-b(i^o}iai.
Deed, epyov, -ov, to.
Defeat, vikcIq), vLKriaco.
Deliberate, ^ov'Xevofj.ai, avp-^ov-
Xfvofxai, ^ovT^evo-ofiat.
Demand, alreoi, alTr](T<o ; a^^too),
d^taxro) ; — hack, dn-aiTed}. Syii.
271.
Deprive, arepeui, -rjo-o).
Descend, KaTa-^aivca (^a-, iv., v.),
-^rjo-opai.
Design, eVi-^ovAevo), -€v<t<o.
Desire, eTn-dvpia), -t)o-co', edeXco,
-i}(r(o; xpsC« ixPV^'^ i^:-)- ^yn.
792.
Desist, TTavop.ai, Trava-o/iaL.
Destroy, 'Kvm, Xvaco.
Die, T6^ (VTUM, -rjao) ; 6vr](TK(o {6av-,
vi.), QavovpLOi; cLTTo-OvqcyKai.
DiiEcult, ^j^aXfTTOff, -17, -ov.
Distant, he — , d7r-€;^a), St-c^o).
Distribute, Sia-Sifico/ui (80-, vii.),
-Soxrai.
Ditch, rdcfipos, -ov, r;.
Do, TTOtto), 7roirjo-(o', Trpdrro) (jrpdy-,
iv.), irpa^io; — harm, KaKua
TTOuco ; — wrong, dStKeoa, -t}0(o ;
— well hy, fv Tvouat.
Door, Bvpd, -as, fj.
Double-quick, charge — , 8p6pa
6e(o, 0€vo-op.ai.
DoTvn, Kara.
Dra"W, o-7rda>, andcra) ; — up, rdrToa
(ray-, iv.), rd^co.
Dread, o/cveco, -rjaco. Syn. 709.
Dress, o-toXtj, -fjs, fj.
DtVCU, oIk€0)., olKrj(T(0.
Each, €KaarTos, -rj, -ov.
Eager, npoOvpos ; he — , em-Ovfiia.
Eat, €o6iai, edopai.
Educate, TratSevoj, -fvaco.
Embark, eu-^aiuo) (^a-, iv., v.),
-^Tjo-opai.
Empty, fV/SaXXo) OaX-, iv.), -^aXw ;
ela-^dWco.
Encamp, arpaToiredevopai. -evao-
pai ; aKTjVfco, -Tjaco ', be encamped,
KciOrjyLai.
Encampment, orparoTreSoi/, -ov, to.
End, navo), iravaa', come to an — ,
Tovofiat.
Enemy, noKipios, ov, o ; ex^pos,
-ov, 6 ; the — , oi TroXepioi. Svn.
709.
Enlist, Xa/x/Sdi/o) (XajS-, v.), 'Krjylro-
pai.
Entire, ottos ', nds, ndaa. ndv.
Entrust, Trpo-irjpi (4-), -rja-o).
Enumeration, dpi6p6s, -ov, 6.
Equipment, o'toKos -ov, 6.
Error, commit — ,&fxapTdv(o (dpLopT-,
v.), dpapTrjaopai..
Escape
442
Gold
Escape,a7ro 0evya)(^iry-,ii.); — the
notice of, XavOdvco {\ad-, \.), Xtjo-m.
Especially, fiaXia-Ta.
Euphrates, EvfppctTr/s, -ov, 6.
Even, Kai; not — , /Li»/6e, ouSe.
Everything, irdvTa.
Evident, brfKos, -rj, -ov.
Except, 7T\r}v.
Exile, (pvyds, -d8os 6.
Expedition, oTdXos,-ou, 6; 6869, -ov,
rj ; make an — , oTpaTevco, -evaai ;
take part in an — , arpaTevofxai.
Experience, rrelpa, -as, rj.
Extent. ttXtjOos, ovs, to.
Express, dno-bcUvvixi {deiK-, v.),
Fair, kqXos, -t}, -6u.
Faithful, TTiaTos, -17, -ov.
Fall, — on, efi-TriTTTa), -ireaovfiai.
Fast, Ta)(ea>s-
Father, Trarrjp, jiarpos, 6.
Fear, (po^os, -ov, 6 ; (po^eopai -^fj-
aopai, of sudden fear or terror ;
Set So), 8e8oLKa, of reasonable fear;
6ku€(o, -fjao), dread. Syn. 709.
Fellow-soldiers, au8pes a-TpaTicb-
Tai, with or without S).
Fidelity, evuota, -as, fj.
Fight, pdxT], -?;?, jj; pdxop^i, pa-
Xovpai, etc.
Find, fvpio-KO) (evp-, vi.), evprjo-o).
First, Trp5)Tos, -t). -ov; Trpayrov.
Fish, IxBvs, -vos, 6.
Five, Trevre ', — hundred, nevTOKo-
(Tioi, -at, -a.
Flee, (f)€vy(o ((/)uy-, ii.), (f)€v^opai
or <f)€v^ovpai.
Flesh, Kpeas, Kpe<os, to
Flour, ciXfvpa, -av, rd.
Flourishing, evdaipav, -ov.
Flow, p€(»> (pv-, ii.), pevaopai
Follo"w , eiropai, icrnopr^v ; as foU
lows, a)Se, or some case of o8e;
on the following day, tjj va-rcpala ;
in the following manner, hde.
Food, alTos, -ov, 6.
Foot, novs, TTobos, 6.
Foot-soldier, Trends, -ov, 6,
For, ydp ; nepi, eVi, npds-
Force, dvvapis, -€a>s, fj ; laxvs, -vos,
T) ; o-Tpdrevpa, -aros, to ; the
Greek — , to 'EXXtjvikov.
Formerly, to dpxaiov.
Four, TeTTapes.
Fourth, Terapros.
Freedom, eXcvBepid, -as, 17-
Friend, (f)iXos, -ov, 6 ; ^ivos, -ov, 6.
Friendly, (jiiXios, -a, -ov ; (f)iXos,
-rj, -ov.
Friendship, cfuXid, -as, rj.
From, e^, OTTO, napd.
Fugitive, (f)vyds, -ddos, 6 ; cf^evyav,
-OVTOS, 6.
Full, pea-Tos, -rj, -ov ; nXrjprjs, -€s.
Furnish, nopl^oi (7ropi8-, iv-), tto-
piS); Trap-exo), -e'^o).
Garrison, (f)vXaKr}, -rjs, ff.
General, a-rpaTrjyos, -ov, 6.
Gift, dcopov, -ov, TO.
Give, dldcopi (80-, vii), ficba©; —
over, 7rapa-8i8oipi.
Gladly, fj8eu)s.
Go, dpi (t-) ; epxopui, ^X6ov; —
up, dva^aivco, ^r}(ropai ', — back,
away, arr-eipi ; — through, dia-
^aivco. Syn. 741.
God, Beds.
Gold, xP^fJ'^ov, -ov, to; of — , xp^'
aovs, -7, -ovv.
Good
443
Inhabitants
Good, aya^oy, -^, -ov.
Good-wiil, evvoia, -as, rj.
Gratify, x«P*'C«F«' (X"P*^'' ^^•)'
^apiovfxai.
Great, ^eyas, fieydXr), fieya, of size ;
TToXus, TToXX^, TTokv, of amouiit or
number; greater part, to noXv.
Greece, 'EXXas, -ados, rj.
Greek, "EkKqv, -rjvos, 6 ; 'EXXiyvt-
Kos, -T], -6v ; in — , 'EWrjvtK^s.
Grieve, Xv7rea>, 'KvTrrjaco.
Ground, — arms, riBefxai to. oirXa.
Guard, (^uXokt;, -fjs, v ; c^vXa^,
-aico?, o; — or he on — (^uXarro)
(0vXaK-, iv-)i <^vXd^a).
Guest, or guest-friend, ^euos, -ov, 6.
Guide, i^yefiwi/, -ows, 6.
Halt, dva-Traioixai, in order to rest ;
— under arms, OeaOai ra oTrXa ;
laTTjfMt ((TTa-, vii.), o-r/)o-a>; Kora-
Xiio), unyoke.
Hand, x^'P^ x^^po'^' ^•
Happen, rvyx"^'" {t^X'-^ ^0 "^^'^lo"
/xai ; ylyvofxai, yevfjaofiai ; —
Mjjon, eV-Tvyx«''<i*
Happy, €v8aifM0)v, -ov.
Hard, xa^f7i"«^' '^^ '"*'•
Harm, do — , KaKas Trou'w, Troirjaoi ;
SMjfer — , /cafcojs ttuo-xco (7ra^-, vi.),
Treicrofiai.
Hasten, o-ttcvSo), -o-Trevo-w ,• op/iaco,
Have, €X<» (o'fX-)j «!*" *' ^'V^' («0'
eao^iaL, with dat.
He, generally omitted; when em-
phatic, oItos, €K€ivos, and o8e ;
a„rf_, 6 8e,etc. (182, 393ff);
— who, 6 with the part. (234, h).
Hear, aKovio, aKovaofuu.
Height, aKpov, -ov, to.
Her, oblique cases oi avTj].
Herald, Krjpv$, -vkos. 6.
Here, ivraida, avTOv, avTodi, devpo.
Hill, \6(pos, yrjXoclios, -ov, 6-
Him, oblique cases of avTos; ov,
indir. reflex ; see He.
Himself, eavTov, reflex. ; avTos,
iiiteus.
Hinder, kcoXvco, kcoXvo-co.
Hire, paaQoopat, -wo-o/xai.
His, when not emphatic, by the ar-
ticle; referring to the subject, by
iavTov\ when not referring to
the subject, by avTov, Ueivov.
Hold, excB (o-fX-)' f'f'^' <^X^o-<"-
Home, homeward, oUade.
Honor, ti/xtj, -rjs, f) ; Ti/ido), -^o-a>.
Hope, eXTTi's, -I'Soy, ^.
Hoplite, oTrXtTTjs, -ov, 6.
Horse, ittttos, -ov, 6 ; on horseback,
dno Hmrov or dcj) lir-nov.
Horseman, iTnrivs, -eoas. 6.
Hostile, TToXefiios, -a, -op ; ex^pos,
-a, -ov.
Hostility, TioXcp-os, -ov, 6.
House, oi/ci'd, -as, fj ; oikos, -ov, o.
How, TTMf, oTTcos ; — lai-ge, oo-os,
-■q, -ov ; oTToo-o?, -T], -ov-
Hundred, eKaTov.
Hunt, 6r)pevco, -cvaco ; ^rjpdco, -aora>.
I, ey&.
If, ft, eai', av, rjv.
Immediately, €v6vs.
Impassable, anopos, -ov.
In, eV, €is; — order that, ii/a,. ws,
OTTO) J.
Inflict, eni-Tidrj^i (Be-, \'u.), erjaa.
Inhabit, oiWo), -rjau; cVot»c€ft>.
Instead
444
Marsyas
Instead, — o/*, avri
Intend^ jneXXco, fxeWfjaa).
Into, ds.
Invade, efi-/3aXX<o (/3aX-, iv.), -^aka>.
Ionian, 'Icovlkos, -'fj, -6u.
Issus, 'Icrtroi, -ibv, ol.
J.
Jar, ^Kos, -ov, 6.
Javelin, TraXrou, -ov, to.
Journey, nopeid, as, rj ; 6B6s, -ov,^.
Judge, KptvQ) (Kpiv-f iv.), Kpivm.
Justice, biKT), -T]s, ^.
Justly, diKaiMs.
Kill, KTeivco (kt€v-, iv.), KT€va> dno-
KT^lvoi ; be, killed, dTro-durjcTKa),
-Oavovp-at.
King, (Saa-iXevs, -eo)?, 6, 6e — , ^aari-
Xevo), -fuo-o).
Know, ytyvooaKio (yvo-, vi.), yvdii-
aopai ; ol8a, e'laopai ' ■ — how,
inidTapaL, iTviurricropxxi.
Lacedaemonian, haKcbaipovios, -a,
-ov.
Land, yrj. y^s, fj; x^P^i "°^' ^•
Large, peyas, of extent ; iroXvs, see
Great.
Last, at — , reXos.
Lead ayco a^O) \ f)yiopai, rjyrjcropai,
— hack, drr-dyco.
Leader, rjyepatv, -ovos, 6.
Learn, — by inquiry, 7rvv6dvop,ai,
(nv$', v.), neva-opai.
Leave, XftVo) (Xitt-, ii.), Xft>/r&);
eVXeiTro), eVi-Xf tVci) ; — behind,
Kara-XeiTTO), VTro-XetVa).
Left, evoivvpos, -ov; dpiaT€p6s, -a,
-ov.
Lest, p.r].
Let, — loose or — go, d(f)-ir]pi
(-0-
Letter, emaToXr], -rjs, f].
Lie, Kelpai, Ketaopat, of position ;
yjrevdoi, yl/eva-co, falsify.
Line of battle, rd^is, -ecos, fj, fall
into battle — , crvv-TaTTopiai.
Little, piKpos, -d, -6v.
Live, ^d(o, ^r)(ra>.
Long, paKpos, of space or time ;
TToXvs, ttoXXtj, ttoXv, of time ; to-
aovTos, -rj, -ov, so, so much.
Loose, Xvo), Xixrco.
Love, (piXeco, ^ikr](T(o.
Lydia, Kvbid, -as, r).
M.
Maeander, Maiai/Spoy, -ov, 6.
Make, ttoisco. ttoitjctci) ; — answer,
dno-Kpivopai (Kptv, iv.), drro-
Kpivoiipai ; — war, noXepea) -tjo-co ;
— an expedition, aTparevio ; —
known, (rqpaivco (arjpav-, iv.), arj-
p,av5> ; — treaty, (nrevdopai.
Man, avdpcoTTos, -ov, 6. Lat homo;
dvr)p, dvdpns, 6. Lat, vir.
Manifest, (pavepos, -d, -ov. brjXos,
-Tj, -ov.
Many, ttoXXoL See Much.
March, eXavvco (i}^a-, v.), cXa* ; wo-
pfvopai, TTopevaopai; — on, e^e-
Xavvo) ' — up, dvalBaivo), -^{]<Topai ;
day''s — , o-radfios. -oO, 6.
Market-place, dyopd, -as, t]-
Marsyas, Mapavas, -ov, 6.
Mascas
445
Our
Mascas, Matr/cay, -d 6.
Means, hy — oJ\ cmo.
Meat, Kptas, Kpeois, to.
Media, Mj/Si'd, -as, fj.
Meet, avy^iyvonai, -yevrfo-ofiai ;
€v-Tvyxavco (rvy-, v.),-r€V^o/iat.
Meeting, e<-/cX?^crid, as, tj.
Menon, Mevcov, -covos, 6.
Mercenary, ^evos, -ov, 6.
Messenger, ayyeXos, -ov, 6.
Middle, /iccros', -rj, -ov ; fieaou, -ov,
TO.
Midst, fxeaov, -ov, to
Miletus, MiXr]Tos, -ov, f].
Mina, fipa, fivds, rj.
Mind, vovs, vov, 6.
Miss, dfiapTcivco {ap.apT-, v.), dfiap-
TTjaofxai.
Money, dpyvpiov, -ov, to ; xPW^'''^i
-aTQiv, TO. ; xpvcriov, -ov, to.
Month, fJLTjv, firjuos, 6.
More, fiaXXov, rrXeou.
Mother, prjTtjp, p.i]Tp6s, f].
Mountain, opos, -ovs, to.
Much, TToXvs ; TToXv ; see Great.
Multitude, nXijBoSj -ovs, to.
Must, Set, xP^f dvdy<r) eort ; the
verbal in -tcos.
Muster, ddpol^ofiai ; see Collect.
My, when not emphatic, by the
article ; efios, generally with the
article; sometimes fiov, ep-ol eivai',
of mine, ip.6s or e/xot ; — own,
(fios, ifiavTov.
Myself, ip.avTov, reflex. ; avTos,
inteus.
Narrow, (mv6s, 17, -6v.
Near, iiapd ; TrXrjaiov, iyyvs.
Necessary, it is — , 6ft, xph^
Necessity, dvdyKt), -rjs, ^.
Need, deofxai, 8er)crofiai ; there is
— , Set.
Neglect, dixeXeco, d/xeXiyo-o).
Neither, — ... mr, ovt€ . . .
oijTe ; p.rjT€ . . . firjre.
Next, on the — dr///, ttj vvTfpaia.
Night, vv^, vvKTos, 17.
No, ovdeis, -€v6s', fXTjdeis; — one or
nobody, ovbels, fXTjdeis.
Noble, KaXos, -T], -ov ; dyaBos, -rj, -ov.
Noise, Oopv^os, -ov, 6.
Not, ov, fi^ ; — even, ovde, /x»;Se ;
— only . . . but also, koi . . . Kai.
Now, vvv, of time; ^drj, already;
drj, accordingly.
0,3>.
Oath, opKos, -ov, 6.
Obey, TreiBopai (niO-, ii.), Treiaofiai.
Obtain, Tvy xavoi (tvx-, v.), Tev^op.ai.
On, eVt, €v ; — account of, 8id,
eveKa ; — horseback ; see Horse ;
— the one hand ... — the other,
fiiv . . . 8e.
Once ; at — , evdvs.
One, els, tIs ; — another, dXXrjX<op.
Opinion, yvatp-rj, -rjs, rj.
Oppose, KcciXvco, KcoXvaa.
Or, fj.
Order, KeXevw, KeXevaat, bid, com-
mand ; give the or pass the —
along, 7rap-ayyeXX(o (dyytX-, iv.),
-ayyeXo) ; military — tu^ls, -eas,
rj ; in — that, iva, ios, oirats.
Orontas, 'Opovras, d or -ov, 6
Other, aXXos, -r), -o', — wise, aX-
Xa>s.
Our, when not emphafic by the
article ; rifihepos, sometimes by
f]p.a)v.
Overcome
446
Region
Overcome. Kpareo). Kparr^GO) ; irfpi-
yiyuofiat, -ysurjcroixaL
O^we, /o — , 6^€l\(o (oc^eX-, iv.),
6(})eiXr]<T(o.
P.
Palace, /SacriXfia, -a>i/, rd.
Parasaiig, Trapacrdyyrjs, -ov, 6.
Park, Trapdbfiaos, -ov, 6.
Pary satis, Ilapvo-aTis, -i8os, t}.
Fasion, Haaicov, -covos 6.
Pay, fii(r66i, -ov, 6 ; reXeci), reXo) ;
drro dldoifxi, -daxico.
Peltast, 7re\TaaTr)s, -oi>, 6.
Perceive, aiaddvofuu {alad-, v.),
alaBrjaopai.
Perish, ayr-oXXu/iai, arr-oXov/xai.
Perjure, — one^s self ; em-opKeo),
ini opKr)(T(ji>.
Persian, liepaiKcs -f}, -ov; Ilepar}^,
-ov, 6.
Persuade, neidco (md-, ii.), Trelaco.
Phalanx, cpdXay^, -yyos, rj.
Phalinus, ^aXlvos, -ov, 6.
Phrygia, ^pvyid, as, rj.
Pisidians, Iliaidai, -cSv ol
Place, ^atplov, -ov, TO ; take one^s
— , KaO-lo-rafxai, -fiaojxni ; from
that — , epTeiiOev ; in this — ,
euTovSa.
Plain, neSiov, -ov, to ; 8j)Xos", -;;. -ov.
Plan. ^ovXr) -rjs, f] ; ^ov'Kevco. /3ou-
Xevcro), — • against, eni'^ovXeva),
-fvaco.
Pledge, iTi(TTis. -€cos, fj.
Plethrum, nXeBpov, -ov, to-
Plot, €7rt-/3ovXj7, -r}?, fj ; — against ;
iiTi /SouXeuo), -XfUfro).
Plunder, cnrpd^ui (drrpab; iv.),
Point, — out, fTTl-dflKUVIJil (^flK-. v.),
Possible, ^vvaTos, rj, 6v\ it is — ,
eaTi ; as . . . as — , oTi or a>s with
the superlative.
Praise, eir-aivea, eV-aii/ecra).
Prefer, alpeofjcai, alpfjaofiai ; /3ou-
Xo/uat, fiov\rja-op.ai.
Present, nap-aiu, -i ixra, -ov ; at
— , vvV, be — , ndpeiiXL, -eao/xai',
napa-ylyvofxai, -yevr)o-op.at.
Pretext, 7rp6<paais, -eas, 17-
Previous, or preciously, npoadev.
Proceed, iropevofiat^ Tropivo-ojjLai,
e^-e\avvo3, -eXa>.
Procure, rcopi^u) (nopib-, iv.), Tropiw.
Promise, vnia-xveop.ai, axrjo-ofxai.
Property, ^pijfjLara, -utohv, tu.
Prosperous, evdaificov, -ov.
Province, dpx^^-^s, t}
Provisions, to, eniTrjbeta, -onv, tu.
Proxenus, lipo^evos, ov, 6
Punishment, inflict — , Uktiv ini-
Tidrffii, -BrjiTopLai.
Pursue, hia)K(o, diM^a>.
Pursuit, go in — , Stw/co), 8i<i)$a>.
Question, ipcordo), epuiTrjO-co. Svn.
271.
Quickly, Ta)(v, Ta^ecoS'
Rank, rd^ts, -fcoy, 17.
Ravage, dt-apird^o) (apTraS-, iv.),
-apnda-co.
Receive, Xa/x/3ai/Q) (Xa/3-, v.), X^>/ro-
fxai ; be^op-ai, 8e^op.ai.
Refuse, ov (})t]hl.
Regard, vofii^a (yopib; iv.), vo-
Region, Toiroi, -ov, 6.
Reign
447
Six
Reign, /SacrtXevo) ^aa-iXfva-o).
Remain, fxeuco, fxeva.
Remit, dTro-nefiTrco, -Trefx^to.
Report, ayycXXo) (a-y-yeX-, iv.), ay-
•yeX© : dTT-ayyeXXo) ; c^-ayyeXXo) ',
Xeyo), Xe^co.
Rest, ava-iravofiai, -naiKTOfiai ; ^Ae
— of,6 XoiTTos ; ^^e — , oi aXXot ;
of the future, to Xoittov.
Review, e^eracns^ -ecoy, rj ; Jiold a
— , (^eraaiu noieofiai, nocrjaoiiai.
Revolt, d(f)-icrTanai {ara-, vii.),
-(TTTjcronai.
Ride,eXaui/&)(eXa-,v.), cXeS; — awmj
an--eXayvo).
Right, dUaios, -a, -ov, of actions ;
df^ios, of direction ; on the — , iv
de^ia ; give the — hand, df^iUu
River, ttotoixos, -oi>, 6.
Road, odos, -ov, rj.
Rome, 'PafiTj, -tjs, rj.
Royal, ^aaiXeios, -ov.
Rule, ("tfJXf^, ap^co ; 7-uler, apx(ov,
-6vT09, 6.
Run, in general, Tpe;^a) ; — with
haste and speed, usually of men,
6ka} {6v-, ii.), 6(v(rofxai.
Rush, Uiiai (e-), rjaoyiai.
S.
Sack, bi-apTid^o) (Ap-nab-, iv.), -ap-
Trarro).
Sacrifice, 6va>, dvaco.
Safe, da(PaKr]s, -ey.
Safely, dacpaXws-
Safety, ocoTrjpid, -d?, fj ; in — ,
afT(/)aXcoy ; in the greatest — ,
drrcpaXecTTaTa.
Sail, — away, dnoTrXeo (nXv, ii.),
-nXeva-ofiai,.
Same, 6 avros, rj avrr], to avTO-
Sardis,* 'Sapdcis, -eoiv, ai.
Satrap, crarpdn-q^., ov, 6.
Save, crto^o) (cra)8-, iv.), aamm.
Say, Xeyco, Xe^oj ; 07^/*/, (j)r](T(o ',
said, eiTTov. tSyn. 772.
Sea, 6d\aTTa, -rji, rj.
See, opdo), o'^ofiat ; — to, (TKenTO-
fxai (cr/cfTT-, iii.), aKeylropai ; he
seen, (paivopai ((l)av-, iv.), cpavov-
fiai.
Seem, ^aivofiat ((f)ap-, iv.), (j)a-
vovpat ; — best or good, So/cew,
Seize, dpird^co (dp-rrab-, iv.), dpird-
(T&) ; alpeoi, aiprj<Ta>.
Self, atroy, -17, d.
Send, TTf/iTro). Trepyp^to ', dTronefinco',
— yf>?', peTa-n€p,Tropai ; — away
or ^o»?e, drro-TTfp'iro} ; — f/o?/?n,
KaTa-nepnco ; — ?r?7A, avp-nefino}.
Seven, eWa.
Severe, ;^aXe7rdf, -77, -o'l/.
Shield, diiTTLs, -iSos, t) ; neXTij,
-rjsr fj.
Ship, vav9, i/fo)?, rj.
Shoot, To^evco, ro^etVo).
Shout, Kpavyr), rjs, rj ; ^od(o, ^ory
aofiat.
Show, 8rj\6a>, dTjXwo-co ; (jioivco
(cj)av-, iv.), (f)avQ), make appear;
d€iKPvp,i {8eiK-, v.), dei^o), ini-bfi-
Kvvpi, point out.
Side, by the — of, napd ; on all
sides, ndvTrj.
Sight, in plain — , KaTa(f)air)s, -6 9-
Signal, give the — , arjpaivoi {(rrjpav-,
iv.), arjpavQ).
Silanus. SiXdi/o's, -ov, 6.
Silver, dpyvpiov, -ov, to.
Situated, be — , oi/<€o/zat, oiKjytro-
pai.
Six, e^; — thousand, e^a/cio-xtXtot.
Slaughter
448
Thing
Slaughter, kotttco (kott-, iii.)?
So, ovTcos, a)Se, of manuer; roaov-
Tos, — much, of degree ; — that,
or — as to, &(rT€.
Socrates, 2(OKpdTr)s, -ovs, 6.
Soldier, o-TpaTicoTTjs, -ov, 6.
Some, rty ; some . . . others, ol ficu
. . . oi 8e', some one or something,
ri^, t\, TivdS'
Soon, Taxi) ; raxecoy.
Sort, what — , olos, -a, -ov.
Speak, Xeyo), Xe^o). Syii. 772.
Speech, Xoyos, -ov, 6.
Speed, at full — , dva Kpdros, -ovs,
TO.
Stade, arddLov, -ov, to
Stage, aTa6p.6s, -ov, 6.
Stand, larafxaL (crra-, vii.), (tttjcto-
fiai, caTTjKa ; — wider arms, 6k-
(rOai TO. oirka.
Station, aTadfios, -ov, 6.
Still, cTi.
Stone, "kiSos, -ov, 6; /SaXXco (/SaX-,
iv.), /3aX<w.
Stop, Travci). navaoi.
Strike, naioi, nala-w.
Strong, lax^pos, -a, -ov.
Suffer, irdcrxoi (nad-, vi.), neia-opai',
— harm, KaKa>s ndaxo*-
Summit, uKpov, -ov, to-
Summon, fieTa-ne fin open, -nkpy^o-
pai ; KaXeo) (xaXe-), fcaXw, call;
napa-KoXeco, — to one^s side.
Support, Tpo(f)T}, -rjs, rj ; Tpi(pa>,
6piy\r(ii ; vTr-dpx<^i -dp^u).
Surrender, Trapa-didcopi (So-, vii.),
-ScOfTO).
Surround, nepi e^a), e^to.
Sweet, fj8vs, -fla, -v.
Swift, Taxvs, ela, -v.
Swiftly, Taxv. Taxeo)S.
Syennesis, Ivevvecris, -los, 6.
T.
Take, Xap^dvco (Xa/3-, v.), Xq^opai ;
alpeco, aipr}<T(o ; — place, yiyuopai
(yev-), yeuTjcropai.
Talent, TdXavTov, -ov, to
Tarsus, Tapaol, -av. ol.
Teach, dibdarKO) (StSax-, v.), dt-
dd^oi.
Tell, Xe'yo), Xe^o) ; told, clnov. Svu.
772.
Ten, SeKu ; — thousand, pvpioi,
-at, -a-
Tent, (TK-qvr), ^9, f].
Terrify, eK-irXriTTco (nXrjy-, iv.), e|-
enXdyrjv.
Territory, x^pd^ -ds, fj.
Than, 7.
That, deni., €Kf7vos, -t], ov, rel., os ;
those who, oi with a part; coiij.,
OTL ', in order — , tva, los, ontos,
or by fut. part. ; — not, prj ; so
— , cocrre.
The, 6, fj, TO.
Their, when not enipliatic, by the
article; avrau, eKelvujp; — own,
eavrSfV.
Them, oblique cases of qvtos. -tj,
-6 in plur. See 182 : ovtoi, €<el-
uoiQSS).
Themselves, eavT&v, reflex. ; avToi,
intens. ; by the middle voice.
Then, tot^, eir-eLTa; bl], ovv, infer-
ential.
Thence, evrevdev.
There, ivravda, cKel.
Therefore, ovi^.
Thereupon, evravda.
Thessalian, QeTToXos, -ov, 6.
They, generally omitted ; when em-
phatic, OVTOl, €K€lV0ty o78€, ol Se,
etc. See 180 ff., 188.
Thing, generally omitted ; some-
Think
449
Who
times, Trpayfia, -aros, ro; XPW°-j
-aros, TO.
Think, vofii^co (i/o/xtS-, iv.), vofiiw,
heliece ; doKeca, do^co, suppose;
oifuu, generally used pareutheti-
eally, or in the form of a private
opinion.
Third, rpiro?, -rj, -ov.
Thirty, Tpia<ovra.
This, OTTOS', avTT], tovto ; oSe, r\be,
Tode.
Thousand, ;(tXioi, -ai, -a; ten — ,
pipioi, -ai, -a.
Thracian, Qpa^, QpqKos, 6.
Three, rpel?, rpia; — hundred,
TpidKoaiOL, -ai, -a.
Through, 8id.
Throw, piTTTO) (pt(f)-, iii), piylra>',
— at, /3aXXa> (/3aX-, iv.), /SaXw.
Thus, ovTo>s, wSe.
Thymbrium, Qvp^piov, -ov, to.
Tigris, Tiyprjs, -tjtos, 6.
Time, ;(poi'oy, -ov, 6, the general
word ; &pd, -as, fj, proper — or
season : at that — , totc-
Tissaphernes, Tiaaacfiepvrjs, -ovs 6.
To, els, em, Trapd, rrpos, as w. ace
of person -, up — , p-^XP'- 5 ^^S^ ^^
the dat. ; sign of the iiifin. ; sign
of purpose, by fut. part, or by tva,
OTTCoy, (t)s.
Treaty, arirovbal, -S)u, ai.
Trench, Tacppos, -ov, rj.
Tribute, daapos, -ov, 6.
Truce, a-nov8ai, -atv, ai.
Truly, bt].
Trust, TTio-revo), Trttrrevo-a.
Try, TTfipdofiai, Tretpatropat.
Twelve, ScoSe/ca.
Twenty, eiKoa-i.
Two, dva, dvolv] — thousand, 8i<t-
xtXioi. -ai, -a.
Tyriaeum, Tvpia7ov, -ov, to.
Undertaking, irpa^is, -ecos, rj.
Unless, ei pfj.
Until, pexpi, ea-Te, ecoy, npiv.
Upon, eni.
Use, make — of, xp^opai, xpwopm.
Valuable, a^ios, -a, -ov.
Vengeance, irokep.os, -ov, 6.
Victorious, be — , viKao), vlic^a<a.
Victory, vikt], -rjs, rj.
Village, Koipr), -rjs, r}.
Visible, ^avepos, -a, -ov.
W.
Wagon, dpa^a, -rjs, fj.
"Wall, rel^oy, -ovs, to.
War, TToXepos, -ov, 6 ; carry on,
make, or wage — , TroXe/ic©, TroXf-
pr)(T(0.
Watchword, a-vvdrjpa, -aTos, to.
Way, obos, -ov, fj.
Wear, ex^i ^^^ ^'' <J'xh^^'
Well, ev ; do — ft//, ev ttouco, noi-
T](r(o; be — , Ka\a>s ex^et, e^ei.
Well disposed, evvovs, evvow.
What? Tis, Ti, gen. TtVoy; oa-ris,
rJTis, oTi; — sort, olos, -a, -op.
Whatever, oa-Tis. tJtls, oti.
When, enel, eTreibrj-
Whenever. onoTe, erreiB^.
W^here, evda, ov.
Wherever, ottov.
Whether, el; — ... or, ndTepov
.. .1
Which, OS, TJ, o.
Who, or — ? Tis, OS, fj ; oa-Tcs, IJtis.
29
Whoever
450
Zealous
Whoever, os, r}', octtis, r\Tis.
Why, Ti.
Width, fvpos, -ovs, TO.
Wife, yvvT), yvvaiKoS; r).
Wild, aypioi, -a, -ov\ — animal^
Orjpiov, ov, TO
Willing, be — , e'^eXca, edeXfjo-o).
Willingly, cicd)v, -ovaa, -ov.
W"ine, oivos, -ov, 6.
Wing, K€pas, Kepcos and Keparos, of
an army ; on the right — , eVt rw
Wise, (ro(f)6s, -rj, -ov.
Wish, /SovXoftat, j3ov\{]aop,ai, pre-
fer ; edeXco, €6eKr](ja>, he tvilling,
he ready.
With, crvv, jjLerd, napd; ej^coi/; asso-
ciated — , fierd ; — the aid of,
avv.
Withdraw, aTro-o-Trao), -airdaa).
Within, fio-o), of motion; — the
night, ttj^ vvktos.
Woman, yvvrj, ywaiKos, fj.
Wonder, 6avp.dC<o (davpiad-, iv.),
Oavpaaopai.
Word, Xoyoy, -ov, 6; hring hack — ,
aTT-ayyeXXo) (dyyeX-, iv.), -ayyeXoi) ;
pass the — along, TzapayykKKo).
Work, epyov, -ov, to.
Worthy, a^iot, -a, -ov.
Wound, TiTpayaKco {rpo-, vi), Tpaxro).
Write, ypdcfxo, ypdylro).
Wrong, he in the — , ddiKeay, ddiKfjao).
Xenias, Sfvids, -ov, 6.
Xenophon, S€vo(pa>v, -covtos, 6.
Xerxes, Sep^rjs, -ov, 6.
Yet, Irt.
You, av, aov.
Your, when not emphatic by the
article ; tp,€Tcpos ; sometimes by
vpav.
Yourself, (reauroO, aeavT^s ', ovtos
intens.
Zealous, npoBvpos, ~ov.
ENGLISH INDEX.
A declension of nouns, feminine, 41 ;
masculine, 48.
abbreviations, p. 404.
ability, adjectives expressing, 485.
absolute, genitive, 239.
accent, ix. 1, 2, 3, a, b, c\ place of
accent, x.-xii. ; recessive, xiii. ;
19 ; of nouns, 43, ff. ; of verbs, 19 ;
of genitive and dative of oxy tones,
43, 2, 3 ; of enclitics, 102, ff. ; of
proclitics, 101, 103, 4 ; of monosyl-
lables of the consonant declension,
209 ; of participles, 230 ; of per-
fect middle participle, 323, d\
in -s, 350, obs. ; of monosyllabic
participles, 623, b ; of contract
nouns of the first and second
declensions, 165 f. : of contracted
syllables, 153 ; of contract adjec-
tives, 168 f. ; of second aorists,
531, obs.^; of compound verbs,
136; Tiff and t\s, 434.
accusative, direct object, 38 ; of
extent, 93 ; of inner object, 261,
a, b\ two accusatives, 268, 269,
468 ; specification, 338 ; adverb-
ial, 357 ; w. special verbs, 603.
action, formation of nouns express-
ing, 479, ff.
adjectives, formation, 483, ff. ; attri-
butive, 'll ; position, 77, ff. ; agree-
ment, 83 ; predicate, 80 ; in -o?,
-17 (-a), 'ov, 70, ff., -Off, -01/, 71 ; as a
noun, 82; consonant and A de-
clensions, 264, f. ; 824 ; consonant
declension, 266, 334, f.; 824;
stems in v, 294, 824; irregular
299; contract, 170, 2, 3; 335
819; verbals, 373, 782 ; compari
son, 374, ff. ; irregular, 380
compound, 500.
adverbs, 459, ff. ; comparison, 464
numeral, 445 ; syntax, 466.
agent, 260 ; formation of nouns ex-
pressing agent, 478-
agreement of verbs, 37, 65 ; of ad-
jectives, 83 ; of predicate refer-
ring to omitted subject of the
infinitive, 780, ff.
alpha, privative, etc., 498, obs^.
alphabet, i.
Anabasis, story of, 432 ; 1. i. 1-3,
433; L i. 4-6, 640; I. i. 7-8,
■ 648 ; I. i. 9, 675 ; I. i. 10-11,
711; I. ii. 1-2, 728; I. ii. 3-4,
735; I. ii. 5-7, 742; I. ii. 8-9,
756; I. ii. 10-12, 765; I. ii. 13-
16, 774; I. ii. 17-20,786: T. ii.
21-24, 793 ; I. ii. 25-27, 798 ;
I. iii. 1-6,804; I. iii. 7-12, 806;
T. iii. 13-15, 808 ; I. iii. 16-21,
810 ; review of, 812.
antecedent, 186 ; attracted, 439.
aorist, 202; stem, 197; force of the
pluperfect, 433, n. 2; inflection,
195, 826, 827, 834; of liquid
verbs, 256, ff. ; infinitive, 202, a ;
imperative, 415 ; inceptive, 433,
N. 3; gnomic, 678 ; iterative, 679 ;
second aorist, 203, 530, ff. ; in
dependent moods, 567 f.
apodosis, 661.
452
ENGLISH INDEX.
appendix, pp. 365-401.
apposition, 92.
article, 9, 10 ; as possessive pro-
nouns, 9; w. proper names, p.
302.
aspiration, transferred, p. 153^.
attributive position, 79 ; participles,
234-235.
augment, 113, 304 ; in compound
verbs, 135.
Belonging to, adjectives expressing,
485.
breathings, ii. ; place of, ii. ix. 2.
Case, 8 ; endings of consonant de-
clension, 223.
causal clauses, 717.
circumstantial participle, 236, ff.
classification of verl)s, 21, 286 ;
classes of, 516 : first class, 515, ff. ;
second, 527; third, 587; fourtli,
595, 607, ff.; fifth, 630, ff., 736 ;
sixth, 651; seventh, 730; eighth,
698; of mutes, 189, ff.
cognate mutes, 189, 3 ; words, 504.
commands and prohibitions, 421,
559.
comparatives Avithout ^, 385.
comparison, of adjectives, :i74, ff. ;
irregular, 380 ; of adverbs, 464.
compound verbs, 143, 497; of pre-
positions followed with their own
cases, 144 ; w. dative, 147 ; aug-
ment of, 135, 308 ; accent of,
136, 289, 324, n.
conditional sentences, 661 ; particu-
lar, 663; contrary to fact, 668;
general, 680, 681, ff. ; vivid future,
687; less vivid, 690 ; mixed, 804,
N. 15 ; conditional relative clauses,
699, ff. ; conditional temporal,
705, ff. ; substitution of, 715.
conjugations, 825-863.
consonants, 189, ff. ; consonant de-
clension, 207, 208 ; palatal, 208 ;
lingual stems, 218, ft". ; liquid and
syncopated stems, 220, 362 ; stems
in t, V, €v, 290, 292, ff ; in s, 329 ;
digamma nouns, 363 ; rules for
gender, 221, 295.
contract nouns and adjectives, 165,
168, 170, 818, ff. ; third decl., see
consonants ; contract verbs, 154,
429, 676, 843-845; dissyllabic,
in €0), p. 82'.
contraction, 150-152 ; accent of
contracted syllables, 153.
coordinate mutes, 189, 3.
coronis, 169.
crasis, 169.
Dative, indirect object, 66 ; posses-
sion, 106 ; with special verbs,
146 ; with compound verbs, 147 ;
time, 158 ; with adjectives and
adverbs, 172, f. ; of advantage,
212 ; resemblance, 225 ; cause,
manner, means, or instrument,
249 ; respect, 339 ; degree of
difference, 386 ; of agency, p.
130-2, 760; w. verbals, 782.
declension, 5; A, 41, 4S ; O, 61;
814-820 ; consonant, 207, ff , 220,
290, 821-823; see consonants;
Attic, 363.
demonstrative pronouns, 179-182.
denominatives, 473 ; denominative
nouns, 481, f. ; adjectives, 485,.
ff. ; verbs, 492, ff., 612, ff.
dependent moods, 552, a; tenses
of, 567 f.
deponent verbs, 360, f. ,.
digamma nouns of the consonant de-
clension, 363 ; p. 145^.
diphthongs, iv. ; pronunciation of, v.
ENGLISH INDEX.
453
division of syllables, vii. ff.
Doric genitive, p. 25^ ; future, p.
2142.
double consonants, viii. 2, N.
double negatives, p. 266^.
Elision, 99, 134.
ellipsis, subject, 789, ff. ; verb, 790,
1,2.
enclitics, 102 ; accent, 103, ff.,
104, ff. ; last part of a compound
word, p. 176^.
entreaties and exhortations, 421,
559.
euphony, rules for, 190-194, ff. ;
215, ff.; w. 378, tf . ; 613, ff. ;
Kev. 277.
extent of time or space, 93.
Fearing, construction after verbs of,
581.
final clauses, 579.
fitness, adjectives expressing, 485.
formation of words, 471, ff- ; primi-
tive nouns, 476, ff. ; denominative
nouns, 481, ff. ; adjectives, 483, ff.;
denominative verbs, 492 ; of the
fourth class, 612, ff. ; inseparable
prefixes, 498 ; prepositions in
composition, 496, f. ; compound
words, 494, ff.
future conditions : vivid, 687 ; less
vivid, 690.
future indicative active and middle,
195, 201, 826 ; stem, 196 ; liquid
verbs, 255, ff. ; tenses system, 351,
2; Attic, 254, 520, a\ Doric, p.
2142; flrst passive, 346, 831;
second passive, 655, 842 ; future
middle for active, p. 214^ ; future
indicative in object clauses witli
OTTO)?, 589; future in protasis for
subjunctive, p. 280^; future in
relative clauses, 716 ; periphras-
tic, 759.
future perfect middle and passive
stem, 320 ; meaning of, 321.
Gender, 7, ff . ; of A declension, 40,
49, obs. ; declension, 61, a, b ;
consonant declension, 221, 295,
332, f.
general suppositions, 680, ff.
genitive absolute, 239; of agent,
260 ; fullness and want, 340 ;
attrib., 367, ff.; measure, mate-
rial, subjective, objective, posses-
sive, partitive, 369, ff. ; predicate,
370 ; comparison and implied
comparison, 385 ; with verbs, 396-
399 ; source, 409 ; separation,
410 ; cause, 411 ; price, 424 ;
time, 425 ; with adjectives, 426 ;
with adverbs, 426, a.
Grimm's law, 505, ff'.
Historical present, p. 77-^.
Imperative, 421 ; tenses, 415 ; per-
sonal endings, 417 ; of contract
verbs, 429 ; in prohibitions, 559.
imperfect indicative, 111, 114; stem,
112; of contract verbs, 429 ; w.
force of plpf. 2571, 793, N. 6.
indefinite pronoun rls, 435; indef.
relative, oorns, 437.
indirect discourse, 720 ; 723, ff. ;
724; w. on and ws, 768, ff. ;
model simple sentences, 722, 767,
ff. ; complex, 722, ff. ; 723, ff.;
787 ff. ; participial, 776 ; implied,
788 ; review, 800.
indirect questions, 768, 2.
infinitive, 117 ; endings, 115 ; ns
subject, 118, 721, 1 ; as object,
119, 731, 2 ; with adjectives, 120 ;
454
ENGLISH INDEX.
subject of, 121; tenses, 202, a-,
accent of in -at and -vai and per-
fect middle, 323, d\ w. the
article, 117, 721, 3 ; in indirect
discourse, 723, 1, 2, 3, 724.
inseparable prefixes, 474, 498.
instrumental dative, 249.
intensive pronoun, 162, 164, ff. ; 820.
interrogative rt?, 434, 1 ; 441, ff.
iota subscript, iv.
irregular adjectives, 380 ; nouns, 363;
MI verbs, 712; «>', 713, 859;
in\xi, 794, 861; olha, 766, 857;
ef/it, 739, 860; </)»7/x/, 714, 858.
Labials, 189, 1.
lingual stems, 208, 220.
liquids, 189, 2 ; liquid stems of the
consonant declension, 220.
liquid verbs, 252, 257, 832, 833;
fourtli class, 596.
Manner, means, etc., 249.
metathesis, p. 215^.
measure and material, 369, 4, 5.
middle voice, 31.
mood, 16, a\ sign subj., 553, obs*;
opt., 554, a, 574 ; finite and de-
pendent, 552, a\ sequence of,
581, 578, 691.
mutes, 189, if.
Negatives, 422 ; w. imv., 421 ; w.
the infin., p. 170^; in exhorta-
tions, 557 ; in final clauses, 579 ;
in object clauses, 581 ; in condi-
tions, 664 ; in indirect discourse,
768, 3; double negatives, p. 228^
2661.
neuter plural subject, 65.
nominative case, syntax of, 36, 84.
nouns, 5 ; A declension feminine,
41, masculine, 4S i declension.
61 ; consonant declension, see
consonants; contract, 165, 170;
irregular, 363 ; primitives, 476,
IF. ; denominatives, 481, f. ; nom-
inative subject, 36 ; pronouns,
390, ff.
number : nouns, 6 ; verbs, 18.
numerals, table of, 445 ; declension,
446, ff.
declension of nouns, 61, 816.
object clauses, 581, 589.
objective genitive, 369, 3.
optative, active, 554 ; middle and
passive, 576 ; wish, 563 ; po-
tential, 565 ; final clauses, 579 ;
verbs of fearing, 581 ; w. verbs of
striving, 589 ; in less vivid future
conditions, 690.
orders of mutes, 189, 3.
oxytones, ix. 3, a ) xiv.
Palatals, 189 ; palatal stems, 208.
participles, 228 ; declension : Q verbs,
229, 822; contract, 242; MI
verbs, 619,,$^; 623,823; accent,
230 ; tense, 23/ ; attributive, 235 ;
circumstantial, 239 ; supplemen-
tary, 243, ff. ; Rev. 281 ; condi-
tional, 715 ; indirect discourse,
776, ff.
particular suppositions, 663.
passive voice, 32, 343 ; aorist pas-
sive, 344 ; aorist participle, 350 ;
second passive system, 345, 652,
653, ff.
perfect, 311 ; stem, 309 ; pluperfect,
314; stem, 315 ; enlarged, 521 ;
second perfect and pluperfect,
310, 542, ff., of XeiVoj, 835 ; mid-
die and passive, 317: ofXvw, 829;
mute themes, 325, 757, 837, ff.
person, 17.
ENGLISH INDEX.
455
person concerued, nouns expressing,
481.
personal endings, 24, ff. ; primary,
28 ; secondary, 116 ; infinitive,
115 ; imperative, 417 ; subjunc-
tive, 553, obs.^; optative, 554, a.
personal pronouns, 390, ff. ; posi-
tion, 369, 6, obs. ; review, 454.
potential indicative, 666.
potential optative, 565.
predicate position, 81 ; noun, 84.
prefiKes, 474, inseparable, 498.
prepositions in composition, 136,
143 ; uses of, 137, ff. ; with ob-
lique cases, 139-142.
present indicative, 20 ; present stem,
23 ; present tense, 29 ; present
system, 351, 1 ; historical, p. 77'^-
primitives, 473 ; nouns, 476, ff. ;
adjectives, 483, f.
principal parts of a sentence, 55 ;
of verbs, 353, a ; 534 ; of depo-
nents, 361.
privative a, 498, obs.^
proclitics, 101.
pronouns, personal, 390, ff. ; inten-
sive, 164, ff. ; reflexive, 402, ff. ;
reciprocal, 405, f. ; possessive,
407 ; position of possessive and
reflexive, 79; demonstrative, 175,
177, 179 ff. ; interrogative and
indefinite, 434, ff., 441, ff. ; rela-
tive, 178, 184, 439, ff. ; indefinite
relative, 436, f.
pronunciation of vowels, iii. ; con-
sonants, vi.
protasis, 661.
punctuation, xv.
Quality, nouns expressing, 482.
quantity of syllables, viii., 1, 2:
questions, 443 ; deliberative, 561 ;
indirect, 768, 2.
Reading, the art of, 96, ff. ; direc-
tions for, 97, ff. ; exercises for
sight translation, 132, i. ii., 284,
ii. iii., 457, i. ii., 491, 502, 503,
514, 755, 802, 812; selections:
The palaces of Cyrus and Arta-
xerxes, 107 ; The march of Cyrus
through Lycaouia, 285 ; The arri-
val of Cyrus's fleet, 389 ; A halt
and numbering at Celaenae, 450 ;
Greek for retroversion, 458,
606.
recessive accent, xiii.
reduplication, 303 ff. ; Attic, 545 ;
of themes, 618 ; in «', 697-
reflexive pronouns, 402, ff.
relative pronouns, 178, 184; assimi-
lation, 439.
relative and temporal clauses, 699,
ff. ; rel. clauses expressing pur-
pose, 716.
resemblance, union, and approach,
225.
result, formation of nouns of, 480 ;
clauses of, 719.
review of nouns, vowel declension,
126, ff. ; consonant declension,
280; pronouns, 276, 454; con-
traction, 275 ; the active verb,
129, 279, 452 ; middle and pas-
sive, 452 ; contract nouns and
adjectives, 275, 451 ; tenses of
completed action, the passive
voice, 452 ; comparison of adjec-
tives, 453 ; pronouns, 454 ; nu-
merals, 455 ; syntax. 456 ; elfxi,
451, 713; 8ida>fxi, laTrjfxi, and
TiBrffii, 751 ; formation of words,
743, ff. ; second tense system,
749 ; conditions, 750.
rough breathing, ii. ; mutes, 189,
1.
roots, 471.
456
ENGLISH INDEX.
Second aorist, 203 ; second aorist
stem, 581 ; of the MI form in Q
verbs, 731 ; second perfect and
pluperfect, 310, 542, ff . ; second
passive system, 345, 652, ff.
sentence arrangement, 55.
semivowels, 189, 2.
separation, 410.
sequence of moods, 578, 579, a;
691.
sibilant, 189, 2.
specification, 338.
stem, verb, 22 ; noun, 40.
subject, 36 ; of infinitive, 121.
subjective genitive, 369, 2.
subjunctive, Q verbs, 552, ff. ; mid-
dle and passive, 575 ; exhortations,
557; prohibitions, 559; interrog-
ative, 561 ; final clauses, 579 ;
used vividly for optative, 579, a -,
w. verbs of fearing, 581 ; object
clauses with oTrcof, 589 ; present
general suppositions, 680, ff. ; in
vivid future conditions, 687.
subscript iota, iv.
substitution of conditions, 715.
sufax, 474.
syllabic augment, 113.
syllables, vii. 1, 2, 3, 4.
syncope, p. 142^; syncopated nouns,
362.
synopsis, MI verbs, 846.
systems, 351, ff. ; second aorist, 530,
ff. ; second perfect, 543, ff. ; 2d
passive, 652, ff.
Table of numerals, 445 ; of personal
endings, 28, 116, 417.
temporal augment, 113. j
temporal clauses, 704, ff. J
tense, 16, 6 ; primary and secondary, |
110 ; stem, 23 ; tense systems,
351, ff. ; of dependent moods,
567, f.
thematic vowel, 25.
theme, 22 ; in e, 253 ; 522.
transliteration, 87, ff.
Variable vowel, 25, 553, obsH;
554, a.
verbs, G, 21, 252 ; compound, 143;
contract, 154; liquid, 252, 257;
classes of verbs, 515, ff . ; active
verb, 825-828; middle and pas-
sive, 825-831; MI verbs, 619,
712, 729, 737, ff., 794 : see the
Greek index forthe different verbs;
classes of, 730 ; p. 304^ ; 617, ff. ;
conjugation, 846-863; formation,
denominatives, 492, f., 612.
vocative, A declension, feminine
nouns, 41 d; A declension mas-
culine nouns, 49, obs. 1, 2, 3 ;
lingual stems, 208, 219 ; syntax
of, 56.
voice, 1 6 ; active, 30 ; middle, 31 ;
passive, 32.
vowel gradation, 507.
vowels, iii. ; stem, lengthened, 198,
520.
Wishes, 563 ; unattained, 669, ff.
words : simple and compound, 133,
472, 494, ff, 499, ff. ; grouping,
510, ff. ; formation, 471, ff. ; bor-
rowed and cognate, 504.
GREEK INDEX.
This Index is intended to serve merely as a supplement to the English Index.
For most of the Greek words references can be found in the preceding Greek-
English vocabulary.
a, privative, 498, obs\
&y-, 513.
dyaGo's, comparison, 380, 1.
ayyeXXw, 257, 832, 833 ; pert", mid.
system, 840.
aUrxpos, comparison, 379, 3.
al(rxvv», 598, 1 ; synt., 603:
dK-, 616.
dKlvoucT|s, No. 11, 645.
oAXTiXcov, 405.
dXXos, 163 ; group, 629.
ap,a, group, 685.
d}jL€Cv(i>v, 380, 1; synonymes, 388.
av, gen. uses, 566, 677; w. opt., 565 ;
w. indie, 666 ; with temporal
pai-ticles, 692 ; in conditions, 668,
681, 687, 690 ; for emphasis, 804,
N. 16 ; dropped when subjv. be-
comes opt , 787, 2, a.
dvTJp, 362.
dp-, 764.
'dp\i.a, 214, No. 7-
dpTrdt«,^200; perfect passive, 325.
ap\-f 526.
dnrCs, 227, No. 8.
airds, 820; 11868,164, 3, 2, 3.
aXPt, 705.
Paivci), 631, 3; synonyme, 741.
Poo-iXevs, 290 ; without article, 297.
poX-, 551.
Povs, 363.
7 nasal, vi., 189, 2.
•y, dropped before -yy-, p. 320^.
•yi-yvwo-KCi) ; 2d aor. tyvwv, 731, 2 ;
856.
•yvft)-, 660.
yvvi\, 363.
8ttp€iKds, 675, vocab.. No. 12.
-Be, local ending, enclitic, 462.
861, synonyme, 784.
86CKvi5p.i, 737 ; synopsis, 846 ; inflec-
tion, 850.
8etKvi)s, declension, 823.
Sr\\6s cljjii, construction, 247, 777'
hr\K6(a, 154, 3; imperative, 429;
conjugation, 845.
8180VS, declension, 643, 823.
8t8«jti, 641 ; synopsis, 846; conju
gation, 848.
80-, 647.
8oKecD, 253, 522; construction, 725.
8vva|iai, 625 ; accent of subjv. and
opt., p. 250'^.
8v«, 2d aor. ^8tjv, 738 ; synopsis,
846; conjugation, 854.
458
GREEK INDEX.
c as augment or reduplication, before
a vowel, 649 ; e changed lo a in
liquid themes, etc., 650.
c clianged to a in mute themes, 650,
a, b; in 2 aor. pass, stem, 654, a.
eavToO, 403.
IPt,v, (). 2521 ; 731, 1.
4'"yva)v, 651, 731, 2; conjugation,
856.
I7C&, 390, ff.
€l as augment or reduplication, 697-
€t0€, in wishes, 669.
cIhiC, 287, ff. ; 300, 324; subj. and
opt., 573, 859.
ctfii, 739, a ; 860 ; present with
force of the future, 739, b.
etirov, construction, 769, ff. ; syno-
nyme, 772.
cIs, declension, 447*
Ik, kl 46.
4k€ivos, 177, 180.
6K«v, 265, 824.
4|jLavrov, 403.
i-TTi, 4<t»', 194, a.
lirio-TajjLai, 625 ; construction, 778, a.
lirpiafjiTjv, 846, 851.
eo-Ti, omitted, 790.
eo-Ti, 104, 3.
€v8a(|x«v, 266, 824.
evvoia, 42, b \ 160.
€vpos, 329.
€x», with an adv., p. 192^
6«s, while, until, 705.
c«s, morning, 364.
t«i»j contraction, 342.
il8€'a>s, 459, 4.
liSvs, comparison, 379, 1.
liflJiai, 794.
-0€v, -81, 462.
©»poi 214, No. 6.
-iTj, mood suffix, 574.
iilHLi, 794, 861.
Ik-, 639.
tva, 579.
liriretis, 296*, No. 9.
to-Tos, declension, 623, 823.
to-TTjui, 618 ; synopsis, 846 ; conju-
gation, 619, ff.; 847, 851, 855.
lX0vs, 290.
K, etc., dropped before 0, 309, a.
Ka0Tijiai, 794, 862.
Kal . . . KttC, iutens., 109, p. 86i.
Kttl -yap, 372.
KaK6s, comparison, 379, 4 > kukms,
459, 1.
KoX-, 674.
KttXos, comparison, 380, 2.
Kcijiai, 794, 863.
kcXcvo), perfect middle, 325, 836.
Kc'pas, 331.
Kpa-, 696.
Kpe'as, 329.
\a71is, 363, 364.
Xav0dv«, construction, 603.
\6Ya>, construction, 725, 769, c.
Xefirw, class, 527, ff. ; 2d aor. and
2d perf. and pluperf. act., 531,
547, 553, 554 ; perf. mid. system,
837; cognate words of, 541.
Xv», present ind., 20 ; conjugation,
825-831 ; Xtiwv, XiJo-ds, 229, ff. ;
Xv0€(s, 350 ; XcXvKtis, 326, 822 ;
cognate words of, 541.
-J1-, dropped before -y.^-, p. 219^;
p. 3201.
jiaK-, 710.
fie^as, 299 ; comparison, 380, 3;
fie-yo, ixe^dXa, 460.
Htcf^wv, dec!., 824.
H6V . . . 86', 109.
GREEK INDEX.
459
fUxP^i 705.
,1^; p. 1702; 422,428.
)X^TT)p, 362.
Ml verbs, 286 ; Xtm\)ii., 618 ; 8C8w|Jii,
641 ; T10T1HI, 729 ; review of lo-rqjii,
8(8(i>)ii, and riQi][it., 751, fF. ; 8€i-
Kvv|ii and 68vv, 737, 738 ; second
aorists of the Mi form in 12 verbs,
731, If. ; for irregular Mi verbs,
see English Index.
-V-, dropped in the perfect and first
passive sj^stems, p. 241^.
-V, movable, 100 ; dropped before op,
216 ; -vTtti, -vTo, 325.
vaCs, 363, No 10.
vo|iit«, 608, 4 ; construction, 723.
vovs, 170, 1.
-VT, -v8, -v0, dropped before <r,
215.
6'8€, 176, 181, 820.
ot8a, 766, 857 ; construction,
778, a.
otonoi, construction, 723.
d jjL€v ... d 86, 182.
dirXiTTis, 48, No. 1.
oirws, 579 ; oirws \i.i\y 589.
6's, 178, 184,820.
oo-Tis, 437.
OV, OVK, O^, 68.
oiJ, 390, ff.
ou8€is, 447, 6.
oiJtos, 175, 179, 180, 181, 820.
irats, 271.
irds, 265, 824.
TraT-^p, 362.
ir«(0«, ire'ireiKa, 309, a; perf. mid.
system, 839.
ireXTacnis, 52, No. 2.
me-, 594.
irCirrw, cognate words of, 541.
irXa-, 734.
irXeCwv, 380, 4 ; declension, 382.
ttXtjptjs, 335.
iToicw, 154, 2 ; 242 ; imperative,
429 ; conjugation, 844.
iroiwv, declension, 242, 2.
iroXt'iiios, ] 09 ; synonymes, 709.
TToXis, 290.
iroXiTTjs, voc. 49, obs^.
iroXv, iroXXd, 460.
iroXvs, 299 ; comparison, 380, 4
irovs, 363.
irpiv, 707.
peo), 527, 528.
-0-- dropped, 27, 111, b.
-<ra = -to, p. S9\ 2001.
<raarrov, 403.
o-Tpa-, 773.
o-TpaTid, 41 ; synonymes, 214.
o-Tpcirrds, 174, No. 4.
o-v, 390, ff.
SwKpdTTis, 329.
TciTTw, 616 ; perf. mid. system, 838.
Tttxvs, 298 ; comparison, 379, 2.
TCTTapcs, declension, 447.
TI-, 785.
t(6t)p,i, 729 ; synopsis, 846 ; inflec-
tion, 849, 853.
Tip.do), 154, 1 ; imperative, 429 ; con-
jugation, 843.
n\i(av, declension, 242.
tCs, tIs, 435, 441, ff.
TORTUS, 52, No. 3.
Tp€is, declension, 447.
«j>a-, 727.
<j>aivw, 2 aor. pass., 652.
(|>av€pds cl|j.i, construction, 247, 777.
<|>Tiji£, 714, 858 ; construction, 723 ;
w. oi, p. 306^ ; synonyme, 772.
460 GREEK INDEX.
<|>0<S.va>, construction, 245. ^cXiov, 174, No. 5.
<i)CXo«, group, 797.
ft verbs, 21, 286.
X€Cp, 227, 821. JJv, declension, 232, 823.
Xpaonai, contraction, 366. «s ; w. participle, 241, 802, n. 4; adv.
XpTJ; w. the infinitive, 721; syn- and prep., 297 ; result, p. 320^.
oujme, 784. «erT€, in result clauses, 71&.
14 DAY USE
LOAN DEPT.
15
■"FEBTTeS -11 AM
T r» 91 A-60m-4,'64
^eI555910)476B
funeral Library .
7J0V- <^^^'
VB 00113
3^0X01^ -Tf/"'
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY